I 
 
CORSO DI STUDIO ITALIANO, 
 
 COURSE op STUDY FOR THE ITALIAN LANGUAGE, prepared 
 by Dr. BACHI, Instructor in Harvard University ; and 
 for sale by C. C. LITTLE & Co., Washington Street, 
 Boston ; and at theJCJ^jocE&sj^^BooKSTORE, Cambridge. 
 
 UHIVEESITY 
 
 , 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE ITALIAN LANGUAGE ; a New Edition 
 revised and improved, with the addition of Practical Exercises and 
 numerous Illustrations, drawn from the Italian Classic Writers. 
 1 vol. 12mo. 
 
 PART II. 
 
 RACCOLTA DI FAVOLE MORALI, or a Collection of Italian 
 Fables in Prose and Verse, with Interlinear Translations. 1 vol. 
 12mo. 
 
 PA RT III. 
 
 SCELTA DI PROSE ITALIANS, or Extracts from the Works 
 of the best Italian Prose Writers, both Ancient and Modern. 1 vol. 
 12mo 
 
PART IV. 
 
 TEATRO SCELTO ITALIANO, or a Selection of Italian Dra- 
 mas, from the Works of Goldoni, Nota, Giraud, Alfieri, Monti, and 
 Manzoni, with Notes. 1 vol. 12mo. 
 
 PART V. 
 
 I POETI ITALIANI MAGGIORI, or Extracts from Tasso, Ari- 
 osto, Poliziano, and Petrarca, and the Inferno of Dante, with Ana- 
 lytical and Historical Notes. 2 vols. 12mo. (The first volume is 
 in Press.) 
 
 PART VI. 
 
 CONVERSAZIONE ITALIANA, or a Collection of Phrases and 
 Familiar Dialogues in Italian and English. 1 vol. 12mo. 
 
 PART VII. 
 
 A KEY to the EXERCISES contained in the Italian Gram- 
 mar. 1 vol. 12mo. (In Press.) 
 
 At the Bookstore of C. C. LITTLE &, Co. may be had 
 also the following Works of the same Author : 
 
 I. 
 
 RUDIMENTS OF THE ITALIAN LANGUAGE, or Easy Lessons 
 in Spelling and Reading, with an Abridgment of the Grammar. 
 Adapted to the Capacity of Children. 1 vol. 16mo. 
 
II. 
 
 MRS. BARBAULD'S HYMNS FOR CHILDREN, in Italian ; being 
 a Sequel to the " Easy Lessons in Reading," in the aboveraen- 
 tioned Rudiments. 1 vol. 16mo. 
 
 III. 
 
 A COMPARATIVE VIEW OF THE ITALIAN AND SPANISH 
 LANGUAGES, or an Easy Method of Learning the Spanish Tongue 
 for those who are already acquainted with the Italian. 1 vol. I2mo. 
 
 IV. 
 
 A COMPARATIVE VIEW OF THE SPANISH AND PORTUGUESE 
 LANGUAGES, or an Easy Method of learning the Portuguese Tongue 
 for those who are already acquainted with the Spanish. 1 vol. 
 12mo. 
 
CORSO DI STUDIO ITALIANO. 
 
 PART I. 
 ITALIAN GRAMMAR. 
 
CAMBRIDGE: 
 
 FOLSOM, WELLS, AND THURSTON, 
 
 PRINTERS TO THE UNIVERSITY. 
 
A 
 
 GRAMMAR 
 
 ITALIAN LANGUAGE 
 
 BY \ 
 
 PIETRO BACHI, 
 
 INSTRUCTER IN HARVARD UNIVERSITY. 
 
 A NEW EDITION REVISEEL- AND IMPROVED, 
 
 WJT^I* THE ADDITION OF 
 
 PRACTICAL EXERCISES AND NUMEROUS ILLUSTRATIONS, 
 DRAWN FROM THE ITALIAN CLASSICS. 
 
 ,*t K'DIUI* 
 
 uso per base, P esempio per consiglio, 
 
 BOSTON: 
 
 CHARLES C. LITTLE AND JAMES BROWN. 
 
 LONDON: 
 RICHARD JAMES KENNETT. 
 
 M DCCC XXXVIII. 
 
. - 
 
 Entered according to act of Congress, in the year 1838 ; by 
 
 PIETRO B ACHI, 
 
 in the Clerk's office of the District Court, for the District of Massachusetts. 
 
"DE exteris hominibus jam nunc dicam, quorum de- 
 merendi, si tibi id cordi est, persane ampla in praesens 
 oblata est occasio. Ut enim apud eos ingenio quis 
 forte floridior, aut moribus amoenis et^ elegantibus, 
 linguam Etruscam in deliciis habet prsecipuis, quin et 
 in solidd etiam parte eruditionis esse sibi ponendam 
 ducit, prsesertim si Grasca aut Latina vel nullo, vel 
 modico, tinctu imbiberit. Ego certe istis utrisque 
 linguis, non extremis tantummodo labris madidus, sed, 
 si quis alius, quantum per annos licuit, poculis ma 
 joribus prolutus, possum tamen nonnunquam ad ilium 
 Dantem et Petrarcam, aliosque vestros complurimos, 
 libenter et cupide comissaturn ire. Nee me tarn ipsae 
 Athena3 Atticas cum illo suo pellucido Ilisso, nee ilia 
 vetus Roma sua Tiberis ripa retinere valuerunt, quin 
 scepe Arnum vestrum et Fassulanos illos colles invisere 
 amem." 
 
 MILTON. Epist. ad Benedictum Buommattei ; 
 Florent., Sept. 10., 1638. 
 
PREFACE 
 
 TO THE FORMER EDITION. 
 
 As A NATURAL consequence of the general advancement of 
 this country in literature, the importance attached to an ac- 
 quaintance with the Italian Language, as a part of polite ed- 
 ucation, has considerably increased. Not only does it now 
 enter into the circle of the elegant studies of females, as the 
 handmaid and ally of the ornamental arts, but the spirit of 
 its higher literature begins to be understood by the culti- 
 vated of both sexes ; and within a short time a place has been 
 conceded to Dante and Tdsso in the same academic course 
 with Homer and Virgil. 
 
 But while the other languages of the continent of Europe 
 have possessed the advantage of a variety of good gram- 
 mars written in English, the Italian Instructer has had the 
 mortification to see in almost universal use the farrago of 
 Veneroni* to the disparagement of his native tongue and 
 the perplexity of those who would learn it. It is true, that 
 other grammars are extant of various degrees of merit, and 
 those of Galigndniy Sanlagnello, and Vergani are entitled to 
 much praise ; the first two, however, are hardly known here, 
 
 * Veneroni was a native of Verdun, a small town of Burgundy, in 
 France; his real name was Vigneron ; but, having learnt Italian, and 
 wishing to teach it in Paris, he Italianized his name and called himself 
 a Florentine. The Complete Italian Master by Signor Veneroni was 
 written for a few crowns by Roselli, the extraordinary adventurer, 
 who has left us his history in the romance entitled The Unfortunate 
 Neapolitan. 
 
PREFACE. XI 
 
 and the last, which is perhaps the best of them all, has been 
 confined principally to New- York ; where indeed the want of 
 a suitable grammar has been far less felt than in other places, 
 from the singular good fortune of that city in enjoying the 
 living instruction of the venerable Da Ponte, whose own writ- 
 ings, in prose as well as in verse, form an integral and perma- 
 nent part of the noble literature, which he has done so much 
 to propagate in America. 
 
 The field, therefore, was open for attempting to treat in 
 English the Grammar of the Italian Language in a man- 
 ner better suited to the wants of the public ; and the au- 
 thor, in entering it, has flattered himself that he should 
 render an acceptable service, if, after a thorough study of 
 Italian writers on their own tongue, and a diligent examina- 
 tion of the labors of his predecessors both in Great Britain 
 France, and Germany, he should be able to produce a more 
 complete, and methodical, and, at the same time, strictly prac- 
 tical treatise, than now exists in English, however far he 
 might fall short of that perfection of which he has the idea. 
 
 In the Introduction are given very summarily the principles 
 of general grammar, and the terms are defined in which those 
 principles are afterwards applied to the Italian tongue. 
 
 The Part devoted to Pronunciation affords, it is believed, 
 more full information on the subject than can elsewhere be 
 found ; and, as the words are carefully represented by English 
 combinations of letters of equivalent sound,* students who can- 
 
 * The vowel a is represented by the combination of letters ah, pro- 
 nounced without aspiration as in the words sirrah, hallelujah, &c. : e, 
 by ay, as in day, except when it occurs before certain consonants 
 with which in English it has what is called the short sound, nearly 
 resembling the sound in Italian, as in the syllables em, el, &c. ; be- 
 fore r, however, e is sounded long, like ay : i, by ee, as in sleep : u, by 
 oo, as in ooze. In the combinations k,y g,y l,y n,y, a comma 
 is inserted to prevent the letter before it from coalescing with the y, 
 which is to be pronounced with the following vowel as if it began the 
 syllable. 
 
Xll PREFACE. 
 
 not avail themselves of oral instruction, may yet make such an 
 approximation to a just pronunciation, as to perceive and enjoy 
 in a good degree the rhythm and harmony of the classic au- 
 thors, and, with few errors to unlearn, be prepared to take ad- 
 vantage of future opportunities of improving their pronuncia- 
 tion by intercourse with accomplished speakers of the lan- 
 guage. 
 
 In treating of the different Parts of Speech, in the division 
 called Analogy, while the author has wished that nothing 
 should be wanting to the completeness of this part of his trea- 
 tise, he has striven so to methodize the various particulars that 
 they should lie ready for use. The verbs, especially, are given 
 with unexampled fulness; and to both the regular and irregular 
 verbs are annexed the poetical forms, which constitute no small 
 difficulty for learners, even in reading the older prose writers. 
 This is an advantage not afforded to the same extent in any 
 preceding grammar. 
 
 As to the Syntax, a few scattered observations only are to be 
 found in the best grammars. These are here digested under 
 their proper heads, increased by various new ones, and all of 
 them supported by citations from those Classics from whose 
 authority no appeal can be allowed, though colloquial usage 
 may in a few instances be at variance with them. 
 
 The Orthography contains the result of what has been writ- 
 ten by Italian authors on the subject, and such rules as have 
 been deduced from the usage of the best writers. 
 
 Throughout the Grammar, it should be observed, the 
 principal rules are placed under their appropriate heads, in 
 large type ; exceptions to general rules and subordinate obser- 
 vations are printed in smaller type. Every Italian word of 
 more than one syllable is carefully accented, that the mere 
 perusal of the Grammar may operate as a perpetual lesson 
 in pronunciation, preparing the pupil to read currently the 
 first author put into his hands, and sparing the instructer the 
 
PREFACE. Kill 
 
 trouble of much inculcation. For an analogous reason, every 
 Italian word and sentence is accompanied by a literal English 
 version, which is often indispensable to the beginner, and can 
 rarely be unuseful. 
 
 The author is well aware of the amount of indulgence 
 which his English style will require on the part of his readers, 
 whose very pursuit of a foreign literature implies a degree of 
 cultivation in their own, which must make them impatient of 
 the constraint and want of idiomatic propriety they will here 
 meet with. Grammatical propriety, however, and perspicuity 
 were the highest qualities to which he could at present pre- 
 tend, in a language whose idioms are so remote from his own ; 
 and, if he has been in any good degree successful in attaining 
 these, he relies on the candor of ingenuous scholars to attrib- 
 ute his defects to the difficulty of the case, and not suppose 
 that he undervalues or is insensible to the charms of a good 
 style ; which would indeed be inexcusable in one whose ambi- 
 tion it is to spread a knowledge of the most graceful of mod- 
 ern dialects : 
 
 "Illam, quidquid agit, quoquo vestigia movit, 
 Componit furtim subsequiturque Decor." 
 
 TIEULL. /. 4. c. 2. 
 
PREFACE TO THE PRESENT EDITION. 
 
 THE flattering reception, which the former edition of this 
 Grammar has met with, both in this country and abroad, and 
 the wide circulation, which in a few years it has obtained in the 
 different quarters of this Union, have made it the duty of the 
 author to redouble his efforts to approach nearer to the end 
 which he originally proposed to himself. 
 
 A long experience in teaching, the useful suggestions made 
 to him by friends who have been using his book both in private 
 and public instruction, together with an incessant study of his 
 native tongue in the works of the classic writers, have enabled 
 him to make such improvements, as to render the work more 
 deserving of the public favor. 
 
 But the light, which the writings of Monti, Compa^noni, 
 Romdni, Ambros6li, Lucches'tni, and others, have shed on Phi- 
 lology, in Italy, has given origin, within the last few years, 
 to so many valuable treatises on Grammar, that, to derive ad- 
 vantage from their works, and to suit this book to the present 
 times, it was necessary to remodel the former plan, and intro- 
 duce such changes, as appeared to be required by the philoso- 
 phy of the language, and the progress of grammatical science. 
 
 To obtain this object, the Grammar has been newly writ- 
 ten, the arrangement altered, the method simplified, and the 
 style generally improved. Several remarks, which had been 
 found useless, have been omitted, and many important rules, 
 which had been omitted, have been introduced. The verbs 
 have been better displayed : and the Syntax has been increased 
 
 
PREFACE. XV 
 
 by several important chapters, such as those on the Regimen of 
 Words, the Agreement of Participles, &c. 
 
 Sensible of the truth of the principle, that a grammarian 
 ought not to limit himself to a mere exposition of principles, 
 but should deduce them from sound reason and verify them 
 by the authority of the classic writers, (" Grammaticorum 
 sine ratione testimoniisque auctoritas nulla est." SANCT. 
 Minerv. 1. 1. c. 2.) the author has, in this new edition, endeav- 
 oured first to write and explain his rules, and then to add, by 
 way of illustration, the classical authorities, which have furnished 
 him the Examples corroborating the principles he has laid 
 
 Convinced, too, of the advantage which the student naturally 
 derives from the practical application of abstract principles, 
 he has introduced, in each chapter of the Grammar, one or . 
 more Exercises, as the subject or the importance of the rules * >..<P 
 seemed to require. 
 
 The Examples, as well as the Exercises, have been chiefly 
 drawn from the writers of the fourteenth century, such as Ddnte, 
 Petrdrca, Boccdccio, Villani, &c. ; in many instances from those 
 of the sixteenth, as Machiavelli, Guicciardini, Ariosto, Tdsso, 
 &c. ; and, when these have failed to supply apposite illustra- 
 tions, from the best poets and prose writers of the eighteenth 
 century, and from those among the moderns who have distin- 
 guished themselves for purity of diction and elegance of style, 
 as Alfieri, Foscolo, Botta, Manzoni, &. 
 
 To prevent any interruption in the regular progress of the 
 different 'parts of the book, and to reduce the principles to a more 
 compact form, it was at first thought advisable to throw into an \ 
 Appendix, at the end of the volume, certain lists of words and 
 supplementary remarks, which formerly occupied a place in the 
 Analogy ; but the size, which the work had already attained, 
 
XVI PREFACE. 
 
 determined the author to reserve it to be published in a separate 
 form, particularly as its omission at present affects in no man- 
 ner the completeness of the Grammar, however useful such an 
 appendage might be. 
 
 Sorae improvements have also been made in the typo- 
 graphical execution of the work. The most important parts 
 of the rules have been printed in italics. In the examples, 
 which immediately follow, the words which directly illustrate 
 the rules are printed in SMALL CAPITALS ; and the whole of 
 these examples, which always recur in the succeeding citations 
 from the classics, are there printed in SMALL CAPITALS, to en- 
 gage the attention of the learner to their connexion with the 
 longer passages, from which they were at first detached. 
 
 Should the volume appear to any one larger than is necessary 
 for common use, he should observe, that, of the whole number 
 of pages, 351 only are occupied by the rules of the language 
 and their immediate illustrations, and that the remainder of the 
 book is filled by Exercises (which are commonly printed in a 
 separate volume), and by a collection of eighteen hundred cita- 
 tions from the classics, which exhibit all the principal phenomena 
 of the language, in a form which gives the student ready access 
 to a high authority for, and a happy exemplification of, every 
 principle, thus making him familiar beforehand with the idioms 
 and constructions, which would be the chief impediments in 
 his reading the most difficult authors. 
 
 As to the mode of using this Grammar, the author would 
 recommend the following plan. Let the principles first be prop- 
 erly explained and exemplified by the instructer, and let them be 
 properly learned and recited by the student. This done, let the 
 instructer point out the application of them in the citations from 
 the classics which follow the rules of each chapter, and let the 
 student account for them (and for as many others as he may have 
 
PREFACE. XV11 
 
 already learned), by parsing the words which form the subjects of 
 the rules with which he is already acquainted ; and, when he 
 has become familiar with them, let him be directed to write out 
 the Exercises. This method, if strictly adhered to, cannot 
 fail to prove highly useful to the learner, and satisfactory to the 
 teacher. 
 
 Desirous that his book should not fall short of that perfection, 
 which grammatical science seems lately to have reached in 
 Italy, the author has spared neither expense nor diligence in 
 procuring all the best treatises on the Italian language, which 
 have hitherto been published in Europe. Some of these have 
 been of great assistance to him in his labors, and in many in- 
 stances he has not hesitated to adopt from them many excellent 
 hints and valuable remarks. Still he trusts, that the manner 
 in which he has combined his scattered materials into a body 
 of principles, all illustrated by a variety of unquestionable clas- 
 sical authorities, will secure to his work the character of origi- 
 nality, so far as this can belong to any grammar of a language 
 long since settled in its usages and idioms : 
 
 " Etiamsi omnia a veteribus inventa sunt, hoc tamen erit 
 semper novum, usus et dispositio inventorum ab aliis." 
 
 SENEC. Epist. 64. 
 
 Cambridge, September, 1838. 
 
A LIST OF WORKS 
 
 EXAMINED WITH REFERENCE TO THE COMPILATION OF THIS 
 GRAMMAR. 
 
 ALBERTI (di Villanuova, Francesco <T), Dizionario Universale 
 Critico Enciclopedico della Lingua Italiana. Lucca, 1805. 
 6 vol. 4to. 
 
 Jllberti (de Villeneiwe, Francois eT), Grand Dictionnaire Fran- 
 gois-Italien, et Italien-Francois. Bassano, 1831. 2 vol. 4to. 
 
 Algarotti [Francesco), Lettere Filologiche, raccolte da Bar- 
 tolommeo Gamba. Venezia, 1826. 1 vol. 12mo. 
 
 Alunno (Francesco), Le Ricchezze della Lingua sopra il Deca- 
 merone. Venezia, 1557. 1 vol. 4to. 
 
 Ambrosoli (Francesco), Manuale della Lingua Italiana. Milano, 
 
 1829. 1vol. 12mo. 
 
 Barberi (J. Ph.), Grammaire des Grammaires Italiennes, ou 
 Cours Coraplet de Langue Italienne. Paris, 1819. 2 vol. 8vo. 
 
 , Petit Tresor de la Langue Francaise et de la Lan- 
 gue Italienne. Paris, 1821. I vol. 8vo. 
 
 Baretti (Joseph), A Dictionary of the English and Italian Lan- 
 guages. London, 1835. 2 vols. 8vo. 
 
 Bdrtoli (Daniele), Trattato dell' Ortografia Italiana. Milano, 
 
 1830. 1 vol. 12mo. 
 
 Bazzarini (Antonio), Ortografia Enciclopedica Universale. 
 Venezia, 1824. 1 vol. 8vo. 
 
 Bimbo (Pietro), Prose, nelle quali si ragiona della Volgar Lin- 
 gua, colle Giunte di Lodovico Castelv^tro. Milano, 1824. 
 1 vol. 12mo. 
 
 Berganiini (Giov an- Pietro), Voci Italiane d' Autori Approvati 
 dalla Crusca, nel Vocabolario di essa non registrate. Vene- 
 zia, 1745. 1 vol. 4to. 
 
 Biagioli ( G.), Grammaire Italienne Elementaire et Raisonnee. 
 Paris, 1825. 1 vol. 8vo. 
 
 Borelli (Pasqudle), Principj dell' Arte Etimologica. Napoli, 
 1830. 1 vol. 4to. 
 
 Brosse (Charles de), Trait de la Formation Mecam'que des 
 Langues. Paris, 1801. 2 vol. 12mo. 
 
WORKS EXAMINED. XIX 
 
 Bruni (Donato Antonio), Osservazioni sopra la Lingua Toscana. 
 
 Napoli, 1759. 1 vol. 12mo. 
 Bullet (J. B.) Memoires sur la Langue Celtique. Besanc,on, 
 
 1760. 3 vol. fol. 
 BuommatUi (Benedetto), Delia Lingua Toscana, Libri Due,colle 
 
 note di Anton-Maria Salvini. Milano, 1807. 2 vol. 8vo. 
 Caleffi ( Giuseppe) Grammatica della Lingua Italiana, compilata 
 
 su-lle migliori moderne Grammatiche. "Firenze, 1832. 1 vol. 
 
 12mo. 
 Cardindli (Francesco), Dizionario portatile della Lingua Italiana. 
 
 Bologna, 1828. 2 vol. 8vo. 
 
 Carducci (Facondo), Element! della Lettiira, ed Ortografia Ita- 
 liana. Siena, 1828. 1 vol. 8vo. 
 
 Cesari (Antonio), Dissertazione sopra lo Stato della Lingua 
 Italiana. Verona, 1810. 1 vol. 4to. 
 
 Cesarotti (Melckior), Saggi sulla Filosofia delle Lingue, e del 
 Gusto. Milano, 1821. 1 vol. 12nio. 
 
 Cinonio [alias Mambelli (Marc-Ant6nio)], Osservazioni della 
 Lingua Italiana, illustrate ed accresciute da Luigi Lamberti. 
 Milano, 1811. 4 vol. 8vo. 
 
 Cittadini (Celso\ Le Origini della Toscana Favella. Siena, 
 1628. 1 vol. 8vo. 
 
 Compagnoni (Giuseppe), Teorica de' Verbi Italiani, regolari, 
 anomali, difettivi, e mal-noti ; compilata sulle opere del Cino- 
 nio. del Pistolesi, del Mastrofini, e d' altri piu illustri Gram- 
 matici. Livorno, 1830. 1 vol. 8vo. 
 
 Corticelli (Salvadore), Regole ed Osservazioni della Lingua 
 Toscana. Bassano, 1827. 1 vol. 8vo. 
 
 Coureil ( Gio. de), Nuova Grammatica della Lingua Italiana per 
 gl' Italiani. Livorno, 1816. 1 vol. 8vo. 
 
 Dalmistro, Osservazioni intorno alia Lingua Italiana. Venezia, 
 1821. 1 vol. 8vo. 
 
 Da-P6nte (Lorenzo), Elementi della Lingua Italiana. Nuova- 
 Y6rk, 1831. 1 vol. 12mo. 
 
 DeW Arte della Parola, considerata ne' varj Modi della sua 
 Espressione. Milano, 1827. 1 vol. 8vo. 
 
 Del-Muro (Vincenzo), Grammatica Ragionata della Lingua 
 Italiana. Napoli, 1804. 1vol. 8vo. 
 
 Destutt-de-Tracy (Antonio Luigi Clemente), Grammatica Gene- 
 rale, colle Annotazioni di Giuseppe Compagnoni. Milano, 
 1817. 2vol. 8vo. 
 
XX WORKS EXAMINED. 
 
 Diziondiio della Lingua Italiana. Padova, 1827. 7 vol. 4to. 
 
 Dolce (Lodovico), Osservazioni sulla Lingua Italiana. Venezia, 
 1562. 1vol. 8vo. 
 
 Elementi della Lingua Italiana ad tfso delle Scuole. Venezia, 
 1810. 1 vol. 8vo. 
 
 della Grammatica, e della Ortografia Italiana, ricavati 
 
 dal Pallavicino, Bartoli, Rogacci, Buommattei. Napoli, 1829. 
 1 vol. 12m o. 
 
 Faccioldti (Jdcopo), Ortografia Moderna Italiana. Napoli, 1831. 
 1 vol. 4to. 
 
 Ferrarii (Octavii), Origines Linguae Italic. Patavii, 1676. 
 
 1 vol. fol. 
 
 Fornasari, Theoretisch praktische Anleitung zur Erlernung 
 der Italienischen Sprache, in einer neuen, und fasslicheren 
 
 Darstellung. Wien, 1830. 1 vol. 8vo. 
 
 Franscini (Stefano), Grammatica Inferiore della Lingua Italiana. 
 Milano, 1832. 1 vol. J2mo. 
 
 Galignani (J. .#.), Grammar and Exercises, in Twenty-four 
 
 Lectures on the Italian Language, enlarged and improved 
 
 by Antonio Montucci. London, 1823. 1 vol. 8vo. 
 GiambuUdri (Pier-Francesco), Lezioni, aggiuntovi 1' Origine 
 
 della Lingua Fiorentina, altrimenti il Gello. Milano, 1827. 
 
 1 vol. 12mo. 
 Gianntlli (Leonardo), Regole Grammaticali per chi vuol par- 
 
 lare, e scrivere correttamente Toscano. Liicca, 1820. 1 vol. 
 
 12mo. 
 Gigli (Girolamo), Lezioni di Lingua Toscana. Venezia, 1722. 
 
 1 vol. 8vo. 
 
 Gioia ( Melchior), Ideologia. Milano, 1822. 2vol. 8vo. 
 Gorio (A. F.), Storia Antiquaria Etrusca. Firenze, 1749. 
 
 1 vol. 12mo. 
 Gran Diziondrio della Lingua Italiana. Bologna, 1828. 7 vol. 
 
 4to. 
 Grdssi (Giuseppe), Saggio intorno ai Sinonimi della Lingua 
 
 Italiana. Firenze, 1832. 1 vol. 8vo. 
 Jagemann (Chr. Jos.), Neues Deutsh-Italianishes Hand-Wor- 
 
 ter-Buch. Leipzig, 1799. 2 vol. 8vo. 
 Jaklitsch (Giuseppe), Principj Elementari della Lingua Italiana. 
 
 Milano, 1829. 1 vol. 8vo. 
 
 Lemmi (Giov. Spirito), Element! ragionati della Lingua To- 
 scana. Liv6rno, 1808. 1 vol. 8vo. 
 
WORKS EXAMINED. XXI 
 
 Lucchesini (Cesare], Dell' Illustrazione delle Lingue Antiche e 
 
 Moderne, e principalmente dell' Italiana. Lucca, . 
 
 2 vol. 8vo. 
 Mdier (Andrea), Delia Lingua Comune d' Italia. Venezia, 
 
 1822. 1 vol. 12rno. 
 Mdnni (Dom&nico Maria), Lezioni di Lingua Toscana. Milano, 
 
 1824. 1 vol. 12mo. 
 Martignoni ( Girolamo), Nuovo Metodo per la Lingua Italiana la 
 
 piil Scelta, estensivo a tiitte le Lingue. Milano, 1743. 2 vol. 
 
 4to. 
 Mastrofini (Marco), Teoria e Prospetto, ossia Dizionario Critico 
 
 de' Verbi Italian! coniugati, speciahnente degli anomali, e 
 
 mal-noti. Roma, 1814. 2 vol. 4to. 
 Mastroti (Francesco), Corso di Lingua Italiana. Napoli, 1833* 
 
 1 vol. 8vo. 
 
 Mazzinghi, Ortografia Italiana. Napoli, 1829. 1 vol. 12mo. 
 Meidinger, Praktische Italienische Grammatik, wodurch man 
 
 diese Sprache auf eine ganz neue, und sehr leichte Art 
 
 in kurzer Zeit griindlich erlernen kann. Leipzig, 1821. 1 
 
 vol. 8vo. 
 Mendgio (Egidio), Origini della Lingua Italiana. Parigi, 1669. 
 
 1 vol. fol. 
 Menzini (Benedetto), Delia Costruzione Irregolare della Lingua 
 
 Toscana. Verona, 1744. 1 vol. 4to. 
 Momo (Giovanni), Sintassi, Frasi, e Voci per perferzionarsi nella 
 
 Lingua Italiana. Milano, 1809. 1 vol. 8vo. 
 Monti ( Vincenzo], Proposta di alciine Correzioni ed Aggiiinte al 
 
 Vocabolario della Crusca. Milano, 1826. 7 vol. 8vo. 
 Mucci (Domenico), Nuova Grammatica Italiana, formata su i 
 
 Principj di Grammatica Generale. Napoii, 1832. 1 vol. 12mo. 
 
 Muratori (Ludovico Jlntdnio], Dissertazioni sopra le Antichita 
 Italiane. Milano, 1751. 3 vol. 4to. 
 
 Napione (Francesco Galedni), Dell' Uso e de' Pregi della Lingua 
 Italiana. Milano, 1830. 2vol. 12mo. 
 
 JVe^t (Lorenzo), Dizionario Ortologico Pratico della Lingua Ita- 
 liana. Pavia, 1825. 1 vol. 8vo. 
 
 Nuova Ortografia Italiana, con 1'Aggiiinta di varie Voci Dubbie. 
 
 Padova, 1825. 1 vol. 12mo. 
 Onorati (Niccolb), Dizionario di Voci Dubbie Italiane. Napoli, 
 
 1783. 1 vol. 4to. 
 
 Ortografia della Lingua Italiana. MiUno, 1829. 1 vol. 18mo, 
 
XX11 WORKS EXAMINED. 
 
 Panizzi (Antonio), An Elementary Italian Grammar. London, 
 1828. 1 vol. 12ino. 
 
 Parenti (Marc-Ant6nio), Annotazioni al Dizionario Italiano, che 
 si etampa in Bologna. Modena, 1826. 3 vol. 8vo. 
 
 Peretti (Vincent), Grammaire Italienne compose*e d'apres les 
 meilleurs Auteurs et Grammairiens d'ltalie. Paris, 1815. 1 
 vol. 8vo. 
 
 Pergamini ( Gidcomo), Trattato della Lingua Italiana. Venezia, 
 
 1613. 1vol. 8vo. 
 Pezzdna (Angelo), Osservazioni concernenti alia Lingua Italiana, 
 
 ed ai suoi Vocabolarj. Parma, 1823. 1 vol. 8vo. 
 
 Pistolesi ( Giam-Battista), Prospetto de 5 Verb! Italian! regolari 
 e irregolari. Pisa, 1813. 1 vol. 4to. 
 
 P6nza (Michele), L' Annotatore degli Errori di Lingua. Tori- 
 no, 1829. 1 vol. 8vo. 
 
 , Grammatica della Lingua Italiana. Torino, 1834. 1 
 
 vol. 12mo. 
 
 Puoti (Basilio), Regole Elementari della Lingua Italiana. Na- 
 poli, 1836. 2 vol. 12mo. 
 
 Rabbi (Carlo Costdnzo), Sinonimi ed Aggiunti Italiani. Vene- 
 zia. 1817. 1 vol. 4to. 
 
 Romdni ( Giovanni), Teorica della Lingua Italiana. Milano, 1825. 
 2vol. 8vo. 
 
 ' , Teorica de' Sinonimi Italiani. Milano, 1825. 1 vol. 
 
 8vo. 
 , Dizionario Generale de' Sinonimi Italiani. Milano, 1826. 
 
 3 vol. 8vo. 
 
 , Osservazioni sopra Varie Voci del Vocabolario della 
 
 Criisca. Milano, 1826. 1 vol. 8vo. 
 
 , Opiiscoli Scelti sulla Lingua Italiana. Milano, 1826. 1 
 
 vol. 8vo. 
 
 Rosdsco (Girolamo), Delia Lingua Toscana, Dialoghi Sette. Mi- 
 lano, 1824. 2 vol. 12mo. 
 
 Roster (Gidcomo), Osservazioni Grammatical! intorno alia Lin- 
 gua Italiana. Firenze, 1826. 1 vol. 8vo. 
 
 , Element! Grammatical! Ragionati di Lingua Italiana. 
 
 Firenze, 1827. 1 vol. 8vo. 
 
 Salvidti (Leondrdo), Avvertimenti della Lingua sopra il Deca- 
 merone. Milano, 1810. 3 vol. 8vo. 
 
 Saniagnello (M.\ A Complete Grammar of the Italian Lan- 
 guage, London, 1828. 1 vol, 12mo. 
 
WORKS EXAMINED. XX111 
 
 Scilta di V6ci della Lingua Italiana, con Regole ed Osservazioni. 
 Milano, 1828. 1 vol. 12mo. 
 
 Sodve (Francesco), Grammatica Ragionata della Lingua Ita- 
 liana, colle Aggiiinte di Antonio Bianchini. Brescia, 1829. 
 
 1 vol. 12mo. 
 
 Solddti (Matteo), Sullo Stato presente della Lingua Italiana. 
 (Atti dell' Acad. Ital., vol. I.) 
 
 Sortsi (Pier-Domenico), Erudimenti della Lingua Italiana. 
 Milano, 1831. 1 vol. 12mo. 
 
 Spadqfora (Pldcido), Prosodia Italiana, colla Giunta di tre brevi 
 Trattati ; T uno della Z, e sua varieta ; e P altro dell' E e 
 O : il terzo della buona e rea Proniinzia. Venezia, 1820. 
 
 2 vol, 8vo. 
 
 Tommaseo (Niccolb), Nuovo Dizionario de' Sinonimi della Lin- 
 gua Italiana. Firenze, 1830. 1 vol. 8vo. 
 
 Toselli (Ottdvio), Origine della Lingua Italiana. Bologna, 
 
 1831. 3vol. 8vo. 
 Fdnzon (Carlo Antonio^ Grammatica Ragionata della Lingua 
 
 Italiana. Livorno, 1834. 1 vol. 8vo. 
 
 , Dizionario Universale della Lingua Italiana. Livorno, 
 
 1827. 3 vol. 8vo. 
 Vdrchi (Benedetto), L' Ercolano, o Ragionamento sulle Lingue, 
 
 ed in particolare della Toscana e Fiorentina. Milano, 1803. 
 
 1 vol. 8vo. 
 
 Vergani (M. A.), A New and Complete Italian Grammar. Leg- 
 horn, 1824. 1 vol. 12mo. 
 
 Vocdboldrio degli Accademici della Crusca. Venezia, 1763. 
 
 7 vol. 4to. 
 ? colle Aggiunte di Antonio Cesari. Verona, 
 
 7 vol. 4to. 
 
 Universale della Lingua Italiana. Napoli, 1829 
 
 [Iprimi]5 vol. 4to., [che contengono le lettere A RU. 
 (Opera in corso.)] 
 
 Zanobetti ( Giovanni), Nuovo Dizionario Portatile della Lingua 
 Italiana. Livorno, 1827. 1 vol. 16mo. 
 
 Zotti (Romualdo), Grammaire Italienne, et Themes sur la Lan- 
 gue Italienne. Paris, 1823. 2 vol. 12mo. 
 
A TABLE 
 
 OF THE ABBREVIATIONS OF THE NAMES OF AUTHORS AND OF 
 THE WORKS QUOTED IN THIS GRAMMAR. 
 
 AGN. PAND, o. Pandolfmi (Jgnolo), 'Trattato del Governo 
 
 deila Famiglia,' pagina o. 
 Alam. Colt. o. o. Jllam&nni (Luigi), ' La ColtivazioneJ libro 
 
 o. pag. o. 
 
 Alberg. Nov. *#/&erga/i-Capacelli (Francesco), < ./Vbi'//e. 5 
 
 Albert. ) JUbertano, Giudice da Brescia, Volgarizza- 
 
 Abertan. c. o. ] mento de' ' Tre Trattati,' capitolo o. 
 
 . o. o. , , Trattato o. cap. o. 
 
 Alf. Fil. o. o. ? Alfiiri (Vittorio), 'Tragedie,' Filippo, atto 
 
 Filip. o. o. \ o. scerm o. 
 
 Antig. o. o. , Jlnligone, atto o. scena o. 
 
 Saul. o. o. , S'litt. atto o. scena o. 
 
 Alg. lett. A!gar6Ui (Francesco), 'Lettered 
 
 Alleg. ^ Allteri (Alessandro), { Lettere e Rime,' 
 
 Allegr. o. \ x pag. o. 
 
 Ambr. Cof. o. o. Ambra (Francesco d'), * La Cofandria^ 
 
 comedm, atto o. sc^na o. 
 
 Am. Ant. ^ l Jlmmaestramenti degli JlntichiJ raccolti e 
 Amm. Ant d. o. r. o. > volgarizzati da Fra Bartolommeo da San 
 o. o. o. ) Concordio, distribuzione o. rubrica o. am- 
 
 maestra mento o. 
 Amor. Amortlti (( arlo), i Viaggio ai Tre Laghi ; 
 
 Maggiore, di Lucano, e di Cdmo.' 
 Ann, Car. Vedi Car., Caro. 
 
 Ann. Vang. * Jlnnotazidni sopra gli Evangtlj.' (Testo a 
 
 ptnna. citato nel Vocabolario della Criisca.) 
 
 Ariost. ) Ariosto (Ludovico), ' Orlando FurwsoJ can- 
 
 Far, o. o. to o. stanza o. 
 
 B. Vedi Boc.c. 
 
 Barb. Gr. Gr. Barberi (J-Ph.), * Grammaires des Gram- 
 
 maires Italiennes.' 
 
 Bellinc. Beltincioni (Bernardo), ' Rime.' 
 
 Bemb. ? Bimbo (Pietro), 4 Stdria di Venezia,' lib. o. 
 
 Stor. o. o. J pag. o. 
 
 Lett. o. o. o. ., l Leliere Volgari,' voliime o. lib. o. 
 
 pag. o. 
 Ben.Varch. Vedi Parch. 
 
TABLE OF ABBREVIATIONS. 
 
 XXV 
 
 Bent. \Bentivoglio (Cardinal Guido), Letter ej 
 
 lett. o. S lettera o. 
 
 Benv. Cell. Oref. o. Cellini (Benvenuto\ 'Trattati (due) delP 
 
 Oreficeria, e della Scultura,' pag. o. 
 Ber. Tass. lett. Tdsso (Bernardo), ' Lettere? 
 
 Bern. Orl. o. o. Berni (Francesco), ' Orlando InnamordtoJ 
 
 canto o. stanza o. 
 , 'Rime Burlesche,' vol. o. pag. o. 
 
 ^ Boccdccio (Giovanni), < Decamerone,' Intro- 
 duzione. 
 
 'Decam.' Proemio. 
 
 giorndta o. Proemio. 
 
 giorndta o. novella o. 
 
 giornata o. canzone. 
 
 Conclusione. 
 
 Rim. o. o. 
 
 B. 
 
 Bocc. 
 
 Intr. i 
 
 Introd. 
 
 Proem. 
 
 g. o. Proem. 
 
 g. o. n. o. 
 
 g. o. canz. 
 
 Concl. 
 
 Corb. 
 
 A met. o. 
 
 Fiam. 
 
 Fiamm. o. o. 
 
 Pdloc. o. 
 
 Lab. 
 
 Laber. o. 
 
 Tes. o. o. 
 
 Testam. 
 
 Vis. o. 
 
 Vis. Amor. 
 
 Com. Dant. 
 
 Vit. Dant. o. 
 
 Boccal. 
 
 Boez. Varch. o. o. 
 Borgh. Rip. o. 
 Tosc. o. 
 
 Arm. Fam. o. 
 
 tine,' discorso, pag. o. 
 Bott. Stor. Am. 1. o. Botta (Carlo), StMa della Guerra della 
 
 Independenza degli Stati Uniti di^m^n- 
 
 ca,' lib. o. 
 
 Brun. iBrunetto Latini, 'II Tesoro' volgarizzato 
 Brunet. Tes. o. o. da Bono Giamboni, lib. o, cap. o. 
 Pataff. o. , < II Patdffio,' cap. o. (Testo a pen- 
 
 na, citdto nel Vocabolario.) 
 
 Vedi Lab., Laber. o. 
 
 , 'JlmetoJ pag. o. 
 
 , ' FiammettaJ lib. o. numero o. 
 
 , { Fildcolo ' e ' FilocopoJ lib. o. 
 
 , ' Laberinto d' Amore,' ossia * il Cor- 
 
 baccio,' num. o. 
 
 , * Teseide,' canto o. stanza o. 
 
 , * Testament 
 
 , ' Jlmor6sa Visione,' canto o. 
 
 , 4 Comento sopra i primi Diciassette 
 
 Canti delP Inferno di Ddnte.' 
 
 , ' Vita di Dante JLlighieriJ pag. o. 
 
 Boccallni (Traiano), 'Ragguagli di Par- 
 
 nasso.' 
 Vedi Varch. 
 
 Borghini (Raffaello), 4 I1 RiposoJ num. o. 
 , ( Vincenzo), * Delia Toscdna, e delle 
 
 sue Citta,' discorso, pag. o. 
 
 -, * DelP Arme delle Famiglie Fioren- 
 
XXVI 
 
 TABLE OF ABBREVIATIONS. 
 
 Buom. 
 
 Ling. Tosc. o. 
 
 o. o. 
 Buon. 
 
 Buonar. Rim. o. 
 Fier. Introd. 
 
 Buommattei (Benedetto), ' Delia Lingua 
 Toscdna, Libri Due,' lib. o. trattato o. 
 cap. o. 
 
 Buonarroti ( Michel- A*ngelo, il vecchio), 
 1 Rime,' pag. o. 
 
 (Michel-Angelo, il giovane), 'La 
 
 * FieraJ comedia in cinque giornate, Intro- 
 L duzione. 
 
 o. o. o. J giornata o. atto o. scena o. 
 
 Burchiell. p. o. s. o. Burchiello, l Soneiti^ pdrte o. sonetto o. 
 But. Com. Dant. Buti (Francesco di Bartolo da), i Comento, 
 
 ovvero Lettura sopra il Pcema di Dante. 1 
 
 Inf. Purg. Par. o. Inferno, Purgatorio, Paradiso, canto o. 
 
 Cant. Cam. o. Cdnti Carnascialeschi, pag. o. (Testo a 
 
 penna, citato net Vocabolario.) 
 
 Car. >Caro (Aimibal), 4 Lettere Familiari,' parte 
 
 Caro. lett. o. o. 5 - P'^S- - 
 
 Matt. s. o. , ' Mattaccini 1 sonetto o. 
 
 Casa Galat. o. Cdsa (Monsignor Giovanni della), * II 
 
 Galateo 1 pag. o. 
 
 lett. o. , Lettere 1 lettera o. 
 
 Castigl. Cort. 1. o. o. Castiglione (Baldassare), ' II 
 
 lib. o. pag. o. 
 Cavalc. > Cavdlca (Fra Domenico), Volgarizzamento 
 
 Att. A post o 5 degli ' Atti degli Apostoli? pag. o. 
 
 Sin ' 
 
 -Espos. Simb. 
 o. o. 
 
 Frutt. Ling. 
 
 Med. cuor. 
 
 Pungil. o. 
 
 Speccri. Cr. 
 
 Stolt. o. 
 
 Cavalcanti. 
 Cecch. Dot. o.o. 
 
 Esalt. cr. 
 
 Inc. o. o. 
 
 Spir. o. o. 
 
 Cesar. 
 Cinon. t o. 
 
 1 Esposizione del Simbolo degli 
 Apdstoli,' lib. o. pag. o. 
 
 , ' Trattato de' Frutti delta Lingua. 1 
 
 , ' Medicina del Cuore.' 
 
 , ' PungitinguaJ cap. o. 
 
 1 Specchio della CroceS 
 
 Trattato deile * Trenta Sloltizie 
 
 dell' Uomo,' pag. o. 
 
 'Esposizione delle sue Canzoni.' 
 
 Cer.chi (Giovan-Maria), l La DoteJ comedia, 
 atto o. scena o. 
 
 , ' L' Esaltazione della CroceJ come- 
 dia, atto o. scena o. 
 
 1 Gl' Incantesimij' comedia, atto o. 
 
 scna o. 
 
 4 Lo SpiritoJ comedia, atto o. sce- 
 na o. 
 
 CesaroHi (Melchior), Traduzione dell' l Ili- 
 ade d' Om^ro.' 
 
 Cindnio, * Osservazioni della Lingua Itali- 
 ana,' tomo o. 
 
TABLE OF ABBREVIATIONS. 
 
 XXV11 
 
 Class, Esempio tirato da Auto re Cldssico, del 
 
 quale non si rimembra il nome. Occorre 
 rarissime volte. 
 Cort. Osserv. Corticelli (Salvadore), ' Regole ed Osserva- 
 
 zioni della Lingua Toscana.' 
 
 Cr. ? Crescenzi (Pietro de'), 'Trattato dell' Agri- 
 
 Cresc. o. o. o. $ coltura, lib. o. cap. o. num. o. 
 Cron. Mor. * Crimea di Giovanni Morelli.' 
 
 Cms. ? ' Vocabolario degli Accademici della Cru- 
 
 Crusca. S sc(1 *' 
 
 Dant. Inf. o. Dante Atighifri, 'Divina Commedia,' Infer- 
 
 wo, canto o. 
 
 , * Comm.' Purgatorio, canto o. 
 
 , , Paradiso, canto o. 
 
 , ' ConvivioS 
 
 ,'Rime.' 
 
 Pur. & Purg. o. 
 
 Par.&Parad.o. 
 Conv. 
 
 Rim. 
 
 Dav. 
 Davan. 
 
 Seism, p. o. 
 
 Colt. 
 
 Tac. ann.l.o. o. 
 
 > Davanzdti (Bernardo), '6pere.' 
 
 , < Scisma d' Inghilterra,' pag. o. 
 
 , t Coltivazione Toscana.' 
 
 , Volgarizzamento degli ; Anndli di 
 
 Cornelio Tacito,' lib. o. pag. o. 
 
 ~, Volgarizzamento delle c Storie di 
 
 Taciio? lib. o. pag. o. 
 
 , Volgarizzamento della * Germdnia 
 
 di TdcitoS pag. o. 
 
 , Volgarizzamento della ' Vita di 
 
 Giulio Agricola di Tacito,' pag. o. 
 
 -, Volgarizzamento del * Dialogo del- 
 
 St. ) 
 
 Stor. 
 
 Tac. Stor. o. o.) 
 
 Tac. Germ. o. - 
 
 Vit. Agr. o. 
 
 Tac.Perd.Eloq.o.- 
 
 Tac. Post. o. 
 
 traduzione degli Anndli di Tacito? pag. o. 
 Declam. Quintil. C. Volgarizzamento delle ' Declamazioni di 
 
 Quintilidno, testo a penna di Matteo 
 
 Caccini. (Citato nel Vocabolario.) 
 Volgarizzanento della 'Locuzidne 
 
 trio Falereo ' di Piero Segni, pag. o. 
 
 le Cagioni della Perduta Eloquenza di 
 Tacito,' pag. o. 
 
 1 Postille ai primi se*i libri della sua 
 
 Demetr. Segn. o. 
 
 Den. 
 
 Riv.Ital. l.o. 
 
 c. o. 
 Letter. 
 
 Lett. 
 
 Sag. Letter. 
 
 [ Denina (Carlo), 
 I o. cap. o. 
 
 Rivoluzioni d j ItdliaJ lib. 
 
 , ' Discorso Sopra le Vicende della 
 
 LetteraturaS 
 , * Sdggio sopra la Letterattira Itali- 
 
 dna.' 
 
XXVlll TABLE OF ABBREVIATIONS. 
 
 Dep. Decam. o. 'Annotazioni e Discorsi sopra alcuni luoghi 
 del Decamerone di Giovanni Boccaccio, 
 fatti da' Deputdti ' [eletti dal Gran-Diica 
 Cosimo 1. 1' anno 1565, per la correzione 
 di quell' 6pera], pag. o. 
 
 Dial. S. Greg. m. Volgarizzamento de' ' Didloghi di San Gre- 
 gorio Jlldgno. 9 
 
 Din. Comp. o. o. Compdgni (Dmo\ < Storia, ovvero Oronaca 
 Fiorentina, lib. o. pag. o. 
 
 JDittam. ) l II Dittamondo ' di Fazio degli Uberti, lib. 
 
 o. o. $ o. cap. o. 
 
 Eriz. Giorn. Erizzo (Sebastiano), Le Sei Giorndte.' 
 
 Fav. Esop. o. Volgarizzamento delle * Fdvole d* Esopo? 
 
 pag. o. (Testo a ptnna, citato net Vo- 
 cabolario.) 
 
 Fior. Vt. c. o. * Fiore di Virtu? cap. o. 
 
 A . ? Firenzuola (ignolo), Traduzione dell' ^- 
 
 As d' 6r. o. I sino * * d' Apuleio,' pag. o. 
 
 dial. bell. donn. o. , * Didlogo dilU Bellezze delle D6n- 
 
 we,' pag. o. 
 
 disc. an. o. , ' Discdrso degli AnimdliJ pag. o. 
 
 Luc. o. o. , 1 1 Liicidi? comedia, atto o. scena o. 
 
 nov. o. ' , l NovelleJ novella o. 
 
 Trin. o. o. , l Trinuzia? comedia, atto o. scena o. 
 
 Fosc. Foscolo (Ugo), ' Esame Critic o de' Commen- 
 
 tatori di Dante.' 
 
 Fr. Giord. ? Fra Giordano da Ripalta, Prediche, ' 
 Fra Giord. o. J pag. o. 
 S. Pred. o. , testo (a penna) Salvidti, prtdica o. 
 
 (Citato nel Vocabolario.) 
 
 Fr. Guitt. ? Fra Guittone d' Arezzo, Lettered lette- 
 
 Fra Guitt. lett. o. $ tera o. 
 Franc. Barb. o. o. Barberino (Francesco), * Document! d' A- 
 
 more,' poesie, pag. o. verso o. 
 Fr. Sacch. ^ 
 
 Fran. Sacch. > Vedi Sacch. 
 
 Franc. Sacch. } 
 Fris. Elog. Galil. Fiisi (Paolo), EUgio di Galileo Galilei: 
 
 |^|j Q \ Galileo Galilei, Saggiat6re,' pag. o. 
 
 Mach. Sol. o. , * Istoria e Dimostrazioni intorno 
 
 alle Mdcchie Soldri, e loro accident!,' 
 pag. o. 
 
 Gang. ? Ganganelli (Giovan-Vincenzo Antonio [Pa- 
 lett. S P a Clem6nte XIV.] ), < Lettered 
 
 
TABLE OF ABBREVIATIONS. 
 
 XXIX 
 
 Cell. 
 
 Circ. o. o. 
 
 Giamb. 1. o. 
 
 Gian. Stor. Civ. 
 
 Nap. 1. o. c. o. 
 Gio. Fior. Pecor. 
 
 g. o. n. o. 
 Gio. & Giov. Vill. 
 
 1. o. c. o. o. 
 Giral. lett. 
 Gold. 
 
 Avvent. 
 
 Ver. Am. 
 
 Gr. ? 
 
 S. Gir. o. o. 
 
 Gram. Gram. 
 Guar. Past. Fid. o. o. 
 
 Guicc. 
 
 Stor. o. o. 
 
 Stor. Ital. 
 
 Guid. 
 o. 
 
 Incer. c. o. 
 
 Lab. o. 
 
 Lasc. Sibill. o. o. 
 
 Spir. o. o. 
 
 Lib. Cur. Malatt. 
 
 Libr. Adorn. Donn. 
 
 Lipp. M. o. o. ? 
 
 Malm. o. o. $ 
 
 Liv. dec. o. 
 
 Lod, Mar. Rim. o. 
 Lod. Nov. 
 Lor. Med. c. o. 
 
 Gelli (Giovam-Battista), * La Circe,' dialogo 
 
 o. pag. o. 
 Giambulldri (Pier-Francesco), ' Storia d' 
 
 Europa,' lib. o. 
 Giannone (Pielro), ' Stdria Civile del Regno 
 
 di NdpoUJ lib. o. cap. o. 
 
 Vedi Ser Giov. Pecor. 
 
 Vill&ni ( Giovanni), c Storia,' lib. o. cap. o. 
 
 num. o. 
 
 Girdhli (Giraldo), Ltttere.' 
 Goldoni (Carlo), < L' Avventurttre Onorato,' 
 
 comedia. 
 
 * II Vtro AmicoJ comedia. 
 
 Volgarizzame'nto de' c Grddi di San Giro- 
 
 lamoj cap. o. pag. o. 
 Vedi Barb. Gr. Gr. 
 Guarini (Giovam-Battista), 'Pastor Fido,' 
 
 atto o. scena o. 
 
 Guicciardini (Francesco), * Stdria d? Italia? 
 lib. o. pag. o. 
 
 Guido Giudice dalle Colonne di Messina, 
 Volgarizzamento della* Storia della Guer- 
 ra Troiana' pag. o. (Testo aptnna, citato 
 nel Vocabolario.) 
 
 ' Rime Antiche d' Incerti JlutoriJ canzone o. 
 
 Vedi Bocc. Lab., Laber. 
 
 Grazzini (Anton-Francesco) detto il Ldsca, 
 1 La SibillaS comedia, atto o. scena o. 
 
 , ' La SpiritdtaJ comedia, . atto o. 
 
 scena o. 
 
 Volgarizzame'nto del l Libro, ossia Trattato 
 della Cura di tutte le Malattlo: (Teto 
 a penna, citato nel Vocabolario.) 
 
 ' Libro degli Jldornamenli delle DdnneS 
 (T6sto a penna, citato nel Vocabolario.) 
 
 Lippi (Lorenzo), { II Malmantile Racqui- 
 stato,' canto o. stanza o. 
 
 Volgarizzamento delle * Deche (Prima e 
 Terza) di Tito LivioJ deca o. (Testo a, 
 penna, citato nel Vocabolario.) 
 
 Martelli (Lodovico,) * .Rime,' pag. o. 
 
 Lodoli (Francesco), Novelle.' 
 
 Medici (Lorenzo dP), *Canzoni a Ballo, 
 canzone o. 
 
XXX 
 
 TABLE OF ABBREVIATIONS. 
 
 
 , .LIU. ./veftGfcu, siaiiz-a v. 
 
 
 dia, Prdlogo. 
 
 Mach. j 
 Stor. Fior. 1. o. ] 
 
 Cnm 
 
 ^Machiavelli (Niccolo), ' Istorie Florentine,' 
 I lib. o. 
 
 4 f^nvn^rf'tP ' 
 
 lett. 
 
 , i Lettered 
 
 
 i Tl Pry-noVnr ' 
 
 Maestruzz. o. o. 
 
 Volgarizzamento della ' Somma Pisanella, 
 
 Maff. Mer. o. o. 
 
 Manz. Prom. Spos. 
 
 c. o. 
 
 Matt Fran. ) 
 
 Franz. Rim. o.o. { 
 Matt. Vill. o. o. 
 Mes. Bin. Rim. 1. o. 
 
 Cin. o. 
 
 Metast. Artas. o. o. 
 
 lett. 
 
 Miliz. Art. Dis. 
 
 Mor. S. Greg. & 
 
 Gregor. o. o. 
 Nov. Ant. o. 
 
 Ovid. Pist. 
 
 Pall. 
 
 detta il Maestruzzo? lib. o. cap. o. (Testo 
 
 a penna, citato nel Vocabolario.) 
 Maffei (Scipione), ' MeropeJ tragedia, atto 
 
 o. scena o. 
 Manzoni (Alessandro), ' I Promessi SpfoiJ 
 
 cap. o. 
 Franzesi (Matteo), l Rime Burlesche,' vol. o. 
 
 pag. o. 
 
 Villdni (Matteo], t Storia,' lib, o. cap. o. 
 Messer Bino, l Rime Burlesche,' lib. o. 
 - Cino da Pistoia, ' Rime.' pag. o. 
 Metastdsio (Pietro), 'JlrtaserseJ dramma, 
 
 atto o. scena o. 
 
 Passav. o. 
 
 Ver. Pen. 
 
 Spec. Ver. 
 
 Pen. 
 
 Past. Fid. o. o. 
 Pataff. o. 
 Pecor. g. o. n. o. 
 Petr.] 
 
 8. O. 
 
 C. O. 
 
 lett. 
 
 m 
 
 Milizia (Francesco), c Dizionario delle Belle 
 Arti del Disegno.' 
 
 Vedi Zan. da Strat. 
 
 4 II Novellino, ossia Cento NbMe JlnticlieJ 
 
 novella o. 
 Volgarizzamerrto delle 'Pistole rf' Ovidio.' 
 
 (Testo a penna, citato nel Vocabolario.) 
 Pallavicino, ' Concilio di Trento.' 
 
 Passavdnti (Fra Jacopo), ' Specchio di Ver a 
 Penitenza, pag. o. 
 
 Vedi Guar. Past. Fid. o. o. 
 
 Vedi Brun., Brunei. Pataff. 
 
 Gio. Fior. Pecor. 
 
 I Petrdrca (Francesco), ' Rime.' 
 
 , ' Rime,' sonetto. o. 
 
 I , , canzone o. 
 
 , l Letter e Familiari: 
 
TABLE ON ABBREVIATIONS. 
 
 XXXI 
 
 Tri. 
 
 Trionf. 
 
 Am. ) 
 
 Amor. 5 
 
 Fam. 
 
 - Mort. 
 
 Tern. ? 
 
 Temp. $ 
 
 c.o. 
 
 Uom. ill. o. 
 
 , l TrMnfi.' 
 
 , < Trionfo tf Amore? 
 , - delta Fdma? 
 
 'del Tempo^ 
 
 , cap. o. 
 < Vite degli Uomini lllustri? volga- 
 
 rizzate, pag. o. 
 
 Pign. Fav. Pignotti (Lorenzo), ' j 
 
 Poliz. St. o. o. Polizidno, (Agnolo), ' Stdnze per la Giostra 
 
 di Giuliano,' canto o, stanza o. 
 
 Pros. Fior. o. 'Prose Florentine,'- p&g. o. 
 
 Red. annot. Ditir. Redi (Francesco), ' AnnoJ,azi6ni al suo Di- 
 tirdmbo' 
 
 cons. o. o. ' Consulti Medici, vol. o. pag. o. 
 
 Ditir. o. , 'Bacco in Toscana,' ditirdmbo, pag. o. 
 
 Ins. o. , ' Esperienze intorno alia generazione 
 
 degP Insetti' pag. o. 
 
 lett. o. o. , ' Lettere Familiari,' vol. o. pag. o. 
 
 Vip. o. o. , ' Osservazioni intorno alle Vipere? 
 
 lettere, vol. o. pag. o. 
 
 Ricett. Fior. o. ' Ricettdrio FiortntinoJ pag. o. 
 
 Rim. Ant p. o. ' Rime Antiche, ossia Raccolta di Sonetti, 
 
 Canzoni, ed altre Rime di diversi antichi 
 poeti Toscani,' pdg. o. 
 
 Rosasco. Rosdsco (Girolamo), ' Delia Lingua Tosca- 
 
 na, Dialoghi Sette.' 
 
 Sacch. n. o. Saccketti (Franco), ' NovelleJ novella o. 
 
 rim. o. , l Rime? pag. o. 
 
 Op. div. o. , ' O'pere Diverse,' pag. o. 
 
 Sag. Nat. esp. o. ' Sdggi di Naturali Esperienze' fatte nell' 
 Accademia del Cimento, descritti da Lo- 
 renzo Magalotti, pag. o. 
 I Salvidti( Leonardo), 'Avvertimenti della Lin- 
 gua sopra il Decamerone,' vol. o. lib. o. 
 I cap. o. 
 , ' II GrdnchioJ comedia, atto o. sce- 
 
 Salv. Avvert. vol. 
 o. 1. o. 
 
 o. o. o. 
 
 1 Granch. o. o. 
 
 Spin. o. o. 
 
 , 4 La SpmaJ comedia, atto o. sce- 
 
 Salvin.Pros.Tosc. o. Salvini (Anton-Maria), 'Prose ToscdneJ 
 pag. o. 
 
XXX11 TABLE OF ABBREVIATIONS. 
 
 Seal. S. Agost. Volgarizzamento della * Scdla del Paradise,' 
 attribuita a San? Jlgostino. (Testo a pin- 
 na, citato ml Vocabolario.) 
 
 Segn. Crist, instr. ) Segneri (Paolo), <I1 Cristidno Instruito nella 
 o. o. $ siia Legge,' parte o. ragionamento o. 
 
 Mann. Marz. o. , ' Manna dell' anima,' mese di Mar- 
 
 zo. giorno o. 
 
 Nov. o. , , mese di Novembre. giorno o. 
 
 Sen. ) Volgarizzamento delle * Pistole di Seneca? 
 
 Pist. o. pistola o, 
 
 Ser Giov. Fior. 1 
 
 Pecor. f Ser Giovanni Fiorentino, ' II Pecoronc,' 
 
 Gio. Fior. Pe- giorndta o. novella o. 
 cor. g. o. n. o, ) 
 
 Soav. Nov. Sodve (Francesco) ' Novelle Morali.' 
 
 Sod. Colt. o. Soderini (Giovan-Vittorio), * La Coltivazwne 
 
 delle Viti,' pag. o. 
 
 St. Agost. Citt. Dio. Volgarizzamento della < Citta di IM di 
 o. o. SanV Jlgostino, lib. o. cap. o. (Testo a 
 
 penna, atdto nel Vocabolario.) 
 
 Stor. Pistol, p. o. * Storie Pistolesi, ovve.ro delle cose avvenute 
 in Toscana dal 1300 al 1348,' pag. o. 
 
 Stor. Semif. o. Volgarizzamento della ' Storia di SemifonteJ 
 
 pag. o. 
 
 Tass. Am. o. o. ? Tdsso (Torquato), 4 Jlminta, Favola Bos- 
 
 Amint. o. o. ^ chereccia,' atto o scena o. 
 
 Ger. o. o. , l Gerusalemme Liberata, canto o. stan- 
 za o. 
 
 Teor. Verb. Ital. < Teorica de> Ferbi Italian^ di Giuseppe 
 part. o. . o. Compagnoni, pdrte o. pardgrafo o, 
 
 ^^^ett. I Tolomm ti (Claudio), Ltttere.' 
 
 Tratt. segr. cos. < Trattdto delle Segrete cdse delle Donne: 
 
 donn. (Testo a penna, citato nel Vocabolario.) 
 
 Vanz. Fdnzon (Carlo Antonio), Gframmatica Ra- 
 
 gionata della Lingua Italiana.' 
 
 Varch. ) Varchi( Benedetto), Traduzione della 4 Con- 
 Boez. o. o. \ solazione Filosofica di Boezio, lib. o. pro- 
 
 sa & rima o. 
 Ercol. o. , < Ercoldno, ossia Ragionamento sul- 
 
 le Lingue,' pag. o. 
 
 Rim. o. l Rime, 7 pag. o. 
 
 Sen. ben. o. o. Traduzione de' libri de' l Benefaj di Stne- 
 
 caj lib. o. cap. o. 
 
 Vas. Vasari (Giorgio), ' Trattato d^lla Pittura.' 
 
 Vill. Vedi Gio. &f Giov. Vill. 
 
 
TABLE OF ABBREVIATIONS. 
 
 XXX111 
 
 Vine. Mart. rim. o. 
 Vit. S. Ant 
 
 S. Cater. 
 
 S. Franc. 
 
 S. G. Bat. 
 
 Martelli( Vincenzo), 'Rime e Lettere,' pag. o 
 6 Vita di SanC Antonio.' 9 (Testo a penna, 
 citato nel Vocabolario) 
 
 6 di Santa Caterina da Siena.' 
 
 ' di San Francisco? 
 
 r- S. Giov. Guald. 
 (Guad. lib.) o. 
 
 SS. PP. o. o. 
 -- Pad. o. o. 
 Zan. da Strat. o. o. 
 
 di San Giovam-Battista.' 
 
 - - di San Giovam-Battisfa, MS. della 
 Librerla de' Guadagni, pag. o. (Citato 
 
 Vite dff Sdnti Pa- 
 
 Zibald. Andr. o. o. 
 
 nel Vocabolario.) 
 > Volgarizzamento delle 
 
 drij vol. o. pag. o. 
 
 Zandbi da Strata, Volgarizzamento de' 
 f Morali di San Gregorio Magno,' lib. o. 
 num. o. 
 
 * Zibaldone, ovverp Libro di Varie Cose,' 
 testo a penna di Andrea Andreim, parte 
 o. pag. o. (Citato nel Vocabolario.) 
 
ITALIAN GRAMMAR. 
 
 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 (jrR AMMAR is the art of speaking and writing correctly. 
 
 SPEAKING and WRITING are the expression of our thoughts 
 by words. 
 
 WORDS may be considered as articulate sounds, or as signs 
 of our thoughts. 
 
 Words considered as ARTICULATE SOUNDS, are formed of 
 syllables, and syllables of letters. 
 
 SYLLABLES consist of one or more letters pronounced 
 by a single impulse of the voice, and constituting a word, or 
 part of a word. 
 
 Words that consist of one syllable, are called monosyllables; 
 those that consist of two syllables, are called dissyllables ; and 
 those that consist of more syllables, are* called poly syllables. 
 
 LETTERS are certain figures or characters, which represent 
 sounds and articulations. 
 
 SOUNDS are simple emissions of the voice ; and ARTICULA- 
 TIONS are the modifications which sounds receive by the 
 movements of the organs of speech. The letters which repre- 
 sent the sounds, as, a, e, i, fyc., are called vowels ; and those 
 which represent the articulations, as, b, c, d, fyc., are called 
 consonants, because they can only be sounded ivith a vowel. 
 
 The union of two vowels, pronounced by a single impulse of 
 the voice, is called a diphthong; and that of three vowels pro- 
 nounced in like manner, is called a triphthong. 
 
 Words considered as SIGNS OF OUR THOUGHTS, are 
 divided into several classes, which constitute the different 
 PARTS OF SPEECH. These in Italian are nine ; viz. the 
 article, noun, pronoun, verb, participle, adverb, preposition, con- 
 junction, and interjection. 
 
 Of these nine Parts of Speech, the article, noun, pronoun, 
 verb, and participle, are VARIABLE, that is, change their ter- 
 mination ; the rest are INVARIABLE. 
 
 1 
 
2 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 The ARTICLE is a word placed before a noun to denote 
 the extent of its signification ; as, il, lo, la, ' the' : IL libro, 
 ' the book' ; LO sprone, i the spur' ; LA. cdsa, l the house'. 
 
 The NOUN is either substantive, or adjective. 
 
 A SUBSTANTIVE noun is a word, which serves to denote a 
 person or thing ; as, Pietro, ' Peter' ; sole , ' sun' ; virtu, ' virtue'. 
 , Substantive nouns are either proper or common. 
 
 A proper noun is one, which is individually applicable to a 
 person or thing ; as, Cesare, ' Caesar' ; Roma, t Rome'. 
 
 A common noun is one, which may be applied to all persons 
 or things of the same kind ; as, uomo, ' man' ; citta, ' city'. 
 
 Some common nouns are also called collective, from their 
 presenting to the mind the idea of a collection of persons or 
 things ; as, gente, ' people' ; esercito, ' army'. 
 
 An ADJECTIVE noun is a word added to a substantive to ex- 
 press its quality; as, dotto, 'learned' ; bella, 'beautiful': un uo- 
 mo DOTTO, ' a learned man' ; una BELLA citta, ' a beautiful city'. 
 
 Adjectives may express the quality of an object, either abso- 
 lutely, that is, without any relation to other objects, or relatively 
 to other objects ; which produces different degrees of qualitica*- 
 tionr^ these have been reduced to the following three, viz. the 
 positive, comparative, and superlative. 
 
 The positive is the adjective itself, expressing the quality of 
 an object, without any relation of comparison ; as ncco, ' rich' ; 
 po'vero, ' poor'. 
 
 The comparative is the adjective expressing a relation of 
 superiority, inferiority, or equality, between two or more objects 
 in comparison ; as, piu,meno, or si ricco, ' more, less, or so rich' ; 
 piu, meno, or si povero, ' more, less, or so poor' : Pietro e PIU, 
 or MENO RICCO di Tommdso, ' Peter is more, or less rich than 
 Thomas' ; Tommdso e PIU, or MENO POVERO di Paolo, ' Thomas 
 is more, or less poor than Paul' ; Pietro e Tommdso sono si Ric- 
 CHI, or si POVERI come Paolo, ' Peter and Thomas are so rich, 
 or so poor as Paul'. 
 
 The Superlative is the adjective expressing the quality of the 
 object in the highest degree of superiority, or the lowest degree 
 of inferiority. 
 
 There are two kinds of superlative, the relative, and the 
 absolute. 
 
 The relative superlative expresses the superiority or inferi- 
 ority of an object, with relation to others ; as, il piu, or il meno 
 ricco, ' the most, or the least rich' ; il piu, or il mtno povero, 
 ' the most, or the least poor' : Tommdso e IL PIU, or IL MENO 
 RICCO, Paolo e IL PIU, or IL MENO POVERO, di tutti ; ' Thomas 
 is the most, or the least rich, Paul is the most, or the least 
 poor, of all'. 
 
INTRODUCTION. 3 
 
 The absolute superlative shows that the object spoken of 
 possesses a quality in the superlative degree, but without 
 reference to any other ; as, ricchissimo, ' very rich' ; poverissimo, 
 4 very poor'. 
 
 A great number of Italian nouns are susceptible of a change 
 of termination, which, modifying the primitive idea expressed 
 by them, augments or diminishes their signification ; as, uo'mo, 
 4 man' ; OMONE, i large man' : ruscello, ' brook' ; RUSCEL.LETTO, 
 'small brook'. The nouns thus altered, are called AUGMENTA- 
 TIVES and DIMINUTIVES. 
 
 With nouns are usually classed the NUMERALS, which are 
 either cardinal, or ordinal. 
 
 Cardinal numbers are those, which determine a collection of 
 objects, with regard to their number or quantity; as, uno, 
 1 one' ; died, i ten'. 
 
 , Ordinal numbers determine objects with regard to their order 
 or arrangement ; as, primo, ' first' ; decimo, ' tenth'. 
 
 Italian nouns are varied by gender and number. 
 
 Gender is a division of nouns according to sex. Nouns 
 denoting males are masculine; nouns denoting females are 
 feminine. This division, which properly regards only nouns 
 having sex, is in Italian extended also to all other nouns, 
 though they have no sex ; so that every noun is either of the 
 masculine or feminine gender. But there are certain nouns 
 which belong to both genders, and these are said to be of the 
 common gender. 
 
 JVumber is the designation of one or more objects. There 
 are two numbers, viz. the singular and plural. The singular 
 designates one single person or thing ; the plural, more than 
 one person or thing. 
 
 The various relations of nouns, which in Latin are denoted 
 by different terminations, or cases, are expressed in Italian 
 by certain prepositions placed before them ; and for the nom- 
 inative and accusative of the Latin, have been substituted the 
 terms subjective, and objective ; and for the genitive, dative, and 
 ablative, the terms relation of possession, of attribution, and of 
 derivation. 
 
 A PRONOUN is a word used instead of a noun, already 
 expressed, to prevent its frequent repetition ; and like the noun 
 is either substantive or adjective. 
 
 Substantive pronouns are either personal, conjunctive, relative, 
 or interrogative ; and adjective pronouns are either possessive, 
 demonstrative, or indefinite. 
 
4 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 The personal pronouns are those, which mark the persons. 
 
 The persons are three, viz. the first, second, and third. The 
 first is the person speaking ; as, io, ' I' ; no'i, ' we' : the second 
 is the person spoken to ; as, tu, ' thou' ; voi, ' you' : and the 
 third is the person spoken of; as, egli, 'he' ; ella, ' she' ; eglino. 
 elleno, l they'. 
 
 The conjunctive pronouns are those, which are always joined 
 to a verb. They are derived from the personal pronouns, and 
 are divided into conjunctive, property speaking ; as, mi, ' me', or 
 ' to me' ; ti, l thee', or ' to thee' ; si, ' one's self, or l to ones' 
 self: MI duole, 'it grieves me' ; TI parla, ' he speaks to thee' ; 
 si loda, 'he praises himself: and relative conjunctive pro- 
 nouns ; as, ne, ' of it, of him, of her', or i of them' ; NE vorrei 
 veder la fine, ' 1 should like to see the end of it'. 
 
 The relative pronouns are those, which refer to a person or 
 thing, that has been before spoken of; as, chi, ' who' or ' he 
 that'; die, il qudle, 'who', or 'which that': CHI si umilia si 
 esalta, 'who', or 'he that humbles himself exalts himself: V uo- 
 mo, CHE or il QUALE scrive, 'the man, who or that writes'; il libro, 
 CHE or il QUALE io leggo, ' the book, which or that I read'. 
 
 The person or thing, which relative pronouns refer to, is 
 called the antecedent. 
 
 The interrogative pronouns are those, which are used to 
 interrogate, or ask a question; as, chi? 'who?' che? 'what? 7 
 qudle ? 'which?' CHI e? 'who is it?' ciiE/dfe? 'what are 
 you doing ?' QUALE volete^ ' which will you have ?' 
 
 The possessive pronouns are those, which mark the possession 
 of a person or a thing ; as, mio, ' my', or ' mine' ; tuo, ' thy', or 
 ' thine' ; suo, ' his, her, hers', or ' its' : MIO fratello, ' my bro- 
 ther' ; U TUO cappello, 'thy hat' ; questo e suo, 'this is his, hers', 
 or 'its'. 
 
 The demonstrative pronouns are those, which point out the 
 particular person or thing of which we speak; as, questo, ' this' ; 
 quello, 'that'; cotesto, 'that near you': QUESTO giovine, ' this 
 youth'; QUELLO specchio, 'that looking-glass'; COTESTO libro, 
 ' that book near you'. 
 
 The indefinite pronouns are those, which express a person 
 or thing in a general and unlimited sense ; as, alcuno, ' some 
 one' ; ogni, ' every' ; niente, ' nothing'. 
 
 Italian pronouns, like the nouns, are varied by gender and 
 number. 
 
 A VERB is a word, which by itself implies affirmation ; as, 
 essere, ' to be' : ESSERE amabile, ' to be amiable' : and neces- 
 sarily supposes a subject and a quality, to which it affirms that 
 the subject is, or is not attributed ; as, la VIRTU e AMABILE, 
 
INTRODUCTION. 5 
 
 4 virtue is amiable' ; la PIGRIZIA non & LODEVOLE, * slothfulness 
 is not laudable'. 
 
 There is but one verb, stricldy speaking ; essere, ' to be' ; 
 because this alone expresses affirmation. But there are other 
 words, which in themselves contain both the verb essere, and 
 the quality, which it affirms to belong- to the subject of which 
 we speak ; as, amdre (essere amdnte), l to love (to be a lover 
 of)'; sprezzdre (essere sprezzdnte), ' to despise (to be a despiser 
 of)': egli AMA (egli E AMANTE), 'he loves (he is a lover of)'; 
 ella SPREZZA (ella E SPREZZANTE), ' she despises (she is a 
 despiser of)' ; and to these has also been given the name of 
 verbs, and they are used to express the quality of the subject, 
 or the action it performs or it undergoes. 
 
 Verbs are commonly divided into active, passive, neuter, pro- 
 nominal, and unipersonaL 
 
 Active verbs are those, that express an action, which falls or 
 may immediately fall upon an object ; as. amdre, t to love' : 
 amdre LA VIRTU, ' to love virtue'. 
 
 The object upon which the action of the verb falls, is called 
 the regimen or complement of this verb. Besides this first com- 
 plement, which is called direct, many active verbs may have a 
 second complement, which is called indirect ; as, scrivere. ' to 
 write' : scrivere UNA LETTERA, * to write a letter' : scrivere 
 una lettera AD UN AMICO, i to write a letter to a friend.' This 
 last, however, properly speaking, is rather a complement of the 
 preposition, which always precedes it. 
 
 Passive verbs are those, that express an action which falls 
 upon the subject ; as essere amdto, ' to be loved' : LA VIRT& e 
 amdta, ' virtue is loved'. 
 
 JVew/er verbs are those, that express a state of being, or an 
 action which does not fall directly upon an object ; as, dormire, 
 1 to sleep' ; nuocere, l to be noxious'. 
 
 Pronominal verbs are those, that are varied with two pro- 
 nouns of the same person ; as, vender-si, ' to sell ' or ' to be 
 sold' : QUESTO LJBRO si vende cdro, l this book sells', or * is 
 sold dear'. 
 
 To pronominal, properly, belong reflective and reciprocal verbs. 
 
 Reflective verbs are those, that express either the action of a 
 subject which acts upon itself; as, difender-si, 'to defend ones' 
 self: io MI difendo, ' I defend myself; or an action of the sub- 
 ject, which terminates finally in itself; as,/dr-si un dovere ' to 
 make to ones' self a duty' : EGLI si faun dovere, 'he makes to 
 himself a duty'. 
 
 Reciprocal verbs are those, that express the action of several 
 subjects, who act respectively the one upon the other ; as, 
 aiutdr-si ; 'to assist each other'; NOI ci aiutidmo, 'we assist 
 each other'. 
 
 1* 
 
6 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 Unipersonal, or, as they are usually called, impersonal verbs, 
 are those, that are used only in the third person singular of 
 each tense ; as, accadere, l to happen': accdde, ' it happens'; ac- 
 cddde, ' it happened' ; accaderd, ' it will happen'. 
 
 There are moreover two verbs, which generally assist to 
 vary other verbs, and which, consequently, are called auxiliary 
 verbs: these are, avere, 'to have'; and essere, 'to be': AVERE 
 letto, f to have read' ; ESSERE paiiito, 'to (be) have departed'. 
 
 Italian verbs are varied by mood, tense, number, and person. 
 
 Mood is a particular form of the verb, which shows the man- 
 ner in which the action, or the state of being, is represented. 
 
 There are five moods, viz. the infinitive, indicative, conjunc- 
 tive, conditional, and imperative. 
 
 The infinitive, represents the action in an indefinite manner, 
 and without distinction of person or number ; as, scrivere, ' to 
 write'. 
 
 The indicative represents the action absolutely, and without 
 dependence on any other word ; as, io scrivo, ' I write'. 
 
 The conjunctive represents the action as depending upon 
 another verb with which it is connected by a conjunction ; as, 
 bisogna, che io SCRIVA, ' it is necessary, that I write'. 
 
 The conditional 
 a condition ; 
 could'. 
 
 The imperative represents the action in commanding, exhort- 
 ing, or intreating ; as, sciivi, ' write thou' ; scrivete, i write ye' ; 
 scrividmo, ' let us write'. 
 
 C lit SUJVI.VA, it 10 iicocooai^, tuai a. VVJ.IL^ 
 
 iitional represents the action with dependence upon 
 i ; as, io SCRIVEREI, se potessi, 1 1 should write, if I 
 
 Each of these moods, except the imperative, has different 
 tenses. 
 
 Tense is a distinction of time, which shows when the action is 
 done. Time, strictly speaking, is either present, past, ex future. 
 
 The present denotes the action doing by a subject at the 
 very time in which we are speaking ; as, io, CANTO, ' I sing'. 
 
 The past or preterite denotes the action done by a subject 
 before the time in which we are speaking; as, io CANTAI, 'I 
 sang'. 
 
 The future denotes the action to be done by a subject after 
 the time in which we are speaking ; as, io CANTERO, { I will 
 sing'. 
 
 The preterite is divided into imperfect and perfect. 
 
 The imperfect expresses an action done in a time past, but 
 present in respect to another action done in a time also past : 
 as, io CANTAVA, qudndo voi entrdste, ' I was singing, when you 
 came in'. 
 
 The perfect expresses an action done in a time completely 
 
INTRODUCTION. 7 
 
 past, and without reference to any other action ; as io CANTAI 
 tm' aria, ' 1 sang an air'. 
 
 Tenses are either simple or compound. 
 
 Simple tenses are those, which are formed without the assist- 
 ance of either the auxiliary verbs avere, i to have', or essere, 
 4 to be'; as, pdrlo, *I speak'; venni, 'I came'; lodero, * I, will 
 praise'. 
 
 Compound tenses are those, which are formed of the simple 
 tenses of the auxiliary verb avere, ' to have', or essere, ' to be', 
 and the participle of the verb varied ; as, ho parldto, i I have 
 spoken' ; sono venuto, 1 1 (am) have come' ; avrb loddto, or sarb 
 loddto, 'I will have praised,' or ' will be praised'. 
 
 Each tense contains two numbers ; the singular and plural. 
 
 The number is singular, when one single subject causes 
 the action of the verb ; as, fo mdngio, i I eat' ; and it is plural, 
 when more subjects contribute to the same action; as, NOI 
 mangidmo, * we eat'. 
 
 Each number has three persons, which are denoted by the 
 personal pronouns, io, ' I' ; tu, ' thou' ; egli, i he', or ella, ' she' ; 
 in the singular ; and not, * we' ; voi, * you' ; eglino, or elleno, 
 t they' ; in the plural ; as, io vedo, 1 1 see' ; TU vedi, l thou seest'; 
 EGLI or ELLA vede, 'he or she sees' : NOI vedidmo, ' we see' ; 
 voi vedete, l you see' ; EGLINO or ELLENO vedono, l they see'. 
 
 The assemblage of several verbs, forming all their moods, 
 tenses, numbers, and persons, according to the same rule, is 
 called a conjugation. 
 
 Such verbs as conform to the rule of any conjugation, are 
 called regular; and such as differ in any respect, are called 
 irregular. 
 
 Verbs which are not used in certain tenses, numbers, or per- 
 sons, are called defective. 
 
 The PARTICIPLE is a word which partakes at the same time 
 of the nature of the verb and of the adjective ; as, amdnte, 
 'loving' ; amdto, l loved.' It partakes of the nature of the verb, 
 because it has its signification, and has reference to time ; as, 
 amdnte (che AMA) Dio, * loving (who loves) God' ; AMATO (che K 
 AMATO) da Dio, ' loved (who is loved) by God' ; and it partakes 
 of the nature of the adjective, because, like an adjective, it 
 qualifies a noun ; as, uomo ONORATO, * honored man' ; virtu PRO- 
 VATA, l tried virtue'. 
 
 Participles are divided into present and past . 
 
 The present participle expresses the action of the subject, or 
 the ^quality of a noun, at the moment in which we speak ; as. 
 amdnte, ' loving' : dimna AMANTE, ' a loving woman'. 
 
 The past participle expresses the action or quality as per- 
 
8 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 fected or past; as, temuto, 'feared': castigo TEMUTO, 'feared 
 punishment'. 
 
 With the participle is usually classed the GERUND, which, 
 like the participle, is an inflexion of the verb, but has nothing 
 in common with the adjective. 
 
 Italian participles are varied by gender and number. 
 
 An ADVERB is a word, which serves to modify a verb, an 
 adjective, or another adverb, expressing the manner, or circum- 
 stances of its signification ; as, m'w, ' more' ; mdlto, ' very' ; dis- 
 tintamente, 'distinctly' : egliparla DISTINTAMENTE, 'he speaks 
 distinctly'; siete MOLTO savio, 'you are very wise' ; PIU since- 
 ramente, ' more sincerely'. 
 
 Adverbs are divided into those of quality, order, time, place, 
 quantity, comparison, fyc. 
 
 Adverbs of quality are those, which express the manner in 
 which things are done; as, saviamente, 'wisely'; elegant entente, 
 ' elegantly' ; inconsideratamente, ' inconsiderately' : egli pensa 
 SAVIAMENTE, ' he thinks wisely' ; ilia scrive ELEGANTEMENTE, 
 'she writes elegantly'; hdnno agito INCONSIDERATAMENTE. 
 c they have acted inconsiderately'. 
 
 Adverbs of order serve to express the arrangement of things 
 in regard to one another ; as, prima, ' first' ; poi, ' then' ; da 
 principio, ' before' ; in seguito, ' afterward' : PRIMA andremo in 
 Frdncia, ' we will go first to France' ; POI in Italia, ' then to 
 Italy' ; DA PRINCIPIO si deve evitdre il male, ' we must before 
 avoid evil'; IN SEGUITO si deve far del bene, ' afterward we must 
 do good'. 
 
 Adverbs of time are those, which express some relation of 
 time ; as, ieri, ' yesterday'; oggi, ' to-day'; domdni, 'to-morrow': 
 lo vidi IERI, ' I saw him yesterday'; mini OGGI, 'come to-day'; 
 partirb DOMANI, ' I shall depart to-morrow'. 
 
 Adverbs of place serve to denote the situation or the distance 
 of an object ; as, qui, ' here' ; la, ' there' ; vicino, ' near' ; Ion- 
 tdno, ' far' : son qui, ' I am here' ; guarddte LA, ' look there' : 
 sta qul VICING, ' he lives near here' ; e troppo LONTANO, ' it is 
 too far'. 
 
 Adverbs of quantity are those, which modify an object in re- 
 lation to quantity ; as, poco, ' little'; assdi, ' much'; abbastdnza, 
 'enough': pdrla ASSAI, 'he speaks much'; riftette POCO, 'he 
 reflects little' ; ne ha ABBASTANZA, ' he has enough of it'. 
 
 Adverbs of comparison serve to denote the different degrees 
 of quality of the objects compared ; &B,piu, ' more' ; meno, 'less 7 ; 
 cosi -come, ' so as' : V onore vale PIU delle ricchezze, ' honor is 
 worth more than riches' ; il suo cuore non e MEN bello del viso, 
 
INTRODUCTION. 9 
 
 * her heart is not less beautiful than her face' ; egli non e si do- 
 cile, COME e vivace, ' he is not so docile as he is lively'. 
 
 Adverbs are either simple or compound. Simple adverbs are 
 those which consist of a simple word ; as, qui, ' here'; poi, 'then'; 
 be"ne, ' well' ; and compound adverbs are those, which consist of 
 an adjective and the word m&nte, l manner' ; as, dolcemtnte (con 
 dolce mente), ' sweetly (in a sweet manner)'. There are besides 
 several expressions, which in several words announce the same 
 idea that might be expressed by one adverb ; as, di buon grddo, 
 ' willingly' ; qudnto prima, l very soon' ; aW improvviso, ' unex- 
 pectedly'; and these are called ADVERBIAL PHRASES. 
 
 A PREPOSITION is a word, which is placed before a noun, a 
 
 pronoun, or a verb, to show its relation to some other word ; as, 
 
 in, ' in' ; con, ' with' ; senza, ' without' : non e IN cdsa, ' he is 
 
 not (in the house) at home'; verro CON vat, 'I will come with 
 
 s you' ; SENZA anddr piu dlle lunghe, ' without going any further'. 
 
 Prepositions have several denominations, viz. of place, order, 
 time, union, opposition, fyc. according to the several relations 
 they express. 
 
 The word which follows the preposition is called its regimen 
 or complement. 
 
 A CONJUNCTION is a word, which serves to join words and 
 sentences together ; as, e, * and' ; ne, ' nor, neither' ; ma, * but' ; 
 nondimtno, 'nevertheless': bella E buona, l handsome and good'; 
 is'i; mdngia NE beve, l he neither eats nor drinks' ; egli e povero 
 MA onordto, ' he is poor but honored' ; ella e molto gidvane, e 
 NONDIMENO e molto sdvia, t s\\e is yet very young, and never- 
 theless she is very wise'. 
 
 Besides the general use of connecting words and sentences 
 together, conjunctions sometimes express the particular point 
 of view in which the mind considers the words and sentences 
 so connected ; hence the division of conjunctions into explica- 
 tive, adversative, alternative, conclusive, fyc. 
 
 An INTERJECTION is a word, which is used to express an 
 emotion or affection of the mind ; as, ah! ' ah !' oh! l oh !' aime! 
 alas !' 
 
 The affections of the mind may be of joy, grief, indignation, 
 contempt, fy-c. which give to the interjections different denomi- 
 nations. 
 
 Of the foregoing Parts of Speech, some are occasionally em- 
 ployed, when they are not absolutely necessary to grammatical 
 construction, but serve, nevertheless, to give strength and 
 energy to the discourse; as, gid, mica, pure, mdi : GIA Dio non 
 voglia, 'may God forbid'; non son MICA fdvole, 'they are not 
 
10 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 fables'; la cosa andb PUR cosi, 'the affairs went off so'; MA: si, 
 che io le conosco, 'yes, that I know them'. These words, when 
 so used, are called EXPLETIVES. 
 
 WORDS form the whole subject of Grammar. They may 
 be either expressed by the voice, or represented in writing by 
 characters. 
 
 The collection of letters of which the words of a language 
 are formed, is called the ALPHABET. 
 
 That part of Grammar, which teaches how to express the 
 sounds of words, is called PRONUNCIATION. 
 
 That part which treats of the different sorts of words and 
 their various modifications, is called ANALOGY. 
 
 That part of Grammar, which treats of the connexion and 
 right order of words among themselves, is called SYNTAX. 
 
 That part, which teaches how to write words correctly, is 
 called ORTHOGRAPHY. 
 
ITALIAN ALPHABET. 
 
 THE Italian Alphabet contains twenty-two letters, 
 which the modern Romans, following the Latin, name 
 and pronounce as follows : 
 
 (Figur 
 
 e) 
 
 (Nome) 
 
 (Pron.) 
 
 (Figure) 
 
 (Namo) 
 
 (Pron.) 
 
 A 
 
 a 
 
 a 
 
 ah 
 
 M m 
 
 em 
 
 aytn 
 
 B 
 
 b 
 
 be 
 
 bay 
 
 JV n 
 
 en 
 
 ayri 
 
 C 
 
 c 
 
 ce 
 
 chay 
 
 O o 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 D 
 
 d 
 
 de 
 
 day 
 
 P p 
 
 pe 
 
 pay 
 
 E 
 F 
 
 e 
 f 
 
 e 
 ef 
 
 ay 
 ayf 
 
 I I 
 
 qu 
 er 
 
 koo 
 ayr> 
 
 G 
 
 
 ge 
 
 j<*y 
 
 S s 
 
 es 
 
 ays' 
 
 H 
 
 
 acca 
 
 ahk'-kah 
 
 T i 
 
 te 
 
 tay 
 
 1 
 
 m 
 i 
 
 i 
 
 ee 
 
 U u 
 
 u 
 
 00 
 
 J 
 
 j 
 
 J e 
 
 y a y 
 
 V v 
 
 ve 
 
 vay 
 
 L 
 
 I 
 
 el 
 
 w 
 
 Z z 
 
 zeta 
 
 dsay'-tah 
 
 The Florentines, on the authority of the " Fathers of 
 the Language," * name and pronounce them as follows : 
 
 (Figur 
 
 A 
 
 e) 
 
 a 
 
 (Name) (Pron.) 
 
 a ah 
 
 (Figure) 
 
 M m 
 
 (Name) 
 
 6mme 
 
 (Pron.) 
 
 aym'-may 
 
 B 
 
 b 
 
 bi bee 
 
 JY n 
 
 cnne 
 
 ayn'-nay 
 
 C 
 
 c 
 
 ci chee 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 D 
 
 d 
 
 di dee 
 
 P p 
 
 Pi 
 
 pee 
 
 E 
 
 e 
 
 c ay 
 
 Q 9 
 
 qu 
 
 koo 
 
 F 
 
 f 
 
 efie ayf-foy 
 
 R T 
 
 erre 
 
 ayr'-ray 
 
 G 
 
 S 
 
 gi j'ee 
 
 S s 
 
 6sse 
 
 ays'-say 
 
 H 
 
 h 
 
 acca ahk'-kah 
 
 T t 
 
 ti 
 
 tee 
 
 I 
 
 i 
 
 i corto ee cor'-to 
 
 U u 
 
 u 
 
 00 
 
 J 
 
 j 
 
 i liingo ee loon 1 -go 
 
 V v 
 
 vi 
 
 vee 
 
 L 
 
 I 
 
 611e ayl'-lay Z z 
 
 z<ka 
 
 dsay'-tah 
 
 * E di qutsti cotdli sdno mdlti ididti, 
 che non suprebbono I 1 ABBICCI. (Dant. 
 Conv.) 
 
 E'gli il crederebbe alldra, che guar- 
 ddndo v6i, igli creder6bbc, che voi sa- 
 p6ste V ABBICCI. (Bocc. g. 6. n. 5.) 
 
 E f& edificare tdnte badte, qu&nte tet- 
 tere ha nelV ABBICC!. (Giov. Vill. 1. 1. 
 c. 13.) 
 
 And of such ones, there are many so 
 ignorant, that do not know even the 
 
 ah-bee-chce 1 . 
 
 He might thiirk so, if looking at you 
 at the same time, he should think that 
 you had learned your a-b-c. 
 
 And caused so many convents to be 
 built as there are letters in tho a-b-c. 
 

 12 ALPHABET. 
 
 Of these twenty-two letters, A, E, I, O, [7, are 
 vowels ; B, C, D, F, <?, L, M, JV, P, Q, #, S, T, 
 
 T 7 , 2T, are consonants ; .7 is considered as a voitfeZ ; and 
 H is a simple sign, having 710 sound. 
 
 The Latin letters K k, X x, Y y, have no place in 
 the Italian Alphabet. 
 
 Instead of &, either c or ch is used ; as, 
 
 Senza fallo tf caUndi sara Without fail by the kalends 
 
 capildno Buffalmdcco. (Bocc. Buffalmacco will be captain. 
 g.8.n.9.) 
 
 Diceva un cmrie ed un He said a Kyrie and a 
 
 Sdnctus* (Bocc. g. 8. n. 2.) Sanctus. 
 
 X is sometimes translated into s or 55, and sometimes 
 into cc ; as, 
 
 Jlcciocchb io prima esmplo So that I might first set the 
 
 dea a tutti vol. (Bocc. Intr.) example to all of you. 
 
 Un giovane lor nipote, che They sent a young man, 
 
 avta nome Alessdndro, mandd- nephew of theirs, called Alex- 
 
 rono. (Bocc. g. 2. n. 3.) ander. 
 
 S6pra gli alii palagi, e so- It [the wind] leaves it [the 
 pra V ecctlse torn la Idscia. dust] upon the high palaces 
 (Bocc. g. 4. Proem.) and the lofty towers. 
 
 The word ; Xerxes' is written with an s, S6rse ; but the word t Xan- 
 thus ' is written with an x } Xdnto, * the Scamander ' ; to distinguish 
 it from Sdnto, ' Saint' 
 
 For T has been substituted i ; as, 
 
 Feggio lunge da? Idghi Jhtr- I see far from the Avernian 
 nt, Stigi. (Petr. s. 265.) and Stygian lakes. 
 
 The English and German W w, in translating proper 
 names, is commonly changed into u when it is a vowel, 
 and into v or g when a consonant ; as, Neuton, * New- 
 ton ' : Fallenstein, ' Wallenstein ' ; Galles, ' Wales.' 
 
PART I. 
 
 ITALIAN PRONUNCIATION. 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 SOUNDS OF THE VOWELS. 
 A is sounded like a in the English word/ArfAer; as, 
 
 (Pronounce) 
 
 ArA, ah' -rah, altar ; 
 
 A/WIA, ahZ'-mah, soul. 
 
 E has two sounds, one open, the other close : 
 
 E open is sounded like ai in the English word 
 /Air; as, 
 
 *Ema, t&i'-mah, theme ; 
 
 VEna, vai'-na/i, oats. 
 
 E close is sounded like ai in the English word 
 as, 
 
 Ivga, l&i f -gah, alliance ; 
 
 m&i f -lah, apple. 
 
 J is sounded like ee in English ; or like i in the 
 English word machine ; as, 
 
 inwo, een'-no, hymn ; 
 
 fate, lee'-tay, strife. 
 
 O has two sounds, one open, the other close : 
 
 O open is sounded like o in the English word 
 cord; as, 
 
 fcofta, lot'-tdh, blow ; 
 
 rof-sah, rose. 
 
14 PRONUNCIATION. 
 
 O dose is sounded like o in the English word 
 bone ; as, 
 
 folia, foU-lah, crowd; 
 
 or a, o'-rah, hour. 
 
 U is sounded like oo in the English word ooze ; as, 
 
 uso, oo'-so, use ; 
 
 tvtto, toot 1 -to, all. 
 
 When these vowels are at the end of words marked 
 with an accent, they have a quick and sharp sound, 
 which very seldom occurs in the English language ; as, 
 
 bontA, Zxm-tah 7 , goodness ; 
 
 affE, ahf-fay', in truth ; 
 
 ball, bah-lee', bailiff; 
 
 /o/6, fah-lo f , bonfire ; 
 
 tribu, tree-boo', tribe. 
 
 [For Rules how 10 Determine when the vowels .E, O, are Pronounced open, 
 or close, see APPENDIX, A.] 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 PRONUNCIATION OF THE CONSONANTS. 
 
 ITALIAN consonants, except C, G, R, S, Z, are pro- 
 nounced as in English. 
 
 C followed by the vowels e, i, is pronounced like 
 ch in the English words cuerry, cm'% ; as, 
 
 cena, chay'-nah, supper ; 
 
 cibo, chee f -bo, food. 
 
 G followed by the vowels e, i, is pronounced likey 
 in English ; or like g in the English words Gem, 
 GinGer ; as, 
 
 Gelo, ^jay'-lo frost ; 
 
 Giro jee'-ro, turn. 
 
 R in the beginning of words, or in the middle 
 
CONSONANTS. 15 
 
 when it begins a syllable, is pronounced like r 
 in the English words wain, marine ; as, 
 
 Rupe, loo'-pay, rock ; 
 
 mdRe, mah'-iay, fcea : 
 
 But at the end of words, or when it ends a 
 syllable, or when preceded by another conso- 
 nant, or when doubled, it has a rolling sound to 
 which there is nothing similar in the English lan- 
 guage, and which can be acquired only by oral 
 instruction ; as, 
 
 peR, pay? ', for; 
 
 eRto, ay^-to, steep ; 
 
 atRo, ah'-tw, black ; 
 
 oRRido, otf-ree-do, horrid. 
 
 S in the beginning of words, or when preceded 
 or followed by another consonant, or when dou- 
 bled, is pronounced sharp, like s in the English 
 words saint, pulse, discount, assembly; as, 
 
 santo, sahn f -to, saiit ; 
 
 film, jayV-sah, mulberry ; 
 
 sea, ay'-skah, bait ; 
 
 lesso, lays' -so, . boiled. 
 
 Between two vowels, and in the last syllabic 
 of all substantive and adjective nouns that end 
 in ise, uso, usa, it is pronounced flat, or soft like 
 z ; or like s in the English word rose ; as, 
 
 viso, vee'-zo, visage ; 
 
 palese, pah-lay f -zay, manifest ; 
 
 abuso, ah-boo'-zo, abuse ; 
 
 confusa, con-foo 1 -zah, confounded. 
 
 In the last syllable of all adjective nouns end- 
 ing in 050, osa, it is pronounced sharp ; as, 
 
 virtuoso, veer-too, o 1 '-so, virtuous ; 
 
 maestosa, ?nah,ay-sto' -sah, majestic. 
 
 Z cannot be submitted' to certain rules. It can 
 only be said, that, in the beginning of words, or 
 when single, it is pronounced flat, or soft like ds 
 in the English word Winnsor ; as, 
 
 zodiaco, dso-dee' ,ah-ko, zodiac ; 
 
 zanzdra, dsahn-dsah' -rah, gnat. 
 
1.6 PRONUNCIATION. 
 
 When preceded by a consonant, or when fol- 
 lowed by two vowels, or when doubled, it is 
 pronounced sharp, like is in the English word 
 benefiTS ; as, 
 
 c&lza, kahV-tBoh, stocking ; 
 
 grdzia, grdk r -tsee,a/i, grace ; 
 
 belUzza, bayl-lay f -tsah, beauty. 
 
 In the last syllable of words ending in dnza. 
 enza, onza, it is pronounced something like z in 
 the English word razor ; as, 
 
 danza, dahn'-zah, dance ; 
 
 clemtnza, klay-maynf-zah, clemency ; 
 
 lonza, lon'-zah, panther. 
 
 [For a list of Words varying from the general Rules, respecting the Pronuncia* 
 tion of Z, see APPENDIX, B.J 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 OF / AND II. 
 
 J is considered as a vowel in Italian. It is used 
 instead of ii, at the end of words, in the plural of 
 some nouns ; * and it is sounded like ee in the 
 English word /EE, each e being distinctly pro- 
 nounced ; as. 
 
 temps, ? f or tempiiy taym'~pe,Q, temples ; 
 studs, S ( studu, stoo f -de,e, studies. 
 
 H has no sound. It is only used to denote the hard 
 sound of the consonants c, g, before the vowels e, 
 i; as, in 
 
 CHerico, 
 
 kay f -ree-ko, 
 
 clerk ; 
 
 cuitdrra, 
 
 kee-tahr' -rah, 
 
 guitar ; 
 
 gutzzo, 
 
 gty'-tso, 
 
 Moor; 
 
 gniro, 
 
 gee f -ro, 
 
 dormouse : 
 
DOUBLE CONSONANTS. 17 
 
 To prolong the sound of the vowels a, e, i, o, u, 
 in the interjections, 
 
 an! ah! ah! 
 
 den ! day ! alas ! 
 
 IH! ee! ih! 
 
 j?oH ! po ! pooh ! 
 
 UH I do ! uh ! 
 
 To distinguish the words,* 
 
 I have, HO, o, j r o, o, or; 
 
 thou hast, Hai, a^,ee, f f ) di, ah',ee, to the ; 
 
 he has, He*, aft, f T Q W a^i, to ; 
 
 they have, Hanno, akn'-no, } ( anno, ahn f -no, year. 
 
 And in each case it is a sign, a mark of distinction 
 rather than a letter. 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 DOUBLE CONSONANTS. 
 
 Cc followed by the vowels e, i y is pronounced like 
 tch in the English word WTCH ; as, 
 
 accento, aht-chayn'-to, accent; 
 
 accidio, aht-chee' -dee,o, slaughter. 
 
 Gg I followed by the vowels e, i, is pronounced 
 like dg in the English word /ODoe ; as, 
 oGGtito, o&-jayt f -to, object; 
 
 oQGidi, od-jee~dee', now-a-days. 
 
 Ch followed by the vowels e, i, is pronounced 
 like k in the English words, Kept, Keep; as, 
 
 CH&O, kay f -to, quiet; 
 
 cuino, kee'-wo, inclined. 
 
 O.UU. , lit, lilt! j 7t(?j Ol 1L Ot-U.j WHICH 1UUUC DOCHia IU "o pi oi^iu.w.^ j 
 
 simplifies the orthography of the words, and dispenses with a useless letter. 
 
18 PRONUNCIATION. 
 
 Followed by the vowels ia, ie> io, iu> it is pro- 
 nounced like Jci in the English word Kind; as, 
 
 cmave, k,yV-tww, key ; 
 
 cmesa, k,yay f -sah, church ; 
 
 CHwma, k,yo'-maft, head of hair ; 
 
 cmusa, k,yoo'-sa/z, hedge. 
 
 Gh followed by the vowels e, i, is pronounced like 
 g in the English words oe, Giddy ; as, 
 
 GH^m&o, gaymf-bo, crooked ; v 
 
 GHiro, gee'-ro, dormouse. 
 
 Followed by the vowels ia, ie, zo, w, it is pro- 
 nounced like gui in the English word cuic?e ; as, 
 
 Gmanda, g,yahn f -dah, acorn ; 
 
 GHiera, g,yay f -rah, quiver ; 
 
 Gmdtto, - g,yot f -to, glutton ; 
 
 tegGHiuzza, tayg-g,yoot'-sah, baking-pan. 
 
 Gl followed by the vowel i : and in all words in 
 which i is followed by another vowel, is pro- 
 nounced like II in the English word brilliant ; 
 
 as, 
 
 GLI, l>yee', the ; 
 
 601,1, y-l,yee, he ; 
 
 vdQiAa, vo f -l,yah, desire ; 
 
 CIGLW, chee f -l,yo, eye-brow: 
 
 But in all words in which gli is followed by a 
 consonant, it is pronounced like gl in the Eng- 
 lish word Glimmer ; as, 
 
 neGijigtnte, nay-g\ee-jayn'-tay, negligent ; 
 anGi*icano, ahn-g\ee-kah f -no, Anglican. 
 
 It has the same sound in the words, 
 
 ahn 1 -glee, Englishmen ; 
 
 ahn f -glee,ah, England. 
 
 Gn followed by the vowels , e, i, o, u, is pro- 
 nounced something like ni in the English word 
 as, 
 
 mah-gah f -n 9 yah, blemish ; 
 ah-n,yayy~lo, lamb ; 
 
SYLLABLES. 19 
 
 incoGmto, een-ko'-n,yee-io, unknown; 
 
 bisoGNo, &ee-s</-n,yo, need ; 
 
 iGNudo, ee-n,yW-cfo, naked. 
 
 Sc followed by the vowels e, i, is pronounced 
 like sh in the English word sneZ/, smp ; as, 
 
 sc^na, shay f -nah, scene ; 
 
 scimicf, 9 shee f -mee,ah, ape. 
 
 Sch followed by the vowels e, i, is pronounced like 
 skin the English words SKeteA, &K.ill ; as, 
 
 scHrnio, skai/r'-no, mockery ; 
 
 scni/b, skee^o, skiff. 
 
 Followed by the vowels ia, ie, io, iu, it is pro- 
 nounced like sJc in the English word SK^ ; as, 
 
 scuiavOj sk,ya^-vo, slave ; 
 
 scHi^na, 8k,yay f -nah, the back ; 
 
 scmoppo, skflop-po, musket ; 
 
 scnmma, sk^oo'-r/ia/i, froth. 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 
 OF SYLLABLES. 
 
 CIA', do, ciu, are pronounced like cha, cho, choo y in 
 the English words CHAHW, cnop, cnoo^e ; as, 
 
 ciAZda, chaM-rfa, wafer; 
 
 cibmpo, chom'-po, clown ; 
 
 ciurwa, choo/^-ma/i, crew. 
 
 Gid, gio, giu, are pronounced like ja> jo, ju, in the 
 English words jAr, jore, jury ; as, 
 
 . jahZ'-Zo, yellow ; 
 
 jor'-wo, day ; 
 
 ju'-^fo, just. 
 
 Scid. scio, sciu, are pronounced like sha, sho, shoo, 
 in the English words SHA#, snop, SHOO^; as, 
 
 sciAme, shah'-mai/, swarm ; 
 
 scio/fo, shol f -to, loose ; 
 
 sciugd^o, shoo-gah'-to, wiped. 
 
20 PRONUNCIATION. 
 
 Gud, gue, gui, are pronounced like gua, gue, gui, 
 in the English words /anGUAge, Za/iGUE/, lanGuid ; as, 
 
 GUAncia, gwa.hn f -chah, cheek, 
 
 GUErra, gwayr'-raft, war ; 
 
 Gvida, gwee'-dah, guide. 
 
 Qua, qui, qui, quo, are pronounced like qua, que, qui, 
 quo, in the English words quality 9 Question, quibble, 
 quote ; as, 
 
 quAnto, kwahn'-/o, how-much ; 
 
 QUES/O, kway'-^o, this ; 
 
 quinto, kween'-fo, fifth ; 
 
 quotidiano, kwo-tee-dee,ah'-no, daily. 
 
 CHAPTER VI. 
 
 DIPHTHONGS AND TRIPHTHONGS. 
 
 ITALIAN diphthongs are so pronounced as to give to 
 each vowel its proper sound. They are generally di- 
 vided into two classes, the long and the short. 
 
 Long diphthongs are those, in which each vowel is 
 as distinctly pronounced as if they formed each a sep- 
 arate syllable ; as, 
 
 tie 
 
 AEre, 
 
 ah', ay -ray, 
 
 air; 
 
 di 
 
 mAi, 
 
 mah^ee, 
 
 never ; 
 
 do 
 
 pAolo, 
 
 pah^o-Zo, . 
 
 a pau] ; 
 
 du 
 
 Aura, 
 
 ah^oo-?*^, 
 
 breeze ; 
 
 ea 
 
 borEA, 
 
 bo f ~ro.y,&h, 
 
 the north-wind : 
 
 ee 
 
 VEEmenza 
 
 v&y,<iy-mctyn f -z(th 
 
 , vehemence ; 
 
 ei 
 
 
 
 ZEI, 
 
 EoZo, 
 
 Zay^ee, 
 ay'jO-Zo, 
 
 her; 
 ^Eolus ; 
 
 en 
 
 fan do, 
 
 jTay r ,oo-c?o, 
 
 feud ; 
 
 6i 
 
 vbi, 
 
 vo^ee, 
 
 you ; 
 
 06 
 
 cobrte, 
 
 /co,o? v -tav, 
 
 cohort ; 
 
 ui 
 
 coZui, 
 
 ko-loo f ,ee, 
 
 that-one. 
 
GENERAL RULES. 21 
 
 Short diphthongs are so pronounced, that, of the two 
 vowels, one is so faintly heard as to seem blended 
 with the other ; as, 
 
 id /iA<0, /eejah'-fo, breath; 
 
 ie CIE/O, chee,&y f -lo, heaven; 
 
 id pibva, pee^-vah, rain ; 
 
 iu piuma, pee,oo f -mah, feather ; 
 
 ud quAnto, kwtihnfto, how-much ; 
 
 ue guE/fo, gvr*.yf-fah, cage; 
 
 ui quinto, kween'-to, fifth ; 
 
 u6 Juono, foo,o'-no, thunder. 
 
 Triphthongs are generally classed with the short 
 diphthongs, and are pronounced, 
 
 dio gAio, gah',yo, gay; 
 
 Ui miEi. meejay'jee, mine ; 
 
 uai fcuoi, 600^ ,ee, oxen; 
 
 udio- guAio, g-wah^yo, wailing ; 
 
 teoio cuoio, Xwo^yo, leather ; 
 
 iuoi lacciuoi, laht-choo,o f ,ee, snares. 
 
 CHAPTER VII. 
 
 GENERAL RULES ON THE ITALIAN PRONUN- 
 CIATION. 
 
 ITALIAN words are pronounced exactly as they are 
 written, there being no silent letter except h. 
 
 Every vowel always preserves its proper sound, inde- 
 pendently of the consonants which accompany it.* 
 
 * There is, perhaps, no greater difficulty for foreigners in pronouncing Ital- 
 ian, than that of the vowels E, O, whose sound, either open or close, often 
 determines the signification of words ; as in melc, pesca, t&ma ; collo, /ore, voto, 
 which pronounced with .E and O open, mean, 'honey', 'a peach', 'theme'; 
 ' neck', ' the bar', ' void' : and pronounced with E and O close, signify, ' apples', 
 'fishing', 'fear'; 'with the', ' a hole', 'vow'. 
 
 [For a list of Words of Similar Orthography, but of Different Signification, 
 distinguished by the Different Sound of E, O, see APPENDIX, A. (2)] 
 
PRONUNCIATION. 
 
 When consonants are doubled, each of them is sepa- 
 rately pronounced ;* as, 
 
 frah-tayV -lo, brother ; 
 
 a/id-dob'-bo, ornament; 
 
 % cRR^re, ayr-ro' -ray, error ; 
 
 aTTre'zzi, a/it- trayt' -see, utensils. 
 
 If a word ends with a consonant, and the following 
 word begins with a vowel, the consonant of the former, 
 in the pronunciation, is joined to the vowel or first syl- 
 lable of the latter ; as, 
 
 /?CR Amore, ^?e-R A-more, pay-Yzh-mo f -ray, 
 
 for love sake ; 
 
 qudi, Angostia, qua-i* AN-goscia kwah-lahn-go'-shahj 
 
 what anguish; 
 
 granrf inviio, gran-v iy-vito, grahn-deen-vee f -to, 
 
 great invitation. 
 
 When gti precedes a word beginning with a vowel, 
 the vowel or first syllable of the latter is joined to gli, 
 so as to form a single syllable ; as, 
 
 GLI onorij GLI o-non", l,yo-n</-ree, the honors ; 
 
 OCC/IT, &e-GLi oc-chi, bay-l,yok f -kee, beautiful eyes. 
 
 In all Italian words of more than one syllable, there 
 is always one, upon which the voice, in pronouncing 
 the word, is heard stronger than upon the others. This, 
 which is generally effected by raising the voice upon 
 that syllable and letting it fall upon the rest, is com- 
 monly called the tonic accent of the word. The sylla- 
 ble upon which the tonic accent falls, is pronounced 
 longer than the other syllables ; each of which is not to 
 
 * The importance of the observance of this rule will at once be perceived by 
 the learner, when, in advancing in the study of the language, he observes a great 
 number of words written with a double consonant, whose signification would be 
 entirely altered by pronouncing them with a single consonant; as in COIRRO, 
 Jiocco, presso, rdssa, seRRa, SONNO, 'car', 'tassel', 'near', 'red', 'saw', 'sleep': 
 which pronounced with a single consonant, cdRO, fioco, preaoj rdsa, SCRG, SOKO. 
 signify 'dear', 'hoarse', 'taken', 'rose', 'evening', 'lam'. 
 
 [For a list of Words, whose Signification is determined by the Pronunciatioik 
 of double Consonants, see APPENDIX, C.] 
 
EXERCISE. 23 
 
 occupy more than half the time employed in pronounc- 
 ing the accented syllable ; as, 
 
 oNda, ox-ddh, wave ; 
 
 WCCEL/O, do2-chayl-Z0, bird ; 
 
 E&ano, &y-bah-no, ebony ; 
 
 dh-mee-stah, amity. 
 
 EXERCISE ON THE PRONUNCIATION. 
 
 Cedro, citron ; cenere, ashes ; celebre, celebrated ; cicatrice, 
 scar ; cicaldta, chit-chat ; cipolla, onion ; cidncia, story ; ciarldre, 
 to prate ; cidlda, wafer ; cielo, heaven ; cieco, blind ; cioccoldte, 
 chocolate ; cio'cco, stump ; do, this ; fanciullo, child ; ciurma, 
 crew ; ciuffb, a tuft of hair ; gente, people; genere, gender ; 
 giro, turn ; gigdnte, giant ; ginocchio, knee ; giardino, garden ; 
 giammdi, never ; gidllo, yellow ; gio'rno, day ; gidgo, yoke ; gio- 
 condo, 'merry ; giovane, youth ; giugno, June ; giulio, gay ; 
 giudice, judge ; giudicare,to judge ; rdwe, copper ; rovina,Tuin ; 
 orroVe, horror; parlare, to speak; firro, iron; drZo, border ; 
 merce, reward ; bardo, bard ; arrovelldre, to be angry ; iiretire, 
 to ensnare ; crudele, cruel ; /orza, force ; territdrio, territory ; 
 tartdreo, tartarean ; 5ct/w^, health ; servo, servant ; sorte, fate ; 
 sire, sire ; so'pra, above ; cosi, so ; singoldre, singular ; sole, sun ; 
 su, upon ; superdre, to surmount; palese,' manifest ; cortese, cor- 
 teous ; speso, expended ; reso, rendered ; rosa, rose ; sposa, 
 spouse ; ma, laughter ; musa, muse ; virtuoso, virtuous ; con- 
 fuso, confounded ; zolla, clod ; zio, uncle ; zuppa, soup ; zerbino, 
 a spark ; zimdrra, night-gown ; pozzo, a well ; carezze, caresses ; 
 carrozza, couch ; tdzza, cup ; ammazzdre, to kill ; pizzico, pinch ; 
 orzo, barley ; zizzdnia, tare ; rezzo,' shade ; vizio, vice ; zotico, 
 rude ; letizia, joy ; nazione, nation ; timpj, temples ; studj, stu- 
 dies ; esempj, examples ; vizj, vices ; eccidj, slaughters ; augurj, 
 auguries ; ho, I have ; hdi, thou hast ; ha, he has ; hdnno, they 
 have ; ah ! ah ! deh ! alas ! ih ! ih ! poh ! pooh ! uh ! uh ! accidio, 
 steel ; accento, accent ; accidioso, sluggish ; Idccio, noose ; fdc- 
 cia, face ; lacciuolo, snare ; oggetto, object ; soggwmo, abode ; 
 
24 PRONUNCIATION. 
 
 pioggia, rain ; rdggio, ray ; aggiunta, addition ; oggi, to-day . 
 cMto, quiet ; chino, inclined ; cherubino, cherubim ; chimico, 
 chymist ; chermes, cochineal ; chimera, chimera ; chicchessia, 
 whosoever ; chidve, key ; chwstro, cloister ; chiusa, hedge ; chia- 
 mdrc, to call ; chttsa, church ; chiodo, nail ; chitrico, clerk ; 
 ghembo, crooked ; ghermfoe, to gripe ; ghiro, dormouse ; ghiribiz- 
 20, whim ; ghervne, gore, ghirldnda, garland ; ghidia, gravel ; 
 ghidccio, ice ; lusinghiere, flattering ; preghtera, prayer ; ghiotto, 
 greedy; tegghiuzza, baking-pan ; figli, children ; fdgli, leaves ; 
 piglidre, to take jfamiglia, family ; moglie, wife ; orgoglio, pride ; 
 imbroglio, embarassment ; fogliuto, leafy ; figliuolo, son ; negli- 
 genza, negligence ; negUtto, neglected ; dngli, Englishmen ; 
 dnglia, England ; anglicdno, Anglican ; campdgna, the country ; 
 magndminp, magnanimous; ingegntre, engineer; spignere, to 
 push ; magnifico, magnificent ; sigrwre, sir ; ttgno, wood ; ignu- 
 do, naked ; scesa, descent ; scemdre, to diminish ; sctttro, scep- 
 ter ; scimia, ape ; scisma, schism ; sciagura, misfortune ; scidme, 
 swarm ; sciancdto, hipped ; scitnza, science ; coscitnza, con- 
 science ; sciocco, foolish ; sciorre, to loose ; sciugatoio, towel ; 
 sciugdre, to wipe ; schidvo, slave; schiantdre, to tear; schttna, 
 the back ; schittto, candid ; schioppo, musket ; schiuma, froth ; 
 guadagndre, to gain ; guerra, war ; guarddre, to look ; guerire, 
 to heat ; guercio, squint-eyed ; guida, guide ; guiddre, to guide ; 
 qudttro, four ; qualitd, quality ; quddro, picture ; qudle, which ; 
 qutsto, this ; quercia, oak ; quitte, quiet ; quindici, fifteen ; quivi, 
 there ; quotididno, daily. 
 
PART II. 
 
 ITALIAN ANALOGY. 
 
 PARTS OF SPEECH. 
 
 (Variable) (Invariable) 
 
 L' AR-HCOLO, the Article; L' AVVERBIO, Jhe Mvtrb ; 
 
 IL NOME, the Noun ; LA PREPOSIZIONE, the Preposi- 
 
 [tion ; 
 
 IL PRONOME, the Pronoun ; LA CONGIUNZIONE, the Conjunc- 
 
 [tion ; 
 
 JL VERBO, the Verb ; L' INTERIEZIONE, the Interjec- 
 
 [tion. 
 
 JL PARTicipio, the Participle : 
 
 CHAPTER L 
 
 ARTICLES. 
 
 THERE are three articles in Italian ; ?7, lo, la, ( the 5 , in 
 the singular; i or li,* gli, le, c the', in the plural number. 
 
 It, lo, and i or li, gli, are used with masculine, la and 
 /e, with feminine nouns. 
 
 I/, and i or K, are put before masculine nouns begin- 
 ning with a consonant, except z, or s followed by ano- 
 ther consonant ; as, 
 
 IL vratello, the brother ; i Figliuoli, the children ; 
 
 IL Marito, the husband ; LI Fadri, the fathers. 
 
 * We meet with li frequently in the Classics, especially in poetry ; but modern 
 writers generally use i in preference to it. 
 
 3 
 
26 ANALOGY. 
 
 Lo and gli, are put before masculine nouns beginning 
 with z, s followed by another consonant, or a vowel ; * 
 
 as, 
 
 LO zio, the uncle ; GLI zejiri, the zephyrs 
 
 LO STrepito, the noise ; GLI sprom, the spurs ; 
 
 LO innocente, the innocent man ; GLI bcchi, the eyes. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 The noun Dw t ' God', before its plural, Dei, t Gods', takes the 
 article gli; as, 
 
 GLI Dei, "the Gods. 
 
 After the preposition per, ( for, by, or through', whether the 
 nouns begins with z, s : or any other consonant, the article lo is more 
 properly used; as, 
 
 per LO anwre, for the love ; per LO braccio, by the arm. 
 
 In the plural, however, if the noun begins with any consonant 
 but z, or s followed by another consonant, we may use indifferently, 
 either gli or li ; as, 
 
 per GLI boschi, through the woods ; 
 
 per LI regni, through the regions. 
 
 La and le, are put before all feminine nouns begin- 
 ning either with a consonant, or a vowel; as, 
 
 LA Reina, the queen ; LE cortesie, the courtesies : 
 
 LA sorella, the sister ; LE mddri, the mothers ; 
 
 LA yobillct, the nobleness ; LE Anime, the souls. 
 
 The articles lo, la, before a noun beginning with a 
 vowel ; and gli, le, before a noun beginning with i, e ; 
 
 * Poets very often use lo before nouns beginning with other consonants than z, 
 or 8 followed by another consonant; and il before nouns beginning with those 
 consonants ; as, 
 
 Lo oi6rno se n'anddva e Va.tr bruno; The day was closing, and the dusky 
 
 (Dant. Inf. 2.) air ; 
 
 Seguielo appresso it, splendido, e on- Next followed the splendid and hon- 
 
 rdndoPricivdllc; (Bocc. Vis. 1.) orable Pricivalle ; 
 
 GLI Rdwii schidnta, abdtte, e porta Tears off the boughs, beats down, 
 
 fuori ; (Dant. Inf. 9.) and hurls away ; 
 
 but in prose this usage is, by all good writers, carefully avoided. 
 
ARTICLES. 27 
 
 generally drop o, #, i, e, and take an apostrophe instead 
 of them ;* as. 
 
 (for 
 
 infirm ; 
 
 (for 
 
 Sometimes the article il drops the i after a word 
 ending with a vowel, and takes an apostrophe instead 
 of it; as, 
 
 E' L viso, ? and the coun- uscio *L colpo, ) the blow 
 
 (for E IL viso), $ tenance ; {for uscio IL cdlpo), $ issued, 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 L' vn fratello L' kltro abban- 
 dondva,e LA SORELLA IL FRA- 
 TELLO, e spesse volte LA donna 
 IL swo MARITO. (Bocc. Intr.) 
 
 E che maggior cosa e, LI PA- 
 
 DRI 6 LE MADRI, I FIGLIUOLI dl 
 
 risitdre e di sermre schivdvano. 
 (Bocc. Intr.; 
 
 LA REINA non si sapeva sazi- 
 dre d'udire LA NOBILTA e LE 
 CORTESIE del giovane re. (Nov. 
 ant. 35.) 
 
 JVbw istette gudri a levdrsi IL 
 ne, il qudle LO STREPITO del ca- 
 ricdnti e delle bestie aveva desto. 
 (Bocc. g. 7. Proem.) 
 
 Avevan LO INNOCENTE per fal- 
 sa suspizione accusdto. (Bocc. 
 g\ 3. n. 7.) 
 
 E con amor si Idgna Ch 1 ha 
 si cdldi GLI SPRON, si duro IL 
 vreno, (Petr. s. 140.) 
 
 Lucdvan GLI OCCHI suoi piu 
 che LA stella. (Dant. Inf. 2.) 
 
 #Z tempo DEGLI DEI fdlsi e 
 bugidrdi. (Dant. Inf. 1.) 
 
 One brother abandoned the 
 other, and the sister the broth- 
 er, and oftentimes the wife her 
 husband. 
 
 And what is more, the fath- 
 ers and the mothers shunned 
 to visit and serve their chil- 
 dren. 
 
 The queen could not be sat- 
 isfied with hearing of the no- 
 bleness and the courtesies of 
 the young king. 
 
 The king was not long in get- 
 ting up, whom the noise of the 
 beasts and of those who loaded 
 them had already awakened. 
 
 They had accused the in- 
 nocent man on a false suspi- 
 cion. 
 
 And complains of love, that 
 has so sharp spurs, and so hard 
 a bit. 
 
 Her eyes shone more than 
 the star. 
 
 In the time of fabled and 
 false deities. 
 
 * Le drops the e sometimes, and takes 
 
 poetry, even before words beginning with 
 
 Ei sonfra iS&.nimc piu were. (D.Inf. 6.) 
 
 C&nto L \rrni pietdse. (Tass. Ger. 1.) 
 
 an apostrophe instead of it, chiefly in 
 any o.her vowel } as, 
 
 They are amidst blacker souls. 
 
 I sing the pious arms. 
 
28 
 
 ANALOGY. 
 
 Sempre tenendo PERLO BRAC- 
 cio LO infermo. (Bocc.g.2.n.8.) 
 
 PER LO suo A MORE adunque 
 a noi tipiega. (Dant. Purg. 1.) 
 
 Ldsciane anddre PER IA tuft 
 sctte REGNI. (Dant. Purg. 1.) 
 
 L' ANIMA tua e da viltdte offe- 
 sa, LA quail molte fidte L' UOMO 
 ingombra, Sicche cV onrdta im- 
 presa lo rivolve. (Dant. Inf. 2.) 
 
 / pcnsier son saette E' L viso 
 un sole E' L desirfoco. (Petr.) 
 
 Zefiro torna, E'L lei tempo 
 rimena t ~E ifiori, e L'ERBE, sua 
 dolce famiglia. (Petr. s. 269.) 
 
 hcchi vostri uscfo 'L 
 COLPO mortdle. (Petr.) 
 
 Del bel paese Id dovx J L si 
 suona. (Dant. Inf. 33.) 
 
 Holding always the sick man 
 by the arm. 
 
 Then for her love condescend 
 to our desires. 
 
 Let us pass through thy se- 
 ven regions. 
 
 Thy soul is by vile fear as- 
 sailed, which oft, So overcast 
 a man, that he recoils From 
 noble undertaking. 
 
 The thoughts are arrows, 
 and the countenance a sun, 
 and the desire fire. 
 
 Zephyr returns, bringing 
 back flowers, and herbs, his 
 sweet family. 
 
 From your eyes the mortal 
 blow issued. 
 
 Of that fair land where si is 
 spoken. 
 
 When the articles il, lo, la ; i or li, gli, le, are im- 
 mediately preceded by the prepositions di, c of; # ? 
 c to'; da, c from or by 7 ; in or ne, ' in ? ; con, ' with'; 
 per, c for, by, j>r through' ; su, c upon' ; fra or tra 7 
 6 amongst' ; in order to avoid the harshness of sound 
 produced by two monosyllables coming together, they 
 are united to them, so as to form a single word ; as, 
 
 a i, AI, to the ; da gli, 
 
 su la, SULLA, upon the ; tra le, 
 
 DAGLI, from or by the ; 
 TRALLE, amongst the. 
 
 Union of the Prepositions DI. A, DA, IN or NE, CON, 
 PER, su, FRA or TRA, with the Article 
 
 di il, 
 a H, 
 dail, 
 
 in or ne il, 
 con iZ, 
 per il, 
 
 TL, the; 
 
 DEL, 
 
 AL, 
 
 DA.L, 
 
 NEL, 
 
 COL, 
 
 PEL, 
 
 of the ; 
 
 to the ; 
 
 from or by the ; 
 
 in the; 
 
 with the ; 
 
 for, by or through the; 
 
ARTICLES. 
 
 suit, 
 
 f?, 
 tra il, 
 
 SUL, 
 
 FRAL, 
 
 TRAL, 
 
 upon the ; 
 amongst the. 
 
 i or LI, the, 
 
 di i or di li, DEI or BELLI,* 
 
 a i or ali, AI or ALLI, 
 
 da ?* or da li, DAI or DALLI, 
 in or ne i, or in or ?ie Zi, NEI or NELLI, 
 
 con i or con li, coi or COLLI, 
 
 per i or per Zi, PEI or PELLI, 
 
 su i or su li, sth or SULLI, 
 
 fra i or fra li, FRAI or FRALLI, 
 
 fra i or Jra /i, TRAI or TRALLI, 
 
 of the ; 
 
 to the ; 
 
 from or by the ; 
 
 in the ; 
 
 with the ; 
 
 for, by or thro.' the; 
 
 upon the ; 
 
 amongst the. 
 
 
 LO, the ; 
 
 
 di Zo, 
 
 DELLO,* 
 
 of the ; 
 
 a Zo, 
 
 ALLO, 
 
 to the ; 
 
 dalo, 
 
 DALLO, 
 
 from or by the ; 
 
 in or ne lo, 
 
 NELLO, 
 
 in the ; 
 
 con lo. 
 
 COLLO, 
 
 with the ; 
 
 per lo, 
 
 PELLO, 
 
 for, by or thro.' the; 
 
 su Zo, 
 
 Sl^LLO, 
 
 upon the ; 
 
 fra Zo, 
 tra Zo, 
 
 FRX.LLO, ? 
 TRALLO, ^ 
 
 amongst thee. 
 
 
 GLI, the ; 
 
 
 di gli, 
 
 DEGLI,* 
 
 of the ; 
 
 a gli, 
 
 AGLI, 
 
 to the ; 
 
 da gli, 
 
 DAGLI, 
 
 from or by the ; 
 
 in or ne gli, 
 
 NEGLI, 
 
 in the ; 
 
 con gli, 
 
 COGLI, 
 
 with the ; 
 
 per gli, 
 
 PEGLI, 
 
 for, by or thro.' the; 
 
 sugli, 
 
 StJGLI, 
 
 upon the ; 
 
 fra gli, 
 tra gli, 
 
 FRAGLI, ) 
 TRAGLI, ^ 
 
 amongst the, 
 
 * Poets very often 
 N6 mai nascdse il citl si f6lta nilb- 
 
 fcia, CAe, sopraggiunta dal fur6r d& 
 
 venti, Non fuggisse DA I p6ggi, e DA 
 
 LE valli. (Petr. c. 14.) 
 
 DA L' erba, e DA LI fi6r ddntro a 
 
 quel stno Pdsti, ciascun saria di coUr 
 
 vinto. (Dant. Purg. 7) 
 
 ' Al Padre, al Figlio y A LO Spirito 
 
 Santo* Comindt * gl6ria> tutto H Pa- 
 
 ra<Hso. (Dant. Par. 27.) 
 
 use them separate ; as, 
 
 Nor ever did the aky conceal so thick 
 a cloud, that, overtaken by the fury 
 of ihe wind, it would not flee from the 
 hills, and the valleys ; 
 
 By the herbs and flowers, placed 
 in that recess, in color all would be 
 surpassed ; 
 
 * Glory to the Father, to the Son, 
 And to the Holy Spirit,' rang aloud 
 Throughout all Paradise.- 
 
30 
 
 ANALOGY. 
 
 LA, the ; 
 
 di la t 
 a la, 
 da la, 
 in or ne la, 
 con la, 
 per la, 
 sula, 
 fra la y 
 tra Ia 9 
 
 DELLA y 
 
 ALLA, 
 
 DALLA, 
 
 NELLA, 
 
 COLLA, 
 
 PELLA, 
 
 SULLA, 
 
 FRALLA, 
 
 TRALLA, 
 
 of the ; 
 
 to the ; 
 
 from or by the ; 
 
 in the ; 
 
 with the ; 
 
 for, by or through the ; 
 
 upon the ; 
 
 amongst the. 
 
 di le, 
 ale, 
 dale, 
 
 in or ne le. 
 con Ie 9 
 per le, 
 su le, 
 fra le, 
 tra le? 
 
 LE, the ; 
 DELLE, 
 
 ALLE, 
 DALLE, 
 WELLE, 
 COLLE, 
 
 PELLE, 
 
 SULLE, 
 
 FRALLE, > 
 TRALLE, 5 
 
 of the; 
 
 to the ; 
 
 from or by the ; 
 
 in the ; 
 
 with the ; 
 
 for, by, or through the ; 
 
 upon the ; 
 
 amongst the. 
 
 D6i, di, ddi, nei, coi, pei, sui, frdi or trdi, followed 
 by a noun beginning with a consonant, drop the i, and 
 take an apostrophe instead of it ; as, 
 
 DE' prati, of the meadows ; A' cdnti, to singing ; 
 DA' varenti, by the relations ; NE' Giardini, in the gardens ; 
 co' Raggi, with the rays ; PE' Monti, through the moun- 
 
 [tains ; 
 su' itibri, upon the books ; TRA' wri, amongst the flow- 
 
 [ers. 
 
 Pel, petto, pella, and pelli, pegli, ptlle, in elegant 
 style are better written per lo, per la, and per li, per 
 gli, per le ; as, 
 
 PER LO Dwca, by my guide ; PER LA pieta, through pity ; 
 PER GLI occhi, through the PER LE frondi, on account of 
 
 [eyes ; [the leaves* 
 
ARTICLES. 
 
 31 
 
 And scrupulous writers before nouns beginning with z 
 or s followed by another consonant, use collo, trallo, 
 colla, trdtta, and cogli, tragli, colle, trdlle, and sugli, 
 always separated ;* as, 
 
 CON LA zazzera, with the 
 [head of hair ; 
 
 CON GLI sciocchi, with the 
 [ignorant ; 
 
 su GLI scudi, upon the 
 [shield. 
 
 CON LO splendore, with the 
 [splendor : 
 
 su LO SMalto, upon the 
 [enamel ; 
 among the 
 
 [stars ; 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Come NE' Lucidi sereni sono 
 le stelle ornamento DEL cielo, e 
 NELL A primavera i fiori DE' 
 PRATI, e DE' cdlli i rivestiti ar- 
 buscelli ; cost DE' laudevoli co- 
 stumi,e DE' nagionamenti belli 
 sono i leggiddri motti. (Bocc. 
 g. 6. n. 1.) 
 
 E divenuti piu lieti} su si le- 
 vdrono, ed A' suoni., ed A' CANTI 
 cd A' Ralli da capo si dierono. 
 (Bocc. g. 3. Proem.) 
 
 Ok, sventurdta! che si dird 
 DA' Tiwi fratelli, DA' PARENTI, 
 DA' vitini, qudndo si saprd, eke 
 tu sii qui trovdta ? (Bocc. g. 8. 
 n. 7.) 
 
 Qudndo NE' GIARDNI entrdtc, 
 disttsa la dilicdta mdno, coglietc 
 le rose, e lascidte le spine stare. 
 (Bocc. g. 5. n. 10.) 
 
 Omlrose selve, 6ve per cote il 
 sole, Che vi fa co' suoi RAGGI 
 dlte e superbe. (Petr. s. 129.) 
 
 As in the bright clear sky, 
 the stars are the ornament of 
 the heavens, and in the spring 
 the flowers are of the meadows, 
 and the verdant shrubs of the 
 hills, so witty sayings are the or- 
 naments of praiseworthy man- 
 ners and fine conversations. 
 
 And having become more 
 gay, they arose and gave them- 
 selves once more to playing, 
 singing, and dancing. 
 
 Oh, unfortunate woman ! what 
 will be said by thy brothers, by 
 thy relations, by thy neighbors, 
 when it shall be known, that 
 thou hast been found here ? 
 
 When you enter into the 
 gardens, extending your deli- 
 cate hand, you cull the roses, 
 and leave the thorns. 
 
 Shady woods, where strikes 
 the sun, which renders you 
 with its rays so lofty and noble. 
 
 * And in poetry even before nouns beginning with any other letter ; as, 
 
 Ecco la Jiera CON LA coda agfaia. 
 (Dant. Inf. 17.) 
 
 Vidi Solon CON GLI dltri sei di a'ti 
 Grtcia, si vtinta. (Petr. Tr. Fam.) 
 
 .Behold the beast with sharpened 
 tail; 
 
 I saw Solon with the other six of 
 whom Greece boasts. 
 
ANALOGY. 
 
 E quindi passdi in terra 
 d'Jibruzzi, dove gli uomini c le 
 femmine vdnno in zoccoli su PE' 
 M6KTI. (Bocc. g. 6. n. 10.) 
 
 Ldscio lo file, e vo PE' nolci 
 pomi Promessi a me PER LO 
 verdce DUCA. (Dant. Inf. 16.) 
 
 Cosl avestu riposti DE' Bei 
 vestigi spdrsi, Ancor TRA' Fi6- 
 meVerba. (Petr. c. 26.) 
 
 PER GLI OCCHI mi passb den- 
 tro la mente. (Rim. ant. p. 49.) 
 
 Era 'Z giorno eft al Sol si sco- 
 lordro PER LA PIET.A del suo 
 Fattore i red. (Petr. s. 3.) 
 
 Giunsc nel bosco PER LE FR6x- 
 DI ombroso. (Bocc. Tes. 5. 33.) 
 
 CON LO SPLENDOR die SUa l)d- 
 
 '{ezza adduce. (Incer. c. 4.) 
 
 JYVm errdr CON GLI sci6ccHi. 
 (Petr. c. 47.) 
 
 And then I passed to the land 
 of Abruzzi, where men and wo- 
 men go in wooden shoes up 
 over the mountains. 
 
 I leave the gall, in quest of 
 the sweet fruit, which has been 
 promised to me by my faithful 
 guide. 
 
 Thus would that thou, (O 
 heart,) hadst still preserved 
 some of the beautiful footsteps, 
 here and there, amongst the 
 flowers and the grass. 
 
 It passed through my eyes 
 to my mind. 
 
 It was the day when the rays 
 of the sun grew pale, through 
 pity for his Maker. 
 
 He arrived in the wood, shady 
 on account of its leaves. 
 
 With the splendor which 
 brings her beauty. 
 
 Do not wonder in error with 
 the ignorant. 
 
 The English indefinite article a, an, is expressed in 
 Italian by the indefinite pronouns un, uno, una, accord- 
 ing to the rules already given with regard to the articles 
 il, lo, la, ' the' ; as, 
 
 UN wercatdnte, a merchant ; UNO spirdglio, a breathing-hole ; 
 UIT A Fiamma, a flame ; UNA zeba, a goat. 
 
 Uno, like lo, before a noun beginning with a vowel, 
 drops the o, but takes no apostrophe instead of it ; una 
 drops the a and takes an apostrophe ; as, 
 
 UN uomo, a man ; UN' bmbra, a shade ; 
 
 UN Arrwre, a love ; UN' bra, an hour. 
 
 When a noun is taken in a partitive sense, the Eng- 
 lish adjectives some and any are expressed by ther 
 
ARTICLES. 33 
 
 words del, dello, della, in the singular ; and dei, degli, 
 delle, or alcuni, alcune, in the plural ; as, 
 
 DEL pane, some bread ; DELL' olio, some oil ; 
 
 ALCTJNE cose, some things ; ALCUNI udmini, some men ; 
 
 DEGLI STromenti, some instru- DELLE ardnce, some oranges, 
 [ments ; 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 In Parigi fu UN gran MER- 
 
 CATANTE. (BOCC. g. 1. n. 2.) 
 
 lEra Arriguccio UN Fiero uo- 
 MO, e UN Forte. (Bocc. g. 7. 
 n. 6.) 
 
 Nella qudl grotta ddva alqudn- 
 to lume tfNO SPIRAGLIO fat to nel 
 monte. (Bocc. g. 4. n. 1.) 
 
 UN volerc, UN AMORE ci ha 
 sempre tenuti legdti e congiunti, 
 cd UN wedesimo giorno ci diede 
 al mondo ; pidcciavi, poiche UN' 
 ORA ci toglie, che similemente 
 UNA uedesima FIAMMA ci con- 
 siimi. (Bocc. Filoc.) 
 
 Gli diedi DEL PANE e DEL cd- 
 cio. (Firenz.) 
 
 tfno de' famiglidri di Mes- 
 ser Neri accese il fuoco. e po- 
 sta la padella sopra il treppie, 
 e DELL' OLIO messovi, comincio 
 ad aspettdre, che le giovani gli 
 gittdssero DEL pesce. (Bocc. g. 
 30. n. 6.) 
 
 Di niuna cosa sermeno, che di 
 porgere ALC^NE COSE dagl' in- 
 fermi addomanddte, (B. Intr.) 
 
 There was in Paris a great 
 merchant. 
 
 Arriguccio was a haughty 
 and strong man. 
 
 In which grotto came some 
 light through a breathing-hole, 
 opened in the mountain. 
 
 One will, one love, has al- 
 ways kept us bound an'd united, 
 and the same day gave us to 
 the world ; may it please you, 
 then, since the same hour takes 
 us from it, that one same flame 
 should consume us. 
 
 I gave him some bread and 
 some cheese. 
 
 One of the domestics of Mes- 
 ser Neri kindled the fire, and 
 having put the frying-pan up- 
 on a trevet, and having put 
 some oil in it, he began to wait 
 that the young women should 
 throw into it some fish. 
 
 They ^ rendered no service, 
 but to reach some things called 
 for by the sick. 
 
34 ANALOGY. 
 
 EXERCISE I . 
 
 [Let the learner here put the right Article according to the gender marked, 
 against the Italian nouns, and the number of the same, as indicated by the 
 English words.] 
 
 The sacred Tiber, the Egyptian obelisks, the temples 
 sdcro Tevere t m. y Egizidni obellschi^m^ tempj,m. 
 
 still dark with the vapor of the sacrifices, the Flavian 
 ancora foacki vapore } m. sacrifizj^.j Fldvio z 
 
 Amphitheatre which lies like a mangled giant,* the 
 anfitedtro 1 ,m.* il qudle gidce come sbrandto" 2 gigdnte^m., 
 
 columns which describe the customs of the soldiery, 
 colonnejf. che descrwono costumdnzef. mili,zia,f., 
 
 the triumphal arches, the space of the Forum, the 
 trionfdli* drchijm., spdzio,m: ,F6r0,ra., 
 
 mausoleums, the majestic ruins of the circuses and of the 
 mausolei,m., maestosc" rume, 1 ?. circhi,m. e 
 
 baths, and all the remains of the Roman splendor, 
 terme,f., e tutti avdnz^m. Romano? splendidezza, 1 ?., 
 
 fill the mind 
 empiono dnimo,m. 
 
 withf I delightful wonder. 
 di I sodvc maramglia. 
 
 Nero to appease them, ordered that the fasces of the 
 JYerone per appacidr^ li } t bandi che fdsci,m. 
 
 emperor 
 imperat6re,m. 
 
 should be borne I with the laurel. The 
 si portdssero \ allorojm. 
 
 senators complained against I the insolence of the 
 
 di insolenzaS. 
 
 against 
 
 the avarice of the 
 
 senatdri,m. si dolivano 
 
 plebeians, and the plebeians 
 plebei,m., e plebei,m. di avariziaS. 
 
 magistrates and of the great. 
 magistrdti,m. e grdndi,m. 
 
 * In this and the following Exercises, the numbers affixed to the Ilalian words 
 are intended to denote the order in which they are to be placed ; as, 'Flavio z anfi- 
 tectlro*', aitfittatro Fldvio. 
 
 | When an English word or phrase cannot be rendered literally, but by an 
 equivalent Italian word or phrase, they are both included between brackets" [ ] ; 
 as, * with' con ; di, * of. 
 
 J The sign ^, is used to denote, that the words under which it is found, are to 
 be joined in one , as, per appaciar^_,li, per appacidrli. 
 
ARTICLES. 
 
 He proposed that (the) honors [should be rendered! to Galba, 
 * Propose che 2 on6ri, 3 m.\ si rendessero 1 \ a Gdlba, 
 
 and that the memory of Piso also 
 e che 3 memoria^ f. di 5 Pisone 6 dnche 2 
 
 He departed 
 Parti 
 
 should be celebrated. 
 si celebrdsse 1 . 
 
 the temple of (the) 
 
 to I carry to I 
 per I portdre in I 
 
 the standards of the empire. (The) princes 
 ijnpero,m. principijU 
 
 reputation and I with their 
 reputazione e \ con il 
 
 hand and I with their 1 arms. 
 e con le \ drmi. 
 
 insegnefi. 
 with their I 
 
 con la 1 
 
 I with their 
 I con la 
 
 Concord 
 Conc6rdia,f. 
 
 do more 
 fdnno piu 
 
 advice, than 
 consiglio, che 
 
 Not pardoning, as in (the) other armies, the first fault,! 
 Non pcrdondndo, come in dltri csercitiym., prima fdltaj'., 
 
 he who left the standard 
 
 chi lascidva insegnaj'. 
 
 was immediately beheaded. It appeared to him that he heard 
 era subitamente decapitdto. pdrve 2 Gli 1 sentire 6 
 
 nor 
 Tie 
 
 the second, but 
 secondaf., ma 
 
 I about (the) mid-night people descend in the house. 
 I insu? 4 mezzanbttcfL pcrsone scendere 7 8 cdsa, 9 f. 
 
 Having entered into the tower, she began to weep. For 
 Entrdta torref., comincio a pidngere. Per 
 
 the pain he felt, he began to roar, so that he seem- 
 doldr.m. sentito, comincio a mugghiar, che pareva 
 
 ed a lion. Fleeing through the woods. 
 ledne,m. Fuggendo per bdschi,m. 
 
 He was 
 Fu 
 
 seen by 
 veduto da 
 
 to come 
 
 venire 
 
 a companion 
 compdgnofm. 
 
 I to a gossip 
 \da comdrc, 2 ?. 
 
 of his. 
 suo. 1 
 
 of hers. 
 
 sva. 1 
 
 Having 
 
 caused him 
 Fdtto^ lo 
 
 1 He gav 
 1 diedi 
 
 to him 
 
 Gli 1 
 
 a purse 
 3 bdrsa*f. 
 
 with some florins 
 con 5 7 fiormifm. 
 
 in it. 
 dentro . 
 
 Having found in the garden some capons, some wine, and 
 Trovati 6rto,m. cappdni,m., 
 
 some eggs, lie supped 
 uovaf.. ceno 
 
 entirely at his ease.i 
 a suo bell' dgio.\ 
 
 Such words, as, though necessary in English, are not to be expressed in 
 Italian, are in this part marked with a dash j and such words as are necessary 
 in Italian, but are not expressed in English, are in this language introduced, 
 in Dalies, and included between parentheses ; as, 'He proposed that (the) honor* 
 nhould be rendered', Propose che si rendessero gli ontri. 
 
36 ANALOGY. 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 SUBSTANTIVE NOUNS. 
 
 ALL Italian substantives end with one of the vowels 
 o, a, e, i, u* It is these vowels that show their gendei 
 and number. 
 
 GEND ER. 
 
 Nouns ending in o are of the masculine gender ; as, 
 
 Ubro, book ; specchio, mirror ; 
 
 oriuolo, watch ; scrittoio, scrutoire. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 Proper names of women ; as, 
 
 Sdffo, Sappho ; E'ro, Hero ; Catisto, Calisto : 
 
 Erato, Erato ; dtropo, Atropos ; Metto, Alecto : 
 
 Some contracted nouns, generally used in poetry ; as, 
 
 immdgo,(foT \ . testudo,(for 7 . , . Cartdgo, (for ) Car- 
 
 immdgine) $ l % e > testudint) J tortoise ' Cartdgine) 5 thage: 
 
 And the nouns 3 
 
 mdnO) hand ; eco } echo, 
 
 are feminine. 
 
 Some nouns of animate beings ending in o, in the feminine 
 change o into a; as, 
 
 Colombo, pigeon ; Colombo, hen-dove ; 
 
 cavdllo, horse ; cavallA, mare ; 
 
 gdtto, cat; gattA, she-cat. 
 
 * Lapis, l pencil', and some very few foreign nouns, as, ribes, ' currants', cher- 
 me^, * cochineal 5* &c., are the only exceptions to this rule. But, then, we meet 
 in'Italian with many nouns, which, in composition, are made to end with a 
 consonant ; and this on principles, which will be explained in Part IIP. when 
 treating of ITALIAN ORTHOGRAPHY. 
 
 
SUBSTANTIVES. 37 
 
 Nouns ending in a are of the feminine gender ; as, 
 
 cdsA, house ; strddA, street ; 
 
 port A, door; chits A, church. 
 
 u x c K p T i o N s . 
 Proper names of men ; as, 
 
 ^Eneas ; Andrea, Andrew , Tobza, Toby ; 
 , Attila ; Battista, Baptist ; Luca, Luke : 
 
 Nouns of professions exercised by men ; as, 
 
 artista, artist; scriba, scrivener; alchimista, alchymist; 
 
 legisla, lawyer ; potta } poet; ebanista, cabinet-maker - 
 
 Nouns of dignity ; as, 
 
 papa, pope ; duca, duke ; g&rdrca, high-priest ; 
 
 patridrca, patriarch ; mondrca, monarch ; demdrca, demarch : 
 
 Nouns derived from the Greek, ending in ma^mma ; as, 
 
 clima, climate ; diadema, diadem ; pocma, poem ; 
 
 prisma, prism ; enimma, enigma ; progrdmma, programma : 
 
 Nouns formed of a verb and a noun ; as, 
 
 pascibietola, logger- santinfizza, hypocrite: guardaroba, the ma- 
 [head ; [ter of the wardrobe ; 
 
 And the following, 
 
 j sofa ; sdrra, ; sciloma, long discourse ; 
 
 cipa, sot ; canape, hemp; baccald, cod-fish : 
 
 ire masculine. 
 
 The nouns, 
 
 diota, idiot; eremita, hermit; anacoreta, anchorite; 
 
 pocrita, hypocrite; apostata, apostate; patriotta, patriot; 
 deicida, deicide ; parriclda, parricide ; regicida, regicide ; 
 
 raticida, fratricide ; omiclda, homicide ; matricida, matricide ; 
 intagonista, antagonist; regalista, royalist; monopolista, monopo- 
 
 [list; 
 Deista, Deist ; ateista, atheist; Calvinista, Calvinist; 
 
 Are of the common gender. 
 
38 
 
 ANALOGY. 
 
 Some names of animate beings ending in a, in the masculine 
 change a into o ; as, 
 
 , doe ; c^rvo, stag ; 
 
 A, she- wolf ; lupo, wolf; 
 
 OTSA, she-bear ; orso, bear. 
 
 The nouns, tima, piantta, drdmma, podesth, in the significa- 
 tion of * theme', ' planet', ; drama', ' civil magistrate', are mas- 
 culine ; and in the signification of ' fear', ' cope', ' drachm', 
 'power', are feminine. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Galedtto fu IL LIBRO e chi lo 
 scrisse. (Dant. Inf. 5.) 
 
 O'ra eke debbo dire di quelli 
 che escono DALLO scRiTToio/ra 
 la ginte cdlla pinna neW orec- 
 chio. (Casa Galat. 86.) 
 
 Gli abitatdri di questo Castillo 
 con ARMATA MANO pervennero at 
 lido. (Guid. 60.) 
 
 Tdle che di lontdno Nelle 
 
 valli ECO TRISTA risuondva. 
 (Bocc. Tes. 11, 30.) 
 
 V&ro diro fdrse, e parr a men- 
 z6gna C/i' i sent? trdrmi delta 
 PROPRIA IMAGO (Petr. c. 4, 8.) 
 
 Siccdme qudndo IL COLOMBO 
 si pons, Prisso al compdgno. 
 (Dant. Par. 25.) 
 
 Niuna gldria a uri 1 dquila 
 & Vaver vinto UNA COLOMBA. 
 (Bocc. g. n.) 
 
 In CASA TUA sei orgoglidso e 
 incomp or labile ; a case altrui, 
 umile e dimesso. (Varch. Sen. 
 ben. 3. 28.) 
 
 Mise dissenzione NELLA CHIE- 
 SA, ttnindo sitta c6ntro al Pa- 
 pa con certi cardindli ed dltri 
 c^rici. (Giov. Vill. 1.4,21, 1.) 
 
 The book and he who wrote 
 it were [to us] Galeotto. 
 
 No.w what must I say of 
 those, who come out of their 
 study among the people with 
 a pen over the ear. 
 
 The inhabitants of this castle 
 with arms in their hands reach- 
 ed the shore. 
 
 Such that at a distance 
 sounded in the valleys like a 
 sad echo. 
 
 Perhaps I shall tell the truth 
 and it will appear false, that 1 
 felt myself drawn away from 
 my own body. 
 
 As when the dove alight* 
 by his mate. 
 
 . 
 
 No glory comes to an eagl< 
 from having conquered a dove I 
 
 In thy house thou art prouc | 
 and insupportable; and at the 
 houses of others, humble an<{ 
 submissive. 
 
 He put dissension in th<| 
 church, plotting against th 
 Pope with certain cardinal 
 and other priests. 
 
SUBSTANTIVES. 
 
 39 
 
 fu IL maggtore, e ipiu SAVIO 
 LEGISTA, che fdsse fino al suo 
 timpo. (Giov.'Vill. 8. 65, 2:) 
 
 II tnio signdre nella liber alitd 
 a QLVEL gran MONARCA non cede. 
 (Red. Vip. 1. 7.) 
 
 Ecoslfigurdndo 'I Paradiso,- 
 Convien saltdr LO SAGRATOPOE- 
 MA, Cdme chi trudva suo cam- 
 min reciso. (Dant. Par. 23.) 
 
 Ribdldo, SANTINFIZZA, gabba- 
 dei, Che a quel d'dltri pon cin- 
 que e cam sei. (Lipp. M. 7. 68.) 
 
 Orfinisci dra auESTO TT^O sci- 
 6MA, che tuavevi comincidto di 
 colui Id. (Salv. Spin. 1. 3.) 
 
 Parole, le qudli lo Spirito 
 Sdnto sdpra la lingua delV u6MO 
 ID i6T A ponev a. (Bocc. g. 2. n. 4.) 
 
 Ed T^NA LtfpA, che di tutte 
 brdme Sembrdva cdrca. (Dant. 
 Inf. 1.) 
 
 Ed ecco, memo a lei, uscir d* 
 unamdcchiafolta UN itipogrdn- 
 de e terribile. (Bocc. g. 9. n. 7.) 
 
 Perocche s\ mi cdccia IL LtiN- 
 GO TEMA. (Dant. Inf. 4.) 
 
 Da, auESTA TEMA acciocche tu 
 ti sdlve. (Dant. Inf. 2.) 
 
 Lo BEL PIANETA, che ttd flWOT 
 
 conforta Faceva tutto rider 
 VOriente. (Dant. Purg. 1.) 
 
 Aricora, Idscio #NA PIANETA 
 di zendddo vermzglio. (Bocc. 
 Testam.) 
 
 DRAMMA e un componimento 
 poetico rappresentatzvo. (Cru- 
 
 Sz' essa non fermdi peso di 
 DRAMMA. (Dant. Purg. 21.) 
 
 Qudndo verrd lor NIMICA PO- 
 (Dant. Inf. 6.) 
 
 He was the greatest and the 
 wisest lawyer, that had been 
 seen until his time. 
 
 My master in liberality does 
 not yield to that monarch. 
 
 And with such figuring of Pa- 
 radise, The sacred strain must 
 leap, like one that meets-A sud- 
 den interruption to his road. 
 
 Ribald, hypocrite, mocker of 
 God, who 'add five to that of 
 others, and take out six. 
 
 Now finish that long discourse 
 that thou hadst begun about 
 that man. 
 
 Words, which the Holy 
 Ghost put into the mouth of the 
 ignorant man. 
 
 And a she-wolf who seemed 
 to be laden with wants of every 
 
 When lo ! near her, came 
 out from a thick hedge a large 
 and terrible wolf. 
 
 For my wide theme so urges 
 me on. 
 
 That thou mayest be relieved 
 from this fear. 
 
 The beautiful planet that in- 
 vites to love, made all the 
 orient laugh. 
 
 I bequeath, moreover, a cope 
 of crimson silk stuff. 
 
 The drama is a poetical 
 composition to be represented. 
 
 Without which, I did not 
 rest a moment. 
 
 When shall come the Power 
 adverse to them. 
 
40 ANALOGY. 
 
 Come piu tosto pots, rfandS a As soon as he could, he went 
 
 eolui } ckein luogo DEL PODKST! to him who filled the place of 
 (Bocc. g, 2. n. 1 .) ' Podestk. 
 
 Nouns ending in e are some of them masculine, and 
 some feminine ; as. 
 
 cdrmE, m., poem ; falcEj f., reaping hook ; 
 
 co'Z/E, m., hill ; siepE, f., hedge ; 
 
 t /?orE, m., flower ; ntw, f., snow. 
 
 Those ending in ge, le s me, re, se, nte, are generally 
 masculine ; as, 
 
 ?GE, king ; inaLE, path ; 
 
 MME, river ; CMO'RE, heart ; 
 
 ;, utensil ; WO'NTE, mountain. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 The nouns, 
 
 I6gge, law, faldnge, phalanx ; laringe, larynx ", 
 
 indolej disposition ; prole, offspring ; pelle, skin ; 
 
 bile, bile; voile, valley; ipirbole. hyperbole; 
 
 drme, arm; fame, hunger; spsme, hope; 
 
 scure, hatchet; polvere, dust; vepre, brier; 
 
 torrc, tower; febbre, fever; mddre, mother; 
 
 frdsc, phrase ; buiose, dungeons; ge.nte,, people ; 
 
 mente, mind ; lente, lens ; patente, patent ; 
 
 corrente, current; sorgente } source; scmente, seed; 
 are feminine. 
 
 Those ending in be, ce, pe, te, ve, ie, ine, one, are, 
 generally, feminine ; as, 
 
 JO^BE, common people ; cicatrice, scar ; 
 
 hedge ; a?*TE, art ; 
 
 key ; s^riE, series ; 
 
 , image ; tncuifiNE, anvil ; 
 
 reason ; nozt&KE, nation. 
 
 
SUBSTANTIVES. 41 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 The nouns, 
 
 dice, elk ; pesce, fish ; mdntice, bellows ; 
 
 eodice, code ; cdlice, chalice ; vortice, vortex ; 
 
 pepe, pepper ; presepe, stable ; recipe, recipe ; 
 
 vdte, bard; Idtte, milk; limite, limit; 
 
 breve, a brief; conclave, conclave; architrave, architrave; 
 
 erzne, hair ; cdrdine, hinge ; confine, confine ; 
 
 disordine, disorder ; glutine, glue ; pettine, comb ; 
 
 lastone, stick ; mattone, brick ; paragone, comparison; 
 
 are masculine. 
 
 The nouns, . 
 
 dere, air ; cdrcere,* prison ; c^nere,* ashes j 
 
 tirbore, tree ; fdlgore, thunderbolt ; fronted forehead ; 
 
 fonte, fountain ; /tmc,t rope; trdve, beam; 
 
 grtgge,* flock; cons&rte, consort; ertde, heir; 
 
 partnte, parent; 
 are of the common gender. 
 
 Names of animate beings, ending in c, are generally of the 
 common gender ; as, 
 
 Uprv, hare; strpv, snake. 
 
 The noun dimdne, when it means i to-morrow', is masculine ; 
 but when it signifies 'the beginning of the day', is feminine. 
 
 The noun mdrgine, when it means 'scar', is feminine ; but 
 when it means * margin,' ' extremity', is of the common gender. 
 
 The nouns /ante, and^ne, when they mean 'foot-soldier'; and 
 aim' or ' design', are masculine : but when they mean ' ser- 
 vant'; and ' end' or ' termination', are of the common gender. 
 
 The nouns oste, and ordine, when they mean ' host', an * inn- 
 keeper' ; and ' order', a ' command', are masculine : but when 
 they mean ' host,' an ' army'; and ' order', ' arrangement', or a 
 4 religious order', they are of the common gender. 
 
 * Corcere, ccnere, and gregge, in the plural number, cdrceH, * prisons', c6neri r 
 4 ashes' j and grcggi, * flocks', are feminine only, 
 t Frtnte and /tine, in prose, are feminine only. 
 
 4* 
 
ANALOGY. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Ennio di quel cantd RTJVIDO 
 CARME. (?etr. s. 153.) 
 
 Qucsta era molto bine affossa- 
 ta, e con BUONA SIEPE. (Sacch. 
 n. 91.) 
 
 Vidigente, alia riva <f UN gran 
 FIUMK. (Dant. Inf. 3.) 
 
 Un rlv!) d'dcqua chiarissima, 
 il qudle d'una montagnetta di- 
 scendera in UNA VALLE oMBu6- 
 s&. (Bocc. g. 1. n. I.) 
 
 Serrdtalacella COLLA CHIAVE, 
 dirittamente sen ando alia came- 
 ra dclloMate. (Bocc. g. 1. n.4.) 
 
 Fawns dal cielo una colomba 
 bidncac'jme neve, e, messo il bec- 
 
 CO BEL C ALICE, tllttO 'I SOingUt 
 
 si bevre. (Pass. 136.) 
 
 Ed evvi, oltre a questo. TAERE 
 assdipiii TKESCO. (Bocc. Intr.) 
 
 Ma poicche Z'AERE a divenir 
 incomincio.(Bocc. Araet.) 
 
 Ed entrdta nel CHIARO FONTZ 
 tutta si rnise nellc deque. (Bocc. 
 Amet.) 
 
 Dintorno ALL A F^NTE sipose- 
 roasedere. (Bocc. g. 6. n. 1.) 
 
 JWm credo UN SERPE, che ha 'I 
 cor cotdnto accrbo. (Dittam. 2. 
 12.) 
 
 Te non colomba, ma VELENOSA 
 SERPE conosctndo, con tutta la 
 forza di perseguire intendo. 
 (Bocc. g. 8. n. 7.) 
 
 Lo stolto semprc procrdstina 
 di far btne, dicendo : ' Dimdn 
 farb bsne'; e sempre Z'UN DI- 
 
 MANK diman^Z'A 
 
 (Aibertan. c. 61.) 
 
 Ennius sang of him a rude 
 song. 
 
 This was well f rtified by a 
 ditch, and by a good hedge. 
 
 I beheld a throng upon the 
 shore of a great stream. 
 
 A. stream of very clear water, 
 which descended from a little 
 hill into a shady valley. 
 
 Having locked the cell with 
 the key, he went directly to the 
 chamber of the Abbot. 
 
 There descended from Hea- 
 von a dove as white as snow, 
 and, having put its b *ak into the 
 chalice, it drank all the blood. 
 
 And there, besides this, the 
 air is a great deal more fresh. 
 
 But when the air began to 
 be good. 
 
 And having entered into the 
 clear fountain, she plunged 
 herself into the water. 
 
 They sat around the fountain. 
 
 I do not beliewe a serpent, 
 who has a heart so cruel. 
 
 Knowing thee to be not a 
 dove, but a venomous serpent, 
 I intend to persecute thee with 
 all my power. 
 
 The fool always delays to 
 do good, saying: 'To-morrow 
 1 will do good.' And one to- 
 morrow ever requires another. 
 
SUBSTANTIVES. 
 
 Qudndofui desto inndnzi LA 
 DIMANE, Pidnger senlii fra 'I 
 sonno i miei figliuoli. (Dant. 
 inf. 33.) 
 
 Si ricordo lei doverc avere 
 tfsA MARGINE, a gmsa d'una 
 7ocetta, sopra I'orecchia sini- 
 stra, (Bocc. g. 5. n. 5.) 
 
 Lofondo suo, ed dmbo le pen- 
 did Fdtte eron pietra, e i MAR- 
 TINI d'alldto. (Dant. Inf. 14.) 
 
 Posciachfr ella sifu condotta 
 ALLA MARGINE delCdlta ripa, 
 nuotdndo scampdmmo . (Firenz. 
 Aein.) 
 
 Manddndo cinquccento FANTI 
 UHIBELLINI del contddo di Fi- 
 renze. (Giov. Vill. 1. 7. c. 109.) 
 
 DoLcm6so piu che dltro Se ' 
 fdtto FANTE. (Bocc. Tes. 4. 
 
 83.; 
 
 Jiveva Giacomino in cdsa UNA 
 
 FANTE ATTEMPATA. (BOCC. g. 
 
 5. n. 5.) 
 
 Un uomo a LIETO FfNE per- 
 venuto. (Bocc. g. 5. n. 4.) 
 
 Questa fu LA FINE delV im- 
 pzratore Arrigo. (Giov. Vill. 
 1.7. c. 22.) 
 
 Volendo IL stio OSTE esser 
 pagato, primieramente GLI die- 
 de r una. (Bocc. g. 1. n. 7.) 
 
 Cosi avvenne nel nostro bene 
 
 AVVENTURATO OSTE. (GlOV. 
 
 Vill. I. 11. c. 53.) 
 
 CongregdtfjtA BELLA, egrdn- 
 de, K PODEROSA 6sTE. (Bocc. g. 
 2, n. 7.) 
 
 Dal Signdr Jlnnibale Ruccelldi, 
 potrd ella intendere L' ORDINE 
 deUe cose. (Casa, lett. 8.) 
 
 Se con sdna msnte sard RI- 
 
 eOARDATO L,' ORDINE delle COSC. 
 
 (Boec. g. 9. n. 9.) 
 
 When I awoke before the 
 morning, I heard my sons sob 
 in their slumber. 
 
 He recollected that she ought 
 to have a scar, like a cross, 
 above the left ear. 
 
 Its bed and sloping sides, and 
 both the margins, were petri- 
 fied. 
 
 After that she came to the 
 margin of the high bank, we 
 escaped by swimming. 
 
 Sending five hundred Ghi- 
 belline foot-soldiers from the 
 territory of Florence. 
 
 Wretched more than any 
 other, thou art made a servant. 
 
 Giacomino had in his bouse 
 an elderly servant maid. 
 
 A man who had come to a 
 happy end. 
 
 This was the end of the Em- 
 peror Henry. 
 
 His host desiring to be paid, 
 he first gave him that one. 
 
 Thus he fell in with our for-j 
 lunate army. 
 
 He collected a fine, large and 
 powerful army. 
 
 From Mr Annibal Ruccellai, 
 you may hear the order which 
 I have given to him. 
 
 If we should consider with 
 sound mind the order of things. 
 
44 ANALOGY. 
 
 PRESA L' ORDINE tra loro, il Having made the arrange - 
 
 trattdto fu riveldto al Duca. raent among themselves, they 
 
 Stor. Pistol, p. 171.) revealed the subject to the 
 
 duke. 
 
 Jo ho avuta sempre special I have always had a special 
 
 divozione AL VOSTRO ORDINE. devotion to your order. 
 (Bocc. g. 1.. n. I.) 
 
 Al tempo del ditto Papa Jnno- In the times of the said Pope 
 
 cenzo si comincio LA SANTA OR- Innocent, was instituted the or 
 
 DINE d& Frdti Minori. (Giov. der of the Minor Friars. 
 Vill. 1. 1. c. 24.) 
 
 Nouns ending in i are some of them masculine, and 
 some feminine ; as, 
 
 eclissi, m., eclipse ; crisi, f., crisis ; 
 
 brindisi, m., toast ; f&i, f., thesis. 
 
 Nouns of dignity, as, 
 
 ball, bailiff; pdri, peer; guardasigitti, keeper 
 
 '[of the seal: 
 
 The noun di, * day', and its compounds ; as, 
 buond\ t good day ; mezzodl, noon ; oggidi, now-a-days: 
 
 Nouns formed of a verb and a noun in the plural ; as, 
 lavaceci, dunce ; graffiasdnti, hypocrite ; guardaportoni, porter - r 
 leccapidtti, glutton ; cacciadidvoli, exorcist; cavadenti, tooth draw- 
 
 [er: 
 
 And the following, 
 
 alealt, alkali ; ambdssi, ambs-aces ; zdnni, merry-andrew ; 
 abbicci f alphabet ; barbagidnni, owl ; soprattieni, delay ; 
 
 cremisl, crimson ; diesi, diesis [in music] ; appigionasi, notice of 
 
 [a house to let : 
 are masculine. 
 
 The noun Gencsi, * Genesis', is of the common gender. 
 
SUBSTANTIVES. 
 
 45 
 
 Nouns ending in u are some of them masculine, and 
 some feminine; as, 
 
 me'u, m. dill ; 
 
 ragUy m. ragout-, 
 soprappib, m. overplus ; 
 
 gru,f. crane ; 
 tribhf. tribe ; 
 gioventuf. youth. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Signijicdva gran sccco nslla 
 vegnentc state, e poi nella oppo- 
 sizione di CUJELLO ECCLISSI 
 gran sovcrchio d> deque. (Giov. 
 Viil. 1. 11. c. 2.) 
 
 Qucl, eke i medici nostri ckid- 
 man CRISI. (Bern. Rim. 1. 16.) 
 
 Cingonlo intorno i suoi FA MO- 
 ST PARI. (Ariost. Far. 38. 79.) 
 
 H medico si f ice loro incontro 
 dicendo, che Iddio dtsse~l6ro IL 
 UONDL (Bocc. g. 8. n. 9.) 
 
 IL maggior CACCIADIAVOH 
 non & in Toscdna. (Lor. Med. 
 Arid. 2. 5.) 
 
 Ma tdli cose hdnno piu DEL 
 Ayyi,esondison6ste. (Demetr. 
 Seng. 67.) 
 
 Comincertmo dal principio 
 
 DEL GENESI. (GlOV. Vill. 1. 11. 
 
 c.2) 
 
 Lascidsse loro nn per cento 
 di quanta kdnno, e guadagnds- 
 sonsi quell uno col sudore del 
 ro/io, come comdnda LA GENESI. 
 (Dav. Seism, p. 38.) 
 
 IL MEU i CALDO cd c erba, il 
 cui s6me e detto con simlglidnie 
 nome. (Cr. 6. 78. 1.) 
 
 lo ho giudicdto, che egli sia 
 oramdi bene con qwilche freno 
 riientre i cdldi impeti BELLA 
 stf A GiovKNTilL. (Firenz. Asin. 
 178.) 
 
 It announced a great drought 
 in the following summer,and af- 
 terward at the opposition of that 
 eclipse, a great abundance of 
 water. 
 
 That, which our physicians 
 call crisis. 
 
 His famous peers surround 
 him. 
 
 The physician went to meet 
 them, wishing God would give 
 them a good day. 
 
 A greater exorcist is not to 
 be found in Tuscany, 
 
 But such things more become 
 a merry-andrew, and are in- 
 decent. 
 
 We will commence from the 
 beginning of Genesis. 
 
 That he should leave them 
 one per centum of what they 
 have, and that they should earn 
 that one by the sweat of their 
 brow, as is commanded in Gen- 
 esis. 
 
 The dill is warm, and it is an 
 herb whose seed is called by 
 the same name. 
 
 I have thought, that it is 
 now proper to moderate, with 
 some restraint, the warm im- 
 pulses of his youth. 
 
46 ANALOGY. 
 
 Adjectives, verbs, adverbs, prepositions, when used 
 substantively, are of the masculine gender ; as, 
 
 lello, beautiful : seguitdre, to continue ; 
 
 dove, where; quando, when; 
 
 come, how; perche, why; 
 
 sl> yes ; no, no. 
 
 The names of the days of the week, except Dome- 
 nica, Sunday'; and those of the months, are masculine ; 
 as, 
 
 Mercoledl, Wednesday; Sabato, Saturday; 
 
 Sprite, April; dgosto, August. 
 
 Names of trees are masculine ; as, 
 olmo, elm-tree; mirto, myrtle-tree ; 
 
 no'ce, walnut-tree;, limone, lemon-tree. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 Queraa, oak-tree ; vite, vine ; ginestra, broom ; 
 
 are feminine. 
 
 Names of fruits are feminine* ; as, 
 
 pera, pear; ardncia, orange; 
 
 susina, plum; ciriegia, cherry. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 Pdmo, apple ; fico, fig ; d&ttero, date ; 
 
 cedro, citron \ pino, pine ; limdne, lemon, 
 
 are masculine. 
 
 Some masculine nouns, when used to denote a femi- 
 nine object, take a different termination; as, 
 
 amico, friend, m. ; arnica, friend, f. ; 
 
 cugino, cousin, in. ; cugina, cousin, f. ; 
 
 genitore, father; genitrice, mother; - 
 
 autore, author ; autrice, authoress ; 
 
 poita, poet ; poetessa poetess ; 
 
 sacerdote, priest ; sacerdotessa. priestess ; 
 
 duca, duke ; duchessa, duchess ; 
 
 principe, prince; principessa, princess; 
 
 re, king ; regina, queen. 
 
 * These are generally formed from the names of trees, changing o into a; as, 
 mdxdorZo, * almond-tree' ; widndorM, * an almond' igtlso, 'mulberry-tree'; 
 ' a mulberry.' 
 
SUBSTANTIVES. 
 
 47 
 
 Some names of animate beings denote the feminine 
 by a different word ; as, 
 
 uomo, man; donna, woman; 
 
 tdro, bull; vacca, cow; 
 
 pdrco, pig; troia, sow; 
 
 Some in the feminine take a different termination ; as. 
 
 cane, dog ; 
 /eone, lion; 
 
 cag-na, bitch ; 
 leondssa, lioness ; 
 
 And others are either masculine or feminine, and 
 designate both genders ; as, 
 
 corvo, m., crow ; 
 
 panUra* , panther. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Le donne, gudndo arrivano a 
 quardnta dnni perdono IL BELLO 
 dilla gioventudinc. (Libr. 
 Adorn. Donn.) 
 
 La regina a Filomina, voltdta, 
 le impose IL SEGUITARE. (Bocc. 
 g. 3. n. 3.) 
 
 IL D6vE w ho gia pensdto. 
 (Bocc. g. 2.) 
 
 Sarei continto di sapere IL 
 GIUANDO. (Petr. s. 306.) 
 
 DEL C^ME non ti cdglia IL 
 PERCHE ti diro. (Bocc. Filoc.) 
 
 Son certa DEL si. (Bocc. g. 
 7. n. 7.) 
 
 Ciascuno rispdsc DEL NO. 
 (Bocc. g. 1. n. 7.) 
 
 Jlncora JL MERCOLEDI, e 7 
 Venerdlj e IL SABATO. (Maes- 
 truzz. 1. 33.) 
 
 L*AMOR6 SOMIRTO Crescepiu 
 volontitr net cespo intiro. ( Alam. 
 Colt. 1. 16.) 
 
 LA vfTE appo ?i6i t assai co~ 
 noscitita. (Cr. 4. 1. 1.) 
 
 When women arrive at forty 
 years they lose the beauty of 
 youth. 
 
 The queen turning to Filo- 
 mena, ordered her to continue. 
 
 I have already thought of the 
 where. 
 
 I should be happy to know 
 the when. 
 
 Do not trouble yourself about 
 the how, I will tell you the 
 why. 
 
 I am certain of the .affirma- 
 tive. 
 
 Every one answered in the 
 negative. 
 
 Even Wednesday, and Fri- 
 day, and Saturday. 
 
 - The amorous myrtle grow* 
 better in the whole bush. 
 
 The Vine among us is very 
 well known. 
 
46 
 
 ANALOGY. 
 
 Ti sir bo gclse, mdndorle, 
 e SUSINE. (Bocc. Amet. 15.) 
 
 Tson qutl dellefruUc del mat 
 6rto Chequiriprendo DATTERO 
 per FICO. (Dant. Inf. 33.) 
 
 E di qu&sto consiglio fu au- 
 trice una ch'tbbe n6me Polisso. 
 (But. Com. Dant.) 
 
 D6xNA e nume generico dilla 
 FEMMIXA dilla spezie umdna. 
 (Crusca.) 
 
 Mi sovvihied'avcrfdtlo man- 
 gidre al LE6NK della cdrnc d'u- 
 naLEONEssA. (Red. Ins. 71 .) 
 
 Infra molte bidnche colombe 
 aggiugne.piu di bellezza UN NE- 
 no c6RVo, chc un cdndido cAgno. 
 (Bocc. g,9n. 10.) 
 
 I keep for thee mulberries, al 
 monds, and plums. 
 
 He am I, who fruit from 
 evil garden brought ; And here 
 my fig is with a date repaid. 
 
 And the author of this coun- 
 sel was one who was named 
 Polisso. 
 
 Woman is the generic name 
 of the female of the human 
 species. 
 
 I recollect to have made the 
 lion eat of the flesh of the li- 
 oness. 
 
 Amongst many white doves 
 a black crow adds more beauty 
 than a white swan. 
 
 NUMBER, Or FORMATION OF THE PLURAL, 
 
 Masculine nouns, ending in 0, a, e, form the plural by 
 changing 0, a, e, into ?*; as, 
 
 /i&ro, book; Zi&ri, books; 
 
 cavdllo, horse ; cavdlli, horses ; 
 
 ^O&A, poet; potti, poets; 
 
 climA, climate ; c/imi, climates ; 
 
 JWTE, flower ; fior^ flowers ; 
 
 leprE, hare ; lepn, hares. 
 
 Feminine nouns, ending in 0, e, form the plural by 
 changing 0, e, into i; as, 
 
 mdno, hand; mdm, hands; 
 
 drtE, art; drti, arts; 
 
 fontE, fountain ; . font i, fountains. 
 
 Feminine nouns ending in a, form the plural by chang- 
 ing a into e; r s, 
 
 house ; 
 , table ; 
 
 COSE, houses ; 
 E, tables; 
 
SUBSTANTIVES. 49 
 
 Nouns ending in t, u, or in ie, or with an accented 
 vowel, do not change their termination in the plural ; as, 
 
 estasi) extacy ; tstasi, extacies ; 
 
 gru, crane; g ru , cranes; 
 
 sptciE, sort; sptciE, sorts; 
 
 rE,* king; rE , kings; 
 
 cittA* city; cittA, cities; 
 
 virtu* virtue ; virth, virtues. 
 
 The following nouns in the plural have an irregular 
 formation : 
 
 Dw, 
 
 udmo, 
 
 bue, 
 
 God ; 
 man ; 
 ox ; 
 
 D6i, t Gods ; 
 uomini, men ; 
 budi^ oxen. 
 
 EXAMPLE: 
 
 ALCUNI CAVALLI si diputano 
 a vettura, dltri a cdrr&.(Cr. 6. 9.) 
 
 E f dimsa la terra in SETTE 
 CLIMI. (But. Com. Dant.) 
 
 Ed io 9 l provdi sul primo 
 uprir DE' Fi6ri. (Petr. c. 38.) 
 
 COLLE mie MANI avrei gid 
 posto in terra Queste meinbra 
 noiosc. (Petr. s. 29.) 
 
 Qualcuna rf' este ndtti Chiu- 
 da omdi quisle DIJE r6NTi di 
 pitinto. (Petr. c. 46.) 
 
 E diquello un mezzo bicchier 
 per uomo desse ALLE prime MEN- 
 SB. (Bocc. g. 6. n. 2.) 
 
 E questo e essere in ESTASI. 
 (But. Com. Dant.) 
 
 LE GRU hdnno un loro re, e 
 tutte lo servono, (Fior.Vt. c. 19.) 
 
 De* qudli animdli sono quasi 
 infinite LE SPECIE. (Gell. Circ. 
 2. 29.) 
 
 Some horses are destined for 
 burden, others to the carriage. 
 
 The earth is divided into 
 seven climates. 
 
 And I experienced it at the 
 first blooming of the flo\yers. 
 
 I should have already with 
 my own hands laid in the 
 ground thes wearisome limbs. 
 
 Let one of these nights 
 close these two fountains of 
 tears. 
 
 And of that [wine] he should 
 give half a tumbler to each man 
 at the first course. 
 
 And this is to be in extacy. 
 
 The cranesJiave a king, and 
 all serve him. 
 
 Of which animals, the spe- 
 cies are almost infinite. 
 
 * Such nouns are generally contracted ; as re from rjge, cittd from cittAde, 
 virtu from virtude ; and when :h.'V are used entire, that is, without the suppres- 
 sion of any syllable rege, cittdde, virtude, they change their termination, and 
 make in the plural rcgi> 'kings'; cittddi, ; cities'^ mrtudi^ 'virtues' according 
 to the general rule. 
 
 5 
 
50 ANALOGY. 
 
 LE CITTA son nemiche, amici Cities are unfriendly, the 
 
 i boschi A' miiipcnsieri. (Fetr. woods are friendly to my 
 c. 37J thoughts. 
 
 Tutti iREGidel mondo sono All the kings in the world 
 
 mino a vostro sposo. (Fr. Guitt. are inferior to your husband. 
 lett. 10.; 
 
 Tosto GLI DEI d' abisso in Soon the go ds of the Abyss 
 
 vdrie tdrme Concorron dogni in different bands, rush from 
 
 intorno alV dlte porte. (Tass. all sides to the lofty gates. 
 Ger. 3. 5.) 
 
 Veggendo MOI/TI UOMINI nil- Seeing many men frequent 
 
 La cdrte del padre usdre. (Bocc. the court of her father. 
 g. 4. n. 1.) 
 
 Perche addiv6nne, che i su6i. Wherefore it happened, that 
 
 gli dsini, le pecore, per li cdmpi the oxen, the asses, the goats, 
 
 .96 n'anddvano. (Bocc. Introd.) went astray through the fields. 
 
 Many nouns in o in the plural end in i, and more 
 elegantly in a ; as, 
 
 audio, ring; \ Qr rings ; 
 
 labbm. 
 
 Some have only the termination in a in the plural ; as, 
 
 miglio, mile ; ml^/iA, miles ; 
 
 staio, bushel; stdiA, bushels; 
 
 udvo, egg; UOVA, eggs. 
 
 [For a list of Words in 0, making the plural in i or a, see APPENDIX, D.] 
 
 Riso, l laughter' ; membto, ' limb', or t member of the human 
 body', form their plural in i and a ; risi, risa, * laughter' ; w^m- 
 bri t membra, l limbs' : but riso, ' rice' ; mtmbro, ' member of a 
 corporation or political body', form their plural in i only ; risi, 
 
 * rice' ; mtmbri, ' members'. 
 
 Gtsto, ( exploit' ; frutto, l the fruit of a tree' ; Ugno, i fire- 
 wood,' form their plural in i and a ; gtsti, gtsta, i exploits' ; 
 frutti,frutta, ' fruits' ; Itgni, Ugna, { wood' : but gtsto, i gesture' ; 
 frutto, * production of the earth', or ' income' ; ttgno, l the hard 
 substance of a tree', ' a ship,' or ' a coach', form their plural in i 
 only ; g&ti, ' gestures ' ; frutti, ' produce' or ' income ' ; Ugni, 
 
 * billets of wood', * ships', or * coaches'. 
 
 
SUBSTANTIVES. 
 
 51 
 
 Osso, i bone', has a treble termination in the plural, making 
 dssi, osse, ossa, ' bones'. 
 
 When these nouns take the termination in a in the 
 plural, they become feminine, and receive the article It 
 before them ; as, le anilla, ' the rings' ; le miglia, * the 
 miles ' ; lefrutta, * the fruits' ; le osse or le ossa, ' the 
 bones.' 
 
 Finally there are, in Italian, as well as in all other languages, 
 some nouns which have only the singular number; as, all 
 proper names,* names of metals, and the words prole, ' genera- 
 tion' ; progenie, ' progeny' ; stirpe, ' race' ; mane, * morning' ; 
 miele, ' honey,' &c. ; and others which have only the plural ; as, 
 Idri, * household gods'; annali, 'annals'; calzoni, 'breeches'; 
 vdnni, l wings' ; forbid, l scissars' ; nozze, ' nuptials' ; esequie, 
 1 exequies' ; reni, ' the reins' ; molle or molli, ' tongs' ; spezie or 
 spfaj, ' spices' ; froge, l the skin over the nostrils of a horse' ; 
 &c. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Fdttosi prestdre a Madonna 
 Giacomma un DE* suoi ANELLI, 
 guivi per sua moglie sposd la 
 ddi.iina. (Bocc. g. 5. n. 4.) 
 
 Lalunga gutrra Che DEL- 
 L'ANELLA fe' si dlte spoglie. 
 (Dant. Inf. 28.) 
 
 E'lla fcce portdre i due cap- 
 poni Ihsi, e M6LTE u6vA 
 fresche. (Bocc. g. 7. n. 1.) 
 
 Lascidrono anddr Calandrino 
 con LE maggior EISA del mondo. 
 (Bocc. g. 8. n. 3.) 
 
 Lo spirto DALLE lille MEM- 
 BRA scidlto. (Petr. s. 259.) 
 
 Tdnto piu celebrd_ Tiberio 
 SIJE GESTA in sendto. (Dav. 
 Tac. ann. 1. 2.) 
 
 Viveano quasi come lestie di 
 FBT^TTA, e di ghidnde. (Giov. 
 Vill. 1. 1. c. 23.) 
 
 Having asked Madonna Gia- 
 comina to lend him one of her 
 rings, there took Catharine to 
 wife. 
 
 That long war, in which was 
 made the rich booty of the 
 rings. 
 
 She caused to be brought 
 the two boiled capons, and 
 many fresh eggs. 
 
 They let Calandrino go with 
 the greatest laughter in the 
 world. 
 
 The spirit freed from the 
 beautiful limbs. 
 
 Tiberius celebrated so much 
 the more his exploits in the se- 
 nate. 
 
 They lived like beasts on 
 fruit and mast . 
 
 * When proper names of persons^ however, are taken as common, they are 
 used also in the plural ; as, t Chiabrera, i Filicaia, i JKedi, i Jtfenzini, i Ouidi, i 
 Frugdni, e tanti dltri sublimi e pr igiatkssimi irtgtgni, the Chiabreras, the Fili- 
 caias, the Redis, the Menzinis, the Guidis, the Frugonis, and so many other sub- 
 lime and most worthy geniuses.' 
 
52 ANALOGY, 
 
 ttfuoco cresce per LE I.E-INA, Fire is increased by wood, 
 
 e qudnte piii ce ne metti mag- and the more you put on, the 
 
 giore si fa. (Fr. Giord. 146.) larger it becomes. 
 
 Fu r,on solamtnte vcciso, ma He was not only killed, but 
 
 fino ALL' OSSA divordto. (JBocc. devoured even to the bones, 
 g. 2. n. 9.) 
 
 LA STKPE non fa le singu- Family does not make ex- 
 
 Idri persone nlbili, ma le singu- traordinary persons noble, but 
 
 Idri persone fdnno nobile LA extraordinary persons render 
 
 BTIRPE. (Dant. Conv.) their family noble. 
 
 Cristo voile per sva prcsenza Christ wished to honor with 
 
 onordr LE NOZZE di Cdna Ga- his presence the nuptials of 
 
 lil-ia,) equimfdre ilpTinio mird- Cana of Galilee, and there to 
 
 colo. (Cavalc. Espos. simb. 1.) work the first miracle. 
 
 Independently of the change of termination, there are 
 in Italian many nouns, which in the plural undergo a 
 certain change of orthography. 
 
 Thus all nouns ending in ca, ga, in order to preserve 
 in the plural before the vowels i, e, the same sound 
 which c, g, have in the singular before the vowel #, take 
 an h, in the plural after the consonant c, g ; as, 
 
 monarcA, monarch; mcmdrcm, monarchs ; 
 
 cotflGA, colleague; collegni, colleagues; 
 
 monacA 9 nun ; mo'nacHe, nuns ; 
 
 rod ; vergHe, rods* 
 
 Nouns ending in co, go, consisting of two syllables, 
 also take an h in the plural after c, g ; as, 
 
 g-two'co, sport; giuocm, sports: 
 
 place ; luogui, places. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 Greco, { Greek' ; porcoj 'hog' ; in the plural make, Greet, c Greeks'; 
 porcij ' hogs.' Mdgo, - magician', in the plural makes either i 
 or magi, ' magicians'. 
 
SUBSTANTIVES. 
 
 53 
 
 Nouns in co, go, of more than two syllables, if co, go, 
 are preceded by a consonant, take an h in the plural ; 
 and if they are preceded by a vowel they are written 
 without h ; as, 
 
 bifdlco, laborer ; bifolcni, laborers ; 
 
 albtroo, inn ; albtrgui, inns ; 
 
 mtdico, physician; mtdici, physicians; 
 
 tedloGo, theologian ; te&oQi, theologians. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 The following nouns, 
 
 cdrico, charge ; 
 
 fondaco, warehouse ; 
 pdrroco, parson ; 
 stdmaco, stomach ; 
 mdnico, handle ; 
 traffico, trading ; 
 
 in the plural make, 
 
 cdricm, charges ; 
 fdndacui, warehouses ; 
 pdrrociii, parsons ; 
 stomacni, stomachs ; 
 mdnicui, handles ; 
 tradings ; 
 
 dbbligo, obligation ; 
 ripiegOj expedient ; 
 catdlogo, catalogue ; 
 impiego, employment ; 
 gastigo, punishment; 
 intrigo, intrigue ; 
 
 obbligui, obligations j 
 ripidgm, expedients ; 
 catdlogni, catalogues; 
 impiegui, employments ; 
 gastigRi t punishments ; 
 intrigui, intrigues. 
 
 Several other nouns in co,go, are indifferently written 
 with or without the h ; as, 
 
 mendzco, beggar ; 
 equivoco, equivoque ; 
 didloGO, dialogue ; 
 apologue ; 
 
 [ For a list of Nouns ending in co, go, and making the plural in ci, t, or eftt, 
 
 ghi, see APPEKVIX D. (2.)} 
 
 5* 
 
54 ANALOGY. 
 
 Nouns ending in cm, gia, and ccia, ggia, unaccented, 
 form their plural by changing a into e, and suppressing 
 the i ; as, 
 
 IdnciA, lance ; ZdncE, lances ; 
 
 frdnGiA, fringe ; frdnGE, fringes ; 
 
 arrow; jWccE, arrows; 
 
 A, strand f ^idcGE, strands. 
 
 Nouns ending in do, gio, and ccio, gg*io, unaccented, 
 form their plural by changing o into i, and suppressing 
 the i that they have in the singular; or what is the same, 
 by suppressing only the o ; as, 
 
 fcdcro, kiss ; 6dci, kisses ; 
 
 /r^Gio, honor; freGi, honors ; 
 
 Jdccio, snare 5 Zacci, snares ; 
 
 "raGGio, ray ; rdcei, rays. 
 
 But if cia, gia, and ccia, ggia, or cio, ^zo and ccio, ggio are ac- 
 cented, the i is never suppressed ; as, 
 
 c/eoiA, elegy; elegie, elegies j 
 
 farmaciA, pharmacy ; fairnacie, pharmacies; 
 
 reading-desk ; leggii, reading-desks. 
 
 Nouns ending in chio, ghio, glio, form the plural by 
 suppressing the o ; as, 
 
 OCCHIO, eye ; OCCHI, eyes ; 
 
 mwg-GHio, bellowing ; mwg-GHi, bellowings ; 
 
 5coGi,io, rock ; ^CO'GLI, rocks. 
 
 Nouns ending in dio* 6io, also form their plural by 
 suppressing the o ; as, 
 
 fornAio, baker ; fornAi, bakers; 
 
 Jttatbio, spinning-wheel; JXatoi, spinning-wheels, 
 
 All other nouns ending in io, if io is unaccented, 
 
 * Most nouns in dio end alsoindro; as, libraioor librA.Ro,for> dioor/ornARO; 
 when they take this last termination, in the plural they make librari, ' booksel- 
 lers' ;/ordri, * bakers' ; according to the general rule. 
 
 
SUBSTANTIVES, 
 
 55 
 
 form their plural by changing io into j ; but if io is ac- 
 cented, they form it by changing the o of io into t; as, 
 
 studj, studies, 
 
 benefits, benefits ; 
 
 rii, rivulets ; 
 
 desii, desires. 
 
 studio, study; 
 benefizio,* benefit ; 
 rio, rivulet ; 
 
 desio, desire ; 
 
 The noun moglie, ' wife', forms the plural by suppres- 
 sing the e ; mogli, ' wives'. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 La contessa Mateldafondo un 
 ndbile monasterio di MONACHE. 
 (Giov. Vill. 1. 4. c. 20.) 
 
 II dl che costei ndcque eran le 
 stelle In Lu6aHi alii ed eietti. 
 (Petr. c. 44.) 
 
 Tra brutti PORCI piu degni di 
 gdlle, Che d' dltro cibofdtto in 
 umdn uso. (Dant. Purg. 14.) 
 
 / sdvj si partirono, e torndrsi 
 a* I6ro ALBERGHI. (Nov. ant. 6.) 
 
 Si su6l ricdrrere n& mdli 
 pericolosi a' MEDICI eccellenti. 
 (Casa. Jett. 41).) 
 
 Ponendo loro grandissimi 
 CARICHI di montte. (Stor. Fist. 
 170.) 
 
 Le risptiste xive, le novel* e vi 
 erano, e gli APQLOGT. (Pros. 
 Fior. 6.) 
 
 Spdrti costdro per la piccolo, 
 cdsa, pdrte ri 1 andd nella c6rte, e 
 poste giii lor LANCE, avvenne 
 che uno di loro gittb la sua 
 LANCIA net fieno. (Bocc. g. 5. 
 n. 30 
 
 The countess Matilda found- 
 ed a noble convent of nuns, 
 
 On the day when this lady 
 was born, the stars were in 
 high and chosen places. 
 
 'Midst brute swine Worth- 
 ier of acorns than of other food 
 Created for man's use. 
 
 The sages went away, and 
 returned to their dwellings. 
 
 In dangerous diseases we 
 are accustomed to have re- 
 course to excellent physicians. 
 
 Laying upon them 
 great imposts of money. 
 
 very 
 
 There were witty answers, 
 stories, and fables. 
 
 These having spread them- 
 selves through the small house, 
 and having laid down their lan- 
 ces, it happened that one of 
 them threw his lance into the 
 hay. 
 
 * Many nouns in zio, end also in do or gio ; as, benefizio or benefkc i o, sertAzio 
 or*er73iaioj but, however they may end, constantly form the plural in j ; aa, 
 benefizj or benejicj, l benefits' 5 servizj or sermgj, * services'. 
 
56 
 
 ANALOGY. 
 
 Gia nella sommita de piu 
 alii monti apparivano i RAGGI 
 delta surge nte luce. (Bocc. g. 
 8. proem.) 
 
 Le giocdnde ode, e le lascive 
 ELEGIE, a tutte le dltre studiose 
 drti antipongono. (Dav. Tac. 
 Perd. Eloq.) 
 
 10 soleva esseruno degli OCCHI 
 del capo vdstro. (Pecor. g. 4. 
 
 Mi parea per tutto, dove che 
 io mi volgessi, sentire MTJGGHI, 
 urlif e strida di diversi c fero- 
 cissimi animdli. (Lab. 29.) 
 
 Che giova dunque, per che tut- 
 ta spdlme La mia barchetta, 
 
 poicht infra gli sc6GLi E' 
 
 ritenuta. (Petr. c. 39.) 
 
 Donne, n6i sidmo gidvani 
 roRNAi. Dell' drte nostra buon 
 maestri assdi. (Cant. Cam. 
 34.) 
 
 11 qudle, n& liberdli STTJDJ 
 ammaestrdto, sommamente i xa- 
 lordsi udmini onordva. (Bocc. 
 Vil. Dant.) 
 
 Jlppresso costdro le sirdcchie 
 e le M6GLI loro, tutte di brimo 
 vestite. nennero. (Bocc. g. 3. 
 n.7.) 
 
 Already on the summit of 
 the highest mountains appeared 
 the rays of the rising light. 
 
 They prefer the merry odes 
 and the lascivious elegies to all 
 the other studious arts. 
 
 I used to be one of the eyes 
 of your head, 
 
 I seemed to hear, wherever 
 I turned, the bellowings, the 
 bowlings, and the cries of dif- 
 ferent and very ferocious ani- 
 mals. 
 
 What does it avail to spread 
 all the sails of my bark, if she 
 is impeded among the rocks. 
 
 Ladies, we are young bakers 
 very well skilled in our art. 
 
 Who, being well skilled in 
 liberal pursuits, greatly honored 
 learned men. 
 
 After them came their sisters 
 and their wives, all dressed in 
 mourning. 
 
 VARIATION OF NOUNS. 
 
 Italian nouns are varied by means of certain preposi- 
 tions placed before them ; viz. DI, { of, in the genitive, 
 or relation of possession ; A, * to', in the dative, or rela- 
 tion of attribution ; DA, c from or by', in the ablative, 
 or relation of derivation. The nominative, or subjective, 
 and the accusative, or objective, are distinguished by the 
 place they occupy in the sentence. 
 
 Proper nouns are generally varied with the prepositions 
 only : common nouns with the prepositions and the ar- 
 
SUBSTANTIVES. 57 
 
 tides il, lo, la ; i or li, gli, le, the'. When common 
 nouns are used in an indefinite sense, they are varied 
 with the prepositions and the pronouns uno, una, ' a 'or 
 an' ; alcani, alcune, ' some'. 
 
 Variation of a Proper Noun. 
 
 Subjective (N.)* ..... Chare, CaBsar : 
 
 C Possession (G.) di Ces ire, of Caesar; 
 
 Relation of 2 Attribution (D.) a Cesare, to Caesar; 
 
 ( Derivation (Ab.) da Chare, from or by Caesar; 
 
 Objective (Ac.) ...... Cisare, Caesar. 
 
 Before a noun beginning with a vowel, the preposi- 
 tion di drops the i and takes an apostrophe in its stead ; 
 and the preposition a takes a d after it ; as, 
 
 D> AHtdnio, > f Anth . AD Antonio, > Anthonv 
 
 (for DI Antonio), $ y ' (for A Ant6mo), $ 
 
 Variation of Common Nouns. 
 
 Masculine Noun, beginning with a Consonant, varied 
 with the article iL 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 Subjective (N.) il Lihro, the book ; i or li libri, the books ; 
 
 - C Poss. (G.) del libro, of the book ; dei libri, of the books ; 
 
 Relat. -? Atlr. (D.) al Libro, to the book ; di libri, to the books ; 
 
 ( Der. (Ab.) dal libro, from the dai libri, from the 
 
 [book ; [books ; 
 
 Objective (Ac.) il libro, the book ; i libri, the books. 
 
 * To facilitate i he Variation of these and other nouns, to those who are ac- 
 customed to the Latin Declension, we have added to each relation the Initial of 
 the name of the corresponding case in Latin; thus (N.) stands for nominative ; (G.) 
 for genitive ; &c. 
 
58 ANALOGY. 
 
 Masculine Noun, beginning with a Consonant, varied 
 with the article lo. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 Subjective (N.) lo spicchio, the mirror ; gli specchi, the mirrors ; 
 
 f Poss. (G.) dello specchio, of degli spscchi, of the 
 
 [the mirror ; [mirrors ; 
 
 Relat J Attr. (D.) dllo specchio, to dgli specchi, to the 
 
 [the mirror ; [mirrors ; 
 
 I Der. (Ab.) ddllo specchio, from ddgli spicchi, from the 
 
 L [the mirror; [mirrors; 
 
 Objective (Ac.) lo specchio, the mirror; gli specchi, the mirrors. 
 
 Masculine Noun, beginning with a Vowel. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 Subjective (N.) V amico, the friend ; gli ani i, the friends ; 
 
 f Poss. (G.) delV amici, of the degli amici, of the 
 
 [friend ; [friends ; 
 
 Relat J ^ ttr ' (^') a ^' am i c i to t ^ ie ^* amid, to the 
 
 ' j [friend ; [friends; . 
 
 I Der. (Ab.) daW amico, from ddgli amid, from the 
 l_ [the friend ; [friends ; 
 
 Objective (Ac.) V amico the friend ; gli amwij the friends. 
 
 Feminine Noun, beginning with a Consonant. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 Subjective (N.) la cdsa, the house ; le case, the houses ; 
 
 f Poss. (G.y-deUa cdsa, of the > din ^ f ^ houge 
 
 [house ; $ 
 Relat J Attr ' (-)- cdsa, to the _ ^^^ to the houses . 
 
 J Der. (Ab.) ddlla cdsa, from dalle case, from the 
 
 ^ [the house ; [houses ; 
 
 Objective (Ac.) la cdsa, the house ; le case, the houses. 
 
SUBSTANTIVES. 59 
 
 Feminine Noun, beginning with a Vowel. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 Subjective (N.) V dnina, the soul ; le dnime, the souls ; 
 Poss. (G.)-deH' dnima, of the 
 
 e ^ ^ e ^^ of the soujs . 
 Relat.- Attr * ( D -)~H' anima, to the ' > ^ dj|i to the goulg . 
 
 [SOUl; } 
 
 Der. (Ab.)---daW dnima, from <ZWe dnime, from the 
 
 [the soul ; [souls ; 
 
 Objective (Ac.) V dnima, the soul ; le dnimc, the souls. 
 
 Variation of Common Nouns used in an Indefinite 
 Sense. 
 
 Masculine Noun. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 Subjective (N.) un uccello, a bird ; alcuni uccelli, some birds ; 
 
 fPoss. (G.) d> un uccilioj of a d* alcuni uccdlli, of some 
 1 [bird; [birds; 
 
 Relat j Attr.(D.) adunuccello,toa. ad alcuni uccelli, to some 
 
 
 [bird ; [birds ; 
 
 Der. (Ab.) da un uccello, da alcuni ucc&li, from some 
 
 | J-CA. \f\.\J . J^U,l* *// U.H/Ct't/t/j U.I* tH/OM./C/t' W^Ubl/CC'j * V** OWIliO 
 
 [from a bird ; birds ; 
 
 Objective (Ac.) un uccello, a bird ; alcuni uccelli, some birds. 
 
 Feminine Noun. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 Subjective (N.) una mela, an apple ; alcune mele, some apples ; 
 
 fPoss. (G.) d) una mela, of an d j alcune mele, of some 
 
 [apple ; [apples j 
 
 P , , J Attr. (D.) ad una mela, to ad alcune mele } to some 
 
 [an apple ; [apples ; 
 
 ', Der. (Ab.) daunavnela, da alcune mele , from some 
 
 ^ [from an apple ; [apples ; 
 
 Objective (Ac.) unamela^ an apple ; alcune mele, some apples. 
 
60 ANALOGY. 
 
 EXERCISE II. 
 
 [The learner will supply the article according to the Gender of the nouns, 
 and will form their Plural and vary them, according to the preceding rules.] 
 
 The study of (the) belles lettres. The country of the 
 studio bella letter a. paese 
 
 Amazons. The fable of the frogs. The virtues of the 
 Jlmazone. fdvola rdna. virtu 
 
 Romans. The hatred of the enemies. The poets of (the) 
 Romdno. odio nemico. poeta 
 
 Latium. 
 Isizio. 
 
 He gave praise to the valiant,* consolation to the infirm,* 
 Dava lode valente, conforto infer mo, 
 
 example to all.* He has bought the horse of the prince for 
 essmpio tutto. Ha comprdto cavdlLo principe per 
 
 a small sum of money. (The) fortune is sometimes 
 piccolo, somma da.na.ro . fortuna e gudlche volta 
 
 who deserve 
 che meritano 
 
 a better fate. He proposed the model of the future 
 miglitir sdrte. Propose modillo avvenire 2 
 
 government, avoiding all the things, which had I 
 
 governo 1 , scanzdndo tutte cosa, che erano \ 
 
 lately displeased. The prince took the public 
 frescamente spiaciute. principe tdlse 4 publici G 
 
 books I from the hands I of the I questors, and 
 tibro^ di mdno 1 \ di 2 \ questdre 3 , e 
 
 I entrusted I them I to the praetors. 
 diede cura 2 \ ne l \ pretore. 
 
 The cries and (the) bowlings of the ravages spread (the) 
 strido e urlo salvdgio spdrsero 
 
 - terror among the Europeans. Thousands of people, who 
 terrore Europto. Migliaio ginte, che 
 
 were present at the speech of Regulus to the Romans, 
 erano pres nti a orazicne Regolo Romano, 
 
 * To the valiant^ to the infirm, tt all, here used in the plural number. 
 
 unjust towards (some) unhappy creatures, 
 ingiusta verso alciini infelice. 
 
SUBSTANTIVES. 
 
 61 
 
 wept ; and he departed to return to Carthage, as he 
 pidnsero ; ed egli partissi per ritorndre Cartdgine, come 
 
 had promised, amidst the acclamations of the multitude. 
 Gva promesso, fra acclamazione moltitudine. 
 
 Thetis, wishing to render Achilles invulnerable, dipped him 
 Tetide, bramdndo di rtndere Jlchille i-nvulnerdbile, immerse? lo l 
 
 in the river Styx, holding him by one I of his 
 
 heels. 
 
 fiiime Siige, tenendo^^lo per uno \ delle calcdgno. 
 
 They conducted him to the spot, and by threats and 
 condussercfi Lol sito, e eon mindccia t 
 
 promises they disposed him to ascend the walls. 
 promessa disposero^ lol a salirc miiro. 
 
 He led into | the field twelve hundreds of buffaloes, nine 
 Mend a \ cdmpo dodici centindio di lufala, nove 
 
 hundred cows, many calves, and over a thousand hogs. 
 cento vdcca, assdi 2 vitelld 1 , e oltre a mille porco. 
 
 She had I her I cheeks all burnt by the many tears she 
 - Jlveva I le \ gudncia, tutte arse per molte Idgrima 
 
 had shed. Weeping, she I fell 
 
 -- . Piangendo, J si Lascio cadert 2 
 
 and humbly asked | his pardon 
 
 perdondnzcfi 
 
 auu. nuifiuiy aoivcu. / ma 
 
 ed umilmtntc domando^ \ gli* 
 
 feet, 
 piede 4 . 
 
 at I his 
 a'3 '\glii 
 
 for I (the) past 
 dil \ 3 passdti* 
 
 injuries. 
 oltrdggio. 3 
 
 book, 
 
 in ON city of Lycia, a 
 in citta, di Libia, 
 
 There was found 
 Si trovo 
 
 which had brass leaves, - (the) leaves of brass. 
 che avca : foglio rdme. 
 
 Calandrino waited all the following evening with his 
 
 Calandrmo stette tidta 
 
 contrivances to 
 artificio per 
 
 catch 
 piglidre 
 
 vegnente 2 
 
 bat. 
 vispistrdllo. 
 
 serai 
 
 con snot- 
 
ANALOGY. 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 ADJECTIVE NOUNS COMPARATIVES AND 
 SUPERLATIVES. 
 
 ITALIAN Adjectives end with one of the vowels, o, a, e. 
 
 GENDER. 
 
 Adjectives ending in 0, are masculine, and become 
 feminine by changing o into a ; as, 
 
 virtuoso, ) Yimous \ uomo virtuoso, m., virtuous man ; 
 virtues A, $ \fanciullA virtuo'sA, f., virtuous 
 
 [young woman : 
 
 sinctro, ? sincere, ^ amo'rE sinctro, m., sincere love ; 
 
 sincerA, \ blameless ; \ naturA sinctrA, f., blameless na- 
 
 [ture. 
 
 Adjectives ending in e, are of the common gender ; as,J 
 
 f modo cortisE, m,, courteous 
 , m. & f-.courteous ; j &n ^ A ^^ ^ cofeouf ' 
 \ [soul: ; 
 
 L consigUo fedelEj m., faithful 
 
 , m. & f., faithful ; [counsel;^ 
 
 ( guidAfedelE, f., faithful guide. 
 
 FORMATION OF THE PLURAL. 
 
 Adjectives ending in o, e, form the plural by chang- J 
 ing o, e, into i ; as, 
 
 $piactrE ameno, s., delightful pleasure ;,j 
 {ludghi amtni, p., delightful places : 
 
 . . Cg-en^E prudtntE, s., prudent people ; 
 
 /' c P ru< ^ en ^ 5 i uomini prudtnti, p. m., prudent men ;^ 
 ^ li > ) ( vtrgim prudenti, p. f., prudent virgins. 
 
ADJECTIVES. 63 
 
 The adjective bello, ' handsome', ' beautiful', before nouns be- 
 ginning with s followed by another consonant, z, or a vowel, makes 
 bcgli in the plural ; as, 
 
 leG-Li spdcchi, beautiful mirrors ; 
 
 Sec LI zaffiri, beautiful sapphires ; 
 
 team occhi, beautiful eyes. 
 
 Adjectives ending in a, form the plural by changing a 
 into e ; as, 
 
 preziosA, ) . $ g-iw A prezwsA, s., precious jewel; 
 
 preziosE, $ p ' J pi^^rE preziosE, p., precious stones. 
 
 Adjectives ending in co, ^*o; ca, ga ; do, gio ; cia, 
 gia ; cftto, g"Aio, glio ; and io, in the singular, follow, 
 in the plural, the rules already given for the formation 
 of the plural of Substantives. 
 
 AGREEMENT OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 Italian adjectives agree with their substantives in gen- 
 der and number ; as, 
 
 uomo dotto ed ammaestralo, a learned and well-instructed 
 
 man ; 
 
 bwhiA. e virtuosA glnfe* good and virtuous people ; 
 
 valordsi udmini, btllE donnE, brave men,, fair women, pretty 
 leggiddn gifoam, youths. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Grdnde intendimento e quello Great is the understanding 
 
 (Cun UOMO VIRTUOSO, come fu of a virtuous man, as he was. 
 costui. (Fr. Sacch. n. 75.) 
 
 La Sibilla e bellzssima ' FAN- The Sibyl is a very beauti- 
 
 ciULLA,ine alletata, e VIRTUO- ful young woman, well bred, 
 
 SA. (Lasc.Sibill.il.) and virtuous. 
 
64 
 
 ANALOGY. 
 
 Sia manifesto, la dcmenza, c 
 
 SINCERO AM6RE, che U dcttO re 
 
 portava al nostro comune. (Giov. 
 Till. 1. 1. c. 2.) 
 
 Questa NATURA al stio fai- 
 tdre uriita, Qualfu crcdta, fu 
 SINCERA e buona. (Dant. Par/7) 
 
 O ANIMA CORTESE MantOTa- 
 
 na. (Dant . Inf. 2.) 
 
 In dubbio stdto si FEDEL 
 COXSIGLIO. (Petr. c. 49.) 
 
 Prese a persuader Tibirio, 
 ch' e' rivesse fuori di PKma t in 
 LU6GHI AME5I. (Day. Tac. am. 
 4. 95.) 
 
 Laonde, secJndo ch r w posso 
 far congkiettura, chc e quillu 
 eke i PRUDENTI UOMINI chidma- 
 no indovindre, tu mostri d'essere 
 innamordta agramente. (Firenz. 
 Asin. 150.) 
 
 Vtrgine saggia, e del Id 
 numero una Delte be&te VER- 
 GINI PRUDENTI. (Petr. c. 49.) 
 
 In me movindo de> BEULI 
 occnri rdi Crin d' amor pen- 
 sflcri. (Petr. s. 9.) 
 
 E trovo in quella cdssa moltc 
 FREZi6sE PIETHE, e legate, & 
 sciolte. (Bocc. g. 2 n. 4.) 
 
 Rice HI dttlc prede de' Fio- 
 rcntini. (Giov. V ill. 1. 9. e. 320.) 
 
 4 
 
 Molti cherici, eziandio da LUN- 
 GHE parti, cominciarono a ve- 
 nire al servo di Dw. (Vit. S. 
 Giov. Gualb. 295.) 
 
 D'un medcsmo peccdto al 
 '/nando LERCI. (Dant. Inf. 15.) 
 
 Qite/Ze drche d'argcnto. Chc 
 stinieresti pieno di tesoro, 
 Sporte son piene di vesciche 
 r.uor. (Tass. Am. 1.2.) 
 
 Let the clemency, and sin- 
 cere love, which the said king 
 bore to our community, be 
 manifest. 
 
 This nature with its Maker 
 thus conjoined, Created first 
 was blameless, and good. 
 
 O courteous Mantuan soul. 
 
 In a doubtful condition so 
 faithful counsel. 
 
 He undertook to persuade 
 Tiberius, that he should live in 
 some delightful place, ont of 
 Rome. 
 
 Therefore, as far as I can 
 conjecture, which is what pru- 
 dentmen call to guess, you ap- 
 pear to be greatly in love. 
 
 Wise Virgin, and one of the 
 beautiful number of the blessec 
 prudent virgins. 
 
 Turning the .beams of her 
 beautiful eyes to me, creates 
 thoughts of love. 
 
 And she found in that chest 
 many precious stones, some 
 set, and some not set. 
 
 Enriched with the booty of 
 the Florentines. 
 
 Many clergymen, even from 
 distant parts, began to come to 
 see the servant of God. 
 
 By one same sin polluted in 
 the world. 
 
 Those chests of silver, which 
 you would imagine to be filled, 
 with treasures, are baskets fill- 
 ed with empty bladders. 
 
COMPARATIVES. 
 
 Cost per li gran SAVJ si con- 
 jessa, Chela Femce muore, e 
 poi rindsce. (Dant. Inf. 24.) 
 
 UOMO DOTTO delle scritture, 
 
 ED 'AMMAESTRATO dtlld fide dt 
 
 Crzsto. (Add. Cavalc. Att. 
 Apost. 113.) 
 
 Mia sorella e quest a Ndta di 
 
 BU6NA E VIRT06SA GENTE. 
 
 (Arios. Fur. 18. 82.) 
 
 Qudnti VALOROSI UOMINI, 
 qudnte BELLE D6NNE, qudnti 
 
 LEGGIADRJ GI(SvANI, la SGTOj V6- 
 
 ' gnente, nelV dltro mondo cendro- 
 no con li loro passdti ! (Bocc. 
 
 Intr.) 
 
 So mighty sages tell, that the 
 Phoenix dies, and springs forth- 
 with renascent. 
 
 A man learned in Holy 
 Writ, and well instructed in 
 the Christian faith. 
 
 This is my sister, born of 
 good and virtuous people. 
 
 How many brave men, how 
 many fair women, how many 
 pretty youths, the coming 
 evening, supped in the other 
 world with their departed 
 friends ! 
 
 COMPARATIVE 
 
 Comparatives are generally 
 the adjective or positive the adverb pia, ' 
 press a relation of superiority : meno, ' less', to express 
 a relation of inferiority : and si or cost; * so', tanto, ' so', 
 c so much' ; quanto, i as', ; as much' ; quanto piu, * the 
 more' ; quanto meno, ' the less' ; altrettdnto, 'as', f as 
 much' ; to express a relation of equality, between the 
 objects compared $ as, 
 
 - litto, happy : 
 
 PIU LIETO, 
 
 more happy ; 
 
 (dtera, proud ; 
 
 MENO ALTERA, 
 
 less proud ; 
 
 bella, beautiful ; 
 
 si or co si BELLA, 
 
 so beautiful ; 
 
 sdno, healthy ; 
 
 TANTO 8 A NO, 
 
 so healthy; 
 
 famoso, famous : 
 
 QUANTO FAM6SO 3 
 
 as famous; 
 
 altitroj proud ; 
 
 QUANTO PIU ^.LTIERO, 
 
 the more proud ; 
 
 nocente, guilty ; 
 
 QUANTO MENO NocENTE, the less guilty ; 
 
 contenti, pleased ; < 
 
 TKIVTI. ( 
 
 as much pleased. 
 
 Comparatives of superiority and inferiority generally 
 require before the second of the objects compared, or, 
 what is the same, the second term of comparison, the 
 
<tf ANALOGY. 
 
 preposition di, c than', if it be a substantive noun or pro- 
 noun, or a numeral adjective ; and the conjunction die. 
 4 than', if it be any other adjective, a verb, or an ad- 
 verb ;* as, 
 
 FIU lieto DI ME, more happy than I ; 
 
 MEN bello DEL viso. less beautiful than the face ; 
 
 FIU DI M!LLE scogli. more than a thousand rocks ; 
 
 PIU f6rte C:;E SAVIO, more strong than wise ; 
 
 non MENO odorifere CHE > not less odoriferous than are the 
 siENoZe sptzie, $ drugs ; 
 
 PIU Mlla CHE MAI, more handsome than , ever. 
 
 Sometimes these comparatives are formed by the adverbs meglio. 
 ' better', and peggio. c worse' : and then they always require di t or 
 che> before the second term of comparison ; according to the gen- 
 eral rule ;* as. 
 
 MEGLTO D 5 ALTiir. diccimilia better than another ten thou- 
 
 dobbre, sand pistoles ; 
 
 r tina dellc PE'jeio maritdtc one of the worst-married that 
 
 CHE sf A, there is. 
 
 Very often the second term of comparison is a verb understood 
 or $ pronoun and a verb, and then this second term of comparison 
 always requires che before it; as. 
 
 scorgevasi PIU pom-pa CHE , there was perceived more 
 [scorgvasi] Icalta, pomp than sincerity. 
 
 PIU bclla CHE [('] iina lamia. more beautiful than a lamia. 
 
 scappo PEGGIO CHE [scappa] he ned worse (more violent- 
 
 un toro. ly) than a bull : 
 
 inttndi MEGLIO CH' io non thou understandest better 
 
 RAGioNOj than I can speak ; 
 
 ' This, however, is not without exception, as we not seldom meet, in the 
 Classics, with expressions similar to these ; 
 
 U'na donna PIU bella assdi CHE 'L A woman^a great deal more bean- 
 
 SOLB. (Petr. c. 24.) tiful than the sun. 
 
 Reputiamci w6No care CHE TUTTE Do we-consider ourselves less dear 
 
 Z' nitre .* (Bocc. Introd.) than all the others ? 
 
 To so MGLIO CHE SLTRO iidmofar 1 know how to do what I wish, be' - 
 
 td cfte io t>6glio. (Bocc. g. 9. n. 5.) ter than any other man. 
 
COMPARATIVES. 
 
 67 
 
 Comparatives of equality always require before the 
 second term of comparison another adverb correlative to 
 that by which they are formed. Thus, 
 
 si or cosij so, as ; ^ ( come, as ; 
 
 tdnto, so, so much ; 
 
 j qudnto, as ; 
 
 qudnto, as, as much ; 
 quanta piu, the more ; 
 
 g 1 tdnto, 
 i tdnto piii, or 
 : g* \ tdnto mtno, 
 
 as ; 
 the more, or 
 the less ; 
 
 qudnto mtno, the le"ss ; 
 
 ** I tdnto mtno, or 
 j tdnto piu, 
 
 the less, or 
 the more ; 
 
 ultrettanto, as, asmuch;^ 
 
 ( qudnto. or come, as : 
 
 "si lieta COME lella, 
 TANTO sdno QUANTO zo, 
 
 quANT.o [6gli] era fanwso, 
 TANTO [ella] ra bellissima, 
 
 QtlANTO PIU dltitro, TANTO 
 
 MENO amdto, 
 
 3IEN0 noctntt) TANTO 
 
 ALTRETTANTO COntentl, COME 
 
 se fosse venvto il Diica, 
 
 as glad as fair ; 
 
 as healthy or strong as I ; 
 
 as much as he was famous, 
 she was beautiful ; 
 
 the more proud, the less be- 
 loved ; 
 
 the less guilty, the more im- 
 patient; 
 
 as pleased as if the Duke 
 had come. 
 
 Sometimes come, l as ', and qudle, l as ', 'like. 9 , are used to form 
 these comparatives, and then they require the correlatives cosi, 
 ' thus ', and tale, ( such ' ; as. 
 
 COME il f red do mi offese, cosi il 
 cdldo mi fa noia, * 
 
 <U?ALE [colpo] adino dd in pa- 
 rtte, TAL [colpo] riceve. 
 
 as the cold injured me, thus 
 the heat annoys me ; 
 
 the ass who kicks against the 
 wall, receives such a blow as 
 he gives. 
 
 Tdnto, qudnto, altrettdnto^ and qudle, and their correlatives, 
 sometimes are made to agree with the nouns with which they are 
 
 ^i.-.c-d j as. 
 
 as many times as ; 
 
 as many as they see, so many 
 they desire ; , 
 
 fifty Paternosters, and as many 
 Ave-Marias ; 
 
 paid in such money, as the 
 provisions had been sold for. 
 
 qudntr., 
 
 qudntE NE veggono. tdntx 
 desiderano, 
 
 cinqudnta Paterndstri, e altret- 
 td - 
 
 pagdto di tdlv moneti, qudh le 
 derrdtr. erano state rcndt'ite, 
 
- 
 
 'ANALOGY. 
 
 Often the adverbs cosl and tdnto are suppressed, and 
 the comparative is formed by the use of their correlatives 
 only ; as, 
 
 T cosi] bianco COME we're, white as snow ; 
 
 fattenderb [tanto] QUANT o 
 
 I will wait for thee as long 
 as thou wishest. 
 
 To increase or diminish the force of comparatives, 
 we make use of the adverbs troppo, molto or assai, or 
 via or vie, < far', ' much,' or ' a great deal', before piu, 
 and meno ; as, troppo, motto, or assai piu via or vie 
 ply,, ' much,' or < a great deal more ' ; troppo, molto, or 
 assai meno via or vie meno, ' much ' or ' a great deal 
 less ' ; as, 
 
 TROPPO PIU "bella, a great deal more beautiful ; 
 
 MOLTO PIU core, much more dear : 
 
 ASSAI PIU lucente* far more bright ; 
 
 V!E PIU forte, a great deal more strong ; 
 
 MOLTO MEN fo'rti. much less able. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Iiu rividi piu Leila c MENO 
 ALTERA. (Petr.s.261.) 
 
 JVessun tisse giammdi riu 
 BI ME LIETO. (Petr. c. 7.) 
 
 Dek ! senonhdi BEI^ viso it 
 cor .MEN BELLOW (Ariost: Fur. 
 c. 4.) 
 
 E sperdndo venire in miglwr 
 porio Poi mi condussc in PIII 
 DIMII.LE scdGM. (Petr. c. 21.) 
 
 Sapvidte che guellecdmere s6- 
 
 nO NON MENOr ADORIFERE, CHE 
 S1ENO i LOSSOU rft'?LE S FEZ IE 
 
 delta vostra lottega. (Bocc. g. 
 8. n. 9.) 
 
 Saro PIU CITE MAI BELLA. 
 (Petr.) 
 
 Quello, che vdlse MEGLIO 
 
 IV ALTRE DIECIMILIA DOBBRE. 
 
 (Bocc. g. 10. n. 9.) 
 
 
 I saw her again, more beau- 
 tiful and legs proud. 
 
 None ever lived more happy 
 than I. 
 
 Ah ! if thou hast not aj 
 heart less beautiful than thy 
 face. 
 
 And hoping to come to a bet-; 
 ter harbor, he conducted me up- 
 on more than a thousand rocks. 
 
 Know that those chambers, 
 are not less odoriferous, than 
 are the boxes of drugs jn yourj 
 shop. 
 
 1 shall be more beautiful < 
 than ever. 
 
 That, which was more valu- 
 able than another ten thousand 
 pistoles. 
 
 
COMPARATIVES. 
 
 16 son pur TJNA DELLE PEG- 
 t;io MARITATE femine che sia 
 etl mondo. (Firenz. Lye. 4. 1.) 
 
 SCORGEVASI in questo parldre 
 di Tib6rio PIU POMPA CHE LE- 
 ALTA. (Dav. Ann. Tac.l. 1.) 
 
 E'lla e una giovane quaggiu 
 che e PIU BELLA CHE TJNA LA- 
 MIA. (Bocc/g. 9. n. 5.) 
 
 PEGGIO CHE UN TORO SCAFFO 
 dcAV altar e. (Dav. Storie.) 
 
 Se' sdvio'E 'NTENDI ME' CH'I' 
 NON RAGIONO. (Dant. Inf. 2.) 
 
 Vdltaver me si LIETA COME 
 BELLA. (Dant. Par. 2.) 
 
 Sew avessi co si BELL A COTTA 
 COME ELLA. (Nov. ant. 25.) 
 
 TANTO il fdccia Dw SANO 
 delle rtni GIUANTO io. (Bocc.) 
 
 CluANTO trd* cavalier i ERA 
 il Marchese FAMOSO, TANTO la 
 d6nna tra tutte V dltre ddnne del 
 mondo ERA BELLISSIMA. (Bocc. 
 g. l.n.5.) 
 
 TANTO ,PIU cieco son w di te 
 Q.U \NTOPiusdnoamante. (Guar. 
 Past. Fid. 3. 3.) 
 
 E'ssa TANTO PIU IMPAZIEN- 
 
 TjLmente sosteneva questa noia 
 
 duANTO MENO SI SCntlVd NOCEN- 
 
 TE. (Bocc. g. 7. n. 5.) 
 
 Delia vcnuta de* cavalieri, i 
 Fiorentinifurono ALTRETTANTO 
 
 CONTENTI, COME SE FOSSE VENU- 
 
 TO IL DTJCA inpersona. (Giov. 
 Till. 1. 10.) 
 
 Demetrio, ndstro amico, su6l 
 dire, che ALTRETTANTO gli e del- 
 le parole dellafdlle gentc, auAN- 
 TO d& sudni che fa il vento. (Sen. 
 fist.) 
 
 I am indeed one of the worst- 
 married women in the world. 
 
 There was perceived. in this 
 speech of Tiberius more pomp 
 than sincerity. 
 
 There is a young woma 
 here below more beautiful than 
 a lamia. 
 
 He fled from the altar worse 
 (more violently) than a bull. 
 
 Thou art wise, and under - 
 standest better than I can speak. 
 
 Turning to me with aspect 
 as glad as fair. 
 
 If I had so beautiful a dress 
 as she. 
 
 May God make him as strong 
 in his loins as I am. 
 
 As much as the Marquis was 
 famous among the knights, the 
 lady was beautiful among the 
 other ladies. 
 
 I am as much more blind than 
 thou as I am more enamoured. 
 
 She r bore this vexation so 
 much the more impatiently, 
 the less she felt guilty. 
 
 The Florentines were as 
 pleased with the arrival of the 
 knights, as if the Duke had 
 come in person. 
 
 Demetrius, our friend, used 
 to say, that it happens with th 
 words of foolish persons, as it 
 does with the sounds which the 
 wind makes. 
 
70 
 
 ANALOGY. 
 
 COME It troppo FREDDO 
 
 {aista notte MI OFFESE. cosi it 
 CALDOyi'incominciaa TAT gran- 
 dissima NOT A. (Bocc. g. 8. n. 7.) 
 
 Assai dee bastare a clascuno, 
 
 St 'ClUALE ASINO DA IN PARETE, 
 
 TAL RICEVE', senza volere dltre 
 ingiuridre. (Bocc. g. 8. n. 8.) 
 
 TANTE VOLTE Q.UANTE etla 
 nclla memdria mi vitne. (Bocc. 
 Filoe.) 
 
 .Yon s6no i giovani d 1 unci^ 
 eontenti, ma GIVANTE NE TEG- 
 
 C-OSa, TANTE NE DESIDERANO. 
 
 (Bocc. g. 8. n. 7-3 
 
 La mattina si vudle ariddre dl- 
 tachiesa, e quivi dire CINQCAN- 
 TA PATERNOSTRI E ALTRET- 
 
 TANTE AvEMARlE. (BoCC. g. 
 
 3.n. 4.) 
 
 Videsi DI TAL MONETA PAGA- 
 
 TO, aUALI LE DERRATE ERANO 
 ?TATE VBNDtJTE. (BoCC. g. 6. 
 
 ft. 5.) 
 
 Un vestimento di lino sottilis- 
 simoj e BIANCO COME NEVE. 
 (Bocc. g. 10. n. 6 ) 
 
 I'p volentieri T' ATTENDE- 
 RO auANTo vroi. (MaiF. Mer. 
 
 4.2.) 
 
 TROPPO Fill BELLA gli pdrVt ':. 
 
 che stimdto non avea. (Bocc. g. 
 
 7.n.7.) 
 
 MOLTO piu belle e _PIU CARE, 
 che ndinon sidmo.(Bdcc. Intr.) 
 
 Ond' ella Jessi LUCENTE 
 Flu ASSAI di qitel cfc dV era. 
 (Dant, Par. 5.) 
 
 Vedi Sansone VIE PIU FOR- 
 TE CHE SAVIO. (Petr.Tr. Amor.) 
 
 E'lle s6no MOLTO MEN FO:ITI 
 $he gli udmini a sostenere. 
 (Bocc. Introd.) 
 
 And as the excessive cold 
 last night injured me, thus the 
 heat begins now to annoy me 
 greatly. 
 
 It ought to be quite sufficient 
 for any one, that ' the ass who j 
 kicks against the wall, receives 
 such a blow, as he gives,' with- 
 out wishing to cause any far- 
 ther injury* 
 
 As many times as she comes 
 into my remembrance. 
 
 people are not satisfi- 
 ed with one; but as many they 
 see. so many they desire. 
 
 In the morning we must go 
 to church, and there say fifty 
 Paternosters and as many Ave- 
 Marias. 
 
 
 He saw himself paid in such 
 money as the provisions had 
 been sold for. 
 
 A garment of linen very fine, 
 and white as snow. 
 
 I will wait for thee willingly 
 as long as thou wishest. 
 
 She appeared to him a great 
 deal more beautiful than he 
 had imagined. 
 
 Much more fair and much 
 -more dear, than we are. 
 
 Whence she became far more 
 brisrht than she had been. 
 
 See Sampson a great deal 
 more strong than wise. 
 
 They are much less able 
 than men to bear. 
 
COMPARATIVES. 
 
 EXERCISE III. 
 
 He has no other more children than him. I know not, who. 
 ha 2 Mm 1 figliuolo lid. so% JY0n,l chi 
 
 could recover I my property I more properly than thoiL 
 possa riscuotere \ il jfwo convenevole te. 
 
 Peter, who had more desire of eating than of sleeping", 
 Pietro, che aviva vdglia mangidre dormire, 
 
 asked whether there was any thing for I supper. We 
 
 domanddva se vi fosse alcuna cosa 
 
 da cena. 
 
 are less powerful than the Greeks, ~they have more 
 sidmo podcrdso Greco, essi fydnno 
 
 bravery, wealth, and wisdom than we. Who I would fare I 
 prodezza, tesoro, c sapere n6i. Chi \ starebbe 
 
 better than I, if that money* were mine ? In this 
 me, se quel dendro fossero miei ? quests 
 
 season the nights are longer than the days. He began 
 stagione n6tte sono lungo dl: Comincw 
 
 to coast along (the) Barbary, robbing every- one who 
 a costeggidre Barberia, rubdndo ciascuno che 
 
 was less powerful I than he. I I do not 
 poteva meno lui. \ non 
 
 say, that it 
 dico, - che 6i 
 
 is not a sin, but God pardons | (of) I greater sins to 
 sia* non 1 peccdto, ma Iddio perddna \ (de } ) \ grdnde a 
 
 him who I repents himself. It appeared that she was 
 chi I pente 2 si. 1 ' Parea che ilia fosse 
 
 whiter than (the) snow. She afflicts more than she con- 
 bidnco . n&ve. rfffligge con- 
 
 soles (not). 
 sola 2 won 1 . 
 
 None in this wretched world was so miserable as I 
 Niuno questo sciagurdto mdndo fu miser o w 
 
 am. Am' I not as beautifulf as (is) the wife of 
 
 . sono* i03 JVbnl bello sm moglie 
 
 Richard ? Who commended him so much as thou ? 
 Riccidrdo ? Chi commendo 2 il l tu f 
 
 * That money, in the plural number. 
 t Beautiful, in the feminine gender. 
 
72 ANALOGY. 
 
 The master gave as much faith to the words of Bruno, as 
 maestro diede fide parola Bruno, 
 
 was 
 
 due I to any truth. I began 
 
 I si sarebbe convenuta \ qualunque veritd. comincidi 3 
 
 to flee as much as I could. I will defend her certainly 
 a 4 fuggire 5 l potei z . I'o difendero^ la? - per certo* 
 
 as much as I 
 
 shall be able. 
 potrd. 
 
 The more the heart is excited, the less can (the) 
 cuorfr commosso, pud 
 
 man express I his feeling. The more crazy he is 
 
 uomo esprimcre \ il siw 
 
 sentimenlo. pdzzo egli* e 1 - 
 
 than you, the more he is enamoured, As I it came into his 
 rat, e innamordto . \ gli venne in 
 
 mind, I so he did. I wish to go to hear (the) mass, 
 pensiero, \ fece. I'o voglio anddre mtgsa, 
 
 and recommend myself to God as much as I can. 
 e raccomdndar^mi Dio posso. 
 
 I His , 
 I La sua 
 
 joyful. 
 allegro. 
 
 presence J will make it appear to us i much more 
 presenza \ celo fard parere 
 
 For I (the) which object (the) fortune was | a great 
 A J qudle oggetto for tuna fu 2 
 
 deal more I propitious to him. This family is far greater^ 
 3 J propizia* gli- 1 Questo famiglia e grdndej^ 
 
 and a great deal more known. A great deal more pure 
 conosciuta. pura 
 
 than a white dove. 
 Candida Colombo, . 
 
 SUPERLATIVES. 
 
 Relative superlatives are formed by prefixing the 
 article* il, i or li, ' the', for the masculine, and la, h\ 
 ' the', for the feminine, to the comparative ; as, 
 
 piu forte, more strong ; IL piu forte, the most strong ; ; 
 piii vezzosi, more graceful ; i piii vezzosi, the most graceful ; 
 mtnofresca, less fresh ; A meno fresca, the least fresh ; 
 piu belle, more beautiful ; LE piu belk, the most beautiful. 
 
SUPERLATIVES. 73 
 
 When these superlatives are followed by a second 
 term of comparison, and this is a noun or a pronoun, 
 they require the prepositions di, i of or in '; fra or tra, 
 ' amongst' ; after them ; as, 
 
 il piii forte DI TUTTJ gli the strongest of all men ; 
 uomini, 
 
 i piu vezzdsi fanciulli the most graceful children in 
 DEL HONDO, the world ; 
 
 il piu perfttto TRA TANTI, the most perfect amongst so 
 
 many. 
 
 If the second term is a verb, the superlative requires 
 the conjunction che, c that' ; after it ; as, 
 
 ilpiufelice CHE'SI TROVI the happiest man that can be 
 sotto le stille, found under the stars ; 
 
 il piu sdvio uomo CHE the wisest man ever was in the 
 FOSSE al mondo, world. 
 
 When the object compared, or the first term of com- 
 parison, precedes the superlative, the article of this 
 superlative is generally suppressed ; as, 
 
 iljwre [il] piu bello, the most beautiful flower; 
 
 /' eta [la] menfr&sca, the least fresh age. 
 
 Absolute superlatives are formed by changing the last 
 vowel of the plural of adjectives, into issimo for the 
 masculine, and into issima for the feminine ; as, 
 
 Ulhy beautiful ; bellissmo, very beautiful ; 
 
 HCC&E, rich ; n'ccMssiMA, very rich ; 
 
 JMk, faithful; 
 
 A few adjectives take the termination errimo, for the 
 masculine, and errima, for the feminine, in their super- 
 lative ; as, 
 
 ceZe&re, celebrated; ccZcfeERRiMO, very celebrated; 
 
 salubre, wholesome ; sa/w&ERRiMA, very wholesome ; 
 
 dcre, severe ; CERRIMO, very severe. 
 
 7 
 
74 ANALOGY. 
 
 These superlatives may be also formed by prefixing 
 the adverbs troppo, molto, or assai, ' very 5 , to the posi- 
 tive ; as, 
 
 pitne, full ; TROPPO piene, very full ; 
 
 rtire, rare ; MOLTO rare, very rare ; 
 
 vicini, near; ASSAI vicim, very near: 
 
 Or by making use of such expressions as, sopra ogni 
 dltro, above every other one' ; stnza modo, * exceed- 
 ingly' ; senza fine, c extremely' ; fuor di misura, { be- 
 yond measure' ; &c. ; as, 
 
 SOPRA OGNI ALTRo/eJice, happy above every other one ; 
 
 grosso SENZA MODO, exceedingly coarse ; 
 
 bedta SENZA F!NE, extremely blessed ; 
 
 doUnte FUOR DI MISURA, grieved beyond measure. 
 
 Very often we form them by repeating the adjective ; 
 as, 
 
 vivo, lively ; vivo vivo, very lively ; 
 
 piccino, small ; piccino PICCINO, very small ; 
 
 lenta, slow ; Unta LENTA, very slow. 
 
 To increase the force of superlatives, we use the 
 adverbs, piu 9 ' more'; molto, ' much'; tanto, ' so much'; 
 before them ; and sometimes we raise the repeated 
 adjective to the superlative degree ;* as, 
 
 piti nobiHssimo, very noble ; 
 
 MOLTO bellissima, extremely beautiful ; 
 
 T^NTO bellissima, so very beautiful ; 
 
 grdndi GRANDISSIMI, exceedingly great. 
 
 There are a few adjectives, which beside their regular 
 
 * This form of expression ia found in the earlier classics, though very seldom 
 adopted by modern writers. 
 
SUPERLATIVES. 
 
 75 
 
 Italian form, retain in the comparative and superlative 
 degree the irregular form which they have in Latin ; as, 
 
 buono, \piuluono, 
 
 [good;}orMiGLi6RE, 
 cattivo, ]piucattivo, 
 
 bonissimo, 
 
 J cattivissimo, 
 \ or PESSIMO, 
 
 \ 
 
 beflt . 
 b< 
 
 worst . 
 W 
 
 to which may be added, 
 
 suPERi6RE, superior; 
 INFERIORE, inferior; 
 
 INFIMO, lowest. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Raccontano ancora, die tra 
 lorofu E'rcole, IL piu FORTE DI 
 TIJTTI GLI UOMINI. (Day. Tac. 
 Germ.) 
 
 E'ran i piu belli, e i PIU VEZ- 
 zosi FANCIIJLLI DEL HONDO. 
 (Bocc. g. 3.) 
 
 E di tdrtole ho preso una 
 nidmta LE PIU BELLE del 
 mondo. (Bocc. Amet. 15.) 
 
 TRA TANTI, e si Hi xolti IL 
 PIU PERFETTO. (Petr. B. 201.) 
 
 .They relate also, that among 
 them was Hercules, the strong- 
 est of all men. 
 
 *. They were the most beau- 
 tiful and the most graceful 
 children in the world. 
 
 And I have taken a nest-full 
 of turtles, the most beautiful in 
 the world. 
 
 The most perfect amongst so 
 many, and so beautiful coun- 
 tenances. 
 
 * From these two comparatives are derived the substantives maggidre and 
 mindre, which, used in the plural, are equivalent maggi6ri t to 'parents', * ances- 
 tors', 'superiors'; mmdri, to 'inferiors'; as, 
 
 a' su6i MAUGIUUI ; Disobedient to his parents. 
 
 Who were thy ancestors? 
 
 Therefore he neither treats with 
 due reverence his superiors, nor 
 with due mildness his inferiors. 
 
 Disubbidiente 
 (Pass.) 
 
 Chi fur li MAGGIOR tudi? (Dant. 
 Int. 10.) 
 
 E perd non rtndc debita reverenza alii 
 MAGOIORI, nd debita mansuetudine 
 alii MiN6m. (Bocc, Com. Dant. 
 Inf. 8.) 
 
ANALOGY. 
 
 Sard IL nu FELfcE, e con- 
 lento urfmOf CHE si TR6vi SOTTO 
 LE STELLE. (Macch. Com.) 
 
 E'gli era IL rm SAVIO, cd il 
 
 piu avveduto UOMO CHE AL 
 
 MONDO FOSSE. (Bocc. ff. 10. n. 
 10.) 
 
 IL FIORE PIU BELLO delV eta 
 nostra. (Lod. Mart. Rim.) 
 
 Quel fudco, ch'io pensdi, eke 
 fosse spento Da L'ETA. MEN 
 FRESCA. (Petr. c. 13.) 
 
 Assdi sostenne Per BELLIS- 
 SIMO amor quisti al suo tempo. 
 (Petr. s. 172.) 
 
 Fdtta fare una RICCHISSIMA 
 corona d'oro e dipietre prezidse, 
 per corondrsi re di Lombardia. 
 (Giov. Vill.l. 11. c. 76.) 
 
 Per la loro singoldr pietd 
 verso questa Santa St=de, e verso 
 tutti ndij suoi FEDELISSIMI ser- 
 vitdri. (Casa, lett. 23.) 
 
 Archita, ingegner CELEBER- 
 HIMO tra gli antichi. C^egn. 
 Crist, instr. 3. 2.) 
 
 H reobdrbaro si e loro medi- 
 cina SALUBERRIMA. (Tratt. 
 segr. cos. dorm.) 
 
 11 Duca di Ghelderi, ACCER- 
 RIMO nimico suo. (Guicc. Stor. 
 6-) 
 
 JVe dubito punto die non sien 
 di quelli, che dirdnno le c6se 
 dette esser TROPPO PIENE di m6t- 
 ti e di cidncc. (Bocc. Concl.) 
 
 Son MOLTO RARE a cercdre le 
 notizie. (Borgh. Tosc. 352.) 
 
 E un giorno, ASSAI VICINI 
 della camera^ sico medesmi, 
 comincidrono a ragiondre. 
 (Bocc. n. 1.) 
 
 I shall be the most happy 
 and the most contented manj 
 that can be found under the 
 stars. 
 
 He was the most wise, and 
 the most wary man ever was in 
 the world. 
 
 The most beautiful flower of 
 our age. 
 
 That fire, which I thought 
 would be extinguished by ma- 
 turer age. 
 
 This one suffered much in 
 his time for the love of a very 
 beautiful person. 
 
 Having caused to be made a 
 very rich crown of gold and of 
 precious stones, in order to 
 crown himself king of Lombar- 
 dy. 
 
 Through their singular piety 
 towards this Holy See, and to- 
 wards us all, its most faithful 
 servants. 
 
 Archytas, a very celebrated 
 architect amongst the ancients. 
 
 Rhubard is for them a very 
 wholesome medicine. 
 
 The Duke of Ghelderi, his 
 most severe enemy. 
 
 Nor doubt I at all, that there 
 are many, who will say, that 
 the things which 1 have said 
 are very full of words and idle 
 stories. 
 
 News is very rare to be 
 found. 
 
 And one day, very near that 
 room, they began to'talk among 
 themselves. 
 
SUPERLATIVES. 
 
 77 
 
 JSstimdva il prince SOFRA 
 
 OGNI ALTRO FELICE. (BoCC. g. 
 
 2. n. 7.) 
 
 Uomo mater idle, e G ROSSO 
 SENZA MODO. (Bocc. g. 3. n. 6.) 
 
 Fdmmi, die puoi, ddlla sua 
 grdzia ddgno, SENZA FINE o 
 BEATA. (Petr. c. 49.) 
 
 DOLENTE FUOR DI MISURA, 
 
 senza alciin indugio, cid che il 
 re domanddva f6ce. CBocc. g. 
 2. n. 7.) 
 
 E f bbe un cavdllo, e dd> suoi 
 fdnti ilfice, vivo vivo scorticdre. 
 (Nov. ant. 54.) 
 
 Basi, e divento PICCIN picciNO. 
 (Buonar. Fier. 2. 4.) 
 
 E'lla sen na notdndo LENTA 
 LENTA. (Dant. Inf. 17.) 
 
 Iddio ftce Vuomo PIU NOBI- 
 LISSIMO che gli dltri animdli. 
 (Crusca.) 
 
 Vide Vdmbra sua MOLTO BEL- 
 LISSIMA. (Nov. Ant. 43.) 
 
 Appr6sso i qudli Biancafiore 
 veniva TANTO BELLI SSIMA, che 
 dgni comparazidne ci surza 
 scdrsa. (Bocc. Filpc. 7.) 
 
 O'ndc prona nillo stdmaco 
 travdgli GRANDI GRANDissiMi. 
 (Red. cons. 1. 16.) 
 
 I'o non potrii tr attar c per la 
 salute d& midifratelli con MAG- 
 uioR affezion (Vdnimo, ne con 
 MIGL.IOR modo di qudllo, che ho 
 w trattdto. (Casa. lett. 21.) 
 
 Col PEGGIORE spirto di Ro- 
 mdgna Trovdi un tal di voi, 
 che per su' opra In dnima in 
 Cocito gid si bdgna. fDant. 
 Inf. 33.) 
 
 O'nde nel circhio M IN ORE in 
 eterno e consunto. (Dant. Inf. 
 
 11.) 
 
 He thought the prince happy 
 above every other one. 
 
 An exceedingly coarse and 
 uncouth man. 
 
 Make me, O you who can, 
 extremely blessed lady, worthy 
 of his favor. 
 
 Grieved beyond measure, 
 without any delay, he did that 
 which the king wished. 
 
 He had a horse, and caused 
 it to be flayed all alive by his 
 servants. 
 
 He came near dying, and 
 became very small. 
 
 It went on sailing very slow. 
 
 - God made man much more 
 noble than the other animals. 
 
 He saw his shadow extreme- 
 ly beautiful. 
 
 Next whom came Biancafiore 
 so very beautiful, that every 
 comparison would fail. 
 
 Wherefore he experiences 
 exceedingly great pains in his 
 stomach. 
 
 I could not act for the wel- 
 fare of my brothers with greater 
 interest, nor in a better manner 
 than that in which I have 
 acted. 
 
 In company with the worst 
 spirit of Romagna I found such 
 an one of you, as, for his do- 
 ings, even now in soul is plung- 
 ed in Cocytus. 
 
 Whence in the smaller circle 
 is eternally consumed. 
 
 7* 
 
78 
 
 ANALOGY. 
 
 n qudle ddlla pdrie SUPERI- 
 ORE alia INFERIORS da il suo 
 dolce, e consondntc suono. 
 (Declam. Quintil. C.) 
 
 Le vdlte pidne d 1 OTTIMI mni. 
 (Bocc. g. 3.) 
 
 ; Essindo stdto in mta un 
 PESSIMO uomo. (Bocc. n. 1.) 
 
 La MASSIMA attimtd dd' rdggi 
 soldri. (Sag. Nat. esp.) 
 
 Le MINIME alterazioni del 
 frtddo. (Sag. Nat. esp.) 
 
 Which from the superior to 
 the inferior part gives its sweet 
 and harmonious sound. 
 
 The cellars full of the best 
 wines. 
 
 Having been in his life a 
 very bad man. 
 
 The greatest power of the 
 solar rays. 
 
 The smallest alterations of 
 cold. 
 
 EXERCISE IV. 
 
 Let the strongest of all the Romans come forward. 
 4 5 tutto* 7 Romano* V&nga\ inndnzi* 
 
 The 
 
 rostra were immediately covered 
 rostro 3 Furond subitamtnte 5 copdrti* 
 
 with the 
 
 heads of the most illustrious patricians. 
 ttschio 2 illustre* patrizio. 1 
 
 a short space of time, I to be made 
 piccolo spdzio ttmpo \ fare 
 
 beautiful, and of the largest, and of the richest palaces, 
 bdllo grdnde ricco palagio. 
 
 He caused, in 
 
 Ftce, 
 
 one of the most 
 
 which - had ever been seen. 
 fossero" mdi 1 stdti veduti. 
 
 I esteem him the most 
 I'o rtputo 2 il 1 , 
 
 handsome, the most agreeable, the most graceful, and the 
 b'UlOf piactvole, leggiddro, 
 
 most wise knight that I can be found I in the kingdom of 
 sdvio cavalier e \ trovdr si possa 5 \ 1 redme* 3 
 
 Prance. He was the most amusing man in the world. 
 Frdncia* E'ra sollazzdvole uomo rnondo. 
 
 She is the most happy woman in the world. 
 E 1 1 3 felice* donncfi mondo. 
 
 The 
 
 planet most remote from the earth. 
 piantta remoto tirra. 
 
 The most furious 
 
SUPERLATIVES 
 
 mies with I their I tall persons, and long spears strik 
 ico 1 \ le loro \ alto persona, lungo dsta fediscon 
 
 enemies 
 nemico 
 
 I from a distance. 
 da disco sto. 
 
 79 
 strike 
 
 Having taken a very large stone, she I let it fall I into 
 Prtsa grdnde pidtra, | la lasqio cadtre \ in 
 
 the well. 
 pozzo. 
 
 The stone in reaching (in) the water made a 
 pietra giungindo dcqua flee 
 
 very great noise. 
 grande rumor e. 
 
 of very fine linen. 
 sottile 2 lino. 1 
 
 They were dressed 
 E'rano vestiti 
 
 in 
 
 di 
 
 a garment 
 vestimdnto 
 
 She was a very beautiful woman, 
 E'ra ddnna, 
 
 wise, and very virtuous. He is a very austere man. A 
 
 sdvio, ondsto. E'gli e acre 2 uomo.l 
 
 very celebrated poet. They would commit themselves 
 
 celebre poeta. E'lle vorrebbero 2 metter* si 1 
 
 quite alive 
 
 to the flames. I 
 nel fudco. \ 
 
 You are exceedingly good. 
 Siete buono. 
 
 I will be the best husband in the world. He was 
 
 I'o sard marito mondo. E'gli era 
 
 ie worst man, that I perhaps ever was born. 1 Be sure* 
 
 uomo, I forse mdi nascesse. Siate certo, 
 
 lat I have a greater desire 
 ic w ho% 3 vdglia^ 
 
 of it I 
 nel 
 
 than you. 
 
 voi. 
 
 The 
 
 2 
 
 ery great confidence which he has with us I makes him say 
 3 confidenza* che$ ha$ con 7 noi s \ Gliel fa dire 1 
 
 fa dire 1 
 
 We have drunk I of the I best wine. He 
 ~- Abbidmo bevuto \ d' un \ vino. 
 
 the smallest fault. The highest 
 j colpa. 
 
 in | a dark cloud. 
 oscuro* nebbia. 1 
 
 does not pardon him 
 JVon gli perdona 
 
 arts were wrapt 
 
 drte erano avvdlte \ d' 
 
80 ANALOGY. 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 AUGMENTATIVES AND DIMINUTIVES. 
 
 AUGMENTATIVE^. 
 
 THERE are three kinds of augmentatives ; those that 
 express bigness or grandeur ; those that express vigor 
 or beauty ; and those that express contempt. 
 
 To express bigness or grandeur, we change the last 
 vowel of nouns, if masculine, into one, ozzo, and, ii 
 feminine, into one, ozza; as, 
 
 cappello, hat ; cappettb&B, large hat ;* 
 
 foresA, country girl ; /oresozzA, fine country girl ; 
 
 btllo, handsome ; bdtixE, large and handsome ; 
 
 frtscA, fresh ; frescbzzA, fine and fresh. 
 
 When a feminine noun takes the termination one, in the aug 
 mentative, it becomes masculine; as, 
 
 donnA, f., woman ; donnoxE, m., large woman ; 
 
 campdnA, f, bell ; camjpanoNE, m., large bell. 
 
 To express vigor or beauty, we use otto, occio, fo 
 the masculine, and otta, occia, for the feminine ; as, 
 
 gidvanv, youth; giovanoTTo, handsome an 
 
 [vigorous youth 
 
 bellA, fair ; bellbcciA, very fair ; 
 
 gratidE, large ; grandbi'TA, handsome anl 
 
 [large! 
 
 grossA, large; grossbc CIA, very large and firm^ 
 
 * It is impossible to give in any other tongue the full and exact meaning of 
 Italian Augmentatives and Diminutives ; the translations, therefore, throughout 
 this chapter, must be regarded as attempts at expressing by several wordw 
 and as far as the English permits it, the change of signification wh ch, in Italian, 
 is effected by a simple change of termination, forming one of the striking beautiei 
 of this language. 
 
AUGMENTATIVES. 81 
 
 To express contempt, we use the terminations accio, 
 azzo, astro, for the masculine, and accia, azza, astra, 
 aglia, for the feminine ; as, 
 
 Zifero, book ; librAccio, bad book j 
 
 popolo, people ; popolAzzo, populace ; 
 
 giwanv, young man ; giovanA.sTE.0^ contemptible 
 
 [young man ; 
 gentE, folks : gentAGLiA, rabble. 
 
 We can join the augmentative termination of bigness 
 o that which expresses contempt, and that of contempt to 
 that of bigness ; and thus form a double augmentative ; 
 
 idmo, man; omAccio, bad man; owiAcciO'NE, a very 
 
 [bad man ; 
 
 ibaldo, ribald ; ribaldbNV, great ribald ; ribaldoNA'CCIQ, very 
 
 [great ribald. 
 
 And sometimes by repeating the termination of con- 
 empt, we form a treble augmentative ; as, 
 
 idnco, white ; feiancASTRo, whitish ; 
 
 ianc A STRONE, slightly whitish; feiancASTRONaccio, of a 
 
 [dirty white. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Per in capo CAPPELLONI Having on their heads very 
 
 rdndi alia Spagnuola. (Lasc. large hats after the Spanish 
 
 ibill. 2. 2.) fashion. 
 
 E'ra una piacevole, e fresco, She was a pleasant and fresh 
 
 ORESOZZA. (Bocc. g. 8. u.S.) fine country girl. 
 
 JYVm vidi mdi uomini piu I never saw more large, 
 
 ELLONI. (Caro. lett. 2. 137.) handsome men. 
 
 Vedi tu, donna mia, come le Dost thou see, my good 
 
 ostre s6no tutte FKESCOZZE ? woman, how ours are all fine 
 
 Agn. Pand. 47.) and fresh ? 
 
 TA'lle guagnel, tu s&i UN BEL In truth, you are a fine large 
 
 ONNONE. (Bern. rim. 2. 7.) woman. 
 
82 
 
 ANALOGY. 
 
 Son&ten CAMPANONE. (Buo- 
 nar. Fier. 2 . 3. 9.) 
 
 11 valoroso, e gia Id GIOVA- 
 N6xxo Mdbiade fa molto famo- 
 so. (Matt. Franz, rim. 169.) 
 
 Oh ! c6me ella e 6ra t e fre- 
 scoccia, e BELLOCCIA. (Las, 
 Spir.) 
 
 JF'o avea una conca assdi 
 GRAKDOTTA. (Mes. Bin. rim. 
 1. 202.) 
 
 E'Ua e GROSSOCCIA, tarchid- 
 ta, e giuliva. (Lor. Med. 
 Nenc.) 
 
 Fee 1 egli di quelle un famdso 
 LIBRACCIO. (Allegr. 92.) 
 
 Fo non son ndto Ailla feccia 
 del POPOLAZZO. (Bocc. g. 10. 
 n. 8.) 
 
 N6i non temidmo d 1 un GIO- 
 VANASTRO. (Dav. Tac. Ann. 
 
 Ring the large belt 
 
 The valorous and handsoin 
 and vigorous youth Alcibiade 
 was very famous. 
 
 Oh ! how very fresh, an< 
 fair she is now. 
 
 I had a pan very handsom 
 and large. 
 
 She is very large and firn 
 well-limbed, and gay. 
 
 He made of them a famou 
 bad book. 
 
 I was not born of the drej 
 of the populace. 
 
 "We do not fear a contemp 
 ible young man. 
 
 Guiddva, gli accoltelldnti 
 Giulidno, le ciurme Appollinare, 
 non cdme capitdni, ma licenziosi 
 e pigri, c6me la lor GENTAGLIA. 
 (Dav. Tac. Stor. 3.) 
 
 Jlccddde, eke quest i OMAcci6Ni 
 Jurono sconoscenti do 1 beneficj 
 ricevuti da Gidve. (Fir. dial. 
 bell, donn.) 
 
 Quel RIBALDONACCIO delfra- 
 tello ha consumdlo tdnto. 
 (Cecch. Dot. 1. 2.) 
 
 Essendo qudsto un cfrrto 
 BIANCASTRONACCIO senza trop- 
 po bdrba. (Fir. nov. 7.) 
 
 Julian led the gladiator 
 Appollinaris the rowers, not 
 captains, but as licentious, an 
 slothful men, like their rabb] 
 
 It followed, that these vei 
 bad men were ungrateful fort 
 benefits received from Jupitt 
 
 That very great ribald oft! 
 brother has consumed so muc 
 
 This one being a certain 
 man of a dirty white (palj 
 color and without much beard. 
 
AUGMENTATIVES. 83 
 
 EXERCISE V. 
 
 [This and the following Exercise on Diminutives, are introduced 
 )lely for the purpose of habituating the learner to the formation 
 f such words; but as all nouns are not susceptible of the same 
 lodification, and as the employment of one termination in prefer- 
 ice to the others depends entirely on usage and euphony, nothing 
 nt constant reading, and the study of the classics, can teach the 
 per use of these words.] 
 
 He is a coarse and I good-for-nothing I man. That 
 
 E f grdnde, 2 t$ | da nidla* \ udmo.l Cotesta 
 
 a dirty, ugly servant. The kitchens of (the) great 
 sudicio'2 fdntcl cucina 
 
 jttons are always filled I with I cooks. I Go home, 
 tidtto s6no sempre pieno \ di \ cuoco. \ Anddtevene a cdsa 
 
 to be beside I 
 uscito 
 
 eat contemptible fool, you appear to me 
 sciocconej voi parete% mi 1 
 
 f) yourself. Take that large cup, and wash it well. Thou 
 vdi. Ptglia quel tdzza, e Idva^^lo bene. Tu 
 
 a fine large woman. He had in that chamber a 
 donna. E'gli aveva quello camera 
 
 ge old chest, which had been made I since the time I of his 
 cassdne, che era fdtto \ fin ddllo 
 
 her's grand-father. He bites them all with that ugly a 
 dre* dvolo.l E'gli mdrde* /el tutte con quello 
 
 outh. This great fool 
 cca. Questo pecora 
 
 wants to teach me how to know 
 -mi vu6l far conoscerc 
 
 he) thing's, as if I were born yesterday. Each of 
 
 cdstf, crime sc io fossi ndta ieri. ognuno- 
 
 em had a bad large sword. They opened a large box 
 
 Aveva 1 spdda. Aprirono cdssa 
 
 of I their father. I speak only of ungrateful, and very 
 del I Idro 2 pddrel I'o pdrlo s6lo ingrdto, e 
 
 oud men. Ring the large bell, behold the council of 
 perbo . Sundte campdnttj ecco consiglio 
 
 e widows, that enter, People, that are born of the uregs 
 veddva, che entra. Gente, che e ndta feccia 
 
 'the rabble. I 1 never saw I men so very handsome. 
 popolo. j Non vidi mdi \ uomo cosi bello. 
 
84 ANALOGY. 
 
 She would appear to you a fine large woman. They I scat- 
 E'lla parrebbe 2 m*l . bella femina. | 
 
 tered themselves i through that rabble. 
 Si spdrsero per quelto ciurma. 
 
 DIMINUTIVES. 
 
 Diminutives may be divided into four classes, viz. 
 those that express kindness or tenderness ; those that 
 express smallness or prettiness ; those that express 
 compassion ; and those that express contempt or indig- 
 nation. 
 
 To express kindness or tenderness, we change the 
 last vowel of nouns into erello, for the masculine, and 
 into erella, for the feminine ; as, 
 
 ioj old man ; VCCC/WERELLO, poor old man ; 
 
 fool ; pazzERELLA, poor little fool. 
 
 To express smallness or prettiness, we use the ter- 
 minations ino, etto, ello, uccio, uzzo, for the masculine, 
 and ina, etta, ella, uccia, uzza ; for the feminine ; as, 
 
 Of boy ; fanciuttixo, little boy ; 
 
 rusctllo, brook ; ruscelteTTo. small brook ; 
 
 JintstrA, window ; ^/wes/rELLA, little window ; 
 
 6o'ccA, mouth; &OCCUCCIA, pretty little mouth ; 
 
 umido, damp; umiduzzo, slightly damp. 
 
 Some feminine nouns take the terminations ino, etto, ello. in the 
 diminutive, and then they become masculine ; as, 
 
 COSA, f., house ; CASINO, m., small house, or 
 
 [country-house ; 
 
 capdnnA } f., cottage ; copawiETTO, m., little cottage ; 
 
 portA, f., door; portELio, m., small door, or 
 
 [carriage-door. 
 
 To express compassion, we use the termination tc- 
 ciuolo, for the masculine, and icciuola, for the feminine ; 
 
DIMINUTIVES. 85 
 
 x and all those terminations used to express smallness or 
 prettiness ; as, 
 
 udmo, man ; omicciu6LO, poor little man; 
 
 t&wu, woman ; ftmnicciuoi,A, wretched little woman ; 
 
 To express contempt or indignation, we use the ter- 
 minations iccidtto, icciattolo, for the masculine, and 
 iccidtta, iccidttola, for the feminine ; and all the termi- 
 nations used to express compassion, except ino, and ma; 
 
 as, 
 
 man; 5 omicciiTTO, ? despicable 
 
 \ OTWICCIATTOLO, $ puny fellow ; 
 
 t 
 
 No rule cnn be given how to determine in which sig- 
 nification the terminations bo, etto, ello, uccio, uzzo, 
 icciuolo, are used; the connexion of the words, is the 
 only guide. Thus, 
 
 ftmina, woman; vile /emt'riELLA, vile, contemptible little 
 
 [woman ; 
 
 gidvine, giri; gentile g-tortn^LLA, genteel little girl; 
 utimo, man ; bud,io omicciuoLo, good, poor little man. 
 
 Very often, instead of diminishing the substantive we 
 diminish the adjective which qualifies it ; and sometimes 
 we diminish both the substantive and the adjective ; as, 
 
 figliuoli Uneri, young children ; Jiglivdli ienen&L!.!, very young 
 
 [children; 
 bdcca piccola, little mouth; feoccueciA piccolixA., pretty 
 
 [little mouth ; 
 
 C c?onnicciuoLE vedov^TTE^ 
 
 ddnmvtdove, widowed women ; < wretched young 
 
 ^ [widowed women. 
 
 Besides the above terminations there are some nouns 
 which have a peculiar ending in their diminutive ; as, 
 
 parte, part ; pa/^icELLA, small part ; 
 
 lume, light; touciivo, small light; 
 
 Mama, white; 6iancoLiNA, pretty white: 
 
Hfi ANALOGY. 
 
 Others have quite an irregular termination ; as, 
 
 mercctnte, merchant ; mercantooLO, little miserable merchant ; 
 
 paglia, straw ; />ag-ZiucA, small piece of straw ; 
 
 bacio, kiss; fcactozzo, cordial smacking kiss ; 
 
 amdro, bitter; amaroGNO^o, bitterish. 
 
 [For a List of such Diminutives, see APPENDIX, E.] 
 
 We may join two different terminations in the formation 
 of diminutives ; and then we form a double diminutive, 
 which sometimes, besides the idea of kindness or tender- 
 ness, expresses also that of prettiness or compliment; and 
 sometimes serves % to diminish the object still more, and to 
 convey also the idea of prettiness ; as, 
 
 cattivo, miserable man ; caftwELLo, a wretched man ; 
 
 cafti'tJELLU'CCIO, wretched little man ; 
 
 Zi&ro, book ; libr^TTO, small book ; Zt&rETTPNO, pretty little 
 
 [book. 
 
 Sometimes we make use of the diminutive termination 
 to diminish the augmentative; and when we wish to 
 express contempt for the object represented by the 
 name already diminished, we augment the diminutive ; 
 as, 
 
 Iddro, robber ; ZadroNE, highwayman ; fodrowCE'LLO ; 
 
 [pilferer ; 
 (ZdwiA, lady ; damiizzA, petty lady ; damuzz A'CCIA, 
 
 [pretended lady. 
 
 ^Finally, such is the genius of the Italian language in 
 this respect, that we may even modify the verbs and 
 adverbs by one or more syllables added to them; thus, 
 
 T to give many 
 
 From feocidre, to kiss ; we make ftaciuccHiARE < little kisses 
 
 } one after 
 ' another ; 
 
 " cantdre, to sing; 5 canteRELLARE, ? , 
 I orcawfrccHiARE, 5 lo 
 
 " pdco, little; 5/^ocMNO, 
 
 btne, well; \ J eni , NO pretty well ; 
 
 very well. 
 
DIMINUTIVES. 
 
 87 
 
 E X A M P L E I 
 
 M6vesi 'I VECCHIEREL canu- 
 to x e bidnco. (Petr. s. 14.) 
 
 O PAZZERELLA, tU HOH Sttl 
 
 quello eke si bfdtto. (Macch.) 
 
 Che ancdr ?n' odidsti essendo 
 FANCiuLLiNO. (Bern. Ol. 1. 
 21.) 
 
 Che non per mstdj ma per 
 suono e n6to D' un RI*SCEL- 
 LETTO. che quivi discende. 
 (Dant. Inf. 34.) 
 
 Vide entrdre un tdpo per la 
 FINESTRELLA. (Nov. ant. 90.) 
 
 Quella BOCCUCCIA sdnta. 
 (Bellinc.) 
 
 Dubito che non sia un poco 
 UMIDIZZO. (Crusca.) 
 
 Dal mmo piano di CIUESTO 
 CASINO si scende in dltre stdnze 
 sotto terra. (Borgh. Rip. 132.) 
 
 Che abbidmo ndi a fare, se 
 non a mendrlo in GUJESTO CA- 
 
 PANNETTO. (BOCC. g. 3. n. 1.) 
 
 Sdlsesulfico, e fu giunto AL 
 PORTELLO. (Lor. Medic. 119.) 
 
 Un OMICCIUOLO di piccola 
 condizidne. (Franc. Sacch. Op. 
 div. 134.) 
 
 Avete vdi mdi pdsto wienie a 
 queste DONNICCIUOLE ? (Agn. 
 Pand 6.) 
 
 E'gli k, un certo OMICCIATTO, 
 che non e nessun di vdi, che veg- 
 gendolo non Vavesse a noia. 
 (Lor. Med. Arid, prol.) 
 
 E m mdndano, a lor capric- 
 
 ClO, gli OMICCIATTOLI 71071 SO 
 
 iamente, ma i barbassdri. (Al- 
 le ff . 181.) 
 
 The hoary and white-headed 
 poor old man moves on. 
 
 O poor little fool, you don't 
 know what has been done. 
 
 For you hated me from the 
 time I was a little boy. 
 
 Discovered not by sight, but 
 by the sound of a small brook 
 that descends there. 
 
 He saw a mouse enter 
 through the little window. 
 
 That divine, pretty little 
 mouth. 
 
 I doubt whether it is not 
 somewhat slightly damp. 
 
 From the first story of this 
 small house we descend into 
 other rooms under ground. 
 
 What else have we to do, 
 but to bring him into this little 
 cottage. 
 
 He climbed the fig tree, and 
 reached the small door. 
 
 A poor little man of low 
 condition. 
 
 Have you ever thought of 
 these wretched little women ? 
 
 He is a certain despicable 
 puny fellow, that there is none 
 of you, who on seeing him 
 would not dislike him. 
 
 
 
 And they send to you, ac- 
 cording to their whim, despi- 
 cable ignorant men as well as 
 great and learned. 
 
88 
 
 ANALOGY. 
 
 VlL FEMIKELLA in Puglld U 
 
 prende. (Petr.) 
 
 U'na GF.NTIL piacevol GIO- 
 YINELLA. (Mes. Gin.) 
 
 l/TCBUON OMICCIUOLO. (BoCC. 
 
 g. 3. n. 1.) 
 
 /FIGLIUOI.I ancdr TENEREL- 
 LI. (Fir. Disc. an. 79.) 
 
 Con Una BOCCUCCIA PICCO- 
 LiwA. (Bocc. g. 4. n. W.) 
 
 Qy.este DONNicciu6LE vn- 
 DOVETTE. (Agn. Pand. 6.) 
 
 Essendo gia una PARTICELLA 
 delta n6tte passdta. (Bocc g. 1.) 
 
 Avendo un LUMICINO in md- 
 no. (Matt. Fran, Rim.) 
 
 Con quelle site man'ne BIAN- 
 OL!NE. (Fir. Asin. 41.) 
 
 MERCANTUOLO di qu&ttro de- 
 ndri. (Bocc. g. 3. n. 7.) 
 
 Tra veccia, t I6glio, f. Irucio- 
 li, e PAGLI^CHE. (Car. Matt. 
 ..8.) 
 
 Se non m' avessi dato tal 
 BACi6zzo. (Pataff. 9.) 
 
 Di sapore AMAROGNOLO, 
 mnlto acre, e penetrative. (Ri- 
 cett. Fior. J9.) 
 
 Ritorni dlla corte piu giallo y 
 epiu CATTIVEL:^CCIO, r/icmai. 
 (Franc. Sacch. nov. 74.) 
 
 Mi hdnno portdto qui il LI- 
 BRETT IN o degli enimmi del Si- 
 gnCr Coltcllini. (Red. lett. 2.) 
 
 Vi prego, che, inndnzi che 
 
 COtSstO LANDRONCELLO vddd dl- 
 
 truve, mi f accidie render e un 
 miopdio d' uJse. (Bocc. g. 8. 
 a, 5.) 
 
 A vile, contemptible little 
 woman, in Apulia captivate** 
 him. 
 
 A genteel, agreeable little 
 girl. 
 
 A good, poor little man. 
 
 The young ones [of the 
 dove] yet very young. 
 
 With a pretty little mouth. 
 
 These wretched 
 widowed women. 
 
 young 
 
 A small part of the night 
 having already passed. 
 
 Having a small light in hi 
 hand. 
 
 With her 
 white hands. 
 
 small pretty 
 
 Little miserable merchant 
 worth four farthings. 
 
 Between vetch, darnel, 
 shavings, and small pieces of 
 straw. 
 
 If thou hadst not given me 
 such a cordial smacking kiss 
 
 Of a taste bitterish, very 
 acrid, and penetrating. 
 
 He returned to the court 
 more pale, and wretched than 
 ever. 
 
 They have brought me here 
 the pretty little book of enig- 
 mas of Mr Coltellini. 
 
 1 pray you, that, before 
 this pilferer goes elsewhere, 
 you would make him return to 
 me a pair of spatterdashes Q 
 mine. 
 
DIMINUTIVES. 
 
 Essendomi accattdta un po' di 
 DAMUZZACGiAsafoata'ca. (Alleg. 
 57.) 
 
 Allor la BACICCUHIAI. (Pa- 
 taff. 9.) 
 
 dccertdtevi, che w *vi pdrto 
 un BENONE grandone. (Car. 
 lett. 1.) 
 
 Having obtained somewhat 
 of the character of an uncouth 
 pretended lady. 
 
 Then I gave her many little 
 kisses one after another. 
 
 Be assured, that I love you 
 hugely. 
 
 EXERCISE VI|. 
 
 The little boy took out all the flowers, that he 
 
 giovine trdsse tutto fiore t che egli 
 
 With a pretty little mouth, 
 
 Con b6cca t 
 
 had in the little basket. 
 avevn canestro. 
 
 Dost thou 
 tu* 
 
 whose lips looked like two little rubies. 
 le cui Idbbro parevano due rubmi. 
 
 think | that I will suffer that thou 1 shouldst pawn my 
 Credit \ che 'to sdffera che tu \ ?' impegni la 
 
 little gown ? He conducted 
 
 gonnellal E'gli mise* mi* p 
 
 remote narrow lanes. Like the little sheep that 
 
 fuor di mdnof strdda.l C6me 
 
 come out I of the I fold, I first one, 
 escono \ dal \ chiuso, \ ad una } 
 
 three, I and the others remain a little 
 tre, I e dltra stdnno 
 
 down I their I eyes and I their I nose. 
 do I gli j occhio e il \ muso. 
 
 sackcloth, with a miserable little 
 con vil 
 
 me through certain 
 mi 1 per certa 
 
 pecora, che 
 
 I then two, I then 
 a due, I a 
 
 timid, lowering 
 timida, atterdn- 
 
 Clothed , 
 Vestito 
 
 in 
 
 di 
 
 me 
 avdra 
 
 very 
 
 hat She wag 
 cappello. E'lla tre, 
 
 I have found him with a 
 Po ho% trovdto 3 lo l con 
 
 I Do not be sparing with 
 I Non voglidte essermi 
 
 of a discreet little smile. The other was a child 
 discrete rzso. dltro era fanciullv 
 
 not yet one year old. 
 nori* anc6ra* un 4 dnnrf 
 8^ 
 
 somewhat slightly malicious 
 alqudnto malizitiso. 
 
 little book in his hand. 
 libra mdno. 
 
 small, who 
 piccolo, che 
 
 wai 
 avecfi 
 
90 
 
 ANALOGY. 
 
 Who is this contemptible little man, that has come 
 
 Chi e questo 
 insult 
 
 to 
 adir 
 
 I us in 
 ci 1 5 r 
 
 a torn little cap. 
 rdtto bcretta. 
 
 Accompany the little 
 Accompagndte 
 
 child flatters 
 fanciullo lusinga 
 
 having heard 
 
 uonio, che t z vcnitto^ 
 
 ur house ? He had I on I his head 
 itra 7 cdsa f* Aveva \ in \ capo 
 
 Little boxes made I of I boards. 
 casstinc fdtti \ con \ dsse. 
 
 Thus the blind little 
 Cost cieco 
 
 master. 
 padionc. 
 
 (the) lovers. 
 amdnte. 
 
 these 
 questo 
 
 words, 
 pardia, 
 
 The poor little woman, 
 vccchia, 
 
 said, Have a very 
 disse, Abbiidt 
 
 little 
 tdnto 
 
 (of) , patience. 
 pazitnza. 
 
 
 CHAPTER V 
 
 
 
 NUMERALS. 
 
 
 CARDINAL NUMBERS, 
 
 U'no, 
 due, 
 
 one ; 
 two; 
 
 vent* uno, ? 
 or ventuno, 
 
 twenty-one r 
 
 tre, 
 
 three ; 
 
 ventidue, 
 
 twenty- two ; 
 
 qu&ttro, 
 cinque. 
 
 four; 
 five; 
 
 ventitre, 
 ventiqudttro, 
 
 twenty- three , 
 ^twenty-four j 
 
 ** 
 
 six ; 
 
 ventidnque, 
 
 twenty-five; 
 
 sttte, 
 
 seven; 
 
 venlisei, 
 
 twenty-six ; 
 
 6tto, 
 
 eight ; 
 
 ventiselte, 
 
 twenty -seven^ 
 
 nove, 
 
 died, 
 
 nine ; 
 ten; 
 
 venf otto, ) 
 or ventotto, $ 
 
 twenty-eight ; 
 
 undid. 
 
 eleven ; 
 
 ventinove, 
 
 twenty-nine ; 
 
 dodid, 
 
 twelve ; 
 
 trenta, 
 
 thirty ; 
 
 tredid, 
 
 thirteen ; 
 
 trentuno, 
 
 thirty-one ; 
 
 quattordid, 
 
 fourteen ; 
 
 . 
 
 . 
 
 quindid, 
 
 fifteen ; 
 
 trentttlo, 
 
 thirty-eight ^ 
 
 sedici* 
 
 sixteen ; 
 
 4 
 
 
 didassette, 
 
 seventeen ; 
 
 quaranta, 
 
 forty ; 
 
 didotto, 
 
 eighteen ; 
 
 . . . 
 
 
 
 didannove, 
 
 nineteen ; 
 
 cinquanta, 
 
 fifty; 
 
 venti, 
 
 twenty ; 
 
 
 
sessdnta, 
 setidnta, 
 ottdnta, 
 novdnta, 
 
 cento, 
 duecento, J 
 ducenlo, > 
 or dugento, j 
 trecento, 
 quattrocento, 
 
 NUME 
 sixty; 
 seventy ; 
 eighty ; 
 ninety ; 
 hundred ; 
 two hundred ; 
 
 three hundred; 
 four hundred ; 
 
 RALS. 
 
 mills, 
 duemila, 
 or dumUa, 
 tremila, 
 
 mittecento, or i 
 mille e cento, ( 
 
 91 
 
 thousand ; 
 two thousand ; 
 three thousand; 
 
 eleven hun- 
 , [dred ; 
 
 diecimUa, 
 centomila, 
 
 milione, 
 
 ten thousand ; 
 
 hundred thoua- 
 [and; 
 
 million. 
 
 The numbers vcntisei, ventfsette, quarantasei, ottantasette, are 
 sometimes contracted into venzii y 'twenty-six' ; venzette, { twenty- 
 seven' ; quaranzei, ' forty-six' ', ottanzitte, ' eighty-seven*. 
 
 Cento, when followed by quardnta, cinquanta, sessdnta, settdnta, 
 loses its last syllable, and makes cenquardnta, 'one hundred and 
 forty' ; cencin quanta, * one hundred and fifty' ; censessdnta, * one 
 hundred and sixty'; censettdnta , * one hundred and seventy.' 
 
 Cardinal numbers, except uno and its compounds, are 
 generally of the common gender; as, 
 
 siltz dnni, m., 
 quindici sUlle, f., 
 
 seven years; 
 fifteen stars. 
 
 The Italians make use of these numbers, instead of the 
 ordinal, to indicate the days of the month ; and then 
 they are preceded by the masculine articles i or li; or 
 by the words di, alii, or addi ; as, 
 
 LI vENTiquATTRo Giugno, the 24th of June ; 
 AI DICIOTTO di Dicembre, on the 18th of December; 
 
 ALLI QUATTORDICI di Gennwo, on the 14th of January ; 
 ADD! DODICI di Mdrzo, on the 12th of March. 
 
 EXCEPTION. 
 
 The first day of the month is indicated by the ordinal number 
 imo t ' first,' preceded in like manner by i7, al, or add\. 
 
 pnmo 
 
92 ANALOGY. 
 
 When they are used to indicate the hours of the day, 
 they are preceded by the feminine article Za, le ; but 
 then the word 6ra, * hour 3 ; ore, * hours' ; is either ex- 
 pressed or understood ; as, 
 
 LE DUE ore, two o'clock ; 
 
 LE QUATTRO [ore], four o'clock. 
 
 Una, and its compounds ventuno, trentuno, &c., 
 before feminine nouns, like other adjectives, change o 
 into a; as, 
 
 IMA L!BRA, one pound ; 
 
 novantunA RTTOTA, ninety-one wheels. 
 
 When cardinal numbers are used as substantives, all 
 but tre and those ending in i, are made to vary .in the 
 plural ; as, 
 
 due cinqui, two fives ; 
 
 tre novi, three nines. 
 
 Mille and milione, in the plural make mila and milio- 
 ni; as, 
 
 diciotto MiLA, eighteen thousand ; 
 
 un milione di MILIONI, a million millions. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Vivettednni VENZEI. (Franc. He lived twenty-six years. 
 Sacch. rim. 40.) 
 
 JVe figlio TENZETTE (lello It [a scorpion] brought forth 
 
 stisso colore. (Red. Ins. 47.) twenty-seven [scorpions] of the 
 
 same color. 
 
 Dintro La citld di Roma vi Within the city of Rome 
 
 sono auARANZEic/ziese cardina- there are forty-six cardinal 
 
 lane. (Brun. Tes. 3. 3.) churches. 
 
 Un milione, e OTTANZETTE One million" and eighty" 
 
 miglidia, e cinquecento fiormi seven thousand and five hand" 
 
 d'oro. (*Dav. Tac. Tost. 429.) red gold florins. 
 
 &v6ndor>i in quel eoncilio There being in that council 
 
 CENduARANTeftto vescovi. (Petr. one hundred and forty-eight 
 
 Uoin. ill. 82.) bishops. 
 
NUMERALS. 
 
 CKNCINQUANTA de' suoi cava- 
 liiri mandd incontra air 6ste d& 
 Fiorentini. (Giov. Vill. 1. 9.) 
 
 Piu di CENSETTANTA dnni 
 ttdtivarono gli Dei scnza tdalo. 
 (St. Agost. Citt. Dio. 4. 31. 
 
 La voglia e la ragion combat- 
 tut' hanno sette, e SETT' AMU. 
 (Petr. s. 80.) 
 
 QUINPICI STELLE, che in di- 
 verse plage Lo cielo aovivan 
 di tdnto aereJio. (Dant. Par. 
 13.) 
 
 Di Ferrara, LI VENTICIUATTRO 
 GitfcNo, Mille seictnto sette. 
 (Bent. lett. I.) 
 
 A'l D1CIOTTO DI DlCEMBRE. 
 
 (Bav.) 
 
 A'LLT auATTORDici DI GEN- 
 WAIO. (Macch.) 
 
 II detto anno ADD! DODICI DI 
 MARZO. (Giov. Vill.) 
 
 Che 6ra e f Sono LE Q.UAT- 
 THO. (Class.) 
 
 E'ccoii la notte, ecco LE Dt/E 
 K, 6cco le qudttro. (Firenz.) 
 
 TJgli tiNA LIBRA di castrone. 
 (Burchiell. p. 2. s. 1.) 
 
 Jintre NOVANTUNA Ru6rA. 
 (Dant. Conv.) 
 
 E dicidmo DUE cfwftui, due 
 stlti, THE NOVI, perchb questi 
 numerdli, sempre che stdnnoper 
 sustanttvi, si dedinano. (Buom. 
 Ling. Tosc. 2. 8. 13.) 
 
 E f ran per numero DICIOTTO 
 M!LA. (Bemb. Stor. 12. 176.) 
 
 Al padre Carrara rinda in 
 mio njme UN MI LION E DI MILIO- 
 wj di saluti. (Red. lett. 2.) 
 
 He sent one hundred and 
 fifty of his horsemen against 
 the Florentine host. 
 
 They adored their gods, with- 
 out idols, for more than one 
 hundred and seventy years. 
 
 Inclination and reason have 
 'striven for seven after seven 
 years. . ^ V 
 
 Fifteen stars, which in dif- 
 ferent spheres enliven the . 
 skies with so much serenity. 
 
 Ferrara, 24th June, 1607. 
 
 On the 18th December. 
 
 On the 14th January. 
 
 On the 12th of March of the 
 said year. 
 
 What o'clock is it? It i 
 four o'clock. 
 
 Behold night, behold two 
 o'clock, behold four o'clock. 
 
 Take one pound of mutton. 
 
 Other ninety-one wheels. 
 
 And we say two fives, two 
 sevens, three nines, because 
 these numerals, when thej 
 stand as substantives, are de- 
 clined. . 
 
 They were eighteen thous- 
 and in number. 
 
 Give to father Carrara, in 
 my behalf, a million millions 
 of salutations. 
 
ANALOGY. 
 
 ORDINAL NUMBERS. 
 
 Primo, 
 
 secondo, 
 
 terzo, 
 
 quarto, 
 
 quinto, 
 
 s6sto, 
 
 settimo, 
 
 ottdvo, 
 
 nono, 
 
 ddcimo, 
 
 decimoprimoj 
 *und6cimo or 
 undictsimo, 
 ' decimosecondo, 
 
 first; 
 second ; 
 third ; 
 fourth ; 
 fifth ; . 
 sixth ; 
 seventh ; 
 eighth ; 
 ninth ; 
 tenth ; 
 
 eleventh ; 
 
 dodecimp, twelfth; 
 
 dodicesimo, 
 
 *decimoterzo, 
 
 terzodtcimo, or > thirteenth; 
 
 tredictsimo, } 
 
 *decimoqudrto, > 
 
 quartodtcimo, or > fourteenth 
 
 quattordicesimo, ) 
 
 > sixteenth 
 
 seven- 
 teenth ; 
 
 *quaranUsimo, or 
 quadragtsimo, 
 
 quint sdtcimo, or > fifteenth ; 
 
 qumdicesimo, ) 
 
 *decimos6sto, ^ 
 
 sestodtcimo, or 
 
 sedictsimo, 
 
 *decimos6ttimo, 
 
 settimodtcimo, or 
 
 diciassettesimo, 
 
 *decimottdvo, 
 
 'ottodecimo, or 
 
 diciottisimo, 
 
 *decimonono, 
 
 nonodecimo, or 
 
 diciannovtsimo, 
 
 t 
 
 eight- 
 eenth ; 
 
 nine- 
 teenth ; 
 
 *ventesimoprimo, 
 vige imoprimo or 
 ventuntsimo, 
 *ventesimosecdndo, 
 
 ' twenty- 
 first: 
 
 *trentesimoprimo, 
 trigesimoprimo, or S i;" 11 ^ 
 trentunesimo, > 
 
 *sessanUsimo, or 
 
 > fortieth : 
 
 quinquagtsimo, or > fiftieth j 
 quingenttsimo, 5 
 
 > sixti 
 
 ? seven- 
 5 tieth ; 
 
 *settantesimo or 
 stttuagtsimo, 
 
 *ottardtsimo, m > eightieth : 
 ottagtsimo, J 
 
 *novanttsimo, or 
 nonog&toto, 
 
 y ninetieth ; 
 
 centesimo, hundredth ; 
 
 ducenUsimo, or ? two 
 dugenttsimo, $ hundredth ; 
 trecenttsimo, three hundredth: 
 
 milltsimo, 
 
 thousandth : 
 millionth, 
 
 * We mark with an asterisk those, amongst the different names of the same 
 numbers, that are most in use. 
 
NUMERALS. 
 
 95 
 
 The ordinal numbers from primo to decimo, and ven- 
 tesimo, trentesimo, &c., before feminine nouns change o 
 into a; and in the plural change o into i, for the mascu- 
 line, and a into e, for the feminine ; as, 
 
 la primA. DONNA, the first woman ; 
 
 le ttrzE PERCOSSE, the third stripes ; 
 
 l& cinquantesimA. LETTERA, the fiftieth letter ; 
 
 i primi* DI, the first days : 
 
 And their compounds, quartodecimo, decimosettimo, 
 &c., change both the last vowel of the last, and the last 
 vowel of the first of the two component numbers ; as, 
 
 la quartA.decimA. CONDIZIONE, the fourteenth condition ; 
 la decwi&stttimA. STOLT!ZIA, the seventeenth folly. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Delle quali LA PIUMA 
 chiameremo Pampinea, la se- 
 cdnda Fiamm6tta, Filomena la 
 terza, fyc. (Bocc, Introd.) 
 
 Nessuno Le seconde aspettd- 
 va ne LE TEKZE [percosse.] 
 ^Dant. Inf. 18.) 
 
 Fra Guittone, nella LETTERA 
 che nel mio c6dice e la CINGIUAN- 
 TESIMA. (Red. annot. Ditir.) 
 
 E ne' DI PRIMI dentro al 
 divznseno Nasccimmo. (Bocc. 
 Araet. 96.) 
 
 LA aUARTADECIMA CONDI- 
 
 XIONE, che deve avere la confes- 
 yione 9 si & accelerdta, (Passav. 
 176.) 
 
 LA DECIMASETTIMA STOLTI- 
 
 ZIA, e diqutlli che vogliono fug- 
 gire. (Cavalc. Stolt. 228.) 
 
 Tlie first of whom, we will 
 call Pampinea, the second 
 Fiammetta, the third Filome- 
 na, &c. 
 
 None waited for the second, 
 nor the third [stripes .] 
 
 Fra Guittone, in the letter 
 which in my MS. copy is the 
 fiftieth. 
 
 And in the first days we 
 were born in the divine bosom. 
 
 The fourteenth condition, 
 which the confession ought to 
 have, is that of being early. 
 
 The seventeenth folly, is 
 that of those who desire to flee. 
 
 * Pr'tmi is sometimes used as a substantive, and then has the signification of 
 'ancestors', 'parents' ; as, 
 
 Fieramtntcfuro avversi A me e They were fiercely adverse to roe, 
 
 a> miei PRIMI, e a miapdrte. (Dant. to my ancestors, and to my party, 
 laf. 10.) 
 
96 
 
 ANALOGY. 
 
 COLLECTIVE, DISTRIBUTIVE, AND PRO- 
 PORTIONAL NUMBERS. 
 
 Pdio, 
 
 Colle 
 a pair ; 
 
 ctive. 
 quarantina, 
 cinquantina, 
 sessantina, 
 letlantina, 
 ottantina, 
 novantina t 
 
 centindiOj 
 miglidio, 
 
 two scores, or 
 [forty ; 
 fifty, or two scores 
 [and a half; 
 three scores, or 
 [sixty : 
 seventy, or three 
 [scores and a half; 
 four scores, or 
 - [eighty; 
 ninety, or four 
 [scores and a half; 
 a hundred ; 
 a thousand ; 
 
 cinquina. 
 
 the number of five; 
 
 settina, 
 
 the number of 
 [seven ; 
 
 decina, 
 
 ten, or half a 
 
 dodicina 
 or dozzina 
 
 > a dozen ; 
 
 veniina, 
 treniina, 
 
 a score, or twenty ; 
 thirty, or a score 
 
 [and a half 
 
 Distributive. 
 
 Una metd t 
 un tirzo, 
 un quarto, 
 un quinto, 
 
 one half; 
 one third ; 
 one fourth; 
 one fifth ; 
 
 un ststo, 
 un stltimo, 
 un ottdvo, 
 un nowo, 
 
 one sixth ; 
 one seventh ; 
 one eighth ; 
 one ninth ; &< 
 
 
 Proportional. 
 
 
 Ddppio, 
 triplo, 
 quddruplo, 
 
 double ; 
 triple ; 
 quadruple ; 
 
 quintuple, 
 ctntuplo, 
 
 quintuple 
 ten-fold ; 
 a hundred-fold* 
 
 Collective, distributive, and proportional numbers 
 low the rules of other adjectives. 
 
 * TVeina, quattriwa, seina^ otti-na &c., are sometimes used by the It lians im 
 common language, to express ( the number of thti-e*, l f four', 'of six*, * 9f 
 eight', &c., but they have never been employed by good writers. 
 
NUMERALS. 
 
 97 
 
 With numeral adjectives are generally classed the fol- 
 lowing words ; viz, 
 
 ambiduo, \ 
 ambeduo, I 
 amboduo, v both, both 
 amenduo, ( of them. 
 
 dmbi, 
 dmbe, 
 dmboj 
 
 amenduni, 
 amendune, 
 entrdmbi, 
 
 ambidue, 
 ambedue, 
 ambodue, 
 amendue, 
 
 ambidui, 
 ambedui, 
 
 A'mbi, its compounds, and amenduni, are used in 
 speaking of masculine objects : dmbe, its compounds, 
 and amendane, in speaking of feminine : the others 
 may be used for both genders ; as, 
 
 both lovers ; 
 both sages ; 
 both eyes ; 
 both women ; 
 both turned ; 
 both arms ; 
 
 both hemispheres ; 
 
 both shores ; 
 
 both hogs ; 
 
 both things, or both of them ; 
 
 Sofronia and Olindo both of 
 the same city. 
 
 dmbi AMANTI, 
 ambidue SAVJ, 
 dmbe LE L\icr, 
 ambedue DONNE, 
 dmbo CONVERSI, 
 
 dm6oi,E BRACCIA, 
 
 amenduo GLI EMISPERI, 
 amendue LE SPONDE, 
 amenduni PORCI, 
 aniendum COSE, 
 
 SOFRONIA ed OLiNDO 
 
 d^una cittdde entrdmbi, 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 FILKNO e TIRSI AMBI novelli 
 \MANTI. (Vine, Mart. rim. 
 4-) 
 
 jL' UNO e Z'ALTRO SAVIO diced 
 vero, percid ad AMBIDUE donoe. 
 (Nov. ant. 23.) 
 
 E sien nel cuor puriite AMBE 
 LE LUCI Ch'dlla strdda d?am6r 
 mi furon dud. (Petr. c. 8.) 
 
 Allora AMBEDUE [d6nne] 
 entrtrono netla fossa, (Nov. 
 ant. 35.) 
 
 Alfine, AMBO CONVERSI al 
 giusto seggio. (Petr. c. 48.) 
 
 Philenus' and Thyrsis both 
 new lovers. 
 
 Both sages told the truth, 
 therefore he gave to both. 
 
 And let the heart bear pun- 
 ishment for both eyes, which 
 led me to the road of love. 
 
 Then both [women] entered 
 into the ditch. 
 
 Finally both turned to the 
 seat of justice. 
 9 
 
98 
 
 ANALOGY. 
 
 Con AMBO IE BRACCIA mi 
 prese. (Dant. Inf. 19.) 
 
 n confine D' AMENDED GLI 
 IMISPERI. (Dant. Inf. 20.) 
 
 Per cui tremdvano AMENDtJE 
 IE SPONDE. (Dant. Inf. 9.) 
 
 AMENDTJNI [porci] M6RTI 
 cdddero in terra. (Bocc. In- 
 trod.) 
 
 Ntlla vostra elezione sta, di 
 tdrre qudl piu vi pidce DELLE 
 
 D#E [COSe], O AMENDTJNE. 
 
 (Bocc. g. 7. n. 1.) 
 
 Colii SOFRONIA, OLINDO egli 
 s?app&lla D J una cittdde EN- 
 TRAMBI, e d'una fede. (Tass. 
 Ger. 2. 16.) 
 
 He seized me with both 
 arras. 
 
 The confine of both hemi- 
 spheres. 
 
 On account of which both 
 shores trembled. 
 
 Both [hogs] fell dead to the 
 earth. 
 
 It is at your choice, to take 
 which of the two [things] you 
 like best, or both. 
 
 She is called Sofronia, he 
 Olindo, both of the same city 
 and of the same faith. 
 
 EXERCISE VII. 
 
 He sent 
 Mando 
 
 his 
 
 suo 
 
 five 
 
 hundred horsemen 
 cavdllo 
 
 brother with six cohorts, and 
 fratello coorte, e 
 
 to I Terra di Lavoro. He made him 
 in I fece* GM 
 
 grieve for this sin forty days. He passed 
 pidngere questo peccdto di. Passo 
 
 Tunis I to I Apulia with more than eight hundred Spanish 
 Tuni&i I in \ Puglia Spagnuolo^ 
 
 horsemen. Metellus was already in Lombardy I with j 
 cavaliere. 1 Metello era gid, Lombardia \ colla \ 
 
 his army of three legions, who 
 suo* 6ste l legidne, che 
 
 France. 
 Frdncia. 
 
 I 
 
 I'o ho qui lira, \ di 
 
 to have bought a farm. And this was four hundred years 
 comprdre podere. E do fu anno 
 
 was coming 
 veniva 
 
 from 
 di 
 
 from 
 di 
 
 Being already about (to) thirty years 
 Essendo gia, di vresso* 3 4 dnno^ 
 
 old. 
 Essendo gid, dipresso* 3 4 dnno 5 xecchio. 1 
 
 have here two hundred livres, | with | which I intended 
 
 io voleva 
 
 before (that) Rome I was begun. I 
 dn*t che Roma 3 \ si eomintidsse. 1 \ 
 
 He was of the age 
 E'ra eta, 
 
NUMERALS. 99 
 
 of twenty-six or twenty-seven (years). One hundred and 
 o anno. 
 
 seventy archers. He sent one hundred and fifty I of I 
 sagittdrio. Mandd | de* \ 
 
 his soldiers. 
 suo fdnte. 
 
 They went to Messina the twenty-fourth of December. 
 Anddrono Dicembre. 
 
 He was baptized I on the sixteenth, in St. John's. On 
 
 Battezzos-si \ San Giovanni. 
 
 the eighteenth of December, having heard of the insurrection 
 Dicdmbre, - udita rivdlta 
 
 of the legion, he went out I (of) the palace dressed I in I 
 legione, s' uscl \ paldgio vestito \ di \ 
 
 black. The first of the month I will pay you. Come at 
 nero. mese pagherd* vi. 1 Venite a 
 
 (the) six o'clock, and we will speak I of it. I He arrived 
 - . parleremo* \ Tit. 1 | Giunse 
 
 at Milan at (the) one o'clock 1 in I the night. At (the) 
 a Mildno a | di \ notte. A 
 
 twelve o'clock I I went to see I our ambassador. 
 i I mi ported dal \ ndstro ambasciaddre, 
 
 It I was worth I thirty-one livres. Thou didst usurp one 
 I Valeva \ lira. - Usurpdsti 
 
 He came 
 
 jf 
 
 to an agreement I on I condition of paying sixty thousand 
 accordo \ con \ eondizidne pagdre 
 
 ducats to the conquerors. Salute him I for me I a thousand 
 ducdto mncitore. Salutatc^, lo% [ me^i | 
 
 millions of times. 
 volta. 
 
 Here begins the eleventh book. He arrived happily 
 Qui commcia 2 libro. 1 Arrivd felicemente 
 
 to the fortieth year I of 1 his life. Contradicting (to) 
 anno \ della \ suo vita. Contradicendo 
 
 himself in the fourteenth chapter. Boniface the Eighth 
 *e medesimo 2 capitolo. 1 Bonifdxio 3 
 
 hundred and seventy-five thousand gold florins. 
 
 d' dro* fiorincil. 
 
100 ANALOGY. 
 
 being Pope in Rome, the Abb of Cligni came to the 
 Essendo* pdpa 2 5 Roma, 6 10 Abbdte" 13 venne 7 
 
 court. In 
 cdrte. 9 A 
 
 The twenty-first stanza. 
 stanza. 
 
 the time of the Emperor Frederic the First, 
 tempo Imperatofe Federico 
 
 He had tied both 
 
 his 
 
 feet. II bit I both I my | 
 
 Jlveva legdti i pitde. \ Mi morsi 
 
 hands through grief. They entered both I into I the garden. 
 mdno per dolor e. . Entrdrono \ in \ gia^dino 
 
 I gave it to both. 
 ho* date* Lo. 1 
 
 CHAPTER VI. 
 
 SUBSTANTIVE PRONOUNS, 
 
 PERSONAL AND CONJUNCTIVE PRONOUNS, 
 
 THE Italian personal pronouns are the following : 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 1st Person, T.O, m. & f., I; noi } ra. & f, we; 
 
 2d Person, tu, ra. &f., thou; , voi } m. & f., you; 
 f { effli. 1 
 
 e S h > he; lotegiino, 
 
 3d Person,^ *** > m - he or itj , or ^"' m - Uhey. 
 ella. she: ^ ^ 
 
 j ella, 
 
 6h ^ U^o, 
 
 she or it; or ess e, f., J 
 
 Singular and Plural. 
 
 o r C one's self, himself, herself 
 3d Person, se, ra. & f, .^ tneraselves . 
 
 Conjunctive pronouns are derived from the personal 
 pronouns, and are divided into conjunctive, properly 
 speaking, and relative conjunctive pronouns. 
 
 Personal pronouns are varied with the prepositions 
 only. 
 
PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 
 
 101 
 
 VARIATION OF PERSONAL PRONOUNS, 
 
 70. 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 Personal. Conjunc. Relat. 
 Subjective (N.) io, I; 
 
 fPoss. (G.) dime, of me; 
 
 Relat. < Attr. (D.) a me, mi, to me ; 
 
 ( Der. (Ab.) da me, from me ; 
 
 Objective (Ac.) me, mi, me : 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 Personal. Conjunc. Relat. 
 
 Subjective (N. 
 
 ) noi, 
 
 we ; 
 
 (Poss. (G. 
 
 ) di noi, 
 
 of us; 
 
 Relat. <Attr. (D.' 
 (Der. (Ab.; 
 
 ) a noi, ne or ci, 
 ) da noi, 
 
 to us; 
 from us 
 
 Objective (Ac.] 
 
 ) noi, ne or czj 
 
 USr 
 
 TV. 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 Conjunc. Relat. 
 
 Personal. 
 Subjective (N.) tu, 
 
 ( Poss. (G.) di te, 
 Relat. I Attr. (D.) a te, ti, 
 
 (Der. (Ab.V da*e, 
 Objective (Ac.) te, ti, 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 Personal. 
 Subjective. (N.) voi, 
 
 (Poss. (G.) divoi, 
 Relat. < Attr. (D.) a voi, 
 
 ( Der. (Ab.) da voi, 
 Objective (Ac.) voi, 
 
 thou ; 
 of thee ; 
 to thee ; 
 from thee . 
 thee : 
 
 Conjunc. Relat. 
 
 ye or you ; 
 of you; 
 to you; 
 from you ; 
 you. 
 
 EGLI. 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 Personal. Conjunc. Relat. 
 (N.) -egli, he; 
 
 (Poss. (G.)dilui, ne, of him ; 
 
 < Attr. (D. ) a lui, gli or li, to him; 
 
 (Der. (Ab.) da lui, ne, from him , 
 
 Objective. (Ac.) lui, ilotlo, him: 
 
 Subjective 
 Relat 
 
102 ANALOGY. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 Personal. Conjunc. Relat. 
 
 f wrsuuui. wuujuiit. jrvuiui. 
 
 Subjective (N. ) egli or eglino, they ; 
 
 C Poss. (G.) di loro, nt, of them ~, 
 Relat. \ Attr. (D.) a Idro, Idro, to them ; 
 
 ( Der. (Ab.) da Idro, ne, from them ; 
 Objective (Ac.) I6ro, gli or li } them. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 Personal. Conjunc. Relat. 
 Subjective (N.) esso, he or it; 
 
 C Poss. (G.) d' esso, ne, of him or it; 
 
 Relat. < Attr, (D.) ad esso, gli, to him or it , 
 
 {Der. (Ab.) da esso, , ne. fromhimorit; 
 
 Objective (Ac.) esso. lo. him or it : 
 
 PLURAL.' 
 
 Personal, Conjunc. Relat. 
 Subjective (N.) essi, they ; 
 
 C Poss. (G.) d 1 essi, ne, of them ; 
 
 Relat. < Attr. (D.)~ ad essi, to them : 
 
 (Der, (Ab.) da essi, ne, from them 
 
 Objective (Ac.) essi, gli or li, them. 
 
 ELLA. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 Personal. Coujune. Relat. 
 Subjective (N.) ella, she ; 
 
 (Poss. <G.) dilei, ne, of her; 
 
 Relat. ] Attr. (D.) a lei, h, to her ; 
 
 (Der. (Ab.) da lei. ne, from her ; 
 
 Objective (Ac.)-lei, la, her: 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 Personal. Conjunc. Relat. 
 Subjective (N.) elle or elleno ? they ; 
 
 C Poss. (G.) dildro, nc, of them; 
 
 Relat. \ Attr. (D.) a I6ro 9 Idro, to them ; 
 
 (Der. (Ab.) da Uro, nt, from them 
 
 Objective (Ac.) loroj l, -them. 
 
PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 
 
 103 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 Personal. 
 Subjective (N.) essa, 
 
 fPoss. (G.) d 1 essa , 
 Relat. < Attr. (D.) ad essa, 
 
 ( Der. (Ab.) da essa, 
 Objective (Ac.) essa^ 
 
 Conjunc. Relat. 
 
 le, 
 la, 
 
 . 
 
 she or it : 
 of her or it; 
 to her or it ; 
 from her or it ; 
 her or : : 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 Personal. 
 Subjective (N.) esse, 
 
 Poss. (G.) d> esse, 
 Relat. < Attr. (D.) ad esse, 
 
 (Der. (Ab.) da esse, 
 Objective . (Ac.) esse, 
 
 Conjunc, Relat. 
 
 they; 
 
 ne, of them ; 
 to them / 
 ne, from them ; 
 le. them. 
 
 Personal. 
 Subjective (N.) .. 
 
 CPoss. (G.) di se, 
 Relat. <Attr. (D.) a se, 
 
 ( Der. (Ab.) da se, 
 Objective (Ac.) se } 
 
 Conjunc. Relat. 
 
 of one's self; 
 to one's self; 
 from one's seli ; 
 one's self. 
 
 la, tu, egli, ella ; noi, voi, egli or eglino, elle or 
 etteno, are- applied to animate beings ; esso, essa ; essi, 
 esse ; se, may be applied both to animate and inanimate 
 beings. 
 
 The pronouns esso, essa, are used sometimes to express 
 the self-same, the very object of which we speak ; and 
 then they are elegantly supplied by the words desso, 
 dessa, but in the subjective only ; as, 
 
 in ESSA luce, in that very light ; 
 
 ESSO Messtr Teddldo, the same Messer Tedaldo ; 
 
 tu non par DESSO, thou dost not seem thyself; 
 
 el? e ben DESSA, it is she, herself. 
 
 * Se is used to express a relation of identity with the subject, and has no 
 jectivc. 
 
104 ANALOGY. 
 
 In familiar conversation, the Italians very often employ lui, and 
 lei, as subjectives, instead of egli and ella ; but this usage, 
 though authorized by some writers, ought never to be followed in 
 the written language. 
 
 We find also in some classics egli and ella, used for lui and lei ; 
 and elle for loro ; as, memoria d' ELLA, ' memory of her' ; e sudn 
 di man con ELLE, * and striking of hands with them' : and 'tllo for 
 
 a*MVj gu.u,j.ii j\j\A*.a^ii u,g UJ. .i* o i/ iiim , XjLiLil OlUjUUiItU X/C//tofcC// <J 3 t-, V1JH3JT 
 
 were pensive' ; c/t' alcuna gloria i rei avrebber d' ELLI, * for the 
 guilty souls would derive no glory from them' ; this license, never- 
 theless, must be left entirely to the Poets. 
 
 La for ella, le for elleno, and gli for egli and for eglino ; as, LA 
 mi scusi, 'excuse me' ; LE mi dzcano, * tell me' ; GLI era qui, ' he 
 was here'; &c.; are contractions, which, however common they 
 may be in Tuscany, and supported by the authority of several 
 writers, are notwithstanding to be carefully avoided in the written 
 language, especially in an elevated style of composition. 
 
 The pronouns zo, tu, egli, ella, esso, are often used 
 as mere expletives ; as, 
 
 5' io moinssij io, if I should die ; 
 
 tu di 1 tue parole, TU, thou mayest say what thou 
 
 [pleasest; 
 
 EGI.I k una compassione a it excites pity to see him ; 
 [vedtrlo, 
 
 JELLA non andra cosi, it shall not be so ; 
 
 dndiamo con 6s so lui, let us go with him. 
 
 I'o is sometimes written f ; and egli, eglino , are con- 
 tracted into 6i, and often written e' ; as, 
 
 i' non so ridire, I cannot say ; 
 
 EI dtbbe avtr inteso, he must have heard ; 
 
 EI sigittaro in sulla spiagga, they leaped upon the shore ; 
 
 E' penso, he thought ; 
 
 domandb chi tffossero, he asked who they were, 
 
 When the pronouns me, te, se, are preceded by the 
 preposition con, 'with', we often transpose the preposi- 
 
PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 105 
 
 lion, make an elision of tne n, and form of them a single 
 word ; as, 
 
 ton me, MECO, wirth me ; 
 
 con te, TECO, with thee ; 
 
 con s, SECQ, with one's self, himself, &c. 
 
 We find in the classics ndsco, vosco ; used for on not, e with us 1 , 
 and con voi, ' with you' ; but these expressions have become 
 obsolete. 
 
 Italian personal pronouns are very often suppressed, 
 the termination of the verb being sufficient to indicate 
 the person ; as, 
 
 andidmo [n6i] a Roma, let us go to Rome ; 
 
 [egli] domandbchifossero, he asked who they were. 
 
 The English reflective pronouns myself, thyself, our- 
 selves, &c., are expressed in Italian by the personal 
 pronouns, and the word stesso, m., stessa, f., or me- 
 desimo, m., medcsima, f., for the singular; and stessi, 
 m., stesse, f., or medisimi, m., medesime, f , for the 
 plural; as, 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 f w stesso t ~] C noi stessi, 
 
 1st ! or medesimo, m. ^ lf \ or m^mmi..,m. ^ 
 
 Per.) vo stessa, ndi stesse, f 
 
 ^or medesima, f. J \^ormedesime, f.) 
 
 2d C tu stesso, m. 7 ft lf C oi .(>*, m. 7 yourse i ves; 
 Per. (^ tu stessa, f. $ C ^ e stesse, i. y j 
 
 3d 
 Per. 
 
 * stesso, ~) himself, C eglino stessi, 
 or esso stesso, m. 5 or itself; ^ or essi stessi, m. 
 ella stessa, > herself, C elleno stesse, 
 
 or essa stessa, f. 3 0** itself; ^ or eisse stsse, f. 
 
 Tone's self, ^ 
 
 se stesso, m. J himself, I se sttssi, m. 
 
 5e stessa, f. j herself, [ se stesse, f. 
 
 L or itself; J 
 
 them- 
 selves 
 
106 
 
 ANALOGY. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Vld' W IN ESS A LtJCE dltTG 
 
 lucerne. (Dant. Par. 8.) 
 
 Quantunque il maggiore a 
 diciotC dnni non aggiugnesse, 
 qudndo ESSO MESSERTEDALDO, 
 ricchissimo venne a mdrte. 
 (Bocc. g. 2. n. 3.) 
 
 Tu NON mi PAR DESSO. 
 (Bocc. g. 9. n. 3.) 
 
 ELL' E BEN DESSA, ancora e 
 in vita. (Petr. s. 290.) 
 
 Chefarebbe egli s'fo MORISSJ, 
 fo? (Macch. Com.) 
 
 Tu Di' TUB PAROLE, TU J W 
 
 per me non mi terro mdi sdlva, 
 se noi non la incantidmo. (Bocc. 
 g. 7. n. 1.) 
 
 E'GLI E 1JNA COMPASSIONS A 
 
 VEDERLO. (Macch. Com.) 
 
 E'LLA NON ANDRA cosi, c/i' io 
 non te ne pdghi. (Boce. g. 9. 
 n. 5.) 
 
 ANDIAMO CON ESSO LUI A 
 ROMA. (Bocc. g. 2. n. 3.) 
 
 I' NON BO ben RIDIR com' i' 
 v* entrdi. (Dant. Inf. 1.) 
 
 E'l DEBBE AVERE 1NTESO, 
 
 che tu ,ragioni di lui. (Gell. 
 Circ. 2. 39.) 
 
 Ond' EI SI GITTAR tuttl IN 
 
 STJLLA SPIAGGIA. (Dant. Purg. 
 2.) 
 
 Laonde E' gli PEN so di volere 
 la seguente mattzna ristordre. 
 (Bocc. g. 10. n. 9.) 
 
 Mendti i gentiluomini nel 
 giardinOj cortesemente gli DO- 
 
 MANDO, CHI E' F6SSERO. (BoCC. 
 
 g. 10. n. 9.) 
 
 In that very light 1 saw 
 other luminaries. 
 
 Although the eldest was not 
 arrived to the age of eighteen, 
 when this same Messer Tedal- 
 do died very rich. 
 
 Thou dost not seem to me 
 thyself. 
 
 It is she herself, she is yet 
 alive. 
 
 What would he do if I should 
 die? 
 
 Thou mayest say what thou 
 pleasest; as for me I shall 
 never consider myself safe, if 
 we do not enchant her. 
 
 It excites pity to see him. 
 
 It shall not be so, that I will 
 not pay }^ou for it. 
 
 Let us go to Roms with him. 
 
 I cannot say how I entered 
 it. 
 
 He must have heard, that 
 thou speakest of him. 
 
 Wherefore they leaped all 
 upon the shore. 
 
 Therefore he thought to 
 restore them on the following 
 morning. 
 
 Having led tke gentlemen 
 in the garden, he courteously 
 asked them, who they were. 
 
PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 
 
 107 
 
 E in segno di .cid, ne rdeo 
 ME co delle sue cose piu care. 
 (Bocc. g. 2. n. 9.) 
 
 Miofiglio otf , e per che non 
 e TECO ? (Dant. Inf. 10.) 
 
 Quel giorno ch' w lascidi 
 grave, ejtensosa Madonna, e'l 
 mio cor SECO. (Petr. s. 212.) 
 
 I'o MEDESIMO non so quel 
 ch' i 1 mi voglio. (Petr. s. 103.) 
 
 .E tu t TU STESSO, talora a me 
 usbergo di mm gloria tu sembri. 
 (Alf. Saul. 2. 1.) 
 
 Ma com 9 &, che si gran rom6r 
 non suone Per dltri messi, o 
 per LEI STESSA il sentaf (Petr. 
 s. 213.) 
 
 Non come fidmma che per 
 forza e spenta,Ma che per 
 SE MEDESMA siconsume, (Petr. 
 Tri.) 
 
 And as a proof of this, I will 
 take with me those things 
 which are the most dear to her. 
 
 Where is my son, and why 
 is he not witk thee ? 
 
 That day when I left my 
 lady serious and pensive, and 
 my heart with her. 
 
 I know not myseif what I 
 want. 
 
 And thou, thyself, sometimes 
 seemest to me the shield of my 
 glory. 
 
 But how is it, that so great a 
 rumor does not sound through 
 other messengers, or. that she 
 does not hear it herself. 
 
 Not like a flame which is 
 extinguished by force, but like 
 one which consumes itself. 
 
 EXERCISE VIII. 
 
 I know, better than any other man, how to do 
 
 so, dltro udmo, far 
 
 that which I please. God never will ^have 
 
 do che voglio. Iddio mdi non amcL 
 
 me for this sin. Thou wilt ask 
 quisto peccdto. 
 
 dirdi 2 
 
 mercy on 
 
 misericdrdia \ di 
 
 her whether she wants any thing. You appear 
 lei se vudl nulla. parete 
 
 to 
 
 o be a man of God, how do you say such 
 uomo Dio, come ditel cotesto 
 
 words? Without expecting any reprehension from 
 pardla? Senza attendere ripfensione 
 
 you. The magistrate begun to have pity 
 
 Podestd. comincid ad aver compassi6nt 
 
108 ANALOGY. 
 
 1 upon j her. She pleases me so much, that I 
 I dii I pidce* mi 1 tdnto, che 
 
 could not express it. Having taken leave I of I him, 
 potrei 2 nonl dir^, lo. Preso commidtcfi \ da.1 \ ' 2 , 
 
 he I returned I to his house. They never return^ 
 I sene torno cdsa. mdi non rendono 2 
 
 it, and we return it 
 Zo, 1 , e rendidmo^ la* 
 
 as soon as we have 
 
 come abbidmo 2 
 
 used it. We are ready I to I do it, since 
 adoperdtcfi lal. sidmo presti \ di \ fdr^,lo, poicke 
 
 it pleases you. She would drive me out of the 
 place 2 vfi. scaccercbbc 2 mil fu6r 
 
 house. I have spoken I to him of you. We 
 cdsa. ko 2 rhgiondto 3 \ gli 1 
 
 make better work. You promised I to me I to 
 faccidmo lavorw. . prometteste* \ mi* \ di 
 
 let me speak with I your wife. 
 
 fdr^^mi partdre \ con la \ .vdstra 2 donna?. [State 
 
 joyful, I you are in your house. j Do not trust 
 lietamente, \ siete vostra? cdsa 1 . \ Non vi fiddte 
 
 to J them. They* had all gone to church. 
 di erano tuttc anddte chiesa. 
 
 It is he, himself. She I does not seem I I to 
 
 E 1 , non sembra \ di 
 
 lo herself. Many years (they) have not passed. 
 
 t :.,:? . molto 5 dnno 6 sono3 non* passdti 4 . 
 
 They went with him. Come with me. II have 
 
 - - Anddron : Venite . non 
 
 nothing j to do with thee. We have seen them 
 
 ho nitnte \ a far albidmo* veduti 3 Gli l 
 
 ourselves. She herself has brought I them I to me. 
 
 Thou hast said it thyself. They began to 
 - kdi* ditto 3 Lo 1 . - comincidrontf a* 
 
 speak amongst themselves. 
 
 ragiondre* Seco 1 z . 
 
 * They, in the feminine gender. 
 
CONJUNCTIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 109 
 
 Conjunctive Pronouns. 
 
 Singular. Plural, 
 
 let Per. ti, m. <fc f., ^ e me '> I ne or ci, m. & f. , J ^ ? s > 
 
 3dPe, ,,..*, { t ^ e h f' } ,i, m . & f., |jjj3 
 
 1^ZiorZ,*m., to him or it; Wro, m., to them ; 
 
 7 or Zo,* m., him or it ; gli or II f m., them ; 
 
 Ze,*f,, to her or it; Mro, f., to them ; 
 
 la,* f; , her or it ; Ze,* f, them. 
 
 3d Per. 
 
 Singular and Plural. 
 
 ' si, m. & 
 
 jTto one's slf, " 
 
 to himself, 
 J to hererelf, 
 ] to itself or 
 ^ to themselves; j 
 
 ^ of him or it, 
 , nc, m. & f, < of her or it, 
 ^ of them ; 
 
 Tone's self 7 
 I himself, 
 m. & f., <( herself, 
 j itself or 
 ^ themselves ; 
 
 C from him or it, 
 w, m. & f., < from her or it, 
 /from them. 
 
 Mi, ti, ne or ci, ui, are applied to animate beings 
 only ; the others may be applied both to animate and 
 inanimate beings. 
 
 Conjunctive pronouns take the place of personal 
 pronouns, when these pronouns are in the objective or 
 relation of attribution, and are closely connected with 
 a verb ; as, 
 
 MI poUte torre [for poUtt torre 
 
 A ME], 
 non TI pdssono mudvere [for 
 
 non pdssono muovere TE], 
 NE sar&bbe gran bidsimo [for 
 
 sarMe A NOI gran bidsimo], 
 
 you can take away from 
 
 me; 
 they cannot move thee ; 
 
 it would be in us a great 
 fault ; 
 
 * The pronouns z7, Z0, a, K, gli, le, appear, in orthogr phy, to bo th same 
 words^as the articles i'Z, lo, la, li, gli, le. The learner, however, will observe, 
 that when the words i/, Zo, &c., are followed by a noww, a verb in the irtfnitiv* 
 wood, or any other word used as a noun, they are always articles ; but whom 
 'Ihey are followed by a Terb in a tense of the indicativ , the conjunctive, or "he 
 conditional mood, or when they are joined to a verb, thej arc alway* * 
 
 pronouns. 
 
 10 
 
no 
 
 ci ha guiddti [for ha guiddti 
 
 NOI], 
 OLI vinne a memoria [for vtn- 
 
 ne a memoria A LUI], 
 LI si bra, mostrdto [for si ira, 
 
 mostrdto A LUI], 
 LI conddnni [for conddnni 
 
 LORO], 
 
 IL chiamb [for chiamb LUI], 
 LO avtsse fdtto duUnte [for 
 
 avtssefdtto LUI doUnte,~\ 
 LA mandb [for mandb LEI], 
 LE poUsse torndre [for pottsse 
 
 torndre A LEI], 
 LE donerb [for donerb LORO], 
 & paruto LORO [for ^ra pa- 
 
 mfo A LORO], 
 si t^efe davdnti [for v&fc rfa- 
 
 vdnh' A SE], 
 si Zaseid cadtre [for toct'6 ca- 
 
 ctere SE], 
 
 mipidn di parldryv [for^id- 
 
 cc c: me diparldre DI ESSO], 
 
 a qudn'i NE giactvuno [for a 
 
 qudnti DI LORO giactvano], 
 
 ANALOGY. 
 
 it has guided us ; 
 
 there came into his mind ; 
 
 he had shown himself to 
 
 him; 
 it should condemn them ; 
 
 she called him ; 
 it had afflicted him ; 
 
 he sent her ; 
 
 it might cause her; 
 
 I will give them ; 
 
 it had seemed to them ; 
 
 he sees before him ; 
 she let herself fall; 
 
 it pleases me to speak of 
 
 it; 
 from as many of them as 
 
 were abed. 
 
 If the conjunctive pronouns mi, ti, ct, vi, li, lo, le, la, 
 si, ne, are followed by a verb beginning with a vowel, 
 they commonly lose the i and take an apostrophe in its 
 stead; as, 
 
 M' hA rotto, 
 c' immdlle, 
 L' offendtva, 
 N' Avrtmmo, 
 
 he has bruised me ; 
 
 thou suckest us ; 
 
 he offended them ; 
 
 we should have from him. 
 
 When they are preceded by a verb they are joined to 
 it so as to form one single word ; as, 
 
 dondrMi, 
 pdrveTi, 
 
 to give me ; 
 
 it appeared to thee ; 
 
 to send him ; 
 
CONJUNCTIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 11 
 
 , he being in want ; 
 
 telling him. 
 
 In using the pronouns il, lo, li, gli, la, le, we follow 
 the rules already given with regard to the articles il, lo, 
 la, < the ' ; as, 
 
 IL consentiy 
 chi LO scrisse, 
 L' Amero, 
 GLI Aspettdva, 
 
 thou consentest to it ; 
 he who wrote it ; 
 I will love him ; 
 he expected them. 
 
 The pronouns mi, ti, ci, vi, si, ne, are often used 
 as mere expletives ; as, 
 
 io MI 5o?io, I am ; 
 
 se tu TI hdi posto mente, whether thou hast minded ; 
 
 s empre che tu ci viverdi. as long as thou livest ; 
 
 t'o che voi vi dite, what you say ; 
 
 si uscl del paldgio, he went out the palace ; 
 
 the NK fosse del budn what had become of the good 
 udmo, man. 
 
 xx AMP L ES, 
 
 V6l MI POTETE Tt)RRE qudntO 
 
 tengo, e DonAKMi,siccdmev6stro 
 uomo a chi vi pidce. (Bocc. g. 
 3. n.9.) 
 
 S' egli PARVETF il fallo mio 
 cosi grdnde, che ^ON TI rtissoNO 
 Mc6vERE a pietdtc alcuna le 
 amdre Idgrime, ne gli umili 
 prieghi, muovafi almeno questo 
 sdlo mio atto. (Bocc. g. 8. n. 7.) 
 
 11 MANDARLO fuOI'l dl COLSCL 
 
 ndstra cos), infermo NE SAREBBK 
 
 GRAN BIASIMO. (BoCC. g. 1. n.l.) 
 
 II vostro senno t piu che il 
 nostro avvedimento, ci HA GUI- 
 BATI. (Bocc. Intr.) 
 
 BlSOGNANDOGLI WIO, 
 
 quantitd di dandri, GLI VENNE 
 A MEMOKIA tm ricco Giudco. 
 (Bocc. g. 1. n. 3.) 
 
 You can take away from me 
 all I have, and give me, like 
 one of your men, to whomso- 
 ever it pleases you. 
 
 If my fault appeared to thee 
 so great, that neither my bitter 
 tears, nor my humble prayers, 
 can move thee to pity, at 
 least let this single act of mine 
 move thee. 
 
 To send him out of our house, 
 so infirm as he is, would be in 
 us a great fault. 
 
 Your wisdom, more than our 
 foresight, has guided us. 
 
 Being in want of a good sum 
 of money, there came into hi 
 mind a rich Jew. 
 
ANALOGY. 
 
 11 stgutnte, di appdrve per 
 visidne Cristo a Ruberto, DICEN- 
 DOLI, che in fdrrna di lebbroso 
 
 LI SI ERA MOSTRATO, VOlendo 
 
 provdre la sua pietd. (Giov. 
 Vill. 1. 4. c. 18.) 
 
 O LI CONDAKW i a sempiterno 
 pidnto. (Petr. s. 214.) 
 
 Assdi volte invdno IL CHIAMO. 
 (Bocc. g. 4.n. 6.) 
 
 Se d'una cosa sola non LO 
 AVESSE la fortuna FATTO DO- 
 LEKTE. (Boec g. 5. n. 1.) 
 
 Ad una lor possessions LA nc 
 MANDO. (Bocc. g. 5. n. 7.) 
 
 Cumincid a dubitdre, non quel 
 suo guarddr cost fiso movesse 
 la sua rusticitd ad alcuna cosa, 
 che vtrgogna LE POTESSE TOR- 
 HARK. (Bocc. g. 5. n. 1.) 
 
 5' elle vi pidcciono t w LIB vi 
 DONERO. (Bocc. g. 2. n. 9.) 
 
 JVe ERA ancora LOR 
 alcuna volta, tdnto gaiamente 
 eantdr gli usignuoli, quanta 
 quella mattina pareva. (Boce. 
 g. 7. Proem.) 
 
 DAVANTI si VEDK due, che 
 verso lui con una lanterna in 
 mdno Tenitno. (Bocc. g. 2. n. 
 5.) 
 
 E'ssa sopra il sdno del Cdnte 
 si LASCIO con la tisia CADERE. 
 (Bocc. g. 2. n. &.) 
 
 E'gU ill PlAcE DI PARLARME. 
 
 (Bocc. g. 1. n. 7.) 
 E'gli, pianamtnte anddndo, 
 
 A aUANTI NE GIACEVANO, a tutti 
 
 in simil mani6rataglid icaptlli. 
 (Bocc. g. 3. n. 2.) 
 
 M' HA con un bastone tutto 
 SOTTO. (Bocc. g. 7 n. 7.) 
 
 The following day, Christ 
 appeared in a vision to Robert, 
 saying to him, that he had 
 shown himself to him in the 
 form of a leper, to try his pity. 
 
 Or it should condemn them 
 to eternal woe. 
 
 She called him many times 
 in vain. 
 
 If fortune had not afflicted 
 him in one thing alone. 
 
 He sent her to a farm of 
 theirs. 
 
 She began to doubt, lest her 
 looking so fixedly should more 
 his uncouthness to do some- 
 thing, which might cause her 
 shame. 
 
 If you like them, I will giy 
 them to you. 
 
 Nor had it ever seemed to 
 them, that the nightingales had 
 at any time sung so cheerfully, 
 as they appeared to do that 
 
 He sees before him two per- 
 sons, who came towards him 
 with a lantern in their hands. 
 
 She let her head fall on the 
 bosom of the Count. 
 
 It pleases me to speak of it. 
 
 He, walking softly, from as 
 many of them as were abed, cut 
 a tuft of hair in the same man- 
 ner. 
 
 He has bruised me all over 
 with a stick. 
 
CONJUNCTIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 113 
 
 2 nelV eterna pot si mal 
 'iMn6LLE. (Dant. Inf. 12.) 
 
 Dicendo che quello che dovea 
 rft/ender/eL'oFFENDEVA. (Fav. 
 Esop. 67.) 
 
 Sc egli sapesse lavordr V6rto t 
 io mi credo, che noi N'AVREMMO 
 buon servigio. (Bocc. g. 3. n. 
 1.) 
 
 JVe tu IL CONSENTI, Amor6. 
 (Tass. Ger. 2. 15.) 
 
 Galeoltofu il libra, e CHI LO 
 SCRISSE. (Dant. Inf. 5.) 
 
 I'o ho amdto, ed dmo GuiscAr- 
 do, e quanta viverd L'AMERO. 
 (Bocc. g. 4. n. 1.) 
 
 GLI ASPETTAVA. (BOCC. g. 
 
 3. n. 7.) 
 
 I'o MI SONO un povero pelle- 
 grmo. (Bocc. Filoc. 1. 5.) 
 
 I'o non so, SE TU T'HAI POSTO 
 MENTE, come noi sidmo tenute 
 strttte. (Bocc. g. 3. n. 1.) 
 
 Con tuo ddnno ti ricorderdi, 
 
 SEMPKE CHE TU CI VIVERAI, del 
 
 ncme mio. (Bocc. g. 6. n.,4.) 
 
 Anddte, goccioloni ; vdi non 
 sap6te cid CHE voi vi D!TE. 
 (Bocc. g. 6. n. 6.) 
 
 DEL PALAGIO s'usci, e fug- 
 gissi a cdsa. (Bocc. g. 2. n. 8.) 
 
 La ddnna se ne venne, e DEL 
 BUON UOMO domandd, CHE NE 
 FOSSI. (Bocc. g. 2. n. 2.) 
 
 And in the eternal [life] 
 thus miserably thou suckest us 
 
 Saying that he who ought to 
 have defended them, offended 
 them. 
 
 If he knew how to cultivate 
 the garden, I believe that we 
 should have from him good 
 service. 
 
 Nor thou dost consent to it, 
 O Love. 
 
 The book, and he who wrote 
 it, were [to us] Galeottoi 
 
 I have loved, and love GUIS- 
 cardo, and will love him ai 
 long as I live. 
 
 He expected them. 
 I am a poor pilgrim. 
 
 I know not, whether thou 
 hast minded, how close we are 
 kept. 
 
 To thy sorrow thou wilt re- 
 member my name, as long as 
 thou livest. 
 
 Go away, fools ; you do not 
 know what you say. 
 
 He went out the palace, 
 and fled to his house. 
 
 The woman came, and asked 
 what had become of the good 
 man. 
 
 When the pronouns mt, ti, gli, ne or ci, vi, .si, are 
 
 immediately followed by the pronouns lo, la, gti, U, le, 
 
 ne, they are generally united and form a single word; as, 
 
 mi lo, MELO, him or it to me ; ci li, CELT, them to us ; 
 
 'ti la, TELA. her or it to thee ; vi gli, VEGLI, them to you. 
 
 10* 
 
114 ANALOGS 
 
 Union of the Pronouns m, w, GLI, NE or ci, ri, si, 
 with the Pronouns LO, LA, GLI, LI, NE. 
 
 MI, to me y 
 
 mi lo, (inviate) MELO,* (send) him or it to me j 
 
 mi la, (mostrate) MELA, (show) her or it to me ? 
 
 m * #/* ) C , 
 
 mi /t, | (prestate) < MELI, > (7enrf) them to me ; 
 
 mi le, ) C MELE, 3 
 
 T (give) to me of it, or t<x 
 
 mi ne, (date) MENE ? < me of them ; some of it, 
 
 ( [or some of them, 
 
 TI, to thee ; 
 
 it lo, TELO* (invio), (I send) him or it to thee ; 
 
 ti Ja, TELA (mostro), (I show) her or it to thee ; 
 
 ti gli, TEGLI 
 
 ti li, 
 
 TELI > (presto), (I lend) them to thee ; 
 
 ti It, TELE ) 
 
 GLI, to him or her ; 
 K fo, OLIELO (invia), J ^ sends ) him ^ 
 
 GLI^LA (mostra), | ^ Ae slww 
 
 gK It, OLIELI ) /n-i-t,-, 5 ^ e lends) them to him or 
 
 glile, OL,6LE ^P rt ^ [her; 
 
 f (he gives) to him or her of 
 
 7 . 5 GLIENE ?Mi\ ) it, or to him or her of them; 
 
 **> \ L ^ NE J ^ A ) S _to her of it, or to her of 
 
 [them ; &c. 
 
 * Some writers use these pronouns, with exception of glielo^ &c., separate ; 
 
 UK JLO 8E LO. NE LO OT CE LO, &e. 
 
CONJUNCTIVE PRONOUNS. 115 
 
 NE or ci, to us 5 
 
 (mostrate) < (show) her or it to us ; 
 
 
 ne gli, ^ / NEGLI, 
 
 or ci glij I I or CEGLI, 
 
 or lift, / (P*t*te) <^CELI, / ( knd ' them to U8 ' 
 ne le V / NELE, 
 
 or ci fe, / \ or CELE, 
 
 (date\ CENE J (8 im ) to us of i4 ' or to u * 
 
 tnc ' NJE) ^ J [ofthem;&c. 
 
 vi, to you ; 
 
 vi lo, VELO (inviamo), (we send) him or it to you ; 
 
 vi Za, VELA (mostriamo), (we show) her or it to you ; 
 
 vi gli, VEGLI i 
 
 vi ft, VELI > (prestiamo), (we lend) them to you ; 
 
 vi /e, VELE ) 
 
 ^n e ,, v^ (d^o), s^^r^Tr^Vc: 
 
 si, to one's self; 
 
 Vi lo, SELO (inviano), J ^% ^rf; him or it to 
 
 ^ [themselves ; 
 
 M ia, SELA (mostrano), J ^ e ^ Mo ^ r }! er or * to 
 
 ^ [themselves ; 
 
 si gli, SEGLI ) r ,., , ,, ., 
 
 W /7 m?r T V rnv^^tann^ 5 I ^ C 3/ ' n / them to them - 
 
 S SLE S < [">! 
 
 C ^/iey g^vcj to themselves 
 
 sine, SENE (danno), < of it, or to themselves of 
 
 < [them; &c. 
 
 MeJo 9 mo, glielo, nelo or celo, veto, selo, &c., 
 before a verb beginning with a consonant, except z, and 
 ^ followed by another consonant 9 often drop the o ; 
 
116 ANALOGY. 
 
 and before a verb beginning with a vowel, drop the o 
 and take an apostrophe in its stead ; as", 
 
 MEL visse, he told it to me ; *> 
 
 TEL Trarrbj I will draw it for you ; 
 
 - non GLIEL ceZat, I did not conceal it from him ; 
 
 GLIEL' \ptrsi, I revealed it to him ; 
 
 CEL' Avetefatta, you have deceived us ; 
 
 SEN' vntrb, she entered. 
 
 When the pronouns mi, ti, ct, vi, gli, U> &c., are 
 preceded by the adverb ecco, c behold', they form with 
 this a single word ; as, 
 
 ^ccomi, behold me ; 
 
 Decoct, behold us ; 
 
 cccoZc, behold them. 
 
 When the pronoun lo is preceded by the adverb non, 
 'no, not', it is, more elegantly, changed into il and joined 
 with the adverb in a single word ; as, 
 
 non t7, NOL vide, she does not see him ; 
 
 non il, NOL ntgo, I do not deny it. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Tu dV (Z/drMELO vedere ne' Thou sayest, that thou wilt 
 
 mm. (Bocc. g. 6. n. 4.) make rne see it amongst the 
 
 living. 
 
 MEL BISBE il padre mio, ch'io My father told me, that 
 
 mi guarddssi Di per gid J, should take care never to 
 
 mdi nella Mcssenia il piede. set my foot in Messenia. 
 (MafivMer. 3. 4.) 
 
 Per vederfdre il tomo a qu& To see those v maccaroni 
 
 moGcherdni, e fcfrMENE una sa- falling down, and give myself 
 tolla. (Bocc. g. 8. n. 3.) a bellyful. 
 
 Sznza alcun maestro w TEL -Without any master, I will 
 
 TRARRO ottimamentc. (Bocc. draw it for you very well, 
 g. 7. n. 9.) 
 
 I'o non mene maravzglio, nl I do not wonder at it, nor do 
 
 TENE so ripigliare. (Bocc. g. I know how to reprove you for 
 3. n. 3.) it, 
 
CONJUNCTIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 117 
 
 I f o ch'era d'ubbidir disideroso 
 
 NoN GLIEL CELAI ma tllttO 
 
 GLIEL' APERSI. (Dant. Inf. 
 10.) 
 
 Gli amici noi albidmo quali 
 CEGLI eleggidmo. (Bocc. g. 
 
 La ddnna udendo questo, e 
 dopo molte riconfermazidni 
 /(i^eLENE dal Zeppa, credendolo t 
 disse. (Bocc. g. 8. n. 8.) 
 
 Vedindo I'uomo la semplicitd 
 del fanciullo GLIENE vennc 
 pietd. (Matt. Vill. 10. 30.) 
 
 V6i CEL' AVETE FATTA. 
 (Bocc. g. 8. n. 9.) 
 
 Qudnte CENE vedete voi, It 
 eui bellezze si6n fdtte cdme It 
 mie? (Bocc. g. 4. n. 2.) 
 
 C6me questo aweniito mi sia^ 
 iritvemente VEL faro chidro. 
 (Bocc. g. 10. n. 4.) 
 
 Mi place di /arvENE piu 
 chidre con una piccola novelUtta. 
 (Bocc. g. 1. n. 3.) 
 
 In processo di tempo SB LB 
 riprese. (Bocc. g. 7. n. 3.) 
 
 - SEN' ENTRO nella cdsa del 
 pover uomo. (Bocc. g. 5. n. 3.) 
 
 Lo scalar e, accostdtosi alVu- 
 sciOjdisse: " E^CCOMI qui, ma- 
 ddnna." (Bocc. g. 8. n. 7.) 
 
 E'CCOLE, die ella medesima 
 piang&ndo meV ha riportdte. 
 (Bocc. g. 3. n. 3.) 
 
 E'lla o lo spr6zza, o NOL VEDE, 
 o nons'avvede. (Tass. Ger. 2. 
 16.) 
 
 I f o NOL posso negdr, e NOL 
 NEGO. (Petr. s. 202.) 
 
 I, who was desirous of obey- 
 ing, did not conceal it, but re- 
 vealed to him all. 
 
 *. We have such friends as we 
 choose them for us. 
 
 The lady hearing this, and 
 after many confirmations of it 
 made to her by Zeppa, believ- 
 ing it, said . 
 
 The man seeing the sim- 
 plicity of the boy, took pity up- 
 on him. 
 
 You have deceived us. 
 
 How many of them do you 
 see, .whose beauties are such 
 as mine ? 
 
 How this happened to me, 
 I will explain to you briefly. 
 
 It pleases me to make you 
 more conscious of it, with a 
 small tale. 
 
 In the progress of time he 
 took them back. 
 
 She entered in the house of 
 the poor man. 
 
 The scholar, coming to the 
 door, said : " Behold me here ; 
 madam." 
 
 Behold them, which she her- 
 self weeping has brought back 
 to me. 
 
 She either despises him, or 
 does not see him, or does not 
 understand. 
 
 I cannot deny it, and do not 
 deny it. 
 
118 ANALOGY. 
 
 EXERCISE IX. 
 
 But what wishest thou that I should say to her 
 
 Ma che vudi che dica z 1 
 
 for you, I if it happens that I should speak 
 
 da tiia pdrte, \ se avvidne che favdlli* 
 
 to her? They will rob us, and perhaps will take 
 ruberdnnd* *, e% forsc 4 torrdnno^ 
 
 (to us) even I our I life. I will lodge you 
 
 5 dncke la \ vita. albcrgherd% 1 
 
 willingly, as I can. The youth told him every 
 volentieri, come potro. giovanttto disse 2 J 6gni 
 
 thing. I will pardon him willingly, and pardon 
 
 c6sa. perdoneroS 2 Voleniieril, e 4 perdono 7 
 
 him now. He gave to him his I benediction, 
 
 6 ,5ra 5 . _ Di^ 
 
 lasua I bcnedizione, 
 
 holding him for a very holy man. How 1 doei 
 tentndo^, sdnto uomo. Che \ 
 
 it appear | to thee? Have I well kept 
 
 1 ? ho'2 3 ben* serbdta 5 
 
 my 
 la* 
 
 promise to you ? My brother writes to me, that 
 promessa* 1 ? mio3 frattllo* Scrive 1 ^, *, che 
 
 without any fail, I I should send 
 sinza alcun fdllo, \ dbbia manddti* 
 
 gold florins ; I otherwise 1 I his 
 
 to him one thousand 
 
 <Wro2 Jiorino 1 ; | se non? \ \ la" 7 
 
 head will be cut oft* 
 testa 8 sard 6 taglidta* 
 
 (to him.) I have not deceived you I to I deprive 
 4 . Ao 3 non 1 inganndta 4 \ per \ tor^ 
 
 you of I your property. I Certainly although thou 
 il vdstro. Certo quantunque 
 
 affirmest it, I I do not believe I that thou believes! 
 aftrmi* \. 3 | non crtdo 4 \ che 5 e creda* 
 
 it. Having turned himself to I his I wife, he 
 7. Volto I la I moglie, 
 
 asked her if she had had them. If thou I dost 
 domando 2 1 se 3 avesse 6 avuti 4 5 . Se \ non 
 
 not do it, I thou wilt repent thyself of it so many 
 fdi 2 lo^y \ pentcrdi 6 tdnte 
 
 times, that thou 1 wilt. die I of it. 
 volt*, cA I vorrdi morire 2 \ l . 
 
RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 119 
 
 He granted it to him freely. I want to go 
 concedetteS Liber amente^. Vdglio and arc 
 
 and I tell him, that he j should go away: Leave 
 
 a j dir^ 1, che \ sene vdda. Ldscia^, 
 
 me, I beg it of thee (thee of it). That which he 
 , prego* 1 Quello che 
 
 afterwards said to me, I do not dare to tell it to 
 pot disse% 1 , non oso dir^, 
 
 you, if first you do not pardon me. The song 
 , se prima non per donate* 1. 2 canzone 3 
 
 being finished, the master said : " What dost thou think 
 Finital, maestro disse : " Che 
 
 of it (does it apvear to thee of it)?" You did not 
 
 pdre'2 non 
 
 believe it, when I told it to you. Having kept 
 eredevdte 2 1, qudndo* dissi* 4 . Avendo^, serbdti 2 
 
 them full a year I to I return them to him, I gave 
 gli 1 len 3 4 dnno b \ per 6 \ render 7 ^, 9 8 ^, 10 diedi l ~ 
 
 them away for the love of God. BehoM me ; what 
 11 amdr Dw. ; che 
 
 I do you want I of I me ? Behold one (of them), 
 volete I da j f 1^ una3 z 
 
 behold another of them, 
 'x^ uridltra 3 2 . 
 
 RELATIVE AND INTERROGATIVE 
 P R O N O U N S . 
 
 Relative Pronouns. 
 
 Singular and Plural. 
 
 Chi, m. & f. who, he or she that, they that ; 
 
 $;:&?:} wh ' which ' that ' 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 quale, m. & f. who, which, qudli, m. & f 
 
 Chi refers to persons only ; che, ctii, qudte, both to 
 persons and things* 
 
1QO ANALOGY. 
 
 Che is chiefly used in the subjective, and citi in all 
 other relations, but the subjective; chi, quale, are used 
 in all their relations ; as, 
 
 CHI qfftndc, 6dia, he that offends, hates ; 
 
 A cm non si mttte navi* to him who does not set him- 
 
 gdndo, self navigating; 
 
 qutlla, CHE io ctrco, she, whom I seek ; 
 
 gli occhi DI CHE io parldi, the eyes of which I spoke ; 
 
 A cui si amnidglia, to which she unites herself; 
 
 DACUI fosse. V ingiuria ri- from whom the offence was 
 
 ceviua, received ; 
 
 IL QUALE tra piactvole who was an agreeable young 
 
 giovane, man ; 
 
 pr6sso ALLA QUALE ska ri- near which should be situated 
 
 posto un diletUvole piano, a delightful plain ; 
 
 uno BE' quALi ira chiama- one of whom was called Pan> 
 
 to PanfUo, philus ; 
 
 i nomi DELLE QUALI roc- whose names I would relate* 
 
 conterti, 
 
 Cui is generally used instead of chi, che, qudle ; as, 
 
 non guarddndo cui [or CHI] not minding whom she jeered; 
 
 motteggidsse, 
 colti, cui [or CHE] tgli amd- she, whom he loved ; 
 
 va, 
 colui, cui [or IL QUALE] he, whom I killed, 
 
 io uccisi, 
 
 Che is sometimes used instead of qudle ; as, 
 
 un cavalitr, CHE [or IL QUA- a knight, whom Italy honors ; 
 
 LE] Italia onora t 
 
 la misiria in CHE [or NEL- the misfortune into which she 
 
 LA QU^LE] tra venuta, had fallen : 
 
 Sometimes, it is used with the article il, in the signifi- 
 cation of la qudl cosa, * which thing' ; as, 
 
 JL CHE [or LA QUAL COSA] which thing displeased them ; 
 dispidcque loro, 
 
 BEL CHE avvedutosi, which thing he having ob- 
 
 served. 
 
RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 121 
 
 Sometimes it is used in the signification of cosa, 
 * thing' ; che cosa, c what thing' ; as, 
 
 un bel CHE [or una bella a fine thing j 
 cos A], 
 
 sinza saper CHE for CHE without knowing what thing 
 COSA] sperare, to hope : 
 
 And sometimes it is equivalent to the English pronoun 
 what' only; as, 
 
 CHE doldre io sento, what pain I feel ; 
 
 CHE dance tu di', what stories thou tellest 
 
 Che before a vowel drops the e r and takes an 
 apostrophe in its stead ; as, 
 
 CH J Eo-Zi e usdto, which is wont ; 
 
 di CH' io parlai, of which I spoke. 
 
 Quale is sometimes used instead of chi; as, 
 
 f6lle e QUALE [or CHI] crtde, foolish is he who helieves ; 
 QUALE [or CHI] piu possMe, he who [possesses] has more : 
 
 And sometimes it is equivalent to the English pronoun 
 * what ' ; as, 
 
 /o'sse la cagidne, what the cause was ; 
 
 quALE fosse V hnimo di lei, what her mind was. 
 
 Qudle, unless followed by z, or s followed by another 
 consonant, in the singular drops the e; and in the plu- 
 ral makes quai, and qua'? as, 
 
 QU^L amore, what love ; 
 
 la quAL cosa, which thing ; 
 
 t qu^i vizj, which vices ; 
 
 dlle quA* lettere, to which letters. 
 
 To avoid the ambiguity, which would arise in Ital- 
 ian, from the inversion of the different words of a sen- 
 
 U 
 
122 ANALOGY. 
 
 tence, when the pronouns che, quale, refer lo the 
 object of the proposition, they are changed for the 
 pronoun cui. Thus the phrase, { the city which the 
 wood conceals', if * city' is the subject of the proposi- 
 tion, is rendered la cittd CHE or la Q.UA'LE il bosco ascon- 
 de, < the city which conceals the wood' ; but if c city' is 
 the object of the proposition, then it is rendered la citta 
 cui ilbosco ascbnde, ' the city which the wood conceals' ; 
 as, 
 
 Vuomo CHE Dio non teme, the man who does not fear 
 
 God; 
 
 f udmo cui sdnno piglia, a man who is seized by sleep. 
 
 Instead of di cui, del or dilla quale, dii or delle 
 quali ; da cui, ddl qudh ; con cui, col quale ; per cui, 
 per lo quale, &c., we often find used the adverb onrfe, 
 which then assumes the nature of a relative pronoun ; as, 
 
 quei sospiri ONDE [or DI those sighs with which I 
 cui] io nudriva il cuore, nourished my heart ; 
 
 nilla prigione ONDE [or in the prison from which she 
 DALLA QU^LE] k. sciolta, is released ; 
 
 ogni Idccio ONDK [or COL every tie with which my 
 QUALE] U mio core & heart is bound ; 
 
 awinto, 
 
 quillo usciuolo ONDE [or that little door through which 
 PER LO QUALE] 6ra en- he had entered. 
 
 trdto, 
 
 Before a vowel, onde drops the e, and takes an apos- 
 trophe instead of it ; as, 
 
 OND' io, of which I ; 
 
 OND' Era, through which he [was] had. 
 
 Chi, che, cui, are varied with the prepositions only ; 
 quale is varied both with the prepositions and the article 
 il or la, c the', according to the gender of the object it 
 refers to. 
 
RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 123 
 
 The prepositions di } , are often elegantly suppressed before 
 
 .';;; as, 
 
 in cdsa [di] cui era morto t 
 
 v6i [a] cui fortuna ha posto 
 in mdno ilfrdno, 
 
 in whose house he had died ; 
 
 you, into whose hands fortune 
 has put the reins. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 CHI Ol'FEIfDE, ODIA, 6 UOU 
 
 dimcntica. (Dav. Vit. Agr.) 
 
 Qucl piacere, CH' EGLI E 
 USATO di dare A CHI trdppo SON 
 si METTE n& suoi pclagki NA- 
 VIGANDO. (Bocc. Proem.) 
 
 QUELLA, CH'iO CERCO C 71071 
 
 ritrdvo in terra. (Petr. s. 34.) 
 
 GLI OCCHI DI CH'IO PARLAI 
 si caldamente. (Fetr. s. 251.) 
 
 Moltisongli animdli A ct7i 
 si AMMCJGLIA. (Dant. Inf. 1.) 
 
 Nella mente ritorndndosi chi 
 egli era, e qudl FOSSE L'lNGitJ- 
 RIA mcEVtJTA, c perche, e DA 
 cuj. (Bocc. g. 8. n. 7.) 
 
 Dioneo, IL auALE, ollre ad 
 ognidltro, ERA PIACEVOL GIO- 
 VANE. (Bocc. Introd.) 
 
 U'Tia montdgna dspra ederta, 
 
 PRESSO ALLA dUALE UN BEL- 
 
 j.issiMO pidno e dilettevolc sia 
 rip6sto. (Bocc. Introd.) 
 
 DE' Q.UALI 1JNO ERA chl(L~ * 
 
 mito PAMFILO. (Bocc. Introd.) 
 
 Sette gidvani donnc, i NOMI 
 DELLE auALi io in prdpria fdr- 
 maracconterei. (Bocc. Introd.) 
 
 NON GUARDANDO CUI MOT- 
 
 TEGGIASSE, credetido vlncere fu 
 -cinta.. (Bocc. g. 1. n. 10.) 
 
 COLEI maritdndOj cui EGLI 
 AMAVA. (Bocc. g. 10. n. 6.) 
 
 He that offends, hates, and 
 does not forget. 
 
 That pleasure, which it is 
 wont to give to him who does 
 not set himself navigating 
 too much through its seas. 
 
 She whom I seek, and do 
 not find on earth. 
 
 The eyes of which I spoke so 
 warmly. 
 
 Many are the animals to 
 which she unites herself. 
 
 Revolving in his mind, who 
 he was, and what the offence 
 received was, and why, and 
 ;from whom received. 
 
 Dioneo, who was agreeable 
 beyond every other young 
 
 A mountain rough and steep, 
 near which is situated a very 
 beautiful and delightful plain. 
 
 One of whom was called 
 Pamphilus. 
 
 Seven young women, whose 
 names I Would relate in their 
 true form. 
 
 Not minding whom she 
 jeered, believing to conquer 
 she was conquered. 
 
 Marrying her, whom he 
 loved. 
 
124 
 
 ANALOGY. 
 
 COLIJI, ctfi fo cccftfi. 
 (Bocc. g. 10. n. 8.) 
 
 S6pra zl mdnte Tarpeo, can- 
 zcn, vcdrdi UN CAVALIER, CH' 
 
 ITALIA tutta ON6RA. (PetT. C. 
 
 6.) 
 
 Diana, che conosceva LA MI- 
 SERIA IN CHE Biancafidre ERA 
 VEstjTA, temper 6 le sue ire con 
 giiisto freno. (Bocc. Filoc. 1. 
 
 Avevan sentito perck presa 
 la Ninetta fdsse ; IL CHE fdrte 
 DispiAcoruE LORG. (Bocc. g. 4. 
 n.3.) 
 
 DEL CHE AWEDtfrosi Mar- 
 celto^ disse. (Dav. Stor. ). 4.) 
 
 Mi pareva UN BEL CHE Ves- 
 sernefudra. (Bern. rim. 1. 74.) 
 
 La gidvane prese Iu6no augic- 
 rio d' aver questo n6me udito, 
 e comincid a SPERAR SENZA 
 
 SAFER CHE. (BoCC. g. 5. D. 2.) 
 
 Dio il sa, CHE DOLC^RE to 
 SENTO. (Bocc. g. 5. n. 10.) 
 
 Po non so che rfndreuccio, ne 
 CHE CIANCE son quclle, che TU 
 Di*. (Bocc. g. 7. n. 5.) 
 
 F6LLE E QUAL CREDE, eke 
 
 per sudi consigli mudver possa 
 Vdrdine del citlo. (Dittam.) 
 
 QDAL PIU genie POSSIEDE 
 Colui e piu da 1 su6i nemici av- 
 v6Uo. (Petr. c\ 29.) 
 
 Laonde fdtto ckiamdre il 
 Siniscalco, e domanddto auiL 
 FOSSE del romlre LA CAGIONE. 
 (Bocc. g. 6. Proem.) 
 
 La donna, conoscendo CIUAL 
 r6ssE L'ANIMO pi LEI, lasciS 
 stare le parole. (Bocc. g. 2. n, 
 8.) 
 
 QUAL AMORE avrcble i sospiri 
 di Titofdtti a Gisippo nel cudr 
 serUire.se non costei? (Bocc. 
 g. 10. n. 6.) 
 
 He, whom I killed. 
 
 On the Tarpeian mountain, 
 O Song, thou wilt see a knight^ 
 whom all Italy honors. 
 
 Diana, who knew the mis- 
 fortune into which Biancafiore 
 had fallen, moderated her anger 
 with a proper restraint. 
 
 They had heard why Ninetta 
 had been taken ; which thing 
 displeased them much. 
 
 Which thing Marcellus har- 
 
 ing observed, said. 
 
 Tt appeared to me a fine thin/^ 
 to be out of ft. 
 
 The girl took it as a good 
 omen, to have heard this name, 
 and began to hope, without 
 knowing what [thing] to hope. 
 
 God knows [it] what pain I 
 feeL 
 
 1 know not what Andreuccio, 
 or what stories these are which 
 thou tellest. 
 
 Foolish is he who believes, 
 that be can change the decrees 
 of heaven by his deliberations. 
 
 He who has. more subjects, 
 is surrounded by more enemies. 
 
 Having, therefore, caused the 
 senechal to be called, and hav- 
 ing asked what the cause of the 
 noise was. 
 
 The woman, knowing what 
 her mind was, abandoned the 
 conversation. 
 
 What love could the sighs 
 of Titus, have caused Gisippus 
 to feel in his heart, if not that of 
 her. 
 
RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 125 
 
 LA Q.UAL c6sA veggtndo An- 
 dreucdo. (Boec. g. 2. n. 5.) 
 
 vizj procedono da 
 <;uesta xclenosa radicc. (Aram. 
 Ant. 317.) 
 
 A'LLE Q.UA' LETTEKE io mi 
 rimctto. (Casa. lett, 18.) 
 
 Che atttnde ciascun UOM CHE 
 Dfo VON TEME. (Dant. Inf. 3,) 
 
 E cdddi c6me L' UOM cui 
 SONKO riGLiA. (Dant. Inf. 3.) 
 
 V6i che ascoltdte in rime 
 xpdrse il sudno Di aujsi sospf- 
 
 RI OND* fo NUDRIVA IL CUORE. 
 
 (Petr. e. 1.) 
 NELLA BELLA PRIGIONE OND' 
 
 OR A E SCIOLTA P6cO CTtt Stdtd 
 
 ancor V alma gentile. (Petr. e. 
 44.) 
 
 /' agglo in 6dio la spente, e i 
 deliri Ed OGNI LACCJO ONDE'L 
 
 Mfo COR E AYVINTO. (Petr, S~ 
 
 75.) 
 PER auELLo USCIUOLO, OND' 
 
 KRA ENTRATO, il miSC, fufoi. 
 
 (Bocc. g. 2. n. 2.) 
 
 It budn uomo, is CASA cui 
 MORTO ^RA, disse. (Bocc. g. 4. 
 n. 8.) 
 
 V6l, CIJI FORTUNA IJA POSTO 
 
 is MA NO it frtno Dellc belle 
 conirdde. (Petr. c, 29.) 
 
 thing Andreuccie 
 
 Which 
 seeing. 
 
 Which vices proceed from 
 this venomous root. 
 
 To which letters I refer. 
 
 Which waits for every maa 
 who does not fear God. 
 
 And I dropped down, like a 
 man who is seized by sleep. 
 
 You who hear in scattered 
 rhymes the sound of those sighs 
 with which I nourished my 
 heart. 
 
 The gentle soul had been but 
 a short time in the beautiful 
 prison from which she is now 
 released. 
 
 I hold in hatred the hope, 
 the ravings, and every tie with 
 which my heart is bound. 
 
 She put him out of that little 
 door through which he had 
 entered. 
 
 good man, in whose 
 house he had died, said. 
 
 You, into whose hands for 
 tune has put the reins of the 
 beautiful countries. 
 
 EXERCISE X. 
 
 He determined i to find I 
 Pensd I di voler trovdre \ 
 
 This wretched little man who is 
 Qussto cattivo e' 2 
 
 who had done this. 
 avcssc- fat to* questo 1 . 
 
 here, I saw there 
 
 (that 
 
 was) sleeping, 
 si dormiva, 
 
 whilst 
 mentrc 
 
 I 
 
 saw 
 vidi* 
 
 was dividing 
 divideva 3 
 
 11* 
 
 the 
 i 
 
]*26 ANALOGY. 
 
 things stolen with him whom afterwards I killed. Render 
 furto* colui -- ucdsi. 
 
 me at least the clothes I (of mine) \ (the) which I have 
 almeno pdnno \ miei ko 3 
 
 left there. (The) Fiammetta, whose hair* was curly, 
 lascidiP ri 2 . , capello erano crespv, 
 
 long, and of the color of gold. This is the ring, 
 lungo, e 6ro. Qucsto anello, 
 
 which she already carried I to I France the first 
 gia? porto* in \ Frdncia prim*) 
 
 time that she made that journey I with her 
 rdlta fece quel cammino col 
 
 brother. Neither I, nor the one from whom J 
 fratello. , ne colui 
 
 received her, ever knew I whose daughter 
 
 r.hhi? * -n.nn sni;f > . r m, r ma mAi? \ * fi.fr1.itntl.aQ 
 
 she 
 si 
 
 was. I She, who knew well, that which she had 
 fdsse.* I , sapira bene, do 
 
 to do. Having turned herself to Pamphilus, who 
 a 1 /arcs. - Rivolta - Panfilo, 
 
 sat I at I her right, pleasantly said to him. The 
 
 sedeva* \ dlla 1 \ sua* de strap piacevolmente* dissc? *. 3 
 
 first (of whom), to whom the queen gave 
 primo* i2567 rcgina? 
 
 such a 
 tal 9 
 
 charge, was Philostratus, who began in this way. 
 cdn"c010, fu FildstratOj - comincio questo maniera. 
 
 Are you that woman, who must come to speak 
 Siete quello ddnna, dovetcz venire 3 c4 parldre$ 
 
 to him ? The young man is the son of Landolphus 
 1 1 gldvane e figlMlo Landdlfo 
 
 of Procida, by (the) whose means thou art a king; 
 , per - dpera* se' re; 
 
 the young woman is the daughter of Marin Bulgaro, 
 gidxane e figliudla 
 
 (the) whose power causes that thou art not now sent 
 potenza fa 23 ^ a & non * dggi* scac- 
 
 away I from I Tschia. 
 
 riti/fl \ di I 
 
 * Hair, in the plural number. 
 
INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. 127 
 
 The woman, hearing him speak whom she held 
 donna j udcndo costiii parldre tencva 
 
 for a dumb man, was quite amazed. 
 tiitta stordl. 
 
 mutolo 
 
 She went 
 sen' vsci 9 
 
 out I of the church, hy that way through which he had 
 9 chiesa, Pen quello 2 via* 4 5 era 9 
 
 come. Now, determine I without any other delay, 
 
 venuto.'* Or, 
 
 ti consiglia \ scnza dltro indugia, 
 
 and j take I that man whom you wish most. To 
 
 t J ti piglia* j - - * - ruck' 3 piu.* 
 
 (the) which, I could not resist, for any thing in 
 
 i 7 non Q resistere* ~ cdsa 2 
 
 the world. By the hundred steps by which 
 3 mdndo. 4 Per scaglidne per 
 
 j one ascends j to the Tarpeian rock. At I (the) 
 j si sdle I Tarpeo - . Di 
 
 which thing, all Uie others frightened began to 
 cosa. tutto dltro spavcntdti tomincidrcno^ a' 
 
 flee. He saw the lady, who loves my brother. 
 
 fuggire* vide ddnna, dma mw fratelh. 
 
 Behold the young man, whom his daughter loves, 
 E'cco gidvane, sua? figtia 3 dma.' 
 
 'Interrogative Pronouns. 
 
 The relative pronouns chi, cAe, and quale or quali, 
 when used to ask a question, become interrogative 
 pronouns. 
 
 Chi always denotes a person : che denotes things, or 
 the quality of persons and things : qudle or quali denotes 
 both persons and things, or the qualities of persons and 
 things ; as, 
 
 CHI siete voi ? Who are you ? 
 
 CHI quESTi ? Who is this one ? 
 
 CHE [cosa] hdif What ails thee ? 
 
 CHE HOMO ? What man is he ? 
 
 CHE ORAZi6NE ? What prayer ? 
 
ANALOGY. 
 
 DIAVOLO? What demon? 
 
 quAL PAURA ? What fear ? 
 
 QU^LI LEGGI ? What conditions ? 
 
 Although both c//<: and qudle denote things or the qualities of 
 persons and things, it is nevertheless to be observed, that, when 
 we inquire of an object without reference to its intrinsic merit, 
 qudle is generally used ; but if our inquiry refers to the intrinsic 
 ir.'-Tit of the object, we use chc in preference ; a?, 
 
 tuAL fu la ca.gi.6nf. ? What was the cause '". 
 fiUAL ducefia d6gno f What leader would be worthy ? 
 <JHE gentc c ? What [kind of] people are they ? 
 
 CHE peecdti kdifdtto ? What [kind of] sins hast thou com 
 
 [mitted ? 
 
 Cut is often used as an interrogative pronoun, in- 
 stead of chi ; as, 
 
 Con cui [or con chi] sti With whom hast thou been? 
 stato? 
 
 are used also 
 
 The pronouns cAe, and qudle or quali, 
 in exclamations ; as, 
 
 CHE veduta amdra ! What a sad sight ! 
 
 QUAL pdlvcre! What dust! 
 
 QUA i martin ! What torments ! 
 
 Interrogative pronouns are varied with {he prepositions 
 only. 
 
 K X. A M P I. K S . 
 
 De' quai ne io, ne '/ duca mlo Of wliom neither I nor my 
 
 eaccorst Se non qwindo gri- leader was aware until they 
 
 ddr : " cm SIETJE v6i ?" (Dant. exclaimed : " Who are you ?" 
 Inf. 25.) 
 
 CHI E auEHTi ckt coslslarnu- Who is this that sneezes 
 
 tisct? (Bocc. g. 5. n. 10.) thus? 
 
 CHE HAI TU, RAcca f (Dant. \Vhat ails thee, Bocca ? 
 Inf. 32.) 
 
 CBK UOMO vcostui? (Bocc. What man is this ? 
 . 1. n. 1.) 
 
INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 tdi CHK ORA7IONE \lSOte 
 
 di dire, eammindndo ? (Bocc.) 
 
 And what prayer are you 
 wont to say, when you travel ? 
 
 Qu AL DIAVOL ti toccaf (Dant.) What demon touches thee ? 
 
 QVALI LKGGI? qudli mindcce? 
 
 Q.UA.I. PAURA? (BOCC. g. 10. 
 
 n. d) 
 
 Ma ditemi, auAi. FD LA CA- 
 aioNR per la qualc v6i con lui vi 
 turbdstc? (Bocc. g. 3. n. 7.) 
 
 QUAL DtfcE FiA DEGNO di 
 
 ttro? (Tass. Ger. I. 52.) 
 
 CHE GENTK ^, che par nel 
 du-Sl si vint a ? (Dant. Inf. 3.) 
 
 CHE PECCATI HAI tU FATTO ? 
 
 (Bocc.) 
 
 CON CtJI ti CftlKDl tU JESSKRK 
 
 STATO ? (Bocc. g. 3. n. 6.) 
 
 Ah! CHE VEDtJTA AMARA 
 
 (Tass. Ger. 19. 105.) 
 
 r^ per Varia stesa POL- 
 VERB *' veggio ! (Tass. Ger. 
 3. JO.) 
 
 QuAi MAKTITU ! (Crusca.) 
 
 E se nonpidngi, DI che pidn- 
 ger sudli f (Danl. Inf. 33.) 
 
 What conditions ? what 
 threats ? what fear ? 
 
 But tell me, what wa the 
 cause that you were displeased 
 with him ? 
 
 What leader will be worthy 
 of them? 
 
 What people are these, who 
 seem so overcome with woe 7 
 
 What sins hast thou com- 
 mitted ? 
 
 With whom dost thou think 
 to have been ? 
 
 Ah! what a bitter and sad 
 sight ! 
 
 What dust do I see spread 
 through the air ! 
 
 What torments 1 
 
 And if at this, thou dost not 
 weep, at what art thou accus- 
 tomed to weep ! 
 
 EXERCISE XI, 
 
 Who knocks below ? What fear have you ? Who 
 picchia laggiuf paura avete f 
 
 chastised you thus? What do we do? What do 
 tastigo* vi 1 cosi? * faccidmo 1 f 
 
 we wait for? What ilo we dream of? What sleep, 
 attendidmo? sognidmof s6nno 1 
 
 or what lethargy has lulled thus I thy I virtue? What 
 o letdrgo ha sopite? cosi 1 | la tua | virtu f 
 
 chains, what prison, what crosses I would be sufficient?! 
 catena^ cdrccre, cr6ce | ei lasterebbero ? 
 
ISO 
 
 ANALOGY. 
 
 Who does not know that without money* (the) idleness 
 non sa senza dendro poltroneria 
 
 c&nnot subsist ? " Woman, what dost thou do ?" to 
 non pud durdrc ? " D6nna t tu? fa??*' 
 
 TV horn the woman replied! '< Dost thou not see it?" 
 ddnna rispcse : " - tu 4 JVYm 1 ^ vedi 3 lo* ? " 
 
 What is this secret ? And 
 e cotes to secrcto f E 
 
 what is this supposition ? 
 questa supposizionc ? 
 
 What thing is that which you have made me eat ? 
 
 1 mangidre f 
 
 cosa e questo 
 
 avete% fdtto% 
 
 " Sir, 
 
 The 
 * 
 
 I must 
 a me convene 
 
 a great fault." 
 gran faJ-lo.'* 
 
 What I wilt thou pay 
 2 [ pagkcrdi tu* 
 
 thou do me ? if 
 i? 
 
 ask 
 domanddr^ 
 
 your 
 xi 
 
 pardon 
 perddno 
 
 for 
 di 
 
 me 
 3 
 
 thou 
 
 live 
 
 asked 
 
 master said : " And 1 for what ?" 
 maestro 3 Disse : l "E \ di .*'' 
 
 for? I What coulnst 
 
 Di? 1 I potre.t? 
 
 doest so, what j shall v. e 
 fdi cost, * I vivrtm 
 
 I on ? I Alas ! and in what manner ? The admiral 
 I di 1 ? j Oimc ,' e modo f 4 ammirdglio^ 
 
 him then, what thing had brought him to 
 
 avesse 9 condotto 
 
 that. 
 
 Dost thou know i 
 2 Condsci 1 
 
 ho 
 
 those 
 coldr 
 
 are, 
 sieno. 
 
 (the) whom 
 
 thou wishest (that) 
 
 VlXJl 
 
 the negative. 
 n6. 
 
 should be burnt ? The king replied I in 
 s'drdano? re rispose \ di 
 
 What sins hast thou committed, that thou 
 pcccdto kdi . fdtto t 
 
 wishest to confess thyself. In 
 
 rude" 3 confessdre? ti\ Di 
 
 two young men offended these? But 
 gidvanc 6 offtso* 1 9 Ma 
 
 human faults, and usual faults. 
 wn&na* cdlpu,* i, usdta- 
 
 what 
 
 have 
 h&nno 1 
 
 what? 
 
 these 
 questo* 
 
 they 
 
 are 
 son 
 
 Oh, what a bitter 
 O, amdruz 
 
 What splendid spoils! 
 supirba spdglia ! 
 
 is kindled for thee ! 
 
 (*xa 3 l 2 / 
 
 sight ! 
 veditta /i 
 
 What glorious triumphs ! 
 gloridso 2 tridnfo 1 i 
 
 O, my son, 
 O, mio 2 figliudfi, 
 
 what fllame 
 fidmma 
 
 j. in t{;p plaral number. 
 
POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 131 
 
 CHAPTER VII. 
 ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 THE Italian possessive pronouns are the following : 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 Mio, m. mia, f. my or mine, miei m. mie, f, 
 
 tiio, m. tua } f. thy or thine, tufa,* m. die, f. 
 
 suo, m. sua, f. his, her, hers or its, su6i,* m. stie, f. 
 
 ndstro, m. ndstra, f. our or ours, nostri, m. ntstre, f. 
 
 vostro, m. rostra, f. your or yours, vostri, m. vostre, f. 
 
 *SS&.J their ^theirs, {g^ib*' '' 
 
 i7 M!O Ugno, my bark ; 
 
 la TUAjiglioletta, thy little daughter ; 
 
 i suoi avversdrj, their adversaries ; 
 
 /e NOSTRE pompe, our pomps ; 
 
 #LORO anddre, their deportment; 
 
 fe LORO parole, their words. 
 
 3/io, two, swo, nostroy vostro, and dro, are sometimes used with 
 the article substantively, 17 mzo, #*iio, il suo, &c.; and then the 
 word acere, { property', is understood ; and they are equivalent 
 to 'my property', ' thy property', &c. ; as, 
 
 mdngi DEL STJO, let him eat of his own [proper- 
 
 TiOTi mangerd DEL NOSTRO, he will not eat of ours, [ty ;] 
 
 * Poets for the sake of Rhyme, often use nti?', vwi, instead of no, we*; <Jt, 
 4 you'. This license is extended also to tuoi, sudi, which in poetry are often 
 changed into tui, * thy or thine j sui, < his, her, hers or its j their or theirs' ; aa t 
 
 " Di radoIncontra.," mi rispose^ " Seldom happens," replied he to 
 
 " che, di xv'iFdccia >l cammino atain, me, " that any one of us goes through 
 
 per qudl to vddo. Ter 1 t, ch* dltra the way, which I am going. But I 
 
 jSota quagffid Fv'i t Congiurdto da was there below once before, conjured 
 
 quiMa Eriton cruda, Che richiamdva by that crue I Erich tho, who recalled th t 
 
 r<Jm&ra'corptsu'i." (Dant. Inf. 9.) shades to their bodies." 
 
 Tosto ch' alpU d6lla sua ttmba FU'J, Aa noon as 1 reached the foot of hi* 
 
 Guarddmmi un pdco, e pdi quasi tomb, he looked at me awhile, and 
 
 sdegnosoMi dimandd : " Chi fur li then, a'most with contempt, he askl 
 
 maggidr TUI." (Dant. Inf. 10.) me :'* Who were thy ancestors." 
 
 JVVSi udiremo e parlertmo vu'i. We will bear and f peak to you. 
 
 (Dant. Inf. 5.) 
 
132 ANALOGY, 
 
 Miei, tudi, nostri, and Idro, are also used substantively, t miei 
 i tuoi, i suoi, indstri, i Idro; and then the word partnti, * relations' ; 
 amid, * friends' ; compagni, 'companions'; familiarly * domes- 
 tics' ; solddti, 'soldiers'; or scgudci, 'followers', is understood^ 
 and they are equivalent to 'my relations', ' thy friends', s his com- 
 panions', ' our domestics', ' your soldiers', l their followers' ; as, 
 
 incdntra A' MJI, against my relations; 
 
 pregdto DA' suoi, requested by his friends. 
 
 Possessive pronouns are sometimes expressed bj the 
 conjunctive pronouns mi, ti,gli, le, &c., and we say * ME'/O 
 prendo in braccia, instead of loprendo nclle MI'E braccia, 
 ' I take him in my arms' ; LE sigitto ai piedi, instead of 
 si gitto ai suoi piedi, ' he threw himself at her feet' ; 
 fac. ; as, 
 
 MI si strugge il cudre, my heart melts; 
 
 GLI si gittb at collo, she threw herself on his neck $ 
 
 si lascib casc&r Vumino, he let his hook fall. 
 
 To avoid the ambiguity which in many instances 
 would arise, in Italian, from the indiscriminate use of 
 the possessive pronouns suo, sue, suoi, sue; when 
 these pronouns do not relate to the subject of the prop- 
 osition, they are changed for the personal pronouns di 
 /lit, di lei, e of him,' ' of her*. Thus in the phrase 
 * John loves Peter and his children,' if the pronoun his 
 relates to John, the subject of the proposition, it is ex- 
 pressed byi suoi ; as, Giovanni ama Pietro e i suoi^/Z- 
 fliuoli, ' John loves Peter and his [John's] children' ; 
 ut if Ax* does not relate to John, but to Peter, the 06- 
 ject of the proposition, then it is expressed by i di lui; 
 as, Giovanni dma Pietro* i DI IAII jigliuoli, * John loves 
 Peter and his [Peter's] children r : 
 
 mandb ad uccidere siio he sent to kill his father [the 
 pddre, father of him who sent] ; 
 
 sua sortlla e i ftgli DI her sister and her children [the 
 LI, children of her sister]. 
 
POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 133 
 
 The pronouns suo, sua, suoi, sue, are very often expressed by 
 lui, di tti, even in, cases when no ambiguity would arise ; as, 
 
 la ingratitudine DI LTJI, his ingratitude ; 
 alia cdsa DI LEI, to her house. 
 
 Possessive pronouns are generally varied with the 
 repositions and articles. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Dictro al MIO LEGNO, che can- 
 ndo vdrca. (Dant. Par. 2.) 
 
 Se tu ti cont6nti di lascidre ap- 
 "esso di me questa TUA FIGLIO- 
 STTA, w la prenderd volenti6ri. 
 Jocc. g, 2. n. 8.) 
 
 A Hi tribuni pdrve luogo e t6m- 
 > d'assalire i suoi AVVERSARJ. 
 jiv. dec. 3.) 
 
 Pdssan vostri trionfij e VOSTRE 
 >MPE. (Petr. cap. 11.) 
 
 JVbn uman veramente ma divi- 
 LOR ANDAR era, e LOR sdnte 
 LROLE. (Petr. Trionf.) 
 
 Or MANGI DEL St7O, s'dgli 716 /ICt, 
 \ DEL JNOSTRO NON MANGERA 
 
 fM. (Bocc. g. 1. n. 7.) 
 
 PerM qu6lpopolo& si empio-- 
 .contra A J MIEI in ciascuna sua 
 %ge. (Dant. Inf. c. 10.) 
 
 Vdssene, pregdto DA' suoi, a 
 kidssi. (Bocc. g. 5. n. 8.) 
 
 Nel pensdrlo MI si STRUGGE IL 
 >RE. (Maff. Mer. 4. 7.) 
 
 Piangdndo GLI si GITTO AL 
 LLO. (Bocc. g. 3. n. 7.) 
 
 Si LASCIO CASCAR L* UNCINO 
 
 piedi. (Dant. Inf. 21.) 
 
 EgH lo MANDO AD UCC1DERE 
 ro PADRE. (Class.) 
 
 Behind my bark, which singing 
 cuts its way. 
 
 If thou art willing to leave with 
 me this little daughter of thine, I 
 will take her with pleasure. 
 
 This appeared to the tribunes a 
 proper place and time to assail their 
 adversaries. 
 
 Your triumphs and your pomps 
 pass away. 
 
 Their deportment and their holy 
 words truly were not human, but 
 divine. 
 
 Let him eat of his own property, 
 if he has any, for he will not eat 
 of ours. 
 
 Why is that people so fell against 
 my kin in all their laws. 
 
 > 
 
 He goes to Chiassi at the re- 
 quest of his friends. 
 
 In thinking of it my heart melts. 
 
 Weeping, she threw herself on 
 his neck. 
 
 He let the hook fall at his feet. 
 
 He sent him to kill his father, 
 [the father of him who sent.] 
 
 12 
 
134 
 
 ANALOGY. 
 
 Mia mddre dma egualmente 
 
 SUA SORELLA, E I F1GLI DI LEI. 
 
 (Crusca.) 
 
 Avendo rigudrdo dlLA INGRA- 
 TiTUDiNE^n LUI verso mm md- 
 dre mostrdta. (Bocc. g. 2. n. 5.) 
 
 Comincid a ripardrsi memo AL- 
 
 LA CASA DI LEI. (BOCC. g. 2. I). 
 
 8.) 
 
 My mother loves equally her 
 sister, and her children, [the chil- 
 dren of her sister.] 
 
 Considering his ingratitude 
 shown towards my mother. 
 
 He began to resort near her 
 house. 
 
 EXERCISE XII. 
 
 He loved more (the) my life than (the) your 
 amd piu vita 
 
 benevolence. Fearing that he 
 benevoUnza. Temendo 
 
 should be 
 non fosse 
 
 reprehended, 
 
 he kept (the) his love concealed as much as he 
 
 teneva 6 3 4 am6re$ nascoso 7 * 
 
 could. Since thou art my friend, I will show it 
 poteva 2 Perche sei amico, insegnerd 3 la 1 
 
 to thee. (The) thy virtue is great, and known 
 
 virtu e molto, e conosciuto 
 
 every where. I In coming out (from) the church 
 per tutto. I Uscendo chiesa 
 
 he saw this count, and (the) his little children, who 
 
 vide questo conte, e figliuolo, 
 
 asked alms. She refused to be familiar with 
 addomanddvano 2 limosina 1 . rifiutdva 
 
 him (the) (his familiarity.) 
 dimestichezza. 
 
 The holy Friar, who had 
 sdnto Frdte, avda* 
 
 confessed him, having asceniled (on) the pulpit, 
 
 confessato 3 1 salito in sit pergamo 
 
 began to preach wonderful things of him, and 
 
 comincio 3 a 20 predicdre 21 maravigliosa 18 cosa 19 l 2 e 4 
 
 of (the) his life, of (the) his fastings, of (the) his 
 
 5 ' vita 7 , 8 9 digiuno, " 12 
 
 simplicity, and of (the) his innocence. I often observed 
 
 semplicita, e 14 15 16 innocenza. 11 spesso mirdva 
 
POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 135 
 
 how much the sun had run of (the) his luminous 
 qudnto 2 sole 3 avesse 1 trascorso 4 5 6 luminoso* 
 
 But what 
 Ma 
 
 shall we say 
 diremo noi 
 
 to those who 
 coloro 
 
 (the) my hunger? 
 2 3 fame* 1 
 
 The 
 
 journey. 
 vidggio 7 
 
 feel so much pity for 
 
 hdnno 5 cotdnto 6 compassione 7 di 1 
 
 public places of Rome are full of ancient likenesses 
 
 pubblico 2 luogo 1 Roma son pieno antica immdgine 
 
 of (the) my ancestors. It is not my intention I to I 
 
 maggiore. e 2 Non 1 intenzione \ di \ 
 
 explain 
 spiegdre 
 
 at 
 al 
 
 friendship demand. 
 amicizia vogliono. 
 
 present, that which the laws of (the) 
 presentej quello legge 
 
 attach 
 
 did not seek I 
 non cercdi 
 
 any blemish to the honesty, and to the purity 
 alcuno mdcola onesta, e chiarezza 
 
 imporre 
 of 
 
 (the) your blood. 
 sdngue. 
 
 Who could reply to (the) your 
 saprebbe rispondere 
 
 wise words? In (the) happiness they are unhappy, 
 
 felicita sono misero t 
 
 sdvio parola ? 
 
 in (the) riches poor, and in (the) their 
 ricchezza mendico, e 
 
 unfortunate. 
 sciagurdto. 
 
 adventures 
 ventura 
 
 The lady then said to that one: " Come, 
 donna allora* disse 1 2 colui 3 : " Vieni, 
 
 and 
 e 
 
 ask thy property (the) (thine). I have not deceived you 
 damAnda ho 3 non 1 inganndto* * 
 
 domdnda 
 
 I to 
 I per 
 
 'ngannato 
 
 rob you of your property (the) (yours). Not only 
 t or . . Non solamente 
 
 hast thou gambled my property (tfie; (mine), but thou hast 
 nfhai - giuocdto -- > a - ^ ai 
 
 also 
 sopra 1 
 
 1 his 
 
 it 
 
 prevented (the) my going. He 
 
 astonished ^ I 
 ! impedito ' anddla. Fece maramglidre \ 
 
 father, and all (the) his relations, and every 
 padre, e tutti , 
 
136 
 
 ANALOGY. 
 
 one else who knew him. Minghino with (the) his com- 
 cun dltro conosceva? l . 
 
 panions concealed himself in the house of a friend 
 
 ripose 
 
 casa 
 
 of his. 
 
 Cimon, who had already descended with 
 Cimone, era* gia 1 disc6so 5 
 
 (the) his troops, 
 
 had determined 
 avea preso consiglio 
 
 flee 
 fuggire 
 
 into 1 
 
 some neighbouring" wood. 
 alcuno vicino 2 selva 1 . 
 
 sat 
 
 Feigning 
 7 atto sembidnte 
 
 not 
 non 2 
 
 to 
 
 know him, 
 conoscer^ , 
 
 she 
 si pose a 
 
 at his (to him at the) feet. I set in 
 3 piede. posi 2 
 
 my (to me in the) heart 
 
 to I give thee that which 
 di \ ddr^, quello 
 
 thou wentest seeking, and I have given it to thee. 
 anddvi cercdndo, e - diedi^ 2 ^, l . 
 
 Perotto recognised him, and weeping threw himself 
 riconobbe 2 *, e piangendo gitto 3 si 2 
 
 at his (to him at the) feet, and embraced him, saying : 
 4 piede, e abbraccid^, llo, dicendo : 
 
 (< My father !" Tedaldo sj>eaks with the woman, and 
 <c miG 2 Padre !" 1 pdrla donna, e 
 
 frees her husband (the husband of her) from death. 
 liber a marito morte. 
 
 He sent him to kill his father (the father of him 
 mando 2 l ad uccidere padre 
 
 who sent). My father loves his brother, and his 
 padre dma fratello, e 
 
 children (the children of him his brother). 
 figlio , 
 
DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 137 
 
 DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Qudsto, m. qudsta, f. this ; 
 
 quello, m. quella, f, that ; 
 
 cotesto. m. cotestaA. ") ., . 
 
 or codUto, m. eoMtta, f. \ that near y u ' 
 
 costuij m. he, this man ; eost6i, f. she, this woman. 
 
 j in. he, that man ; colei, f. she, that woman. 
 
 cotestui, or C he, the or that 7 cotesldi, or C she, the or that wo- 
 codestuij m. man near you. J codestei, f. ( man near you. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Qutsti, m. qutste, f. these. 
 
 quelli, m. quelle, f. those. 
 
 cotdsti. m. coteste. f. ) ,, 
 orcod<Um. MtfHl.i ^those near you. 
 
 costoro, m. & f. they, these men, these women. 
 
 coloro, m. & f. they, those men, those women. 
 
 cotestoro, or they, the or those men near you, 
 
 codestoro, m. & f . ( those women near you. 
 
 y 6sta, for ' questp, questa, l this, 5 have become obsolete. 
 
 Questo, quello, and cotesto or codesto, may be used in 
 speaking of both persons and things ; cost&i, col&i, and 
 cotestui or codestui, denote persons only. 
 
 Questo and costui are employed to point out an object 
 near the person speaking ; cotesto or codesto, and cotes- 
 tui or codestui, to point out an object near the person 
 spoken to ; and quello and colui, to point out an object 
 at a distance from both the person speaking and the 
 person spoken to ; * as, 
 
 * From the pronouns questo, quello, and cotesto or codesto, some derive the adverbs 
 
 out a place at a distance both from the person speaking and the person spoken to. 
 (The rule is correct; but as to the derivation, it appears to us, that the pronoun 
 questo is derived from the adverb qul and the pronoun 6sto, qu(*)6sto, and the pronoun 
 quello from the adverb qul and the pronoun ello, qu(i)611o ; rather than that qul w 
 derived from questo or quello.) 
 
138 ANALOGY. 
 
 QUESTO dendro, this money ; 
 
 QUELLA [donna,] that lady ; 
 
 COTESTI pdnni, those clothes ; 
 
 COSTEI* e un sole, this woman is like a sun. 
 
 COLTJI che ne invia, that man who sends us. 
 
 batlete COTESTORO,* beat those [boys]. 
 
 This rule is equally observed, when the pronouns 
 questo, quello, and cotesto or codesto, point out an abstract 
 substance, or a thing which is in the person speaking, 
 the person spoken to, or the person spoken of; as, 
 
 QUESTI sospiri, these sighs ; 
 
 QUELLA allegrtzza, that merriment ; 
 
 COTESTE parole^ those words. 
 
 Quello, followed by a noun beginning with a vowel drops the o and 
 takes an apostrophe in its stead ; and followed by a noun beginning 
 with any consonant but z, or s followed by another consonant, drops 
 its last syllable. Followed by a noun beginning with a vowel, z, or s 
 followed by another consonant, in the plural it makes quegli ; as, 
 
 QUEL Tossente k, Creole, that powerful one is Hercules ; 
 
 QUELL' Altro k, Demofonte, the other is Demophoon ; 
 
 QUEGH xngeli, those angels ; 
 
 QUEGLI spiriti, those spirits. 
 
 Qutlli, followed by a word beginning with a consonant, is contracted 
 into quei, and often written que'; as, 
 
 QUEI DO/ci lumi, those sweet lights ; 
 
 QUE' compdgni, those companions. 
 
 Qudsta, followed by the nouns mattina or mane, * morning ' ; sdra, 
 ( evening ' ; notte, ' night ' ; often drops the first syllable, and forms with 
 them a single word ; as, 
 
 - . 
 
 qutsta matlina, STAMATTINA, 7 ,. 
 or questa mdne, STAMANE, j thls momin S > 
 questasera, STASERA, this evening; 
 
 qu6sta notte, STANOTTE, to-night, or last night. 
 
 * Observe, that after the pronouns costiii, colbi, coiestbi or codesthi, &.c. we never 
 use the substantive uomo, ' man ', or ddnna, ' woman ', in the feminine ; and do not 
 say costiii urfmo, colei donna ; but simply costbi, for ' this man J ; coUi, for ' that wo- 
 man ' ; &c. : costiii, coltoi, cotestui, &c., containing in themselves both the adjective 
 pronouns questo, quello, cotesto, &c., and the substantive pronoun Hii, or lei in the 
 feminine, &c. costui orquesto lui, ' this man ' ; colei or quetta lei, * that woman' j &c. 
 
DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 139 
 
 Questo, quello, and cotesto or codesto, are often used 
 substantively, and then they are equivalent to questa cosa, 
 6 this thing ' ; quella cosa, ' that thing ' ; &LC. as, 
 
 udito QUE'STO (or questa having heard this (or this thing) ; 
 
 cosa), 
 
 COTE'STO (or cotesta cosa) that (or that thing) ought not to 
 non si vorrdbbefdre, be done. 
 
 We say sometimes in questo, in questa, in quello, in 
 quella, and then the words istdnte, ' instant ' ; momento 
 stesso, c very moment ' ; bra stessa, very hour ' ; occasione 
 stessa, c very occasion ' ; are understood ; and in questo, 
 in quelld, are equivalent to ' in this very moment,' 6 in 
 that very hour ' ; &c. as, 
 
 IN QUESTO soppravvtnne la at this very instant came the 
 fdnte, servant ; 
 
 vidi IN j QUE'LLA una nave I saw at that very moment a 
 piccioletta, rather small bark. 
 
 Quello, in speaking of a city, territory, country, &c., 
 is equivalent to cittd, territorio, paese, &c. ; as, 
 QUEL di Perugia, the territory of Perugia ; 
 
 QUEL di Bergamo, the country of Bergamo. 
 
 We very often use questi, quegli, and cotesti or codesti, 
 in the singular, in speaking of persons, but in the sub- 
 jective only ; and then questiis equivalent to quest 9 uomo, 
 ' this man ' ; quegli, to quell'' uomo, c that man ' ; cotesti, 
 to cotest' uomo, ' that man near you '; as, 
 
 QUESTI e il mio Signdre, this is my master ; , 
 QUEGLI e Cdco, that is Cacus ; 
 
 COTESTI, che ancor vive, that one who is yet alive. 
 
 When quegli is so used, in the plural, it makes queglino (quegli 
 uomini), t those men.' 
 
 Quegli followed by a word beginning with a consonant is, like quelli, 
 contracted into quei^ and often written qu6 ' ; as, 
 
 QUEI chefu presente, he who was present ; 
 
 QUE* rispose, that one answered. 
 
140 ANALOGY. 
 
 Questo and quello, and questi and quegli, sometimes 
 serve to denote two objects already spoken of; questo 
 and questi being used for the near, and quello and quegli 
 for the distant object ; and then they correspond to the 
 English expressions the latter and the former ; as, 
 
 QUESTI 51 rredono aver da- the latter think to derive their 
 
 gli iddii il ministero ministry from the gods, the 
 
 QUELLI il segreto, former, their secret ; 
 
 QUEGLI vuole, che io ti perdo- the former demands that I 
 
 ni, e QUESTI, che in te in- should pardon thee, the latter 
 
 crudelisca, that I should be cruel with 
 
 thee. 
 
 To the above demonstrative pronouns may be added 
 do, 'this or that ' ; which is equivalent to questo, 
 quello, and cotesto or codesto ; in the signification of 
 questa, quella, or coiesta or codesta cosa, ' this, that, or 
 that thing near you ' ; but it never refers to a person ; as, 
 
 ci6 ch> io ne sento, that which I think of it ; 
 
 ch' k cio eke, tu d? ? what is that which thou sayest ? 
 
 ci6 udito, having heard this [thing.] 
 
 The Italian expressions, do che, questo che, quello che, 
 generally correspond to the English pronoun what, used 
 in the signification of c this which' or ' that which' ; as, 
 
 cio CHE tu hdi a fare, what thou hast to dp ; 
 
 QUELLO CHE dictva Mritino, what Adrian said. 
 
 Demonstrative pronouns are varied with the prepo- 
 sitions only. 
 
 Sometimes the ^preposition di, l of,' is suppressed before tbe pro- 
 nouns costui, coluij and cotestui or codestui, and the pronouns are 
 put before the noun with which they are connected ; as, 
 
 al COSTUI^ tempo {for al tempo in the time of this one ; 
 DI costui), 
 
DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 141 
 
 by the counsel of that one ; 
 for the deeds of those. 
 
 per lo COLXJI consiglio (for per 
 lo consiglio DI colui), 
 
 per le COSTORO opere (for per 
 le opere DI costoro), 
 
 E XAM PL E S . 
 
 Signora, tenete QUESTO DENA- 
 RO. (Bocc. g. 8. n. 1.) 
 
 Le mie nottifa triste, e i giorni 
 oscuri QUELLA, che n'ha portdto 
 ipensier miei. (Petr. s. 250.) 
 
 Veggindom COTESTI PAJTNI, m 
 ho creduto lui. (Bocc. g. 2. n. 2.) 
 
 Cost COSTEI ch' E tra le donne 
 ujv SOLE. (Petr. s. 9.) 
 
 La donna, che COLUI CHE a te 
 KB INVIA Spesso $al sonno la- 
 grimando desta. (Petr. s. 8.) 
 
 Perche BATTETE voi COTESTO- 
 RO ? (Nov. ant. 45.) 
 
 Che fdnno meco omai Q.UESTI 
 SOSPIRI, Che nascean di dolor e ? 
 (Petr. c. 33.) 
 
 I'o giudicherei ottimamcnte fat- 
 to, che quellafesta, QUELLA ALLE- 
 GREZZA, che noi potessimo, pren- 
 dessimo. (Bocc. Introd.) 
 
 Voi mi parete uomo di Dio, 
 come dite voi COTESTE PAROLE 1 
 (Bocc. g. 1. n. 1.) 
 
 Colui cti f. secoe QUEL POSSEN- 
 TE e forte ERCOLE, QUELL' ALTRO 
 DEMOFOJVTE. (Petr. Tr. Am.) 
 
 QUEGLI ANGELI, 6 QUEGLI SP1- 
 
 RITI. (Cinon. t. 4.) 
 
 QUEI DOLCI LTJMI S'acqmstctn 
 per ventura, e nonper arte. (Petr. 
 s. 224.) 
 
 E cosl la portd a QUE' suoi 
 CQMPAGNI. (Bocc. g. 9. n. 2.) 
 
 Madam, take this money. 
 
 That lady who has taken away 
 my thoughts makes my nights sad, 
 and my days gloomy. 
 
 Seeing you with those clothes, I 
 took you for him. 
 
 Thus this woman, who is like a 
 sun amongst the other women. 
 
 The lady, who often wakens from 
 his sleep, weeping, him who sends 
 us to thee. 
 
 Why do you heat those boys ? 
 
 What do these sighs which 
 sprung from grief do now with me? 
 
 1 should think it very well done 
 that we should take that enjoyment 
 that merriment, which we could. 
 
 You appear to me to be a man 
 of God, how do you say those 
 words ? 
 
 That one who is with him, is 
 that powerful and strong Hercules, 
 the other is Demophoon. 
 
 Those angels and those spirits. 
 
 Those sweet lights are ac- 
 quired by good luck and not by 
 art. 
 
 And thus he carried her to those 
 companions of his. 
 
142 
 
 ANALOGY. 
 
 Di questo di STAMATTINA sard 
 w tenuto a voi. (Bocc. g. 10. n. 
 9.) 
 
 STAMANE era unfanciullo, e or 
 sonvecchio. (Petr. c. 11.) 
 
 Egli ci e STASERA venuto un de' 
 suoifratelli. (Bocc. g. 8. n. 7.) 
 
 Ubbridco, fastidioso, tu non c' 
 entrerdi STANOTTE. (Bocc. g. 7. 
 n, 4.) 
 
 UDITO QUESTO. (Petr. Tr. Tern.) 
 Figliuola mia, COTESTO NON 
 
 SI VORREBBE FARE. (BOCC. g. 3. 
 
 n. 8.) 
 
 IN QUESTO LA FANTE di lei 
 SOPPRAVVENNE. (Bocc. g. 8. n. 
 
 I* V1DI UNA NAVE PICCIO- 
 
 LETTA Venir per V dcqua verso 
 noi IN QUELLA. (Dant. Inf. 8.) 
 
 Passdndo per QUELLO DI PE- 
 RUGIA. (Stor. Pist 50.) 
 
 QUESTI i: IL MIO SIGNORE, 
 qnesti veramente e Messer Torello. 
 (Bocc. g. 10. n. 9.) 
 
 QUEGLI E CACO Che sdtto il 
 sdsso di monte Jlventino, Di sdn- 
 guefece spesse volte Idco. (Dant. 
 Inf. 25.) 
 
 COTESTI, CHE ANCOR VIVE, e 
 
 non si noma, Guardare w per 
 veder, s' il condsco. (Dant. Par. 
 
 QUEGLINO rivoleano i loro strdc- 
 ci. (Bocc. g. 9. n. 2.) 
 
 E disse cose IncredibiliaQVEi, 
 CHE FU PRESENTE. (Dant. Par. 
 17.) 
 
 . QUE' RISPOSE : " To sono cadu- 
 to in una fossa." . (Nov. ant. 36.) 
 
 Non solamente il popolo, ma i 
 n6bili, e i sacerdoti : QUESTI si 
 
 CREDONO AVER DAGLI IDDIl IL 
 MINISTERO, QUELLI IL SEGRETO. 
 
 (Dav. Germ.) 
 
 Of this of this morning I am in- 
 debted to you. 
 
 This morning I was a boy, and 
 now I am an old man. 
 
 There came this evening one 
 of her brothers. 
 
 Drunkard, troublesome man, 
 thou wilt not enter there to-night. 
 
 Having heard this. 
 
 My daughter, that ought not to 
 be done. 
 
 At this very instant her servant 
 came in. 
 
 As I saw at that very moment 
 coming through the water towards 
 us a rather small bark. 
 
 Passing through the territory of 
 Perugia. 
 
 This is my master, this is truly 
 Master Torello. 
 
 That is Cacus, who oftentimes 
 shed lakes of blood under the rock 
 of Mount Aventine, 
 
 I should like to look at that one, 
 who is still alive and does not tell 
 who he is, to see whether I know 
 him. 
 
 Those ones wanted again their 
 rags'. 
 
 And said things incredible to him 
 who was present. 
 
 That one answered : ' I have 
 fallen into a ditch." 
 
 Not only the people, but the no- 
 blemen, and the priests : the latter 
 think to derive their ministry from 
 the gods, the former, their secret. 
 
DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 143 
 
 QUEGLI VUOL.E, CHE 1O TI PER- 
 
 DONI, E QUESTI CHE, contro a mta 
 natura, IN TE INCRUDELISCA. 
 (Bocc. g. 4. n. 1.) 
 
 Ji voUrvene dire cio CH* 10 NE 
 SEJVTO. (Bocc. g. 1. n. 3.) 
 
 Va via, figliudlo, CH' E cio, 
 CHE TU DI' ? (Bocc. g. 1. n. 1.) 
 
 Cio UDITO si addolordvano gli 
 aiutij efremevano i nostri. (Dav. 
 Stor. 1. 2.) 
 
 Tu sdi ben cio CHE TU HAI A 
 FARE. (Bocc. g. 9. n. 5.) 
 
 L* oste udendo quello che la 
 donna diceva, e QUEJLLO CHE DI- 
 CEVA ADRIANO ; comincid a cre- 
 dere, che Pinuccio sogndsse. 
 (Bocc. g. 9. n. 6.) 
 
 AL COSTTJI TEMPO. (Giov. Vill.) 
 
 PER LO COLUI CONSIGLIO. 
 (Bocc.) 
 
 PER LE COSTOROOPERE. (Bocc. 
 g. 5. n.l.) 
 
 The former demands that I 
 should pardon thee, and the latter 
 that, against ruy nature, I should 
 be cruel with thee. 
 
 To tell you that which I think 
 of it. 
 
 Away with thee, my son, what 
 is that which thou sayest ? 
 
 Having heard this the auxiliary 
 troops were grieved, and our own 
 were in a rage. 
 
 Thou knowest well what thou 
 hast to do. 
 
 The host hearing what the lady 
 said, and what Adrian said, began 
 to believe that Pinuccio was 
 dreaming. 
 
 In the time of this one. 
 By the counsel of that one. 
 
 For the deeds of those. 
 
 EXERCISE XIII. 
 
 This sin is that which (the) divine justice has 
 peccdto e divino giustizia Ao 2 
 
 not wished to leave unpunished. 
 non 1 voluto lascidre impunito. 
 
 May God grant 
 Dio dia 2 
 
 you that joy, and that good which you desire. 
 1 allegrezza, e benc desiderate. 
 
 you speak ? 
 parldte? 
 
 allegrez 
 What is that secret of which you speak? At this 
 
 secreto 
 
 none dared 
 niuno ardi 
 
 to 
 \di 
 
 answer. That was a trifling 
 rispondere. fu picciolo 
 
144 
 
 ANALOGY. 
 
 thing, and thou didst well to do with it what thou 
 
 cosa, e face'sti bene a fdr^ ne 
 
 didst (with it). There was in that court this us^age. 
 
 facesti* ne 1 . Era corte usdnza. 
 
 Passing by the cell of this one, he heard the 
 Passdndo davdnti cilia , sentl 
 
 noise which they (these ones) made together. He 
 
 schiamdzzo facevano 2 insieme 1 . 
 
 I did not work I at all, but a thousand times I a I 
 non lavordva \ punto, ma - volta \ il \ 
 
 day, he would run to the window I to see this 
 di, correva finestra \ per vedere 
 
 woman. It appeared to him to be safe, and out 
 pdrve 3 2 6ssere sicuro, e fuor 
 
 of the hands of those who had taken him. 
 tndno avevano 3 pr6so l 
 
 Those ones make me enter here 
 fdnno 3 1 entrdre* ci 2 
 
 to I deceive 
 per I inganndr^ 
 
 Having departed from that one with (the) whom 
 Partitosi 
 
 he had been so long, 
 era 2 stdto 3 lungamente 1 
 
 he came 
 sene v6nne 
 
 to I England. 
 in I Inghilterra. 
 
 I will pay thee 
 paghero 2 l 
 
 for this time, and for I 
 di volta, e di j 
 
 that. I have heard what you have spoken of me. 
 ho inteso avete 4 ragiondto 3 l 2 
 
 that he had I 
 
 And on this occasion I he perceived 
 
 a very beautiful 
 Ullo 
 
 woman for 
 donna 
 
 Cxlxl// 
 
 a 
 
 ac | 
 
 wife. 
 moglie. 
 
 UUCI t/ 
 
 Dost thoi 
 Non odi 
 
 not hear 
 tu 
 
 what 
 
 he says ? 
 dice 1 
 
 This one is 
 
 the arch 
 arci 
 
 bishop Ruggeri. 
 vescovo 
 
 That one 
 
 is 
 e 
 
 Brutus. 
 Bruto. 
 
 Conceiving 
 Prendendi 
 
 a sudden hope of being able to return once ^more 
 - siibita sperdnza potere ritorndre b ancora 1 
 
INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 
 
 145 
 
 in the royal state, 
 2 reale* stdto 3 , 
 
 by 
 
 per 
 
 the counsel of that one. 
 consiglio 2 i 
 
 All those who believe so are deceived. In Cyprus 
 Tutti credono 2 cosl 1 sono inganndti. Cipri 
 
 and the disturbances 
 
 e 4 5 turlamento* 
 
 and in Rhodes the rumors 
 e Rodi 2 rumore 3 
 
 were great, and lasted a long time I through I the 
 furono 1 grdnde 7 j e - lungo tempo \ per 
 
 deeds of these ones. 
 opera 2 J . 
 
 ^rf,X.'- 
 
 * OF THE 
 
 [UNIVE;ESITT 
 
 INDEFINITE PRONO1 
 
 
 Of indefinite pronouns, 
 the singular, and cannot 
 plural number : 
 
 the following are used only in 
 be put before nouns in the 
 
 qualche, m. & f. 
 
 some, any ; 
 
 ogni, m. & f. 
 
 all, every ; 
 
 chiunque, m. & f. 
 chisivo'glia, m. & f. 
 chi che, m. & f. 
 chicchessia, m. & f. 
 
 / whoever, whosoever ; 
 
 che che, m. & f. 
 checchessia, m. & f. 
 
 > whatever, whatsoever ; 
 
 qualunque, m. & f. 
 qucdsii'ogtiaj m. & f. 
 qualsisia, m. &. f. 
 
 nulla, m. & f. 
 niente, m. & f. 
 
 V whosoever, whatsoever ; 
 
 > nothing. 
 
 wno, m. 
 
 una, f. one ; 
 
 oj m. unallra, f. another ; 
 
 qualcuno, m. qualcuna, f. > some, some one, some 
 qualchvduno, m. qualcheduna, f. ^ body ; 
 
 13 
 
146 
 
 ANALOGY. 
 
 ciascuno, m. ciascuna, 
 ciascheduno, m. ciascheduna, f. 
 
 ognuna, f. 
 ciascuna, f. 
 
 veruno, m. 
 
 veruna, f. 
 
 nessuno, m. 
 
 nessuna, f. 
 
 or russwno, m. 
 
 nissuna, f. 
 
 neuno, m. 
 
 neuna, f. 
 
 or niuno, m. 
 
 niuna, f. 
 
 nulloj m. 
 
 ?iw#a, f. 
 
 every one, every body ; 
 
 no one, nobody. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 iy before numeral adjectives, as in the phrases (%m dwe mesi, 
 ' eveiy two months ' ; ogni sei pdgine, l every six pages ' , ogni died 
 sold&ti, ' every ten soldiers ' ; and in the word ognissdnti, < the day of 
 All-saints ' ; is used with nouns in the plural. 
 
 Qudlche has been used, by some writers, with nouns in the plural, as, 
 qudlche verdi boschi, * some green woods ' ; but such examples are not 
 to be imitated. 
 
 The following are used in both numbers : 
 
 Singular. 
 
 tcde, m. & f. such ; 
 
 S such, such 
 
 colale, m. & f. 
 
 alcuno, m. 
 alcuna, f. 
 talunOj m. 
 taluna, f. 
 
 c^rfo, m. 
 a,f. 
 
 
 certain ; 
 
 sttsso, m. 1 
 
 medtemo,!*. r same 5 
 medesima, f. 7 
 
 Plural. 
 
 ^dZi, m. & f. such ; 
 IL m. & f. < 
 
 talune, f. 
 
 c^r/i, m. 
 ctrte, f. 
 
 ^ some, some 
 ' ones ; 
 
 certain ; 
 
 st&sse, f. 
 
 medtsimi,m. s5 
 mtdisime, f. j 
 

 INDEFINITE 
 
 PRONOUNS. 
 
 147 
 
 a/fro, m. 
 dltra, f. 
 
 V other ; 
 
 Altri, m. 
 ctltre, f. 
 
 > others ; 
 
 tutto, m. 
 tutta, f. 
 
 jail; 
 
 tutti, m. 
 
 > all, every one, 
 every body ; 
 
 alqudnto, m. 
 alqudnta, f. 
 
 ? a little, 
 $ somewhat; 
 
 alqudnti, m. 
 alqudnte, f. 
 
 ? a few, not 
 $ many ; 
 
 tanto, m. 
 
 ^ 
 
 tdnli, m. 
 
 ^ 
 
 frbita, f. 
 coldnto, m. 
 
 > so much ; 
 
 fcircte, f. 
 cotdnti, m. 
 
 > as many ; 
 
 cotdnta, f. 
 
 J 
 
 cotdnte, f. 
 
 ) 
 
 altrettdnto, m. 
 altrettdnta, f. 
 
 ? as much, 
 S as much more ; 
 
 altrettdnti, m. 
 altrettdnte, f. 
 
 ? as many, as 
 J many more ; 
 
 ^o'co, m. 
 
 ? a little, 
 J a few ; 
 
 pochi, m. 
 
 > few; 
 
 mo'fto, m. 
 mdtta, f. 
 
 > much ; 
 
 molti, m. 
 wo'/^e, f. 
 
 V many ; 
 
 trdppo, m. 
 troppa, f. 
 
 > too much ; 
 
 troppi, m. 
 troppe, f. 
 
 > too many. 
 
 Chiunque, chisivoglia, chi che, chicchessia, qualcuno, 
 qualcheduno, ognuntf, taluno, are applied to persons only; 
 the others may be applied both to persons and things. 
 
 N&lla, niente, nothing,' mean also ' some or 
 any thing,' and nessuno or nissuno, neuno or niuno, 
 veruno, ' nothing, no one, nobody,' mean also * some or 
 any thing, any one, any body ' ; as, 
 
 5 7 Hid VUOl NTJLLA, 
 
 se tgli si sentisse NIENTE, 
 non rimarrebbe a sosientr 
 
 ptna NESSTJNA, 
 se va in NIUN luogo, 
 s' tgli ha bontdte VERONA, 
 
 if she wants any thing ; 
 if he felt any thing ; 
 there would not remain any pun- 
 ishment to suffer; 
 if he goes to any place ; 
 if he has any good quality. 
 
148 ANALOGY. 
 
 Alcuno, 'some,' is sometimes used instead of nihno, 
 < nothing, no one ' ; as, 
 
 che ALCUNA gloria avrebbero, for they would derive no glory ; 
 che ALCUNA via darebbe, which would afford no way. 
 
 A'ltro is sometimes used instead of altra cosa, ' some 
 or any thing else ' ; as, 
 
 avresti detto ALTRO ; thou wouldst have said some- 
 
 thing else ; 
 
 hdifatto ALTRO ? hast thou done any thing else ? 
 
 Ji'ltn is often used in the singular, in speaking of per- 
 sons ; and then it is equivalent to altr' uomo, ' another 
 man,' or ' another person,' ' others ' ; as, 
 
 ne vdi, ne faTRipotra dire ch> neither you nor any other man 
 io non V abbia veduta, can say that I have not seen 
 
 it; 
 per nonfidarmene ad ALTRI, not to trust to other persons. 
 
 When altri is thus used, in any other relation, than the 
 subjective or the objective, it is changed into altrui; as, 
 
 ho detto male d' ALTRUI, I have spoken ill of another ; 
 
 le presterei ad ALTRUI, I would lend them to others ; 
 
 che io da ALTRTJI non sia that I should not be heard by 
 nditOy any other person, 
 
 A'ltri is also used in a distributive sense, and then it 
 corresponds to the English pronouns one another; 
 the one the other ; some others ; as, 
 
 ALTRI fa remi, ed ALTRI vo'Z- the one makes oars, the other 
 
 ge sarte, twists ropes ; 
 
 ALTRI sen vdda errando^ AL- let some go wandering, let 
 
 TRI rimanga ucciso, ALTRI some be killed, let others 
 
 idol si fdccia un dolce place their happiness in a 
 
 sguardo, sweet 
 
INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 149 
 
 Altrui is sometimes used with the article, and then 
 the words avere, sostdnza, ' property ', patrimony ', are 
 understood, and V altrui is equivalent to c another's pro 
 perty ', i patrimony ', &c. ; as, 
 
 domandar L' ALTRUI, to demand another's property 
 
 logordr DELL' ALTRUI, to use the property of others. 
 
 U'no and altro are sometimes used with the article, 
 V uno, V altro ; and then V uno corresponds to the one, 
 the former, and V altro to the other, the latter. U'no 
 and altro, when so used, in the plural make gli uni, gli 
 altri, for the masculine ; and le une, le dltre, for the 
 feminine ; as, 
 
 V etct L' UNO, e L' ALTRA avta age had changed the one and 
 
 trasformati, the other ; 
 
 e DELL' UNE, e DELL' ALTRA and with the one and with the 
 
 fdcci quello che cridi, other do what thou thinkest. 
 
 GLI UNI tem&nti Jlnnibale, GLI the former fearing Annibal, the 
 
 ALTRI Filippo, latter Philip. 
 
 The expressions V uno e V altro, V una e V altra ; gli 
 uni e gli altri, le une e le dltre, correspond to the Eng- 
 lish pronouns both both of them ; as, 
 
 L' UNO E L' ALTRO corno, both horns ; 
 L' UNA E L' ALTRA stella, both stars. 
 
 L?*un V altro, V una V altra ; gli uni gli altri, le une 
 le dltre, are equivalent to the English pronouns one 
 another, each other ; as, 
 
 si AMAVANO L' UN L' ALTRO, they loved one another ; 
 L' UN L' ALTRO inttnti a ri- intent to look at each other. 
 guarddrsi, 
 
 Jn uno, is equivalent to the English expression at the same time ; as, 
 
 Mesta mi vdde, ma IN UN fug- he sees me sad, but at the same 
 gir dal suo cospetto, time to flee from his presence. 
 
150 ANALOGY. 
 
 Senz* dltro sometimes corresponds in English to without doubt, cer- 
 tainly, &c. ; as, 
 
 6gli SEKZ' ALTRO sara col re, he without doubt is with the 
 
 king. 
 
 Per dltro means otherwise, this excepted, as for the rest, &c.; as, 
 PER ALTRO sdviOy e avveduto, as for the rest, wise and prudent. 
 
 Tale in the singular often drops the e and makes tal ; 
 and in the plural is contracted into tai, and sometimes 
 written to? ; as, 
 
 TAL/W mia stella, such was my star ; 
 
 TAI dimostrazioni, such demonstrations ; 
 
 TA* paldgi, such palaces. 
 
 Indefinite pronouns are generally varied with the pre- 
 positions only ; except stesso, medesimo, dltro 9 which are 
 varied with the prepositions and articles. 
 
 The prepositions di, a, are elegantly suppressed before the pronoun 
 altrui ; and sometimes the preposition di is suppressed, and altrui placed 
 between the article and the noun with which it is connected ; as, 
 
 le pidghe [di] altrui, the wounds of others ; 
 
 lafortuna si fa [a] altrui incontro, fortune goes to meet others; 
 bagndto^ nelV ALTRUI sdngue, [for bathed in another's blood, 
 nel sdngue di altrui] , 
 
 To the above pronouns may be added chi, quale, pia, 
 meno, parecchi, parecchie, and si, which are also used as 
 indefinite pronouns. 
 
 Chi is sometimes used instead of alcuno ; as, 
 
 in questo loco pub arrivdr cm in this place may arrive some 
 ti frastorni, one who will disturb thee : 
 
INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 151 
 
 and somstimes instead of nessuno; as, 
 
 quivi non e CHI l<*gga, ne CHI there is no one there who reads, 
 scriva, and none who writes. 
 
 Chi is also used in a distributive sense, and then it is 
 equivalent to the English pronouns one another; the 
 one the other ; some others ; as, 
 
 O) CHI Juki, CHI erbe carrying, some flowers, some, 
 odorifere, e CHI diverse ma- sweet herbs, and others, dif- 
 niere di spezierie, ferent kinds of spices. 
 
 Quale is used in a distributive sense, and corre- 
 sponds to one another; as, 
 
 QUAL se ri> andb in contddo, e one went into the country, and 
 QUAL qua, e QUAL la, another here, and another 
 
 there. 
 
 Piu and parecchi, parecchie* as indefinite pronouns, are 
 equivalent to the English pronoun several ; as, 
 
 PIU giorni, several days ; 
 
 PARECCHI dltri, several others ; 
 
 PARECCHIE ore, several hours. 
 
 Piu and meno sometimes take the article, il piu, il 
 meno ; i piu or le piu, i meno or le meno ; and then il 
 piu, i piu or le piu, are equivalent to the most, the 
 greater part ; and il meno, i meno or le meno, to the least, 
 the smaller part ; as, 
 
 IL PIU del tempo, the greater part of the time ; 
 
 i PIU morivano, the most of them died ; 
 
 LE PiO si trovdvano in Ber- the greater number of them 
 
 linzone, were found in Berlinzone ; 
 
 il Paradiso e DEI MENO, Paradise is for the smaller 
 
 number. 
 
 Si is used for both genders and both numbers in the 
 objective only, and corresponds to the English words 
 one, we, people, they, &c. ; as, 
 
152 
 
 ANALOGY. 
 
 si vde, 
 
 si e detto, 
 
 si videro. 
 
 si promettono [molte] cose, 
 
 one sees ; 
 
 we have said ; 
 
 people saw ; 
 
 they promise many things. 
 
 Si and the verb, in these and similar expressions, 
 hold the place of a passive proposition, and may be 
 equally well rendered in English by the verb to be ; as, 
 
 si rendessero gli onori a Gal- honors should be rendered 
 6a, e si ceifbrdsse la me- to Galba, and the memory 
 m&ria di Pisone, of Piso should be celebrated. 
 
 When si is followed by the particle we, we change the 
 i of si into e ; as, 
 
 non SE NE trovertbbe uno, they would not find one. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Tu le dirdij s' ELLA VUOL NTJL- 
 LA. (Bocc. g. 9. n. 5.) 
 
 // domando SE EGLI si SENTIS- 
 
 SE NIENTE. (BOCC. g. 2. D. 3.) 
 
 Che NON RIMARREBBE A SOS- 
 TENER PENA NESST^NA nel pUTgCL- 
 
 torio per gli peccati, (Pass.) 
 
 SE Filippo VA oggi in NI^S 
 LUOGO. (Bocc. g. 8. n. 3.) 
 
 Per le tentazioni si prova T 
 
 U6m0, S* EGLI HA BONTATE VE- 
 
 RTJNA. (Pass. p. 47.) 
 
 CH' ALCUNA GLORIA i TCI 
 
 AVREBBER rf' clll (Bant. Inf. 3.) 
 
 Ch' ALCTJNA VIA DAREBBE fl 
 
 chi su fosse. (Bant. Inf. 12.) 
 
 ALTRO AVRESTI DETTO, se tu 
 m* avtssi vediito a Bologna. 
 (Bocc. g. 8. n. 9.) 
 
 Thou wilt ask her, whether she 
 wants any thing. 
 
 He asked him whether he felt 
 any thing. 
 
 That there would not remain in 
 purgatory any punishment to suffer 
 for sins. 
 
 If Philip goes to-day to any 
 place. 
 
 By temptations it is proved 
 whether a man has any good qual- 
 ity. 
 
 For the guilty would derive 
 no glory from them. 
 
 Which would afford no way 
 to him who should be above. 
 
 Thou wouldst have said another 
 thing, if thou hadst seen me in Bo- 
 logna. 
 
INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 
 
 153 
 
 0, ALTRO HAI tU FATTO ? (BoCC. 
 
 n. 1.) 
 
 NE voi, NE ALTRI con ragione 
 mipotra piu DIRE CH' io NON L' 
 
 ABBIA VEDUTA. (BOCC. g. 1. D. 8.) 
 PER NON FIDARMENE ad ALTRI, 
 
 10 med6sima tel son veriuta a si- 
 gnified. (Bocc. g. 5. n. 2.) 
 
 To ho DETTO MAL D J ALTRUI. 
 
 (Bocc.) 
 
 CHE io DA ALTRUI che da lei 
 UDIJO NON SIA. (BOCC. g. 3. D. 5.) 
 
 ALTRI FA REMI, ED ALTRI 
 VOLGE SARTE. (Dant. Inf) 
 
 ALTRI disperse SEN VADA 
 
 ERRANDO : ALTRI RIMANGA UC- 
 
 ciso : ALTRI, in cure d' amor 
 sodve immerso, IDOL si FAC- 
 
 CIA, UN DOLCE SGUARDO, im/is0. 
 
 (Tass. Ger. 4. 18.) 
 
 Con le voci umili, e mansuete 
 
 nel DOMANDAR L' ALTRUI. (BOCC, 
 
 g. 4. n. 2.) 
 
 Si dispose a voler LOGORAR 
 DELL' ALTRUI. (Bocc. g. 4. n. 10.) 
 
 TantO L 5 ETA L s UNO E L* AL- 
 TRO, da quello che esser solbano, 
 
 gli AVEA TRASFORMATI. (BOCC. 
 
 g. 2. n. 6.) 
 
 Che le mie cose ed ilia ti sieno 
 raccomanddte, E QUELLO DELL' 
 U\NE E DELL' ALTRA FACCI, CHE 
 CREDI, che sieno consolazlCne 
 delV dnima mia. (Bocc. g. 2. n. 
 7-) 
 
 Immagindi di voUr fare, sic- 
 come fecero i Saguntini, o gli 
 Jlbidei, GLI UNI TEMENTI ANNI- 
 BALE CartagMse, E GLI ALTRI 
 FILIPPO Macedonico. (Bocc. 
 Fiamm. 5. 53.) 
 
 Scalddva il sol gia L' TJNO E L' 
 ALTRO CORNO Del Tduro. (Petr, 
 cap. 1.) 
 
 Oh, hast thou done any thins 
 else ? 
 
 Neither you, nor others can any 
 longer say rightly that I have not 
 seen it. 
 
 Not to trust to others, I myself 
 have come to inform thee of it 
 
 I have spoken ill of others. 
 
 That 1 should be heard by no 
 other, but by her. 
 
 Some make oars, and others 
 twist ropes. 
 
 Let some of them go dispersed, 
 and wandering : let some be killed : 
 let others, plunged in the cares 
 of pleasing love, place their hap- 
 piness in a sweet look, a smile. 
 
 With humble and mild words in 
 demanding the property of others, 
 
 She disposed herself to use the 
 property of others. 
 
 So much had age changed the 
 one and the other from what they 
 were used to be. 
 
 Let my things and her be re- 
 commended to thee, and with the 
 one and with the other do what 
 thou thinkest would be of any con- 
 solation to my soul. 
 
 I thought of doing as the Sagun- 
 tines and the Abydeans did, the 
 former fearing Annibal the Cartha- 
 ginian, the latter Philip the Mace- 
 donian. 
 
 The sun was already warming 
 both the horns of Taurus, 
 
154 
 
 ANALOGY. 
 
 Otf e n bel^ciglio, e L' UNA E 
 
 L* ALTRA STELLA CA' Ctl COTSQ 
 
 del mw viver liime denno ? (Petr. 
 s. 258.) 
 
 L* tJN L' ALTRO di egudle 
 amore si AMAVANO. (Bocc.) 
 
 L* UN L* ALTRO A RI GUARD AR- 
 
 si INTENTI. (Tass. Ger.) 
 
 MESTA ognor MI VEDE, mesta 
 
 & VCro, MA IN UN DAL StJO COS- 
 PETTO FUGGIR mi vede. (Alf. 
 Filip. 1. 1.) 
 
 EOLI SENZ* ALTRO SARA COL 
 
 RE. (Maff. Mer. 2. 3.) 
 
 RlCCO, e SAVIO, E AVVEDtJTO 
 
 PER ALTRO, ma avarissimo. 
 (Bocc. g. 6. n. 2.) 
 
 Where is the beautiful brow and 
 both those stars which gave light 
 to my life ? 
 
 They loved oiie another with an 
 equal love. 
 
 Intent to look at each other. 
 
 He sees me always sad, sad it is 
 true, but at the same time he sees 
 me flee from his presence. 
 
 He without doubt is with the 
 king. 
 
 Rich, and wise, and prudent 
 otherwise, but very avaricious. 
 
 LE PIAGHE ALTRtii. (Petr. 8. The wounds of others. 
 
 6.) 
 
 Ricdrdati che una votia senzd 
 piii, suole avvemre, che LA FOR- 
 
 TTJXA SI FA ALTRVI INCQNTRO 
 
 col viso lieto, e col grembo aperto. 
 (Bocc. g. 6. n. 10.) 
 
 NELL* ALTRUI SANGUE gid 
 BAGNATO e tmto. (Petr. s. 29.) 
 
 TAL FU MIA STELLA, e tal niia 
 cruda sorte. (Petr. s. 182.) 
 
 Queste TAI dolorose DIMOSTRA- 
 ZIONI sow troppo vedute, e cono- 
 sciute. (Castigl. Cort. 1. 3.) 
 
 E fecer TA' PALAGI, e td' ma- 
 raviglie, che non si potr6bbe dire. 
 (Fr. Gior.) 
 
 Ix QUESTO LOCO di leggier PUO 
 
 ARRIVAR CHI TI FRASTORNI. 
 
 (Maff. Mer. 3. 4.) 
 
 QUIVI ivox E chi ragioni Di 
 Cristo, ne CHI LEGGA, NE CHI 
 SCRIVA. (Dant. Par. 12.) 
 
 1 Remember" that Ottee and no 
 more, it is wont to happen, that for- 
 tune goes to meet others with joy- 
 ful countenance, and open bosom. 
 
 Already bathed and stained with 
 another's blood. 
 
 Such was my star, and such my 
 cruel fate. 
 
 Such painful demonstrations are 
 too often seen and known. 
 
 And they made such palaces, 
 and such wonderful things, that 
 cannot be described. 
 
 In this place may easily arrive 
 one who will disturb thee. 
 
 There is no one there who talks 
 of Christ, no one who reads, no 
 one who writes. 
 
INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 
 
 155 
 
 Molti anddvano attorno, POR- 
 TANDO nelle mdni, CHI FIORI, CHI 
 
 ERBE ODORIFERE, E CHI DIVERSE 
 MANIERE DI SPEZIERIE. (BOCC. 
 
 Introd.) 
 E le lor donne, e i figliuoli pic- 
 
 itttti, QUAL SE N' ANDO IX CON- 
 TADO, E QUAL QUA, E QUAL LA, 
 
 poveramente in arnese. (Bocc. 
 g. 2. n, 3.) 
 
 PIU GIORNI felicemente navigd- 
 rono. (Bocc. g. 2. n. 7.) 
 
 Many went about carrying in 
 their hands, some, flowers, some, 
 sweet herbs, and others, different 
 kinds of spices. 
 
 And of their wives, and young 
 children, one went into the coun- 
 try, and one here, and another 
 there, poorly provided. 
 
 They sailed happily several days. 
 
 Con PARE c CHI ALTRI. (Petr.) With several others. 
 
 Duro per lo spdzio di PAREC- 
 CHIE ORE. (Giov. Vill.) 
 
 IL PIU DEL TEMPO, SI Stdn- 
 
 no a mangidre, e poltrire. (Dav. 
 Germ.) 
 
 I PIU senza alcunafebbre, o 61- 
 tro accidente MORIVANO. (Bocc. 
 Introd.) 
 
 Mdso rispose, che LE PIU si 
 
 TROVAVANO IN BERLINZOJVE. 
 
 (Bocc. g.-8. n. 3.) 
 
 IL PARADISO E DEI MENO, 6 
 
 non del piii. (Seem. Mann. Marz. 
 31.) 
 
 Come si VEDE. (Bocc. g. 10. 
 n.2.) 
 
 Come s' E DETTO. (Dav. Ann.) As we have said. 
 
 It lasted for the space of several 
 hours. 
 
 The greater part of the time 
 they pass in eating and dozing. 
 
 The most of them died without 
 any fever, or any other symptom. 
 
 Maso replied, that the greater 
 number of them were found in 
 Berlinzone. 
 
 Paradise is for the smaller num- 
 ber, and not for the larger. 
 
 As one sees. 
 
 VIDERSI in quello esercito- sol- 
 ddti v cchi, che non avevanofdtto 
 mdi gudrdia. (Dav.) 
 
 Qudnto COSE gli si PROMETTO- 
 NO tutto '/ di. (Bocc. g. 3. n. 1.) 
 
 Propose, che si RENDESSERO 
 GLI ONORI A GALBA : che anche 
 
 SI CEI.EBRASSE LA MEMORIA DI 
 
 PISONE. (Dav. Stor. 1. 4.) 
 
 NON SE NE TROVEREBBE UN 
 
 maggior mdi. (Bocc. g. 2. fin.) 
 
 People saw in that army old sol- 
 diers, who had never been on 
 guard. 
 
 How many things they promise 
 him the whole day. 
 
 He proposed, that honors should 
 be rendered to Galba, and that the 
 memory of Piso should also be cel- 
 ebrated. 
 
 They would never find^ one 
 greater. 
 
156 ANALOGY. 
 
 EXERCISE XIV. 
 
 Whoever does otherwise sins. There must be 
 fa 2 altrimenti 1 pecca. Vi deve essere 
 
 some deception. Let us give this bread to eat ^ to 
 ingdnno. Didmo pane a mangidre 
 
 some one. He commanded that every one should 
 Comandd andds- 
 
 go to rest himself. That we I might not cause I 
 se 2 a 4 riposdre 5 si 1 . Jlcciocche non dessimo 
 
 (to) any one I to I think of us. Each 
 
 3 4 I da 1 I pensdre 2 . 
 
 one* of us knows, that the greater part of (the) 
 sa, 4 5 pdrtt? 
 
 her friends (hers) are dead. 
 2 sono 3 motto." 7 
 
 You will receive 
 riceverete 
 
 hundred for every one. Every mother is a nurse 
 
 mddre e - bdlia 
 
 of her children. Without any delay, he did what 
 figliuolo. Senza indugio, fece 
 
 the king ordered. No f body perceived 
 
 re commanddva. persona accorse 2 
 
 it. 
 
 sene. 1 
 
 Here it seemed to me that I saw (to see) noj sanctity, no | 
 jQuivi pdrve u 13 veder 12 l santita 2 , 3 
 
 devotion, no J good deed, or example of life. 
 divozione 4 , 5 buono Q opera 7 , o s esempio 9 10 vita 11 . 
 
 Where every word, every phrase, every mode of 
 O've parula, frdse, modo 
 
 expression is explained with clearness. To-morrow I 
 men spiegdto' 3 con 1 chiarezza 2 . domani 2 
 
 shall dine with some friends. Some companies of 
 Pranzerd 1 con amico. compagma 
 
 Belgians collected in haste, and a band of Vitellians. 
 Belgi fdtto furia, e mdno Vitellidni. 
 
 * Each one, in the feminine gender. 
 
 t No, here in the signification of not one, none. 
 
 J JVo, in the signification of not any. 
 
INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 157 
 
 Now I have nothing more to fear. Who (to 
 Omdi - ho* l piu 3 da temere. 
 
 (the) whom)* I had been obliged to live I for several 
 
 era convenuto vwere 1 * * 
 
 years j like I a deaf and duml) person. I never 
 anno 2 j a guisa di 3 \ - sordo 4 - . e 5 mutolo 6 . non 
 
 should come 
 
 days. 
 di. 
 
 to the end I of it j for | severttl 
 a capo* \ ne l \ in 
 
 Said the bafterer* I "Must I say] more (any 
 Disse barattiere : " Ho w a dir - - 
 
 H 
 
 other thing)." Not being able I to be seen l,y 
 
 Won 
 
 potendo esser 3 veduto* 
 
 "any other, he threw himself I on his knees I beforo 
 2 gittd 7 si? ginocchione 9 \ 
 
 lier, and said. I determined (myself) 
 
 e disse. - Deliberdi^, mi 
 
 tell 
 
 it rather to you than to others. With (the) humble, 
 
 piuttosto umile 2 , 
 
 and mild words in (the) asking the property ci 
 
 3 tnansueto* voce 1 domanddre 
 
 Bothers (the others'). He will be with him without 
 sard 3 4 & 
 
 (any other thing to the contrary). He sees 
 
 at the (one.) same time fly from his presence. 
 in fuggire cospetto. 
 
 Some make oars, and others twist ropes. Suppose 
 fa remo, e volge sdrta. Fingete 
 
 Ion the contrary, that that be not a comedy, but 
 a ^ontrdriO) sia 2 non 1 commedia^ mci 
 
 a tragedy, and that of the actors some should speak 
 tragedia, e recitdnte favelli 
 
 Bolognese, others Venetian, that one Bergamasque, this 
 
 Bergamdsco, 
 
 * PPhom, in the feminine gender. 
 
 14 
 
158 ANALOGY. 
 
 one Neapolitan, and that one Milanese. (The) one* 
 Napoletdno, 
 
 of them had a beautiful and large mattress of 
 
 avea bello* e b grdnde 5 materdsso 1 
 
 cotton I on 
 bambdgia? \ in 
 
 her head, and the other * a very 
 capo, e 
 
 large basket full of things. Some went 
 
 grdnde paniere pieno cosa. sen 9 ando 
 
 the country, and some here, and some there. 
 contddo, e qua, e la. 
 
 into 
 in 
 
 CHAPTER VIII. 
 OF THE PARTICLES JVE, CJ, VI. 
 
 WITH pronouns are generally classed the particles 
 ne, ci, vi, f which never vary, and always refer to some 
 person, thing, or place, which has been spoken of 
 before. 
 
 Ne may refer to one person or thing, or to more 
 than one, according to the number of the objects, which 
 have been mentioned ; and then it is rendered in Eng- 
 lish by of him, of her, of it ; of them ; with him, 
 with her, &c.; at him, &c. ; some of it, some of them ; as, 
 
 NE pare innamorato, he seems enamoured of her ; 
 
 a qudnti NE giacevano taglib he cut off the hair of as many 
 i capelli, of them as slept ; 
 
 * The one, the other, in the feminine gendef. 
 
 t These particles, in orthography, appear to be the same Words as the conjunctive 
 pronouns ne, ci, vi ; their difference in signification, however, is easily ascertained 
 by the moaning of the sentence in which they are used. 
 
PARTICLES WE, CI, VI. 159 
 
 won NE poteva pagdre i cal- I could not pay for my shoes 
 
 zdn", with it ; 
 
 se NE maraviglib) he wondered at it ; 
 
 NE ho preso, I have taken some of it, or 
 
 some of them. 
 
 Ne may also refer to the place, which one comes 
 from, or goes to ; and then it corresponds to the Eng- 
 lish adverbs hence, thence ; as, 
 
 E vennij I came thence ; 
 
 qudndo NE andrete ? when shall you go hence ? 
 
 and sometimes to an indeterminate place ; as, 
 
 NE e portdta dal vento, it is thence carried away by the 
 
 wind. 
 
 Ci, vi, refer to a place, ~and correspond to the Eng- 
 lish adverbs here, there ; hither, thither ; as, 
 
 ci era venuto, I had come hither ; 
 
 won vi pole entrdre, he could not enter thither. 
 
 Ci, properly, refers to a place near the person 
 speaking, and vi, to a place at a distance ; as, 
 
 ci 50710 stdto dltre volte, ' I have been here formerly ; 
 
 <se tu mdi vi tdrni, if thou shalt ever return there. 
 
 This distinction, however, is not observed when the 
 particles ci, vi, and the conjunctive pronouns ci, vi 9 - 
 would be brought together, as in io vi vi condurro, 
 voi ci ciavete condotti ; in which case, to avoid the harsh 
 sound produced by the repetition of the same word, * 
 we say, without regard to the distance of the place, 
 
 io vi cr condurrb, I will conduct you thither; 
 
 voi vi ci avete condotti, you have conducted us hither. 
 
 * An instance nevertheless, is met with in Boccaccio, in which ci is used 
 instead of vi, without the occurrence of the repetition of the word on account 
 -of the conjunctive pronoun: 
 
 JVbn ci s6no in nfan lutfgo abit&nie There aro nowhere dwellings so near , 
 si presso, die tu di gitirno YI potessi that you could arrive there before sun- 
 arriv'are. (G. 5. n. 3.) set. 
 
160 ANALOGY. 
 
 Ci, vi, may refer also to persons or things, and then 
 they take the signification of the persons or things, 
 which they refer to ; as, 
 
 -pensaste a me ? ci pensai, did you think of me ? I 
 
 thought of you. 
 
 baderete a ci'6, or a questo? will you attend to this? yes, 
 sij vi bQderb) I will attend to it. 
 
 Ci, vi, are used sometimes instead of questo, quello. 
 title, &c. in the signification of - to it, in it, from it, 
 &LC. ; as, 
 
 ci troverimo buon compenso, we shall find in it a good com- 
 pensation ; 
 
 ascoltai queste parole senza I listened to these words with- 
 rispondervi, out replying to them ; 
 
 io non vi consentii, I did not consent to it. 
 
 When the particles ci, vi, are followed by the pro- 
 nouns To, la, li, gli, le, they are generally united to 
 them so as to form a single word ; as, 
 
 VELO avea condotto, he had conducted him there ; 
 
 ingegnati di ritenercE.i+o, contrive to keep him there. 
 
 The particle's ne, ci, vi, are often used as expletives ; 
 as, 
 
 NE andb per la camera, he went through the room ; 
 
 ciascun che ci nasce, every one who is horn ; 
 
 dove vi mori, where [there] died. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 JgU,pianamente^ajidando, A He, walking softly, cut off tKe 
 QUANTI in quella casa NE GIACE- hair of as many of them as slept in 
 
 VANO TAGLJO 1 CAPELLI. (BoCC. that llOUSC. 
 
 g,3.n.2.) 
 
 Mi ddvan si poco saldro, che They gave me so small a salary, 
 io NON NE POTEVA appena PAGA- that I could hardly pay for my 
 B i CALZARI. (Bocc. g. 2, D. 1.) shoes with it. 
 
PARTICLES JVE, C7, VI. 
 
 101 
 
 Quand' w MENE VENNI. When I came thence. 
 (Bocc. g. 3. n. 1.) 
 
 La cenere posta in alto, NE K 
 
 PORTATA DAL VENTG. (PaSS. tf. 
 
 Hu. c. 4.) 
 
 The ashes placed on high, is 
 thence carried away by the wind. 
 
 Nay, I had come hither in order 
 to admonish him. 
 
 ERA VENUTO per do- 
 vergli ammonire. (Bocc. g. 1. n. 
 
 Si tardi m giunse, che, essendo 
 le parte serrate', e i ponti levdti, 
 
 ENTRAR NOJV VI POTE dentrO. 
 
 {Bocc. g. 2. n. 2.) 
 
 Veramente ci SONO w ALTRE 
 VOLTE STATO ; ma si m* avea la 
 paura di me tratio, che cosi cdme 
 se mdi non ci fossi, d* esserci 
 stato mi ricordava. (Lab.) 
 
 Se igli avviene, che TU MAI vi 
 TORNI, fa che tu non sii mdi piu 
 geloso. (Bocc. g. 3. n. 8.) 
 
 V6l VI CI AVETE CONDOTTI. 
 
 (Fr. Sacch.) 
 
 PENSASTE A ME ? si ci PEN- 
 SAI. (Bemb.) 
 
 Per avventura P opera nostra 
 potra essere anddta di modo, che 
 n6i ci TROVE RE MO, coll' aiuto di 
 
 DlO, BUON COMPENSO. (BOCC. g. 
 
 2. n. 7.) 
 
 QUEST E PAROLE, non una vol- 
 ta, e SENZA RISPONDERVI alci'i- 
 na cosa, ASCOLTAI con grave d~ 
 nimo. (Bocc. Fiam. 1. 5.') 
 
 Ringranzidndo Iddio, CHE 
 CONDOTTO VEL' AVEA. (Bocc. g. 
 2. n. 4.) 
 
 Sappi se egli s<i lavordre, ed Learn whether he knows how 
 JNGEGNATI DI RiTENERCELO. to work, and contrive to keep him 
 (Bocc.) there. 
 
 Chetamente NE ANDO PER LA Gently he went through the 
 CAMERA infino alia finestra. room as far as the window. 
 (Bocc. g. 2. n. 7.) 
 
 14* 
 
 He arrived there so late, that, 
 the gates being shut, and the 
 bridges raised, he could not enter 
 thither. 
 
 Truly I have been here former- 
 ly ; but fear had in such a manner 
 deprived me of my senses, that I 
 recollected as little of having been 
 here, as if I never had been here. 
 
 If it happens that thou shaltever 
 return there, take care that thou 
 be no more jealous. 
 
 You have conducted us hither. 
 
 Did you think of me ? yes, I 
 thought of you. 
 
 Perchance our business may 
 take such a turn, that we shall 
 find in it, with the assistance of 
 God, some compensation. 
 
 To these words, more than once, 
 and without replying to them any 
 thing, I listened with a serious 
 mind. 
 
 Thanking God that had con- 
 ducted him there. 
 
162 ANALOGY. 
 
 Natural ragione & di CIASCUN It is a natural thing to every one j 
 
 CHE ci NASCE, la sua vita, quanta who is born to help^preserve, and 
 
 pud, aiutdre, e conservdre, e di- defend his life, as much as he can. 
 fendere. (Bocc. Introd.) 
 
 Costui disfece Jerusalem, DOVE This one destroyed Jerusalem, 
 
 vi MORI, tra d 1 drWi e di fame, where there died, both by arms and 
 
 centindia di miglidia di Giudei. of hunger, hundreds of thousands 
 
 (Petr.Uom.ill. 28.) . of Jews. 
 
 EXERCISE XV. 
 
 The miserable Landolfo, although the day before 
 misero , ancorache 3 di* davdntv* 
 
 had called (the) death many times, seeing- it near, 
 avesse 9 chiamdto 8 6 morte 1 molto 1 volta, 2 ved&ndo^, prsta, 
 
 was afraid of it. He wished that I should see 
 Me 2 paura 3 l . Voile vedessi 
 
 all the holy relics, and they were so many, that, 
 sdnto reliquia, e furon tdnto, r 
 
 if I wished to relate them to you, I never should 
 se voldssi 3 contdre 4 - l , non ver- 
 
 come to an end (of them). "Oh, my master !'V 
 r ^j2 3 __ C p 4, i . "Oh, mio* maestro !' n , 
 
 said Bruno, " I do not wonder (myself) at it, 
 
 diceva 
 
 non 
 
 maraviglicP 
 
 for I have heard say, that they say nothing 
 
 ch& ho udito dire, 
 
 I (do not say anything) of it." But yet coming 
 
 non dicono 2 1 ." Ma pure uscito^, 
 
 out thence, he began to wonder^ (himself) I more 
 
 , incomincid 3 4 maraviglidre 5 si 2 an- 
 
 and more. I 
 cora piu. 1 
 
 Cause (the) generosity 1 to he painted 
 
 cortesia* dipmgere 3 
 
 here. 
 
 2 
 
PARTICLES A'jE, C7, VL 
 
 163 
 
 Pretending 
 Sembidnte facendo 
 
 have 
 
 returned there 
 tomato* - * 
 
 with a great deal more merchandise than before. 
 con mercanzia prima. 
 
 I I cannot 
 I non so 
 
 well relate how I entered there. 
 ben ridire come entrap 1 . 
 
 The 
 
 church is so full, of people, that no * person can 
 chiesa e si plena gente , persona pud 3 
 
 any more 
 
 enter there. 
 entrdre 4 ' 2 . 
 
 Andreuccio, fearing, entered 
 , teme"ndo, entrd 2 
 
 there, and entering there he thought within himself. 
 
 If I 
 
 Se 
 
 entrdndo. 
 
 can affect 
 so far vista 
 
 penso 
 
 be d unify I shall be i 
 esser mutolo, 2 sard* 
 
 received there surely. 
 ricevuto 5 3 per 
 
 They f replied: "It is 
 risposero : " - e 2 
 
 very 
 Bene 1 
 
 true, since thou 
 vero> perchb 
 
 art the one who makes us stay here. Alas! Z<ppa, 
 s6i fdi 3 2 stare 4 - l . Ohime ! r 
 
 what does this mean ? Have 
 vuol 2 dir? 1 avcte* 
 
 you then made 
 " 5 Dunque 1 fdtto* 
 
 me 
 
 2 
 
 come here for this ? 
 
 I 
 
 painted 
 gere* 
 
 here, 
 
 will cause 
 fard 3 
 
 in such a manner, 
 di maniera. 
 
 it* 
 
 you nor any other one 
 
 ne 
 
 will be able 
 potra 2 
 
 I to be 
 j dipin- 
 
 that neither 
 ne 
 
 to tell me 
 dire 4 ' l 
 
 l 
 
 any longer, that I have not seen it.| These persons 
 piii, 3 5 ff dbbia 9 nori* veduta 10 8 . 
 
 make me enter here fto 
 fdnno 3 l entrdre 4 2 \ per 
 
 deceive me. 
 inganndr^, 
 
 We wish 
 voglidmo 
 
 * JVo, here in the signification of wo one. t They, in the feminine gender. 
 | It [the generosity la cortes'ia], in the feminine gender. 
 These persons, for these men near me. 
 
164 ANALOGY. 
 
 to go 
 anddre 
 
 and 
 
 see this holy man ; but I, for myself, 
 veddre santo ; ma , me. 
 
 do not see how we can get there. 
 non vedo come possiatno* jpervenire 3 J . 
 
 CHAPTER IX. 
 
 VERBS. 
 
 ALL Italian verbs are classed in three different conju- 
 gations, which are distinguished by the termination of 
 their infinitive. 
 
 The first conjugation comprehends those verbs, 
 which in the infinitive end in are ; as, awARE, ' to 
 love.' 
 
 The second comprehends those verbs, which in the 
 infinitive end in ere ; as terrtERE, ' to fear.' 
 
 The third comprehends those verbs, which in the 
 infinitive end in ire ; as, sentiRE, ' to hear,' or ; to 
 feel.' 
 
 All the verbs of these three different conjugations, 
 whether regular or irregular, are conjugated or varied 
 with one of the auxiliary verbs, avere, i to have, ' or 
 essere, ' to be '. 
 
 VARIATION OF VERBS. 
 
 Verbs may be varied in four different ways ; viz. 
 affirmatively, negatively, interrogatively, and interroga- 
 tive-negatively. 
 
 In the variation of Italian verbs, the personal pronouns 
 are generally suppressed, the persons being sufficiently 
 
AUXILIARY VERBS. 16S 
 
 indicated by the different terminations ; but when dif- 
 ferent persons have the same termination, the pronouns 
 are expressed, to avoid the confusion which might thence 
 arise. 
 
 The pronouns are also expressed in the imperative 
 mood , and also when verbs are varied in the interrogative 
 form, since then the transposition of the pronoun distin- 
 guishes, in conversation, that form from the affirmative* 
 
 In varying the following verbs, we have given, between 
 parentheses, the poetical forms, or the peculiar inflexions 
 to which poets have submitted some of the persons of cer- 
 tain tenses of these verbs. Some of these are elegantly 
 used even in prose, and some are entirely confined to 
 verse ; in order to distinguish the latter from the former,: 
 the latter are printed in Roman characters. 
 
 AUXILIARY VERBS., 
 
 Variation of the Verb Avere affirmatively. 
 
 I. INFINITIVE. 
 
 Simple Tenses. - 
 
 1. Present, 
 rfvere, to have. 
 
 Compound Tenses. 
 
 2. Past, 
 avere avuto, to have had- 
 
 3. Future. 
 
 avere ad avere, ") 
 
 essere per avere, > to ve to have, or 
 
 dovere avere, 5 to be about to have - 
 
 4. Present, 
 avendo, having.. 
 
 5. Past. 
 avendo avuto , having had. 
 
V 
 
 166 
 
 ANALOGY. 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 
 avtnte, s. 
 aventi, p.* 
 
 6. Present. 
 ? having. 
 
 7. Past. 
 
 avuto, m. s., avuti, p. > 
 avula, f. s., avute, p.* 5 
 
 had. 
 
 II. INDICATIVE. 
 
 SIMPLE TENSES. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. ho or 6 I have; 
 
 , 
 
 2d p. 7iai or ai, 'thou hast; 
 3d p.ha or a(ave), he, she, or it has ; 
 
 abbiamo (avemo), 
 
 avete, 
 
 j or anno, 
 
 we have ; 
 
 you have ; 
 they have. 
 
 . Imperfect. 
 
 1st p. w av6va 
 [or u^a,t 
 2d p. avevi, 
 Sd p. ^of/i ore^a 
 [avdva or a- 
 [t^a (avia), 
 
 I had, or did 
 [have ; 
 thou hadst ; 
 he or she had ; 
 
 \mo, ;we had ; 
 
 avevate, you had ; 
 
 avevano or ave- they had. 
 [cwo (avieno), 
 
 3. Perfect. 
 
 1st p. 6bbi, 
 2d p. avesti, 
 3d p. <W>e, 
 
 I had; 
 thou hadst; 
 he or she had ; 
 
 avtmrnoj 
 aveste, 
 ebbero, 
 
 we had ; 
 you had ; 
 they had. 
 
 4. Future. 
 
 1st p. avro, 
 
 2d p. avrdi, 
 3d p. arra, 
 
 I shall or will ; 
 [have ; 
 thou wilt have ; 
 he or she will 
 [have ; 
 
 avremo, 
 
 avrete, 
 avrdnno, 
 
 we shall have ; 
 
 you will have > 
 they will have. 
 
 * The present participle of the verb avere agrees with the subject of the proposi- 
 tion in gender and number. The past participle agrees, sometimes, with the object 
 in gender and number. 
 
 f Some say az'cro, ero, amd??o, &c. instead of orpra, ' I had'; era, 'I was'; 
 arndt-a, ' I loved ' ; &c., but this usage which, indeed, presents the advantage of 
 distinguishing the first from the third person of the imperfect of verbs, is contrary 
 to the authority of the best classics. 
 
AUXILIARY VERBS. 
 
 167 
 
 COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 Singular. * Plural. 
 
 5. Compound of the Present, or Second Perfect. 
 
 1st p. ho avuto, |I have had ; 
 2d p. hdi avuto, thou hast had ; 
 3d p. ha avuto, he or she has 
 ! [had ; 
 
 abbidmo. avuto, 
 avete avuto, 
 hdnno avuto, 
 
 we have had ; 
 you have had ; 
 they have had. 
 
 6. Compound of the Imperfect, or Pluperfect. 
 1st p. 10 aveva avuto, \ I had had,|| avevdmo avuto, \ we had had. 
 
 7. Compound of the Perfect, or Second Pluperfect. 
 1st p. ebbi avuto, \ I had had. 
 
 8* Compound of the Future, or Future Anterior. 
 1st p. avro avuto, \ I shall or will have had. 
 
 III. CONJUNCTIVE. 
 SIMPLE TENSES. 
 
 1 . Present. 
 
 1st p. io dbbia 
 2d p. tu abbia or 
 
 that I have, or 
 [may have ; 
 that thou have ; 
 
 abbidmo, 
 abbidte, 
 
 that we have j 
 that you have ; 
 
 3d p. egli or el- 
 \la dbbia 
 
 that he or she 
 [have ; 
 
 dbbiano, (aggia- 
 [no), 
 
 that they have. 
 
 \ 
 
 2. Imperfect. 
 
 1st p. io avdssi, 
 
 2d p. tuavessi, 
 3d p. avesse, 
 
 if I had, or should 
 [have ; 
 if thou hadst ; 
 if he or she had ; 
 
 avessimo, 
 
 aveste, 
 avessero (aves- 
 [sino), 
 
 if we had ; 
 
 if you had ; 
 if they had. 
 
 COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 3. Compound of the Present, or Perfect. 
 
 1st p. io dbbia I that I have had 
 
 r/7iMi#/> ' Tnr mav liavf 
 
 [or may have 
 [had; 
 
 abbidmo avuto, 
 
 that we have had, 
 
168 
 
 ANALOGY. 
 
 4. Compound of the Imperfect, or Pluperfect. 
 
 1st p. io avessi avuto, \ if 1 had had, or should have had. 
 
 IV. CONDITIONAL. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 SIMPLE TENSE. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p avrei (a 
 [vrfa), 
 
 2d p. avresti, 
 
 3d p. avrebbe 
 [(avria), 
 
 I should, would,: 
 
 [or could have ; 
 
 [or might have; 
 
 thou wouldst 
 
 [have ; 
 
 he or she would 
 [have ; 
 
 Plural. 
 
 avreste, 
 
 avrebbero {avri- 
 [ano or avr'i- \ 
 [eno), 
 
 we should of 
 [would have ; 
 
 you would have ; 
 they would have. 
 
 COMPOUND TENSE, 
 
 2. Compound of the Present, or Past. 
 
 1st p. cwrdi avu' 
 
 I should, would.; 
 [or could have 
 [had ; or might 
 [have had ; 
 
 avremmo avuto, 
 
 we should or 
 [would have had. 
 
 V. IMPERATIVE. 
 
 1st p 
 
 ft 
 
 dbbidnio not. 
 
 let us have 
 
 2d p dbbi (ag- 
 [gi) fw, 
 3d p. a66ia (ag- 
 [gia) egli or 
 [d//a, 
 
 have thou ; 
 
 let him or her 
 [have ; 
 
 abbidte voi, 
 
 dbbiano (aggia- 
 [rio) eglino or 
 [elleno, 
 
 have ye ; 
 let them have. 
 
 * The first person of the imperative in all verb* is wanting. 
 
AUXILIARY VERBS. 169 
 
 Variation of the Perb Avere, negatively. 
 
 I. INFINITIVE. 
 
 Simple Tenses. 
 
 1. Present. 
 Non avere \ not to have. 
 
 Compound Tenses. 
 
 2. Past, 
 non avere avuto , \ not to have had. 
 
 3. Future. 
 
 non avere ad avere. ) , 
 
 non avere per avere, Y r b f n ^ to have or 
 
 non dovere avere, $ [not to be about to have. 
 
 GERUND. 
 
 4. Present, 
 non avendo, \ not having. 
 
 5. Past. 
 
 non av6ndo I not having had. 
 [avuto f I 
 
 II. INDICATIVE. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 SIMPLE TENSES. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1st p. [io]nonho,\l have not; 
 2d p. non hdi, thou hast not ; 
 3d p. non ha, 'he or she has not; 
 
 non abbidmo, 
 non avete, 
 non hdnno, 
 
 2. Imperfect. 
 
 1st p. w non 
 
 [aveva, 
 2d p. non avevi, 
 
 \non aveva, 
 
 Jstp. non ebbi, 
 2d p. non avesti, 
 3d p. non dbbe. 
 
 I had not, or did 
 [not have ; 
 thou hadst not ; 
 
 3d p. egli or ilia he or she had not; 
 
 Inon avevdmo, 
 
 non avevdte, 
 non avevano, 
 
 3. Perfect. 
 
 I had not ; 
 
 thou hadst not ; 
 he or she had not; 
 
 non avemmo, 
 non aveste, 
 non ebbero, 
 
 we have not ; 
 you have not ; 
 they have not. 
 
 we had not ; 
 
 you had not ; 
 they had not 
 
 we had not ; 
 you had not ; 
 they had not. 
 
 15 
 
170 
 
 ANALOGY. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 4. Future. 
 
 1st p. non avrd, 
 2d p. non avrdi, 
 8d p. non avrd:, 
 
 I shall or will not 
 [have ; 
 thou wilt not 
 [have ; 
 he or she will 
 [not have ; 
 
 non avremo, 
 non awete, 
 non avranno, 
 
 we shall or will 
 [not have ; 
 you will not have; 
 
 they will not 
 [have. 
 
 COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 5. Second Perfect. 
 
 1st. p. \io~\ non ho aviito, I have not had. 
 
 III. CONJUNCTIVE. 
 
 1 . Present. 
 
 1st p. w non 
 [Mia, 
 2d p. tu non 
 [abbia, 
 
 3d p. egli or ella 
 {non dbbia. 
 
 that I have not, or 
 [may not have ; 
 that thou have 
 [not; 
 that he or she 
 [have not ; 
 
 non abbidmOj 
 non abbidte, 
 non dbbiano, 
 
 that we have not} 
 
 that you have 
 [not; 
 that they have 
 [not. 
 
 2. Imperfect. 
 
 1st p. w non 
 
 [avessi, 
 2d p. tu non 
 [avessi, 
 3d p. non aves- 
 [se, 
 
 if I had not, or 
 [should not have; 
 if thou hadst not ; 
 
 if he or she had 
 [not; 
 
 non avessimo, 
 non avdste, 
 non avesseroy 
 
 if we had not ; 
 if you had not ; 
 if they had not. 
 
 IV. CONDITIONAL. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. non avrei, 
 
 2d p. non avre- 
 [fit, 
 3d p. non avreb- 
 [be, 
 
 I should, would, 
 [or could not 
 [have ; or might 
 [not have ; 
 thou wouldst not 
 [have ; 
 he or she would 
 [not have ; 
 
 \non avr6mmo, 
 
 non avre"ste t 
 non amebbero, 
 
 we should or 
 [would not have; 
 
 you would not 
 [have ; 
 they would not 
 [have ; 
 
AUXILIARY VERBS. 
 
 171 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1st p. , 
 
 V. IMPE 
 
 RATI7E. 
 
 non abbidmo 
 [noi, 
 non abbidte voi, 
 
 non dbbiano 
 [eglino or elleno j 
 
 let us not have ; 
 have not ye ; 
 
 let them not 
 [have. 
 
 2d p. non avere* 
 [tu, 
 3d p. non dbbia 
 [egli or ella, 
 
 have not thou ; 
 
 let him or let her 
 [not have ; 
 
 Variation of Avere, interrogatively. 
 
 II. INDICATIVE. 
 
 
 SIMPLE TENSES. 
 
 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 
 1st p. 
 2dp. 
 3d p. 
 
 ho w ? 
 Mi tu ? 
 ha egli or 
 [ella ? 
 
 have I ? 
 hast thou ? 
 has he or she ? 
 
 abbidmo noi ? 
 avete voi ? 
 hdnno eglino or 
 [elleno 1 
 
 have we ? 
 have you ? 
 have they ? 
 
 2. Imperfect. 
 
 1st p. aveva w? 
 2d p. avevi tu 1 
 3d p. aveva 6gli 
 [or tola 1 
 
 had I ? 
 hadst thou ? 
 had he or she ? 
 
 avevdmo n6i ? 
 avevdte voi 1 
 avevano eglino 
 [or elleno ? 
 
 had we ? 
 had you ? 
 had they ? 
 
 . Perfect. 
 
 1st p. ebbiio? 
 2d p. avesti tu ? 
 3d p. ebbe egli 
 [or ella ? 
 
 had I? 
 hadst thou ? 
 had he or she ? 
 
 avemmonoi ? 
 aveste voi ? 
 ebbero eglino or 
 [elleno ? 
 
 had we ? 
 had you ? 
 had they ? 
 
 * The second person of the imperative of Italian verbs, preceded by the nega- 
 tive particle non, is changed for the present of tho infinitive of the same verbs : as, 
 non avere (instead of non dbbi), 'have not [thou].' Poets, however, and Anoito 
 and Alfieri in particular, have used both forms indiscriminately. 
 
172 
 
 ANALOGY. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 4. Future. 
 
 1st p. avrd w ? jshall or will I ! ! avremo noi ? 
 [have? 
 
 \avrete voi 1 
 
 Plural. 
 
 shall or will we 
 [have ? 
 will you have ? 
 
 2d p. avrditu? wilt thou have r \u.v c**, w* i "- j-- 
 
 Sd p. <M>ra e^ii will he or she Warano eglino will they have ? 
 [or ilia ? [have ? j [or elleno ?\ 
 
 COMPOUND TENSES^ 
 
 5. Second Perfect. 
 
 1st. p. ho w avuto, or I have I had ? 
 [ho avuto w ?! 
 
 III. CONDITIONAL. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. avrei w ? 
 2d p. avrestitu? 
 
 3d p. avrebbe 
 [egli or ilia ? 
 
 should, would, or 
 [could I have ? 
 wouldst thou 
 [have ? 
 would he or she 
 [have ? 
 
 \avremmo noi 1 
 avrdste voi ? 
 
 avrebbero eglino 
 [or elleno ? 
 
 should or would 
 [we have ? 
 would you have ? 
 
 would they haver 
 
 Variation of Avere, interrogative-negatively. 
 
 I. INDICATIVE. 
 
 SIMPLE TENSES. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. non ho w? 
 2d p. wo/I hdi 
 \tu? 
 3d p. non ha 
 [egli or ilia ? 
 
 have I not ? 
 hast thou not ? 
 
 has he or she 
 [not ? 
 
 'non abbidtno ndi? 
 l non avete voi ? 
 
 non hdnno egli- 
 [no or elleno ? 
 
 have we not ? 
 have you not ? 
 
 have they not ? 
 
 2. Imperfect. 
 
 1st p. non auevalhad I not ? 
 
 [noi ? 
 
 had we not ? 
 
 3. Perfect. 
 1st. p. non ebbi w ? \ had I not ? 
 
AUXILIARY VERBS. 173 
 
 
 
 4. Future. 
 1st p. non avrd io ? \ shall or will I not have ? 
 
 COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 5. Second Perfect. 
 
 1st p. non ho w avuto, 
 
 have I not had ? 
 
 [or non ho avitto w ? 
 
 IV. CONDITIONAL. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. non avrei w ? I should, would, or 
 [could I not have ? 
 
 Variation of the Verb Essere. 
 
 I. INFINITIVE. 
 
 
 Simple Tenses. Compound Tensea. 
 
 
 1. Present. 2. Past. 
 
 
 \ to be. 
 
 essere stdto, m. s. 1 
 
 
 
 [stdti, p. f * havp 
 
 , . , ~ _ * ^ iw Have 
 
 essere^stata, f. s.i 
 [state, p.*^ 
 
 been. 
 
 JSssere, 
 
 3. Future. 
 
 ': '-, 
 
 GERUND. 
 
 4. Present. 5. 
 
 e55endo(sendot),| being. II essendo stdto,m. ) j iavin 
 
 , , . 
 
 t Some authors, and Machiavelli in particular, have used this form constan tly in 
 prose. 
 
 15* 
 
ANALOGY. 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 
 6. Present. 
 
 7. Past. 
 
 (essente, s., 
 essenti,p.,*) 
 
 stdto, m. s. 
 
 [stdti, p. 
 stdta, f. s. 
 
 [state, p. 
 
 been. 
 
 II. INDICATIVE. 
 
 SIMPLE TENSES. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. to so'no, 
 2d p. sei or se', 
 3d p. *, 
 
 1st p. w era, 
 
 2d p. en, 
 
 3d p. dg-fo' era, 
 
 lam; 
 thou art ; 
 he is; 
 
 \\sidmo (semo), 
 (sete), 
 
 2. Imperfect. 
 
 I was; 
 
 thou wast ; 
 he was ; 
 
 eravdmo (era- 
 [ino),t 
 eravate, 
 erano, 
 
 Plural. 
 
 we are ; 
 you are ; 
 they are. 
 
 you were ; 
 they were. 
 
 3. Perfect. 
 
 1st p. /wi, 
 2d p. fosti, 
 3d p. /M (fue), 
 
 I was; 
 thou wast ; 
 he was ; 
 
 fummo, 
 
 foste, 
 
 furono (funnOj 
 
 [furnp, furo, fur, 
 
 [0r foro), 
 
 4. Future. 
 1st p. sard (fia), I shajl or will be ;j saremo, 
 
 2d p. sardi, 
 3d p. sard (fia, 
 [fie), 
 
 thou wilt be ; 
 he will be ; 
 
 sarete, 
 
 sardnno (fiano, 
 [fieno), 
 
 we were ; 
 you were ; 
 they were. 
 
 we shall or will 
 [be; 
 you will be ; 
 they will be. 
 
 * These forms are obsolete. 
 
 | Old writers have used eramo even in prose, and Alfieri has followed their 
 usage in his Vita.. 
 
AUXILIARY VERBS. 
 
 175 
 
 Singular. 
 
 COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 5. Second Perfect. 
 
 1st p. io sono 
 [stdto,m., 
 [stdta, f., 
 2d p. sei stdto, 
 [-a, 
 3d p. e stdto, -a, 
 
 I have been ; 
 
 thou hast been ; 
 
 he or she has 
 [been ; 
 
 sidmo stdti, m. 
 [stdte, f. 
 
 siete stdti, -e } 
 
 eglino sono stdti, 
 [or elleno state, 
 
 Plural. 
 
 we have been j 
 
 you have been ; 
 they have been. 
 
 6. Pluperfect. 
 
 1st p. w era std- 
 [to, -a, 
 
 I had been j 
 
 I eravdmo stdti, -e,]we had been. 
 
 7. Second Pluperfect. 
 
 1st p. fui stdto, I had been ; \\fummo stdti, -e, I we had been. 
 .[-, 
 
 8. Future interior. 
 
 1st p. 8ardstdto,\l shall or will II saremo stdti, -e 
 [-a,| [have been; II 
 
 we shall or will 
 [have been. 
 
 III. CONJUNCTIVE. 
 
 SIMPLE TENSES. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. io sia, 
 
 2d p. tu sia or 
 [lit, 
 
 3d p. egli sia, 
 
 that I be, or 
 [may be j 
 that thou be ; 
 
 that he be ; 
 
 sidmo, 
 sidte, 
 siano or sieno, 
 
 ihat we be ; 
 that you be ; 
 that they be. 
 
 2. -Imperfect. 
 
 1st p. io fossi 
 [(fussi),* 
 2d p. tu fossi, 
 3d p. fosse, 
 
 if I were ; or 
 [should be ; 
 if thou wert ; 
 if he were ; 
 
 fossimo, 
 
 foste, 
 fossero (fossino), 
 
 if we were ; 
 
 if you were ; 
 if they were. 
 
 * This form, as well as/Usse, and fbssero used by Villani, Machiavelli, Guicciar- 
 dini, even in prose, has become obsolete. 
 
176 
 
 ANALOGY. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 3. Perfect 
 1st p. io sia std- that I have been,!! sidmo stati, -e, 
 
 [to, -a, 
 
 [or may have | 
 [been ', 
 
 4. Pluperfect. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 that we have 
 [been. 
 
 1st p. w fossi if I had been ; M/ossimo stdti, -e. 
 [stdto, -a, 
 
 if we had been. 
 
 IV. CONDITIONAL. 
 
 SIMPLE TENSE. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. sarei sa- 
 [ria, fora), 
 
 2d p. saresti, 
 3d p. sarebbe 
 [(saria, fora), 
 
 I should, would, 
 [or could be; 
 [or might be ; 
 thou wouldst be ; 
 he would be ; 
 
 saremmo, 
 
 sareste, 
 sarebbero (sari- 
 [ano or sarieno, 
 [forano), 
 
 we should or 
 [would be, 
 
 you would be ; 
 they would be. 
 
 COMPOUND TENSE. 
 
 2. Past. 
 
 1st p. sarci std- 
 [to, -a, 
 
 I should, would, 
 [or could have 
 [been ; or might 
 [have been ; 
 
 saremmo stdti, 
 A-e, 
 
 we should, 
 [would, or could 
 [have been. 
 
 V. IMPERATIVE. 
 
 Istp 
 
 2d p. sia or sii be thou ; 
 
 [**; 
 
 3d p. sia egli, let him be ; 
 
 sidmo not, ilet us be ; 
 
 state voi, jbe ye; 
 
 siano or sieno let them be. 
 [eglino, 
 
REGULAR VERBS. 177 
 
 REGULAR VERBS. 
 
 Variation of Active Verbs. 
 
 Active verbs, in the compound tenses, are varied with 
 the auxiliary verb avere, ' to have.' 
 
 FIRST CONJUGATION. 
 
 Variation of the Verb Am are. 
 (Paradigm of the verbs ending in are.) 
 
 I. INFINITIVE. 
 
 Simple Tenses. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 i 
 
 Am-dre to love. 
 
 Compound Tenses. 
 
 2. Past, 
 avere amato, to have loved. 
 
 3. Future. 
 
 GERUND. 
 
 . Present. 5. Past. 
 
 am-dndo, loving. \\avendo amdto, having loved. 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 
 6. Present. V. Past. 
 
 am-dnte, s.. am- 
 ' 
 
 am-dto, m. s,, ") 
 
 .["'"-^.IP- Cloved. 
 am-ata, f. s., i 
 
 [am-dte, p. j* ) 
 
 * The present participle of active verbs, like that ofavtre, agrees with the subject of 
 the proposition in gender and number. The yos participle agrees, sometimes, with 
 the 06/ec in gender and number. 
 
178 
 
 ANALOGY. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 II. INDICATIVE. 
 
 SIMPLE TENSES. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 2. Imperfect. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1st p. am-0, 
 
 2d p. dm-i, 
 3d p. am-a, 
 
 I love, or do 
 [love, or am 
 [loving; 
 thou lovest ; 
 he loves ; 
 
 am-iamOy 
 
 am-dte, 
 dm-anOj 
 
 we love ; 
 
 you love ; 
 they love. 
 
 1st p. 10 am-ava, 
 
 2d p. am~dvi t 
 3d p. egli am- 
 [-dva, 
 
 I loved, or did 
 [love, or was 
 [loving ; 
 thou lovedst ; 
 he loved ; 
 
 am-avamo, 
 
 am-avdte, 
 am-dvano, 
 
 we loved ; 
 
 you loved ; 
 they loved ; 
 
 3. Perfect. 
 
 1st p. am-di, 
 
 2d p. am-dsti, 
 3d p. am-d, 
 
 I loved, or did 
 [love ; 
 thou lovedst ; 
 he loved ; 
 
 am-dmmo, 
 
 am-dste f 
 am-drono (am- 
 \-aro or am-dr), 
 
 we loved ; 
 
 you loved ; 
 they loved. 
 
 4. Future. 
 
 1st p. am-erd,* 
 
 2d p. am-erdij 
 3d p. am-era, 
 
 I shall or will 
 [love 5 
 thou -wilt love ; 
 he will love ; 
 
 am-eremo, 
 
 am-erite^ 
 am-erdnno, 
 
 we shall or wil 
 [lovej 
 you will love ; 
 they will love ; 
 
 * The rerbs of this conjugation in the future and the conditional, change the a oi 
 their terminations for e, and make am-erd, &c.; am-erei, &c.j instead of am-ard, &c.| 
 
 nm-n-rpi. Xrt*. 
 
REGULAR VERBS. 
 
 179 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 5. Second Perfect. 
 
 1st p. ho* amdto, 
 2d p. hdi amdto, 
 3d p, ha amdto, 
 
 I have loved ; 
 thou hast loved ; 
 he, she, or it has 
 
 j abbidmo amdto, 
 avete amdto, 
 hdnno amdto, 
 
 we have loved ; 
 you have loved ; 
 they have loved. 
 
 [loved ; 
 
 6. Pluperfect. 
 
 1st p. to aveva I had loved ; ll&umfcmo amdto, I we had loved. 
 [amdto, 
 
 7. Second Pluperfect. 
 1st p, ebbi amdto, \ I had loved. 
 
 8. Future interior. 
 1st p. avrd amdto, \ I shall or will have loved. 
 
 III. CONJUNCTIVE. 
 
 SIMPLE TENSES* 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. to dm-i 
 [(am-e), 
 2d p. tu am-i, 
 3d p. egli dm-i 
 [(am-e), 
 
 that I love, .or 
 [may love ; 
 that thou lovest ; 
 that he loves ; 
 
 am-idmo, 
 
 am-idte, 
 dm-ino, 
 
 that we love ; 
 
 that you love ; 
 that they love. 
 
 2. Imperfect. 
 
 1st p. to am-dssi, 
 
 2d p. tu am-dssi, 
 3d p. am-dsse, 
 
 if I loved, or 
 [should love; 
 if thou lovedst; 
 if he loved ; 
 
 am-dssimo, 
 
 am-dste, 
 am-dssero (am- 
 [-assino), 
 
 if we loved ; 
 
 if you loved ; 
 if they loved. 
 
 COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 3. Perfect. 
 
 1st p. to dbbia amato, 
 
 that I have loved, or 
 [may have loved ; 
 
180 ANALOGY. 
 
 4. Pluperfect. 
 1st p. to avessi amdto, \ if I had loved. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 IV. CONDITIONAL. 
 
 SIMPLE TENSE. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1st p. am-erei 
 
 I should, would, 
 
 am-er6mmo, 
 
 we should, would 
 
 [(am-eria), 
 
 [or could love, 
 
 
 [or could love ; 
 
 2d p. am-eresti, 
 
 [or might love ; 
 thou wouldst 
 
 am-ereste, 
 
 you would love ; 
 
 
 [love ; 
 
 
 
 3d p. am-erebbe 
 [(am- ma), 
 
 he would Jove ; 
 
 am-erebbero(am- 
 [-eriano, am- 
 
 they would love. 
 
 
 
 [-erieno), 
 
 
 [COMPOUND TENSE. 
 
 2. Past. 
 
 1st p. avrei amato, 
 
 I should, would, or could have 
 [loved ; or might have loved. 
 
 V. IMPERATIVE. 
 
 1st p. . 
 
 
 2d p. dm-a tu, 
 3d p. dm-iedi, 
 
 love thou ; 
 et him love ; 
 
 am-idmo noi, 
 am ate voi, 
 dm-ino dglino, 
 
 let us love ; 
 
 love ye ; 
 
 let them love. 
 
 Besides the foregoing changes of termination, there 
 are some verbs of the first conjugation, which undergo 
 in some persons and tenses a change of orthography : 
 Thus, verbs ending in care, gare, in order to preserve 
 the hard sound of c, g, in all their inflections, take an 
 h after those consonants whenever they are followed by 
 6, i as, cercare, ' to search ' ; pregare, c to entreat.' 
 
REGULAR VERBS. 
 
 183 
 
 Variation of the Verb Cercare. 
 (Paradigm of the verbs ending in care.) 
 
 II. INDICATIVE. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. cdrc-o, 
 
 2d p. cercH-i, 
 3d p. cere- a, 
 
 I search, or do 
 [search, or am 
 [searching ; 
 thou searchest ; 
 he searches ; 
 
 cercH-idmo, 
 
 cere-ate, 
 cerc-anO) 
 
 we search ; 
 
 you search ; 
 they search. 
 
 4. Future. 
 
 1st p. cercn-erd,\I shall or will 
 [search ; 
 2d p. cercH-erdi, thou wilt search ; 
 3d p. cercH-ero;, |he will search ; 
 
 \ cercH-eremo, 
 
 cei'cis-erete, 
 I cercH-erdnno. 
 
 we shall or will 
 [search ; 
 you will search ; 
 they will search. 
 
 III. CONJUNCTIVE. 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. io cercu-i that I search, or 
 
 [(cercH-e), 
 
 2d p. tu 
 
 3d p. egli cercH-i 
 [(cercH-e), 
 
 1st p. cercu-erei 
 [(cercH-eria), 
 
 2d p. 
 
 [may search ; 
 that thou search ; 
 
 that he search ; 
 
 cerciz-iamo, 
 cercu-idte, 
 
 cercn-ino, 
 
 that we search ; 
 that you search ; 
 that they search. 
 
 IV. CONDITIONAL. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 [sti, 
 
 , 
 
 3d p. cercH-ereb- 
 [be (cercH-eria) , 
 
 I should, would, 
 [or could 
 [search ; or 
 [might search ; 
 thou wouldst 
 [search ; 
 he would search ; 
 
 cerc*L-eremmo 9 
 
 cercn-ereste, 
 
 cercu-erebbero 
 [(cercH-enano, 
 [cercH-erieno), 
 
 we should, would, 
 [or could search ; 
 
 you would search ; 
 they would search. 
 
 16 
 
182 
 
 ANALOGY. 
 
 V. IMPERATIVE. 
 
 Singular. \ 
 
 Plural. 
 
 2d p. cerc-a tu, 
 3d p. cercH-i 
 [**, 
 
 search thou ; 
 let him, her, or it 
 [search ; 
 
 cercB-idmo noi, 
 cerc-6.te voi, 
 cercH-ino egli- 
 [no } 
 
 let us search ; 
 
 search ye ; 
 
 let them search. 
 
 Variation of the Verb Pregare. 
 (Paradigm of the verbs ending in gare.) 
 
 II. INDICATIVE. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. preg-o, 
 
 2d p. pregTL-i, 
 3d p. preg-a, 
 
 I entreat, or do 
 [entreat, or am 
 [entreating ; 
 thou entreatest ; 
 he entreats ; 
 
 pregR-idmo, 
 
 preg-ate, 
 preg-ano, 
 
 we entreat ; 
 
 you entreat ; 
 they entreat. 
 
 4. Future. 
 
 Istip.pregii-erd, 
 
 2d p. pregn-erdi, 
 3d p. pregn-era, 
 
 I shall or will en- 
 [treat ; 
 thou wilt entreat; 
 he will entreat ; 
 
 pregu-eremo, 
 
 pregK-erete, 
 pregu-erdnno, 
 
 we shall or will 
 [entreat ; 
 you will entreat ; 
 they will entreat. 
 
 III. CONJUNCTIVE. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. 10 pregu-i 
 [(pregn-e), 
 2d p. tu pregu-ij 
 3d p. eglipregK'i 
 [(pre'gH-e), 
 
 that I entreat, or 
 [may entreat ; 
 that thou entreat ; 
 that he entreat. 
 
 pregH-idmo 
 
 pregH-idte, 
 pregu-ino, 
 
 that we entreat ; 
 
 that you entreat ; 
 that they entreat. 
 
REGULAR VERBS. 
 
 183 
 
 Singular. 
 
 IV. CONDITIONAL. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1st p. pregu-erei 
 [(pregH-eria), 
 
 2dp. pregu-ere- 
 [sti, 
 3d p.pregH-ereb- 
 [be (pregn- 
 [-eHa), 
 
 I should, would, 
 [or could en- 
 [treat ; or might 
 [entreat ; 
 thou wouidst en- 
 [treat ; 
 he would en- 
 [treat ; 
 
 pregu-ertmmo, 
 
 pregu-ereste, 
 
 pregu-er6bbero 
 [(pregu-eriano, 
 [pregH-erieno), 
 
 we should, would, 
 [or could en- 
 [treat; 
 
 you would en- 
 [treat; 
 they would en- 
 [treat. 
 
 V. IMPERATIVE. 
 
 2d p. preg-a tu, 
 3d p. prtgu-i 
 tfgli, 
 
 entreat thou ; 
 let him, her, or it 
 [entreat ; 
 
 pregH-idmo noi, let us entreat ; 
 preg-dte voi, entreat ye ; 
 pregn-ino egli- let them entreat, 
 [no, 
 
 Verbs ending in ciare, giare, drop the i, which follows 
 c, g, whenever a, gi, precede e, I ; as, baciare, c to 
 kiss ' ; fregiare, c to adorn.' 
 
 Variation of the Verb Baciare. 
 (Paradigm of the verbs ending in dare.) 
 
 II. INDICATIVE. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. oaci-o, 
 
 2d p. 6ac-i, 
 3d p. bdci-a 
 
 I kiss or do kiss, 
 [or am kissing ; 
 thou kissest j 
 he kisses ; 
 
 bac-ldmo, 
 
 baci-dte, 
 bdci-ano, 
 
 we kiss ; 
 
 you kiss ; 
 they kiss. 
 
L84 
 
 ANALOGY. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1st p. bac-erd, 
 
 2d p. bac-erdi, 
 3d p. bac-era, 
 
 4. j 
 
 I shall, or will 
 [kiss ; 
 thou wilt kiss ; 
 he will kiss ; 
 
 Future, 
 bac-eremo, 
 
 bac-erete, 
 bac-erdnno, 
 
 we shall, or will 
 [kiss; 
 
 you will kiss ; 
 they will kiss. 
 
 III. CONJUNCTIVE. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p, io bdc-i 
 [(bac-e), 
 2d p tu bac-i, 
 3d p. egli bdc-i 
 [(bac-e), 
 
 that I kiss, or 
 [may kiss ; 
 that thou kiss ; 
 that he kiss ; 
 
 bac-ldmo, 
 
 baccate, 
 bdc-ino, 
 
 that we kiss j 
 
 that you kiss ; 
 that they kiss. 
 
 IV. CONDITIONAL. 
 1, Present. 
 
 1st p. bac-erti 
 [(bac-eria), 
 
 2d p. bac-eresti, 
 
 3d p. bac-er^bbe 
 [(faxoena), 
 
 I should, would,] 
 [or could kiss ; 
 [or might kiss ; 
 thou wouldst 
 [kiss ; 
 he would kiss ; 
 
 bac-eremmo, 
 
 bac-ereste, 
 
 bac-erebbero 
 [(5ac-mano, 
 [bac-erieno), 
 
 we should, would, 
 [or could kiss ; 
 
 you would kiss ; 
 they would kiss. 
 
 Istp 
 
 V. IMP 
 1 
 
 ERATIVE. 
 
 \bac-'idmo noi, 
 \baci-dte voij 
 \bdc-ino dgZina, 
 
 let us kiss ; 
 kiss ye ; 
 let them kiss. 
 
 2d p. bdci-a tu, 
 3d p. bdc-i egli, 
 
 kiss thou ; 
 let him kiss ; 
 
REGULAR VERBS. 
 
 ]85 
 
 Variation of the Verb Fregiare. 
 (Paradigm of the verbs ending in giareS) 
 
 II. INDICATIVE. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p./reci-o, 
 
 2d p./hjG-i, 
 3d p./reoi-a, 
 
 I adorn, do adorn, 
 [or am adorning; 
 thou adornest ; 
 he adorns ; 
 
 freG-tdmo, 
 
 freGi-dte, 
 freGi-ano, 
 
 4. Future. 
 
 1st p./rgG-erc), 
 
 2d p./rea-erdi, 
 3d p.freG-erd,, 
 
 I shall or will 
 [adorn ; 
 thou wilt adorn ; 
 he will adorn ; 
 
 \freG~eremo, 
 
 \freG-er6te, 
 \freG-erdnno, 
 
 III. CONJUNCTIVE. 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. w freG-i ithat I adorn, or 
 [(freo-e), [may adorn; 
 2d p. tufr6G-i, that thou adorn ; 
 3d p. egli frG-i that he adorn ; 
 
 egl 
 [( 
 
 freG-e),l 
 
 freG-ldmo, 
 
 freG'-iate, 
 frfa-ino, 
 
 IV. CONDITIONAL. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 we adorn ; 
 
 you adorn ; 
 they adorn. 
 
 we shall or will 
 [adorn ; 
 you will adorn ; 
 they will adorn. 
 
 that we adorn ; 
 
 that you adorn ; 
 that they adorn. 
 
 1st p. freG'erei 
 
 [(freo-eria), 
 
 2d ]>.freG-eresti, 
 
 3d p. freG-erebbe 
 [(freG-eria, 
 
 I should, would, 
 [or could adorn ; 
 [or might adorn ; 
 thou wouldst a- 
 [dorn ; 
 he would adorn ; 
 
 
 freG-erfmmo, 
 
 freG-ereste, 
 
 freG-er6bbero, 
 [(freG-eriano, 
 [frec-erieno), 
 
 we should, would, 
 [or could adorn ; 
 
 you would adorn ; 
 they would adorn. 
 
 16* 
 
186 
 
 ANALOGY. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 V. IMPERATIVE. 
 
 Istp | 
 
 2d p.frdGi-a tu, adorn thou ; 
 3d p.frfa-i egli, let him adorn; 
 
 frcG-ldmo noi, 
 freoi-dte voi, 
 freG-ino eglino, 
 
 let us adorn ; 
 
 adorn ye ; 
 
 let them adorn. 
 
 Verbs ending in rare, in which ia form one syllable, 
 drop the i whenever it is followed by another i ; as, 
 
 Noiare, 'to annoy.' 
 (Paradigm of the verbs ending in iare.) 
 
 II. INDICATIVE. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. noi-o, 
 
 2d p. no-i, 
 3d p. noi-a, 
 
 I annoy, do an- 
 [noy, or am 
 [annoying ; 
 thou annoyest ; 
 he annoys ; 
 
 no-'idmo, 
 
 noi-dte, 
 noi-ano, 
 
 we annoy ; 
 
 you annoy ; 
 they annoy. 
 
 III. CONJUNCTIVE. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. 10 no-i 
 
 [(noi-e), 
 2d p. tu no-i^ 
 3d p. egli no-i 
 [(noi-e), 
 
 that I annoy or 
 [may annoy ; 
 that thou annoy ; 
 that he annoy ; 
 
 no-ldmo, 
 
 no-tdte, 
 no-ino. 
 
 V. IMPERATIVE. 
 
 no-idmo, 
 
 Istp. . . . . j uno-ldm 
 
 2d p. noi-a tu, annoy thou ; I \noi-dte, 
 3d p. no-i egli, [let him annoy ; || no-ino, 
 
 that we annoy ; 
 
 that you annoy ; 
 that they annoy. 
 
 let us annoy ; 
 
 annoy ye; 
 
 let them annoy. 
 
REGULAR VERBS. 
 
 187 
 
 Verbs ending in tare, in which ia form two syllables, 
 drop the i, only when it would be followed by the vowels 
 ta; as, 
 
 lyiviare, ' to send.' 
 
 II. INDICATIVE. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. invi-o, 
 
 2d p. invi-if 
 3d p. invi-a, 
 
 I send, do send, 
 [or am sending ; 
 thou sendest; 
 he sends ; 
 
 inv-idmo, 
 invi-dte, 
 
 Plural. 
 
 we send ; 
 
 you send ; 
 they send. 
 
 SECOND CONJUGATION. 
 
 The verbs of this conjugation are commonly divided 
 into two classes, those ending in ere (long), and those 
 ending in ere (short) : both of these in the perfect have 
 two terminations, ei and etti ; except a few which have 
 the termination ei only. 
 
 Variation of the Verb Temere. 
 
 (Paradigm of the verbs ending in ere (long) ; and of 
 those which in the perfect end in ei and etti.) 
 
 I. INFINITIVE. 
 
 Simple Tenses. 
 
 1. Present. 
 Tem-ere, jto fear. 
 
 Compound Tenses. 
 
 2. Past . 
 || avtre temuto, |to have feared. 
 
188 ANALOGY. 
 
 3. Future. 
 
 SSSM^rc. 
 
 GERUND. 
 
 4. Present. 
 tem~6ndo, [fearing; 
 
 5. Past . 
 11 avendo temuto, lhaving feared. 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 
 6. Present. 
 
 7. Past. 
 
 tem-ente, s., 
 tern-tnti, p., 
 
 > fearing ; 
 
 tetn-utOj m. s. } "J 
 [tem-uti, p., ( 
 
 tem-uta, t. s., / 
 [<cm-wfe,p., ) 
 
 II. INDICATIVE. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 SIMPLE TENSES. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1st p. tem-o, 
 
 I fear, or do 
 
 tem-idmo (tera- 
 
 we fear; 
 
 
 [fear, or am 
 
 [emo), 
 
 
 
 [fearing ; 
 
 
 
 2d p. tem-i, 
 
 thou fearest ; 
 
 tem-ete, 
 
 you fear ; 
 
 3d p. tem-e, 
 
 he fears; 
 
 ' tem-ono 9 
 
 they fear. 
 
 2. Imperfect. 
 
 1st p. io tem-eva 
 
 I feared, or did 
 
 tem-evdmo, 
 
 we feared ; 
 
 [or tem-ea, 
 
 [fear, or was 
 
 
 
 
 [fearing ; 
 
 
 
 2d p. tem-evi, 
 
 thou fearedst ; 
 
 tem-evdte, 
 
 you feared ; 
 
 3d p. egli tem- 
 
 he feared ; 
 
 tem-evano or 
 
 they feared. 
 
 [eva or tem-ea, 
 
 
 [tem-6ano, 
 
 
 
 
 [(tem-ieno), 
 
 
REGULAR VERBS. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 189 
 
 3. Perfect. 
 
 1st p. fem-Ei or 
 [fem-ETTi, 
 [(tem-e'), 
 2d p. tem-esti, 
 3d p. tem-E or 
 
 [tem-ETTE 
 
 [(tem-e-o), 
 
 I feared, or did 
 [fear; 
 
 thou fearedst ; 
 he feared ; 
 
 tem-emmo, 
 
 tem-este, 
 fem-ERONO or 
 
 [Jem-ETTERO 
 
 [(tem-ero, tem-er) 
 
 we feared ; 
 
 you feared ; 
 they feared. 
 
 4. Future. 
 
 1st p. tem-erd) 
 
 2d p. tem-erdi, 
 3d p. tem-erb, 
 
 I shall or will 
 [fear; 
 thou wilt fear ; 
 he will fear ; 
 
 tem-eremo, 
 
 tem-erete, 
 tem-erdnnOy 
 
 we shall or will 
 [fear; 
 you will fear ; 
 they will fear. 
 
 COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 5. Second Perfect. 
 1st p. ho temutOj] I have feared ; || abbidmo temuto^we have feared. 
 
 6. Pluperfect. 
 1st p. 10 aveva temuto, \ I had feared, 
 
 7. Second Pluperfect. 
 1st p. ebbi temuto, \ I had feared. 
 
 8. Future Anterior. 
 1st p. avrd temuto, \ I shall or will have feared. 
 
 III. CONJUNCTIVE, 
 
 that we fear 5 
 that you fear ; 
 that they fear. 
 
 SIMPLE TENSES. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. 10 tem-a, 
 
 3d p. tu t6m-a or 
 \tem-i, 
 3d p. 6gli tem-a, 
 
 that I fear, or 
 [may fear ; 
 that thou fear; 
 
 that he fear ; 
 
 tem-idmo, 
 tem-idte, 
 tem-ano. 
 
190 
 
 ANALOGY. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 -Imperfect. 
 
 1st p. w tem-essi, 
 
 2d p. tu tem-essi, 
 8d p. tem-6sse, 
 
 if I feared, or 
 
 [should fear ; 
 
 if thou fearedst ; 
 
 if he feared ; 
 
 tem-este, 
 tem-essero (tem- 
 
 [-essino),| 
 
 COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 3. Perfect. 
 
 1st p. w dbbia temuto, Ithat I have feared, or 
 \ [may have feared. 
 
 4. Pluperfect. 
 1st p. w avessi temuto < t \ if I had feared. 
 
 if we feared > 
 
 if you feared ; 
 if they feared. 
 
 I should, would, 
 [or could fear ; 
 [or might fear > 
 
 1st p. tem-erei 
 [(tem-eria), 
 
 2d p. tem-eresti, 
 
 [fear ; 
 
 3d p. tem-er6bbe he would fear; 
 [(tern-era), 
 
 thou 
 
 IV. CONDITIONAL. 
 SIMPLE TENSE. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 tem-ertmmo, 
 
 wouldst 
 
 tem-ereste, 
 
 tem-erebbero 
 [(tem-erianO) 
 [tem-erieno), 
 
 we should, would, 
 [or could fear ; 
 
 you would fear; 
 they would fear. 
 
 COMPOUND TENSE. 
 
 2. Past. 
 
 1st p. avrei temuto, 
 
 I should, would, or could have 
 [feared > or might have feared. 
 
 V. IMPERATIVE. 
 
 1st p. . . . . 
 d p. t6m-i tu 
 8d p. t6m-a egli, 
 
 fear thou ; 
 let him fear ; 
 
 tem-idmo noi, ilet us fear ; 
 tem-ete voi t fear ye ; 
 tem-ano 6glino, Jlet them fear. 
 
REGULAR VERBS. 
 
 191 
 
 Variation of the Verb Tessere. 
 
 igm of the verbs ending in ere (short) ; and of 
 those which in the perfect end in ei only.) 
 
 I. INFINITIVE. 
 
 Simple Tenses. Compound Tenses. &,%$ 
 
 I. Present. 2. Past. 
 
 Ttss~ere, |to weave. j| avere tessuto, jto have woven. 
 
 3. Future. 
 
 GERUND. 
 
 4. Present. 5. Past. 
 
 tess-endo, | weaving. J| avendo tessuto, [having woven. 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 
 6. Present. 7. Past. 
 
 less- Bute* s., ' 7 
 tess-enti,?:, Reaving. 
 
 ._, m. s., 
 
 [tess-utij p., 
 
 tess-uta, f. s., 
 [tess-ute, p., 
 
 Singular. 
 
 II. INDICATIVE. 
 
 SIMPLE TENSES. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1st p. ttss-o, 
 
 I weave, or do 
 [weave, or am 
 [weaving ; 
 
 tess-idmo (tess- 
 
 we weave. 
 
192 ANALOGY. 
 
 2. Imperfect. 
 
 1st p. w tess-eva or tess-ea, \ I wove, or did weave, or 
 
 [was weaving. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 3, Perfect . 
 
 1st p. tess-i 9 
 2d p. tess-esti, 
 
 I wove, or did 
 [weave ; 
 thou wovest ; 
 
 3d p. tess-(tess- he wove ; 
 
 tess-emmo, 
 tess-este, 
 
 we wove ; 
 
 you wove ; 
 they wove. 
 
 [-eo), 
 
 4. Future. 
 1st p. tess-erd, \ I shall or will weave. 
 
 COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 5. Second Perfect. 
 1st p. ho tessuto, | I have woven. 
 
 6. Pluperfect. 
 
 1st p. 10 aveva tessuto, \ I had woven. 
 7. Second Pluperfect. 
 1st p. Mi tessuto, \ I had woven. 
 
 8. Future Anterior. 
 1st p. avrd tessitto, \ I shall or will have woven. 
 
 III. CONJUNCTIVE. 
 SIMPLE TENSE. 
 
 1. Present. 
 1st p. 10 tess-a t \ that I weave, or may weave. 
 
 2. Imperfect. 
 1st p. w tess-essi) \ if I wove, or should weave. 
 
 COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 3. Perfect. 
 1st p.io tiblia tessuto 9 \ if I wove, or should weave. 
 
REGULAR VERBS. 193 
 
 4. Pluperfect. 
 1st p. io av6ssi tessuto, \ if I had woven. 
 
 IV. CONDITIONAL. 
 SIMPLE TENSE. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. tess-erei (tess-eria), i I should, would, or could weave ; 
 
 [or might weave. 
 
 COMPOUND TENSE. 
 
 2. Past. 
 
 1st p. avrei tessiilo, 1 1 should, would, or < 
 
 I [woven ; or might h; 
 
 V. IMPERATIVE. 
 
 1st p I ..... 
 
 2d p. tess-i tu, \ weave thou. 
 
 could have 
 iave woven. 
 
 [For a list of Verbs of the Second Conjugation, that in the perfect end in #, or 
 in ei and etti, see APPENDIX, F.J 
 
 Verbs ending in cere (long), in order to preserve the 
 soft sound of c in all their inflections, take an i after 
 that consonant, whenever it is followed by a, o, u ; as, 
 
 Tacere, ' to be silent.' 
 (Paradigm of verbs ending in cere (long)*.) 
 
 I. INFINITIVE. 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 
 7. Past. 
 
 taci-uto t in. s,, taci-uli, p., \ . ., t 
 taci-uta, f. s., taci-ute,?., 5 b< ' nt ' 
 
 * These verbs are subject, also, to some irrtgularitiis, which will be noticed i 
 treating of Irregular Verbt. 
 
 17 
 
194 ANALOGY. 
 
 
 II. INDICATIVE. 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 
 lstp.faci-o*(tac- 
 
 I am silent ; 
 
 tac-ldmo, 
 
 
 [ci-o), 
 
 
 
 
 2d p. tac-i, 
 
 thou art silent ; 
 
 tac-ete, 
 
 
 3d p. tdc-e, 
 
 he is silent ; 
 
 tdci-ono 
 
 (tacci- 
 
 
 
 
 [-ono), 
 
 Plural. 
 
 we are silent ; 
 
 you are silent ; 
 they are silent. 
 
 III. CONJUNCTIVE. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. io tdci-a 
 [(tacci-a), 
 2d p. tu tdci-a 
 [or tac-i (tacci- 
 [-a,) 
 3d p. egli tdci-a 
 [(tacci-a), 
 
 that I be silent, 0r 
 [may be silent ; 
 that thou be si- 
 [lent; 
 
 that he be silent ; 
 
 tac-'idmo, 
 tac-ldte, 
 
 tdci-ano (tacci- 
 [-ano), 
 
 that we be silent ; 
 
 that you be si- 
 [lent ; 
 
 that they be si- 
 [lent. 
 
 V. IMPERATIVE. 
 
 1st p. . : . . 
 
 
 tac-lamo noi, let 
 
 us be silent * 
 
 2d p. tac-i tu, 
 3d p. tdci-a (tac- 
 [ci-a) egli, 
 
 be thou silent ; 
 let him be silent ; 
 
 tac-ete voi, be 
 tdci-ano (tacci-|let 
 [-ano) eglino,}\ 
 
 ye silent ; 
 them be si- 
 [lent 
 
 Verbs ending in cere (short) take an i after c, in the past participle 
 only ; as, I. pdsc-ere,^ to feed ' ; 7. pasci-ulo, m. s.,pasci-uti, p. ; 
 pasci-uta, f. s. ; pasci-iite, p., fed.' 
 
 Verbs ending in iere drop the i, whenever it is fol- 
 lowed by another i ; as 3 
 
 Empiere, ' to fill.' 
 (Paradigm of the verbs ending in iere.) 
 
 1st p. 
 
 II. INDICATIVE. 
 
 j . Present. 
 
 |I fill, or do fill, or \\emp-idmo (emp- we fill; 
 [am filling;" [-'iemo), 
 
 * Tdcio, pronounce both the Romans and Florentines, following the orthography 
 >f the best prose writers (and not tdccio, as poets have, sometimes, been obliged to 
 say), to distinguish this from t'accio, a form of the verb taccidre, c to blame.' 
 
REGULAR VERBS. 
 
 195 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 2d p. 6mp-i, 
 3d p. empi-e, 
 
 thou fillest; 
 he fills, 
 
 \empi-ete, 
 \empi-ono, 
 
 III. CONJUNCTIVE. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. . . . 
 2d p. emp-i tu, 
 3d p. empi-a 
 
 V. IMPERATIVE. 
 
 fill thou ; 
 let him fill ; 
 
 emp'iamo, 
 empi-6te } 
 empi-ano j 
 
 you fill ; 
 they fill. 
 
 1st p. w empi-a 
 [(empi-e), 
 2d p. tu empi-a 
 [or emp-i, 
 3d p. egli empi-a 
 [(empi-e), 
 
 that I fill, or 
 [may fill ; 
 that thou fill ; 
 
 that he fill ; 
 
 emp-ldmo, 
 emp-late, 
 empi-ano, 
 
 that we fill ; 
 that you fill ; 
 that they fill. 
 
 let us fill j 
 
 fill ye J 
 
 let them fill. 
 
 THIRD CONJUGATION. 
 
 The verbs of this conjugation are divided into three 
 classes, those which, in the present of the indicative, 
 end in o ; those which end in isco ; and those which 
 have both of these terminations. 
 
 Variation of the Verb Sentire. 
 
 (Paradigm of the verbs of the third conjugation which, 
 in the present of the indicative, end in o only.) 
 
 Simple Tenses. 
 
 1. Present. 
 Sent-ire, |to hear. 
 
 I. INFINITIVE. 
 
 Compound Tenses. 
 
 2. Past. 
 |j avere sentitOj (to have heard. 
 
196 
 
 ANALOGY. 
 
 3 Future. 
 
 avere a sentire, 
 essere per sentire, 
 dovere sentire, 
 
 4. Present, 
 sent-endoj |hearing. 
 
 to have to hear, or 
 
 to be about to hear. 
 
 j 
 
 GERUND. 
 
 5. Past. 
 \\ avendo sentito t |having heard. 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 
 6. Present. 
 
 (sent-6nte, s., ) , . 
 sent-enti,?.,) Bearing. 
 
 sent-ito, m. s., 
 [sent-iti, p., 
 
 sent-ita, f. s., 
 [sent-ite, p., 
 
 II. INDICATIVE. 
 
 SIMPLE TENSES. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. sent-o, 
 
 2d p. s6nt-i, 
 3d p. sent-E, 
 
 I hear, or do 
 [hear, or am 
 [hearing ; 
 thou hearest ; 
 he hears ; 
 
 sent-idmo, 
 
 sent-ite, 
 sent-oxo, 
 
 we hear ; 
 
 you hear ; 
 they hear. 
 
 2. Imperfect. 
 
 [or sent-ia, 
 
 2d p. sent-ivi, 
 3d p. egli sent- 
 [iva or sent-ia, 
 
 1st p. sent-ii, 
 
 2d p. sent-istiy 
 3d p. sent-i(sent- 
 
 1 heard, or did 
 [hear, or was 
 [hearing ; 
 thou heardst ; 
 he heard ; 
 
 sent-ivdmo, 
 
 ,. 
 sent-ivdte, 
 sent-ivano or 
 \sent-\ano 
 [(sent-ieno), 
 
 3. Perfect. 
 
 I heard, or did 
 [hear ; 
 
 thou heardst ; 
 he heard ; 
 
 sent-immo, 
 
 sent'iste, 
 sent-irono (sent- 
 [-iro, sen-tir), 
 
 we heard ; 
 
 you heard ; 
 they heard. 
 
 we heard ; 
 
 you heard ; 
 they heard. 
 
REGULAR VERBS. 
 
 197 
 
 Singular. 
 4. Future. 
 
 1st p. sent~ird, 
 
 2d p. sent-irdi, 
 3d p. serit-irti, 
 
 I shall or will 
 [hear ; 
 thou wilt hear ; 
 he will hear ; 
 
 sent-iremo, 
 
 sent-irete, 
 sent-irdnno, 
 
 Plural. 
 
 we will hear ; 
 
 you will hear ; 
 they will hear. 
 
 COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 5. __ Second Perfect. 
 1st p. ho sentitOj \ I have heard. 
 
 6. Pluperfect. 
 1st p. io aveva sentito, \ I had heard, 
 
 7. Second Pluperfect. 
 1st p. 6boi sentito, \ I had heard, 
 
 8. Future Anterior. 
 1st p. avrd sentito, \ I shall or will have heard. 
 
 III. CONJUNCTIVE. 
 
 SIMPLE TENSES. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. w sent-Aj 
 
 2d p. tu sent-A. 
 [or sent-i, 
 3d p. egli sent-A , 
 
 that I hear, or 
 [may hear ; 
 that thou hear ; 
 
 that he hear ; 
 
 sent-idmo, 
 sent-idte } 
 $e"nt-Axo, 
 
 that we hear ; 
 that you hear ; 
 that they hear. 
 
 2. Imperfect. 
 
 1st p. io sent-issi, 
 
 2d p. tu sent-issi, 
 3d p. sent-isse, 
 
 if I heard, or 
 [should hear ; 
 if thou heardst ; 
 if he heard ; 
 
 sent-issimo, 
 
 sent-iste, 
 sent-issero (sent- 
 
 [-fssino),l 
 
 COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 if we heard ; 
 iik 
 
 if you heard; 
 if they heard. 
 
 3. Perfect. 
 
 1st p. 10 dbbia sentito, 
 IT* 
 
 that I have heard, or 
 [may have heard. 
 
198 ANALOGY. 
 
 4. Pluperfect. 
 1st p. w avessi sentito, \ if I had heard. 
 
 IV. CONDITIONAL. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 SIMPLE TENSE. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1st p. sent-irei 
 [(sent-iria), 
 
 2d p. sent-ir6sti, 
 
 3d p. sent-irebbe 
 [(sent-iria) , 
 
 I should, would, 
 [or could hear j 
 [or might hear j 
 thou wouldst 
 [hear ; 
 he would hear ; 
 
 sent-iremmo, 
 
 sent-ireste, 
 
 sent-irebbero 
 [(sent-iriano), 
 
 we should, would, 
 [or could hear j 
 
 you would hear ; 
 they would hear. 
 
 COMPOUND TENSE. 
 
 2. Past . 
 
 1st p. avrdi sentito, 
 
 I should, would, or could have 
 [heard ; or might have heard. 
 
 V. IMPERATIVE. 
 
 1st p ... 
 
 
 ll sent-idmo noi. 
 
 let us hear 5 
 
 2d p. sent-i tu, 
 3d p. sent-A. 6gli, 
 
 hear thou ; 
 let him hear ; 
 
 sent-ite voi, 
 \\ sdnf-ANO eglinoy 
 
 hear ye ; 
 let them hear. 
 
 Variation of the Verb Esibire. 
 
 (Paradigm of those verbs of the third conjugation, 
 which, in the present of the indicative, have the termin- 
 ation isco only.) 
 
 I. INFINITIVE. 
 
 Simple Tensei. 
 
 1. _ Present. 
 Esib-ire, |to offer. 
 
 Compound Tenses. 
 
 2. Past. 
 || avere esibito, |to have offered. 
 
REGULAR VERBS. 
 
 199 
 
 3. Future. 
 
 avere ad esibire, ) . , 
 
 iner* peresMre, I * ^ave o offer or 
 
 dovere esibire, 
 
 4. Present, 
 esib-endo, |offering. 
 
 to be about to offer. 
 
 j 
 
 GERUND. 
 
 5.-- Past. 
 || avtndo esibito, |having offered. 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 
 6. Present, 
 esib-ente, s., 
 
 7. Past. 
 
 esib-ito, m. s., J 
 
 eslb-ita^l'S [ offered - 
 [esib-ite, p., } 
 
 
 II. INDICATIVE. 
 
 
 SIMPLE TENSES. 
 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. 
 
 2dp. 
 3d p. 
 
 esib-iscoj 
 
 esib-isci, 
 esib-iscE, 
 
 I offer, or do 
 [offer, or am 
 [offering ; 
 thou offerest ; 
 he offers ; 
 
 esib'idmo, 
 
 esib-ite, 
 esib-iscoxo, 
 
 we offer ; 
 
 you offer ; 
 they offer. 
 
 2. Imperfect. 
 
 1st p. w esib-wa or esib-ia, \ I offered, or did offer, or 
 
 [was offering. 
 
 3. Perfect. 
 
 1st p. esib-ti, \ I offered, or did offer. 
 
 4. Future. 
 
 1st p. esib-ird, \ I shall or will offer. 
 
 COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 5. Second Perfect. 
 1st p. ho esibito, \ I have offered. 
 
200 
 
 ANALOGY. 
 
 6. Pluperfect. 
 1st p. 10 aveva esibito, \ I had offered. 
 
 7. Second Pluperfect. 
 1st p. ebU esibito, \ I had offered. 
 
 8. Future Anterior.. 
 1st p. avrd esibito, \ I shall or will have offered. 
 
 III. CONJUNCTIVE. 
 SIMPLE TENSES. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. 10 esib- 
 [-fscA, 
 2d p. tu esib- 
 [-ISCA, or esib- 
 
 [-1SCHI, 
 
 3d p. egli esib- 
 r-iscA. 
 
 that I offer, or 
 [may offer j 
 that thou offer; 
 
 that he offer ; 
 
 esib-idmo, 
 esil-idte, 
 
 esi6-iscAN 
 
 Plural. * * 
 
 that we offer ; 
 that you offer ; 
 
 that they offer. 
 
 2. Imperfect. 
 1st p. w esib-issij \ if I offered, or should offer. 
 
 COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 * ! 
 
 3. Perfect. 
 
 1st p. w dbbia esibito, i that I have offered, or 
 [may have offered. 
 
 4. Pluperfect. 
 1st p. w avessi esibito, \ if I had offered. 
 
 IV. CONDITIONAL. 
 SIMPLE TENSE. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. esib-irdi (esib-iria), 1 I should, would, or could offer ; 
 
 [or might offer. 
 
REGULAR VERBS. 201 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 COMPOUND TENSE. 
 
 2. Past. 
 
 1st p. avrei esib'ito, I I should, would, or could have 
 
 I [offered; or might have offered. 
 
 V. IMPERATIVE. 
 
 Istp 
 
 2d p. esib-isci, 
 3d p. esil 
 
 offer thou ; || esib-ite, 
 
 let him offer ; 
 
 let us offer ; 
 
 offer ye ; 
 
 let them offer. 
 
 Variation of the Verb Abborrire. 
 
 (Paradigm of those verbs of the third conjugation, 
 which, in the present of the indicative, end both in o 
 and isco.) 
 
 I. INFINITIVE. 
 
 Simple Tenses. Compound Tenses. 
 
 1. Present. 2. Past . 
 
 Jlbborr-ire, |to abhor. || av6re abborrito t |to have abhorred. 
 
 3. Future. 
 
 avere ad abborrire, } , , , , 
 
 issere per abborrire t < f to , hav S^SS ** 
 dovtre abbornre t ) t0 be ab Ut tO abh r> 
 
 GERUND. 
 
 4. Present. 5. Past. 
 
 abborr-endo, {abhorring, \\av6ndo abborrito t [having abhorred. 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 
 6. Present. 7. Past. 
 
 abborr-ente, s., > K , . abborr-ito, m. s., 
 
 abborr-enti, p., Ja b o"ing. [ ab borr4ti, p., ^ abhorre d. 
 
 abborr-ita, f. s., 
 P- 
 
202 
 
 ANALOGY. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 II. INDICATIVE. 
 
 SIMPLE TENSES. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 l8tp.a&&orr-o,or I abhor, or do 
 
 [abborr-iscoj 
 
 3d p. a&60Vr-E,or 
 [aooorr-fscE, 
 
 [abhor, or am 
 
 abborr-idmo, 
 
 [abhorring; 
 
 2d p. abborr-i, or thou abhorrest ; abborr-ite, 
 [abborr-faci, 
 
 he abhors ; 
 
 abborr-ovo, or 
 
 [a&0orr-fscoNO, 
 2. Imperfect. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 we abhor ; 
 
 you abhor ; 
 they abhor. 
 
 1st p. io abborr-wa or abborr-ia,< I abhorred, or did abhor, or 
 
 [was abhorring. 
 
 3. Perfect. 
 
 1st p. abborr-ii, \ I abhorred, or did abhor. 
 
 4. Future. 
 
 1st p. abborr-ird, \ I shall or will abhor, 
 
 COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 5. Second Perfect. 
 1st p. ho abborrito, \ I have abhorred. 
 
 6. Pluperfect. 
 1st p. io at>eea abborrito t \ I had abhorred. 
 
 7. Second Pluperfect. 
 1st p. ebbi abborrito, \ I had abhorred. 
 
 8. Future interior. 
 1st p. avrd abborrito, \ I shall or will have abhorred. 
 
REGULAR VERBS. 
 
 203 
 
 Singular. 
 
 III. CONJUNCTIVE. 
 SIMPLE TENSES. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Istp.t0a00<5rr-A,ithat I abhor, or 
 [may abhor ; 
 that thou abhor ; 
 
 that he abhor ; 
 
 [or abborr-i', or 
 [a&00rr-iscA,or 
 [000rr-iscHi, 
 3d p. egli abborr- 
 ~-A, or abborr- 
 
 [-A, or c 
 
 [-fsCA, 
 
 abborr-idmo, 
 abborr-idte, 
 
 TO,ora-&- 
 [oorr-iscANO,, 
 
 that we abhor ; 
 that you abhor ; 
 
 that they abhor. 
 
 2. Imperfect. 
 1st p. 10 abborr-issij \ if I abhorred, or should abhor. 
 
 COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 3. Perfect. 
 
 1st p. 10 dbbia abborrito, 
 
 that I have abhorred, or 
 
 [may have abhorred. 
 
 4. Pluperfect. 
 1st p. io avessi abborrito, \ if I had abhorred. 
 
 IV. CONDITIONAL. 
 SIMPLE TENSE. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. abborr-irei (abborr-iria). 
 
 I should, would, or could abhor ; 
 [or might abhor. 
 
 COMPOUND TENSE. 
 
 2. Past . 
 
 1st p. avrei abborrito t 
 
 I should, would, 0r could have ab- 
 [horred 5 0r might have abhorred. 
 
204 
 
 ANALOGY. 
 
 V. IMPERATIVE. 
 
 Singi 
 1st p. ... 
 
 ilar, 
 
 i 
 
 Plur 
 
 abborr-idmo^noi, 
 abborr-ite voi, 
 
 &5orr-ANo, or 
 [a&&orr-fscANO 
 [eglino, 
 
 al. 
 
 let us abhor ; 
 abhor ye ; 
 
 let them abhc 
 
 2d p. abborr-i, or 
 \abborr-i sci tu y 
 3d p. a65Jrr-A,or 
 
 [egli, 
 
 abhor thou ; 
 let him abhor ; 
 
 [For a list of Verbs of the Third Conjugation, that in the present of the indicative 
 end in 0, in tsco, or in o and *isco : see APPENDIX, G.] 
 
 Verbs ending in cire, in order to preserve the soft 
 sound of the c in all their inflections, take an i after that 
 consonant, whenever it is followed by a, o ; as, 
 
 Cucire, c to sew.' 
 (Paradigm of the verbs ending in are.) 
 
 II. INDICATIVE. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. cuci~o, 
 
 2d p. cuc-ij 
 3d p. cwc-e, 
 
 I sew, do sew, or 
 [am sewing ; 
 thou sewest ; 
 he sews ; 
 
 cuc-ldmo (cuc- 
 [-imo), 
 cue-lie , 
 cuci-ono, 
 
 we sew ; 
 
 you sew ; 
 they sew. 
 
 III. CONJUNCTIVE. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. w cuci-a, 
 
 2d p. tu cuci-a 
 
 [or cuc-i, 
 3d p. egli cuci-a, 
 
 that I sew, or 
 [may sew ; 
 that thou sew ; 
 
 that he sew ; 
 
 cuc-ldmo, 
 cuc-idte, 
 cuci-ano, 
 
 that we sew ; 
 that you sew ; 
 that they sew. 
 
REGULAR VERBS. 205 
 
 V. IMPERATIVE. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 1st p. . . . 
 2d p. cuc~i tUj 
 3d p. cwci-i 
 
 sew thou ; 
 let him sew ; 
 
 ^ 
 
 cuc-ite voi, 
 cuci-ano eglino, 
 
 let us sew ; 
 
 sew ye ; 
 
 let them sew. 
 
 REMARKS ON THE FOREGOING VERBS. 
 
 There are some verbs of the third conjugation that 
 belong also to the second ; having two terminations in 
 the infinitive, one in ire, the other in ere ; as, 
 
 appetire, appttere, to desire ; 
 
 inghiottire, inghiottere, . to swallow : 
 
 some, that belong also to the first conjugation; having 
 the two terminations ire and are ; as, 
 
 impazzire, impazzare, to grow mad ; 
 
 incoraggire, incoraggiare, to encourage : 
 
 and some others, that belong to all three of the conju- 
 gations ; as, 
 
 ruggire, ruggere, rugghiare, to roar ; 
 olire, olere, olezzare, to be fragrant. 
 
 These verbs are differently varied, according to the 
 conjugation to which their different terminations re- 
 spectively belong. 
 
 The verbs of the second and third conjugation, in 
 the first, second, and third persons singular of the 
 present of the indicative and conjunctive, and in the 
 second and third persons singular of the imperative, 
 have constantly the accent on the penultimate syllable ; 
 as, temo, temi, teme, tema ; sento, senti, sente, 
 senta, &c. Of those of the first conjugation, some 
 have the accent on the penultimate syllable ; as, amo, 
 ami, ama, ami ; and others, on the antepenultimate ; 
 
 18 
 
206 ANALOGY. 
 
 as, mormoro ('I murmur '), mormori, mormora, mor- 
 mori, &tc. 
 
 [For rules for determining when the verbs of the first conjugation, in the present 
 of the indicative, conjunctive, and imperative, have the accent on the penultimate or 
 the antepenultimate syllable, see APPENDIX, H.] 
 
 JLmbire, c to crave,' in the first person plural of the 
 present of the indicative, conjunctive, and imperative ; 
 
 and in the second person plural of the present of the 
 conjunctive, makes abbiamo ambizione, abbiate ambi- 
 zione, to distinguish these persons from the correspond- 
 ing ones of the verb ambiare, ' to amble. 5 
 
 Jlrdire, c to dare,' in the first person plural of the 
 present of the indicative, conjunctive, and imperative ; 
 
 in the second person plural of the present of the con- 
 junctive, and in the gerund makes, abbiamo ardire 
 or ardimento, abbiate ardire, &c., avendo ardire ; 
 and not ardiamo, ardiate, ardendo, which come 
 from ardere, 'to burn.' 
 
 Bollire, ' to boil,' in the first person plural of tHe 
 present of the indicative, conjunctive, and imperative, 
 and in the second person plural of the present of the 
 conjunctive, changes II into gl, and makes bogliamo, 
 bogliate, to distinguish these persons from the corre- 
 sponding ones of the verb bolldre, ' to stamp,' < to set a 
 seal.' 
 
 Gioire, ' to rejoice,' in the first person plural of the 
 present of the indicative, conjunctive, and imperative, 
 
 in the second person plural of the present of the 
 conjunctive, and in the past participle, borrows the 
 corresponding forms of the verb goder^ and makes 
 godiamo, godiate, goduto. 
 
 Smaltire, 'to digest,' in the first person plural of the 
 present of the indicative, conjunctive, and imperative, 
 and in the second person plural of the present of the 
 conjunctive, makes proccuriamo di smaltir e,-*-pr occur i- 
 dte di smaltire ; and not smaltidmo, smaltidie, which 
 come from smaltdre, ' to enamel.' 
 
REGULAR VERBS. 
 
 207 
 
 Suggere, ' to suck,' in the past participle borrows 
 that of succhiare, and makes succhiato, ' sucked. 5 
 
 Many regular verbs, in some tenses, have also an 
 irregular formation, which will be noticed in treating of 
 Irregular Verbs. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Egli e il vero, ch* w ho AMATO, It is true, that I have loved, 
 
 ed AMO Guiscdrdo, e. quanta and do love Guiscard, and I will 
 
 viverd w V AMERO ; e se ap- love him as long as I live ; and if 
 
 presso la morte s' AMA, non mi we love after death, I will not 
 
 rimarrd d' AMARZo. (Bocc. g. 4. cease to love him. 
 
 Qu6l che noi CERCHIAMO di 
 fuggire. (Bocc. Introd.) 
 
 Che noi non PREGHIAMO cose 
 sozze, e non le lascldmo PRE- 
 GARE. (Albert. 2. 10.) 
 
 BACERETE il pib a Nostro 
 Signore a nome mw. (Bernb. 
 Lett.) 
 
 Bonta non b che sua mem6ria 
 FREGI. (Dant. Inf. 8.) 
 
 Guardate, che '/ venir su non 
 vi NOI. (Dant. Purg. 9.) 
 
 TEMETTE di non dovervi 6s- 
 sere ricevuto. (Bocc. g. 3. n. 1.) 
 
 ssi ruppero le uova degli 
 dspidi, e TESSERONO le tele de 3 
 rdgnoli. (Mor. S. Gregor.) 
 
 Le leggi, cos}, le divine come 
 le umdne, TACIONO. (Bocc. g. 6. 
 n, 1.) 
 
 That which we endeavour to 
 avoid. 
 
 For we do not ask for vulgar 
 things, nor let others ask for 
 them. 
 
 You will kiss the feet of Our 
 Lord [the Pope] for me. 
 
 No virtue Jends its lustre to his 
 memory. 
 
 Take heed that your coming up- 
 ward does not harm you. 
 
 He feared he should not be re- 
 ceived there. 
 
 They broke the eggs of the 
 asps, and wove spider's webs. 
 
 The laws, divine as well as 
 human, are silent. 
 
208 
 
 ANALOGY. 
 
 JSssa, che la sera davdnti ce- 
 ndto non avea, da fame costretta 3 
 a pdscere V Me si diede, e PAS- 
 CIUTA come pote, piangdndo, a 
 vdrj pensieri della sua futura 
 vita si diede. (Bocc. g. 2. n. 6.) 
 
 Sostien persona tu di capitdno, 
 E di mm lontandnza EMPI il 
 difetto. (Tass. Ger. 11., 56.) 
 
 Esser non pud, che quell* an- 
 gelic* a/ma, Non SENTA 'I suon 
 dell' amorose note. (Petr. c. 38.) 
 
 Vdssi per tdnto a Giac6bbe, e 
 si ESIBISCONO le soddisfazioni 
 maggiori, che darsi pdssano a 
 uomini forestidri. (Segn. Pred. 
 25.) 
 
 E lo sveglidto cid che x&de 
 ABBORRE. (Dant. Par. 26.) 
 
 She, that the evening before 
 had not supped, compelled by 
 hunger, began to feed herself on 
 herbs, and after she had fed her- 
 self as well as she could, weeping 
 abandoned herself to the various 
 thoughts of her future life. 
 
 Do thou support the office of 
 captain, and supply the want of 
 my absence. 
 
 It cannot be possible, that that 
 angelic soul does not hear the 
 sound of the amorous notes. 
 
 They go therefore to Jacob, 
 and offer him the greatest satis- 
 faction, which could be given to 
 strangers. 
 
 And the upstartled abhors what 
 he sees. 
 
 Jlblorrente, [doe] che ABBOR- Abhorring, [that is to say] that 
 RfscE. (Crusca.) " abhors. 
 
 Con tal cura viene, Che 
 la pidga da sezzo si RICUCIA. 
 (Dant. Purg. 25.) 
 
 Tu ancora non s6i ben tempe- 
 rdto in qudsta virtu di APPETIRE 
 gli onori. (Casa, lett. 70.) 
 
 La meditazione le mostrdva, 
 che ella dovesse APPETERE, e do- 
 manddre. (Seal. S. Agost.) 
 
 E non par mica vergogna, 
 Tra i bicchidri IMPAZZIR tre 
 volte r anno. (Red. Ditir. 37.) 
 
 La donna sentiva si fdtto do- 
 lore, che quasi ri> era per IM- 
 PAZZARE. (Bocc. g. 4. n. 10.) 
 
 E 9 n sul cor quasi fero leon 
 r IE, La nolte allor, quand' 
 posdr dovrei. (Petr. s. 228.) 
 
 It is with such care, that the 
 wound finally heals. 
 
 Thou hast not yet moderated 
 thyself in the virtue of desiring 
 honor. 
 
 Meditation taught her what she 
 ought to desire and ask. 
 
 And it does not seem to be a 
 shame to get crazy among glasses 
 three times a year. 
 
 The woman was so much af- 
 flicted, that she came near being 
 crazy. 
 
 And in my heart, like a fierce 
 lion, it roars in the night when I 
 ought to repose, 
 
REGULAR VERBS. 
 
 209 
 
 Va come Ii6ne,che RUGGISCE, It goes, like a lion that roars, 
 
 cercdndo cui possa divordre. seeking whom he may devour. 
 (Cavalc. Med. cuor.) 
 
 Posciache 'Ifuoco alqudnto ebbe After that the fire had roared 
 
 RUGGHIATO. (Dant. Inf. 27.) awhile. 
 
 EXERCISE XVI. 
 
 [Let the learner change the terminations dre^ ere, ire, of the infinitive mood of 
 the following Italian verbs, for the particular terminations t"hey respectively take 
 in the person and tense indicated by the English, according to the foregoing 
 Paradigms.] 
 
 FIRST CONJUGATION. 
 
 J. 1.* To love. 
 Jlmdre. 
 
 4. loving. 7. loved __ II. 
 am-dre. am-dre. 
 
 1. I love, thou speakest, he sings, we play, you dance, 
 am-dre, parl-dre, cant-are, son-are, ball-are, 
 
 they study. 2. I walked, thou passedst, he called, 
 studi-dre. cammin-dre, pass-dre, chiam-dre, 
 
 we prattled, you confessed, they ordered. 3. I 
 ciarl-dre, confess-dre, ordin-dre. 
 
 confirmed, thou didst deliver, he considered, we preserved, 
 conferm-dre, consegn-dre, consider-dre, conserv-dre, 
 
 you advised, they disputed. 4. I will expect, thou 
 consigli-dre, contrast-are. aspett-dre, 
 
 wilt imagine, he will assault, we will dedicate, you will 
 immagin-dre, assalt-are, dedic-dre, 
 
 assure, they will^ seek. 5. I have praised.f - IIL 
 assicur-dre, cere-are. lod-dre, 
 
 1. I may fast, thou mayest besiege, he may ride, we 
 digiun-dre, assedi-dre, cavalc-dre, 
 
 may punish, you may prove, they may practise, 2. 
 castig-dre, prov-dre, pratic.-dre. 
 
 * To facilitate reference, we use, in this and the following exercises on verbs, the 
 numbers, which we have affixed to the moods and tenses in the Paradigms. 
 
 f The learner can form the compound tenses of any of these verbs by joining 
 their past participle to the simple tenses of the auxiliary verb avere, ' to have.' 
 
 18* 
 
210 ANALOGY. 
 
 I might refuse, thou mightest invent, he might accept, we 
 rifiut-are, invent-dre, accett-dre, 
 
 might accompany, you might experience, they might ad- 
 accompagn-dre, speriment-dre, amministr- 
 
 mim'ster. IV. 1. I would prolong, thou wouldst ven- 
 
 -dre. prolung-dre, arrisic- 
 
 ture, he would eat, we would pray, you would envy, 
 -are, mangi-are, preg-dre, invidi-dre, 
 
 they would tire. V. ask thou, let him judge, let 
 
 annoi-dre. domand-dre, giudic-dre, 
 
 us change, carry ye back, let them wait. 
 cambi-drc, riport-dre, aspett-dre. 
 
 SECOND CONJUGATION. 
 
 I. 1. To fear. 4. fearing. 7. feared __ II. 
 Tem&re. tern-ire,. tem-ere. 
 
 1. I believe, thou feceivest, he sells, we repeat, you 
 cred-ere, ric6v-ere, vend-ere, ripet-ere,* 
 
 enjoy, they depend. 2. I wove, thou didst beat down, 
 god-tire, dipnd-ere. tess-erc, abbdtt-ere, 
 
 he rivaled, we debated, you exacted, they consented. 
 comp6t-ere, dibdtt-ere, esig-ere, accdd-ere. 
 
 3. I mowed, thou didst beat, he groaned, we sheared, 
 miet-ere, bdtt-ere,. gem-ere, tond-ert, 
 
 you reflected, they turned. 4. I will provide, thou 
 riflett-ere, intess-ere. 
 
 wilt fill, he will rage, we will feed, you will lose, they 
 etnpi-ere, frdm-ere, pdsc-ere, ptrd-ere, 
 
 will press. - III. 1. I may cleave, thou mayest render, 
 prem-ere. jend-ere, rtnd-ere, 
 
 he may resolve, we may re-enjoy, you may unweave, 
 risolv-ere, rigod-6re, st&ss-ere, 
 
 they may succeed. 2. I might yield, thou mightest 
 succed-ere. c6d-ere, assolv- 
 
 absolve, he might grant, we might dissolve, you might fill 
 -ere, conc6d-ere, dissolv~ere t ridmpi- 
 
REGULAR VERBS. 211 
 
 again, they might suck. IV. 1. I would combat, 
 
 -ere, sugg-ere. combatt-ere, 
 
 thou wouldst precede, he would hang up, we would sell 
 prec6d-ere, append-ere, rivend- 
 
 over again, you would proceed, they would succumb. 
 
 -ere, proc6d-ere, soccomb-ere. 
 
 V. desist thou, let him drink, let us accomplish, recede 
 desist-ere, b^v-ere, compi-ere, ricdd-ere, 
 
 ye, let them pour out.* 
 mesc-ere. 
 
 THIRD CONJUGATION. 
 
 I. 1. To hear. 4. hearing. 7. heard. II. 
 
 Sentire. sent-ire. sent-ire. 
 
 1. I sleep, thou consentest, he understands, we rejoice, 
 dorm-ire, consent-ire, cap-ire, gio-ire t 
 
 you transfer, they serve. 2. I fled, thou embellishedst, 
 trasfer-ire, serv-ire. fugg-ire, abell-ire, 
 
 he animated, we weakened, you attacked, they admonished. 
 anim-ire, indebbol-ire, assal-ire, ammon-ire. 
 
 3. I constructed, thou conceivedst, he banished, we 
 costru-ire, concep-ire, band-ire, 
 
 assisted, you supplied, they finished. 4. I will favor, 
 accud-ire, suppl-ire, Jin-ire. favor-ire, 
 
 thou wilt differ, he will cure, we will hinder, you will 
 differ-ire, guar-ire, imped-ire, 
 
 infer, they will grow proud. III. 1. I may assent, 
 
 infer-ire, insuperb'ire. assent-ire, 
 
 thou mayest furnish, he may chide, we may boil, 
 forn-ire, garr-ire, boll-ire, 
 
 you may crave, they may establish. 2. I might 
 
 amb-ire, stabil-ire. un~ 
 
 unite, thou mightest betray, he might nurish, we 
 -ire, trad-ire, nutr-ire, 
 
 Irregular Verbs. 
 
212 ANALOGY. 
 
 might warrant, you. might encourage, they might ^ plead. 
 garant-ire, incoragg-ire, piat-ire. 
 
 IV. 1. I would restore, thou wouldst quench, he 
 
 restitu-irej sop-ire, 
 
 would exhaust, we would define, you would ascertain, 
 esaur-ire, defin-ire, chiar-ire, 
 
 they would season. V. act thou, let him hear, let 
 
 cond-ire. ag-ire, sent-ire, 
 
 us dare, obey ye, let them punish. 
 ard-ire, obled-ire, pun-ire. 
 
 VARIATION OF PASSIVE VERBS. 
 
 Passive verbs are formed by joining the verb essere, 
 6 to be,' to the past participle of active verbs. 
 
 Passive verbs, therefore, through all their tenses, are 
 varied with the auxiliary verb essere. 
 
 Variation of the Verb Essere Amato. 
 (Paradigm of the passive verbs.) 
 
 I. INFINITIVE. 
 
 Simple Tenses. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 famdto, m. s., \ 
 3 H> P-> I to he 
 ^ amdto, f. s., | loved. 
 
 Compound Tenses. 
 2. Past. 
 
 f stdto amdto. m.s.. \ . , 
 esse-) stdti amdti* p., ( Jhave 
 re) s^aam^a,f.s., (, een , 
 v stofea?na^,p., ^ 1( 
 
 3. Future. 
 
 avere ad tssere ^ am&i m ^ C to have to be loyed or 
 ^sere per essere > amdta f < to be about to be loved, 
 
 doudre Essere > ' ^ ( 
 
 * The past participle of passive verbs, like that of essere, agrees with the suljett 
 of the verb in gender and number. 
 
REGULAR VERBS. 
 
 213 
 
 4. Present. 
 f amdto, m. s., 
 
 5. Past. 
 
 amto, m. s., \ 
 
 ^1. p s :; Ltl 
 
 [-e, P .,J 
 
 s, f 
 
 s * n - \stdtaamdta, 
 do I **ife om&e, p.. 
 
 II. INDICATIVE. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 SIMPLE TENSES. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. to sono 
 [amdto, m., 
 [amdta, f., 
 2d p. sei amdto, 
 [-a, 
 3d p. e amdto, 
 
 I am loved ; 
 
 thou art loved ; 
 
 he is loved, she 
 [is loved ; 
 
 sidmo amdti, m,, 
 [amdte, L, 
 
 siete amdti, ~e, 
 
 eglino sono amd- 
 [ti, elleno -e, 
 
 we are loved; 
 
 you are loved ; 
 they are loved. 
 
 2. Imperfect. 
 
 1st p. Co era ama- 
 
 I was loved ; 
 
 eravdmo amdti, 
 
 we were loved ; 
 
 [to, -a, 
 
 
 [-e, 
 
 
 2d p. en amdto, 
 
 thou wast loved ; 
 
 eravdte amdti, 
 
 you were loved ; 
 
 i-a, 
 
 
 [-e, 
 
 
 3d p. egli era 
 
 he was loved, she 
 
 erano amdti, -e, 
 
 they were loved. 
 
 [amdto, ilia -a, 
 
 [was loved ; 
 
 
 
 3. Perfect. 
 
 1st p. fui amdto, 
 
 I was loved ; 
 
 fummo amdti, -e, 
 
 we were loved ; 
 
 [-a, 
 
 
 
 
 2d p. fosti amd- 
 
 thou wast loved ; 
 
 fbste amdti, -e, 
 
 you were loved ; 
 
 \to, -a, 
 
 
 
 
 3d p. fu amdto, 
 
 he was loved, she 
 
 furono amdti, -e, 
 
 they were loved. 
 
 [; 
 
 [was loved ; 
 
 
 
 4. Future. 
 
 1st p. sard amd- 
 
 I shall or will be 
 
 saremo amdti,-e, 
 
 we shall or will 
 
 [to, -a, 
 
 [loved ; 
 
 
 [be loved ; 
 
 2d p. sardi amd- 
 
 thou wilt be lov- 
 
 sarete amdti, -e, 
 
 you will be lov- 
 
 \to, -a, 
 
 [ed; 
 
 
 [ed; 
 
 3d p. sard amd- 
 
 he will be loved, 
 
 sardnno amdti, 
 
 they will be lov- 
 
 \to, -a, 
 
 [she will be 
 
 [-e, 
 
 [ed. 
 
 
 [loved ; 
 
 
 
214 
 
 ANALOGY. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 5. Second Perfect. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1st p. w sono std- 
 [to amdto, 
 [stdta amdta, 
 
 I have been lov- 
 [ed; 
 
 sidmo stdti amd- 
 [ti, state amdte, 
 
 we have been 
 [loved. 
 
 6. Pluperfect. 
 
 1st p. w e"ra stdto amdto, std- 
 
 I had been loved. 
 
 [ta amata, 
 
 7. Second Pluperfect. 
 
 1st p./wi stdto amdto, stdta I had been loved. 
 [amdta, 
 
 8. Future Anterior. 
 
 1st p. sard stdto amdto, stdta} I shall or will have been loved. 
 [amdta, 
 
 III. CONJUNCTIVE. 
 SIMPLE TENSES. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. Co sia amd- 
 
 that I be loved, 
 
 pidmo amdti, -e, 
 
 that we be loved ; 
 
 [to, -a, 
 
 [or may be lov- 
 
 
 
 
 [ed; 
 
 
 
 2d p. tu sia amd- 
 
 that thou be lov- 
 
 sidte amdtij -e, 
 
 that you be lev- 
 
 Ito, -a, 
 
 [ed; 
 
 
 fed ; 
 
 3d p. egli sia 
 
 that he be loved ; 
 
 siano amdti, -e, 
 
 that they be lov- 
 
 [amdto, ella -a? 
 
 [she be loved; 
 
 
 [ed. 
 
 2. Imperfect. 
 
 1st p. w fossi 
 
 if I were loved, 
 
 fossimo amdti,-e, if we were loved ; 
 
 [amdto, -a, 
 
 [or should be 
 
 
 
 
 [loved ; 
 
 
 
 2d p. tu fossi 
 
 if thou wert lov- 
 
 ^ 
 foste amdti, -e, 
 
 if you were lov- 
 
 [amdto, -a, 
 
 [ed; 
 
 
 [ed; 
 
 Sd p. fosse amd- 
 
 if he were loved, 
 
 fossero amdti, -e, 
 
 if they were lov- 
 
 l*o, -a, 
 
 [she were loved j 
 
 
 [ed. 
 
REGULAR VERBS. 
 
 235 
 
 COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 3. Perfect. 
 
 1st p. 10 sia stdto amdto, stdta that I have been loved, or 
 [amdta, [may have been loved, 
 
 4. Pluperfect. 
 
 1st p. iofossi stdto amdto, stdta 
 [amdla, 
 
 if I had been loved. 
 
 IV. CONDITIONAL. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 SIMPLE TENSE. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1st p. sarei amd- 
 [to, -a, 
 
 2d p. saresti 
 [amdto, -a, 
 3d p. sarebbe 
 [amdto, -a, 
 
 I should, would, 
 [or could be lov- 
 [ed ; or might be 
 [loved ; 
 thou wouldst be 
 [loved ; 
 he would be lov- 
 [ed, she would 
 l~hf lovftrl : 
 
 saremmo amdti, 
 
 sareste amdtij -e, 
 sarebbero amdti, 
 
 we should,would, 
 [or could be 
 [loved ; 
 
 you would be 
 [loved ; 
 
 they would be 
 [loved. 
 
 COMPOUND TENSE. 
 
 2. Past. 
 
 1st p. sam stdto amdto, stdta 
 [amdta, 
 
 I should, would, or could have 
 [been loved ; or might have been 
 [loved. 
 
 V. IMPERATIVE. 
 
 2d p. sii amdto , 
 [-a,tu, 
 3d p. sia amdto , 
 [egli, -a ilia, 
 
 be thou loved; 
 
 - -ift .! > -. 1 
 let him be loved ; 
 [her be loved ; 
 
 sidmo amdti, -e, 
 [noi, 
 
 sidte amdti , ~e, 
 ~voi, 
 
 let us be loved ; 
 be ye loved ; 
 
 siano amdti egli- let them be lov- 
 [no 9 -e elleno, 
 
216 ANALOGY. 
 
 Many active verbs become passive by taking the 
 particle si : domandarsi, * to be asked ' ; but then 
 they are used in the third person only, as, si domandk, 
 6 it is asked ' ; si E domandato, c it has been asked ' ; &c. 
 
 VARIATION OF NEUTER VERBS. 
 
 Neuter verbs are generally varied with the auxiliary 
 verb essere, ' to be,' according to the conjugation to 
 which they belong. 
 
 Variation of the Perb Par tire. 
 (Paradigm of the neuter verbs.) 
 
 I. INFINITIVE. 
 
 Simple Tenses. Compound Tenses. 
 
 1. Present. 2. Past. 
 
 Partire, |to depart. \\6sserepartito, m.s.-z,p., to have de- 
 
 [partita, f. s. -c, p.,* [parted. 
 
 3. Future. 
 av6re a partire, 
 
 , , 
 
 essereper partire, ^ ave , to f , 
 doverepartire, 5 part> 
 
 . GERUND. 
 
 4. Present. 5. Past . 
 
 partendo, |departing. || ess6ndo partito, \ having departed. 
 
 * The past participle of the neuter verbs that are varied with tssere, agrees with 
 the subject of the verb in gender and number. . 
 
pariito, m. s., \ 
 partiti, p., 
 
 partite, p. J 
 
 REGULAR VERBS. 217 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 
 6. Present. 7. Past. 
 
 J^J3?,';''' }**^S' j> r ^' m ' s '> 
 
 partite 
 
 II. INDICATIVE. 
 SIMPLE TENSES. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. pdrto, I depart, or do depart, or 
 
 [am departing. 
 
 2. Imperfect. 
 
 1st p. io partiva, I departed, or did depart, or 
 
 [was departing. 
 
 3. Perfect. 
 1st p. partii, | I departed, or did depart. 
 
 4. Future. 
 1st p. partirdj \ I shall or will depart. 
 
 COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 5. Second Perfect. 
 
 o,-a,| I have departed. 
 
 6. Pluperfect. 
 1st p. 10 erapartito, -a,| 1 had departed. 
 
 7. Second Pluperfect. 
 1st p.fuipartito, -a, \ I had departed. 
 
 8. Future Anterior,, 
 
 1st p. sard partito, -a, \ I shall or will have departed. 
 19 
 
218 ANALOGY. 
 
 III. CONJUNCTIVE. 
 SIMPLE TENSES. 
 
 1. - Present. 
 
 1st p. 10 pdrta, | that I depart, or may depart. 
 
 2. Imperfect. 
 1st p. io partissi, \ if I departed, or should depart. 
 
 COMPOUND TZNSES. 
 
 3. Perfect. 
 
 lBtp.iosiapartito t -a, that I have departed, or 
 [may have departed. 
 
 4. Pluperfect. 
 1st p. wfossipartito, ,[ if I had departed. 
 
 IV. CONDITIONAL. 
 SIMPLE TENSE. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. partireij j I should, would, or could depart ; 
 
 [or might depart. 
 
 COMPOUND TENSE. ^ 
 
 2. Past. 
 
 1st p. sarei partita, -a, 
 
 I should, would, or could have de- 
 
 parted j or might have departed. 
 V. IMPERATIVE. 
 
 Istp 
 
 2d p. parti tu, 
 
 depart thou. 
 
REGULAR VERBS. 219 
 
 There are some neuter verbs which require to be 
 varied with avere ; as, vivere, ' to live ' ; dormire, c to 
 sleep ' ; tacere, to keep silent ' ; parldre, ' to speak ' ; 
 gridare, < to cry out ' ; ridere, ' to laugh ' ; scherzare, 
 6 to sport ' ; pranzdre, ' to dine ' ; cenare, ' to sup ' ; 
 passeggiare, ' to walk ' ; cavalcare, ' to ride ' ; navigare, 
 1 to sail ' ; tardare, ' to retard ' ; indugiare, ' to delay ' ; 
 &c.: ho vivuto, I have lived ' ; ho dormito,.' I have 
 slept ' ; ho taciuto, ' I have kept silent ' ; &c. 
 
 Others are indifferently varied with the auxiliary 
 
 avere, or essere ; as, durare, ' to last ' ; succombere, ' to 
 
 sink under'; ammutire, 'to become dumb'; impallidire, 
 
 '* to grow pale ' ; &c.: e durato or ha durato, ' it has 
 
 lasted ' ; &c. 
 
 Others may be varied with either avere, or essere ; as, 
 morire, guarire ; but the change of the auxiliary alters 
 their signification: avere morto, ' to. have killed'; 
 essere morto, ' to be killed,' or c to be dead ' ; avere gua- 
 rito, l to have cured ' ; essere guarito, ' to be cured,' or 
 * to have recovered.' 
 
 Dovere, ' to be obliged ' ; potere, ' to be able ' ; voUre, 
 i to be willing,' ' to will,' ' to wish ' ; when joined to a 
 pronominal verb ; as, arrendersi, ' to surrender one's 
 self ' ; frenarsi, c to restrain one's self '; perdersi, 'to 
 lose one's self ' ; require to be varied with essere : 
 si e dovuto arrendere, ' he has been obliged to surrender 
 himself ' ; non mi son potato frenare, ' I have not been 
 able to restrain myself; ti sei voluto perdere, ' tbou 
 wishedst to lose thyself.'* 
 
 * Many of the foregoing verbs are irregular, as will be shown in their proper plae. 
 
220 
 
 ANALOGY. 
 
 VARIATION OF PRONOMINAL VERBS. 
 
 Pronominal verbs are varied with the auxiliary essere, 
 6 to be,' according to the conjugation to which their 
 termination belongs. 
 
 Variation of the J^erb Pentirsi. 
 (Paradigm of the pronominal verbs.) 
 
 I. INFINITIVE. 
 
 Simple Tenses. Compound Tenses. 
 
 1. Present. 2. Past. 
 
 Pentir-si, Ito repent one's \\esser-sipentito, I to have repented 
 
 [self. I' [one's self. 
 
 3. Future. 
 
 to have to repent one's self, or 
 e ' *> be about to P repent one's self. 
 
 GERUND. 
 
 4. Present. 5. Past. 
 
 pent6ndo-si, 
 
 repenting one's \\essendo-sipenti- having repented 
 [self. II \to, [one's self. 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 
 6. Present. 
 
 7. Past. 
 
 pentente-si, s., ) repenting one's 
 pententi-si, p., 5 se ^- 
 
 pentito-si,m.s.j 
 
 lennto-si, m.s., j 
 
 [pentiti-si, p., f [having] repent- 
 
 ientita-si. f. s., ^ ed one's self. 
 
 pentita 
 [penti<e-si, p., 
 
Singular. 
 
 REGULAR VERBS. 
 
 II. INDICATIVE, 
 SIMPLE TENSES. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 221 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1st p. 10 mi pen- 
 [to, 
 Z^y.tipenti, 
 
 3d p. si pe'nte, 
 
 I repent myself; 
 
 thou repentest 
 [thyself; 
 he repents him- 
 [self; 
 
 noi ci pentidmo, 
 vi pentitej 
 si pentono, 
 
 we repent our- 
 [selves ; 
 you repent your- 
 [selves ; 
 they repent them- 
 [selves. 
 
 2. Imperfect. 
 1st p. mipentiva, j I repented myself. 
 
 3. Perfect. 
 1st p. mi pentiij \ I repented myself. 
 
 4. Future. 
 1st p. mipentird, \ I shall or will repent myself. 
 
 COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 5. Second Perfect. 
 1st p. mi sono pentito, -a, \ I have repented myself. 
 
 6. Pluperfect. 
 1st p. mi era pentito , -a, | I had repented myself. 
 
 7. Second Pluperfect. 
 1st p. mifuipentzto, -a, \ I had repented myself. 
 
 8. Future Anterior. 
 
 1st p. mi sard pentito, -a, II shall or will have repented 
 
 [myself. 
 
222 ANALOGY. 
 
 III. CONJUNCTIVE. 
 SIMPLE TENSES. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. mi penta, that I repent myself, or may 
 
 [repent myself. 
 
 2. Imperfect. 
 
 1st p. mipentissij I if I repented myself, or should 
 
 [repent myself* 
 
 COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 3, Perfect. 
 
 1st p. mi sia pentito, -a, I that I have repented myself, or 
 
 [may have repented myself. 
 
 4. Pluperfect. 
 1st p. mifossi pentito, -a, | if I had repented myself. 
 
 IV. CONDITIONAL. 
 SIMPLE TENSE. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. mi pentirdi, I I should, would, or could repent 
 
 I [myself ; or might repent myself. 
 
 COMPOUND TENSE. 
 
 2. _ Past. 
 
 1st p. w sareipentito, -a, 
 
 I should, would, or could have re- 
 [pented myself; or might have 
 [repented myself. 
 
REGULAR VERBS. 
 
 223 
 
 V. IMPERATIVE. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 1st p. ... 
 
 
 pentidmo-ci noi, 
 
 let us repent oui- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 fselves ; 
 
 2d p. penti-ti tu, 
 
 repent thyself ; 
 
 pentite-vi voi, 
 
 L " } 
 
 repent your- 
 
 
 
 
 [selves j 
 
 3d p.sip6nta,or 
 [pnta-si egli, 
 
 let him repent 
 [himself; 
 
 si pentano or 
 [pJntan-si 
 [eglino, 
 
 let them repent 
 [themselves. 
 
 A great number of active and neuter verbs may become 
 pronominal by the addition of the conjunctive pronouns 
 mi, ti, si, &c. either in the objective or in the relation 
 of attribution ; and then these verbs are varied with 
 the auxiliary essere, ' to be ' ; as, loddre, ' to praise ' ; 
 dare, ' to give ' ; tacere, c to keep silent ' : 
 
 mi sono ddto un colpo, I have given [to] myself a 
 
 blow ; 
 ti sii ddto per vinto, thou hast given thyself up as 
 
 conquered ; 
 
 si & loddtOj he has praised himself; 
 
 ci sidmo taciuti, we have kept ourselves silent. 
 
 Usage, however, in some instances allows us also 
 to employ the auxiliary avere, c to have ' ; but then the 
 conjunctive pronouns mi, ti, si, &c. are always in the 
 relation of attribution ; as, 
 
 melo sono or weT ho goduto, 
 Ulo s6i or teV hai creduto, 
 seV b or seV ha bevuto, 
 
 I have enjoyed it ; 
 thou hast believed it ; 
 he has drunk it. 
 
224 ANALOGY. 
 
 VARIATION OF UNIPERSONAL VERBS. 
 
 Unipersonal verbs are generally varied with the aux- 
 iliary ayere, ' to have,' according to the conjugation to 
 which they belong. 
 
 Variation of the Verb Piovere. 
 (Paradigm of the unipersonal verbs.) 
 
 I. INFINITIVE. 
 
 Simple Tenses. Compound Tenses. 
 
 1. Present. 2. Past. 
 
 Piovere, jto rain. || avere piovuto 9 jto have rained. 
 
 3. Future. 
 
 avere a piovere, > to have to rain, or 
 essereper piovere, $ to t> e about to rain. 
 
 GERUND. 
 
 4. Present. 5. Past . 
 
 piovJndo, [raining. || avendo piovuto , (having rained. 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 
 6. Present. 7. Past. 
 
 piov6nte, [raining. |j piovuto, t ra ined. 
 
 II. INDICATIVE. 
 SIMPLE TENSES. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 Id p. piove, I it rains, it does rain, or it is rain- 
 
 [ing. 
 
REGULAR VERBS. 225 
 
 2. Imperfect. 
 
 3d p. pioveva, or piovea, I it rained, it did rain, or it was 
 
 [raining, 
 
 3. Perfect. 
 
 3d p.piove, piove'tte, or piovve I it rained, or it did rain, 
 [(piobbe), I 
 
 4. Future. 
 
 3d p. pioverci, \ it will rain. 
 
 COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 5. Second Perfect. 
 3d p. hapiovuto, \ it has rained. 
 
 6. Pluperfect. 
 3d p. av6va piovuto , | it had rained. 
 
 7. Second Pluperfect. 
 3d p. e'5&e piovuto, \ it had rained. 
 
 8. Future Anterior. 
 2d p. avrti piovuto, \ it will have rained. 
 
 III. CONJUNCTIVE. 
 SIMPLE TENSES. 
 
 1. Present. 
 3d p. piova, \ that it rains, or may rain. 
 
 2. Imperfect. 
 3d p. piovesse, \ if it rained, or should rain. 
 
 COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 3. Perfect. 
 
 3d n. dboia piovuto, that it has rained, or may have 
 
 [rained. 
 
226 ANALOGY. 
 
 4. Pluperfect. 
 3d p. avesse piovuto, \ if it had rained. 
 
 IV. CONDITIONAL. 
 SIMPLE TENSE. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 3d p. pioverdbbe (pioveria),| it would or could rain, or might 
 
 [rain. 
 
 COMPOUND TENSE. 
 
 2. Past. 
 
 3d p. avrebbe piovuto, \ it would or could have rained, or 
 \ [might have rained. 
 
 V. IMPERATIVE. 
 
 3d p.piova, \ let it rain. 
 
 The following are the unipersonal verbs most in use : 
 
 aggiorndre, to be day ; I gelare v ? t f . 
 
 annottare, to grow night ; i ghiaccidre, $ 
 
 balendre ? . i:^ut rdighiacciare ? , ., 
 
 tO h - hten 5 I dimoidre, to thaw 5 
 
 tupnare, to thunder; \farfreddo, to be cold ; 
 
 pidvere, to rain ; [far chidro, to be light ; 
 
 f , to rain very hard ,\far buio, to be dark; 
 
 nevicdre, to snow ; 
 
 grandindre 
 
 tempestdre 
 
 e I to hail ; 
 
 > 3 
 
 far vento, to be windy ; 
 
 far buon tempo, to be good weather ; 
 far cattivo tempo^Q be bad weather. 
 
 The following verbs, though not unipersonal in them- 
 selves, are often used unipers anally, and may have the 
 third person plural, as well as singular ; and are varied 
 with the auxiliary essere, c to be ' : 
 
REGULAR VERBS. 
 
 227 
 
 accaddre, 
 
 i inci^scere, 
 
 
 avvenire, 
 
 to happen ; 
 
 displace. 
 
 to displease ; 
 
 occorrere, 
 
 
 spiactre, 
 
 
 aggraddre, 
 piacere, 
 
 to please ; 
 
 partre, 
 sembrdre, 
 
 to seem ; 
 
 appartenere, to belong ; 
 bastdre, to be enough ; 
 
 speitart, 
 toccdre, 
 
 to belong ; 
 
 bisogndre j> to be needful . 
 
 far uopo, 
 
 
 convenire, $ 
 importdre, to be important; 
 dipendere, to depend ; 
 
 far d' uopo, 
 far mestieri, 
 far di mestieri, 
 
 to be necessary. 
 
 To these may be added all 
 passive by taking the particle 
 
 after them 
 
 verbs which become 
 si, either before or 
 which are varied in the third person both 
 
 singular and plural, and with the auxiliary essere ; as, 
 vedersi, ' to be seen ' : si vede, c it is seen ' ; si sono 
 veduti, 'they have been seen'; biasimarsi, ' to be 
 blamed ' ; si sono biasimali, ' they have been blamed ' ; 
 
 fee, 
 
 E'ssere, c to be,' is also used unipersonally, both in 
 the singular and plural, when it is joined to the particles 
 ci or vi ; as, esserci or esservi, c to be here,' or * to be 
 there.' It is varied as follows : 
 
 Variation of the Verb Essere, unipersonally used. 
 
 I. INFINITIVE. 
 
 Simple Tenses. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 esser-ci or esser- 1 to be here or 
 [-t, I [to be there. 
 
 esser-ci 
 
 orlsser 
 >r esser- 
 
 ~ m > 
 
 Compound Tenses. 
 
 2. Past. 
 stdtOjm.s.j 
 
 ( stto > m ' s -> ) 
 
 I * tdti > P- ( to 
 < stdta j tS (be 
 
 I stdte, p., > 
 
 have 
 been there. 
 
 3. Future. 
 
 6sser-ci or &sser-m per tssere, > t h t be ther QT 
 a^r-ci or avtr-m adtssere, S be about to be ^^ 
 ao^Jer-c^ or aover-w essere, 3 
 
228 
 
 ANALOGY. 
 
 4. Present. 
 
 5. Past. 
 
 ^re being. 
 
 f8tdto,m.8. 9 / h 
 essendo-ci or 1 [staft, p., 1 h . 
 essendo-vij A stata, f. s., 1 , 5 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 
 II. INDICATIVE. 
 
 SIMPLE TENSES. 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 1 . Present. 
 
 3d p. c' or u' ,ihere is, or thereiicisonoormsdnoJthere are. 
 [is; II 
 
 2. Imperfect. 
 3d p. c' ^ra or v' there was ; lie' erano or t>' 
 
 3. Perfect. 
 
 3d p. ci fu or m there was ; I lei furono or vi 
 
 [furono, 
 
 there were. 
 
 there were. 
 
 4. Future. 
 
 3d p. ci sarva; orlthere shall or will I lei sardnno or m 
 Fm or^J The:'' \saranno. 
 
 there shall or will 
 [be;" [saranno, [be. 
 
 COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 5. Second Perfect. 
 
 3d p. c' or t>' |there has been ; II ci sono or vi sonolthere have been. 
 [ S ^o,m.,-a,f.,| 
 
 * Wanting. 
 
REGULAR VERBS. 
 
 229 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 6. Pluperfect. 
 
 3d p. c j ira or u'lthere had been ; lie' irano orw' era-lthere had been. 
 [6ra stdtOj -a,\ II [no stdti, -e,\ 
 
 7. Second Pluperfect. 
 
 3d p. d fu or wlthere had been ; \\ci furono or wlthere had been. 
 [fu stdto, -a,| II [/zmmosfafve,! 
 
 8. Future Anterior. 
 
 3dp.cisarcL.orvi 
 [sard stdto, -a, 
 
 there will have 
 [been ; 
 
 ci sardnno or i there will have 
 
 [sardnno stdti 
 
 [been. 
 
 III. CONJUNCTIVE. 
 
 SIMPLE TENSES. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 3d p. ci sia or vi that there be, or 
 
 [sia, 
 
 [may be ; 
 
 ci stano, vi sia- 
 [no, or ci sieno, 
 [vi sieno, 
 
 that there be, or 
 [may be. 
 
 2. Imperfect. 
 
 3d p. ci fosse orjif there were ; orllci fossero or vzlif there were; or 
 [vi fosse, \ [should be; H [ fossero ,1 [should be. 
 
 COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 3. Perfect. 
 
 3d p. ci sia or vi that there has 11 ci siano or vi sia- 
 [sia stdto, -a, been ; [no stdti, -e, 
 
 4. Pluperfect. 
 
 3d p. ci fosse orlif there had been;! lei fossero or vi if there had beea. 
 * -^ ' [/Sssero "- 
 
 that there have 
 [been, or may 
 [have been. 
 
 d p. cijosse orii 
 [vi/osse s^o, 
 [-a, 
 
 20 
 
230 
 
 ANALOGY. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 IV. CONDITIONAL. 
 
 SIMPLE TENSE. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 3d p. ci sartbbe 
 [or vi sarebbe, 
 
 there should, 
 [would, or could 
 [be ; or might 
 [be; 
 
 ci sarebbero or vi 
 [sardbbero, 
 
 there should, 
 [would, or could 
 [be ; or might 
 [be. 
 
 COMPOUND TENSE. 
 
 2. Past. 
 
 3d p. ci sarebbe 
 [or vi sarebbe 
 [stato, -a, 
 
 there should,; 
 [would, or couldj 
 [have been; or 
 [might have 
 [been; 
 
 ci sarebbero or#t|there should, 
 [sardbbero std- [would, or could 
 [have been ; or 
 [might have 
 [been. 
 
 3d p. ci sia, vi 
 [sia, or sia-ci) 
 [sia-vi, 
 
 V. IMPERATIVE. 
 
 let there be ; \\ci smno, vi sie- 
 [no, or sian-ci, 
 \sitn-m, 
 
 let there be. 
 
 The verb avere, * to have,' is often substituted for 
 the verb essere when unipersonally used, and then it is 
 varied after the same manner ; as, averci or avervi, f to 
 be here ' or ' to be there'; ci ha or vi ha, * here is ' or 
 1 there is j ; ci hanno or vi hanno, ' there are '; &tc. 
 
 The verb avire, not only may be used with propriety for the verb 
 6ssere, but is also elegantly used in the singular, although the noun to 
 which it is joined is in the plural ; as, qudnte miglia ci HA? ' how many 
 miles is it ? ' EBBEVI molti uomini, l there were a great many men 
 there'; &c. 
 
 To express in Italian here or there is some of it, here 
 or there are some of them, we join the particle ne, ' of 
 it, of them,' to ci or vi, and say, essercene or esservene, 
 
REGULAR VERBS. 
 
 231 
 
 avercene or avervene ; as, cen' e or ven' e, cen 5 ^a or 
 ven* ha, ' here is some of it,' or there is some of it ' ; 
 cene sono or vine sono, cen' hanno or verf hanno, ' there 
 are some of them ' ; &c. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Per certo chi non v' dma, da 
 voi non desidera d* ESSERE AMA- 
 TO. (Bocc. g. 4. n. 1.) 
 
 N6i ERAVAM PARTITI gltt da 
 
 illo. (Dant. Inf. 32.) 
 
 DORMITO HAI, bella donna, un 
 brtve so}ino. (Petr. s. 284.) 
 
 Fu accusdto falsam6nte che 
 dovea AVER MORTO un nomo, col- 
 la moglie, e con tutta lafarmglia. 
 (Vit. S. Franc.) 
 
 Tarquinio alia fine FU MORTO 
 per gli figliuoli del sopradetto 
 Marco Mdrzio. (Giov. Vill. 1. 1. 
 c. 2.) 
 
 Lascidie costui dlle mie muse 
 che LO GUARISCANO. (Varch. 
 Boez. 1.1.) 
 
 Mwfratello per raira grdzia di 
 Dio E GUARITO. (Red. lett. 1.) 
 
 E '/ PENTIRSI, e 7 conoscer 
 chiaramcnte, Che quanta place 
 al mondo e un breve sonno. 
 (Petr. s. 1.) 
 
 Dalle qudli facilmente tu TI 
 
 SARESTI POTUTO ASTENERE. 
 
 (Mach. Com.) 
 
 Se io ddlla veritd del fatto MI 
 
 FOSSI SCOSTARE VOLUTA, OVI'^l 
 
 ben saputo sotto dltri nomi rac- 
 contdrla. (Bocc.) 
 
 Surely he who does not love 
 you, does not desire to be loved 
 by you. 
 
 We had already departed from 
 him. 
 
 Thou hast slept, beautiful wo- 
 man 5 a short sleep. 
 
 He was falsely accused to have 
 tilled a man, with his wife, and 
 all his family. 
 
 Tarquin at length was killed by 
 the sons of the above mentioned 
 Marcus Martius. 
 
 Let him be cured by my muses. 
 
 My brother has recovered through 
 the mere mercy of God. 
 
 And to repent and to know 
 clearly, that what pleases the 
 world is a short dream. 
 
 From which thou wouldst have 
 easily abstained. 
 
 If I had wished to depart from 
 the truth of the fact, I should have 
 known how to relate it under dif- 
 ferent names. 
 
232 
 
 ANALOGY. 
 
 rfcciocche male e scdndalo non 
 ne nascesse, ME ne SONO TACIUTA. 
 (Bocc. g. 3. n. 3.) 
 
 ^ Ella fa sdvia certo, e di grand' 
 ammo, Uh' dltra si SAKE* 
 [sarebbe] DATA sul pidngere. 
 (Cecch. Inc. 1. 1.) 
 
 Egli & notte buia, e piovigginaj 
 e par che sia per PIOVER piu for- 
 te. (Sacch. nov. 28.) 
 
 Ci SOJVQ delle dltre donne assdi. 
 (Bocc. g. 3. n. 3.) 
 
 Cavdlca, e qudndo ANNOTTA e 
 qudndo AGGIORNA. (Ariost. Fur. 
 27. 12.) 
 
 Non altramdnti a lui AVVENNE, 
 che al Duca AVVENUTO ERA. 
 (Bocc. 9. 2. n. 7. 
 
 E che i vizj d6bbano da tutti 
 
 BIASIMARSI. (PaSS.) 
 
 QUANTE MIGLIA CI HA ? 
 
 HACCENE piu di milldnta. (Bocc. 
 g. 8. n. 3.) 
 
 La dove CEN' E una, che e 
 molto corta. (Bocc. g, 3. n. 4.) 
 
 That no evil or scandal should 
 arise from it, I have kept silent. 
 
 She was wise surely, and of a 
 great mind ; for another would 
 have given herself to weeping. 
 
 It is a very dark night, and it 
 drizzles, and seems as if it would 
 rain harder. 
 
 Here are many other ladies. 
 
 He rides botn when it grows 
 night, and when it is day. 
 
 It happened to him not other- 
 wise than it had happened to* the 
 Duke. 
 
 And that vices ought to be 
 blamed by all. 
 
 How many miles is it? It is 
 an infinite number. 
 
 Where there is one [way] which 
 is very short. 
 
 EXERCISE XVII. 
 
 PASSIVE VERBS. 
 
 I. 1. To be loved. 
 JEssere umdto. 
 
 4. being believed. 
 essere creduto. 
 
 2. to have been feared. 
 dssere stdto ternuto. 
 
 5. having- been heard. 
 
 essere stdto sentito. 
 
REGULAR VERBS. 233 
 
 II. 1. I am praised, thou art invited, he is expected, 
 loddto, invitdto, aspettdto, 
 
 we are called, you are assured, they are punished. 2. 
 
 chiamdtOj assicurdto, cdstigdto. 
 
 I was sought, thou wast advised, she was prayed, we 
 cercdto, consiglidto, pregdto, 
 
 were accompanied, you were envied, they were assured. 
 accompagndto, invididto, assicurdto. 
 
 3. I was assailed, thou wast besieged, he was ordered, 
 assaltdtOj assedidto, ordindto, 
 
 we were confirmed, you were delivered, they were 
 confirmdto, consegndto, 
 
 accepted. 4. I shall be proved, thou wilt be asked, 
 accettdto. provdto, domanddto, 
 
 she will be admired, we shall be paid, you will be 
 ammirdto, pagato, 
 
 honored, they will be blamed. 5. I have been 
 onordtOj biasimdto, 
 
 robbed.* III. 1. I may be believed, thou mayest 
 rubbdto. creduto, . ; 
 
 be received, he may be beatenj we may be preceded, 
 ricevuto, battuto, preceduto, 
 
 you may be provided, they may be sold. 2. I 
 provveduto, venduto. 
 
 might be punished, thou mightest be furnished, she 
 punito t formto, 
 
 might be hindered, we might be attacked, you might 
 impedito, assalito, 
 
 be betrayed, they might be supplied. IV. 1. 
 
 tradito, supplito. 
 
 I should be admonished, thou wouldst be wounded, he 
 ammonitOj ferito, 
 
 would be banished, we would be encouraged, you would 
 bandito, incoraggito, 
 
 * The learner can form the compound tenses of any of theso verbs by joining the 
 past participle to the compound tenses of the verb essere. 
 
 20* 
 
234 ANALOGY. 
 
 be obeyed, they would be invested. V. Be thou 
 
 obbedito, investito. 
 
 allured, let her be listened to, let us be employed, be 
 
 allettdto, ascoltato, 
 
 ye trusted, let them be saved. 
 
 fiddto t salvdto. 
 
 NEUTER AND PRONOMINAL VERBS. 
 
 I. 2. To have departed. 5. having repented 
 partita. ^ pentito 3 
 
 one's self. II. 5. I have delayed, thou hast kept 
 si. 2 indugidto, 2 taciu- 
 
 silent (thyself), he has gone out, we have cured, you 
 to 3 li, 1 uscito, guarito, 
 
 have praised yourselves, they have lived. 6. I had 
 2 loddto 3 vL l vivuto. 
 
 wounded myself, thou hadst become dumb, she had 
 ferito 3 mi, 1 ammutito, 
 
 corrected herself, you had grown childish, they had 
 ricreduto 3 si, 1 rimbambito, 
 
 seized (themselves). 7. I had dined, thou hadst soiled 
 impadronito 3 si 1 . . pranzdto, 2 imbrottdto 3 
 
 thyself, he had grown mad, we had lost ourselves, you 
 ft 1 , impazzito, 2 smarrito 3 ci l , 
 
 had spoken, they were dismayed (themselves). 8. 
 parldto, 2 sbigottito 3 si 1 . 
 
 I shall have sailed, thou wilt have complained (thyself), 
 navigate, 2 lamentdto 3 ti 1 , 
 
 she will have recovered, we will have taken leave 
 guarito, licenzidto 3 
 
 (ourselves), you will have walked, they will have married 
 ci 1 , passeggidto, 2 maritdto 3 
 
 (themselves). III. 3. I may have rejoiced (myself), 
 
 si 1 . 2 rallegrdto mi 1 , 
 
 thou mayest have sported, he may have colored himself, 
 scherzdto, 2 incolorito 3 si 1 , 
 
REGULAR VERBS. 235 
 
 we may have gone near, you may have risen (your 'selves ), 
 avvicindto, 2 alzdto 3 tu l , 
 
 they may have arrived. 4. I might have enriched 
 arrivdto. 2 arricchito 3 
 
 myself, thou mightest have slept, she might have 
 mi 1 , dormito, 2 
 
 instructed herself, we might have sunk under, you 
 istruito 3 si 1 , succombuto, 
 
 might have assembled yourselves, they might have 
 2 riunito 3 vi l , 
 
 grown pale. - IV. 2. I should have married myself, 
 impallidito. 2 ammoglidto 3 mi 1 , 
 
 thou shouldst have grown proud, he would have rejoiced 
 insuperbito, 2 rallegrdto 3 
 
 himself, we would have cried out, you would have 
 si 1 , griddto, 
 
 enamoured yourselves, they would have become cruel. 
 innamordto 3 vi l , jjs' ; inferocito. 
 
 - V. Defend thyself, let her imagine herself, 
 
 difendere^ ti, - immagindre 2 si 1 , or immagindre^ 
 
 let us help ourselves, ennoble yourselves, let them 
 si, . aiutdre^ ci, annobilire^ vi, rispet- 
 
 respect themselves. 
 2 i 1 or risettdr 
 
 tare 2 si 1 , or rispettdre^, si. 
 
 UNIPERSONAL VERBS. 
 
 I. 1. To rain. 4. raining. 7. rained. To 
 Piovere. piovere. piovere. 
 
 have rained. - II. 1. It is day. 2. it grew 
 piovuto. aggiorndre. annot- 
 
 night. 3. it lightened. 4. it will thunder. 5. 
 tare. balendre. tuondre. 
 
 it has snowed. 6. it had happened, 7. it had 
 nevicdto. avvenuto. 
 
 frozen. 8. it will have seemed. - III. 1. it 
 geldto. sembrdto. 
 
236 ANALOGY. 
 
 may freeze. 2. it might thaw. 3. it may have 
 geldre. dimoidre. 
 
 been cold. 4.' it might have displeased.- IV. 1. 
 
 fdtto cdldo. dispiaciuto. 
 
 it would be important. 2 it would have belonged. 
 
 importdre. appartenuto. 
 
 V. let it be sufficient. 
 
 bastdre. 
 
 ESSERCI Or ESSERVI, AVERCI OT AVERVI. 
 
 I. 4. There being. II. 1. here is, or there is, 
 
 ci 2 JEsser 1 ^,. ci essere, or vi averc, 
 
 there are. 2.. there was, there were. 3. 
 
 ci essere or avere. vi 6ssere, ci * avere. 
 
 there was, there were. 4. there will be, sing., there 
 vi essere, ci essere. vi avere, ci 
 
 will be, plur. 5. there has been some of it, sing., 
 avere. vi essere* ne l , 
 
 there has been some of them, plur. III. 1. that there 
 
 ci avere 2 ne } vi 
 
 may be, sing., that there may be, plur. 2. if there 
 ave"re, ci essere. vi 
 
 were some of it, sing., if there were some of them, plur. 
 avere 2 ne l , ci dssere 2 ne l . 
 
 IV. 1. there should be, sing., there should be 
 
 vi essere, ci avere 2 
 
 some of them, plur. V. let there be, sing., 
 
 ne l . ci avere, or 6ssere^ ci, 
 
 let there be some of them, plur. 
 vi essere 2 ne l , or avere^ vi^, ne. 
 
IRREGULAR VERBS. 237 
 
 CHAPTER X. 
 IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 THE irregularities of Italian Verbs are chiefly confined 
 to the perfect tense of the indicative mood, and the past 
 participle. 
 
 Some verbs, however, are also irregular in the present 
 of the indicative ; and then they are irregular likewise 
 in the present of the conjunctive and in the imperative. 
 
 When verbs are contracted in the infinitive mood, 
 they are contracted also in the future tense, and in the 
 conditional mood. 
 
 In those tenses in which verbs are irregular, the 
 irregularity, generally, does not extend to all the 
 persons : thus, with very few exceptions, in the perfect 
 of the indicative, the second person singular and the 
 first and second persons plural ; and in the present of 
 the indicative and conjunctive, and in the imperative, 
 the jirst and second persons plural, are regular. 
 
 In the variation of these verbs, we will give only those 
 tenses in which they depart from the paradigms already 
 given, to which we must refer for the formation of the 
 other tenses. The persons which are irregular are 
 here printed in small capitals. 
 
 For the assistance of learners, we have added to each 
 verb, the auxiliary with which it is varied in its com- 
 pound tenses. 
 
238 
 
 ANALOGY. 
 
 VARIATION OF THE IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE FIRST 
 CONJUGATION. 
 
 There are but four sim.ple verbs in the first conju- 
 gation, which are not varied like aware, viz. 
 
 dare, 
 
 to go ; 
 to give ; 
 
 fare, to do or to make ; 
 stare, to be, to dwell, to stand, 
 [or to stay.. 
 
 Andare. 
 (Varied with essere.) 
 
 I. INFINITIVE. 
 
 Andare, \ to go. 
 
 GERUND. 
 
 anddndo, Igoing ; 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 
 anddtOj (gone. 
 
 II. INDICATIVE. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. vo, or VA- 
 
 2d p. VAI, 
 3d p. VA, 
 
 [DO,* 
 
 I go, or am go- 
 
 thou goest ; 
 he goes ; 
 
 [ing; 
 
 andidmo, 
 
 anddte, 
 VANNO, 
 
 we go; 
 
 you go ; 
 they go. 
 
 4. Future. 
 
 1st p. andrd [by contraction for I shall or will go. 
 \ander 6~\ , 
 
 * Anddre is also a defective verb, and borrows these forms from the Latin verb 
 vftdere. 
 
IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 239 
 
 III. CONJUNCTIVE. 
 
 Singular 
 
 Plural. 
 
 that we go ; 
 that you go ; 
 that they go. 
 
 IV. CONDITIONAL. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. andrei (andria) [by contrac- I I should, would, or could go; or 
 [tion for anderei (anderia)], | [might go. 
 
 1st p. 10 VADA, 
 2d p. tU VADA 
 
 [(vddi), 
 3d. p. egli VADA, 
 
 1. 1 
 that I go or may 
 
 [go; 
 
 that thou go ; 
 that he go ; 
 
 ^resent, 
 andidmo, 
 andidte, 
 
 VADANO, 
 
 V. IMPERATIVE. 
 
 Istp 
 
 
 2d p. VA (') lu, 
 3d p. VADA egli, 
 
 go thou ; 
 let him go ; 
 
 I andidmo noi, 
 
 anddte voi, 
 \ VADAHO eglino, 
 
 let us go ; 
 
 go ye ; 
 
 let them go. 
 
 Andare is sometimes varied with the conjunctive pro- 
 nouns mi, ti, siy ci, vi, si, and the particle ne ; thus, ME 
 NE vo, c I go hence ' ; TE NE vai, ' thou goest hence ' ; 
 &tc. Me, te, &e. are then mere expletives. 
 
 The compounds of andare, as riandare, signifying 
 Ho go again', &c. have the same irregularities. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 Riandare 
 trasanddre 
 
 are, signifying * to examine ' or ' to go over again ' ; and 
 re, ' to go beyond ' ; are regular and varied like amdre. 
 
 The verbs manddre, c to send ' ; rimandare, ' to send 
 back again'; tramandare, Mo transmit'; comandare, 
 6 to command ' ; dimandare, ' to ask ' ; &c. are not 
 derivatives of andare, and are varied like amare. 
 
240 
 
 ANALOGY. 
 
 Dare. 
 (Varied with avere.) 
 
 I. INFINITIVE. 
 
 | to give. 
 
 GERtfND. 
 
 dando, |giving. 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 
 da.to, |given. 
 
 II. INDICATIVE. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. do, 
 
 I give, or am 
 
 diamo, 
 
 we give ; 
 
 
 [giving j 
 
 
 
 2d p. DAI, 
 
 thou givest ; 
 
 date, 
 
 you give ; 
 
 3d p. dd, 
 
 he gives ; 
 
 DANNO, 
 
 they give. 
 
 3. Perfect. 
 
 1st p. DETTl, OF 
 
 [DIEDI (diei), 
 
 I gave ; or did 
 [give ; 
 
 DEMMO, 
 
 we gave ; 
 
 2d p. DESTI, 
 
 thou gavest ; 
 
 DESTE, 
 
 you- gave; 
 
 3d p. DETTE, or 
 [DIEDE (dieo, 
 
 he gave; 
 
 DETTERO,OrDIE- 
 
 [DERO (dierono, 
 
 they gave. 
 
 Idle), 
 
 
 [didro,di6r,3er- 
 
 
 
 
 [no,dienno,den- 
 
 
 
 
 [rio), 
 
 
 4. Future. 
 1st p. DARO, | I shall, or will give. 
 
 III. CONJUNCTIVE. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. 10 DIA, 
 
 2d p. tu DIA, 01 
 
 [D1I, 
 
 3d p. egli DIA, 
 
 that I give, or 
 [may give ; 
 that thou give ; 
 
 that he give '; 
 
 didmo, 
 didte, 
 
 DIANO,OrDfEXO, 
 
 that we give ; 
 that you give ; 
 that they give. 
 
IRREGULAR VERBS. 241 
 
 2. Imperfect. 
 1st p. w DESSI, | if I gave or should give. 
 
 IV. CONDITIONAL. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. DAREI (darfa), I I should, would, or could 
 [give ; or might give. 
 
 V. IMPERATIVE. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 1st p. ... 
 2dp. db(dtf)tu, 
 3d p. DIA egli, 
 
 give thou ; 
 let him give ; 
 
 diamo ndi, 
 date voi, 
 
 DIANOjOl 1 DIENO 
 
 [eglino 
 
 let us give ; 
 
 *ive ye ; 
 
 let them give. 
 
 The compounds of dare, as ridare, c to give again ' ; 
 addarsi, c to devote one's self ' ; &c., have the same 
 
 irregularities. 
 
 The verbs abbondare, c to abound ' ; accommodare, 
 c to mend ' ; badare, ' to mind ' ; accordare, f to grant ' ; 
 circonddre, c to surround ' ; jidare, c to trust ' ; freddare, 
 i to cool ' ; gridare, ' to cry out ' ; guardare, ' to look '; 
 guidare, c to guide ' ; lodare, * to praise ' ; predare, c to 
 prey 5 ; ricordare, ' to remember ' ; rimediare, c to reme- 
 dy ' ; scaldare, l to warm' ; secondare, c to second ' ; &c., 
 are not derivatives of ddre, and are varied like amare. 
 
 21 
 
242 
 
 ANALOGY. 
 
 Fare. 
 (Varied with avere.) 
 
 I. INFINITIVE. 
 
 FARE (facere),* | to do, or to make. 
 
 GERUND. PARTICIPLE. 
 
 facendo, \ doing. .; Jj FATTO, (done. 
 
 II. INDICATIVE. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p.fo(fdccio), 
 
 2d p. FAI (faci), 
 3d p. fa (face), 
 
 I do or am do-| 
 
 [in 
 
 tnou doest; 
 he does ; 
 
 FACCIAMO, 
 
 fdte, 
 
 FANNO (fan), 
 
 we do ; 
 
 you do ; 
 they do. 
 
 2. Imperfect. 
 1st p. iofaceva orfacea (fea), | I did or was doing. 
 
 3. Perfect. 
 
 1st p. FE 
 
 2d p. FACESTI 
 
 [(festi-), 
 
 3d p. FECE (/e', 
 
 [feo), 
 
 I did; 
 thou didst ; 
 he did ; 
 
 facemmo (fem- 
 [mo) r 
 faceste (feste), 
 
 FECERO (ferono, 
 [ferno, fero, fer, 
 [fenno, fen), 
 
 we did j 
 you did ; 
 they did. 
 
 4. Future. 
 1st p. FARO, I I shall or will do. 
 
 * This verb belongs properly to the second conjugation, it being but a contrac- 
 tion offdcere, now become obsolete, of which it retains many of the forms. 
 
Singular. 
 
 IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 III. CONJUNCTIVE. 
 1. Present. 
 
 243 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1st p. W FACCIA, 
 
 2d p. tu FACCIA, 
 3d p. egli 
 
 that I do, or may 
 [do; 
 that thou do ; 
 that he do ; 
 
 FACCIAMO, 
 
 FACCIATE, 
 FACCIAJVO, 
 
 that we do ; 
 
 that you do ; 
 that they do. 
 
 2. Imperfect. 
 1st p. wfacessi (fessi), | if I did or should do. 
 
 IV. CONDITIONAL. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. FAREI (faria, far6 J ), 1 I should, would, or could 
 
 [do ; or might do. 
 
 
 
 2d p./a (fd')tu, 
 
 3d p. FACCIA 
 
 do thou ; 
 let him do ; 
 
 V. IMPERATIVE. 
 
 FACCIAMO, 
 
 fate, 
 
 FACCIANO, 
 
 let us do ; 
 
 do ye; 
 
 let them do. 
 
 The compounds of/are, as assuefare, ' to accustom '; 
 confare, to suit,' ; to agree ' ; contraffare, { to mimic,' 
 ' to imitate '5 disfare, ' to undo'; mis/are, ' to do wrong ' ; 
 liquefare, to melt ' ; sopraffare, c to overpower ' ; stu- 
 pefare, ' to stupefy,' ' to astonish ' ; Sic., have the same 
 irregularities. 
 
 Sodisfdre or soddisfdre, ( to satisfy,' is both regular and irregular. 
 
 The verbs olfare, < to smell' ; schifare, ' to shun ' ; 
 trionfdre, c to triumph,' are not derivatives of fare, and 
 are varied like amdre. 
 
344 
 
 ANALOGY. 
 
 Stare. 
 (Varied with essere.) 
 
 stdndo, 
 
 I. INFINITIVE. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 Stare, 
 
 GERUND. 
 
 jstanding. 
 
 to stand, to stay, 
 to dwell, or to be. 
 
 stato, 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 
 [stood. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 II. INDICATIVE. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. sto, 
 
 2d p. STAI, 
 3d p. sta, 
 
 1st p. STETTI 
 
 stand or am 
 [standing: 
 thou standest ; 
 he stands ; 
 
 state, 
 STANNO, 
 
 3. Perfect. 
 
 I stood ; 
 
 2d p. STESTI, 
 3d p. STETTE 
 
 [(ste), 
 
 thou stoodst ; 
 he stood ; 
 
 Plaral. 
 
 STESTE, 
 STETTERO(sterO, 
 
 [ster, stiero, 
 [stier), 
 
 we stand ; 
 
 you stand ; 
 they stand. 
 
 we stood ; 
 
 you stood ; 
 they stood. 
 
 1st p. STARO, 
 
 4. Future. 
 
 \ I shall or will stand. 
 
 III. CONJUNCTIVE. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. w STIA, fthat I stand or 
 
 [may stand ; 
 
 2d p. tu STIA, or that thou stand ; 
 
 ['STII, 
 
 3d p. egli STIA, 
 
 that he stand ; 
 
 stidmo, 
 
 STIANO, or ST!E- 
 [NO, 
 
 that we stand ; 
 that you stand ; 
 that they stand. 
 
IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 2. Imperfect. 
 1st p. w STESSI, ^ | if I stood or should stand. 
 
 IV. CONDITIONAL. 
 
 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p, STAREI (staria), I should, would, or could 
 [stand; or might stand. 
 
 V. IMPERATIVE. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 2d p. sta (sta'} 
 [tu, 
 3d p. STIA egli, 
 
 stand thou ; 
 let him stand ; 
 
 stidniOj 
 
 STIAJVO, Or STIE- 
 
 [NO eglino, 
 
 let us stand ; 
 stand ye"; 
 
 let them stand. 
 
 Stare, is sometimes varied with the conjunctive pro- 
 nouns, mi, li, si, &,c., and the particle ne : thus, ME NE 
 sto, ' I remain here ' ; TE NE stai, ' thou remainest 
 here'; &c. Me, te, &c. are then mere expletives. 
 
 The compounds of stare, as contrastare, signifying 
 fi to stand against ' ; distare, ' to be distant ' ; instare, ' to 
 entreat ' ; ristare, e to stop ' ; soprastdre or sovrastdre, 
 signifying c to delay, 3 c to differ'^ &c. have the same 
 irregularities^ 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 Contrastare, signifying ' to deny,' ' to dispute ' ; soprastare or so- 
 vrastdre, signifying l to stand over,' { to threaten '; ostdre, ' to oppose J ; 
 restare, ' to remain '; are regular, and are varied like amdre. 
 
 The verbs accostare, e to approach ' ; acquistare, ( to 
 acquire' ; costare, ' to cost '; manifestare, * to manifest '; 
 pestare, to pound,' are not derivatives of stare, and are 
 varied like amare. 
 
 21* 
 
246 ANALOGY. 
 
 The foregoing verbs, andare, dare, fare, and stare, 
 in all those forms in which, when they are simple, they 
 form but one syllable, have in their compounds the ac- 
 cent on the last syllable ; as, vo, da, fe', sta : rivo, 
 c I go again ' ; rida, c he gives back again ' ; disfe', 
 c he destroyed ' ; insta, ' entreat thou' ; &c. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 VA il cavdl per Gio, Per The horse goes by Gid, the ox 
 
 Anda VA il bd, E V dsino per by rf'nda, and the ass by JL'rri.* 
 Arri. (Fran. Sacch., rime, 9.) 
 
 Or VA'^ ch* un sol voUre & Now go, for one only will is in 
 
 d' amendue. (Dant. Inf. 2.) both of us. 
 
 Qutsto.udito dal sdnto vecchio Having heard this he went to 
 
 SE NE ANDO molto consoldto. the holy man quite consoled. 
 (Vit. S. Ant.) 
 
 Prima ch' dltri dindnzi li RI- Ere any one repassed before 
 
 VADA. (Dant. Inf. 28.) him. 
 
 RIANDA le cose, che tu gli hdi Examine the things, which thou 
 
 ddtte di me. (Salv. Granch. 2., 5.) hast said to him of me. 
 
 Sono molti di s\ lieve fantasia. There are many of so light a 
 
 che in tutte le loro ragioni TRA- mind, that in all their reasonings 
 
 sANDANo.t (Dant. Conv. 178.) they [go beyond the question] 
 
 wander from the subject of them. 
 
 La sente'nza la qudle San Pi6- The sentence which saint Peter 
 
 tro DETTE coniro Jlnania. (Ca- gave against Ananias. 
 vale. Pungill. 97.) 
 
 Al cdnte pidcque molto qu6sta This request pleased the count 
 
 domdnda, e prestam6nte rispose much, and he immediately replied 
 
 di si, e gliele DIEDE. (Bocc. g. that he would, and gave them to 
 
 2. n. 8.) him. 
 
 * Different interjections used by the Italians in driving those animals. 
 | We are awate that some copies of the Convivio have trasvdnnoj Irasdndano, 
 however, is the better reading. 
 
IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 247 
 
 E il buon maestro del parldr 
 proprio [Dante] disse : io mi 
 FECI al mostrato innanzi un poco; 
 e Ver me si FECE, ed io ver lui 
 mi FEI. (Dep. Decarn. 99.) 
 
 AlV inferno non SODISFANO 
 eziandw le preziose cose. (Fr. 
 Giord.) 
 
 E qu\ convien, ch* V questo 
 peso porti Per lei, tdnto ch 1 a 
 Dw si SODDISFACCIA. (Dant. 
 Pur. 11.) 
 
 VeggSndo che da niun cono- 
 sciuto v* 6ra, si STETTE. (Bocc. 
 g. 5. n. 6.) 
 
 Posso favellare, s' w voglio ; e 
 se nd, s\ ME NE posso STARE. 
 (Fr. Giord. S. Fred. 32.) 
 
 Ma paura e pietade CONTRA- 
 STETTE JLl mw crudel ardire. 
 (Ovid. Pist.) 
 
 Rdde volte addividn, che air al- 
 te irnpr6se Fortuna ingiuri- 
 6sa non CONTRAST i. (Petr. 
 c. 11.) 
 
 Martuccio, vegg&ndo la gio- 
 vane, maraviglidndosi^ SOPRA- 
 STETTE. (Bocc. g. 5. n. 2.) 
 
 Sdnza montdre al dosso 
 Deir drcOj 6ve Io scoglio piu so- 
 VRASTA. (Dant. Inf. 18.) 
 
 And the good master of correct 
 speaking [Dante] said: / [made 
 myself] drew a little nearer to 
 him who had been shown me; 
 and He drew near me, and I drew 
 near him. 
 
 In hell even precious things 
 give no satisfaction. 
 
 And here I must bear for it this 
 weight, till satisfaction be made to 
 God. 
 
 Seeing that he was known by 
 none, he stayed there. 
 
 I can speak, if I'wish; if not, I 
 can refrain from it. 
 
 But fear and pity stood against 
 my fierce desire. 
 
 Seldom it happens that Fortune 
 does riot oppose great undertak- 
 ings. 
 
 Martuccio, seeing the lass, won- 
 dering at it, tarried. 
 
 Without ascending on the top 
 of the arch where the rock is more 
 jutting. 
 
248 ANALOGY. 
 
 EXERCISE XVIII. 
 
 fin this and the following exercises on Irregular Verbs, have been introduced many 
 those verbs, which, although they are, or, from the similarity of their termina- 
 tions, seem to be, derived from the simple iiregular verbs here given, are yet regular. 
 This has been done whh a view of early accustoming the learner to make the neces- 
 sary discrimination.] 
 
 I. 1. Togo* 4. giving. 7. made. II. 1. I stay, 
 Jlnddre. dare. fare. stare, 
 
 thou sendest, he gives again, we melt, you entreat, 
 manddre, riddre, liquefdre, instdre, 
 
 they go over again. 2. I gave, thou accustomedst, 
 rianddre. dare, assuefdre, 
 
 he stood against, we asked, you granted, they triumphed. 
 contrastdrej dimanddre, accorddre, trionfdre. 
 
 3. I stayed, thou sendedst back, he devoted himself, we 
 stare, rimanddre, adddre 2 si 1 , con- 
 
 imitated, you delayed, they transmitted. 4. I will make, 
 traffdre, soprastdre, tramanddre. fare, 
 
 thou wilt oppose } he tvill go again, we will trust, you will 
 ostdre, rianddre, fiddre, so- 
 
 stand over, they will praise. 5. I have gone, thou 
 vrastdre, loddre. anddto, 
 
 hast made over again, he has remained, we have given, 
 rifdtto, restdto, ddto, 
 
 you have commanded, they have manifested. III. 1. 
 comanddto, manifest dto. 
 
 that I deny, that thou mayest go beyond, that he may 
 contrastdre, trasanddre, soddis- 
 
 satisfy, that we may pound, that you may attend, that 
 far e y pe stare, baddre, 
 
 they may cost. 2. I might astonish, thou mightest 
 costdre. stupefdre, pre- 
 
 pray, he might approach, we might disdain, you might 
 dare, accostdre, schifdre, seal- 
 
 warm, they might abound. IV. J. I would do wrong, 
 
 ddre, abbonddre* misfdre, 
 
IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 249 
 
 thou wouldst acquire, he would command, we would scold, 
 acquistdre, comanddre, , gridare, 
 
 you would smell, they would cost. V. go thou, let 
 
 olfdrej costdre. anddre, 
 
 him give, let us make, stay ye, let them dispute. 
 f ddre, fdre, stdre, contestdre. 
 
 VARIATION OF THE IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE SECOND 
 CONJUGATION. 
 
 Variation of the Irregular Verbs in ere (long). 
 
 The simple irregular verbs in ere (long) are the 
 following ; viz. 
 
 cadtre, 
 
 to fall ; 
 
 dissuadere, to dissuade ; 
 
 doUre, to grieve ; 
 
 dovtre, to owe ; 
 
 giactre, .to lie down ; 
 
 pardre, to seem ; 
 
 ptrsuaddre, to persuade ; 
 
 piactre, to please ; 
 
 poUre, to be able ; 
 
 rimantre. 
 
 to remain ; 
 
 sapere, 
 
 to know ; 
 
 sedtre, 
 
 to sit down ; 
 
 tactre, 
 
 to be or keep si- 
 
 tentrc, 
 
 to hold ; [lent ; 
 
 valtre, 
 
 to be worth ; 
 
 vedtre, 
 
 to see ; 
 
 volere, 
 
 to wish, to will, 
 
 
 [or to be willing. 
 
 Cad ere. 
 (Varied with essere.) 
 
 I. INFINITIVE. 
 Cadire, |to fall. 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 
 | cadulo, (fallen. 
 
250 
 
 ANALOGY. 
 
 II. INDICATIVE. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. cddo (cag- 
 
 2d p. cddi, 
 3d p, cade, 
 
 1st p. CADDI (ca- 
 
 [dei,cadetti), 
 
 2d p. cadesti, 
 
 3d p. CADDE (ca- 
 
 [deo, cadette, 
 
 I fall; 
 
 thou fallest ; 
 he falls ; 
 
 cadidmo (caggid- we fall ; 
 
 [mo, cademo), 
 caddie, 
 
 3. 
 
 I fell ; 
 
 thou fellest ; 
 he fell ; 
 
 cddono (cdggio- 
 [no), 
 
 Perfect, 
 caddmmo, 
 
 \ cadeste, 
 
 CADDERo(cadero, 
 
 [cader ; cadero- 
 
 [no, cade'ttero), 
 
 you fall ; 
 they fall. 
 
 we fell ; 
 
 you fell ; 
 they fell. 
 
 4. 
 
 1st p. caderd (cadro), 
 
 Future. 
 | I shall or will fall. 
 
 III. CONJUNCTIVE. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. io cdda 
 
 2d p. tu cada 
 [(caggia), 
 
 3d p. egli cdda 
 [(cdggia), 
 
 that I fall or 
 [may fall ; 
 that thou fall ; 
 
 that he fall ; 
 
 cadidmo (caggia- 
 [mo), 
 
 cadidte (caggia- 
 
 cddano (cdggia- 
 
 that we fall ; 
 that you fall ; 
 that they fall. 
 
 IV. CONDITIONAL. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. caderei (cadrei, caderia, I should, would, or could fall ; or 
 [cadria), [might fall. 
 
 V. IMPERATIVE. 
 
 1st p. ; . . 
 2d p. cadi tu, 
 
 fall thou. 
 
IRREGULAR VERBS. 251 
 
 The compounds of cadere, as accadere, ' to happen '; 
 decadere, c to decline ' ; ricadere, ' to fall again ' ; &c., 
 have the same irregularities. The poetical forms, how- 
 ever, aggio, aggia, aggiamo, aggiono, aggiano, are pe- 
 culiar to cadere and not met with in its compounds.* 
 
 Dissuadere. 
 (Varied with either avere or essere.) 
 
 I. INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE. 
 
 |to dissuade. H DISSUASO, [dissuaded. 
 
 II. INDICATIVE. 
 
 Singular, Plural. 
 
 3. Perfect. 
 
 1st p. DISSUASI, |I dissuaded; II dissuademmo, 
 2d v-dissuadestilthou dissuadest; dissuadeste, 
 3d p. DISSTJASE, |he dissuaded ; || DISSUASERO, 
 
 we dissuaded ; 
 you dissuaded ; 
 they dissuaded. 
 
 Dissuadere^ properly speaking, is a compound of the 
 Latin verb suadere, as well as persuadere, c to persuade,' 
 which has the same irregularities. 
 
 Dolere. 
 
 
 
 (Varied with essere, and the conjunctive pronouns, mi, 
 ti, si, &c.) 
 
 I. INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE. 
 
 Dol6r-si, to grieve. || doluto-si, [grieved. 
 
 * Of ricadere, Galileo has used ricdggia. 
 
252 
 
 ANALOGY. 
 
 II. INDICATIVE. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. mi DOLGO 
 
 [(doglio) 
 
 2d p. ti DUOLI, 
 
 3d p. si DUOLE he grieves ; 
 
 [(dole), 
 
 I grieve ; 
 thou grievest; 
 
 Cl DOGLIAMO (do- 
 
 [lemo), 
 vi dolete, 
 
 Si DOLGONO (d6- 
 
 [gliono), 
 
 3. Perfect. 
 
 1st p. mi DOLSI, jl grieved ; 1 1 ci dolemmo, 
 
 2d p. ti dolesti, (thou grievedst ; vi doleste, 
 3d p. si DOLSE, |he grieved ; l| si DOLSERO, 
 
 4. Future. 
 
 we grieve ; 
 
 you grieve ; 
 they grieve. 
 
 we grieved ; 
 you grieved; 
 they grieved. 
 
 1st p. dorrd [by contraction fon I shall or will grieve. 
 [dolerd*],\ 
 
 III. CONJUNCTIVE. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. mi DOLGA 
 [(doglia), 
 
 2d p. ti DOLGA 
 [(doglia), 
 
 3d p. si DOLGA 
 [(doglia'), 
 
 that I grieve or 
 [may grieve ; 
 that thou grieve ; 
 
 that he grieve ; 
 
 ci DOGLIAMO, 
 
 VI DOGLIATE, 
 Si DOLGANO (d6- 
 
 [gliano), 
 
 that we grieve 5 
 that you grieve ; 
 that they grieve. 
 
 IV. CONDITIONAL. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. dorrii (dorria) [by contrac- 
 [tion for dolerei (doleria)t], 
 
 I should, would, or could grieve; 
 [or might grieve. 
 
 V. IMPERATIVE. 
 
 1st p . . . . 
 
 
 ; DOGLIAMO- Ci, 
 
 let us grieve ; 
 
 2d p. DUOLI-fi, 
 
 3d p. si DOLGA 
 [(ddglia), 
 
 grieve thorj ; 
 let him grieve ; 
 
 dolete-vi, 
 
 Si DOLGANO (d6- 
 
 [gliano), 
 
 grieve ye ; 
 let them grieve. 
 
 * To distinguish it from dolerd, future of the verb dolttre, to defraud.' 
 t To distinguish them from dolerti (doleria), forms of the conditional of the verb 
 doldre, to defraud.' 
 
IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 253 
 
 The compounds of dolere, as condoUre, 'to condole ' ; 
 . have the same irregularities. 
 
 Dovere. 
 (Varied with avere.) 
 
 I. INFINITIVE. 
 Dove" re (devere*),|to owe. 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 
 dovuto, |owed. 
 
 II. INDICATIVE. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. devo, or 
 
 I owe ; 
 
 DOBBIAMO (deb- 
 
 we owe ; 
 
 [DEBBO (deg- 
 
 
 [bidmo, deggid- 
 
 
 [gio), 
 
 
 [mo, devemo), 
 
 
 2d p. devi (dei), 
 
 thou owest ; 
 
 dovete, 
 
 you owe ; 
 
 3d p. deve, or 
 
 he owes; 
 
 dovono* or DEB* 
 
 they owe. 
 
 [DEBBE (dee, 
 
 
 [BONO (dtggio- 
 
 
 [rfe j ), 
 
 
 [noj deono, den- 
 
 
 
 t 
 
 [no), 
 
 
 3. Perfect. 
 1st p. dovei or dovttti, \ I owed, 
 
 4 Future. 
 1st p. doverd or dovrd, \ I shall or will owe. 
 
 III. CONJUNCTIVE. 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. W DEBBA 
 
 [(dtggia), 
 
 2d p. tU DEBBA 
 OJ [( 7 ^^) 5 
 
 3d p. egh DEBBA 
 [(Mggia), 
 
 that I owe, or 
 [may owe; 
 that thou owe ; 
 
 that he owe ; 
 
 - 
 
 DftBBIAMO (deg- 
 
 [(gidmo), 
 
 DOBBIATE (deg- 
 
 [gidte), 
 
 DEBBANO (d6g- 
 
 [giano), 
 
 that we owe ; 
 that you owe ; 
 that they owe. 
 
 * The Latin debere, from which dovcre derives some of its forms. 
 
254 ANALOGY. 
 
 IV. CONDITIONAL. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. doverei or dovrei (doveria I should, would, or could owe ; or 
 [or dovria), [might owe. 
 
 V. IMPERATIVE.* 
 
 Giacere. 
 (Varied with either avere or essere.) 
 
 I. INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE. 
 
 Giacere, |to lie down. || giaciuto, jlain down. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 II. INDICATIVE. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1st p. GIACCIO, 
 
 2d p. giaci t 
 3d p. gidce, 
 
 I lie down ; 
 thou liest down ; 
 he lies down ; 
 
 GIACCIAMO, 
 
 giacete, 
 
 GIACCIONO, 
 
 we lie down ; 
 you lie down ; 
 they lie down. 
 
 3. Perfect. 
 
 1st p. GIACQUI, 
 
 2d p. giacesti, 
 3d p. GIACQUE, 
 
 I lay down ; 
 thou layest down; 
 he lay down ; 
 
 giacemtno, 
 giac6ste, 
 
 G1ACQUERO, 
 
 we lay down ; 
 you lay down; 
 they lay down. 
 
 III. CONJUNCTIVE. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 Istp.lOGIACCIA, 
 2d p. fttGIACCIA, 
 
 3d p. egli GIAC- 
 
 [CIA, 
 
 that I lie down or 
 [may lie down ; 
 that thou lie 
 [down ; 
 that he lie down ; 
 
 GIACCIAMO, 
 
 giacldte, 
 
 GIACCIANO, 
 
 that we lie down; 
 
 that you lie 
 [down ; 
 that they lie 
 [down. 
 
 * " Strictly is wanting." Teor. Verb. Ital., Part. II., $. 48. 
 
IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 255 
 
 V. IMPERATIVE. 
 
 Singula 
 1st p. ... 
 
 r. 
 
 Plu 
 
 GIACCIAMO noi, 
 giacete voi, 
 
 GIACCIANO 6gll- 
 
 \no, 
 
 al. 
 
 let us lie down ; 
 lie ye down ; 
 let them lie 
 [down. 
 
 2d p. gidci tu, 
 3d p. GIACCIA 
 
 E4*$ 
 
 lie thou down ; 
 let him lie down; 
 
 The compounds of giacere, as soggiacere, to be 
 subject'; &c., as well as piacere, and its compounds 
 compiacere, ' to please '; dispiacere, * to displease ' ; &c. 
 have the same irregularities. 
 
 Piacire and its compounds compiacere, &c., in the second person 
 plural of the present of the conjunctive, and in the second person 
 plural of the imperative mood } make PIACCIATE, &c. 
 
 Par ere. 
 (Varied with ess ere.) 
 
 I. INFINITIVE. 
 
 Pare" re, |to seem. 
 
 || paruto 
 II. INDICATIVE. 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 
 t |seemed. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. PAIO, 
 
 2d p. pdri, 
 
 3d p. pare (pdr), 
 
 1st p. PARVI 
 
 [(parsi), 
 2d p. paresti, 
 3d p, PARVE 
 
 l(pdrse), 
 
 I seem ; 
 
 thou seemest; 
 
 he seems ; 
 
 paridmo, 
 parete, 
 pdrono, or PAIO- 
 [NO, 
 
 3. Perfect. 
 
 I seemed ; 
 
 thou seemedst ; 
 he seemed j 
 
 paremmo, 
 
 pariste, 
 PARVERO (parse- 
 
 we seem ; 
 you seem ; 
 they seem. 
 
 we seemed ; 
 
 you seemed; 
 they seemed. 
 
256 
 
 ANALOGY. 
 
 4. Future. 
 
 1st p. parrd [by contraction for 
 [parerd*], 
 
 I shall or will seem. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 III. CONJUNCTIVE. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. W PAIA, 
 
 2d p. tu PAIA, 
 3d p. egli PAIA, 
 
 that I seem or\ pariamo, 
 
 [may seem jl 
 that thou seem ; 
 that he seem ; 
 
 PAIATE, 
 
 PAIANO, 
 
 Plural. 
 
 that we seem ; 
 
 that you seem ; 
 that they seem. 
 
 IV. CONDITIONAL. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. parrei (parria) [by contrao 
 [tion for parerei (pareria)f], 
 
 I should, would, or could seem ; or 
 [might seem. 
 
 V. IMPERATIVE. 
 
 1st p. ... 
 
 
 paridmo noij 
 
 2d p. pdri tu, 
 3d p. PAIA egli, 
 
 seem thou ; 
 let him seem ; 
 
 parete voi, 
 PAIAJVO eglino, 
 
 let us seem ; 
 
 seem ye ; 
 
 let them seem. 
 
 Persuadere. 
 ( See dissuadere, p. 251 .) 
 
 Placer e. 
 ( See giacere, pp. 254 and 255.) 
 
 * To distinguish it from parerd, future of the verb pardre, ' to parry,' to adorn.' 
 
 t To distinguish them from parerei (pareria), corresponding forms of the verb 
 pardre, c to parry ' 5 &c. 
 
IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 257 
 
 Potere. 
 (Varied with either avere or essere.) 
 
 I. INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE. 
 
 Potere, |to be able. H potuto, " |been able. 
 
 II. INDICATIVE. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 1st p. POSSO, 
 2d p. PUOI 
 
 3d p. FUO (puote, 
 [p6te), 
 
 I am able ; 
 thou art able ; 
 he is able ; 
 
 Plural. 
 Present. 
 
 POSSIAMO (pote- we are able ; 
 
 (pote- 
 [mo), 
 potete, 
 
 POSSONO (ponnOj 
 [pon), 
 
 you are able ; 
 they are able. 
 
 4. Future. 
 1st p. potrd [by contraction for I shall or will be able. 
 
 III. CONJUNCTIVE. 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. FOSSA, 
 
 I that I be able or may 
 [be able. 
 
 IV. CONDITIONAL, 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. potr6i (potria) [by contrac- 
 [tion for poterci (poteria,tj 
 [poria), 
 
 I should, would, or could be able ', 
 [or might be able. 
 
 * To distinguish it frompoterb, future of the vetbpotbre, * to prune.' 
 t To distinguish them from poterei (poteria), corresponding forms of the verb potdrt, 
 * to prune.' 
 
 22* 
 
258 
 
 ANALOGY. 
 
 V. IMPERATIVE. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 1st p 
 
 
 2d p. POSSA tu, 
 3d p. POSSA 6gli 9 
 
 be thou able ; 
 let him be able ; 
 
 Plural. 
 
 POSSIAMO noij 
 
 POSSIATE VOl, 
 
 POSSANO 6glino, 
 
 let us be able ; 
 
 be ye able ; 
 
 let them be able. 
 
 Rimanere. 
 (Varied with essere.) 
 
 I. INFINITIVE. 
 
 Rimanere, |to remain. 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 
 HRIMASTO (n'waso), [remained. 
 
 II. INDICATIVE. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. RIMANGO 
 
 [(rimagno), 
 2d p. rimdni, 
 3d p. rimdne, 
 
 1st p. RTMASI, 
 2d p. rimanestij 
 3d p. RIMASE, 
 
 I remain ; 
 
 thou remainest ; 
 he remains ; 
 
 rimanete, 
 
 RIMANGONO, 
 
 3. Perfect. 
 
 I remained ; 11 rimanemmo, 
 thou remainedst; rimaneste^ 
 he remained ; || RIMASERO, 
 
 4. Future. 
 
 we remain ; 
 
 you remain ; 
 ;they remain. 
 
 we remained ; 
 you remained ; 
 ihey remained. 
 
 1st p. rimarrd [by contraction for 
 [rimanerd], 
 
 I shall or will remain. 
 
 * " Observe that grammarians believe that this verb has no imperative j because, 
 they say, we cannot command any one to have a power which he has not. But they 
 have not reflected that one can give power, when he is able to do so j as in the case 
 with God in relation to all things j and us, to a smaller extent, may be the case with 
 man and certain relations of man. Which ideas being susceptible of being express- 
 ed also in the imperative mood, reason requires that this verb should not be so easily 
 deprived of it." Teor. Verb. Ital., Part. If., $. 120. 
 
 Besides, the verb potere does not mean only " aver possa o virtd, ma volontd anc6- 
 ra, e satisfazi6ne, e contento ', ch& non i sempre il verbo del portatori, e degli bsini." 
 Dep. Decam., 104. 
 
IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 259 
 
 III. CONJUNCTIVE. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1. __ Present. 
 
 lstp.t0RiMA.NGA that I remain or 
 
 [(rimagna), 
 2d p. tu RIMANGA 
 
 [( rimagna), 
 
 3d p. egli RIMAN- 
 
 [GA, 
 
 [may remain ; 
 that thou remain ; 
 
 that he remain ; 
 
 rimanidmo, 
 rimanidte, 
 
 RIMANGANO, 
 
 that we remain ; 
 that you remain]; 
 that they remain. 
 
 IV. CONDITIONAL. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. rimarrei (rimarria) [hy con- I should, would, or could remain ; 
 [traction for rimanerei (rimane- [or might remain. 
 
 V. IMPERATIVE. 
 
 rimaniamo noi, Slet us remain ; 
 rimanete voi, j remain ye ; 
 
 RIMANGANO 
 
 [eglino, 
 
 2d p. rimdni tu, 
 3d p. RIMANGA 
 
 remain thou ; 
 let him remain ; 
 
 Sapere. 
 (Varied with avere.) 
 
 I. INFINITIVE. 
 
 Sapere (savere*),|to know. 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 
 | saputo, [known. 
 
 II. INDICATIVE. 
 
 
 1. 
 
 Present. 
 
 1st p. so, 
 2d p. SAI, 
 
 3d p. SA (sape), 
 
 I know ; 
 thou knowest ; 
 he knows; 
 
 jlsAPPIAMO, 
 
 lisaptte, 
 
 ||SANNO, 
 
 we know ; 
 you know; 
 they know. 
 
 * This /cm, met with in Dante, Alamanni, and other poets, has become obsolete. 
 
260 
 
 ANALOGY. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 3. Perfect. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1st p. SEPPI, 
 
 2d p. sapesti, 
 3d p. SEPPE, 
 
 I knew; 
 ihou knewcst ; 
 he knew; 
 
 \sapemmo, 
 
 \sapeste, 
 
 ISEPPERO, 
 
 we knew ; 
 you knew ; 
 they knew. 
 
 4. Future. 
 
 1st p. saprd [by contraction for I I shall or will know, 
 [sqpero], I 
 
 III. CONJUNCTIVE. 
 
 1. ' Present. 
 1st p. w SAPPIA, | that I know, or may know. 
 
 IV. CONDITIONAL. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. saprti (sapria) [by contrac- | I should, would, or could know ; 
 [tion for saperei (saperia)], | [or might know. 
 
 V. IMPERATIVE. 
 
 2d p. SAPPI tu, 
 3d p. SAPPIA tgli, 
 
 know thou ; 
 let him know ; 
 
 j 
 
 SAPPIATE VOi, 
 
 let us know; 
 
 know ye ; 
 
 let them know. 
 
 The compounds of sapere^ as risapere, c to learn, 5 or 
 6 to come to know ' ; follow the same irregularities. 
 
 Sedere. 
 (Varied with avere.) 
 
 I. INFINITIVE. 
 
 Sedere (seggere*), | to sit down. 
 
 * This verb, now become obsolete, is still used in many of the/oms of the modern 
 verb sedtre* 
 
IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 261 
 
 GERUND. 
 
 sedendo (seggendo), [sitting. 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 
 sedutOj |seated. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 II. INDICATIVE. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1st p. SIEDO, or 
 
 [sEGGo(seggio), 
 
 2d p. SIEDI, 
 3d p. SIEDE (se- 
 [de), 
 
 I sit ; 
 
 thou sittest } 
 he sits ; 
 
 sedidmo or SEG- 
 [GIAMO (sede- 
 fmo), 
 
 sedete, 
 
 SIEDONO,Or SEG- 
 
 EGONO (seggio- 
 no), 
 
 we sit ; 
 
 you sit ; 
 they sit. 
 
 3. Perfect. 
 1st p. sedei or sedetti, \ I sat. 
 
 4. Future. 
 1st p. sederd* (sedro), | I shall or will sit. 
 
 III. CONJUNCTIVE. 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. io siEDA,or 
 [sEGGA(seggia), 
 2d p. tu siEDA,or 
 [SEGGA (seggia 
 [orseggi), 
 3d p. egli SIEDA, 
 
 [or SEGGA, 
 
 that I sit, or may 
 [may sit; 
 that thou sit ; 
 
 that he sit ; 
 
 sedidmo or SEG- 
 [GIAMO, 
 sedidte (seggia- 
 [te), 
 
 SIEDANO, OrSEG- 
 
 [GANO (seggia- 
 [no), 
 
 that we sit ; 
 that you sit ; 
 
 that they sit. 
 
 IV. CONDITIONAL. 
 
 1. _ Present. 
 
 1st p. sederei (sedrei, sederia), 
 
 I should, would, or could sit ; or 
 [might sit. 
 
 * Mastrofini proposes siederd, and in the conditional siederei; but this, which 
 indeed would present the advantage of distinguishing these forms from the coire- 
 sponding ones of the verb sedare, 'to appease,' has not been adopted by the generality 
 of Italian writers. 
 
262 
 
 ANALOGY. 
 
 V. IMPERATIVE. 
 
 Singular. 
 Istp . 
 
 Plu 
 
 sedidmo (seggia- 
 [mo) noi, 
 sedete voi 3 
 
 SlEDANO,OrSEG- 
 
 [GAJVO eglino, 
 
 ral. 
 let us sit ; 
 
 sit ye ; 
 let them sit. 
 
 2d p. SIEDI tu, 
 3d p. SIEDA, or 
 [SEGGA e'gH, 
 
 >it thou ; 
 let him sit ; 
 
 Sedere is sometimes varied with the pronouns mi, 
 ti, si, &c., and then it requires the auxiliary essere ; as 
 mi siedo, I sit (myself) ' 5 ti sei seduto, ' thou hast sat 
 (thy self) 5 -fee. 
 
 The compounds of sedere, as possedere, c to possess ' ; 
 risedere, { to reside ' ; soprassedere, < to supersede ' ; 
 have the same irregularities. 
 
 Tacere. 
 (Varied with avere.) 
 
 I. INFINITIVE. 
 
 Tacere, Ito be or keep si- 1 1 taciuto, 
 
 [lent J I 
 
 II. INDICATIVE. 
 
 1. Present. 
 1st p. tdcio (taccio), | I am silent. 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 
 been silent. 
 
 3, Perfect. 
 
 1st p. TACQUI, IT was silent ; 
 2dp. tactsti 
 
 3d p. TACQUE, 
 
 thou wast silent ; 
 he was silent ; 
 
 tacemmo, 
 
 taceste, 
 
 TACQUERO, 
 
 we were silent ; 
 you were silent 5 
 they were silent. 
 
IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 263 
 
 III. CONJUNCTIVE. 
 
 1. Present. 
 1st p. 10 tdcia (taccia), | that I be silent or may be silent. 
 
 V. IMPERATIVE. 
 
 1st p. ... I 
 
 2d p. tdci tUj I be thou silent. 
 
 Tacere is sometimes varied with the pronouns mi, 
 ti, si, &c., and then it requires the auxiliary essere ; 
 mi tacio, <I keep silent '; si e taciuto, 'he has kept 
 silent' ; &c. 
 
 The compound of tacfre, ritacere, ' to become 
 once more silent ' ; follows the same irregularities. 
 
 Tenere. 
 (Varied with avere.) 
 
 I. INFINITIVE. 
 
 Tenere, |to hold. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 
 || tenuto, jholden. 
 
 1st p. TENGO 
 
 [(tegno), 
 2d p. TiENi (te- 
 
 3d p. TIENE, 
 
 II. INDICATIVE. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 I hold ; 
 
 tenidmo (tegna- 
 
 we hold ; 
 
 
 [mo), 
 
 
 thou boldest ; 
 
 tenete, 
 
 you hold ; 
 
 he holds ; 
 
 TENG050, 
 
 they hold. 
 
264 
 
 ANALOGY. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 3. Perfect. 
 
 1st p. TENNI, 
 
 2d p. tencsti, 
 
 3d p. TENNE, 
 
 I held ; 
 thou heldest; 
 he held ; 
 
 I tenemmOf 
 \\ teneste, 
 
 TENJVERO, 
 
 we held ; 
 you held ; 
 they held. 
 
 4. Future. 
 
 1st p. terro [by contraction for i I shall or will hold, 
 pcnerd], | 
 
 III. CONJUNCTIVE. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. 10 TENGA 
 
 [(tegna), 
 
 2d p. tU TENGA, 
 
 3d p. egli TENGA 
 [(tegna), 
 
 that I hold or 
 [may hold ; 
 that thou hold ; 
 that he hold ; 
 
 tenidmo (tegna- 
 [mo), 
 <em'^^e(te2;nate), 
 TENGANo(tegna- 
 [no), 
 
 that we hold ; 
 
 that you hold ; 
 that they hold. 
 
 IV. CONDITIONAL. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. terrei (terria) [by contrac- I I should, would, or could hold ; or 
 [tion for tenerei (teneria)], | [might hold. 
 
 V. IMPERATIVE. 
 
 2d p. TIENI (te j ) 
 [tu, 
 
 3d p. TENGA 
 
 [(tegna) egli, 
 
 hold thou ; 
 let him hold ; 
 
 [mo) noi, 
 tenete voi, 
 
 TENGANO (tegna- 
 [no) eglino, 
 
 hold ye ; 
 let them hold. 
 
 Tenere is sometimes varied with the pronouns mi, 
 ti, si, &c., and then it requires the auxiliary essere ; 
 as, mi sono tentito, ' I have holden or restrained myself; 
 
IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 265 
 
 The compounds of tenere, as appartenere, c to be- 
 long ' ; astenere, ' to abstain ' ; attenere, < to attain ' ; 
 contenere, c to contain,' ' to refrain ' ; detenere, ' to de- 
 tain ' ; mantenere, ' to maintain ' ; ottenere, c to obtain ' ; 
 rattenere, ' to stop,' c to restrain ' ; sostenere, ' to sup- 
 port,' c to sustain ' $ &c. have the same irregularities. 
 
 Valere. 
 (Varied with either avere or essere.) 
 
 I. INFINITIVE. 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 
 Fattre, 
 
 to be worth, or \\valuto (valso), 
 [to avail. 1 1 
 
 II. INDICATIVE. 
 
 been worth. 
 
 Singular, 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. VALO I am worth ; 
 
 J(vaglio), 
 lij 
 3d p. vale (vdl), 
 
 1st p. VALSI, 
 2d p. valesti, 
 3d p. VALSE, 
 
 thou art worth ; 
 he is worth ; 
 
 validmo, 
 vaUte, 
 
 VALGONO, Or VA- 
 
 [GLIONO, 
 
 3. Perfect. 
 
 I was worth ; \\val6mmo, 
 thou wast worth; va/dste, 
 he was worth ; | VALSERO, 
 
 4. Future. 
 
 we are worlh ; 
 
 you are worth ; 
 they are worth. 
 
 we were worth ; 
 you were worth ; 
 they were worth. 
 
 1st p. varrd [by contraction for 
 ' 
 
 23 
 
 I shall or will be worth. 
 
266 
 
 ANALOGY. 
 
 III. CONJUNCTIVE. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. io v ALGA 5 
 
 that I be worth 
 
 valiamo, 
 
 that we be 
 
 [OF VAGLIA, 
 
 [or may be 
 
 
 [worth ; 
 
 
 [worth ; 
 
 
 
 2d p. tU VALGA, 
 
 that thou be 
 
 validie, 
 
 that you he 
 
 [OF VAGLIA, 
 
 [worth ; 
 
 
 [worth ; 
 
 3d p. egli VALGA, 
 
 that he be worth; 
 
 VALGANO, OF VA- 
 
 that they be 
 
 [Or VAGLIA, 
 
 
 [GLIANO, 
 
 [worth. 
 
 IT. CONDITIONAL. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. varrei (varria) [by contrac- | 
 [tion for valerei (Valeria)], I 
 
 I should, would, or could be worth j 
 or might be worth. 
 
 1st p. . . . 
 2d p. vali tu, 
 3d p. VALGA 
 [(vaglia) eg 
 
 V. IMPERATIVE. 
 
 be thou worth ; 
 let him be worth 
 
 validmo no'?, 
 valete voi, 
 
 VALGANO, Or VA- 
 
 [GLIANO eglino, 
 
 Tet us he worth ; 
 be ye worth ; 
 let them be 
 
 f worth. 
 
 The compounds of valere, as disvalere, ' to hurt ' ; 
 equivaUre, ( to be equivalent ' ; invatere, ' to lose worth 
 or strength 5 ; prevalere, c to prevail ' ; rivaUre, ' to re- 
 cover worth or strength ' ; have the same irregularities. 
 Of the two forms of the present, however, that in algo 
 is better adapted to them; and disvalgo, 'I hurt'; 
 equivalga, ' let it be equivalent ' ; invdlgano, c that the) r 
 lose strength ' ; &c., are oftener met with in books than 
 disvaglio, &c. 
 
 The poetical form prevdlso, < prevailed, 5 of the past participle of 
 prevalere, has been used by good writers even in prose. Invalere, 
 in the same participle has invdlso, l [having] lost strength ' ; only. 
 
IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 2G7 
 
 Vedere. 
 (Varied with avere.) 
 
 I. INFINITIVE. 
 
 Vedere, \ to see. 
 
 
 GERUND. 
 
 vedendo, or vEG-lseeing. 
 [GENDO,| 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 
 \\veduto (visto), Iseen. 
 
 II. INDICATIVE. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. t?ed!0,vEG- 
 
 I see; 
 
 vedidmo, or VEG- 
 
 we see ; 
 
 [GO, or VEGGIO, 
 
 
 [GIAMO, 
 
 
 2d p. vedi (ve'), 
 
 thou seest; 
 
 vedete, 
 
 you see; 
 
 3d p. v6de, 
 
 he sees ; 
 
 vedono, -VEGGO- 
 
 they see. 
 
 
 
 [NO, or VEG- 
 
 
 
 
 [GIONO, 
 
 
 /3. _ Perfect. 
 
 1st p. VIDI (vid- 
 
 I saw; 
 
 vedemmOf 
 
 we saw;] 
 
 [di), 
 
 
 
 
 3d p. vedesti, 
 
 thou sawest; 
 
 vedeste, 
 
 you saw ; 
 
 3d p. VIDE, 
 
 he saw ; 
 
 VIDERO (vider), 
 
 they saw. 
 
 4. Future. 
 
 1st p. vedrd [by contraction for L I shall or will see. 
 [vederd], \ 
 
 III. CONJUNCTIVE. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. w veda, 
 [VEGGA, or 
 
 [VEGGIA, 
 
 2d p. tu v6da, 
 
 [VEGGA, Or 
 
 [VEGGIA, 
 3d p. igli veda, 
 [VEGGA, or 
 [VEGGIA, 
 
 that I see or may 
 [see ; 
 
 that thou see ; 
 
 that he see ; 
 
 vedidmo, or VEG- that we see ; 
 [GIAMO, 
 
 vedidte, or VEG- that you see ; 
 
 [GIATE; 
 
 vedano, VEGGA- that they see. 
 [NO, or VEG- 
 [GIANO, 
 
268 
 
 ANALOGY. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 IV. CONDITIONAL. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1st p. vedrdi (vedria) [by contrac-l I should,, would, or could see ; or 
 [tion for vederei (vederia)],) [might see. 
 
 V. IMPERATIVE. 
 
 1st p 
 
 
 vedidmOjOT VEG- 
 
 2dp.&K(v6')fci, 
 3d p. veda, VEG- 
 [GA, or VEGGIA 
 
 te$ 
 
 see thou ; 
 let him see ; 
 
 [GIAMO noi, 
 vedete voi, 
 vedano, VEGGA- 
 [NO, or VEG- 
 [GIANO eglino, 
 
 let us see > 
 
 see ye; 
 
 let them see. 
 
 The compounds of vedere, as antivedere, & to fore- 
 see ' ; avvedere, c to perceive ' ; divedere, ' to be sen- 
 sible of ' ; prevedere, to foresee ' ; provvedere, ' to pro- 
 vide ' ; ravvedere, c to amend ' ; rivedere, ' to see again ' ; 
 travedere, c to see one thing for another'; &c. 3 have 
 the same irregularities. 
 
 JUntiveddre, avvedere, divedere^ travedere, in the past participle 
 make only antiveduto, l foreseen '; avvedittOj 4 perceived'; diveduto, 
 1 been sensible of ; traveduto, ' [having] seen one thing for another ' : 
 and dived6re, prevedere, provvedere, ravvedere, travedere, in the future 
 and conditional are sever contracted, and make divederd, f I will be 
 sensible of; prevederti, * I would foresee ' j &c. 
 
 Vo lere. 
 (Varied with avere.) 
 
 I. INFINITIVE. 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 
 Vottre, 
 
 to wish, to will, II voluto, been willing 
 
 for to be willing J' 
 
 [or to be willing. 
 
IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 269 
 
 Singular. 
 
 II. INDICATIVE. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1st p. VOGLIO, or 
 [vo', 
 
 2d p. vuoi (vuo- 
 
 [li, vuo 9 ^ 
 
 3d p. VUOL.E (vo- 
 
 tie), 
 
 1st p. VOLLI 
 
 [(volsi*), 
 2d p. vottsti, 
 
 3d p. VOLLE, 
 
 I am willing ; 
 thou art willing ; 
 he is willing ; 
 
 VOGLIA.MO (vole- we are willing; 
 
 volete, 
 
 VOGLIONO (von- 
 [no, von), 
 
 3. Perfect. 
 
 I was williijg ; 
 
 thou wast wil- 
 ling; 
 he was willing ; 
 
 vottmmo, 
 voUste, 
 
 VOLLERO, 
 
 you are willing j 
 they are willing. 
 
 we were willing; 
 you were wil- 
 
 they were wil- 
 [ling. 
 
 4. Future. 
 
 1st p. vorrd {by contraction fo 
 [voler '()t] 
 
 I shall or will be willing. 
 
 1st p. w VOGLIA, 
 
 III. CONJUNCTIVE. 
 
 1. Present., 
 
 that I be willing or may 
 [be willing. 
 
 IV. CONDITIONAL. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. vorrii (vorria) [by contrac- I I should, would, or could be wil- 
 [tion for volerei (voleria)J], | [ling ; or might be willing. 
 
 * Foist, as well as vtilse and volsero, has become obsolete ; and tho few examples 
 we find in Dante, Ariosto, Berni, and Tasso, ought not to authorize the use of these 
 forms, which properly belong to the perfect of vdlgere, ' to turn ' ; and not ofvolere, 
 1 to be willing.' 
 
 \ To distinguish it from the future of the verb volftre, ' to fly.' 
 
 J To distinguish them from the corresponding forms of voldre, ' to fly.' 
 
270 
 
 ANALOGY. 
 
 V. IMPERATIVE. 
 
 Singular. 
 1st p* . 
 
 PlQ 
 
 VOGLIAMO noij 
 
 VOGLIATE v6i y 
 VOGLIANO 
 
 [eglino, 
 
 ral. 
 
 let us be willing j 
 be ye willing ; 
 let them be wil- 
 [lin. 
 
 2d p. VOGLI tUj 
 
 3d p. VOGLIA 
 
 be thou willing ; 
 let him be wil- 
 [ling; 
 
 The compounds of volere, as disvolere, c to desire the 
 contrary of what one has wished ' ; rivoUre, to wish 
 again,' or c to be once more willing'; have the same 
 irregularities. 
 
 EXAM PLE S. 
 
 E CADDI, come corpo mdrto 
 CADE. (Dant. Inf. 5.) 
 
 11 timore, molto piu che la for- 
 za dille ragioni, lo DISSUASE. 
 (Fra. Gior.) 
 
 L& dove piu MI DOLSE [dolsi] 
 altri si DUOLE, e DOLENDO addol- 
 cisce il mw dolorc. (Petr. c. 22.) 
 i 
 
 Di niuna cosa durdr DOBBIA- 
 MO, la quale dbbiaforza d 1 offen- 
 ders. (Bocc. g. 4. n. 10.) 
 
 Questi e colui, che GIACQUE 
 sopra n petto Del nostro Pelli- 
 cdno. (Dant. Par. 25.) 
 
 And I fell, as a dead body falls. 
 
 Fear dissuaded him a great deal 
 more than the power of reason. 
 
 Others grieve for what I most 
 grieved, and grieving they assuage 
 my grief. 
 
 We ought to endure nothing 
 that has the power of offending. 
 
 This one is he, who lay upon 
 the bosom of our Pelican. 
 
 * It has been asserted that volere has no imperative, but the slightest acquaint- 
 ance with our classic writers might convince any one to the contrary : 
 
 VoGLifcne venir con meco. (Bocc. Be thou willing to come with me. 
 g. 2. n. 10.) 
 
 VOGLI avert caritd. (Gr. S. Gir. 13.) Have charity. 
 
IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 271 
 
 Or ti PIACCIA gradir la sua 
 venuta. (Dant. Purg. 1.) 
 
 Now may his coming please 
 thee. 
 
 Non so, se a voi quello se ne I do not know, whether it will 
 
 PARRA, che a me ne PARREBBE. appear to you so as it would ap- 
 
 (Bocc. Introd.) pear to me. 
 
 Cosi veloci seguono i suoi vi- Thus swift follow their hoops, 
 
 mi, Per simiglidrsi al Punto approaching in likeness to the 
 
 quanta PONNO, E POSSON, Point as near as they can ; and 
 
 quanta a vedfr son sublimi. they can the more, Jhe loftier 
 
 (Dant. Par. 28.) their vision is. 
 
 I'o non mori', e non RIMASI I did not die, neither remained I 
 
 vivo. (Dant. Inf. 34.) alive. 
 
 O'nde, ben SEPPE che dirsi 
 Ddnte,qudndo,nel Canto Dtcimo 
 deir Inferno, indusse Farindta 
 a dirgli quelle parole. (Salviat. 
 Avvert. 1. 2. 12.) 
 
 Che SEGGENDO in piume in 
 fdma non si vie"n, ne sotto coltre. 
 (Dant Inf. 24.) 
 
 E giammdi poi la mia lingua 
 non TACQUE, Mdntre poteo. 
 (Petr. c, 4.) 
 
 Morto che ebbero Costantmo 
 loro fratdllo, loro due TENNERO 
 r imperio. (Petr. Uom. ill.) 
 
 JV^ V un mi VARREBBE, ne 
 V altro VOGL.IO che mi VAGLIA. 
 (Bocc. g. 3. n. 1.) 
 
 ./Voi eravdm partiti gia da llo 
 Ch' i* VIDI duo ghiaccidti in 
 una buca. (Dant. Inf. 32.) 
 
 Iddio VOLLE, in questa vita, 
 privdre ndi di questa luce. 
 (Dant. Conv. 114.) 
 
 Therefore, Dante knew well 
 what he said, when, in the Tenth 
 Canto of the Inferno, he induced 
 Farinata to say to him those 
 words. 
 
 For neither by reposing on 
 feathers, nor under a coverlet, is 
 fame won. 
 
 And never afterwards was my 
 tongue silent, whilst it could 
 [speak]. 
 
 After they had killed Constan- 
 tine their brother, both of them 
 held the empire for themselves. 
 
 Neither the one could, nor I 
 wish that the other should, avail 
 
 We had now left him, when I 
 saw two spirits by the ice pent in 
 one hollow. 
 
 God wished to deprive us, in 
 this life, of this light. 
 
272 ANALOGY. 
 
 EXERCISE XIX. 
 
 I. 1. To fall. 4. lying down, 7. remained. 
 Cadere. giacere. rimane're. 
 
 II. 1. I grieve, tbou art able, he sits, we seem, 
 dolere, potdre, sedere, parere, 
 
 you owe, they know. 2. I dissuaded, thou heldest, 
 dov6re, sapere. dissuadere, tenure, 
 
 he wished, we pleased, you saw, they were worth. 
 voUre, piacere, vedtre, valere. 
 
 3. I fell again, thou pleasedst, he was subject, we 
 ricad&re, compiac6re, soggiacere, ri- 
 
 learned, they sustained. I prevailed, thou maintainedsf, 
 
 sap6re, sosten6re. prevaUre, mantenere, 
 
 he was silent again, we declined, you foresaw, they 
 ritacere, decdddre, antivedere, ri- 
 
 wished again. 1 condoled, thou possessedst, he ab- 
 
 volere. condoUre, possedere, aste- 
 
 stained, we provided, you hurt, they super- 
 were, provvederej disvaUrej soprasse- 
 
 seded. 4. I will grieve, thou wilt seem, he will be 
 dire. dolere, par6re, pote- 
 
 able, we will remain, you will know, they will hold. 
 re, rimanire, sap6re, . tenere. 
 
 III. 1. I may entertain, thou mayest lose strength, he 
 trattendre, invalere, raw- 
 
 may amend, we may displease, you may reside, they 
 vedere, dispiacdre, riseddre, con- 
 
 may contain. 2. I might foresee, thou mightest please 
 tenere. antivedere, ripiace- 
 
 again, he might see again, we might preside, you might 
 re, rivedere, presedere, appar- 
 
 belong, they might hate. IV. 1. I should grieve 
 
 tenure, malvedere. ridoU- 
 
 again, thou wouldst come to know, he would attain, 
 re, risapere, attendre, 
 
IRREGULAR VERBS. JJ73 
 
 we would be sensible of, you would provide, they would 
 
 divedere, _ provveddre, rav- 
 
 amend. -. V. Know thou, let him seem, let us see, 
 
 vedere. sapere, par6re t vedtre, 
 
 please ye, let them be able. 
 piace're, potdre. 
 
 Variation of the Irregular Verbs in ere (short)* 
 
 There are about four hundred verbs in ere (short), 
 that are irregular ; but, as their irregularity, generally, 
 depends on the letters which precede that termination, 
 they may be reduced to the following forty-one; viz. 
 
 Verbs ending in 
 
 $re, preceded by a vowel 
 
 ; as, ^T-AERE, 
 
 to draw. (Class 4th.*) 
 
 btre, 
 
 " ttSSOrBERE, 
 
 to absorb. 
 
 (2d.) 
 
 c$re, preceded by <{ ^ j 
 [r; 
 
 " CWOCERE, 
 " fORCERE, 
 
 to cook. > /<1U v 
 to allege. ^ 4th '> 
 to conquer. > ,^ ,1 \ 
 to twist. 5 
 
 Cd; 
 
 " inVA.DERE t 
 
 to invade. 
 
 
 e; 
 
 ts /EDERE, 
 
 to offend. 
 
 
 
 " TIDERE, 
 
 to laugh. 
 
 
 6 ; 
 
 tl rODERE, 
 
 to gnaw. 
 
 (1st.) 
 
 U ' 
 
 ; a//UDERE, 
 
 to allude. 
 
 
 dere, preceded by <j ^. 
 
 ' ^RDERE, 
 * GCCENDERE, 
 
 to burn, 
 to kindle. 
 
 
 in; 
 
 c 5CINDERE, 
 
 to cut asunder. 
 
 (3d.) 
 
 on; 
 
 ' mjpONDERE, 
 
 to answer. 
 
 (5th.) 
 
 iu; 
 
 { cftlUDERE, 
 
 to shut. 
 
 (1st.) 
 
 it; 
 
 ' C/^IEDERE, 
 
 to ask. 
 
 (5th.) 
 
 >; 
 
 4 COttCEDERE, 
 
 to grant. 
 
 (3d.) 
 
 & 
 
 '!, fc; 
 
 to direct. 7 /u , x 
 to read. \ ( 4th> > 
 
 gere, preceded by < , 
 
 tl VOL.GERE, 
 
 " SjOARGERE, 
 "- WIERGERE, 
 
 to turn. > (2d) 
 to arrive. } v 
 to spread. > (lgt } 
 to dive. 5 
 
 or; 
 
 " JOORGERE, 
 
 to offer. 
 
 (2d.) 
 
 I4ff3 
 
 ^njGGERE, 
 
 to destroy. 
 
 (4th.) 
 
 * For the convenience of learners, and the purpose of rendering more simple the 
 variation of these verbs, they have been arranged .in classes. To facilitate rewt- 
 ence, we here indicate the class in which they will be found. 
 
274 
 
 ANALOGY. 
 
 gliere, 
 
 
 as, 
 
 COGLTERE, 
 
 to gather. 
 
 -j 
 
 gnere, 
 guere, 
 
 
 M 
 
 SO*"M, 
 
 to extinguish, 
 to distinguish. 
 
 K2d.) 
 
 /ere, 
 
 
 
 
 SVf/LERE, 
 
 to root up. 
 
 j 
 
 mere, preceded by < 
 
 f<? 
 
 >w; 
 
 cj 
 it 
 
 OSSUMERE, 
 
 to express, 
 to assume. 
 
 (3d.) 
 (2d.) 
 
 nere, 
 
 
 tt 
 
 BONERS, 
 
 to put. 
 
 (5th.) 
 
 rere t 
 
 
 it 
 
 COrRERE, 
 
 to run. 
 
 (1st.) 
 
 1 
 
 f* 
 
 it 
 
 5CWOTERE, 
 
 to shake. 
 
 ^ 
 
 tere, preceded by < 
 
 1:4; 
 |:-H 
 
 tt 
 
 dl.SCUTERE, 
 
 to discuss, 
 to return. 
 
 (1st) 
 
 1 
 
 li 
 
 it 
 
 conne'xTERE, 
 
 to connect. 
 
 (3d.) 
 
 I 
 
 r*; 
 
 n 
 
 SC/'IVERE, 
 
 to write. 
 
 (4th.) 
 
 vere, preceded by < 
 
 to 
 
 it 
 
 mOVERE, 
 
 to move. 
 
 (3d.) 
 
 \ 
 
 I*; 
 
 ti 
 
 VOL VERE, 
 
 to turn. 
 
 
 These verbs are chiefly irregular in the perfect of the 
 indicative, which ends in si or ssi ; and in the past 
 participle, which ends in so or sso, in to or tto, or in sto. 
 We shall, therefore, first classify them according .to the 
 termination of their perfect and participle, and then we 
 shall vary one of each class, and such of the same class 
 ,as may be otherwise irregular, and note, by way of ex- 
 ceptions, those verbs which depart in any respect from 
 their paradigm. 
 
 [The letters- a, e, ae, between parentheses, prefixed to the following verbs, denote 
 the auxiliary with which they are varied: (a), avere; (e), essere} (ae), either 
 avere or essere.] 
 
 FIRST CLASS. 
 
 Infinitive. 
 A -dere, 
 6 -dere, 
 i -dere, 
 6 -dere, 
 h -dere, 
 -dere 
 
 Perfect. Participle. 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 iu -dere, 
 dr -gere, 
 er -gere, 
 -rere, 
 r -tere, 
 
 'a) ZE-DERE, 
 
 (a) ri-DERE, 
 
 (a) ro-DERE, 
 
 (a) a7Zu-DERE, 
 
 7 -u-c/c, i t i (ae) (IR-DERE, U./-0*, 
 
 en -dere, \ ' ' ~ Si ' ' ' " so ' ' ' '^ (a) accEJV-DERE, acce-si, occ^-so. 
 
 (a) C/JIU-DERE, chiu-si, chiu-so. 
 (a) S/7AR-GERE, spdr-si, 
 (ae) ???ER-GERE ; 
 (ae) cor-RERE, 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 invd-si, 
 
 le-si, 
 
 ri-si, 
 
 ro-si, 
 
 allu-si, 
 
 ar-si, 
 
 Participle. 
 
 invd-so. 
 
 16-so. 
 
 ri-so. 
 
 ro-so. 
 
 allu-so. 
 
 dr-so. 
 
 cor -si, 
 river-si , 
 
 spar-so, 
 mer-so. 
 cor-so. 
 
IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 275 
 
 
 SECOND CLASS. 
 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 Perfect. Participle. Infinitive. 
 
 Perfect. Participle. 
 
 -bere, 
 
 
 "(ae) assor-BERE, 
 
 assor-si, assdr-To. 
 
 n -cere,. 
 
 
 (a) WIN-CERE, 
 
 vin-si, vin-To. 
 
 r -cere, 
 
 
 (a) 6>R-CERE, 
 
 tor-si, tor-TO. 
 
 -gere, 
 
 
 (a) t'OL-GERE, 
 
 vol-si, vol-To. 
 
 n -gere t 
 or-gere, 
 -gliere, 
 
 -. . -51, . .-to-, . . as,< 
 
 (e) gmN-GERE, 
 (a) ^OR-GERE, 
 (a) CO-GLIERE, 
 
 giun-si, giun-To, 
 por-si, por-To. 
 col- si, edZ-To. 
 
 -gnere, 
 
 
 (a) S/?d-GNERE, 
 
 spen-si, spen-io. 
 
 -guere, 
 
 
 (ae) rfzs/m-GUER] 
 
 v,,distin-&i, distin-TO. 
 
 ; -lere, 
 
 
 (a) Sud/-L.ERE. 
 
 sv6l-si, svel-To. 
 
 'i> -mere, 
 
 
 (a) ttSStJ-MERE, 
 
 assun-si, assun-TQ. 
 
 I -vere, 
 
 
 ^) WL-VERB, 
 
 vol-si, vol-TO. 
 
 
 THIRD CLASS. 
 
 
 ce -dere, ~\ 
 
 f (a) COttCE-DERE, 
 
 conce-ssi, conc^-sso. 
 
 \n-dere, 
 
 1 (a) SCIN-DERE, 
 
 sci-ssi, sc^-sso. 
 
 \ -mere, \ 
 
 1 (a) esjori-MERE, 
 
 espre-ssi, espresso. 
 
 d -tere, 
 
 > . . -ssi, . . -sso', . . as,-( (a) SCMO-TERE, 
 
 sco-ssi, scd-sso. 
 
 u -tere, 
 
 1 (a) ^Z5CU-TERE, 
 
 discu-ssi, discu-sso. 
 
 t -tere, 
 
 1 (a) conne'T-TERE 
 
 , conne-ssi,conne-sso. 
 
 6 -vere, J 
 
 |^(a) 7HWO-VERE, 
 
 mo-ssi, md-sso. 
 
 
 FOURTH CLASS. 
 
 
 d -cere,'] ((a) CWO-CERE, 
 
 cd-ssr, ed-TTo. 
 
 u -cere, \ 
 
 (a) addu-CERE, 
 
 addu-ssi, addo-TTo. 
 
 i .geteA 
 g -gere, J> . .-MI, . .-tto ; . . as, 
 ug-gtre, I 
 
 (a) Z^G-GERE, 
 
 (a) distrUG-GER] 
 
 dire" -ssi, dire 1 -TTO. 
 le-ssi, 16-TTO. 
 :, distru-ssi,distru-wo. 
 
 * -vere, 
 
 
 (A) seri-vERE, 
 
 scri-ssi, scri-TTo. 
 
 -ere, ^ 
 
 
 L(a)^-ERE, 
 
 trd-BSi, trd-TTO. 
 
 
 FIFTH CLASS. 
 
 
 on -dere, 
 
 }f(a) m^ON'-DERE 
 
 , nspo-si, rispo-sTO. 
 
 ie -dere, 
 
 . . -st, . . -sto; . . asX (a) C^IE-DERE, 
 
 chie-si, chie-STO. 
 
 -nere, 
 
 ^(a)^?0-NERE, 
 
 po-si, pd-STO. 
 
276 ANALOGY. 
 
 Variation of the Verb Invadere. 
 
 (Paradigm of the First Class of the verbs in 
 ere (short).) 
 
 I. INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE. 
 
 |to invade. {] invd-so, |invaded. 
 
 II. INDICATIVE. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 3.__ Perfect. 
 
 1st p. invd-si t II invaded ; 
 2d p. invaddsti, thou invadest ; 
 3d p. invd-SE } |he invaded ; 
 
 invade ste, 
 
 we invaded ; 
 you invaded ; 
 i they invaded. 
 
 The verbs evadere, ' to evade '; ledere, ' to offend '; 
 ridere, ' to laugh ' ; dividere, c to divide ' ; conqui- 
 dere, c to conquer ' ; int rider e, ' to temper ' ; uccidere, 
 c to kill'; rodere, c to gnaw'; alludere, ' to allude'; 
 deludere, ' to delude ' ; iUudere, c to illude ' ; ardere, 
 c to burn ' ; mordere, ' to bite ' ; accendere, c to kin- 
 dle '; incendere, ' to set on fire '; offendere, ; to offend '; 
 scendere, ' to descend ' ; spenders, ' to spend ' ; tendere, 
 6 to stretch ' ; mlipendere, < to vilify ' ; chitidere, c to 
 shut ' ; spargere, ' to spread' ; mergere, ' to sink'; 
 tergere, ' to wipe ' ; aspergere, c to sprinkle '; correre, 
 6 to run ' ; rivertere, c to turn ' ; and their compounds, 
 have the same irregularities. 
 
 The compounds of correre, occorrere, { to occur ' ; soccorrere, < to 
 succour ' ; in ihe future and the conditional are often contracted ; and 
 make accorra, i it will occur ' ; soccorrebbe, l he would succour.' 
 
 Difendere, ' to defend ' ; pdrdere, t to lose ' ; and rendere, f to ren- 
 der,' are both regular and irregular; and make in the perfect, difendei 
 or difesi, ' I defended ' ; and in the participle, difenduto or difeso, 
 1 defended ' ; &c. 
 
IRREGULAR VERBS. 277 
 
 Fendere, < to cleave ' ; is both regular and irregular ; and makes 
 in the perfect, fendei or fessi, l I cleaved ' ; and in the participle, 
 fenduto and /esso, cleaved.' 
 
 Prdnderc, * to take ' ; and rddere, ' to shave ' ; are both regular and 
 irregular in the perfect ; but in the participle are irregular only, and 
 make prdso, ' taken ' ; and r^so, ' shaven.' 
 
 The verbs pendere, 'to hang' ; spUndere, fi to glitter'; 
 venders, ' to sell'; stridere* c to shriek'; and their 
 compounds, are regular, and are varied like tessere. 
 
 Variation of the Verb Assorbere. 
 
 (Paradigm of the Second Class of the verbs in 
 ere (short).) 
 
 1. INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE. 
 
 |to absorb. || assor-xo, [absorbed. 
 
 II. INDICATIVE. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 3. -Perfect. 
 
 1st p. assor-sij 
 2d p. assorbe'stij 
 3d p. assdr-sE, 
 
 I absorbed ; II assorbdmrno, 
 thou absorbedst; assor&e'ste, 
 he absorbed ; || assor-sERO, 
 
 we absorbed ; 
 you absorbed ; 
 they absorbed. 
 
 Verbs ending in gliere, gnere, and ttre, besides the above, have alao 
 other irregularities, as will be seen by the following Paradigms : 
 
 * Alfonso Varano has written strlse, he shrieked } and strisero, l they shriektd.' 
 
 24 
 
278 
 
 ANALOGY. 
 
 Cogliere. 
 (Paradigm of the Verbs ending in gliere.) 
 
 I. INFINITIVE. 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 
 COGLIERE, or ito gather. 
 [CORRE (cor),' 
 
 HCOLTO, 
 
 [gathered. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 II. INDICATIVE. 
 
 ] . Present. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1st p. coglio, or 
 [COL.GO, 
 2d p. cogli, 
 3d p. coglie, 
 
 1st p. COL.SI (co- 
 [Shei), 
 
 2d p. cogJi&sti, 
 3d p. COLSE (co- 
 [glie,cogliette), 
 
 [ gather or am 
 [gathering ; 
 thou gatherest ; 
 he gathers ; 
 
 cogllamo, 
 cogliete, 
 
 y or COL,- 
 [GONO, 
 
 3. Perfect. 
 
 T gathered ; 
 
 thou gatheredst ; 
 he gathered ; 
 
 cogliemmo, 
 
 coglitste", 
 COLSERO (coglie- 
 [rono, cogliette- 
 
 we gather j 
 
 you gather ; 
 they gather. 
 
 \ve gathered ; 
 
 you gathered ; 
 they gathered. 
 
 4. Future. 
 1st p. c0GLiEROj or C0RRO, | I shall or will gather. 
 
 III. CONJUNCTIVE. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. 10 coglia, 
 
 [orCOLGA, 
 
 2d p. tu cdglia, 
 [or COLGA (cogli 
 [or colghi), 
 3d p. egli coglia, 
 
 PorCOLGA. 
 
 that I gather or\ 
 [may gather ; 
 that thou gather;! 
 
 that he gather ; 
 
 cogliamo, 
 coglidte, 
 
 \cogliano, or COL,- 
 [GANG, 
 
 | that we gather; 
 
 i 
 
 that you gather ; 
 
 that they gather. 
 
IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 279 
 
 IV. CONDITIONAL. 
 
 \ ,__ x 
 
 J. Present. 
 
 1st p. COGLIEREI, or coRREi (?o- I I should, would, or could gather; 
 [glieria, or conia), | [or might gather. 
 
 V. IMPERATIVE. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1st p. ... 
 
 
 2d p. cogli (co 9 ) 
 [tu, 
 3d p. coglia t 'r 
 [c^JLGA egli, 
 
 gather thou ; 
 let him gather ; 
 
 coglldmo noij \ 
 cogliete voi, 
 
 cogliano, or COL,- 
 [GANO tglino, 
 
 let us gather ; 
 gather ye ; 
 
 let* them gather. 
 
 Spegnere. 
 (Paradigm of the Verbs ending in gnere.) 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 
 I. INFINITIVE. 
 
 [SINCERE, 
 
 to extinguish. 
 
 (extinguished. 
 
 II. INDICATIVE. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. sptgno, 01 
 
 2d p. spegni y 
 3d p, spegne, 
 
 I extinguish or 
 [am extinguish- 
 
 [ig; 
 
 thou extmguisn- 
 
 [est; 
 
 he extinguishes; 
 
 i spegrrtdmo, 
 spegnete, 
 
 nono y or 
 
 we extinguish ; 
 
 you extinguish ; 
 they extinguish. 
 
 1st p. 
 
 3. _ Perfect. 
 
 | I extinguished. 
 
280 
 
 ANALOGY. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 III. CONJUNCTIVE. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1st p. w spegna, 
 [or sp^NGA, 
 
 8d p. tu spegna, 
 [or spe$GA 
 [(spegni), 
 Sd p. egli spegna, 
 
 that I extinguish,' 
 [or may extin- 
 [guish ; 
 that thou extin- 
 guish ; 
 
 that he extin- 
 [guish ; 
 
 spegnldmo, 
 spegnidte, 
 spegnano or 
 
 that we extin- 
 [guish ; 
 
 that you extin- 
 guish; 
 
 that they extin- 
 guish. 
 
 V. IMPERATIVE. 
 
 1st p. ... 
 
 
 spegnlamo noi t 
 
 2d p. spegni tu, 
 8d p. spegna, or 
 [sjpeKGA egli, 
 
 extinguish thou ; 
 let him extin- 
 guish ; 
 
 spegnete vdi, 
 spegnano, or 
 
 [5-/)^NGANO 
 
 [eglino, 
 
 let us extinguish j 
 extinguish ye ; 
 let them extin- 
 guish. 
 
 Svellere. 
 (Paradigm of the Verbs ending in lere.) 
 
 I. INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE. 
 
 , [to root up. || sve/xo, |rooted up. 
 
 II. INDICATIVE. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. svello, or 
 [svelco, 
 2d p. svtlli, 
 8d p. svelle, 
 
 I root up ; 
 
 thou rootest up ; 
 he roots up ; 
 
 svellidmo, 
 
 svelttte, 
 
 svellono, or svel- 
 [GONO, 
 
 we root up ; 
 
 you root up ; 
 they root up. 
 
 1st p. 
 
 3, Perfect. 
 
 I I rooted up. 
 
IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 281 
 
 III. CONJUNCTIVE. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 **\ 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. w svella, 
 [or svelGA, 
 2d p. tu svella, or 
 
 that I root up, or 
 [may root up ; 
 that thou root up; 
 
 svellidmo, 
 svellidte t 
 
 that we root up ; 
 that you root up ; 
 
 [or svelghi), 
 3d p. e'gli svella y 
 [or svelGA, 
 
 that he root up ; 
 
 svellano, or svel- 
 [GANO, 
 
 that they root up. 
 
 1st p 
 
 V. IMPE 
 
 RATIVE. 
 
 svellidmo noi y 
 svellete voi, 
 svellano, or svel- 
 [GANO eglino, 
 
 let us root up ; 
 root ye up ; 
 let them root up. 
 
 2d p. svelli tu, 
 3d p. svella, or 
 [sue/GA eg/i, 
 
 root up thou ; 
 let him root up ; 
 
 The compounds of assorbere, ' to absorb ' ; cogliere, 
 6 to gather ' ; and the verbs vincere, ' to conquer ' ; 
 torcere, c to twist ' ; volgere, ' to turn ' ; rifulgere, 
 c to shine ' ; giungere, ' to arrive ' ; mungere, 6 to 
 milk ' ; pungere, fi to prick ' ; ungere, c to anoint ' ; 
 pidngere, ' to weep ' ; frangere, to break ' ;' cingere, 
 6 to gird ' ; finger e, to fain' 5 pingere, ' to paint'; 
 spingere, ' to push ' ; tingere, ' to tinge ' ; porgere, 
 6 to offer ' ; accorgere, { to perceive ' ; sorgere, { to rise ' ; 
 scegliere, 'to choose'; sciogliere, to untie'; togliere, 
 ( to take away ' ; distinguere, ; to distinguish ' ; estin- 
 guere, ' to extinguish ' ; avellere, ' to pull by force ' ; 
 divellere, c to pluck up ' ; assumere, ' to assume ' ; 
 volvere, to turn ' ; and their compounds, have the same 
 irregularities. 
 
 Rifulgere has no participle. 
 
 Sorgere has been by poets changed into surgere, and so throughout 
 its inflexions : sursi, c I rose ' ; surto, ' risen ' ; &c. 
 
 Strmgere, l to bind ' ; and its compounds, as astringere, t to con- 
 strain ' ; &c., in the participle makes strilio^ * bound ' ; astretto y ' con^ 
 strained ' ; &c. 
 
 24* 
 
282 ANALOGY. 
 
 Espellere, f to expel ' ; impellere, ' to impel ' ; repellere, l to repel ' ; 
 in the perfect make espulsi, ' I expelled ' ; impulsi, t I impelled ' ; 
 repulsi, l I repelled ' ; and in the participle, espulso, l expelled ' ; 
 impulso, * impelled ' ; repulso, * repelled.' 
 
 Involvere, ' to involve ' ; and devolvere, ' to devolve ' ; in the parti- 
 ciple make involuto, l involved ' ; devoluto, l devolved.' 
 
 Presumere, l to presume ' ; and riassitmere, ( to re-assume ' 5 assol- 
 vere, * to absolve ' ; dissolvere, ' to dissolve ' ; and riaolvere, * to re- 
 solve ' ; in the perfect are both regular and irregular ; and make 
 presumti or presunsi, 1 1 presumed '; assolvdi or assolsi, 1 1 absolved '; 
 &c. 
 
 Assolvere, diss6lvere, and risolvere in the participle make, assoluto 
 1 absolved ' ; dissoluto* * dissolved ' \ risoluto, * resolved/ 
 
 
 The verb solvere, { to untie/ ' to solve,' is regular 
 and is varied like tessere. 
 
 Variation of the Verb Concedere. 
 
 (Paradigm of the Third Class of the verbs in 
 ere (short).) 
 
 I. INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE. 
 
 [to grant. || conc6- sso, [granted. 
 
 II. INDICATIVE. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 3. Perfect. 
 
 1st p. concd-ssi, 
 2d p. concedestij 
 3d p. 
 
 I granted ; 
 thou grantedst; 
 he granted ; 
 
 concedemmO) 
 concedeste, 
 
 we granted ; 
 you granted ; 
 they granted. 
 
 The verbs scindere, ' to cut asunder ' ; esprimere, 
 4 to express ' ; scuotere, c to shake ' ; percudtere, i to 
 
 * For this participle we, generally, substitute discidlto, a corresponding form of the 
 verb discitigliere, ' to dissolve 7 ; to distinguish it from the word dissoluto, 'dissolute.* 
 
IRREGULAR VERBS. 283 
 
 strike ' ; discutere, ' to discuss '; concutere, * to shake ' ; 
 connettere, ' to connect ' ; muovere, ' to move ' ; 
 and their compounds have the same irregularities. 
 
 Redimere, ( to redeem ' ; in the perfect makes redtnsi, 1 1 redeemed ' ; 
 and in the participle) redento, ' redeemed.* 
 
 Me'ttere, ' to put ' ; and its compounds ammettere, t to admit ' ; com- 
 mette.re, ' to commit ' ; &c., in the perfect make misi, * I put J j ammi- 
 si t ' I admitted ' ; &c. 
 
 Conci&ere, ' to grant ' >. interce'dere, ' to intercede 7 ; precedere, f to 
 precede ' ; and succederej l to succeed/ are both regular and irregular, 
 and make, in the perfect, concdssi or concedi, * I granted '; and in the 
 participle, concesso or conceduto, ' granted ' ; &c. 
 
 Conn6ttere, signifying c to reason/ is regular, and makes, in jthe 
 perfect, connettdi, I reasoned '; and in the participle, connettuto, 
 f reasoned.' 
 
 The verbs cedere, ' to yield ' ; accedere, c to accede '; 
 eccedere, fi to exceed ' ; procedere* ' to proceed ' ; 
 prescindere, ' to prescind ' ; premere, c to press ' ; 
 spremere, i to squeeze ' ; riflettere, ' to reflect ' ; and 
 battere, ' to beat ' ; and its compounds, are regular, and 
 are varied like tessere. 
 
 Riflettere, when applied to * light/ ' sound/ &c., in the participle 
 makes riflesso, ' reflected.' 
 
 Variation of the Verb Cuocere. 
 
 (Paradigm of the Fourth Class of the verbs ending in 
 ere (short).) 
 
 I. INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE. 
 
 CWO-CERE, |to cook. || cd-Txo, |cooked. 
 
 * Of this verb, Castiglione hai used proctssc, < he proceeded. 1 
 
284 
 
 ANALOGY. 
 
 II. INDICATIVE. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 3. Perfect. 
 
 Istp. c<5-ssi, 
 2d p. cocesti, 
 3d p. CO-SSE, 
 
 [ cooked ; 1 1 cocemmo, 
 
 thou cookedst ; cocdste, 
 he cooked ; || CO-SSERO, 
 
 we cooked ; 
 you cooked ; 
 they cooked. 
 
 Adducere. 
 (Paradigm of the Verbs ending in ucere.) 
 
 I. INFINITIVE. 
 
 or [to allege. 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 
 [alleged. 
 
 1st p. 
 
 II. INDICATIVE. 
 
 3. Perfect. 
 1st p. addussij \ I alleged. 
 
 4. Future. 
 
 [by contraction I I shall or will allege. 
 [for adducero], \ 
 
 1st p. 
 
 IV. CONDITIONAL. 
 
 1 . Present. 
 
 (addurria) [by 
 
 [contraction for adducerei (ad- 
 [duceria)], 
 
 I should, would, or could allege ; or 
 [might allege. 
 
 Rilucere, * to shine ' ; and tralucere y f to shine through ' ; are never 
 contracted in the infinitive, and make, in the future, rUucerci, ' it will 
 shine ' ; tralucera, * it will shine through ' ; and in the conditional 
 rilucerebbe y l it would shine J ; &c. 
 
IRREGULAR VERBS. 285 
 
 Distruggere. 
 
 I. INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE. 
 
 , orjto destroy. \\distruTTO, [destroyed. 
 
 II. INDICATIVE. 
 
 3. Perfect. 
 1st p. distr&asi, \ I destroyed. 
 
 4. Future. 
 1st p. distrvGGERo, or distruRRo, \ I shall or will destroy, 
 
 IV. CONDITIONAL. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. disfruGGEREi, or distruR- I I should, would, or could destroy ; 
 [REI (distruggeria or distrurria), | [or might destroy .. 
 
 StHtggere, e to melt ' ; is never contracted in the infinitive, and 
 makes, in the future, only struggerd, * I will melt ' ; and in the con- 
 ditional, struggerei, * I should melt.' 
 
 Trdere* 
 
 I. INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE. 
 
 TraERE, or trdn- 
 [RE, 
 
 to draw. 
 
 \\trdTio t 
 
 1 drawn. 
 
 * Fr&m the Latin trahere, converted also by the Italians into trdggert, 
 become obsolete, but of which it retains many of the forms. 
 
286 
 
 ANALOGY. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 II. INDICATIVE. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1st 
 
 2d 
 3d 
 
 p. trdGGO, 
 
 p. trdi, 
 p. trde (trag- 
 [ge), 
 
 I draw ; 
 
 thou drawest ; 
 he draws ; 
 
 tr alamo j or trao- 
 [GIAMO. 
 i traete, 
 trdoGOso (tran- 
 [no), 
 
 we draw > 
 
 you draw ; 
 thjy draw. 
 
 
 
 3. Perfect . 
 
 
 
 1st p. frassi, 
 
 | I drew. 
 
 
 
 
 4. Future. 
 
 
 1st p. traiiRo [by contraction for I I shall or will draw. 
 [traerd], \ 
 
 III. CONJUNCTIVE. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. to trace A., 
 
 2d t p. tu 
 
 3d p. egli trdo- 
 [GA, 
 
 that I draw or 
 [may draw ; 
 that thou draw ; 
 
 that he draw ; 
 
 traidmo, or trao- 
 
 [GIAMO, 
 
 tra'idte or trao- 
 
 [GIATE, 
 
 that we draw ; 
 that you draw ; 
 that they draw. 
 
 IV. CONDITIONAL. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. fraRREi (trarria) [by contrac-j I should, would, or could draw ; or 
 [lion for traerei (traeria)],! [might draw. 
 
 V. IMPERATIVE. 
 
 1st p 
 
 
 tratdmo or trctG- 
 
 let us draw j 
 
 2d p. trdi tu y 
 3d p. trdGGA. 
 [tH, 
 
 draw thou ; 
 let him draw ; 
 
 [GIAMO. 
 traete, 
 iracGANO, 
 
 draw ye ; 
 let them draw. 
 
IRREGULAR VERBS/ 287 
 
 The compounds of cuocere, ' to cook ' ; traere, * to 
 draw ' ; and the verbs inducere, ' to induce ' ; conducere, 
 Mo conduct'; deducere, { to deduct '; producers, 'to 
 produce '; riducere, ' to educe ' ; seducere, ' to seduce '; 
 traducere, ' to translate ' ; dirigere, ' to direct ' ; m* 
 gere,* 6 to erect ' ; negllgere, ' to neglect ' ; prediligere, 
 ' to have a predilection for ' ; Uggere, ' to read ' ; 
 reggere, c to support'; proteggere, 'to protect'; 
 striiggere, ' to melt ' ; scrivere, l to write ' ; and^li 
 compounds, have the same irregularities. ^^Xv^* 
 
 jpv*' or THE 
 
 Figgere,\ l to fix ' ; infiggere, Mo infix ' ; 
 
 thrust into ' 
 
 * to fry ' ; ajftigvere, to afflict ' ; infliggere, ' to inflict ' ; end in 
 and make confliTTO, < thrust into ' ; friTro, ' fried } ; if^mro, f inflict- 
 ed ' ; &c. 
 
 Rilucere, l to shine ' ; tralucere, l to shine through ' ; are both regu- 
 lar and irregular, and make rilucei or rilussi, 1 1 shone ' ; trained or 
 tralusse, t it shone through ' j but they have no participle. 
 
 Esigere, to exact * ; in the perfect is both regular and irregular, 
 and makes e^gdi or csdssi, * 1 exacted ' ; arid in the participle makes 
 esdtto, ' exacted.' 
 
 Vivere, l to live '; in the participle makes vivuto or tnsstifo, ' lived J ; 
 and in the future and conditional, is often contracted into tuun), ' I 
 will live '; and vivrei (vivria), * I would live.' 
 
 * Erigere is often by poet? contracted into trgere, but then bas no participle. 
 The 4rto raentioAed by Mastrofini, notwithstanding its derivation from erttto, parti- 
 ciple of er'igerC) is used in Italian as a adjective, but not as a participle. 
 
 t Figgcre,&nd some of its compounds, as affiggere, &c., are sometimes spelt with 
 one ff only : figere, affigere j and then make, in the jper/ec,/isi, affisi j and in the 
 participle, fiso, qffiso ; &c. 
 
288 
 
 ANALOGY. 
 
 Variation of the Verl Rispondere. 
 
 (Paradigm of the Fifth Class of the verbs in 
 ere (short).) 
 
 I. INFINITIVE. 
 
 , jto answer. 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 
 |j rispo-sTO, |answered. 
 
 II. INDICATIVE. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 3. Perfect. 
 
 1st p. mp-6si, 
 2d p. rispondesti, 
 3d p. ri 
 
 I answered ; 
 
 I rispondemmO) 
 
 thou answeredst;i rispondeste, 
 he answered; || rtsp-6sRO, 
 
 we answered ; 
 you answered ; 
 they answered. 
 
 Chiedere. 
 
 I. INFINITIVE. 
 
 , |to ask. 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 
 II. INDICATIVE. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. chiedo 
 
 I ask or am ask- 
 
 chiediamo(chieg- 
 
 we ask ; 
 
 [(chieggio), 
 
 [ing; 
 
 [gidmo, chiede- 
 
 
 
 
 [mo), 
 
 
 2d p. chiedi, 
 
 thou askest; 
 
 chiede'te, 
 
 you ask ; 
 
 3d p. chiedej 
 
 he asks ; 
 
 chiedono (chidg- 
 
 they ask. 
 
 
 
 [giono, chieg- 
 
 
 
 
 [gono), 
 
 
 3. Perfect. 
 
 1st p. chicsi, 
 
 I asked. 
 
IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 289 
 
 Singular. 
 
 III. CONJUNCTIVE. 
 
 3. Present. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1st p. io chieda 
 [(chiezgia, 
 
 that I ask, or 
 [may ask ; 
 
 chiedidmo (chieg- 
 [gidmo), 
 
 that we ask ; 
 
 2d p. tu chirda 
 [(chiecrgia, 
 [chidgga, 
 [chie'gghi),. 
 3d p. egli r.hieda 
 [(chitggia, 
 [chiegga), 
 
 that thou ask ; 
 that he ask ; 
 
 chiedidte (chieg- 
 [gidte), 
 
 chiedano (chieg- 
 [gianOj chieg- 
 [gano), 
 
 that you ask 5 
 that they ask. 
 
 1st p 
 
 V. IMP! 
 
 RATIVE. 
 
 chiedidmo noi, 
 chiedete voi, 
 chiedano (chieg- 
 [gano) 6glino : 
 
 let us ask ; 
 ask ye ; 
 let them ask. 
 
 2d p. chiedi tu, 
 3d p. chieda 
 (.(chiegga) egli, 
 
 ask thou ; 
 let him ask ; 
 
 Ponere. 
 
 I. INFINITIVE. 
 
 PONERE, or^ORRE,|to put. 
 
 j] jposxo, 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 | P Ut. 
 
 
 II. INDICATIVE. 
 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. ponoo 
 J(pono), 
 2d p. pom, 
 3d p. pone } . 
 
 I put; 
 
 thou puttest ; 
 he puts ; 
 
 ponidmoy we put ; 
 
 pone"te, you put ; 
 ponoosoy they put. 
 
 
 3. Perfect. 
 
 1st p. JEWS i, | I put. 
 
 i 
 
 4. Future. 
 
 1st p. 
 
 O [by contraction for 1 I shall or will put. 
 Iponerd], \ -^ 
 
 25 
 
290 
 
 ANALOGY. 
 
 III. CONJUNCTIVE. 
 
 Singular, 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. w ponGA 
 [(pogna), 
 
 that I put ; 
 
 ponidmo, 
 
 2d p. tU pOHGA. 
 
 that thou put j 
 
 ponidte, 
 
 3d p. egli pone A 
 
 that he put ; 
 
 pOMGANO, 
 
 [(pogna), 
 
 
 
 IV. CONDITIONAL. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. J90RREI (porria) [bycontrac- 
 [tion for ponerei (poneria), 
 
 that we put ; 
 that you put ; 
 that they put. 
 
 I should, would, or could put; or 
 [might put. 
 
 V. IMPERATIVE. 
 
 2d p. poni tu, 
 3d p.ponoA. tgli, 
 
 put thou ; 
 let him put j 
 
 \\ponidmo noi, 
 \\pon6te voi, 
 
 let us put ; 
 
 put ye ; 
 
 let them put. 
 
 The verbs corrispondere, c to correspond ' ; ascondere, 
 c to conceal ' ; nascondere, ' to hide ' ; richiedere, * to 
 request ' ; and all the compounds of ponere, ' to put ' ; 
 have the same irregularities. 
 
 Jlscdndere and nascdndere, in the participle, end also in so, making 
 j l concealed' ; and nascoso, * hidden.' 
 
 Fondere, l to melt,' and its compounds confondere, l to confound ' ; 
 &c. in the perfect make fusi, 1 1 melted ' ; con/usi, * I confounded ' ; 
 &c.; and in the participle, fu so, l melted ' ; confirso, * confounded ' ; &c. 
 
 Fondere is also regular, making also, in ihe perfect, fondei, and 
 in participle, fonduto. 
 
 Tondere,* c to shear ' ; and scernere, c to distinguish ' ;f 
 discernere, c to discern ' ; concernere, ' to concern ' ; are 
 regular, and varied like tessere. 
 
 * The participle t6so, erroneously attributed to ttindere, is a contraction oftosdto, 
 participle of the verb tosdre, * to shear.' 
 
 t Manzoni has written scerse, 'she distinguished' ; and scerserOj they distin- 
 guished.' 
 
IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 291 
 
 Variation of other Irregular Verbs in ere (short), not 
 included in any of the preceding classes. 
 
 To the above five classes of verbs in ere (short) 
 must be added the verbs, 
 
 conoscere, to know ; 
 crescere, to grow ; 
 nuocere, to hurt ; 
 
 nascere, 
 rompere, 
 
 to be born ; 
 to break ; 
 
 which, in the perfect, end in bbi, cqui, ppi; and in the 
 participle, in uto, to, tto : thus, 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 Participle. 
 
 COnOSCERE, 
 
 cono'-BBi, 
 
 COH05CI-UTO J 
 
 CT^SCERE, 
 
 cr^-BBi, 
 
 cresci-tJTo ; 
 
 ntlo'cERE, 
 
 no-cqui, 
 
 TlOCl'-UTO; 
 
 WffSCERE, 
 
 na-cqui, 
 
 rwi-To; 
 
 rOMPERE, 
 
 rw-ppi, 
 
 ro-TTO. 
 
 Conoscere. 
 (Varied with avere.) 
 
 I. INFINITIVE. 
 
 Conoscere, |to know. 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 
 TOj (known. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 II. INDICATIVE. 
 
 3. Perfect. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1st p. C0WO-BBI 
 
 [(conoscei), 
 2d p. conosce'sti, 
 3d p. <WO-BBE 
 [(conosce), 
 
 I knew ; 
 
 thou knewest ; 
 \\e knew ; 
 
 conoscdmmo, 
 conosceste, 
 
 C0/10-BBERO, 
 
 we knew; 
 
 you knew ; 
 they knew. 
 
ANALOGY. 
 
 The compounds of conoscere, and the verb crescere, 
 'to grow,' and its compounds, have the same irregu- 
 larities. 
 
 Nuocere. 
 (Varied with avere.y 
 
 I. INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE. 
 
 Nuocere, |to hurt. || noci-uxo r jhurt 
 
 II. INDICATIVE. 
 
 SlnguTar. Plurat 
 
 3. Perfect. 
 
 I hurt ; || nocemmo, [we hurt ~, 
 
 thouhurtest; ?i<?ces<e, [you hurt ; 
 
 he hurt; ||no-cQUERO, fthey hurt 
 
 1st p. 
 
 2d p. nocesli, 
 3d p. 
 
 Rinuocere, c to hurt again, ' and the verb naseere? 
 f to be born ' ; and its compound rinascere, ' to be boro 
 again,' in the perfect, have the, same irregularities. 
 
 Ndscere, and its compound rinascere, in the participle make nd-TO> 
 ' been born' j rind-To, * been born again.". 
 
 The verb pdscere, 'to feed/ although it has the same termination as 
 conoscere, crdscere, nascere, is regular. The verb mescere, signity- 
 ing c to pour,' is regular, but signifying ' to mix/ in the participle^ is 
 irregular, and makes misto, l mixed/ 
 
 Rompere. 
 (Varied with awe.) 
 
 I. INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE. 
 
 Rompere, |to break. [j TO-TTO, [broken. 
 
IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 293 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 3. Perfect. 
 
 1st p. rw-ppi 
 [(roppi,rompei), 
 2d p. rompesti, 
 3d p. rw-ppE 
 [(roppe,rompe), 
 
 I broke ; 
 
 thou brokest ; 
 he broke ; 
 
 rompenunc 
 rompiste, 
 
 fW-PPERO, 
 
 we broke ; 
 
 you broke ; 
 they broke. 
 
 The compounds of rompere, as corrompere, ' to cor- 
 rupt ' ; dirompere, * to break ' ; &c., have the same 
 irregularities. 
 
 Variation of the Verb Severe. 
 
 Severe, c to drink,' is a regular verb ; but, as it has 
 been by poets so contracted as to give it the appear- 
 ance of an irregular one, we will here give its variation. 
 
 Bevere. 
 (Varied with avere.) 
 
 I. INFINITIVE. 
 
 (Severe) bere, \ to drink. 
 
 GERUND. PARTICIPLE. 
 
 bevendo (beendo), [drinking. 
 
 | bevuto, 
 
 jdrunk. 
 
 II. INDICATIVE. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st 
 
 2d p. be'vi (b6i), 
 3d p. beve (bee), 
 
 I drink ; 
 thou drinkest; 
 he drinks ; 
 
 25* 
 
 I bevidmo, |we drink ; 
 
 bevete (beete), you drink; 
 
 I bevono (beono), (they drink. 
 
 
294 
 
 ANALOGY, 
 
 2. Imperfect. 
 
 1st p. w beveva or bevta, \ I drank. 
 Singular. 
 
 3, Perfect. 
 
 1st p. bevei or 
 fbevetli, BEVVJ 
 
 [(W&), 
 
 2d p. btvesti, 
 3d p. 6ev or 6e- 
 
 [vette, BEVVE 
 
 [(bebbe), 
 
 I drank ; 
 
 thou drankest; 
 he drank ; 
 
 PJural. 
 
 bev6mmo t 
 
 beveste, 
 
 beverono or be- 
 [vettero, EEV- 
 [VERO (bebbe- 
 \ro, bevvono), 
 
 we drank ; 
 
 you drank ^ 
 they drank. 
 
 4. Future. 
 
 1st p. (beverdj 
 [bevro) berd, 
 
 2d p. (beveiai) 
 
 [beraiy 
 
 3d p. (beverd, 
 [bevra) bera, 
 
 I shaH or will 
 
 [drink : 
 
 thou wilt drink ; ' 
 
 he will drink ; 
 
 (beveremo, be- 
 
 (beverete) berete, 
 
 (beverdnno) be- 
 [rdnno, 
 
 we will drink ; 
 you will drink } 
 they will drink. 
 
 III. CONJUNCTIVE. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. w beva 
 
 [(bea), 
 2d 
 
 tu beva 
 
 [(bevi}bea,bei), 
 
 3^ p. egli beva 
 
 [(bea), 
 
 that I drink or 
 [may drink ; 
 that thou drink ; 
 
 that he drink ; 
 
 levidmo, 
 bevidte, 
 bevano (beano), 
 
 that we drink ; 
 that you drink ; 
 that they drink. 
 
 2. Imperfect. 
 
 1st p. w bevessi jif I drink ; 
 
 [(beessi)J 
 2d p. tu bevessiit thou drinkest ; 
 
 [(beessi), 
 3d p. bevesse if he drinks ; 
 
 [(beesse),! 
 
 bevessimo (bees- 
 
 [sinao), 
 
 beveste (beeste), 
 
 bevessero (bees- 
 I [sero,beessono), 
 
 if we drink ; 
 if you drink ; 
 if they drink. 
 
IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 295 
 
 IV. CONDITIONAL. 
 
 Singular. Plaral. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. (beverei 
 [(beveria)) berei 
 [(beria), 
 2d p. (beveresti) 
 [btrtsti, 
 3d p. (bevertbbe 
 [(beveria)) be 
 [rebbe (beria), 
 
 I should, would, 
 [or could drink ; 
 [or might drink; 
 thou wouldst 
 [drink; 
 he would drink ; 
 
 (beveremmo) be- 
 [remmo, 
 
 (bevereste) ber6- 
 [ste, 
 (beverebbero (be- 
 [veriano, beveri- 
 [e?io)) berebbero 
 [(beriano, beri- 
 [eno), . 
 
 we would drink ; 
 
 you would drink ; 
 they would drink. 
 
 V. IMPERATIVE. 
 
 Istp 
 
 2d p. btm (bei) drink thou ; 
 
 [fw, 
 3d p. b6va (bea) let him drink; 
 
 bevidmo noi, 
 bevete (beete] voi, 
 
 bevano (beano) 
 [dglino, 
 
 let us drink; 
 drink ye ; 
 
 let them drink. 
 
 The compounds of bevere, as imbevere, ' to imbibe ' ; 
 ribevere, * to drink again ' ; have the same irregularities. 
 
 REMARKS ON THE FOREGOING VERBS. 
 
 All verbs ending in ucere, as adducere, ' to allege ' ; 
 inducere,- to induce ' ; &LC. in the participle, besides 
 changing cere into tto, change also the u into o ; and 
 make addotto, ' alleged ' ; indotto, ; induced ' ; &c. 
 
 Rilucere, 
 participle. 
 
 e to shine ' ; and tralucere, to shine through ' ; have no 
 
 Verbs ending in gliere, as cogliere, 6 to gather ' ; 
 togliere, ' to take away *; &c., in the perfect and parti- 
 ciple retain the Z of their termination ; and make COLSI, 
 
296 ANALOGY. i 
 
 6 I gathered '; coiJo, ' gathered ' ; toLsi, < I took away ' ; 
 &c. 
 
 All verbs ending in ndere, as accendere, 6 to kindle ' ; 
 scindere, ' to cut asunder ' ; rispondere, ' to answer '^ 
 &c., in the perfect and the participle lose the n ; and 
 make accesi, ' 1 kindle '; acceso, ' kindled ';. scim", ' I 
 cut asunder ' ; &c. 
 
 Verhs ending in ngere may end also in gnere, and 
 wee versa; thus, giungere or giugxere, ' to arrive * 
 spegwere or speygere, 6 to extinguish ' ; &ic. When 
 they end in gnere', in the perfect and participle they 
 retain the w of their termination ; and make spexsi, 
 6 1 extinguished '; spento, t extinguished ' ; &c. 
 
 The transposition of the n in verbs in ngere ought not to be made ex- 
 cept in those inflexions in which ng is followed by e or i ; as, giungo, 
 1 1 arrive,' giuGxi, ' thou arrives! ' ; gnt&jRe, ' he arrives ' ; giuGitidmo, 
 1 we arrive ' ; giucNdte, * you arrive ' ; giiingono, l they arrive J ; and 
 vice versd in verbs in gnere, it ought not to be made but in those inflex- 
 ions in which gn is followed by o or a; as, S/^NGO, 5 1 extinguish '; 
 sptgni, l thou exlinguishest ' ; &c., spexGa, * that I extinguish 7 ; &c. 
 
 Verbs ending in igere and imere, as dirigere, { to di- 
 rect ' ; esprimere, ' to express ' ; &c., in the perfect and 
 participle change the i into e ; and make dirvssi, ' I 
 directed ' ; dirvtto, ' directed ' ; esprvssi, ' I expelled ' ; 
 e^prE.sso, c expressed ' ; &c. 
 
 The verb redtmere, c to redeem ' ; and verbs ending 
 in wmere, as assumere, c to assume ' ; &c., in the joer- 
 fect and participle, change the m of their termination 
 into n, and make redexsi> ' I redeemed ' ; assuxsi, ' I 
 assumed ' ; assuxto, ' assumed ' ; &c. 
 
 The verbs traere, l to draw * ; ponere, c to put,' and 
 their compounds ; and all verbs ending in gliere, ucere, 
 uggere ; as cogliere, ' to gather ' ; adducere, ' to allege ' ; 
 distruggere, 6 to destroy ' ; are, in the infinitive con- 
 tracted into trdrre, porre, corre, addurre, distrurre ; 
 
IRREGULAR VERBS. 297 
 
 and make, in the future, trarrd, c I will draw' ; porro, 
 * I will put ' ; &tc., and in the conditional, trarrei, c I 
 would draw ' ; &c. 
 
 Rilucere, * to shine ' ; tralucere, l to shine through ' ; and struggere, 
 ' to melt' ; are never contracted in any of the above inflexions. 
 
 All verbs ending in ere (short), preceded by the 
 diphthong wo (accented), as cubcere, ' to cook ' ; scuo- 
 tere, ' to shake ' ; mvbvere, c to move ' ; nubcere, ' to 
 hurt ' ; &o, in the perfect and participle, and in all 
 the inflexions in which the diphthong loses the accent, 
 drop the u ; and make, cossi, ' 1 cooked ' ; cotto, 
 6 cooked ' ; scossi, ' I shook ' ; &c. cociamo, ( we 
 cook ' ; scoteie, l you shake ' ; movero, ' I will move ' ; 
 nocerebbe, { it would hurt ' ; &,c. 
 
 EXAMPLES* 
 
 JLd ambidue questi fini ha qui To both these objects has the 
 
 ALLTJSO parimente il Signore con Lord here equally alluded with 
 
 un tal ditto. (Segn. Mann. Nov. such words. 
 16.) 
 
 Non ist6tte gudri, che egli PER- It was not long before he lost 
 
 DE la vista, c La parola. (Bocc. both his sight and speech, 
 g. 4. n, 7.) 
 
 Qu6sta volta w dird, come si This time I will say, as we are 
 
 dice, ~ /)' essermi PERSA ancW wont to say, that I have missed 
 
 \o la liscialura. (Buon. Fier. 2. 4.) the object in view. 
 
 Taglidndo il FENDE quasi in- With a cut he clove him as 
 
 fino a denti. (Bocc. Filoc. 1,) far as the chin. 
 
 Colui FESSE in grdmbo a Dio That one smote in the bosom of 
 
 ^- Lo cuor che in sul Tanrigi an- God the heart which is yet hon- 
 
 cor si cola. (Dant. Inf. 12.) ored on the Thames. 
 
 Che, per V effetto d& suoi mtf That, through the effect of fas 
 
 pensieri, Fiddndomi di lui, 10 evU thoughts, I, trusting m mm, 
 
298 
 
 ANALOGY. 
 
 fossi PRESO, E poscia morto, 
 dir non mestieri. (Dant. Inf. 
 33.) 
 
 Prdsa la pidstra, la RADEI da 
 tutte e due le bdnde. (Benv. 
 Cell. Oref. 85.) 
 
 E seco avere una procella AS- 
 SORT o Tdnti principi illustri. 
 (Ariost. Fur. 14. 6.) 
 
 Voi troverete lo spezidle per 
 la ma, che andrd a CORRE la 
 misura de' confetti. (Fir. Trin. 
 1.2.) 
 
 Ne poeta ne COLGA mdi, ne 
 Gidve La privilegi. (Petr. s. 
 46.) 
 
 Se egli [il vino] sdppia di sec- 
 co o dbbia odor cattivo, cdccinvisi 
 dentro fidccole accese, e vi si 
 SPENGANO. (Sod. Colt. 99.) 
 
 Sempre la prossimdna 6rba 
 dattorno si SVELGA. (Cresc. 5. 
 1.) 
 
 Che Cristo appdrve d' due ch* 6- 
 rano in via, Gid SURTO fuor 
 d6lla sepulcrdl buca. (Dant. Purg. 
 21.) 
 
 In onordre altrui ten6va la bor- 
 sa STRETTA. (Bocc. g. 1. n. 8.) 
 
 Del lei nido di L6da mi divelse, 
 E nel del velocissimo m* IM- 
 PULSE. (Dant. Par. 27.) 
 
 Cft' e di torbidi nuvoli INVO- 
 LTJTO. (Dant. Inf. 24.) 
 
 Clddio diede moneta d' giudici, 
 efu ASSOLUTO. (Sen. Pist. 97.) 
 
 Questo possente mw nobile ar- 
 dor e Mi solleva da terra, e por- 
 ta il core Dov' ir per sua virtu 
 non gli e CONCESSO. (Buon. Rim. 
 50.) 
 
 was taken and afterward put to 
 death, there is no need that I 
 should tell. 
 
 Having taken the metal, I 
 shaved it on both sides. 
 
 And that along with him one 
 storm had swallowed up so many 
 illustrious princes. 
 
 You will find the apothecary on 
 the way, going to take the meas- 
 ure of the confections. 
 
 Never may a poet gather of it, 
 nor Jupiter give it any privilege. 
 
 If it [the wine] tastes too dry or 
 has a bad odor, let lighted torches 
 be thrown into it, and be extin- 
 guished in it. 
 
 Let the grass always be pulled 
 up around it. 
 
 That Christ appeared unto the 
 two upon their way, new-risen 
 from his vaulted grave. 
 
 He kept his purse close in hon- 
 oring others. 
 
 From the fair nest of Leda rapt 
 me forth, and wafted me on fnto 
 swiftest heaven. 
 
 Which is wrapt in turbid mists. 
 
 Clodius gave money to the 
 judges and was acquitted. 
 
 This powerful ardor of mine 
 elevates me from the earth, and 
 carries my heart, where by its 
 own power it is not" permitted .to 
 ascend., 
 
IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 JL che, e come CONCEDETTE 
 JLmore Che conosceste i dub- 
 biosi desiri ? (Dant. Inf. 5.) 
 
 REDENTO, da Redimere. (Cru- 
 sca.) 
 
 M ]\IISE dentro alle segr6te 
 cose (Dant. Inf. 3.) 
 
 By what and how did Love grant 
 that you should know your uncer- 
 tain wishes? 
 
 Redeemed, from to redeem. 
 
 He led me on into those seclud- 
 ed regions. 
 
 Ne dnche ben capisco V ilia- Neither can I understand the 
 
 zione che fa Apelle, del doversi inference which Apelles makes, 
 
 concedere qualche lume RIFLESSO that some reflected light must be 
 
 alia terra. (Gal. Macch. sol. 168.) granted to the -earth. 
 
 Qudndo Fetonte abbandond li 
 freni, Perche V del, come pare 
 ancor, si COSSE. (Dant. Inf. 17,) 
 
 Ddto che quest a ragione si 
 potesse ADDUCERE. (Borg. Rip. 
 30.) 
 
 JYot, sempre che verra proposi- 
 tOj ADDURREMO simili antichi e- 
 sempj. (Dav. Stor. 3.) 
 
 JE" suono, che si fa nelle selve 
 ddi cacciatori, perche li cdni 
 TRAGGANO al sudno. (But. Inf. 
 31.) 
 
 Via corta e spedita TRAR- 
 REBBE a fin quest' dspra pena t e 
 dura. . (Petr. c. 18.) 
 
 Sono FISO in un limo, che non 
 trovafondo. (Vit. SS. Pad.) 
 
 Lo TRAFITTO il mird, ma nulla 
 disse. (Dant. Inf. 25.) 
 
 Libero spirto od a' suoi mem- 
 bri AFFISSO. (Petr. s. 113.). 
 
 Tento di trar ddlla profonda 
 pidga la CONFITTA saetta. (Guar. 
 Past. Fid. 5, 7.) 
 
 E tdnta grazia sovra me RILUS- 
 SE. (Dant. Par. 22.) 
 
 When Phaeton abandoned the 
 reins, whence heaven, as it yet 
 appears, was wrapt in flames. 
 
 Even could this reason be al- 
 leged. 
 
 Whenever it shall be conven- 
 ient, we will always allege similar 
 ancient examples. 
 
 It is a sound, which is made by 
 hunters in the woods, that the dogs 
 may come to that sound. 
 
 A short and expeditious way 
 would bring to an end this severe 
 and hard pain. 
 
 I am fixed in a marshy soil 
 which has no bottom. 
 
 The pierced spirit looked on 
 him, but did not speak. 
 
 Free spirit of still confined to 
 its limbs. 
 
 He tried to draw from the deep 
 wound the fixed arrow. 
 
 La luce nelle tenebre RILU- 
 CETTE. (Arr. Vang.) 
 
 And so much grace shone over 
 me. 
 
 Light shone in the darkness. 
 
300 
 
 ANALOGY. 
 
 ESATTO, da Esigere. (Crusca.) Exacted, from to exact. 
 
 Che gli fusse oscurdta la fdma That the fame of the beginning 
 
 (Li" 1 principj delta sua milizia da of his military life should be ob- 
 
 un popolo VIVUTO in lunga pace, scured by a people who had lived 
 
 (Guicc. Stor. 5.) in long peace. 
 
 Ma il ben VISSUTO vecchio s' in- 
 gegndva di mostrdre la veritd del- 
 la cosa. (Firenz. Asin.) 
 
 VIVRO, com' io son visso.* 
 (Petr. s. lib.) 
 
 Jlllora dimandd come si chia- 
 mdvaqueW isola;fu RISPOSTO per 
 li marindri. che per antico si chia- 
 mdva Jerusalem. (Giov. Vill, 1. 
 4. c. 18.) 
 
 Ne pud grdzia negdr che tu gli 
 CHIEGGIA. (Alam. Colt. 1. 10.) 
 
 E se ne venne a FONERE oste a 
 Fiesole. (Pecor. g. 11. n. 1.) 
 
 Per duo fiammette, che vedem- 
 mo PORRE. (Dant. Inf. 8.) 
 
 Chi PORRA ben la mente e 
 r intelletto. (Franc. Barb. 15.8.) 
 
 Lo duca ed w,per quel cammi- 
 no ASCOSO, Entrammo a ritor- 
 ndr net chidro mondo. (Dant. 
 Inf. 34.) 
 
 Lapietdde' duo eogndti, Che 
 di tristizia tutto mi CONFUSE. 
 (Dant. Inf. 6.) 
 
 Tutte le campdne che erano in 
 qutllo trovdronsi qudsi tutte FON- 
 DUTE, come fossero coldte nella 
 forndce. (Matt. Vill. 3. 42. ) 
 
 n Saladino CONOBBE costui ot- 
 timamente essere saputo uscir del 
 Idccio, il qudle davdnti d' piedi 
 teso gli avea. (Bocc. g. 1. n. 3.) 
 
 Ben ti dee ricorddr, che non ti 
 KOCQUE. (Dant. Inf. 20.) 
 
 But the well-lived old man en- 
 deavoured to show the truth of 
 the thing. 
 
 I shall live as I have lived. 
 
 Then he asked how that island 
 was called ; he was answered by 
 the sailors, that anciently it was 
 called Jerusalem. 
 
 Nor can he deny any favor that 
 you may ask. 
 
 And came to encamp at Fiesole. 
 
 By two small flames, which we 
 saw kindle. 
 
 He who will reflect well. 
 
 My guide and I entered by that 
 hidden way to return to the bright 
 world. 
 
 Pity for the kindred shades, 
 whence grief wholly overcame 
 me. 
 
 All the bells which were there, 
 were found almost all melted as if 
 they had been put in a furnace. 
 
 Saladin saw that he had known 
 how to get out of the snare, which 
 he had spread before his feet. 
 
 Thou oughtest to remember well, 
 for it did thee good service. 
 
 * By contraction for visstoto. 
 
IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 301 
 
 Jlndbnne a Pavia per una dis- 
 cdrdia NAT A tra qutlli di Becche- 
 ria. (Din. Comp. 3.) 
 
 He went to Pavia on account of 
 a dissension sprung up among the 
 people of Beccheria. 
 
 La cittadindnza, che e or MISTA The citizens' blood, that now is 
 
 Di Cdmpi, e di Certdldo, e di mixed from Campi, and Certaldo, 
 
 Figghine, Pura vedcasi nelV ul- and Figghine, ran pure through the 
 
 timo artista. (Dant. Par. 16.) last mechanic's veins. 
 
 One of which I broke some few 
 years past, to save an infant who 
 was drowning in it. 
 
 U un de^lli qudli, ancor non & 
 molV dnni RUPP' w per un> 
 che dtntro ' annegava. (Dant. 
 Inf. 13.) 
 
 E rndngia, e BEE, e dorme, e And eats, and drinks, and sleeps, 
 veste pdnni. (Dant. Inf. 33.) and puts raiment on. 
 
 EXERCISE XX. 
 
 I. 1. To gather, to allege, to destroy, to draw. 
 Cogliere. adducere. distruggere. trdere. 
 
 to put. to take away. 
 ponere. togliere. 
 
 7. cloven. taken. shaven. 
 ftndere. prendere. rddere. 
 
 kindled. devolved. bound. redeemed, extinguished. 
 accendere. devolvere. stringere. redimere. spegnere. 
 
 cooked, ^answered. born. directed. lived. broken. 
 cuocere. rispondere. ndscere. dirigere. vivere. rompere. 
 
 alleged. II. 1. I gather, thou extinguishest, he 
 
 adducere. cogliere, spegnere, ri- 
 
 reduces, we ask, you draw, they take away. 
 
 ducere, chiedere, trdere, togliere. 
 
 I absorb, thou choosest, he rises, we assume, you 
 assorbere, scegliere, sorgere, assumtre, a- 
 
 compel, they root up. 
 string ere, svellere. 
 
 3. I offended, thou vilifiedst, 
 ledere, vilipendere, 
 
 he ran, we^ bite, you sprinkled, they kindled. 
 
 correre, mordere, aspergere, accendere. 
 
 [ expelled, 
 
 thou invadedst, 
 invddere, 
 
 26 
 
 he knew, we wiped, 
 conoscere, tergere. 
 
302 ANALOGY. 
 
 you shut, they descended. 1 cut asunder, thou 
 
 chiudere, sc6ndere. scmdere, con- 
 
 grantedst, he redeemed, we ^sheared, you chose, they 
 cddere, redimere, tondere, scegliere, mdt- 
 
 put. 4. I will succour, thou wilt drink, it will occur, 
 tere. soccorrere, btvere, occorrere, 
 
 we will shake, you will draw, they will destroy. 
 
 scuotere, trdere, distruggere. 
 
 I will put, thou wilt move, he will turn, we will untie, 
 ponere, muovere, volvere, sciogliere, 
 
 you will reflect, they will melt. III. 1. I may 
 
 riflettere, struggere. dis- 
 
 distinguish, thou mayest milk, he may know, we may 
 tinguere, miingere, ndscere, proUg- 
 
 protect, 
 gere, 
 
 choose, 
 gliere, 
 
 you may cook, 
 cuocere, 
 
 thou mayest fry, 
 friggere, 
 
 they may conquer. 
 vincere. 
 
 he may request 
 richiddere, 
 
 , we may 
 contrap- 
 
 oppose, you may hurt, they may drink. IV. 1. 
 
 ponere, nuocere, btvere. 
 
 I should drink again, thou wouldst break, he would 
 ribevere, frdngere, rilu- 
 
 shine, we would live, you would produce, they would 
 cere, vivere, producere, cre- 
 
 grow. V. write thou, let him feign, let us answer, 
 
 scere. scrwere, flngere, rispondere, 
 
 pour ye, let them feed. 
 mtscere, pdscere. 
 
IRREGULAR VERBS. 303 
 
 VARIATION OF THE IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE THIRD 
 CONJUGATION. 
 
 The following are the simple irregular verbs of the 
 third conjugation ; viz. 
 
 dire, 
 
 to tell ; 
 
 morire, to die ; 
 
 satire, to ascend ; 
 
 seguire, to follow ; 
 
 udire, to hear ; 
 
 uscire, to go out ; 
 
 venire, to come. 
 
 Dire. 
 (Varied with avere.) 
 
 I. INFINITIVE. 
 
 DIRE (dicere),* | to say. 
 
 GERUND. PARTICIPLE. 
 
 [saying. J| DETTO (ditto), jsaid. 
 
 II. INDICATIVE. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. dicn, 
 2d p. did or DI% 
 3d p. dice, 
 
 I say ; 
 
 fhou sayest ; 
 he says ; 
 
 II dicidmOj 
 
 DITE, 
 
 (I dicono, 
 
 we say ; 
 you say ; 
 they say. 
 
 
 2. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 1st p. w 
 
 dicdva or dic6a, \ I said. 
 
 * This verb^belongs*, properly, to the second conjugation, it being but a contrac- 
 tion of dicere, now become obsolete, of which it retains many of the forms. 
 
304 
 
 ANALOGY. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 3. Perfect. 
 
 1st p. oissi, 
 2d p. dicestij 
 3d p. DISSE, 
 
 I said ; 
 thou saidest ; 
 he said ; 
 
 t/icdmmo, 
 
 dic^ste, 
 
 DISSERO, 
 
 we said ; 
 you said ; 
 they said. 
 
 4. Future. 
 
 1st p. DIRO [by contraction for I I shall or will say. 
 dicerd], \ 
 
 III. CONJUNCTIVE. 
 
 1. _ Present. 
 
 1st p. io dica, \ that I say or may say. 
 
 2. Imperfect. 
 
 1st p. w dicessi, \ if 1 said or should say. 
 
 IV. CONDITIONAL. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. DIREI (diria) [by contraction I I should, would, or could say; or 
 [for dicerii (diceria)], | [might say. 
 
 V. IMPERATIVE. 
 
 1st p. ... | 
 
 2d p. DI' tu, (say thou ; 
 3d p. dica egli, I let him say ; 
 
 dic'idmo not, 
 DITE <7oi, 
 dicano eglinO 
 
 llet us say ; 
 pay ye ; 
 
 tlet them say. 
 
 The compounds of dire, as ridire, ' to say again ' ; 
 
 contradire or contraddire, ' to contradict ' ; interdire, 
 
 to forbid ' ; bendire, ' to speak well of ; maldire, * to 
 
 speak il 
 
 bave tbe same irregularities. 
 
 Bened'tre, l to bless,' and maladire or maleflire, t to cuise,' in the 
 perfect, are boih regular and irregular, and make benedii or benedissi, 
 ' I blessed ' ; maledii or maledissi, * I cursed.' 
 
IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 305 
 
 Morire. 
 (Varied with essere.*) 
 
 I. INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE. 
 
 Morire, |to die. || MORTO, [dead. 
 
 II. INDICATIVE. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. MUORO, Or 
 
 I die; 
 
 moriaMQ) 
 
 we die ; 
 
 [MUOIO (uioio). 
 
 
 
 
 2d p. MUORI, 
 
 thou diest ; 
 
 inorite, 
 
 you die ; 
 
 3d p. MUORK 
 
 he dies; 
 
 MUORONO.OrMUO- 
 
 they die. 
 
 [(wwor). 
 
 
 [IONO (naoio- 
 
 
 
 
 [no;, 
 
 
 4. Future. 
 1st- p. inorird or morro, \ I shall or will die. 
 
 III. CONJUNCTIVE. 
 
 1st p. 10 MUOR A, 
 
 [orMUOiA(m6iii). 
 
 2d p. tu MUOR A, 
 [or MUOIA (inora 
 [ormoia, nioii), 
 
 3d p. egli MUO- 
 [RA, or MUOIA 
 [(mora or moia), 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 that I die, orjj moridmo, 
 
 [may die ; 
 that thou die ; 
 
 that he die ; 
 
 MUOR \ NO, or 
 [MUOIA NO (mo- 
 [rauo ormoiano), 
 
 that we die ; 
 that you die ; 
 
 that they die. 
 
 IV. CONDITIONAL. 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. morirdi or morrei (moriria I I should, would, or could die ; or 
 [or tnorria), | [might die. 
 
 * Morire may be varied also with av6re.\ hut then, as wo have already observed 
 (p. 219j, it takes the nature of uu active verb, and signifies ' to kill,' and uot 'to die.' 
 
 2G* 
 
306 
 
 ANALOGY. 
 
 V. IMPERATIVE. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1st p. ... i 
 
 2d p. MUORI tu, die thou ; 
 3d p. MUORA. or let him die ; 
 
 [MUOIA (mora 
 
 [or inoia) egli, 
 
 \ moridmo noi, 
 morite voi, 
 MUORA NO, or 
 [Mu6iANo(rn6- 
 [rano or rnoia- 
 [no) dglino, 
 
 let us die ; 
 
 die ye ; 
 
 let them die. 
 
 The compounds of morire, as premorire, c to die be- 
 fore '; &c., have the same irregularities. 
 
 Salire. 
 (Varied with either avere or essere.) 
 
 I. INFINITIVE. 
 
 Salire (saglire*),)to ascend. 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 
 [ascended. 
 
 II. INDICATIVE. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. SAL.GO, Ol 
 
 I ascend ; 
 
 salidmo, or SA- 
 
 we ascend ; 
 
 [sa/iscr>(saglio), 
 
 
 [GLIAMO, 
 
 
 2d p. sdli or sa- 
 
 thou ascendest; 
 
 salite, 
 
 you ascend ; 
 
 [/iscit (sagli), 
 
 
 
 
 3d p. sale or sa- 
 
 he ascends; 
 
 SALGONO, or sa- 
 
 they ascend. 
 
 [lisce (saglie), 
 
 
 [liscono (sd- 
 [gliono), 
 
 
 * From this vorb, now become obsolete, are derived many of the forms of the 
 modern verb satire. 
 
 { The forms soUsci and saglibmo, of the present of the indicative and of the 
 imperative ; and sagliamo and saglidte, of the present of the conjunctive mood, are to 
 be preferred when sali, saliamo, salidte, might be confounded with s&li, salidmc, 
 and satiate, corresponding tenses of the verb saldre, ' to salt.' 
 
IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 307 
 
 Singular^ 
 
 Plural. 
 
 3. Perfect. 
 
 1st p. salii(sdlsi), 
 2d p. salistii 
 3d p. sail (sdlse, 
 [salio), 
 
 I ascended ; 
 ihou ascendedst; 
 he ascended ; 
 
 saliste, 
 
 salirono(sdlsero, 
 
 [saliro, salir), 
 
 we ascended ; 
 you ascended ; 
 they ascended. 
 
 III. CONJUNCTIVE. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p.0SAL,GA,Or 
 
 [salisca(sdglia), 
 2d p. iwsALGA,or 
 [sa/isca(salghi), 
 3d p. egli SALGA, 
 [or salisca, 
 
 that I ascend, or 
 [may ascend ; 
 that thou ascend; 
 
 that he ascend ; 
 
 salidmo, or SA- 
 [GLIAMO, 
 satiate, or SA- 
 [GL.IATE, 
 SALGANO, or sa- 
 [liscano (sa- 
 [gliano), 
 
 that we ascend ; 
 that you ascend ; 
 that they ascend. 
 
 V. IMPERATIVE. 
 
 2d p. sdli, or sa- 
 \lisci tu, 
 3d p. SALGA, or 
 [salisca egli, 
 
 ascend thou ; 
 let him ascend ; 
 
 salidmo, or SA- 
 [GLIAMO ndi, 
 
 salite vdi, 
 
 SALGANO, or sa- 
 [liscano eglino, 
 
 let us ascend ; 
 
 ascend ye ; 
 
 let them ascend. 
 
 The compounds of salire, as risalire, ' to reascend ' ; 
 assalire, ' to assail'; &LC., have the same irregularities. 
 
308 
 
 ANALOGY. 
 
 Scguire. 
 (Varied with cither avere or essere.) 
 
 I. INFINITIVE. 
 
 Segmre, |to follow. 
 
 II. INDICATIVE. 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 
 seguito, jfollowed. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. seguo, or 
 
 [SIEGUO, 
 
 2d p. se^ui, 01 
 
 3d p. 
 
 [SIEGUI. 
 
 t6gw, or 
 
 [SIEGUE, 
 
 I follow ; 
 thou followest ; 
 he fol'ows ; 
 
 segU'.amo, 
 
 seguono, or 
 
 [SIEGUONO. 
 
 we follow ; 
 you follow ; 
 they follow. 
 
 III. CONJUNCTIVE. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p w s^gua. 
 [or SIEGUA 
 
 2dp. 
 
 [SIEGUA 
 
 [siegui), 
 
 3d p. egli segua, 
 
 [or SIEGUA 
 
 that T follow ; or 
 
 [may follow ; 
 
 that thou follow; 
 
 that he follow ; 
 
 seguidmo, 
 seguidte, 
 
 s6guano, or 
 
 [SIEGUANO, 
 
 that we follow ; 
 that you follow ; 
 
 that they follow. 
 
 V. IMPERATIVE. 
 
 1st p. . . 
 
 
 2d p. sezui, or' 
 [SIEGUI tu. 
 3d p. segua, o 
 [SIEGUA egli, 
 
 follow thou ; 
 let him follow ; 
 
 seguiamo^noi, 
 seguite voi, 
 
 seguano, or SIE- 
 [GUANO 6glino, 
 
 let us follow ; 
 follow ye ; 
 
 let them follow. 
 
 The compounds of spguire, as conseguire, f to obtain ' ; 
 inseguire, ' to pursue ' ; proseguire, e to prosecute ' ; 
 susseguire, ' to follow immediately after ' ; have the 
 
 same irregularities. 
 
IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 309 
 
 Udire. 
 (Varied with avere.) 
 
 
 I. INFINITIVE. 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 
 Udire (od 
 
 ire*), jto hear; ,:, 
 
 | udito, [heard. 
 
 II. INDICATIVE. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. ODO, [ hear; 
 2d p. ODI, thou hearest ; 
 3d p. ODE, he hears ; 
 
 udidmO) we hear ; 
 udite, you hear ; 
 ODONO, they hear. 
 
 4. Future. 
 1st p. udird or udrd, \ I shall or will hear. 
 
 III. CONJUNCTIVE. 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. W ODA, 
 
 2d p. tu ODA 
 3d p. egli ODA, 
 
 that I hear or 
 [may hear ; 
 that thou hear ; 
 
 that he hear ; 
 
 udidmo, 
 
 udidte, 
 
 ODANO, 
 
 that we hear ; 
 that you hear ; 
 that they hear. 
 
 IV. CONDITIONAL. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. udirei or iidrii (udiria or I should, would, or could hear; 
 [udria), [or might hear. 
 
 V. IMPERATIVE. 
 
 1st p 
 
 
 udidmo noi, 
 
 let us hear ; 
 
 2d p. ODI tu, 
 3d p. ODA egli, 
 
 hear thou ; 
 let him hear ; 
 
 udite voi, 
 ODANO iglino, 
 
 hear ye ; 
 let them hear. 
 
 * From this form, now obsolete^ are derived 6do t <Jdi t &c. 5 of udire* 
 
310 
 
 ANALOGY. 
 
 The compounds of u !'ire, as riudire, ' to hear again '5 
 &,c. have the same irregularities. 
 
 Esaudire, ' to grant ' ; is regular, and varied like esibire. 
 
 TJscire. 
 (Varied with essere.) 
 
 I. INFINITIVE. 
 
 Uscire (escire*),|to go out; 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 
 uscito, |gone out. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 II. INDICATIVE. 
 J . Present. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1st p. ESCO, 
 
 2d p. ESCI, 
 3d p. ESCE, 
 
 T go out ; 
 thou goest out; 
 he goes out ; 
 
 nsridmoj 
 uscite, 
 
 ESCOJVO, 
 
 we go out ; 
 you go out ; 
 they go out. 
 
 III. CONJUNCTIVE. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. ZO ESCA, 
 
 2d p. tu ESCA, 
 3d p. igli ESCA, 
 
 that I go out, or 
 [may go out ; 
 that thou go out ; 
 that he go out ; 
 
 uscidmo, 
 uscidte, 
 
 ESCANO, 
 
 that we go out ; 
 
 that you go out ; 
 that they go out. 
 
 V. IMPI 
 1st p ..... 
 
 :RATIVE. 
 
 usciamo noi, 
 uscite vdi, 
 ESCAJVO eglino, 
 
 let us go out ; 
 go ye out ; 
 let them go out. 
 
 2d p. ESCI tu, 
 3d p. ESCA egli, 
 
 The compr 
 the same irre 
 
 2:0 thou out ; 
 let him go out; 
 
 und of uscire, riuscire, 'to succeed,' has 
 ^ularities. 
 
 * From this verb, now become obsolete, are derived the forms esco, 6sca, &c. } ot 
 the verb uscire. 
 
IRRE&ULAR VERBS. 
 
 311 
 
 I. INFINITIVE. 
 
 Venire, |to come. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Venire. 
 (Varied with essere.} 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 
 |come. 
 
 II. INDICATIVE. 
 1. Present. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1st p. VENGO 
 
 [(vegno), 
 2d p. VIENI, 
 
 3d p. VIENE, 
 
 1st p. VENN I, 
 
 2d p. venisti, 
 3d p. VENNE, 
 
 I come ; 
 
 thou comest ; 
 he comes ; 
 
 venidmo (vcgnd- 
 
 vemte, 
 
 [mo), 
 
 YEN GO NO( vegno- 
 [no), 
 
 3. Perfect. 
 
 I came ; 
 thou earnest ; 
 he came ; 
 
 venwwio, 
 veniste, 
 
 VENNERO (veni- 
 [ro) 
 
 we corne; 
 
 you come ; 
 they come. 
 
 we came ; 
 you came ; 
 they carne. 
 
 4. Future. 
 
 1st p. verro [by contraction for I shall or will come. 
 [venird], 
 
 III. CONJUNCTIVE. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. W VENGA 
 
 [(vegna), 
 
 2d p. tU VENGA 
 
 [(vegni), 
 3d p. egli VENGA 
 [(vegna), 
 
 that I come or 
 [may come ; 
 that thou come ; 
 
 that he come ; 
 
 venidmo (vegna- 
 [mo) r 
 veniate (vegna- 
 [te), 
 
 VENGANO (VC- 
 
 [gnano), 
 
 that we come j 
 that you come ; 
 they they come. 
 
 IV. CONDITIONAL. 
 
 i ri 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. verrei (verria) [by contraction I I should, would, or could come ; 
 [for venirei (veniria)], | [or might come. 
 
312 
 
 ANALOGY. 
 
 V. IMPERATIVE. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1st p 
 
 
 veniumo noi t 
 
 let us come ; 
 
 2d p. VIENI tUj 
 
 3d p. VENGA 
 
 [(vegna) 6gli 9 
 
 come thou ; 
 let him come; 
 
 venite voi, 
 VENGANo(veg;na- 
 [no) 4giino. 
 
 come ye ; 
 let them come. 
 
 Venire is sometimes varied with the conjunctive 
 pronouns mi, ti, si. &,c. and the particle ne ; thus, ME 
 NE vengo, ' I am coming thence ' ; TE NE vieni, ' thou 
 art coming thence ' ; &ic. Me, te, &tc., are then mere 
 expletives. 
 
 The compounds of venire, as convenire, ' to agree'; 
 divenire, c to become' ; invenire, ' to find ' ; prevenire, 
 'to anticipate'; sovve .1. e, ' to assist'; &c. have the 
 same irregularities. 
 
 Variation of the Verb Offerire. 
 
 Offer ire, c to offer,' is both regular and irregular ; 
 and it has, besides, been so contracted by poets, as to 
 render it important to give here its variation. 
 
 Offerire. 
 (Varied with avere.) 
 
 I. INFINITIVE. 
 
 Offerire or offrire, \ to offer. 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 
 offerindo or offering. 
 [offrendo,i 
 
 1 1 (offer! to) OFFER- I offered. 
 [TO,| 
 
IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 II. INDICATIVE. 
 
 1. Present. 
 1st p. offerisco or offro, \ I offer. 
 
 2. Imperfect. 
 
 1st p. w offerwa or offriva,or offeria I I offered, 
 [or offria, \ 
 
 313 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 3. Perfect. 
 
 1st p. offeni, of- 
 Ifrii, or OFFERSI, 
 2d p. offensti or 
 [offnsti, 
 3d p. offeri.nffri, 
 
 [Or OFFERSE, 
 
 1st p. offerird or offrird, 
 
 I offered ; 
 thpu offeredst ; 
 he offered ; 
 
 offerimmo or of- 
 [frimmo, 
 offeriste or offri- 
 Iste, 
 offenrono or of- 
 [frirono (offeri- 
 [ro or offiiro, 
 [offeriroroffrir), 
 
 [or OFFERSERO, 
 
 we offered ; 
 you offered ; 
 they offered. 
 
 4. Future. 
 
 I I shall or will offer. 
 
 III. CONJUNCTIVE. 
 
 1 . Present. 
 1st p. offer'isca, offrisca, or o/?ra, | that I offer, or may offer. 
 
 2. Imperfect. 
 1st p. to offerissi or offrissi, \ if I offered, or should offer. 
 
 IV. CONDITIONAL. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. offerirei or offrirei (offeriria I I should, would, or could offer ; 
 [or offriria), | [or might offer. 
 
 V. IMPERATIVE. 
 
 1st p. . . . I .... 
 
 2d p. offerisci or offri tu, \ offer thou. 
 27 
 
314 ANALOGY. 
 
 The verb sofferire, * to suffer,' has the same irregu- 
 larities. 
 
 Conferire, ' to confer ' ; differire, ' to differ ' ; inferire, ' to infer ' ; 
 profeiire, Mo proffer'; riferire, Mo refer'; trasferire, ' to transfer'; 
 are never contracted ; and in the perfect and participle have the 
 terminations in li and ito only ; and make, conferii, 1 1 conferred ' ; 
 differii, ' 1 differed ' ; conferito } * conferred ' ; &c.* 
 
 REMARKS ON OTHER VERBS IN ire. 
 
 The verbs convertire, ' to convert ' ; sovvertire, ' to 
 subvert ' ; are both regular and irregular, and in the 
 perfect make convertii or CONVE'RSI, ' I converted ' ; 
 sovvertii or SOVVE'RSI, ' I subverted ' ; and in the parti- 
 ciple, convertito or CONVE'RSO, { converted ' ; sovvertito 
 or SOVVE'RSO, ' subverted.' 
 
 Divertire, l to divert ' ; pervertire, ' to pervert ' ; have the termina- 
 tions in ii and ito only ; and make divertii, 1 1 diverted ' ; pervertii, 
 ' I perverted ' ; divertito, i diverted ' ; pervertito, ' perverted.' 
 
 Jlpparire and compar'ire, 6 to appear ' ; and their 
 compounds, are both regular and irregular, and in the 
 perfect make apparii or APPA X RVI (apparsi) ; comparii 
 or COMPA'RVI (comparsi), c I appeared ' ; &LC., and in 
 the participle, apparito or APPA'RSO ; (cornparito) COM- 
 PA X RSO, c appeared ' ; &c. 
 
 Apnre, c to open ' ; coprire, ' to cover ' ; and their 
 compounds, in the perfect are both regular and irregu- 
 lar, and make opm* or APE'RSI, ' I opened,' coprii or 
 COPE'RSI, ( I covered ' ; &c., but in the participle are 
 irregular only ; and make APE'RTO, c opened ' ; COPE'R- 
 TO, ' covered ' ; &c. 
 
 * A few instances may be found among the classics in which rifersij ' I referred,' 
 and profersij ' I proffered ' j proferto, ' proifered ' j have been used. 
 
IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 315 
 
 EXAMPLE S. 
 
 A cui il frate DISSE : " DfZ/o 
 sicurame'nte" (Bocc. g. 1. n. 1.) 
 
 E MUOIONO in questa folle 
 sperdnza. (Gr. S. Gir. 2.) 
 
 D6esi inttndere, per lo padre e 
 per lo figliuolo, tutti coloro, che 
 SALGONO, e isc6ndono per retta 
 linea. (Maestruzz. 2. 28.) 
 
 Ond' w per lo tuo mi" 1 penso, 
 e discerno, Che tu mi SEGUI, 
 ed w sard tua guida. -(Dant. Inf. 
 
 To whom the friar said : " Say 
 it frankly." 
 
 And die with this foolish expec- 
 tation. 
 
 For father and son, must be 
 understood, all those who ascend 
 or descend in a direct line. 
 
 Wherefore I, pondering for thy 
 profit, devise, that thou mayest 
 follow me, and 1 will be thy guide. 
 
 Fiorentino Mi s6mbri vera- 
 mente quand' w V ODO. (Dant. 
 Inf. 33.) 
 
 Qudl ESCE alcuna volta di 
 galoppo Lo cavalier di schi6ra, 
 che cavdfchi. (Dant. Purg. 24.) 
 
 Jlvendo fdtto fare un grandis- 
 siino fuoco in una sua cammind- 
 ta, in quella SE NE VENNE, 
 (Bocc. g. 2. n. 2.) 
 
 Dindnzi agli occhi mi si fu 
 OFFERTO Chi per lungo silen- 
 zio par&afioco. (Dant. Inf. 1.) 
 
 Tali cose, PROFERITE cos\ in 
 astrdtto, hdnno qualche difficoltcL 
 all' esser comprise. (Gall. 228.) 
 
 Per lo qual e chi crbda Piu 
 volte J l mondo in Caos CON VER- 
 SO. (Dant. Inf. 12.) 
 
 APPARI una gran mortalitd, 
 ec ...... Stdndo costui nel 
 
 principio del suo capitandlo, AP- 
 PARVE un cdso, ec. ..... 
 
 (Franc. Sacch. n. 158.) 
 
 Gli accorgimenti e le COPERTE 
 me I'o seppi tutte. (Dant. Inf. 
 27.) 
 
 Florentine thou seemest to me, 
 in truth, when I hear thee. 
 
 As sometimes one knight pricks 
 forth at a gallop from a troop of 
 ranked chivalry. 
 
 Having caused a large^fire to be 
 made in one of her halls, there she 
 came. 
 
 There presented itself to my 
 sis;ht, the form of one, whose voice 
 seemed faint through long disuse of 
 speech. 
 
 Such things, spoken so in ab- 
 stract, are difficult to be compre- 
 hended. 
 
 Whereby, there are some who 
 deem that the world has often 
 been turned into chaos. 
 
 There came a great mortality, 
 
 &c He being yet in the 
 
 beginning of his captaincy, an ac- 
 cident there happened, &c. 
 
 I knew all subtleties, and cov- 
 ered ways. 
 
316 ANALOGY. 
 
 EXERCISE XXI. 
 
 I. 1. To say. 4. contradict. 7. blessed, come. 
 Dire. contradire. benedire. venire. 
 
 died. advised. offered. transferred. II. 1. I die, 
 
 morire. avvertire. offerire. trasferire. . morire, 
 
 thou ascendest, he follows, we hear, you go out, 
 salire, seguire, udire, uscire, 
 
 they come. 2. I languished, thou saidst again, he 
 venire. languire, ridire, pre- 
 
 anticipated, we contradicted, you re-opened, they re- 
 venire. contradire, riaprire, rin- 
 
 covered their senses. 3. I cursed, thou reascendedst, 
 venire maledire, risalire, 
 
 he became, we suffered, you diverted, they referred. 
 divenire, sofferire, divertire, riferire. 
 
 I appeared, thou finishedst, he opened, we heard, you 
 apparire, finire, aprire, setitire, con- 
 
 agreed, they covered. 4. I will say, thou wilt arrive, 
 venire, coprirc. dire, pervenire, 
 
 he will die, we will differ, you will discover, they will 
 morire, differire, scoprire, as- 
 
 assail. III. 1. I may die before, thou mayest obtain, 
 
 salire. premorire, conseguire, 
 
 he may hear again, we may convert, you may find, 
 riudire, convertire, invenire, 
 
 they may sufcceed. 2. I might say, thou mightest contra- 
 riuscire. dire, con- 
 diet, he might bless, we might forbid, you might say again, 
 tradire, benedire, interdire, ridire, 
 
 they might curse. IV. 1. I would assist, thou wouldst 
 
 maledire. sovvenire, sof- 
 
 suffer, he would forbid, we would re-assail, you would come 
 feiire, interdire, riassalire. riveni- 
 
 again, they would hear one thing for another. V. con- 
 re, traudire, pro- 
 
DEFECTIVE VERBS. 
 
 317 
 
 tinue thou, let him grant, let us prevent, proffer ye, let 
 segmre, esaudire, prevenire, proferire, nor- 
 
 thern subvert. 
 vertire. 
 
 [For a Table of Irregular Verbs ^ see APPENDIX.] 
 
 CHAPTER XL 
 
 DEFECTIVE VERBS. 
 
 Defective verbs ending in Ire (long) : 
 
 CaUre, to care for ; 
 
 coiere or co7ere, to adore ; 
 lectre & lid- ) 
 
 re, or Ucert > to be lawful ; 
 
 & licere, ) 
 
 pavtre, 
 silere, 
 
 solere, 
 stuptre, 
 
 to fear ; 
 to be, or keep, 
 [silent ; 
 to be wont ; 
 to be astonished. 
 
 Defective verbs ending in ere (short) : 
 
 A'lgere, 
 
 to be chill ; 
 
 riedere, 
 
 to return ; 
 
 dngere, 
 
 to afflict; 
 
 serpere, 
 
 to creep ; 
 
 arrogere, 
 cdpere, 
 
 to add ; 
 to contain ; 
 
 soffolcere or 
 soffolgere, 
 
 > to support ; 
 
 chtrere, 
 
 to ask ; 
 
 taiigere, 
 
 to touch ; 
 
 convellere, 
 
 to convulse ; 
 
 toller 6, 
 
 to take away ; 
 
 fi&dere, 
 
 to wound ; 
 
 torptre, 
 
 to be benumbed; 
 
 lucere. 
 
 to shine ; 
 
 urgere, 
 
 to urge ; 
 
 molcere, 
 
 to assuage ; | vigere, 
 
 to be vigorous. 
 
 /'re, 
 gire, 
 
 Defective verbs ending in ire : 
 
 to go ; 
 
 olire, 
 
 to smell. 
 
 27* 
 
318 
 
 ANALOGY. 
 
 VARIATION OF DEFECTIVE VERBS. 
 
 [These verbs are used only in the tenses and persons, which are here given.] 
 
 CaKn. 
 
 I. INFINITIVE. 
 
 1. Present. 2. Past . 
 
 CaUre, |to care for. || issere caluto, |to have cared for. 
 
 GERUND. PARTICIPLE. 
 
 |caring for. || caluto, [cared for. 
 
 II. INDICATIVE. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 3d p. cale or cdl } \he cares for. II 
 
 2. Imperfect. 
 
 3d p. calevp or 'he cared for. 
 \caUa, | 
 
 3. Perfect. 
 3d p. CALSE, I he cared for. II, . . . 
 
 III. CONJUNCTIVE. 
 1. Present. 
 
 3d p. CAGLIA, 
 
 that he care for, 
 [or may care for.) 
 
 4. Imperfect. 
 
 3d p. caUsse, 
 
 if he cared for, or 
 [should care for. 
 
DEFECTIVE VERBS. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 V. IMPERATIVE. 
 
 3d p. CAGLIA cgli,*\\et him care for. 
 
 319 
 
 CaUre is generally used with the conjunctive pro- 
 nouns mi, 1i) ci, vi, gli ; thus, mi cale, ' I care for ' ; ci 
 caleva, ' re cared for ' ; &c. 
 
 CoUre or colere. 
 
 1st p. (colo), 
 
 I. INFINITIVE. 
 
 (Colere or colere), | to adore. 
 
 II. INDICATIVE. 
 
 1. Present. 
 I adore ; 
 
 3d p. (cole), 
 
 he adores. 
 
 Lecere & licere, or Ucere & licere. 
 
 I. INFINITIVE. 
 
 (Lecere & licere, or 1 to be lawful. I \essere ttcito or 1 to be lawful. 
 [lecere & licere), \ \licitoj \ 
 
 * As it has been questioned whether calere is used in the imperative, we cite from 
 the classics the following examples to prove that it is ao used : 
 
 JVon ve ne CA'GLIA no, io so ben io cid Do not trouble yourselves about it, I 
 che mi/0. (Bocc. g. 3. n. 6.) know very well what I am doing. 
 
 Del c6me non ti CA'GLIA, il percM ti Do not trouble thyself about the how, 
 
 dird. (Bocc. Filoc. 6 ) 
 
 I will tell thee the why. 
 
 Or se frattdnto Son le ndstre castella Now if, in the mean time, our castles 
 orpprtsse, e serve Non ce ne CA'GLIA. are oppressed and conquered, let us not 
 (Tass. Ger. 6. 11.) care about it. 
 
 t From this form are derived e lecito, * it is lawful ' ; era or fu Idcito, ' it was law- 
 ful ; sard lecito, ' it will be lawful ' ; &c., which are used to supply the tenses in 
 which lecere is defective. 
 
320 ANALOGY. 
 
 If. INDICATIVE. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 8d p. Uce or lice, jit is lawful. 
 
 Pavere. 
 
 I. INFINITIVE. 
 
 (Pavere), | to fear. 
 
 II. INDICATIVE. 
 
 1. Present* 
 3d p. (pave), Ihe fears. ' 
 
 SiUre. 
 
 I. INFINITIVE. 
 
 (Silere), | to be, or keep, silent. 
 
 II. INDICATIVE. 
 1. Present. 
 
 2d P . (sili), 
 3d p. (sile), 
 
 thouart, orkeep- 
 [est, silent ; 
 he is, or keeps, 
 [silent ', 
 
DEFECTIVE VERBS. 321 
 
 SoUre. . 
 
 I. INFINITIVE. 
 
 Solire, |to be wont. \\essere solito,* |to be wont 
 
 GERUND. 
 
 soUndo, | being wont. || 
 
 II. INDICATIVE. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. SOGLIO, 
 2d p. SUOLI, 
 
 I am wont ; 
 thou art wont; 
 
 3d. p. SUOLE (so- he is wont; 
 
 SOGLIAMO (sole- 
 
 soUte, 
 
 SOGLIONO, 
 
 [mo), 
 
 we are wont ; 
 
 you are wont ; 
 they are wont. 
 
 2. Imperfect. 
 1st p. io soleva or solea, \ I was wont. 
 
 III. CONJUNCTIVE. 
 
 1. Present. 
 1st p. 10 SOGLIA, ) that I am wont, or may be wont. 
 
 2. Imperfect. 
 1st p. 10 soUssi, | if I were wont, or should be wont. 
 
 Stupere. 
 
 I. INFINITIVE. 
 
 (Stupere), | to be astonished. 
 
 * From this form are derived s6no sdlito, ' I nm wont ' ; dri s6lito t * thou wast 
 wont ' j &c,, which are often used instead ofsoglio j solevi j &c. 
 
322 
 
 ANALOGY. 
 
 II. INDICATIVE. 
 
 Singular, Plural. 
 
 1. Present. 
 3d p. (stupe), heisastonished.il ..... |. . 
 
 Mgere. 
 
 I. INFINITIVE. 
 
 (Algere), | to be chill. 
 
 Istp.(alsi), 
 2d p. (algesti), 
 3d p. (alse), 
 
 II. INDICATIVE. 
 
 3. Perfect. 
 
 I was chill ; jj (algemmo), 
 thou wast chill j 
 
 he was chill ; 
 
 1 (alsero), 
 
 we were chill ; 
 you were chill ; 
 they were chill. 
 
 Jlngere. 
 
 I. INFINITIVE. 
 
 (^.ngere), j to afflict. 
 
 II. INDICATIVE. 
 1 . Present. 
 
 3d p. (ange), |it afflicts. 
 
 2. Imperfect. 
 
 3d p. (angeva), 
 
 it afflicted. 
 
DEFECTIVE VERBS. 
 
 323 
 
 Jlrrogere. 
 
 I. INFINITIVE. 
 
 JLrrogere, | to add. 
 
 GERUND. PARTICIPLE. 
 
 arrogdndo, jadding. ||ARROTO ; or ARRoso,|added. 
 
 II. INDICATIVE. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. 
 
 3d p. arroge, 
 
 he adds ; 
 
 I arrog'idmo, 
 I arrogono, 
 
 2. Imperfect. 
 
 let p. to arrogeva or arrogea,\l added. 
 3. _ Perfect . 
 
 1st p. ARROSI, 
 
 2d p. arrogesti, 
 3d p. ARROSE, 
 
 I added ; 
 
 arrogemmo, 
 
 thou addedst ; arros;este, 
 
 he added ; 
 
 | ARROSERO, 
 
 we add; 
 they add. 
 
 we added ; 
 you added ; 
 they added. 
 
 Capere. 
 
 I. INFINITIVE. 
 
 (Capere), | to contain. 
 
 II. INDICATIVE. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 I. 
 
 3d p. (cdpe), lit contains. ". . . . 
 
 2. Imperfect. 
 
 8d p. (captva), 
 
 it contained. 
 
324 
 
 ANALOGY. 
 
 Cher ere. * 
 
 I. INFINITIVE. 
 
 (Cherere), | to ask. 
 
 II. INDICATIVE. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. < 
 
 3d p. (chere), 
 
 I ask ; 
 
 he asks. 
 
 Con veil ere. 
 
 I. INFINITIVE. 
 
 Convellere, \ to convulse. 
 
 GERUND. PARTICIPLE. 
 
 convellendo, |convulsing. jj coNvtiLso, [convulsed. 
 
 II. INDICATIVE. 
 I. Present. 
 
 3d p. convelle, Ihe convulses ; \\conv6llono, [they convulse. 
 2. Imperfect. 
 
 3d p. convelleva he convulsed ; convellevano or 
 
 [or convell6a,\ 
 
 [convelle ano, 
 4. Future. 
 
 they convulsed. 
 
 3d p. convellerct,\he shall or willi convellerdnno, 
 \ [convulse ;|| 
 
 they shall or wi 
 [convulse 
 
DEFECTIVE VERBS. 
 
 325 
 
 III. CONJUNCTIVE. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 2. Imperfect. 
 
 3d p. convelldsse, 
 
 if he convulsed,| 
 or should con- 
 vulse ; 
 
 convell6sserp) 
 
 if they convuls- 
 [ed. 
 
 IV. CONDITIONAL. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 3d p. 
 
 convelle- 
 [rebbe, 
 
 he should, would, 
 [or could con- 
 [vulse ; or might 
 [convulse ; 
 
 convellercbbero, 
 
 they should, 
 [would, or could 
 [convulse. 
 
 Fiedere. 
 
 I. INFINITIVE. 
 
 Fiedere , * |to wound. 
 
 GERUND. 
 
 \\fiedendo, [wounding. 
 
 II. INDICATIVE. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. fi6do, 
 2d p. fitdi, 
 3d p. fiede, 
 
 I wound; 
 
 thou woundest; 
 
 he wounds; \\Ji6dono, 
 
 2. Imperfect. 
 1st p. lofiedeva ovfiedea^ \ I wounded. 
 
 1st p.fiedti, 
 
 3. _ Perfect. 
 
 \ I wounded. 
 
 they wound. 
 
 * Ancient writers said also feggcre, ' to wound, to strike '; from wliich aro de- 
 rived the forms fdggono, ' they strike '; which we meet in tho Jlminacstramenti ; 
 and feggia, it strikes,' in the Inferno of Dante. 
 
 28 
 
326 
 
 ANALOGY. 
 
 III. CONJUNCTIVE. 
 
 Singular. Plural 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. wfieda jthat I wound ; 
 [(fieggia),j 
 
 3d p. eglifieda that he wound ; 
 [(fieggia)J 
 
 2. Imperfect. 
 1st p. iofiedessiy \ if I wounded. 
 
 that they wound 
 
 Lucere. 
 
 I. INFINITIVE. 
 
 Lucere, |to shine. 
 
 GERUND. 
 
 lucendo, |shining, 
 
 II. INDICATIVE. 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. . 
 
 
 luciamo, 
 Incite, 
 
 \ we shine ; 
 lyou shine. 
 
 2d p. luci, 
 3d p. luce, 
 
 thou shinest; 
 he shines ; 
 
 2. Ii 
 
 nperfect. 
 
 
 1st p. '\o luceva, 
 
 I shone. 
 
 
 3.1 
 
 ^erftct. 
 
 | lucemniOy 
 \ Iuc6ste, 
 
 we shone ; 
 you shone. 
 
 2d p. luctsti, 
 3do. . 
 
 thou shonest ; 
 
 1st p. lucerd, 
 
 4. Future. 
 
 I I shall or will shir;e. 
 
DEFECTIVE VERBS. 
 
 327 
 
 III. CONJUNCTIVE. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p 
 
 2d p 
 
 3d p. 6gli (luca), 
 
 .... 1 1 lucldmo, 
 
 .... I lucidte, 
 
 that he shine ; || (lucano), 
 
 that we shine ; 
 that you shine ; 
 that they shine. 
 
 2. Imperfect. 
 1st p. to lucessi) | if I shone or should shine. 
 
 IV. CONDITIONAL. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. lucerei (luceria), I if I should, would, or could 
 
 [shine ; or might shine. 
 
 (Molcere), 
 
 2d p. (molci), 
 3d p. (molce), 
 
 Molcere. 
 
 I. INFINITIVE. 
 
 | to assuage. 
 
 II. INDICATIVE. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 thou assuagest ; 
 he assuages. 
 
 2. Imperfect. 
 
 1st p. w (molc^- 
 [va), 
 
 2d . (raolcevi), 
 3d p. egli (mol- 
 [ceva), 
 
 I assuaged ; 
 
 thou assuagest ; 
 he assuaged. 
 
328 ANALOGY. 
 
 Riedere. 
 
 I. INFINITIVE. 
 
 Riedere, \ to return. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 II. INDICATIVE. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1st p. ritdo, 
 2d p. riedi, 
 3d p. riede, 
 
 I return ; 
 thou returnest ; 
 he returns ; 
 
 I riedono, 
 
 they return. 
 
 2. Imperfect. 
 
 1st p< io rie"deva\I returned ; 
 [or riedea, 
 
 2d p. riede'vi, 
 
 3d p. egli riedeva he returned ; 
 [or riedea, 
 
 thou returnedst ; 
 
 riedevano or rie- 
 \deano, 
 
 they returned. 
 
 III. CONJUNCTIVE. 
 1. Present. 
 
 \ st p. to rteda, 
 2d p. tu rieda, 
 
 3d p. dgli rieda, that he return ; 
 
 that I return ; or ' 
 [may return ; 
 that thou return ; 
 
 riedanoj 
 
 that they return. 
 
 Serpere. 
 
 I. INFINITIVE. 
 
 (Serpere), |to creep/j 
 
 GERUND. 
 
 | (serpendo), (creeping. 
 
DEFECTIVE VERBS. 
 
 II. INDICATIVE. 
 
 329 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. (s6rpo)j 
 2d p. (serpi), 
 3d p. (serpe), 
 
 I creep ; 
 thou creepest ; 
 he creeps ; 
 
 I (s6rpono), 
 
 they creep. 
 
 2, Imperfect. 
 
 1st p. w (serpe- 
 ,[*a), 
 
 2d p. (serpevi), 
 3d p. egli (serpe- 
 
 thou creptest * 
 
 
 
 he crept ; 
 
 (serpevano), 
 
 they crept 
 
 III. CONJUNCTIVE. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. io (se'rpa). 
 2d p. tu (sirpa}, 
 
 that I creep ; or 
 [may creep ; 
 that thou creep ; 
 that he creep ; 
 
 I (serpano), 
 
 that they creep. 
 
 Soffolcere or Soffolgere. 
 
 I. INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE. 
 
 (Soffolcere or to support. || (soffolto), Isupported. 
 
 [soffolgere, 
 
 II. INDICATIVE. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 3d p. (soffolce or 
 Isoffolge), 
 
 be supports. 
 
 3. Perfect. 
 
 3d p. (soffol'se,) I he supported. 
 
 28* 
 
330 ANALOGY. 
 
 Tangere. 
 
 I. INFINITIVE. 
 
 (Tangere), | to touch. 
 
 II. INDICATIVE. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 1, Present. 
 
 3d p. (tange), Ihe touches. II 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Tollere. 
 
 I. INFINITIVE. 
 
 (Tollere), | to take away. 
 
 II. INDICATIVE. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 2d p. (tolli), 
 3d p. (tolle), 
 
 thou takest awa; 
 he takes away. 
 
 H . 
 
 11 
 
 III. CONJUNCTIVE. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 2d p. tu (tolla), that thou take 
 
 [away ; 
 
 3d p. egli (tolla), I that he take a way. 
 
DEFECTIVE VERBS. 
 
 331 
 
 V. IMPERATIVE. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 3d p. (tolla) egli, 
 
 let him take 
 [away. 
 
 Estolhre, ' to lift ' ; compound of tollere, is not de- 
 fective, but in the participle, and in all the persons of 
 the perfect of the indicative. 
 
 Torpere. 
 
 I. INFINITIVE. 
 
 (Torpere), . | to become numb. 
 
 II. INDICATIVE. 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. (torpo), 
 
 3d p. (torpe), 
 
 I become numb ; 
 
 hebecomesnumb.il 
 
 III. CONJUNCTIVE. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 1st p. w (torpa), 
 2d p. tu (torpa), 
 3d p.egft(torpa), 
 
 that I 
 
 become 
 
 [numb ; 
 that thou become 
 
 [numb ; 
 that he become 
 
 [numb. 
 
332 
 
 Singular. 
 
 ANALOGY. 
 
 / 
 Urgere. 
 
 I. INFINITIVE. 
 
 / 
 Urgere, \ to urge. 
 
 II. INDICATIVE. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 3d p. urge, ]he urges. 
 
 2. Imperfect. 
 
 3d p. egliurgeva he urged ; urgevano or ur- they urged, 
 
 [or urgea, [gtano, 
 
 Vigere. 
 
 j. INFINITIVE. 
 
 (Vigere), | to be vigorous. 
 
 II. INDICATIVE. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 3d p (vige), I he is vigorous ; || 
 
 4. Future. 
 
 3d p vigera), 
 
 it will be vigor- 
 tons.) 
 
DEFECTIVE VERBS. 
 
 333 
 
 
 Gire. 
 
 
 I. INFINITIVE. 
 
 Gire, | to go. 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 | gito, |gone. 
 
 1st p. 
 2dp. 
 
 II. INDICATIVE. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 1. Present. 
 .... \\gidmo, 
 
 1st p. gwa or gia, 
 
 1st p. io gii, 
 
 1st p. gird, 
 
 1st p. 
 2d p. 
 
 we go; 
 you go. 
 
 2. Imperfect. 
 | I went. 
 
 3. Perfect. 
 
 | I went. 
 
 4. Fidure* 
 
 | I shall or will go. 
 
 III. CONJUNGTIVE. 
 
 1. Present, 
 glamo, 
 gldte, 
 
 that we go, or 
 [may go ; 
 that you go. 
 
 1st p. io gissij 
 
 2. Imperfect. 
 
 | if I went, or should go. 
 
334 
 
 ANALOGY. 
 
 1st p. girei (giria), 
 
 1st p. 
 
 2d p. 
 
 V. CONDITIONAL. 
 
 I should, would, or could go ; or 
 [might go. 
 
 V. IMPERATIVE, 
 
 gite, 
 
 let us go ; 
 go ye. 
 
 Ire. 
 
 I. INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE. 
 
 Ire, | to go. || ito, Igone. 
 
 II. INDICATIVE. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 2d p. 
 
 lee, 
 2. Imperfect. 
 
 1st p. 10 iva, 
 
 3d p. egli wa, 
 
 I went ; 
 
 he went. 
 
 wano, 
 
 2d p. isti t 
 3d p. . . 
 
 3. Perfect. 
 thou wentest ; 
 
 (iro, ir), 
 
 you go. 
 
 l- 
 
 we went. 
 
 they went. 
 
1st p. 
 
 2dp. 
 3d p. 
 
 3d p. 
 
 2dp. 
 
 DEFECTIVE VERBS. 
 4. Future. 
 
 335 
 
 Singular. 
 
 ire mo, 
 irete, 
 
 IV. CONDITIONAL. 
 
 (iriano), 
 
 V. IMPERATIVE. 
 
 fce, 
 
 Plural. 
 
 we shall or will 
 
 you will go ; 
 [they will go. 
 
 they should, 
 [would, or could 
 [go ; or might 
 [go- 
 
 ye. 
 
 Olire. 
 
 I. INFINITIVE. 
 
 OZire, | to smell. 
 
 II. INDICATIVE. 
 2. Imperfect. 
 
 1st p. w oliva, 
 
 2d p. olivij 
 
 3d p. egli oliva, 
 
 I ymelied ; 
 thou smelledst ; 
 he smelled. 
 
 I olivano, 
 
 they smelled. 
 
 
336 
 
 ANALOGY. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 CALEXDOGLI vie piu la salute 
 propria che gV inter6ssi de* Stmi- 
 font6si. (Stor. Semif. 36.) 
 
 Lo cuor che 'n sul Tamigi an- 
 cor si COLA. Dant. Inf. 12. 
 COLA, doe COLE. (Buti. Com. 
 Dant.) 
 
 Quanlunque alia natura umd- 
 na LECE Jiver di lume. (Dant. 
 Par. 13.) 
 
 E dfr nemwi PATE e d6' sog- 
 gttti. (Tass. Ger. 1. 83.) 
 
 Preso dalnuovo canto, STUPE e 
 SILE. (Boez. Varch. 3. 12.) 
 
 I'o dubito che Vossignoria non 
 dblia occupdto il primo luogo 
 nella grazia di Siia Beatitiidinc, 
 il qudle SDLEVA tssere il mio. 
 (Cas. lett. 19.) 
 
 ALSI ed drsi gran tempo. 
 (Varch. Rim. 3.) 
 
 Tdnta paura e duol V alma 
 trista ANGE. (Petr. s. 236.) 
 
 ARROSERO gtrte nuova per sei 
 Priordti. (Giov. Vill. 9. 2.) 
 
 Se di saper ch' w siq, ti CAL, 
 cotdnto. (Dant. Inf. 19.) 
 
 Chi sa come difende e come 
 fere, Soccorso d' suoi perigli 
 dltro non CHERE. (Tass. Ger. 2. 
 85.) 
 
 Dopo alcuni strdni avvolgimdn- 
 ti cased morta, CONVULSA e in- 
 tirizzita. (Red. Vip. 1. 83.) 
 
 " O figliuol," disse, " qudl di 
 qu6sta greggia 6" arresta pun- 
 to, gidce poi cent' dnni Sdn- 
 za arrostdrsi qudndo '/ foco il 
 FEGGIA." (Dant. Inf. 15.) 
 
 Caring more for his own safety 
 than for the interests of the Seini- 
 phontians. 
 
 That heart which is yet honored 
 on the [bank of the] Thames. 
 
 Whatever of light is allowed to 
 human nature. 
 
 And fears both his enemies and 
 his subjects. 
 
 Transported by the new song, 
 he is astonished and keeps silent. 
 
 I doubt whether your Lordship 
 has not occupied the first place in 
 the favor of His Holiness, which 
 was wont to be mine. 
 
 I was chill and burned for a great 
 while. 
 
 So much fear and grief afflicts 
 my sad soul. 
 
 They added new people for six 
 successive Piiorates. 
 
 If it imports thee so much to 
 know who I am. 
 
 He who knows how It [the hand 
 of God] defends, and how it of- 
 fends, asks no other assistance in 
 his perils. 
 
 After some strange whirlings, she 
 fell down dead, convulsed and stiff 
 with cold. 
 
 " O son," said he, " whoever of 
 this throng stops one instant, lies 
 then a hundred years, without any 
 ventilation, when the fire smites 
 him." 
 
DEFECTIVE VERBS. 
 
 337 
 
 LUCE VAN- gli occhi suoi piii 
 the la Stella. (Dant. Inf. 2.) 
 
 E gia il sole a mezza t6rza 
 RIEDE. (Dant. Inf. 34.) 
 
 Chi pud dir come SERF A, o 
 come crdsca, Gia da piu Idti il 
 foco 1 (Tass. Ger. 12. 45.) 
 
 Perche la vista tua pur si SOF- 
 FOLGE Lag giii tra V ombre tri- 
 ste smozzicdte ? (Dant. Inf. 29.) 
 
 fo sonfdtta da Dio, sua tnerce, 
 tale Che la vostra miseria non 
 mi TANGE. (Dant. Inf. 2.) 
 
 Che dona e TOLLE ogni dltro 
 benfortuna. (Arios. Fur. 27. 84.) 
 
 S\ la gran front e e le gran cor- 
 na ESTOJLLE. (Tass. Ger. 4. 7.) 
 
 Jf Greci Ilfavellar non TOR- 
 PE infra le Idbbra. (Buon. Fier. 
 2.5.5.) 
 
 Che V una pdrte e V dltra tira 
 ed URGE Tin tin sondndo con 
 s\ dolce nota. (Dant. Par. 10.) 
 
 Per mostrdre che la caritd sent- 
 pre VIGERA in loro. (But. Par. 
 7.) 
 
 E la ingegnosa pecchia^ al pri~ 
 mo albore GIVA preddndo or 
 uno or dltro fiore. (Poliz. St. 1. 
 25.) 
 
 ITE, cdldi sosp'iri t alfreddo core. 
 (Petr. s. 120.) 
 
 Mescoldto insi&me con quello 
 di molte dltre cose, che per lo 
 giardino OLIVANO. (Bocc. g. 3.) 
 
 Her eyes were brighter than the 
 star [of day]. 
 
 And now the sun returns within 
 one hour and a half of noon. 
 
 Who can say how the fire 
 creeps, and already increases on 
 every side. 
 
 Why dost thou fasten thy sight 
 below among the maimed and 
 miserable shades ? 
 
 I am so made by God, thanks 
 to his grace, that no sufferance of 
 your misery touches me. 
 
 For fortune gives and takes 
 away every other good. 
 
 So high he raises his great brow 
 and horns. 
 
 To the Greeks the speech does 
 not languish in their lips. 
 
 In which the one part draws and 
 the other pushes, sending out a 
 tinkling sound of note so sweet. 
 
 To show that charity will al- 
 ways be in vigor among them. 
 
 And the industrious bee, at the 
 first dawn, was rifling now this 
 and now the other flower. 
 
 Go, warm sighs, to the cold 
 heart. 
 
 Mingled with the scent of many 
 other things, which through the 
 garden spread their fragrance. 
 
 As most of the foregoing defective verbs are of rare occurrence, and 
 can be used with propriety only in verse, an Exercise upon them has 
 been here thought needless. 
 29 
 
338 ANALOGY. 
 
 GENERAL REMARKS ON ITALIAN VERBS. 
 
 Verbs, which in the infinitive end in are, ere or ere, 
 ire ; as /A'RE, ' to make ' ; tessvRE, ' to weave ' ; WC/I'RE, 
 1 to hear ' ; followed by a word beginning with a con- 
 sonant, except z or s followed by another consonant. 
 often drop the last vowel ; as, 
 
 FAR mfesa, to make defence ; 
 
 TESSER Fiscette, to weave baskets ; 
 
 UDIR novella, to hear news. 
 
 Those verbs, which, by contraction, end in arre, orre, 
 tirre; as, ^A'RRE from traere, ' to draw' ; imponnE from 
 imponere, 'to impose'; tnfrWu'RRt from introducere, 
 ' to introduce ' ; drop the last syllable ; as, 
 
 TRAR Non puote, he cannot draw ; 
 
 IMPOR leggi, to impose laws ; 
 
 INTRODU'R costume, to introduce a custom. 
 
 The first and third persons plural of tenses of 
 verbs ending in mo, and no, ro ; as, erai'aivio, ' we 
 were ' ; parlavaxo, c they spoke ' ; caddeno c they fell ' ; 
 often drop the last vowel ; as, 
 
 ERAVAM rartiti, we had departed ; 
 
 PARLAY AN Rado, they spoke seldom ; 
 
 they fell into the boiling lake. 
 
 Those persons which end in nno;~ as, saranno, l they 
 will be ' ; hanno, c they have ' ; drop the last sylla- 
 ble ; as, 
 
 tutti SARAN serrdli, they shall all be closed ; 
 
 V HAN prdprio a noia, they really hate him. 
 
 Infinitives of verbs, and the first and third persons 
 plural of their tenses, drop constantly the last vowel 
 
REMARKS ON VERBS. 339 
 
 or syllable, when they are followed by a conjunctive 
 pronoun ; as, 
 
 FARLARne, to speak of it ; 
 
 AND i AM vi, let us go thither ; 
 
 they assisted me ; 
 
 they gave him. 
 
 The third person singular of the present of the in- 
 dicative of the verbs calcre, 6 to care for ' ; dolere, ' to 
 grieve ' ; rimanere, ' to remain ' ; solere, ' to be wont ' ; 
 tenere, ' to hold ' ; valere, ' to be worth ' ; volere, ' to 
 be willing ' ; venire ' to come ' ; and the second person 
 singular of the imperative of the verbs rimanere, tenere, 
 venire; drop the last vowel, especially when they are 
 followed by a conjunctive pronoun ; as, 
 
 se vi CAL m" me, if you care for me ; 
 
 vuoLti ch? 10 ti vinco ? does it grieve thee that I con- 
 
 quer thee ? 
 
 suoLmi abbaglidre, it is wont to dazzle me ; 
 
 - TIEN DaZ Cie/o, she holds from Heaven ; 
 
 RiMANfa* con n6i, remain with us ; 
 
 non si VUOL Dire, it must not be said ; 
 
 viENwe qua, come [thence] hither. 
 
 The first person singular of the present of the indica- 
 tive of the verb e'ssere, ; to be ' ; and the second person 
 singular of the imperative of the verb ponere, ' to put ' ; 
 drop the last vowel, and \\henfollowed by the conjunc- 
 tive pronoun mi, they change n into m ; as, 
 
 r SON colei, I am she ; 
 
 poivmi 6ve n Sol uccide i put me where the sun kills the 
 fiori, flowers. 
 
 All forms of verbs followed by a conjunctive pronoun 
 (as we have already observed, p. 110, and the foregoing 
 examples clearly show,) are joined to them so as to form 
 one single word. Now, if the form of the verb consists 
 
340 ANALOGY. 
 
 of one syllable ; as, c, ' it is ' ; ha or a, ' it has ' ; dV, 
 1 tell thou ' ;/a', ' make thou ' ; sa, ' he or it knows ; '$vo, 
 * I go ' ; &c. ; or if it bears the accent on the last sylla- 
 ble ; as, diro, ' I will tell ' ; mostro, ' he showed ' ; &c. ; 
 in being joined to a conjunctive pronoun, the consonant 
 of the pronoun is doubled^ and the accent when mark- 
 ed is suppressed ; as, 
 
 cvt>i cadiUo ddlla memoria ? has it escaped from your mind ? 
 
 haumi a tal condutto, she has reduced me to such a 
 
 condition ; 
 
 avvi letti, there are beds ; 
 
 ij ma&stro mio, tell me, my master ; 
 
 ti ben sentire, make thyself to be heard well ; 
 
 Iddio, God knows it ; 
 
 a guisa (ToV6o, I go on like a blind man ; 
 
 diroTti perch* V venni, I will tell thee why I came ; 
 
 mostrocci un 1 6mbra r he showed us a spirit. 
 
 EXCEPTION. 
 
 The g of the pronoun gli t is never doubled, although the accent 
 of the verb is always suppressed; as, 
 
 MANDOGLI dicendo, sent him word. 
 
 The forms trai, ' thou d rawest ' or i draw thou ' ; trae, 
 6 he or it draws ' ; of the verb traere or trarre^ ' to draw ' ; 
 when joined to a conjunctive pronoun, drop the last 
 vowel, and require that the consonant of the pronoun be 
 doubled ; as, 
 
 frawNe lo Scricca, except Scricca ; 
 
 frctMMt di mortal letdrgo, it draws me from a mortal leth- 
 
 argy. 
 
 Finally, infinitives of verbs, like present participles in 
 English, are often used in Italian as substantives ; as, 
 il parlare, c the speaking' ; /' abbracciare, the embrac- 
 ing' ; il favellare, ' the manner of speaking ' ; and then 
 
REMARKS ON VERBS. 
 
 341 
 
 have a plural, which they form like substantives, by 
 changing e into i; as, 
 
 li sdzzi parldn, immodest [speakings or] con- 
 
 versations ; 
 
 gli abbraccidn, the [embraeings or] embraces ; 
 
 i proprj favelldri, one's own manners of speaking. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Dindnzi a lui non Me 
 NASCONDER, ne FUGGIR, ne FAR 
 DIFESA. (Petr. s. 203.) 
 
 E vede un uom c.anuto alV om- 
 bre amene TESSER FISCELLE 
 dlla sua greggia accdnto. (Tass. 
 Ger. 7. 6.) 
 
 Ed ilia Di questa cosa UDIR 
 Non vuol NOVELLA. (Bern. Oil. 
 1.9.) 
 
 TRAR Motto il debit fidnco oltra 
 NON PUOTE. (Tass. Ger. 19. 28.) 
 
 E ttggi imporre, ed i: 
 COSTUME, Ed drti e culto di 
 verdce JVwme. (Tass. Ger. 1. 9.) 
 
 Noi ERAVAM PARTITI gid da 
 ello. (Dant. Inf. 32.) 
 
 PARLAVAN RADO convoci sodvi. 
 (Dant. Inf. 4.) 
 
 E amendue GADDER NEL 
 mezzo del BOLLENTE STAGNO. 
 (Dant. Inf: 22.) 
 
 Tt/TTI SARAN SERRATI Qudll- 
 
 do di JosaffoL qu\ tornerdnno. 
 (Dant. Inf. 10.) 
 
 Tdnto L'^HAN PROPRIO i suoi 
 figliuoli A NOIA. (Bern. Rim.) 
 
 29* 
 
 Before him it does not avail to 
 conceal, to fly, or to make defence. 
 
 And she sees a hoary old man in 
 the pleasant shade, weaving, bas- 
 kets by the side of his flock. 
 
 And she does not wish to hear 
 speaking about this thing. 
 
 He cannot draw his feeble frame 
 much further. 
 
 And to impose laws, and to in- 
 troduce customs, and arts, and the 
 worship of the true God. 
 
 We had already^ departed from 
 him. 
 
 They spoke seldom, but withjme- 
 lodious voices. 
 
 And both fell into the middle of 
 the boiling lake. 
 
 They [the sepulchres] shall all 
 be closed, when they [the spirits] 
 shall have once more come here, 
 returning from Jehosaphat. 
 
 So much his own children hate 
 him. 
 
ANALOGY. 
 
 gli mi pidte di PARLARNE. 
 (Bocc. g. 1. n. 7.) 
 
 AND i AM vi, ben mi pidce [di 
 vederlo]. (Nov. Ant.) 
 
 AIUTARONMI elle bine. (Bocc. 
 g. 4. Proem. ) 
 
 DlEDERGLI (BOCC. g. 7. D. 4.) 
 
 SB vi CAL DI ME, venite meco 
 bino a paldgio. (Bocc. g. 8. n 5.) 
 
 Che avesti, Anichino 1 DUOLTI 
 cos\ CH' io TI VINCO ? (Boee. g. 
 7. n. 7.) 
 
 Morte ha spinto qu&l sol, che 
 
 ABBAGL1AR SUOLMI. (Petr. S. 111. 
 
 E 'I nobile inggno che DAL, 
 CIELO Per grdzia TIEN deir 
 immortdle Apollo. . (Petr. c. 5.) 
 
 StdtTi C RIMANTI CONKOl^Se ti 
 
 pidce. (Vit. SS. PP. 2. 317.) 
 
 Comdre, egli NON si VUOL DIRE. 
 (Bocc. g. 4. n. 2.) 
 
 Jldridno disse : " 5i, VIENJVE 
 QUA." (Bocc. g. 9. n. 6.) 
 
 I' SON COLEI, che ti die tdnta 
 guerra. (Petr. s. 261.) 
 
 POMMI OVE 'L SOL UCCIDE I 
 
 FIORI e n erba. (Petr. s. 113.; 
 Ora EVVI cosi tosto DALLA. ME- 
 
 MORIA CADUTO ? (BOCC. g. 10. 
 
 n. 6.) 
 
 E 1 gita. al Cidlo ; ed HAMMI A 
 TAL CONDUTTO. (Petr. s. 247.) 
 
 Ed AVVI LETTI, che vi parrib- 
 ber piit b6lli che quelli del Doge 
 di Vinegia. (Bocc. g. 8. n. 9.) 
 
 DlMMI, MAESTRO MIO ! DIMMI, 
 
 ! (Dant. Inf. 4.,) 
 
 It pleases me to speak of it. 
 
 Let us go [thither], 1 should be 
 glad to see it. 
 
 They assisted me well. 
 
 They gave him. 
 
 If you care for me, come with 
 me as far as the palace. 
 
 What ails thee, Am'chino ? Does 
 it grieve thee thus that I conquer 
 thee ? 
 
 Death has extinguished that sun, 
 which is wont to dazzle me. 
 
 And the noble mind which he 
 holds from Heaven, through the 
 favor of the immortal Apollo. 
 
 Stay and remain with us, if thou 
 likest. 
 
 Gossip, it must not be said. 
 
 Adrian said : " Yes, come [thence] 
 hither." 
 
 I am she, who caused you so 
 much grief. 
 
 Put me where the sun kills the 
 flowers and the herbage. 
 
 Now has it so soon escaped from 
 your mind ? 
 
 She is gone to Heaven; and 
 has reduced me to such a condition. 
 
 And there are beds, which would 
 appear to you better than those of 
 the Doge of Venice. 
 
 Tell me, my master ! tell me, 
 my sire I 
 
REMARKS ON VERBS. 
 
 343 
 
 Grida forte, FATTI BEN SEN- 
 TIRE. (Bocc. g. 8. n. 6.) 
 
 Cry out loud, make thyself to be 
 beard well. 
 
 SALLO IDDIO. (Bocc. g. 2. n. 5.) God knows it. 
 
 VOMMENE A GUISA D* ORBO SCTl- 
 
 za luce. (Petr.) 
 
 DIROTTI PERCH' ' VENNI, e 
 quel ch' w 'ntesi. (Dant. Inf. 2.) 
 
 MOSTROCCI UN* OMBRA dalV UH 
 
 canto sola. (Dant. Inf. 12.) 
 
 E per Uttera MANPOGLI DICEN- 
 DO, cne da Brandizio si dovesse 
 levdre. (Gio. Vill.) 
 
 TRANNE LO SCRICCA, Che sep- 
 pe far le moderate spese. (Dant. 
 Inf. 29.) 
 
 O'do to la voce Di David ? 
 . . . TRAMMI DI MORTAL LETAR- 
 GO. (Alf. Saul. 3. 4.) 
 
 E *I SUO PARLARE, e 'I bel VI' 
 
 so> e le chidme Mi pidcquer si 
 (Petr. c. 7.) 
 
 Non hdnno parole ne FAVELLA- 
 RI PROPRJ. (Varch. Ercol. 329.) 
 
 Li sozzi PARLARI corrompono 
 li buoni costumi. (Albert, c. 10.) 
 
 Le ttnere. Idgrime, GLI ABBRAC- 
 CIARI, e gli onesti bdci. (Bocc. 
 g. 2. n. 5!) 
 
 O elttti di Dio / gli cui SOFFRI- 
 RI E giustizia e sperdnza fdn 
 men duri t Drizzate noi verso 
 GLI ALTI SALIRI. (Dant. Pur. 19.) 
 
 I go on like a blind man without 
 light. 
 
 I will tell thee why I came, and 
 what I heard. 
 
 He showed us a spirit by itself 
 retired apart. 
 
 And send him word by letter, 
 that he should depart from Brun- 
 dusium. 
 
 Except Scricca, who knew how 
 to lay out his fortune temperate- 
 ly- 
 
 Do I hear the voice of David ? 
 
 It draws me from a mortal 
 
 lethargy. 
 
 And her conversation, and her 
 beautiful countenance, and her hair 
 pleased me so ..... 
 
 They have neither words nor 
 manners of speaking of their own. 
 
 Immodest conversations corrupt 
 good morals. 
 
 The affectionate tears, the em- 
 braces, and the chaste kisses. 
 
 O ye elect of God ! whose suf- 
 ferings both justice and hope rniti- 
 gate, direct our way towards the 
 steep ascents. 
 
344 ANALOGY. 
 
 CHAPTER XII. 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 ITALIAN participles may be considered either as forms 
 of the verbs from which they are derived, or as adjec- 
 tives. 
 
 Considered as adjectives, 'they follow the same rules 
 as adjectives with regard to gender and number. 
 
 Present participles end in e, are of the common gen- 
 der, and form the plural by changing e into i ; as, 
 
 {imperator^ trionfantE, m. s., 
 ** tf iS*$Lf.3%& 
 [ing militia ; 
 
 [uomim tempestdnti, m. p., 
 
 [tost ships. 
 
 Present participles are sometimes used substantively, as, amdnte, 
 1 lover ' ; ascoltdnti, ' listeners ' ; they follow however invariably the 
 same rule. 
 
 Past participles end in o, are masculine, and become 
 feminine by changing o into a ; they form the plural by 
 changing o into t, and a into e ; as, 
 
 fordto, > - ,1 . S mewbro fordto, m. s., pierced limb ; 
 fcrdtA, 5 P ; ( golA. fordti, f. s., pierced throat ; 
 
 acc6si, ) . .1 j . J cwori accsi, m. p., kindled hearts ; 
 access, ) l ' \fidmmE access, f. p., kindled flames. 
 
 Some verbs have a future participle ; as, duraturo, * to last ' ; 
 fatturo, ' about to do ' ; futuro, l future ', or ' to be ' ; perituro, l about 
 to perish ' j venturo, l about to come ' ; which follow the same rul es 
 as past participles. 
 
 Many past participles of verbs of ihe first conjugation 
 are frequently contracted ; as, cerco for cercato, ' search- 
 
 
PARTICIPLES. 345 
 
 ed * ; desto for destato. ' awakened ' ; mozzo for wiozzato, 
 'cut off' ; &c. ; these, when contracted, are alike the 
 first person of the present tense of the indicative mood, 
 and are subject to the same inflections as the other par- 
 ticiples which are not so ; as, 
 
 [o] ctrco, I search ; cerco, searched ; 
 
 [io] ddsto, I awake ; desto, awaken ; 
 
 [o] mozzo, I cut off; mozzo, cut off: 
 
 dtsto, awaken ; worno dtsto, m. s., man awakened ; 
 
 mozzji, cut off; mdno mozzA, f. s., hand cut off; 
 
 c6rch.E, searched ; provmcE cdrc^E, f. p., provinces 
 
 [searched. 
 
 Italian participles agree with substantives in gender 
 and number; as, 
 
 mentE avvtzzAi * mind accustomed ; 
 
 rdggi perduti, rays lost ; 
 
 COSE saputE, things known ; 
 
 COSE dtttE, things said. 
 
 [For a List of Contracted Participles, see APPENDIX I.] 
 
 Italian participles when used as adjectives form their 
 comparatives and superlatives, according to the rules 
 already given ; as, 
 
 lucente, bright; PIUL LUCENTE, more bright; 
 
 nocente, guilty ; ME.VO NOCE.VTE, less guilty ; 
 
 arndto, loved ; MOLTO AMATO, very much loved ; 
 
 riverito, revered ; IL PIU RI VERITO, the most revered j 
 
 intend6nte, versed ; INTENDENTJSSIMO, very well 
 
 [versed. 
 
346 
 
 ANALOGY. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Sicche 'I tuo cuor, quantunque 
 pud, giocondo S' appresenti 
 
 alia TURBA TRIONFANTE, Che 
 
 lieta men per questo etera tondo. 
 (Dant. Par. 22.) 
 
 Una ndveportdnte UOMINI TEM- 
 
 PESTANTI, PERICOLANTI, SOGGIA- 
 
 CENTI a tdnti marosi. (Giov. Vill. 
 1. 11. c. 3.) 
 
 Qudndo leggemmo il disidto 
 riso Esuer bad at o da cotdnto 
 AMANTE. (Dant. Inf. 5.) 
 
 do, die avvcnuto era, distmta- 
 mente narro, con gran maramglia 
 
 degH ASCOLTANTI. (BOCC. g. 10. 
 
 n. 4.) 
 
 . . . E qual FORATO suo MEM- 
 BRO, e qudl TA&LT.o Mostrdsse, 
 d'agguaglidr sarebbe nulla // 
 modo del la nona bolgia sozzo. 
 (Dant. Inf. 23.) 
 
 Un dltro che FORATA av6a la 
 COLA. (Dant. Inf. 28.) 
 
 Superbia, invidia, e avarizia 
 sono Le tre famlle c' hdnno i 
 CUORI ACCESI. (Dant. Inf. 6.) 
 
 E vdde presso a s& le FIAMME 
 ACCESE. (Dant. Inf. 23.) 
 
 E che il principe ne nomindsse 
 dodici, DURATURI cinque dnni. 
 (Dav. Tac. Ann. 2. 40.) 
 
 Eat to avea prima e poi era 
 FATTURO. (Dant. Par. 6.) 
 
 Tempo FUTTJRO m 9 e gid nel 
 cospdtto. (Dant. Pur. 23.) 
 
 Piu ardentemente cercano i se- 
 coldri le cose PERITVRE, che noi 
 le utili. (Cavalc. Espos. Simb. 1.) 
 
 Vigil ate d 1 ogni tempo, sicche 
 sidte degni di fugg'ire V ira VEN- 
 TTJRA, (Cavalc. Frutt. Ling.) 
 
 So that thy heart should present 
 itself as joyful as it can to the tri- 
 umphant militia [church], which 
 joyfully proceeds through this 
 round space. 
 
 A ship carrying men, wrecked, 
 endangered and subject to so many 
 storms. 
 
 When we read of those dear lips 
 so rapturously kissed by one so 
 deep iii love. 
 
 He related distinctly what had 
 happened, to the great wonder of 
 the listeners. 
 
 . . . And if some should have a 
 limb pierced, and some cut off, they 
 could badly equal the vile mode of 
 punishment of the ninth bolge. 
 
 Another who had his throat 
 pierced. 
 
 Pride, envy, and avarice are the 
 three sparks which have kindled 
 their hearts. 
 
 And sees near her the flames 
 kindled. 
 
 And that the prince should ap- 
 point twelve of them, who were to 
 las.t [or remain in office] five years. 
 
 He had done [that sign], and 
 afterward he was to do again. 
 
 Future time is already in my 
 presence. 
 
 Men in the world seek with more 
 eagerness perishable things, than 
 we do useful ones. 
 
 Be always diligent that you 
 may deserve to avoid approaching 
 wrath. 
 
PARTICIPLES. 
 
 347 
 
 , essdndo DESTO, gli pdr- 
 ve seniire scdndere nella cdsa per- 
 sone. (Bocc. g. 3. n. 7.) 
 
 Un y ch* avea V una e V 6Ura 
 MAN MOZZA. (Dant. Inf. 28.) 
 
 Av&ndo CERCHE molte PROVINCE 
 Cristidne. (Bocc. g. 10. n. 9.) 
 
 Lassdi quil, ch* i' piu brdmo ; 
 ed ho si AVVEZZA La MENTE a 
 contempldr sola costei. (Petr. s. 
 93.) 
 
 Avio. la luna PERDUTI i RAGGI 
 Bu6i. (Petr. c. 38.) 
 
 I'o non ho qu,6ste COSE SAPtJTE 
 da* vicini, el la medesinia niele ha 
 DETTE.. (Bocc. g. 3. n. 3.) 
 
 Ond* 6llaf6ssi LUCENTE PIU 
 assdi di quel ch* eW era. (Dant. 
 Par. 5.) 
 
 E'ssa tdnto piu impazi&nte 
 sosteneva quista noia, qudnto 
 MENO si sentiva NOCENTE. (Bocc. 
 g. 7. n. 5.) 
 
 MOLTO AMATO cuore, ogni 
 mio vfficio verso te & fornito. 
 (Bocc. g. 4. n. 1.) 
 
 Tra i qndli il maggiore e IL PIU 
 RIVERITO da tutti, a quelle stagio- 
 ni, 6ra Jdcopo di Carino. (Matt. 
 Vill. 1. 72.) 
 
 Aristofane & persona INTEN- 
 DENTISSIMA Delia sci'ittura. 
 (Cecch. Spir. 5. 5.) 
 
 Because, being awake, he seem- 
 ed to hear people descend into the 
 house. 
 
 One who had the one and the 
 other hand cut off. 
 
 Having searched through many 
 Christian provinces. 
 
 I left what I desire most, and 
 I have my mind so accustomed to 
 contemplate her alone. 
 
 The moon had lost her rays. 
 
 I have not heard these things 
 from the neighbours, she herself 
 has told them to me. 
 
 Whence she became far more 
 bright than she had been. 
 
 She bore this vexation so much 
 the more patiently, the less she felt 
 guilty. 
 
 O very much loved heart, I have 
 done towards thee all that I could. 
 
 Amongst whom the greatest and 
 the most revered by all, at that 
 time, was Jacopo di Carino. 
 
 Aristophanes is a person very 
 well versed in writing. 
 
348 ANALOGY. 
 
 EXERCISE XXII. 
 
 Before (to the) his eyes they slew her crying 
 Presente suo 2 occkio 1 svendre* el(a? griddre 4 
 
 for mercy and assistance. To him, residing 1 in Flan- 
 
 mcrce 5 .aiiito 7 . 6gli, dimordre Fidn- 
 
 ders, cnme a desire I to I hear. Apollo holding- that 
 dra, venire vogtia \ di \ senlire. tenure quello 3 
 
 part of the Heaven, which he nov/ traverses, was embel- 
 pdrte 4 1 Ciclo 2 , 6ra trascurrere, abbel- 
 
 lishing more (the) their works. In a book which I intend 
 lirt 4 piu 1 lavoro 3 . libra intendere 
 
 I to I make, God granting- it, on vulgar eloquence. 
 di I /are, Dio concedere , di volgdre tloquenza. 
 
 It happened that durmg the war the queen of France 
 
 Jlvvenire durdre guerra reina Frdncia 
 
 I fell very sick. 
 I ammalo graveminte. 
 
 After that the lady had made herself to be 
 Poicchb donna avdre 2 fdre* si 1 pre- 
 
 besought very much. They had I all their heads 
 gdre? assdi 3 . Esso essere \ tutto 
 
 surrounded I with I oak leaves leaves of oak. 
 inghirlanddre 5 \ di 1 \ fonda 2 3 qu6rcia 4 . 
 
 (The) my skin is bronzed ( on me ), and (the) 
 mio pelie essere abbrunire sopra di io t 
 
 my bones are dried up I on account of I the heat 
 osso essert 4 diseccdre 5 per 1 \ 2 cdldo 3 . 
 
 Nor were the faults of the Vitellians punished, but 
 JVd esstre fdlta Vitellidno pumre, ma 
 
 well paid I on I the other side. The jealous man 
 ben pagdre \ da \ dltro pdrte. 2 gdoso* Messer 1 
 
 had put some little stones in I his 
 averc 5 mettert 6 alciina 7 pietra* 9 | *' 4 
 
 mouth. There 
 bocca. 
 
 is a tree more above, I whose fruit I was bitten 
 essere 9 Legno 1 piu sit, che \ essere mordent 
 
ADVERBS. 
 
 349 
 
 by Eve. 
 Eva. 
 
 How many versos I have already spread 
 Quanta verso avere gia spar- 
 
 verso 
 
 about. All were beaten with (the) rods in the middle 
 
 gere. Tulto essere Idttere verga mezzo 
 
 of the square, and had (the) their head cut off. They 
 
 piazza, avtre 2 testa 3 taglidre 1 . 
 
 have promised, and sold me to a merchant, who 
 
 avere 2 promettere 3 , 4 vtndcre 5 M' 1 mercdnte, 
 
 is to 
 de' 5 
 
 Let 
 
 the 
 
 3 
 
 carry 
 portdr 3 
 
 ages 
 eta.* 
 
 me 
 mi 4 
 
 to the Sultan in the Levant. 
 1 Solddno 2 Levdnte. 
 
 to come 
 venire? 
 
 judge from this who 
 estimdre 2 Quinci 1 6 
 
 Otho was. The present (age shall hear) and the 
 
 Ottone 8 esserc 1 . 5 presente 7 mondo 6 udire* 9 
 
 future ages shall hear (the) my protestations. 
 
 6ssere l udirv 8 2 protesto 3 . 
 
 CHAPTER XIII. 
 
 ADVERBS. 
 
 SIMPLE ADVERBS IN COMMON USE. 
 
 Adverbs of Time. 
 
 n~r' 
 
 Uggi, 
 
 to-day ; 
 
 dianziJl 
 
 ^ 
 
 iM*, 
 
 yesterday ; 
 
 innanzi,\ 
 
 > before ; 
 
 domani,* 
 
 to-morrow ; 
 
 prima, 
 
 ) 
 
 dm, 
 
 1 
 
 teste, 
 
 just now ; 
 
 adisso, 
 
 > now ; 
 
 jodi, 
 
 
 mo,f 
 
 ) 
 
 ddpo,\\ 
 
 > afterwards ; 
 
 
 p6scia y 
 
 5 
 
 * From the Latin de and mane. f From the Latin modo. 
 
 I From <&, in, and the Latin ante : the Celtic ant, l opposite.' 
 $ From the Latin pone : the Celtic bwo or 6on, changed into yon, ' the last.* 
 j| From the Celtic do, after,' and pan, the last.' 
 
 30 
 
350 
 
 sempre,* 
 
 mat, 
 
 spesso, 
 
 sovtvtej 
 
 talvdlla, 
 
 tcddra, 
 
 tuitora, 
 ognpra, 
 allora, 
 subito, 
 
 ANALOGY. 
 
 always ; 
 
 tosto, 
 
 never ; 
 
 presto, 
 
 often : 
 
 adagio, 
 
 passo, 
 
 sometimes ; 
 
 pertempo, 
 tdrdi, 
 
 c-till 
 
 
 intdnto, 
 
 always ; 
 
 frattdnto, 
 
 then; 
 
 mentre, 
 
 immediately ; 
 
 
 soon ; 
 quick ; 
 
 > slow ; 
 
 early ; 
 
 late ; 
 
 already ; 
 ? in the mean 
 \ time; 
 
 whilst. 
 
 Adverbs of Place. 
 
 aufc' here, hither ; 
 
 altrove, 
 altronde, 
 
 > elsewhere ; 
 
 A there, thither ; 
 
 ovunque, 
 dovunque, 
 
 > wherever ; 
 
 co| there, thither; 
 
 su, 
 giu, 
 
 up; 
 down ; 
 
 cofd there near you; 
 
 sopra,** 
 
 upon, above ; 
 under, below ; 
 
 l quivi, 1 lhere ; 
 
 dentro. 
 
 > within ; 
 
 indi, thence ; 
 quindi, from thence ; 
 
 fuora$ 
 
 > without ; 
 
 quinci,^ from hence ; 
 
 av&nti,\\\\ 
 
 before ; 
 
 costinci, \ fr m thence ' 
 } where you are ; 
 
 dietro^ 
 accanto, 
 
 behind; 
 aside ; 
 
 dtoe, S where; 
 
 attorno,*** 
 rim petto, 
 
 around ; 
 opposite ; 
 
 dnrfe, J i 
 
 vicino, 
 
 near; 
 
 donde, J W 
 
 lungi, 
 
 far; 
 
 
 oltre, 
 
 beyond. 
 
 * From the Latin semper : the Celtic chemp or semp, ' without,' and ar or er, 'end.' 
 
 I From the Latin svbinde. | From the Latin hanc koram. 
 
 $ From the Latin illic, iliac. \\ From the Latin quo and istic,istac. 
 
 IT From the Latin qui and hinc. 
 
 ** The Latin super : the Celtic 5wp, < upon.' 
 
 ft The Latin sub, subtus : the Celtic sub, * under.' 
 
 Jt From the Celtic particles en and tre. 
 
 $$ The Latin/oris,/0r<w: the Celtic for, 'out.' 
 
 || || From the Celtic ab, * far,' and ant, ' opposite.' 
 
 HIT From the Celtic dre, back.' *** From the Celtic tor, circle.' 
 
ADVERBS. 
 Adverbs of Order. 
 
 351 
 
 Pr * a > first; 
 prima, 
 
 Pj?' then; 
 dopo, 
 
 Adverbs of Qwan 
 
 Piu, more ; 
 mino, > , . 
 mdnco, $ 
 woo, , . 
 assai, * much > 
 
 itirfi, ^ 
 quindi, > afterwards ; 
 appresso,* ) 
 infine, finally. 
 
 ^i^y and Quality. 
 
 troppoj too much ; 
 or?/ari,| not much ; 
 /an^o, so much ; 
 jt?oro, little ; 
 qffdtto, any at all. 
 
 JSene, well; " ] 
 
 Adverbs of Affirmation 
 
 Si, I yes, 
 g-i&, $ indeed ; 
 certo, certainly ; 
 6ene, well ; 
 
 male, badly. 
 
 , Negation, and Doubt. 
 
 davvero, ? indeed, truly, 
 difdtti, J in truth ; 
 appunto, exactly so. 
 
 JVb, no, 
 non, not ; 
 
 J&*S, never ' 
 
 mica, *l 
 punto, > not at all. 
 affdtto, ) 
 
 Forse, perhaps ; 
 circa, about ; 
 
 Adverbs of Comparist 
 
 cok ^o,thus; 
 come, as ; 
 siccome, so, as ; 
 /nw, more ; 
 
 presso, about ; 
 quasi, almost. 
 
 m and Interrogation. 
 
 mcno, less ; 
 tdnto, so much, as ; 
 quanta^ as ; 
 a-guisa, 1 ljk 
 a-mdrfo, S 11J 
 
 * From the Celtic prem, * near.' 
 
 f From the Celtic tropa, ' troop,' c multitude.' 
 
 J From the Latin gerra t the Celtic gcr, 
 
352 ANALOGY. 
 
 Ove ? > where, 
 
 dove ? $ whither ? 
 donde? whence? 
 
 qudndo ? when ? 
 
 !, \*> 
 
 perche? why? 
 
 quanta ? how much ? 
 
 Adverbs of Choice and Demonstration. 
 
 Anzi, 
 prlma, 
 
 / 
 jEcco, 
 eccoqui, 
 
 eccoquu, 
 
 ( rather; 
 
 piuttosto, 
 piupresto, 
 
 > sooner. 
 
 > there is, 
 \ there are ; 
 when lo. 
 
 behold ; 
 ) here is, 
 J here are ; 
 
 tccoli, 
 eccold, 
 quand 1 icco, 
 
 The adverbs oggi, l to-day ' ; ieri, ' yesterday ' ; and 
 domani, ' to-morrow ' ; are often used as substantives ; 
 as, 
 
 questo di rf' OGGI, this day ; 
 
 il giorno di IERI, yesterday ; 
 
 DOMANI e VmerdU, to-morrow is Friday. 
 
 Mai, never,' is sometimes used in the signification of 
 ' ever ' ; as, 
 
 qudi bdrbarefur MAI ? what savage women were 
 
 there ever ? 
 cost Mllo comefu MAI, as beautiful as ever was. 
 
 Qui, qua, ' here'; and quinci, ' from hence '; indicate 
 a place near the person speaking : costi, costd, ' there 
 near you ' ; and costinci, i from thence where you are '; 
 indicate a place near the person spoken to: and li, la; 
 coli, cola; ivi, quivi, ' tliere ' ; indi, 'thence', and 
 quindi, ' from thence ' ; indicate a place at a distance 
 from both the person speaking and the person spoken 
 to ; as, 
 
 cost qui mi disst^ so he said to me here ; 
 
ADVERBS. 
 
 353 
 
 QDINCI nonpdssa mdi dnima 
 
 buona,. 
 tdnte belle giovani che COST! 
 
 s6no, 
 
 ditel COSTING i, 
 ne LI gudri lontdno, 
 vuolsi cosl COL! dove si puote 
 
 cid che si vuole, 
 QUIVI 51 pidngon li spietdti 
 
 ddnni, 
 comandolle che INDI non u- 
 
 scisse, 
 
 Si, ' yes ' ; and no, ' no ' 
 used as substantives ; as, 
 
 il mio NO, 
 
 il suo si, 
 
 si e NO nel cdpo mi tenzona 9 
 
 no good spirit ever passes 
 hence ; 
 
 so many beautiful girls as 
 there are there near you ; 
 tell it from where you are ; 
 not far from thence ; 
 
 so it is willed there, where 
 will is power ; 
 
 here they wail their merci- 
 less wrongs ; 
 
 he ordered her not to go out 
 from thence. 
 
 or ' not ' ; are sometimes 
 
 my negative ; 
 his affirmative ; 
 
 yes and no struggle in my 
 head. 
 
 Si is used sometimes instead of the conjunction e, 
 ' and,' and may be rendered in English by the word 
 both ; as, 
 
 si per la sua forma, e si per la both for his personal heauty and 
 nobiltti, del pddre, for the nobility of his father. 
 
 JVb sometimes takes the place of a whole sentence ; 
 as, 
 
 o voUssero, o NO [o non voles- whether they wished, or not 
 
 sero], [or they did not wish] ; 
 
 quillo che io avrd fdtto, e quel what I shall have done, and 
 
 che NO [e quel che non avr6 what not [and what I shall 
 
 fatto], not have done], 
 
 JVb is used only in answering a question, or when 
 used absolutely : non, in all other instances, and par- 
 ticularly when the negative is followed by a verb or 
 another adverb ; as, 
 
 signor, NO, no, sir ; 
 
 30* 
 
 
354 ANALOGY. 
 
 NONfarnetico, NO, I do not rave, no ; 
 
 NO, per quello NON rimwrcl il no, the bargain will not be 
 mercdto, broken oft' on this account. 
 
 O've, ' where,' in poetry, is often changed into u' ; 
 as, 
 
 u' sono i vtrsi? where are the verses? 
 
 u j son giunte le rime ? where are the rhymes gone ? 
 
 The adverbs lene, gia, mat, mica, punto, non, ecco, 
 are often used as mere expletives ; as, 
 
 si BENE, yes indeed ; 
 
 Gil Dio non voglia, may God forbid ; 
 
 sigidce MAI sempre inghidccio, lies always frozen ; 
 
 non MICA dipoco ajfdre, not at all of little conse- 
 
 quence ; 
 
 non e PUNTO morto, he is not at all dead ; 
 
 append ancora NON ha, he has hardly yet; 
 
 ECCO, non so dir di no, . I cannot say no. 
 
 E X AMP L E S . 
 
 QUESTO DI D' OGGI e stdto ddto This day has been given to kings, 
 
 a re, e a solddni, e a slfdtta gen- and to sultans, and to similar peo- 
 
 te. (Bocc. g. 10. n. 10.) pie. 
 
 Quanta mi fu IL GIORNO DI What was ordered to me yester- 
 
 IERI imposto alia sua partenza. day at your departure. 
 (Red. Lett.) 
 
 DOMANI E VENERDI, e il se- To-morrow is Friday, and the 
 
 guente di Sdbato. (Bocc. g. 2. n. following day Saturday. 
 I-) 
 
 QUAI BARBARE FUR MAT, qudi _ What savage women, what Sara- 
 
 Saracine ? (Dant. Purg. 23.) cens were there ever ? 
 
 Cosi e oggi BELLO il cielo The sky is as beautiful to-day as 
 
 COME FD MAI. (Bocc. g. 6. n. 10.) it ever was. 
 
 Qui fui con Pamfilo. e cosi Here was I with Pamphilus, 
 
 etui MI DISSE, e cosi quifacemmo. and so he said to me here, and so 
 
 (Bocc. Fiamm. 4.) we did here. 
 
ADVERBS. 
 
 355 
 
 QUINCI NON PASSA MAI ANIMA 
 
 BUONA. (Dant. inf. 3.) 
 
 Veggendo TANTE BELLE GIO- 
 
 VANI CHE COSTA SONO. (BOCC. 
 
 J-iloc. 2.) 
 
 DITEL COSTINCI, *e won, Z' drco 
 tiro. (Dant. Inf. 12) 
 
 NE Li GUAKI LONTANO /HOT di 
 
 via Un suo bcl veto lascidva 
 fuggendo. (Bocc. Vis. Am. 20.) 
 
 VUOLSI COSl COLA DOVE SI 
 PTJOTE ClO CHE SI VUOLK,epiu 
 
 non dimandare. (Dant. Inf. o.) 
 
 QUIVI SI PIANGON LI SPIKTATI 
 
 DANNI : Quivi e dlensdndro, e 
 Diomsio feto Che f& Sicilia 
 av6r dolorosi anni. (Dant. Juf. 
 12.) 
 
 COMAND6LLE CHE INDI NON 
 
 USCISSE infino a tantu, che cgli 
 che r avea rinckiuxa, non V a- 
 prisse. (Passav. 78.) 
 
 Tanto vale IL MIO NO quanta 
 IL suo si. (Cecch. Esalt. cr. 2. 
 3.) 
 
 Che Sl E NO NEL CAPO MI TEN- 
 
 ZONA.* (Dant. Inf. S.) 
 
 Era Cimone, si PER LA SXJA 
 
 FORMA, e S1 PKR LA NOBILTA e 
 
 ricchdzza del padre, quasi nbto a 
 ciascuno. (Bocc. g. 5. n. 1.) 
 
 fo vi diro QCELLO CHE 10 AVRO 
 
 FATTO, E QUEL CHE NO. (BOCC. 
 
 g. 2.n. 1.) 
 
 llfamiglidre rispose : ' SIGNOR, 
 NO.' (Bocc. g. 1. n. 7.) 
 
 Disse allora Pirro : * NON FAR- 
 NETICO, KO; Signora.' (Bocc.) 
 
 No, PER QUELLO NON RIMAR- 
 RA IL, MERCATO, (BoCC. g. 7. n. 
 
 2.) 
 
 Hence no good spirit ever pass- 
 es. 
 
 Seeing so many beautiful girls 
 as are there near you. 
 
 Tell it from where you are, or 
 else 1 draw my bow. 
 
 Not far from thence flying out of 
 the way, she left a beautiful veil. 
 
 So it is willed, there where will 
 is power, and ask no more. 
 
 Here they wail their merciless 
 wrongs : here dwells Alexander 
 and the fierce Dionysius, who 
 wrought for Sicily many years of 
 woe. v 
 
 He ordered her not to go out 
 from thence until he, who had 
 shut her up there, should come to 
 open for her. 
 
 My negative is as good as his 
 affirmative. 
 
 For yes and no struggle in my 
 head. 
 
 Cimon was, both for his person- 
 al beauty, and for the nobility and 
 wealth of his father, known to al- 
 most every one, 
 
 I will tell you what I shall have 
 done, and what not. 
 
 The domestic replied : * No, sir.' 
 
 Then Pyrrhus said : ' I do not 
 rave, Madam, no.' 
 
 No, the bargain will not be brok- 
 en off on this account. 
 
 1 At war 'twixt will and will not.' SHAKSPEARE, Measure for Measure. 
 
356 
 
 ANALOGY. 
 
 U' SONO I VERSI, U* SON GIUN- 
 TB LE RIME ? (Petr. C. 46.) 
 
 Disse Cnlandrino : l Si BENE.' 
 (Bocc. g. 9. n. 5.) 
 
 // negromdnte disse : l GIA DIO 
 
 NON VOGLIA.' (BOCC. g. 10. D. 5.) 
 
 "U'na part* del mondo &, che si 
 
 GIACE MA.I SEMPRE IN GH1AC- 
 
 Cio. (Petr. c. 5.) 
 
 U'na ne dird, JVON MICA d' uo- 
 
 mO Di POCO AFFARE. (BOCC. g. 
 
 10. n. 6.) 
 
 Teddldo NOIST E PTJJJTO MORTO. 
 (Bocc. g. 3. n. 7.) 
 
 Questo nostrofanciullo, il qudle 
 
 APPENA ANCORA KON HA qUdttOr- 
 
 did dnni. (Bocc. g. 4. n. 8 ) 
 
 6cco, io NON so ora DIR DI NO. 
 (Bocc. g. 8. n. 7.) 
 
 Where are the verses, where 
 are the rhymes gone ? 
 
 Calandrino replied : Yes in- 
 deed.' 
 
 The necromancer replied : 'May 
 God forbid.' 
 
 There is a part of the world 
 which lies always frozen. 
 
 I will tell you one, not at all of 
 a man of little consequence. 
 
 Tedaldo is not at all dead. 
 
 This hoy of ours, who is hardly 
 fourteen years old yet. 
 
 I cannot now say no. 
 
 COMPOUND ADVERBS. 
 
 Compound adverbs are formed of an adjective, and 
 the substantive mente,* ' manner.' Mente being of the 
 feminine gender requires that the adjective be of the 
 same gender ; as, 
 
 sdviA, wise; 
 onds^A, honest; 
 corttsE, courteous; 
 
 SAVIA-MENTE, in a wise manner, or wise- 
 
 ["y; 
 
 ONESTA-MENTE, in an honest manner, or 
 [honestly; 
 
 CORTESE-MENTE, in a courteous manner, 
 [or courteously ; 
 
 prudentz, prudent; PRUDENTE-MENTE, in a prudent manner, 
 
 [or prudently ; 
 
 * From the Celtic menf., * minner.' It is from this language that tho Latins 
 borrowed their mens, and formed such expressions as forti mente, clard mente, devo- 
 id mente, &c., which afterwards passed to the Italians, as sana mente in Boccac- 
 cio (g. 9. n. 9.) ; affettudsa mente in Ariosto (Orl. Fur ); eterna mente in Monti (Bassv.) 
 may prove; ah hough they are now generally written in one word ; as,/0rewzen, 
 * strongly '; chiaramentc, ' clearly ' ; devotame'nte, ' devoutly ' ; sanamentc, ' wisely ' j 
 ttfettuosamente, l affectionately ' ; eternamente, ' eternally ' ; &c. 
 
ADVERBS. 
 
 357 
 
 If the adjective ends in le,* or re, for the sake of 
 euphony the final e is dropped in the formation of the 
 adverb ; as, 
 
 festevolE, merry; FESTEVOL-MENTE, merrily ; 
 
 particoldrE, particular ; PARTICOLAR-MEJNTE, particularly. 
 
 Sometimes the adverb is an adjective only, without 
 the addition of the word metite ; as, 
 
 CHIARO [for chiaramdnte], clearly ; 
 DOLCE [for dolcemcnle,] sweetly. 
 
 The following are the 
 
 Adjectives commonly used as Adverls.\ 
 
 Forte, 
 
 very strong ; 
 
 tan to, 
 
 so much ; 
 
 sodo, 
 
 fast, hard ; 
 
 rdro, 
 
 rarely ; 
 
 alto, 
 
 softly ; 
 
 solo, 
 
 only; 
 
 basso, 
 
 low ; 
 
 tutto, 
 
 all; 
 
 certo, 
 
 certainly ; 
 
 poco, 
 
 little ; 
 
 triste, 
 
 sadly ; 
 
 motto, 
 
 much ; 
 
 lieto, 
 
 merrily ; 
 
 troppo, 
 
 too much ; 
 
 dolce, 
 
 sweetly ; 
 
 b'ello, 
 
 handsomely ; 
 
 ckidro, 
 
 clearly; 
 
 buono, 
 
 very well ; 
 
 scuro, 
 
 darkly ; 
 
 aperlo, 
 
 openly ; 
 
 schietto, 
 
 candidly ; 
 
 sicuro, 
 
 surely ; 
 
 piano, 
 
 low, softly ; 
 
 dimesso, 
 
 lowly ; 
 
 lento, 
 
 slowly ; 
 
 sommesso, 
 
 humbly ; 
 
 pronto, 
 
 readily ; , 
 
 vicino, 
 
 rear ; 
 
 ratio, 
 
 speedily; 
 
 lontdno, 
 
 far. 
 
 * This ruin with regard to adjectives ending in le is not without exceptions, as 
 may be seen in the following passages: 
 
 SimiL-Ementc it mal seme rf' Adamo. In like manner Adam's evil brood. 
 (Dant. Inf. 3.) 
 
 I'o la rive<r<rio stdrsi umiL.K.mente. I see her remaining humbly. 
 (Petr. a. 211.) 
 
 UmiLEmcnte vipriego. (Bocc.) I humbly entreat you. 
 
 C6sa rdde, iiolte usdta per lo carmine, ma A thin? seldom used by the community, 
 1tlii.Emenlefdr.ia. (AJutt. Vill. 9. 28.) but usefully done. 
 
 fin order to know when these words am arfjectioes, and wh'-n adverbs, it is suf- 
 ficient to observe whether, in the discourse, they are added to, or used for, a sub- 
 
358 ANALOGY. 
 
 Adverbs formed of an adjective, and the adverbs 
 
 presto, sovente, pertempo, adagio, vohntieri, affatto, 
 may be used in a comparative and superlative degree, 
 which is formed thus : 
 
 tronqidllnmente, tranquilly; 
 
 pill tranquiUamente, more tranquilly; 
 
 tranquill-issiMA-mente, very tranquilly : 
 
 felicemente, happily ; 
 
 ME\o/e/iceme7?fe, less happily ; 
 
 ftlic-issiMA-mvnte, very happily: 
 
 schittto, candidly ; 
 
 PIU or MENO schitlto, more or less candidly; 
 
 schutt-issiMA-mente, very candidly: 
 
 lieto, merrily ; 
 
 PI\\ or MEN lieto, more or less merrily ; 
 
 e/ite, very merrily : 
 
 volenlieri, willingly ; 
 
 PIU or ME\O volenlieri, more or less willingly; 
 
 very willingly. 
 
 The adverbs kene, 'well'; and male, 'badly 5 5 in 
 their comparative and superlative, make, 
 
 M^GLIO, better; 
 
 OTTI M Amente or 6enissiMO, very well : 
 
 PEGGIO, worse ; 
 
 PES SIM Amente or mcrZissiMO, very badly. 
 
 Jlssai, in the superlative makes assaissuvio, c very 
 much.' 
 
 Btantive, or not ; for, if so, they are adjectives j otherwise they are adverbs. Thus, 
 in these examples, 
 
 S' i' werildi di voi assdi o POCO. If I deserved of you either much or 
 (Dant. Inf. 26.) little. 
 
 Segno manifesto di POCO senno. (Bocc. A manifest sign of little wisdom, 
 g. 1. n. l.J 
 
 E per POCO, se tu mi dicessi, che w Howover little you should ask me to 
 anddssi di qui a Peretola, w credo cA' w go to Perctola, I believe that I should 
 vi andrci. (Bocc. g. 8. n. 9.) go there. 
 
 the word p6cn is an adverb in the first instance, where it modifies the verb meritdi ; 
 but it is an a>/jr.ctive in the other two, where, in the first, it is added to the sub- 
 stantive .-</, and, in the second, stands for a substantive ; being equivalent loptica 
 cosa, liitle thing.' 
 

 ADVERBS. 
 
 359 
 
 Bine, poco, adagio, piano, tanto, as we have already 
 observed at p. 86, have also a diminutive, 
 
 benixo, 
 pockixo, 
 
 J50COL1NO, 
 
 pretty well ; 
 >> very little ; 
 
 adagixo, 
 
 very slow ; 
 
 i 
 
 very little. 
 
 Bene, has also an augmentative : 6enoNE, * very 
 well.' 
 
 ADVERBIAL PHRASES IN COMMON USE. 
 
 Di subito, suddenly ; 
 di lotto, presently ; 
 in un bnltno, in an instant ; 
 in un batter d* occkio, in the 
 [twinkling of an eye ; 
 poco fa, a little while ago; 
 fra poco, in a short time ; 
 un pezzofa, some time ago ; 
 delle volte, at times ; 
 air improvviso, unexpectedly ; 
 alia ventura, at random ; 
 al^ avvenire, in future ; 
 a minuto, in detail ; 
 avicenda, by turns; - 
 a gdra, emulously ; 
 a cdso, by chance ; 
 a torto, wrongly ; 
 per accidtnie, } 
 per sorte, > by chance ; 
 
 per avventura, ) 
 pur troppo* too truly, too well ; 
 di fresco, newly ; 
 di buon grddo, willingly ; 
 suo malgrddo, a gainst one's will; 
 senza meno, positively ; 
 qudnto prima, very soon ; 
 asuaposta, /at one's 
 a suo senno, $ pleasure ; 
 da senno, seriously ; 
 
 a bello studio, 
 abMap6sta, 
 a meno che, unless ; 
 non cha,\ except; 
 
 dapertutto ) everywhere; 
 
 per ogm dove, \ 
 
 ad un trdtto, at once ; 
 
 infditi, . f t . 
 
 j-fit f *^ IdCL , 
 
 difatto, \ 
 
 di gran lungn, by far ; 
 
 a tungo anddre, in the long 
 
 [run, in time ; 
 a piu potere, with all one's 
 
 [might; 
 
 di mala voglia, unwillingly ; 
 a un di presso, almost ; 
 </' allora in qua,since that time ; 
 d' 6ra inndnzi, henceforth ; 
 in quel mentre, in or at that time ; 
 dipunto in punto, exactly; 
 di punto in bianco, point blank; 
 di qudndo in qudndo, } now 
 di trdtto in trdtto, > and 
 di tdnto in tdnto, ) then ; 
 it piu per lo piu, on the whole, 
 
 [at the utmost. 
 
 * An elliptical expression for the phrases e PUR TROPPO vero, * it is too true 1 ; & PUR 
 TROPPO 6c/i<>, 'it is too well.' 
 
 f An elliptical expression for the phrase SE NON f6sse, or fosse stato, CHE, ( were it 
 not,' or ' had it not been.' 
 
3GO 
 
 ANALOGY. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 SAVIAMENTE si spuosono loro 
 ambasciata. (Gio. Vill. I. 8. c. 1 ) 
 
 Mdngiano co' forestieri FESJE- 
 VOLMEME. (Dav. Germ.) 
 
 V dltre dojme, vdila Pampinea, 
 amen gid i- 1 u PA RTI c o i. A K M E.\ T K 
 tra s& cotninciuto a trattdr del 
 modo. (Bocc. liitrod.) 
 
 Jlssdi la V)C.e lor CHIARO V ab- 
 bdia. (Dant. Int. 7.) 
 
 Come DOLCE pdrla t e DOLCE 
 ride. (Petr. s. 12(>.) 
 
 Qudii do pure nianca dcUe cose 
 nel luogo, dive noi siri/no, ce 
 n y andidmo in vn dltro FEL.ICIS 
 
 SIMAMErVTE. (G.'ll. ClrC. 1.31.) 
 
 un visse giammdi piu di 
 (Fetr. s. 7.) 
 
 Questa grossezza iwn impeili- 
 sec il riceviniento del mttdllo, 
 anzi V acccVa PIU V<LENTIEKI 
 deW dltra terra. (Ben. Cell. 
 Oref.) 
 
 To m' asterrti VOLENTIERISSI- 
 MAMENTP: da cosi fatta prepaia- 
 zione. (Red. Cons.) 
 
 U qudle %ia OTTIMAMENTE la, 
 lingua sapta. (LJocc. g. 2. n. 9.) 
 
 Tu ti p'nti MALISSIMO con co- 
 lui al qudle in desideri che gli 
 Dei nocciuno. (Varch. Sen. Ben. 
 6.) 
 
 Oh, mi rallegro ASSAISSFMO 
 Vedervi vivo e prosperoso. (Ainbr. 
 Cof. 5. 6.) 
 
 Egli stan pur BENIN con quelle 
 bdrse Di rdsu al collo. (Buon. 
 Fier. lutiod.) 
 
 Thus wisely they delivered their 
 mess-age. 
 
 They eat merrily with strangers. 
 
 The other ladies, having heard 
 Pampinca, had already begun more 
 particularly to devise the means. 
 
 Their words reveal their fault too 
 clearly. 
 
 How sweetly she speaks, and 
 how sweetly she smiles. 
 
 Whenever things are wanting 
 in the place where we are, we 
 go to another very happily. 
 
 None ever lived more happy 
 than I. 
 
 This richness [of this earth] 
 does nqt prevent the metal being 
 received in it; on the contrary it 
 receives it better than the other 
 earth. 
 
 I would abstain very willingly 
 from such preparation. 
 
 Who knew already the language 
 very well. 
 
 Thou conductest thyself very 
 badly with him whom thou wishest 
 that the gods should injure. 
 
 Oh, I rejoice pretty much to see 
 you alive and prosperous. 
 
 They look pretty well with those 
 bags of satin hung to their necks. 
 
ADVERBS. 
 
 361 
 
 Pidcciavi di prestdre un POCO- May you be pleased to lend to 
 
 LINO A qutsta pinna lo stan- this pen for a very little while 
 
 cdto dito. (Dant. Rim.) your wearied finger. 
 
 Conviene un TANTINETTO lo- You ought to praise me a little. 
 ddrmi. (Salvin. Pros. Tosc. 1.) 
 
 Assicurdtevi, che io vi porto un Be assured, that I love you 
 
 BENONE grandone. (Car. lett. 1.) hugely. 
 
 EXERCISE XXIII. 
 
 Where 
 
 wast 
 fosti 
 
 thou yesterday a little before (to the) 
 
 gior- 
 
 day? Where dost thou run ? What fury urges thee 
 no ? 2 correre 1 ? furia sospingere* l 
 
 on ? Where dost thou go ? Wait for me. Ah ! 
 2 anddre 1 ? Aspettdre^ . Deh ! 
 
 how can this be ? 
 
 d6e poier qu6sto 2 esser 1 1 
 
 to-day. There 1 must be 
 4 . convidne 2 esser 3 
 
 I have seen him here 
 veddre 3 1 6 
 
 there some places 1 covered I 
 
 with small bushes and grass, 
 virgulto erba, 
 
 1 - luogo nascoso 
 
 where the hares now 
 lepre 
 
 and then I can 
 
 I possano 3 
 
 conceal themselves. 
 nascondere 1 2 . 
 
 this the earth, which I touched before. 
 terreno, toccdre 
 
 not answering him, 
 1 rispondere 2 ^, 3 , 
 
 he began to call 
 comincidre chiamdre 
 
 It is not 
 essere* l 
 
 The boy 
 more loud. 
 
 You ^are now already old and 
 essere vecchio 
 
 can 
 potete 
 
 ill endure 
 durdr 
 
 fatigue. Without I thinking at-all, as if he had J 
 fatica. S6nza \ pensdre* *, quasi 3 av6sse 6 \ 
 
 thought a long time (much time), he I said. 
 pensdre 6 4 tempo 5 , | disse. 
 
 31 
 
 It 
 
M<i' ANALOt.'Y. 
 
 i ..... :'. II I.. ri.U.Ml.T All ' \-M, 
 
 u 
 
 for ti"' love of God I lot it bo done I quick, 1 
 
 IIKI- ,1111,11 | f,,,Y,,,.M | 
 
 received, a littlo while ago, Jetton from Meatlna, 
 
 who erica bovo. How (much) 
 
 I., . 
 
 i nro wo from (tKe) our quartor* P I Boo 
 
 ..,,/,,,/ 
 
 knooka below, Ho hoped I to I bo able to havo 
 
 \.-. -..-. I ,/j I /.,..-,. 
 
 ntv oi Luooa oaaily. Ho I goon I running hort 
 
 Wwft', I i-,i I 
 
 thorn aa if ho were oraay. The good woman 
 
 /MMM 
 
 if dllfff flflfO, /MMM,' ,'. /JH/<J>|,| 
 
 returned I urtor | fjtAfj I..T .-heiti and oarried it baok 
 
 i * 
 
 Uieru iroin-whenoe the had taken u. r< n mo, whence 
 ' - iNHlr Itv4rt . XH 1 ^ 
 
 and of what condition art thou? 
 
 And he I replied 1 : u I am I from I Syria, and I am 
 ..,< | <atiftj .1, \ 
 
 a kipg. 11 He aeti oareleialy. And I having been 
 fiF ^fNr4ff liHitvr<il 
 
 put I in pridon, he I ws I mu>i)y treated by them. 
 mtfa* I jir^dnt , | /W | r i4iM(r trfttfcto 4 * 
 
 Obnerve it more particularly. .A M.I living departed 
 
 fKim*r(/ % j from tlienoe, he I went I flAtntf) t, \ 
 
 'f< |t*J*1 I Mr' 
 
 lu> I h\c.\ I most 
 
PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 CHAl'TKIl XJV. 
 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 PREPOSITIONH IN COMMON USE. 
 
 Di* 
 
 of j 
 
 accdnto, \ 
 
 ii:-:iil', nhoill, 
 
 *t 
 
 to, in, :f ; 
 
 alUito, ; 
 
 i near, by ; 
 
 </,! 
 tn, 
 
 from, by, on, at ; 
 in, on, upon ; 
 
 tillnrno, i 
 
 about, arouml ; 
 
 con, 
 
 with ; 
 
 tti/<t<'>H80j 
 
 on, upon, about ; 
 
 per, 
 
 throiin-li, by, on nr- 
 [countor,inorder 
 
 prfaao, J 
 (tpprtssO) 
 
 ;near, almost ; 
 
 
 [to, for ; 
 
 vicliiQ) 
 
 
 9U, 
 
 s6pra, 
 
 j on, upon 5 
 
 lungi, I 
 lontdno, ( 
 
 ' far, from j 
 
 s6tto 
 
 under ; 
 
 dppo,\\ 
 
 at, with, in com- 
 
 ' 
 
 > amongst, within ; 
 
 vtrsofft 
 
 parison with ; 
 towards ; 
 
 i 
 
 > in, in about ; 
 
 6ltra t \ 
 
 | beyond, beside*; 
 
 prima, 
 
 before ; 
 
 lun%o, 
 
 along ; 
 
 ddpo, 
 
 after ; 
 
 flno, 
 
 ) 
 
 dnzi, 
 
 \ 
 
 slno, 
 
 ' till, until f 
 
 inn&nzi, 
 din&mi, 
 
 davdnti, 
 
 f before, in the 
 
 ) prcsen<:e f ' Mj 
 
 inflno, | 
 inalno, 
 c6ntra,** 
 c6nlro, 
 
 ^Mftr as ; 
 
 against ; 
 
 dtttro, 
 didtttro, 
 
 > behind ; 
 
 ( nnfS 
 
 > opposite ; 
 
 t$h 
 
 > in, within ; 
 
 Ssff 9 ! 
 
 1 
 without ; 
 
 fu6ra, 
 fu6ri y 
 
 ) out of, without, 
 
 Hldm, 
 eccttto. 
 
 > except, excepted ; 
 
 infu6ri, 
 
 except, excepted'; tranne, 
 
 
 * From the CItlo rf, a \gn ofqualiflcation. J From the Ccllic 4a t < tt.' 
 
 t From the Celtic a, < near/ 'joining with.' $ From the Celtic n, ' in.' 
 
 (I From the Latin /m// / Celtic ap, 'joint,' 'attached.' 
 IT From the Latin vertui i Celtic gwero, *to turn.' 
 ** From the Celtic con, a lign ofoppoHition ; an4 trac/t, ' iide.' 
 tf From the Latln/rn / -Celtic /row, ' before.' 
 
 U (And dnxa and an, uiod by old writer*,) from the Latin tint i Celtic y, 
 1 want.' ' privation.' 
 
364 ANALOGY. 
 
 circa, } 
 
 tncirca, > about, almost ; 
 
 intorno, } 
 
 secondo, 
 
 S^ sl . a * according 
 
 giusto, t 
 
 conforme, 
 
 The nature of most of the foregoing prepositions is 
 such as to admit of no other significations than those 
 which have been given ahove ; there are however some 
 which are made, in Italian, to express so many different 
 relations, that it has been thought indispensable to add 
 the following remarks : 
 
 The preposition di may express a relation of posses- 
 sion, of extraction, or of qualification ; as, 
 
 il dendro DI Lt5i, his own money; 
 
 figlio DEL FIGLIUOLO, son of the son ; 
 
 la stdtua DI MARMO, the statue of marble ; 
 
 uomini di GROSSO INGEGNO, men of dull understanding. 
 
 Jl may express a relation of attribution, of end or 
 tendency of action, or of proximity to a place, person, 
 or thing ; as, 
 
 AL TEMPO deW IMPERADORE in the time of the emperor 
 FEDER!GO PRI'MO, Frederic the First ; 
 
 * From the Latin justa : Celtic ajusta y l to adjust.* 
 
 t Some of the foregoing prepositions are the same as the adverbs ; as, so- 
 pra, 60o, pr'trna, appresso, dopo, dentro, difuori, &c., which, when they are 
 followed or preceded by a noun, a pronoun, or a verb which they govern, are 
 always prepositions, but otherwise are adverbs. Thus in the following ex- 
 amples, 
 
 Or via mettiti avdnti, to TI verrb AP- Now go before, I will follow after 
 
 PRE'SSO. (Bocc. g. 2. n. 5.) thee. 
 
 Dalla mddre delta giovane prima, e They were first surprised by the rno- 
 
 APPRE sso da Currddo soprappresi furo- ther of the girl, and afterwards by Cur- 
 
 110. (Bocc. g. 2. n. 6.) ratio. 
 
 the word appresso^ in the first instance is a preposition because it. governs the 
 pronoun ti ; but in the second is an adverb because it governs no other word. 
 
PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 365 
 
 VENGA A VEDERLA, 
 
 che il vostro ligndggio AN- 
 
 DASSE A POVERTADE, 
 TROVANDOSI A PARlGI, 
 ALLATO ALLA DONNA, 
 S ? AVVICINAVA ALLE TERRE 
 
 del Duca, 
 
 let him come to see her ; 
 
 that your lineage should be- 
 come poor ; 
 
 finding himself in Paris ; 
 by the side of the lady ; 
 
 he approached the land of the 
 Duke. 
 
 Da may express a relation of derivation, of departure, 
 of separation, of dependence, of difference, of designa- 
 tion, of destination, of similitude, of fitness, aptitude, or 
 capability, of presence, of passage through or by, of un- 
 certainty of number, of time, of place, of loneliness, or of 
 instrumentality ; as, 
 
 Cino DA PISTOIA, 
 
 le grdzie VENGONO DA Dio, 
 
 TORNANDO DA PARlGI, 
 PARTITI DA COTESTI, 
 m' ALLONTANA DAL VOLGO, 
 
 DIPENDE DA QUEL PTJNTO, 
 
 ALTR' UOMO DA QUELLO che 
 io sono, 
 
 Guglielmo DAL CORNO, 
 
 C6se DA MANGIARE, 
 
 uomo DA POCO, 
 avdnti DA se, 
 
 DALLA CASA dtllOL doUUtt, 
 
 DA NoviNTA M!LA bocche, 
 
 DA GRAN TEMPO, 
 DA qUESTA PARTE, 
 
 DA me, DA per vai, 
 edificdto DA TARQUINIO, 
 
 31* 
 
 Cino of Pistoia ; 
 
 favors come from God ; 
 
 returning from Paris ; 
 
 go away from those spirits ; 
 
 she separates me from the 
 
 common people ; 
 it hangs upon that point ; 
 
 a different man from what I 
 am now ; 
 
 William [surnamed] from the 
 Horn ; 
 
 eatable things ; 
 
 a foolish man ; 
 
 before himself ^ 
 
 before the house of the lady ; 
 
 above ninety thousand mouths ; 
 
 a long time since ; 
 
 to this side ; 
 
 of me ; by yourself;. 
 
 built by Tarquin* 
 
366 ANALOGY. 
 
 Besides the above relations, the preposition da is 
 often used to express with brevity the habitation of a 
 person ; and is equivalent to the words a casa, a casa 
 di, ' to one's house ' ; * as, 
 
 DA [or a casa, di] me, to me [or to my house] ; 
 
 DA [or a cdsa di] lui, to his house ; 
 
 DA [or a cdsa di] lei, to her house ; 
 
 DAL [or a cdsa del] Cardindle, to the Cardinal's. 
 
 In expresses a relation of inferiority, or a relation 
 between two objects of which the one contains, and the 
 other is contained ; as, 
 
 dormiva IN UN LETTICCIUO- he slept in a little bed; 
 
 1*0, 
 
 com IN MERCATO, I ran to the market ; 
 
 era IN PAIUGI, IN UN ALBER- there were in Paris, in a ho- 
 
 GO, tel. 
 
 The Italians consider as containing-objects, the di- 
 visions of time, the parts of one's body, the apparel ive 
 wear, and sometimes even the surface of bodies ; as, 
 
 cinto noville raccontdte IN one hundred stories related in 
 DIECI GIORNI, ten days ; 
 
 pudica IN FACCIA, chaste in her countenance ; 
 
 la corona IN FRONTE, the crown on the forehead ; 
 
 IN ABITO di peregrini, in pilgrim's dress ; 
 
 gli furono straccidti i pdnni all the clothes he had on were 
 
 IN DOSSO, torn ; 
 
 IN MARE, e IN TERRA, on the sea, and on the land. 
 
 Con expresses a relation of company ; and the Italians 
 
 * The Italian has derived this usage from the Celtic language, in which the word 
 da was a synonyme of, and often used for, the word cae or c/tae, ' habitation ' ; 
 the cdsa of the Italian. 
 
PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 367 
 
 generally consider as companions the instruments, the 
 means, or the manner in which an action is performed, 
 
 vengo a desindre CON voi, 
 che CON lo STJLE, CON la PEN- 
 
 NA, COL PENNELLO 71071 
 
 dipignesse, 
 
 facendogli cenno COLLA MA- 
 NO, 
 
 incomincib a dire CON UMIL 
 
 VOCE, 
 
 CON FATICA gli rispose, 
 
 I come to dine with you ; 
 
 which with his style, with his 
 pen, or with his pencil, he 
 could not paint ; 
 
 making him a sign with her 
 hand ; 
 
 began to say with a humble 
 
 voice ; 
 with difficulty he replied to 
 
 him, 
 
 Per expresses the way through, or the means by, which 
 a thing is done; the reason why, or the object for which, 
 it is done ; it expresses also a relation of space with 
 regard to time or place ; and a relation of instrumentali- 
 ty, of qualification, of destination, or of distribution ; 
 as, 
 
 PER ME si va nella citta do- 
 lente, 
 
 PER LI CtTI PRIEGHI COStui 
 
 sovvenni, 
 
 non PER CRUDELTA delta 
 donna amdta, ma PER so- 
 VERCHIO FUOCO, 
 
 vo PE' DOLCI POMI, 
 PER piti DI dimordndo, 
 
 PER li CAMPI, PER le VIE, C 
 
 PER le CASE morieno, 
 
 promessi a me PER to VERA- 
 CE DIJCA, 
 
 e riputdto PER SANTO, 
 farei PER Currddo ogni cosa, 
 
 died ducdti.pER uno, 
 
 through me you go into the 
 
 city of woe ; 
 at whose entreaties I have 
 
 aided this one ; 
 not on account of the cruelty 
 
 of the beloved lady, but on 
 
 account of an excesssive 
 
 flame ; 
 
 I go for the sweet fruit ; 
 remaining for several days ; 
 
 through the fields, through 
 the streets, and in the hous- 
 es they died ; 
 
 promised to me by my sure 
 guide ; 
 
 he is reputed a holy man ; 
 I would do for Currado every 
 thing ; 
 
 ten ducats each. 
 
368 
 
 ANALOGY. 
 
 Per is also used to entreat or to swear by ; as, 
 
 PER quelia pace che per voi by that peace which is pie- 
 s' aspttti, ditene , . . . , pared for you, tell us . . . .; 
 
 TI Gitf RO, PER qutllo amort I swear to thee, by that love, 
 
 che io tiporto, che . . . . , which I bear thee, that .... 
 
 The preposition a, as it was mentioned p. 37, fol- 
 lowed by a word beginning with a vowel takes a d 
 after it, and su followed by another u takes an r ;fuora, 
 fuori, and fino, sino, infino, insino, followed by a word 
 beginning with a consonant often lose the last vowel ; 
 and verso, loses the last syllable ; as, 
 
 CD ud/no c?' intelletlo, 
 SUR un' dsse, 
 IN FIN DM dm, 
 volta VER MC, 
 
 to a man of sound judgment ; 
 upon a board ; 
 henceforth ; 
 turned towards me. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 E COn IL DENARO DI LTJI U 
 
 pagd. (Bocc.) 
 
 FU FIGLIO DEL FIGLTUOLO del 
 
 Conte d> Jlrtese. (Gio. Vill. 11. 
 54.) 
 
 LA STATUA DT MARMO, di 
 
 Ugno, o di metdllo, rimdsa per 
 memoria d' alc.un valente uomo. 
 (Dant. Conviv.) 
 
 UOMINI e femmine DI 
 GROSSO INGEGNO. (Bocc. Intr.) 
 
 AL TEMPO DELL' IMPERADORE 
 FEDERIGO PRIMO. (Bocc. g. 10. 
 n. 9) 
 
 Chi nol cr6de, VENGA egli A. 
 VEDERLA. (Petr. s. 210.) 
 
 And paid him with his own 
 money. 
 
 He was son of thfr son of the 
 Count of Artois. 
 
 The statue of marble, or of 
 wood, or of metal, remaining there 
 in memory of some great man. 
 
 They were men and women of 
 dull understanding. 
 
 In the time of the emperor 
 Frederic the First. 
 
 He who does not believe it, let 
 him come to see her. 
 
PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 369t 
 
 A voi noil vi sarebbe onore 
 
 CHE J L VOSTRO LIGNAGGIO ANDAS- 
 
 SE A POVERTADE. (Nov. Ant. 46.) 
 
 TROVANDOSI egli una volta A 
 PARIGI in povero stdto. (Bocc.) 
 
 ALLATO ALLA DONNA la pose. 
 (Bocc.) 
 
 ALLE TERRE DEL DUCA s' AV- 
 VICINAVA. (Bocc. g. 2. n. 7.) 
 
 Ecco GIN DA PISTOIA. (Petr. 
 Fr. Am. 4.) 
 
 DA DlO VENGONO LE GRAZIE. 
 
 (Bocc. g. 10. n. 3.) 
 
 DA PARIGI a Genova TORNAN- 
 DO. (Bocc. g. 8. n. 9.) 
 
 E tu che s6' costi, dnima viva, 
 PARTITI DA COTESTI che son 
 morti. (Dant. Inf. 3.) 
 
 Questa sola DAL VOLGO M' AL- 
 (Petr. c. 19.) 
 
 DA QUEL PtTNTO DlPENDE 
 
 il Ciilo e tutta la natura. (Dant. 
 Par. 28.) 
 
 Quand 9 era in pdrte ALTR' UOM 
 DA QUEL CH' i' SONO. (Petr. s. 
 
 It would not be honorable to 
 you, that your lineage should be- 
 come poor. 
 
 Finding himself once in Paris in 
 poor circumstances. 
 
 By the side of the lady he put it. 
 
 He approached the lands of the 
 Duke. 
 
 Behold Cino of Pistoia. 
 Favors come from God. 
 Returning from Paris to Genoa. 
 
 And thou who standest there, 
 living spirit, go away from those 
 spirits who are dead, 
 
 She alone separates me from the 
 common people. 
 
 Heaven and nature hangs upon 
 that point. 
 
 When I was in part a different 
 man from what I am now. 
 
 II qudle ava nome GUGLIELMO 
 DAL CORNO. (Gio. Vill. 9.) 
 
 Le COSE DA MANGIARE WOW si 
 
 stimano dalV itso o dalV affetto, 
 ma ddlla consuetudine . (Varch.) 
 
 Tu se' piii DA POCO che Maso, 
 che s\ lascidva fuggire i pesci 
 cotti. (Lasc. Spir. 5. 7.) 
 
 POCO AVANTI DA SE, vide le 
 
 c6neri rimdse d' A!ttila> flagello 
 diDio. (Bocc. Floe. 4.) 
 
 Dal f rate partitosi, DALLA CASA 
 w' ando DELLA DONNA. (Bocc. 
 g. 3. n. 3.) 
 
 Who was named William [sur- 
 named] from the Horn. 
 
 Eatable things are not valued 
 from their use or their taste, but 
 from habit. 
 
 Thou art more foolish than Ma- 
 so, who let the cooked fish escape 
 from him. 
 
 At a little distance before him- 
 self, he saw the ashes left by 
 Attila, the scourge of God. 
 
 Leaving the friar, he passed be- 
 fore the house of the lady. 
 
370 
 
 ANALOGY. 
 
 Stimdvasi av6re in Firinze DA 
 
 NOVANTA MILA BOCCHK, tra UO- 
 
 mini, fctnniine. e fanciulli. (Gio. 
 Vill. 11. 93.) 
 
 Gid. DA GRAN TEMPO nilllo pill 
 
 ne conosci. (Alf. Fil. 4. 2.) 
 
 Si dura poca fatica a fdrlo in- 
 chindre DA QUESTA o DA QUEL- 
 LA FARTE. (Mach.) 
 
 Poscia rispose lui : " DA ME 
 non vtnni." (Dant. Pur. 1.) 
 
 Voi ve ne avvedrete DA PER 
 v6i nel Uggere quisto frammin- 
 to. (Red. lelt.) 
 
 H campidogHo fu EDIFICATO 
 DA TARQUINIO, assedidto DA 
 Brenno, e libcrdlo DA Camilla. 
 (Vanz.) 
 
 Torna qui DA ME. (Mach.) 
 
 ddunque, andatevene DA i,th. 
 (Bocc. g. 2. n. 6.) 
 
 Essjindo Salabattto DA LEI an- 
 dato ima sdra. (Bocc. g. 8. n. 10.) 
 
 DAL CARDINAL di Morone, ap- 
 P&na ar rivet to, andarono tiitli gli 
 ambasciaduri. (Pall.) 
 
 IN UN LETTICCIUOLO assdi plC- 
 
 colo si DOKMI VA. (Bocc. g. 2. n. 7.) 
 
 I'O COR.SI IN MERCATO per dlT- 
 
 telo. (Mach. Coin.) 
 
 ' ERA IN PARIGI, IN UN ALBER- 
 GO, alqudnti mercatdnti Italiani. 
 (Bocc.) 
 
 Initndo di raccontdre 
 
 NOVELLE, RACCONTATE IN 
 
 GIORM. (Bocc. Intr.) 
 
 PUDICA IN FACCIA, 6 TielV 
 
 dvre onista. (Dant. Puf. 3r) 
 
 It was thought that there were 
 in Florence about ninety thousand 
 mouths, among men, women, and 
 children. 
 
 It is already a long time since 
 thou forgottest them all [thy pangs 
 of remorse]. 
 
 One meets with very little diffi- 
 culty in making him lean to this 
 or to that side. 
 
 Then he replied to him : " I 
 did not come of myself." 
 
 You will perceive it by yourself 
 in reading this fragment. 
 
 The capitol was built hy Tar- 
 quin, besieged by Brennus, and 
 delivered by Camillus. 
 
 Return here to me [or to this 
 my house]. 
 
 Go, then, to his house. 
 
 Salabaetto having gone one eve- 
 ning to her house. 
 
 All the ambassadors went to the 
 Cardinal of Morone's, as soon as 
 he arrived. 
 
 He slept in a very small bed. 
 
 I ran to the market to tell it to 
 you. 
 
 There were in Paris, in a hotel, 
 a number of Italian merchants. 
 
 I intend to relate one hundred 
 stories, to be related in ten days. 
 
 Chaste in her countenance, and 
 modest in her carriage. 
 
PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 371 
 
 Fulgevami gift IN FRONTE LA 
 CORONA. (Dant. Pur. 8.) 
 
 IN AB1TO DI PEREGRINI. (BoCC.) ' 
 
 Tutti i PANNI GL1 FURONO IN 
 DOSSO STRACCIATI. (BoCC. g. 1. 
 
 n.l.) 
 
 Comandamento dbbero dal lor 
 comurte d' abbdttere la forza d6 J 
 Viniziani IN MARE, E IN TERRA. 
 (Gio. Vill.) 
 
 Sign6re, io VENGO A DESINARE 
 
 CON VOI, 6 CON LA VOSTRA BRIGA- 
 
 TA. (Bocc. g. 9. n. 3.) 
 
 Niuna cosa fu, che egli CON 
 
 LO STILE, CON LA PENNA, O COL 
 PENNELLO NON DIPIGNESSE Simile 
 
 a quella. (Bocc. g. 6. n. 6.) 
 E V invito ad avvicinarsi, FA- 
 
 CENDOGLI CENNO COLLA MANO. 
 
 (Bocc.) 
 
 Incomincid CON TJMIL VOCE A 
 DIRE Qwe7 ch" w vo' air altro 
 canto differire. (Arios. Fur.) 
 
 Tito, non restando dipidngere, 
 
 CON FATICA COSI GLI RISPOSE. 
 
 (Bocc. g. 10. n. 8.) 
 
 PER ME SI VA NELLA CITTA 
 DOLENTE, PER ME SI VA ntlF 
 
 et6rno dolore^ PER ME si VA 
 tra la perduta g6nte. (Dant. 
 Inf. 3.) 
 
 Donna scese dal cielo, PER LI 
 cui PRIEGHI D6lla mm com- 
 pagnia COSTUI SOVVENNI. (Dant. 
 Purg. 1.) 
 
 NON PER CRUDELTA DELLA 
 DONNA AMATA, MA PER SOVER- 
 
 CHIO FUOCO ntlla m&nte CONCET- 
 TO da. poco regoldto appetito. 
 (Bocc. Proem.) 
 
 Ldscio lo fele, e vo PE* DOLCI 
 POMI PKOMESSI A ME PER LO 
 VKRACE DUCA. (Dant. Inf. 16.) 
 
 The crown shone already on my 
 forehead. 
 
 In pilgrim's dress. 
 
 All the clothes he had on were 
 
 torn. 
 
 They were ordered by their com- 
 munity to destroy all the forces, 
 which the Venetians had on the 
 sea, and on the land. 
 
 Sir, I come to dine with you, 
 and with your company. 
 
 There was nothing, that he 
 could not with his style, with his 
 pen, or with his pencil, paint like 
 it. 
 
 And she invited him to approach, 
 making him a sign with her hand. 
 
 He began to tell with an humble 
 voice what I choose to leave for 
 the next canto. 
 
 Titus, without ceasing from 
 weeping, with difficulty replied to 
 him thus. 
 
 Through me you go into the 
 city of woe, through me you go 
 into eternal pain, through me you 
 go amongst the damned spirits. 
 
 A dame descended from heaven, 
 at whose entreaties I have aided 
 this one with my guidance. 
 
 Not on account of the cruelty 
 of the beloved lady, but on ac- 
 count of the excessive flame kin- 
 dled in his mind by an unruled 
 passion. 
 
 I leave the gall, and go for the 
 sweet fruit promised to me by my 
 sure guide. 
 
ANALOGY. 
 
 Quivi PER piii DI DIMORANDO. 
 (Bocc. g. 2. n. 1.) 
 
 PI.K le VILLE, c PER LI 
 
 PER LE Vffi, E PER LE CASE, dl 
 
 di e di n6tte, moricno. (Bocc. 
 Iiitrod.) 
 
 Essdndo stdto un pdssimo u6- 
 mo in vita, in m6rte i RIPUT^TO 
 
 PER SA.NTO. (BOCC. g. 1. n. 1.) 
 fo FAR]l PKR CuRRji.DO 6GNI 
 
 c6sA, che io polessi. (Bocc. g. 2. 
 n. 7.) 
 
 E die I6ro DIE"CI DUC^TI PER 
 
 tfNO. (BOCC.) 
 
 O spiriti eUtti, PER QUE"LL A 
 P.ACE Ch* io credo CHE PER vox 
 tutti s' ASP^TTI, DfrENE d6ve 
 la montdgna gidce. (Dant. Pur. 
 3.) 
 
 I'o TI OIT^RO PER QU^LLO. f/l- 
 
 di$8olubile AM^RE CHE io TI 
 nii; r<>, CHE i7 qudrto m6se non 
 uscira, che tu mi rivedrdi. (Bocc. 
 1-iaiu. 2.) 
 
 JVbn pare inddgno AD 
 D' INTELL^TTO. (Dant. Inf. 2.) 
 
 Battuti in SUR UN' ASSE col 
 coltdllo. (Dav. Colt.) 
 
 O'gni dUra c6sa t sia v6stra li- 
 beramdnte iNFfN DA 6RA. (Bocc. 
 g. 4. n. -I.) 
 
 V<$LTA VER ME, mi disse. (Fi- 
 renz. Asin. ; '2^.} 
 
 There remaining for several 
 days. 
 
 Through the villages, and through 
 the iu'lds ; through the streets, and 
 in the houses, both by day and by 
 night, they died. 
 
 Having been a very bad man in 
 his life, he is in death reputed a 
 holy man. 
 
 I would do for Currado every 
 thing that I could. 
 
 And gave them ten ducats each. 
 
 chosen spirits, for that peace, 
 which, as I deem, is for all of you 
 prepared, tell us where the moun- 
 tain low declines. 
 
 I swear to thee by that indisso- 
 luble love, which I bear thee, that 
 the fourth month will not pass, 
 ere thou wilt see me again. 
 
 It does not seem undeserved to 
 a man of sound judgment. 
 
 Beaten upon a board with a 
 knife. 
 
 Let every other thing be freely 
 yours henceforth. 
 
 Turned towards me, she said. 
 
PREPOSITIONS. 373 
 
 EXERCISE XXIV. 
 
 He gave us the key of his house. This gentle 
 dare 2 1 3 chidve* 5 7 cdsa. 6 2 gentiP 
 
 lady being very often urged by the messages and 
 donna 3 JEssere 1 stimoldre ambascidta 
 
 by the entreaties of each one of them. Both in- 
 priego in- 
 
 flamed by a fierce vengeance, turned towards (to) these 
 fiammdre feroce 2 vendetta 1 , rivolgere 
 
 civil blood. 
 civile 2 sdngue 1 . 
 
 walls (the) their sword still warm I with 
 muro f&rro cdldo di 
 
 It is believed that he is 
 Si cre'de che sia 
 
 the richest prelate that 
 ricco preldto 
 
 there is in I has 1 the church of God (from) 
 
 dbbia \ chiesa Dw 
 
 the Pope excepted. They were all garlanded 1 with I 
 Pdpa essere tutto inghirlanddre 5 \ di 1 \ 
 
 leaves of oak. We will give thee so many blows 
 foglia? 3 quercia*. dare 2 l 
 
 with 
 d' 
 
 one of these iron bars bars of iron 
 
 pdlo f&rro 
 
 upon (the) your head, that we will make thee fall 
 
 fdre* l cade- 
 
 down dead. I have a farm very near to the bank 
 re morto. av6re podere riva 
 
 of the river. Then came the time of going out 
 fiume. venire tempo uscire 
 
 against the prince, who was approaching (himself) 
 prence, avvicindre 3 
 
 already to the lands of the Duke. They made him 
 terra Duca. 
 
 1 he ;was put to sit down just opposite to the 
 JEssere me" Mere seder e 
 
 door of the room, whence the abbot was obliged 
 uscio cdmeraj abate dottre 
 
 32 
 
374 
 
 ANALOGY. 
 
 to come out into the 
 uscire 
 
 seest a temple by-the-side 
 vedere tempio 
 
 dining room 
 sdla a mangidre 
 
 of 
 a 
 
 the sea. 
 mare. 
 
 Here thou 
 
 The em- 
 2 im- 
 
 the 
 
 peror being one day between these two sages, 
 
 peratore 3 JEssere 1 giorno sdvio, 
 
 one stood on the right I of him I , and the other 
 stare 2 a 3 destra* \ gli 1 | , 
 
 on the left. Having gone out from the city they 
 
 sinistra. Uscire cittd 
 
 put themselves on the way. 
 metterc 2 si 1 via. 
 
 the finger of 
 
 dito 2 a 3 
 
 face at him 
 
 He put a ring on 
 Mettcre 5 anello 6 l 
 
 Looking fixedly in his 
 Guarddre^ 
 
 fixedly in the face, in order to 
 flso mso, 
 
 Torello. 
 
 4 
 
 see whether 
 vedere se 
 
 he was speaking seriously. 
 dire 
 
 Having 
 
 put (himself) on a great black pelisse, he arranged 
 Mettere^, nero 2 l , acconcidre 4 
 
 himself in that in such a manner, that he looked like 
 
 gmsa, 
 
 parere 
 
 a bear. 
 orso. 
 
 With the best harmony in the world all 
 miglior pace mondo tutto 
 
 (and) four dined together. He began with the 
 qudttro desindre insieme. incomincidre 2 3 4 
 
 piece of wood to give him the greatest blows in 
 st6cca 5 6 ddre 7 GV 1 maggiore colpo 
 
 the 
 
 world, now on 
 mondo, 
 
 (the) 
 
 his head, and then on 
 ttsta, e 
 
 (the) his sides. I wish first to go to Rome, and 
 
 fidnco. volere anddre Roma, 
 
 there to see him (the) whom thou sayest to be 
 
 vedere dire 
 
 that he is vicar of God on earth. 
 6ssere vicdrio Dio terra. 
 
 There sounded 
 Suondre 
 
PREPOSITIONS. 375 
 
 through the city a wonderful report, that the tombs 
 
 cittd mirdbile 2 voce 1 , 3 5 tomla 6 
 
 of the Scipios were discovered I . By that steep 
 
 7 8 
 
 Scipione 9 
 
 si fossero scoperte* \ . scosctso 
 
 way I arrived at the tombs of the valorous race. 
 via giungere avello valoroso 2 stirpe 1 . 
 
 Neither by letter did she dare 
 JY2 Uttera ardire 
 
 let him hear it. 
 fdre^, 2 sentire 3 l ^,. 
 
 Not seeing through the wood any path. You will 
 vedere selva sentiero. ri- 
 
 receive a hundred (of them) for every-one. He went to 
 c6vere 2 cento 5 3 ciascuno 4 . anddre 
 
 Ravenna in-order-to speak to the army. No, I never 
 parldre armdta. , 
 
 will mention it will not mention it ever. With 
 
 l dire 3 2 4. 
 
 a low voice he replied thus. This ferocious man, 
 basso voce rispondere 2 l . feroce 2 uomo 1 , 
 
 acts of 
 
 having usurped with (the) frauds and with (the) 
 < - usurpdre frode 
 
 violence I a throne not his own, sought 
 
 lenza \ trono , cercdre* di 9 \ man- 
 
 serve it with (the) terror and with (the) cruelty. 
 n 2 terrore 3 4 5 6 crudeltd 7 . 
 
 to i pre- 
 
 Without any fail I promise to thee, upon (the) my 
 
 alcun fdllo promettere 2 l } mio 
 
 faith, that within - among a few days thou wilt 
 
 fe, - poco d/l tro- 
 
 find thyself with me. I wish that we should de- 
 
 ware 2 ! 4 3 . volere - seen- 
 
 scend (until) there below. 
 dere giu. 
 
376 ANALOGY. 
 
 CHAPTER XV. 
 CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 CONJUNCTIONS IN COMMON USE, 
 
 E, 
 
 0, 
 
 and ; 
 or, either ; 
 
 non gia, 
 
 I not at all, not 
 j indeed ; 
 
 ne, 
 
 nor, neither ; 
 
 non solo, 
 
 ' not only, 
 
 se, 
 
 if, whether ; 
 
 non eke, 
 
 | not merely ; 
 
 ma, 
 
 f Vint 
 
 pur che, 
 
 provided ; 
 
 perd, 
 
 > UU L , 
 
 a meno che, 
 
 unless : 
 
 che, 
 
 that; 
 
 dnzi che, 
 
 rather, sooner; 
 
 , 
 
 Syet, neverthe- 
 
 ( 
 
 f rather than not, 
 
 pure, 
 
 less ; 
 
 dnzi che no, * 
 
 rather so than 
 
 gia, 
 
 yet, already ; 
 
 ( 
 
 ; otherwise ; 
 
 dnzi, 
 
 inay, rather, on 
 the contrary ; 
 
 si, 
 cost, 
 
 so, thus ; 
 
 dnche, 
 
 ^ 
 
 come, 
 
 ri 
 
 dnco, 
 eziandio, 
 
 > also, even ; 
 
 siccome, 
 sicche, 
 
 as, IIKG ; 
 so, thus, 
 
 altresl, 
 
 N 
 
 cosi che, 
 
 wherefore ; 
 
 ancora, 
 
 ( also, even, a- 
 l gain ; 
 
 talche, 
 giacche, 
 
 so, so that ; 
 sine* ; 
 
 eppure, 
 ossia, 
 
 ( yet, neverthe- 
 l less ; 
 
 doe, 
 doe a dire, 
 vale a dire, 
 
 that is ; 
 that is to say ; 
 
 ovvero, 
 
 > or, either ; 
 
 almeno, 
 
 at least * 
 
 oppure, 
 
 ) 
 
 almdnco, 
 
 
 nemmeno, 
 
 ] 
 
 di piu, 
 
 moreover ; 
 
 nemmanco, 
 
 
 inoltre, 
 
 ) 
 
 neppure, 
 
 ! neither, 
 
 oltrecche, 1 
 
 besides, 
 
 nednche, 
 
 } not even ; 
 
 oltracdb, j 
 
 ' besides this 5 
 
 tampoco, 
 
 
 d j altronde, 
 
 
 nettampoco, 
 se mdi, 
 
 ? if ever, 
 
 dunque, 
 adunque, 
 
 ; then, 
 \ therefore j 
 
 se pure, 
 
 J if indeed ; 
 
 onde, 
 
 | , p 
 
 se perd, 
 
 if however ; 
 
 laonde, 
 
 > wnerefore, 
 
 se non, 
 
 ? unless, except, 
 
 quindi, 
 
 ; - 
 
 se non che, 
 
 I but; 
 
 percio, 
 
 > therefore, for 
 [ which reason \ 
 
CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 377 
 
 accid, 
 
 
 in sdmma, \ 
 
 in short, 
 
 acciocche, 
 
 in order that, 
 
 in fine, ( 
 
 ' in conclusion ; 
 
 affine, 
 
 to the end that; 
 
 sia che, 
 
 whether, 
 
 ciffinchb, 
 
 
 vuoi, 
 
 or, either ; 
 
 ch& 
 
 for, why ? 
 
 del resto, 
 
 otherwise, 
 
 perchd, 
 
 because ; 
 
 per dltro, 
 
 besides ; 
 
 poiche, ? because, since, 
 
 tdnto, 
 
 as; 
 
 posciache, $ as, after ; 
 
 qudnto, 
 
 as ; 
 
 perocche, 
 
 qudndo, 
 
 when ; 
 
 imperocche, \ because, 
 
 quand* dnche, 
 
 even when ; 
 
 perciocche, [> whereas, 
 
 in guisa che, ^ 
 
 
 imperciocchb, \ as, since ; 
 conciosiacche, \ 
 
 in modo che, 
 inmani&rache, 
 
 so that, in such 
 
 quantunque, \ 
 
 di modo che, 
 
 a manner ; 
 
 sebbene, 
 
 dimanierache,; 
 
 
 benchd, }> although ; 
 
 intdnto 
 
 1 in the mean 
 
 comeche, 
 avvegnache, J 
 
 frattdnto, J 
 
 time, mean- 
 ' while, whilst ; 
 
 ancorche, > , 
 
 mentre, ] 
 
 whilst, 
 
 , . i \ f even tliat i 
 contuttoche, $ 
 
 mentrecche, ( 
 
 ' whilst that ; 
 
 nonostdnte, 
 
 
 salvo, 
 
 1 
 
 nondimeno, 
 
 
 eccetto, \ 
 
 > save, saving, 
 
 nientedimeno, 
 
 Qtill 
 
 trdnne, | 
 
 > except ; 
 
 con tutto cid, 
 non per tdnto, 
 non per questo, 
 cid non ostdnte, 
 
 bllil, 
 
 nevertheless, 
 notwithstand- 
 ing, for all that; 
 
 fuorchb, 
 forse, 
 6ra, 
 
 perhaps ; 
 now.* 
 
 cid nondimeno, 
 
 
 
 
 tuttavia, * J 
 
 
 Many of these conjunctions, as nondimeno, cid non ostdnte, &c. 
 contain in themselves & pronoun, & preposition, an adverb, &c.; but, 
 from their office of joining 1 sentences together, they are commonly 
 reckoned amongst conjunctions, though in fact they are but conjunctive 
 phrases. 
 
 * Some of these conjunctions might be mistaken for prepositions or adverbs, and 
 the conjunction CHE, for the relative pronoun CHE, 'who,' 'which,' 'that'; their 
 character however will soon be ascertained by considering the office which they per- 
 form in a sentence. Thus in the following examples : 
 
 Iddto mi ha fatto tdnta gratia^ che 'to God has granted me such a favor as to 
 A'NZI la mta morte ho veduto alcitni de' enable me to see some of my brothers 
 
 before my death. 
 
 She was a little advanced in years and 
 rather proud. 
 
 I was indeed not naturally so, but by 
 
 \ mta 
 -m.iiifra.taii. (Bocc. g. 2. n. 5.) 
 
 Attempattlla era, e A'NZI superba che 
 no. (Bocc. g. 6. n. 1.) 
 
 To ra ben cosi, ma non per natitra. 
 
 KI u> c/e/e ci/ot, ma, nun, per /tan*/ it, ws n 
 
 per iina infermitd. (Bocc. g. 3. a disease, 
 n. 1.) 
 tho word dnzi is a preposition in the first instance because it governs la mia mdrtc : 
 
 32* 
 
378 ANALOGY. 
 
 The conjunction ne is sometimes used in the signifi- 
 cation of e, ' and ' ; as, 
 
 ddlci NE cdri, sweet and dear ; 
 
 parldi NE scrissi, I spoke and wrote. 
 
 Ma is often used in the signification of piu, < more ' ; 
 as,* 
 
 MA die uriOj more than one ; 
 
 non MA che di sospiri, no more than sighs, 
 
 Che is sometimes used in the signification of fra or 
 tra, ' between ' ; as, 
 
 meglio di diecimila ddbbre, more than ten thousand pis- 
 CHE in gioie, e CHE in toles between jewels and 
 dendri, money. 
 
 Pure is often used in the signification of ancora, 
 i also,' < even ' y solo, solamente, < only ' ; as, 
 
 e PURE peccdto, it is also a sin ; 
 
 s' io avessi avuto PURE un had I had even the slightest 
 
 pensieruzzo, thought ; 
 
 natura non avea ivi PUR di- nature had not only painted 
 
 pinto, there. 
 
 The conjunctions quantunque, sebbene, bencke, come- 
 che, avvegnache, ancorche, contuttoche, are generally 
 followed by one of the following conjunctions, pure, 
 
 it is an adverb in the second because it modifies the verb era : and it is a conjunction 
 in the last because it connects the clause (era) per natbra with ^era) per una 
 infermitd. 
 
 And in the following : 
 
 Comincidrono a dire, CHE quello, CHE They began to say that what he had 
 earli av6oa rispdsto, non ventva a dir ntol- replied was without meaning 
 la. (Bocc. g. 6. n. 9.) 
 
 the first che is a conjunction, because it connects dire, with what follows j and 
 the second is a relative pronoun, because it refers to quello, its antecedent. 
 
 * From these and similar examples it seems as if the Italian ma were derived from 
 the Latin magis : the Celtic mai, * great.' 
 
CONJUNCTIONS. 379 
 
 nonostante, nondimeno, nientedimeno, con tutto do, do 
 non ostante, do non di meno, non pertanto, non per 
 questo tuttavia ; as their correlatives ; as, 
 
 COMECHE vdrie cose gli an- although it passed through his 
 ddsse per lo pensiero di mind to do various things, 
 /are, PURE deliberd . . . . , yet he determined 
 
 Often the correlative conjunction is suppressed ; as, 
 
 Jlrriguccio, CONTUTTOCHE Arriguccio, although a mer- 
 fosse mercatdnte, era fnon- chant, was a proud man. 
 dimerio] unfiero uorno, 
 
 Non soloy non che> are followed by ma, ma ancora ; 
 as, 
 
 sta bene di coslfdtte cose NOW it is well to reprimand for 
 CHE gli amici, MA gli stra- such things, not only friends, 
 nieri di ripiglidre, but even strangers ; 
 
 il vino NON SOLO conforta il wine not only assists the 
 natural calore, MA ANCORA natural heat, but it clears 
 chiarifica il sdngue, the blood. 
 
 JVbw che is often an elliptical expression for the 
 phrase NON solamente dico CHE, ma, ' I say not only 
 that, but ' ; as, 
 
 spero trovdr pieta NON CHE I hope to find not only par- 
 perdono [NON SOLAMENTE don, but pity ; 
 rico CHE spero trovdr per- 
 dono, MA pieta], 
 
 avrebbero potuto muover la they could have not only 
 guerra, NON CHE difender- defended themselves, but 
 si [D!CO NON SOLAMENTE even waged war. 
 CHE avrebbero potuto di- 
 fendersi, MA muover la 
 gutrra], 
 
 Tanto is followed by quanto, and sometimes by che ; 
 corresponding to the English words both . . . and 5 as, 
 
 TANTO crudi QUANTO c6tti, both raw and cooked ; 
 TANTO mdschi, CHE feminine, both men and women. 
 
380 
 
 ANALOGY. 
 
 The conjunctions e, o, followed by a word beginning 
 with a vowel often take a d after them ; and pure, ep- 
 pure, oppure, alrneno, nemmeno, ora, ancora, followed 
 by a consonant drop the last vowel ; as, 
 
 hard and severe battles ; 
 whether a spirit or a living 
 man; 
 
 which to think of oppresses 
 rny heart ; 
 
 which he hopes to see also 
 there in heaven. 
 
 diire, CD dspre baltdglie, 
 OD ombra, OD uomo certo, 
 
 che il cuor mi preme gia PUR 
 
 pe.nsdndo, 
 ch* AN COR lassu vedere spe- 
 
 ra, 
 
 Pure, gid, ora, are sometimes mere expletives ; as, 
 
 la cosa andd PUR cost, the thing passed just so ; 
 
 fossero essi pur GI! disposti, would that they were disposed; 
 6RA le parolefurono assdi, now the words were many. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Se gli occhi suoi ti fur DOLCI, 
 NE CARI. (Petr. c. 40.) 
 
 Qudnto di lei PARLAI,NE SCRIS- 
 si. (Petr. s. 296.) 
 
 Or cui chidmi tu Iddio ? JEgli 
 non b MA CHE tfNo. (Nov. Ant. 
 78.) 
 
 Quivi, secondo che per ascol- 
 tdre, JVon av6a pianto, MA CHE 
 DI SOSPIRI Che V aura eterna 
 facevan tremdre. (Dant. Inf. 4.) 
 
 Donolle CHE IN GIOIE, e CHE 
 in vasellamenti d' oro e d' ariin- 
 
 tO, E CHE IX DENARI, quillo che 
 
 vdlse m6glio D' dltre DIECIMILA 
 DOBBRE. (Bocc. g. 2. n. 9.) 
 
 E pogndmo, che non lo faccid- 
 mo a malizia, pure nienledime- 
 no E PTJRE PECCATO. (Cavalc. 
 Pungil. 195.) 
 
 If her eyes were sweet and dear 
 to thee. 
 
 How much I spoke and wrote 
 of her. 
 
 Now whom callest thou God ? 
 There is no more than one. 
 
 There, as well as my ear could 
 note, no other plaints were heard 
 than sighs, which caused the eter- 
 nal air to tremble. 
 
 He gave her between jewels, 
 and gold and silver vases, and 
 money, what would be worth 
 more than ten thousand pistoles. 
 
 And let us suppose, that we do 
 not do it through malice, yet 
 nevertheless it is also a sin. 
 
CONJUNCTIONS, 
 
 381 
 
 0, S* fo AVESSI AVtTTO PURE 
 
 UN PENSIERUZZO di fare V una 
 di quelle cose, che voi dite, credete 
 voi, che Iddio m' avesse tdnto so- 
 stenuta ? (Bocc. g, 1. n. 1.) 
 
 NON AVEA PUR NATtJRA 1VI 
 
 DIPINTO, Ma di soavitd di mil- 
 le odori Vi facea un incdgnito 
 indistmto. (Dant. Pur. 7.) 
 
 COMECHE VARIE COSE GLI AN- 
 DASSE PER LO PENSIERO DI FA- 
 RE, PURE, vedendo il re, DELIBE- 
 RO (Bocc. g. 2. n. 2.) 
 
 ERA ARRIGUCCIO, COWTUTTO- 
 CHE FOSSE MERCATANTE, UN FIE- 
 
 RO UOMO. (BOCC. g. 7. II. 8.) 
 
 A VOI STA BENE DI COS1 FATTE 
 COSE, NON CHE GLI AMICI, MA 
 GLI STRANIERI DI RIPIGLIARE. 
 
 (Bocc. g. 2. n. 3.) 
 
 IL VINTO NON S6LO CONFORTA 
 IL NATURAL CALORE, MA ANCORA 
 CHIARIFICA IL SANGUE tOrbldo. 
 
 <Cresc. 4; 48; 2.) 
 
 SPERO TROVAR PIEXI, NON CHE 
 
 PERDONO. (Petr. s. 1.) 
 
 Tdnte miglidia armdti, a pie e 
 a cavdllo, AVREBBERO, con dltro 
 
 Cdp0 } POTUTO MUOVER LA GUER- 
 RA, NON CHE DIFENDERSI. (DaV. 
 
 Stor.) 
 I frutti sono samssimi TANTO 
 
 CRUDI, QUANTO COTTI. (Red. 
 
 Lett. 2.) 
 
 Dimorano salvfiremente in 
 queir aria di collirta, TANTO MAS- 
 em, CHE FEMMINE. (Lib. Cur. 
 Malatt.) 
 
 'Le detle nazioni ebbero DURE, 
 
 ED ASPRE BATTAGLIE. (Gio. Vill. 
 
 b. 6. c. 29.) 
 
 " Miserere di me" griddi a lui, 
 ? " Qudl che tu sii, OD OMBRA, 
 OD UOMO CERTO." (Dant Inf. 1.) 
 
 Oh ! had I had even the slight- 
 est thought of doing one of those 
 things which you say, do you be- 
 lieve that God would have assisted 
 me? 
 
 Nature not only had painted there, 
 but of the sweetness of a thousand 
 smells had made an unknown, un- 
 distinguishable fragrance. 
 
 Although it passed through his 
 mind to do various things, yet, 
 seeing the king, he determined 
 
 Arriguccio, although a mer- 
 chant, was a proud man. 
 
 It is well for you to 'reprimand 
 for such things, not only your 
 friends, but even strangers. 
 
 Wine not only assists the natu- 
 ral heat, but it clears also the 
 turbid blood. 
 
 I hope to find not only pardon, 
 but pity. 
 
 So many thousand armed men, 
 on foot and on horseback, would 
 have, under another captain, not 
 only defended themselves, but 
 waged war. 
 
 Fruits are very wholesome, both 
 raw and cooked. 
 
 In that mountain air both men 
 and women live in very good 
 health. 
 
 Said nations had hard and se- 
 vere battles, 
 
 " Take pity upon me," cried I to 
 him, "whatever thou be, whether 
 a spirit or a Hying man." 
 
382 ANALOGY. 
 
 Tu vuoi ch* w rinuovelli Thou wishest that I should re- 
 
 Disperdto dolor che il cuor mi call the desperate grief, which to 
 
 prime GIA PUR PENSANDO, pria think of oppresses my heart, before 
 
 eh' w nefavelli. (Dant. Inf. 33.) I tell it. 
 
 f Per mirdr la sembidnza di Co- In order to see the image of 
 
 lui t CH' ANCOR LASSU nel del Him whom he hopes to see also 
 
 VEDERE SPERA. (Petr. s. 14.) there in heaven. 
 
 LA COSA AXDO PUR cosl. (Bocc. The thing happened just so. 
 g. 2. n. 5.) 
 
 O'ra FOSSERO ESSI PUR Gil Now would that were disposed 
 
 DISPOSTI a venire. (Bocc. Int. to come. 
 
 6RA LE PAROLE FtjRoivo AS- Now the words were many, and 
 
 SAI, ed il rammarichio della don- the sorrow of the lady great. 
 na grdnde. (Bocc. g. 3. n. 6.) 
 
 EXERCISE XXV. 
 
 The waters, and the air, and the branches, and 
 dcqua, dura, rdmo, 
 
 the little birds, and the fishes, and the flowers, and 
 uccello, pesce, fiore, 
 
 the grass speak of love. | I do not go away 
 erba parlare arnore. \ . non 10 mi 11 allontdno 12 
 
 neither from (the) Mount Parnassus, nor from the 
 3 Monte 4 ' Parndsso? 
 
 Muses. And it appears to me to see with-her la- 
 Musa 9 . -^ardre 4 ^ 5 ved6r 2 3 ddn- 
 
 dies and damsels, and they are savins and beech-trees. 
 
 na donzdlla, essere abete f&ggio* 
 
 Neither by message, nor by letter did she dare to I 
 
 ambascidta, lettera ardire di \ 
 
 I let him know it. 1 Nimrod was the first king, or 
 
 fdrglielo sapere. \ Nembrotte essere re, 
 
 ruler, or collector (of assemblage) of people.* I will 
 
 rettore, ragunatore congregazidne gente. di- 
 
 * People, in the plural peoples. 
 
CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 883 
 
 tell perhaps a thing not credible, but true. He was 
 
 re cosa credibile, tiiro. JEssere 
 
 not only killed, but devoured even to the bones. 
 
 ucciderej l divorare 5 3 osso*. 
 
 He lost every hope, not only of ever having her 
 
 perdere* Ogni 1 speranza 2 , doverla mdi 
 
 again, 
 riavere. 
 
 but even 
 
 of seeing 
 vedere 
 
 her. 
 
 1 And for what rea- 
 ca- 
 
 son ? " said Ferondo : " Because thou wast jealous.*' 
 gione?" dire : " essere geloso." 
 
 Alexander although 
 
 Alessandro 
 
 I remained 
 stette 
 
 he had 
 
 great fear, yet 
 
 rd.n.tJ.pl rtn.i'/.rnZ. 
 
 he 
 
 paura 2 , 
 
 quiet. 
 cheto. 
 
 Surely, although thou affirmest 
 Certo, affermdre* 
 
 it, I do not believe, that thou 
 
 believest 
 credo? 
 
 it. 
 
 'Go 
 
 then," said the lady, " and call him." 
 ," dire donna, " chiamdre^ ." 
 
 l . "Anddre 
 Since you 
 
 pardon me, I will tell it to you. 
 perdondre*^, 5 , 6 dire 9 7. 
 
 Therefore I stop (myself) ; but why goest thou ? 
 
 _ nrroeirtre'*' 'l 2 fl.YldnrP ? 3 ! 
 
 promise me 
 promettere 2 l 
 
 arrestdre 
 
 Although we are in the month of July - be of July, 
 essere 3 1 Luglio 2 , 
 
 I thought 
 mi son creduta 
 
 this morning I should freeze to 
 mattina as- 
 
 freeze. I wish, that she I should send I me a small 
 siderdre. Volire, mdndi 2 l 
 
 lock of the beard of Nicostratus. Now it happened, 
 cidcca bdrba Nico strata. avvenire, 
 
 that the king of France He was guarding I the 
 
 re Frdncia Era a guarddre \ 
 
 passes with more than three thousand horsemen, between 
 ptisso tremila cavalierc, 
 
 German and (between) Lombards. Provided I you^ have 
 Tedesco Lombardo. \ a voi dia 
 
 the mind 
 il cuore 
 
 to 
 
 di 
 
 keep secret what that which I 
 tener secreto 
 
384 
 
 ANALOGY. 
 
 will say to you. 
 ' are 2 . 
 
 have I only one 
 non hdnno 
 
 The cranes 
 gru 
 
 leg and one foot. I see, that he wishes, that I 
 
 vedere, 
 
 volere. 
 
 gamba pie. 
 
 should do I what that which, I never not ever, 
 fdccia I , 3 , 
 
 should relate 
 
 wished to do, that is, that I 
 volere* fare, , 
 
 his wickedness. 
 cattivitci 2 . 
 
 raccdnti 
 
 (the) 
 
 CHAPTER XVI. 
 
 INTERJECTIONS. 
 
 INTERJECTIONS IN COMMON USE. 
 
 Ak! 
 
 ah ! ha 1 alas ! 
 
 ahime! aime! 
 
 \ 
 
 eh ! e ! 
 ih! 
 
 eh! 
 ih! 
 
 chime! eime! 
 ohime! oime! 
 
 >alas (me) ! 
 
 oh ! o ! 
 
 oh ! ho ! 
 
 [ome ! 
 
 \ 
 
 uh! 
 
 uh! 
 
 oite ! 
 
 alas (thee) ! 
 
 dhi! 
 
 ah ! alas ! 
 
 oise ! 
 
 alas (him or her)! 
 
 */-* / 
 
 ^ here ! ho hey ! 
 
 gudi ! 
 
 woe ! 
 
 em, . 
 
 I ho there ! 
 
 aiuto ! 
 
 help ! 
 
 old ! 6i ! 
 
 ah ! oh ! 
 
 o Dio ! 
 
 oh Heavens ! 
 
 uhi! 
 
 ah ! alas ! 
 
 lasso ! 
 
 ^ 
 
 /fj>Ji i 
 
 Sah ! alas ! pray ! 
 
 lasso me ! 
 
 > alas ! 
 
 Utfi I 
 
 prithee ! 
 
 dhi Idsso ! 
 
 ^ 
 
 doh! 
 ah, ah ! 
 
 oh ! pshaw ! 
 ah, ah ! 
 
 povero me ! 
 
 ( wretched that I 
 am ! unfortun- 
 
 eh, eh! 
 oh, oh ! 
 poh ! 
 
 eh, eh ! 
 oh, oh ! 
 poh ! 
 
 misero me ! 
 meschino me ! 
 dolente me ! 
 
 < ate that I am ! 
 wretched me ! 
 l^poor me ! 
 
 puh ! pu ! 
 
 pu ! pooh ! 
 
 o me bedto ! 
 
 
 eia ! 
 
 halloo ! 
 
 o me felice ! 
 
 happy that I am! 
 
 old! 
 
 holla! ho there !i bedto me ! 
 
 happy me ! 
 
 
 \felice me ! 
 
 
INTERJECTIONS. 
 
 385 
 
 cost ! 
 
 so ! thus ! 
 
 Alto ! 
 
 halt! 
 
 si! 
 
 > yes, certainly ! 
 
 sta! 
 ohl ! j 
 
 stop ! 
 take care ! 
 
 pure ! 
 
 yet ! 
 
 gudrda I 
 
 . have care ! 
 
 f I 
 
 < how! how then! 
 
 largo ! } 
 
 i beware ! 
 
 come ! 
 su! 
 
 \ why ? why so ! 
 
 piano, } 
 adagio, \ 
 
 softly ! gently ! 
 slowly ! 
 
 orsu ! 
 
 f up, up ! come ! 
 
 zl ! zilto ! 
 
 st! whist! hush! 
 
 su, su ! 
 
 come then ! 
 
 cheto ! 
 
 quiet ! still ! 
 
 via! 
 via, via ! 
 
 away ! 
 
 non piu ! 
 
 bdsta ! 
 
 enough ! 
 
 eh via ! 
 
 fie ! fie upon ! 
 
 silenzio ! 
 
 silence ' 
 
 vergogna ! 
 
 for shame ! 
 
 tacete ! 
 
 
 oibb ! 
 
 o fie ! o fough ! 
 
 anddte ! 
 
 away ! 
 
 dnimo ! 
 
 \ 
 
 baddte ! 
 
 | mind ! 
 
 cordggio ! 
 fate cuore ! 
 
 ( courage ! 
 i cheer up ! 
 
 aW erta ! 
 state aW erta! 
 
 > have care ! 
 } beware ! 
 
 bene ! 
 
 well ! 
 
 di grdzia ! 
 
 pray! 
 
 bravo ! 
 
 J bravo ! 
 \ very well ! 
 
 per caritd ! 
 
 for charity's 
 [sake ! 
 
 buono ! 
 
 good ! v 
 
 per amor del tie- for heaven's 
 
 viva ! 
 
 long live ! 
 
 lo! 
 
 [sake ! 
 
 eh viva ! evviva /huzza ! 
 
 mercl ! 
 
 > mercy ! 
 
 cdpperi ! 
 cdppita ! 
 poffdre ! 
 
 t ay ! heyday ! 
 I marry ! 
 
 misericordia I 
 possibile ! 
 appunto ! 
 
 mercy upon us ! 
 is it possible ! 
 exactly ! just ! 
 
 oh bella ! 
 
 fine! 
 
 pensdte ! 
 
 just think ! * 
 
 ecco ! 
 
 lo ! behold ! 
 
 
 The interjections lasso, povero, misero, meschino, 
 beato (me ! ), are mere adjectives, and when used by 
 female, take the feminine termination: lassa, pove- 
 ra, miser a (me I), &c. ; and in the plural make, lassi, 
 poveri (noil), &tc. 3 for the masculine; and lasse, pove- 
 re (noil), &c. for the feminine ; as, 
 
 LASSA ME ! in che maV 6ra alas ! in what evil hour was I 
 ndcqui, born ; 
 
 MisERi NOI ! che sidm, se Id- miserable that we are ! what 
 dio ci Idscia ? becomes of us, if God for- 
 
 sakes us ? 
 
 * It in important to observe, that, as some of these interjections are used to 
 express different, and oven contrary, emotions or affections of the mind, their exact 
 signification can only be determined by the sense of the words which accompany them, 
 give rise to the exclamation. 
 
 33 
 
386 ANALOGY. 
 
 Bravo ! zitto ! cheto ! are also adjectives, and, when 
 used in speaking to a female, or to more than one male 
 or female, follow the same rule ; as, 
 
 BRAVA ! come qudndo ? bravo ! as when ? 
 
 ZITTI, un po' I hush, a little ! 
 
 Bravo ! is also used in its superlative, and makes 
 bravissimo ! bravissima ! bravissimi ! bravissime, l bravis- 
 simo ! ' 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Oime ! LASS A ME ! doUnte me ! Alas ! unfortunate that I am ! 
 
 IN CHE MAL,' ORA NACQTJi. (Bocc. in what evil hour was I born. 
 g.7.n.2.) 
 
 MISERI NOI ! CHE SIAM, SB ID- Miserable that we are ! what be- 
 
 DIO ci L.ASCIA ? (Alf. Saul. 1. 1.) comes of us, if God forsakes us. 
 
 BRAVA! COME QUANDO? (Manz. Bravo! as when? 
 Prom. Spos. c. 1.) 
 
 ZITTI, -UN PO' ! ch* elle dormo- Hush a little ! for they are sleep- 
 no. (Buon. Fier.) ing. 
 
 Many of the foregoing interjections are elliptical 
 expressions of, and equivalent to, perfect sentences ; as, 
 ola, for instance, which stands for O [tu, che sei] LA, ' O 
 thou, who art there ' ; orsu, for 6na [levati or levatevi] 
 su, 'now rise up'; v vt, for [va' or andate] VIA ; cheto, 
 for [sta or state] CHE'TO, * be still ' ; coraggio, for [abbii 
 or abbiate] CORA'GGIO, c have courage ' ; viva, for VIVA 
 [egli or etla lungamente,] l may he or she live long '; bene, 
 for [sta or va] BE'NE, 6 it is well ' ; bravo, brava, for [sei 
 or siete] BRA'VO, BRA'VA ; oh bella, for OH [questa e] BE'L- 
 LA, 'oh this is fine '; &c. ; to which may be added manco 
 male, or meno male, ' less evil,' ' not so bad,' c better so '; 
 which is often used as an interjection, and is equivalent 
 to the phrase [il] MA X LE [e~\ MA X NCO, or ME X NO, [che non 
 
INTERJECTIONS. 387 
 
 sarebbe stato, se la cosa fosse andata altrimenti,~\ ' the 
 evil is less than if the thing had happened otherwise,' 
 ( it is not so bad as if it had happened otherwise,' c bet- 
 ter so than otherwise.' 
 
 EXERCISE XXVI. 
 
 Ah ! how many steps thou Ipsest through the for- 
 pdsso perdere* * 2 sel- 
 
 est ! " Ah ! " I said he, I " valiant men, ah ! corn- 
 ea 3 / I dicea , I " valente uomo, com- 
 
 panions, ah ! brothers, keep (the) your place." Alas ! 
 pdgno, fratello, tenure ludgo." 
 
 mercy ; for heaven's sake ! Alas ! blind ungrateful world ! 
 
 orbo ingrdto' 2 mondo 1 ! 
 
 ! happy souls ! Wretched that I am ! I have 
 
 felice 2 dnima 1 ! avere? 
 
 loved thee more than (the) my own life. Fie ! go 
 amdre 3 l vita. anddre 
 
 on. Is it possible, that thou I art I alive ? Marry ! 
 oltre. | sii \ vivo ? 
 
 1 recant (myself.) How many tears, alas ! have I 
 ridire* *. Idgrima, avere 
 
 already shed ! Woe to you, perverse souls ! 
 
 sparger -e ! prdva? dnima 1 ! 
 
 never 
 non is- 
 
 hope 
 perdte mdi 
 
 to see the heaven again. Hush ! hush ! other- 
 veder ci6lo . 
 
 wise we begin again. Holla ! where art thou ? Come ! 
 
 essere da-capo. essere 1 
 
 let us see. Up, up ! citizens, let every-one arm himself 
 
 vedere. cittadino, 3 armdre 2 , l 
 
 speedily to the defence. Oh ! thou art in great haste 
 
 veloce difesa. avere gran fretta- 
 
 Alas ! how miserable is (the) our fortune ! " The cava- 
 
 qudnlo misero 2 essere 1 fortuna ! 2 cava- 
 
388 ANALOGY. 
 
 lier said : " I wish to leave thee, and serve God." 
 litre 3 Dire 1 : ' volere lascidr^ servir Dio." 
 
 The demon replied : u Pshaw ! why wishest thou to 
 2 demonio 3 Rispondere 1 : " vottre 2 
 
 leave me ? " O poor me ! (that) I I shall never be good 
 lasciare l ? " | non sard mdi piu buo- 
 
 again I I for any thing. Pray ! my friend, why wishest 
 no I I a 2 arnica 1 , voltre 
 
 thou to give thyself I this trouble ? " Alas ! " said the 
 entrdre in \ fatica ? " " dire 
 
 other, " what is that which thou sayest ? " Come ! 
 " essere dire ? " 
 
 go, I will wait for thee in the house. Away ! do 
 anddre, aspettdre 2 cdsa. 
 
 not have any fear, I will carry thee to the house 
 av r paura, ponere 2 l cdsa 
 
 safe and sound. Silence, son, do I not make noise I ; 
 sdlvo 3 sdno 1 . . , figliuolo, | non far romore \ ; 
 
 let f (the) thy father sleep. Oh ! you make me laugh. 
 lasciare * genitdre* dor mire 1 . fare 2 1 ridere. 
 
 He cried out : Oh, oh ! " 
 Griddre : " 
 
 at 
 per 
 
 (the) which cry the 
 grido 
 
 cranes began to fly. Oh, blind ! oh, wretched ! oh, 
 grit, comincidre fuggire. cieco. ! ! 
 
 foolish man ! oh, how infirm thou art ! Alas (him) ! 
 mdtto ! qudnto infermo* tssere 1 ! ! 
 
 wretched (him) ! that the hog had been stolen from 
 / , * pdrco essere 2 imboldre 3 
 
 him to him. Heyday ! how well in tune she is ! 
 l . 3 tuono* l stare 2 ! 
 
 Courage, youn^g men, let us assault manly, and with 
 , giovane, assaltdre virile, 
 
 cheerful front, these drowsy people. Away, stay there 
 allegro fronte dormiglidne. , 
 
 with the other dogs. 
 cdne. 
 
PART III, 
 
 ITALIAN SYNTAX 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 ORDER AND POSITION OF WORDS. 
 
 WORDS may be arranged in. Italian either in the 
 natural order of the ideas which they are used to con- 
 vey ; as, io son r{cco, e spendo il mio in metier tavola, 
 ' I am rich, and spend; my money in keeping a good 
 table ' ; or in a somewhat different order, in which eu- 
 phony or emphasis is consulted ; as, in quella dimoran- 
 do, poco o niente potrebbe del suo valor dimostrare 
 [for potrebbe dimostrare poco o niente del suo valor, 
 dimorando in quella], c He could show little or nothing 
 of his valor, remaining there*' Hence there are two 
 different constructions, the one called simple or direct, 
 the other inverse or indirect. 
 
 SIMPLE CONSTRUCTION-.. 
 
 In the simple construction, the subjective is always put 
 before the verb. It is generally a pronoun, a noun, an 
 adjective or a verb used as a noun, or a phrase ; as, 
 
 io Amo,, 1 love ; 
 
 PIETRO fugge, Peter flies ; 
 
 IL BKLLO pidce, the beautiful pleases; 
 33* 
 
390 SYNTAX. 
 
 IL suo PARLARE mi pidcque [her speaking] her conversation 
 
 si, pleased me so; 
 
 CHE TU CON NOI Ti RiMAN- we should be very glad,i/*/um 
 
 <*A, n' e caro, wouldst remain with us. 
 
 The objective is put after the verb. It is generally 
 SL pronoun, a noun, an adjective, a verb, or a phrase; as, 
 
 guardate ME, look at me ; 
 
 dmo GUISCARDO, I love Guiscard ; 
 
 perdono IL BELLO, they lose [the beautiful] the 
 
 beauty ; 
 
 avendo compiuto IL suo CAN- having finished her ringing ; 
 
 TARE, 
 signified IL FATTO COME STA- declared the fact as it was. 
 
 VA, 
 
 If the subjective or objective have an article, this 
 article is put before them ; as, 
 
 GLI uomini sono capo delle [the] men are the head of wo- 
 
 femmine, men ; 
 
 IL capitdno cadde, e sconcios- the captain fell, and sprained 
 
 si IL piede, [the foot] his foot. 
 
 The adjectives belonging to the subjective and objec- 
 tive are put immediately after them ; as, 
 
 gli scoldri MORIGERATI e DI- the well-behaved and diligent 
 LIGENTI studiano, scholars study ; 
 
 U maestro primia gli scoldri the master rewards the atten- 
 ATTENTI e STUDIOSI, tive and studious scholars. 
 
 Any other word which is dependent on the subjective 
 or objective is also put immediately after them ; as, 
 
 la virtu DI PAOLO fa rico- the virtue of Paul was ac- 
 nosciuta, knowledged ; 
 
 nconosciva nei discendenti it acknowledged in the de- 
 la virtu DEL PADRE, scendants the virtue [of the 
 
 father} of their father. 
 
 The relative pronoun is put after its antecedent ; as, 
 
ORDER OF WORDS. 391 
 
 Lo sco/are, il QUALE nascdso the scholar, who had concealed 
 era, himself. 
 
 The adverb is put immediately after the verb, which 
 it modifies ; as, 
 
 dma ARDENTEMENTE la glo- he loves glory ardently. 
 ria, 
 
 The preposition is put before the word, which it gov- 
 erns ; as, 
 
 DI selva IN silva DAL crudil she flies from wood to wood to 
 5' invdla, avoid the pursuit q/*^e fero- 
 
 cious animal. 
 
 The conjunction is put between those parts of a sen- 
 tence, which it connects ; as, 
 
 gli augelletti, E i p&sci, E i the little birds, and the fishes, 
 Jioriy E T 6r6a, and the flowers, anc? the 
 
 grass. 
 
 The interjection has no fixed place, it having no in- 
 trinsic relation to the other words ; it is, however, gen- 
 erally put at the beginning of the phrase ; as, 
 
 OIME ! che e quello, che tu alas ! what is that you say ? 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Io SONO RICCO, E SPENDO IL I am rich, and spend my money 
 
 MIO IN METTER TAVOLA, ed ono- in keeping a good table to enter- 
 
 ro i miei concittadini. (Bocc. g. tain my fellow-citizens. 
 
 9. n. 9.) 
 
 IN Q,UELLA DiMORANDO, poco He could sbow little or nothing 
 
 o NIENTE POTREBBE DEL stjo of his valor, remaining there. 
 
 VALOR DIMOSTRARE. (BOCC. g. 
 
 10. n. 1.) 
 
 Io ho amdtOj e AMO GUISCAR- I have loved, and love GUIS- 
 
 DO. (Bocc. g. n. I.) card. 
 
 PiETRoBoccamdzzctFtiGGEcon Peter Boccamazza flies away 
 
 /' Jlgnoldlla, e truova ladroni. with Agnolella, and meets with 
 
 (Bocc. 5. n. 3.) thieve3. 
 
392 
 
 SYNTAX. 
 
 IL BIZLLO PIACE dgli occhi, e si The beautiful pleases the eyes, 
 ammira. (Vas.) and is admired. 
 
 E 'L StJO PARLARE, fi '/ 6^/ 01S0, 
 
 e le chiome MI PIACQUER si, ch 9 
 io Z' 7o dindnzi dgli occhi. ( Petr. 
 c.7.) 
 
 CHE TU CON NOI TI RIMAN- 
 GA per questa sera, N' E CARO. 
 (Bocc. g. 5. n. 3.) 
 
 GUARDATE ME, eke SOtl dl Vistd 
 
 priva. (Pign. Fav.) 
 
 Le donne, qudndo arrivano a 
 quardnta dnni, PERDONO IL BEL- 
 LO dilla gioventudine, e acqui- 
 stano il billo matrondle. (Lib. 
 Adorn. Donn.) 
 
 AVENDO gid COMPITJTO la J)6lla 
 ninfa IL stro CANT ARE. (Bocc. 
 Am.) 
 
 A lui si raccomandd, e SIGNI- He recommended himself to 
 nco IL, F^TTO COME STAVA. him, and declared the fact as it 
 (Ser. Giov. Fior. Pecor.) was. 
 
 And her conversation, and her 
 beautiful face, and her hair pleas- 
 ed me so, that I have her before 
 my eyes. 
 
 We should be very glad, if thou 
 wouldst remain to-night with us. 
 
 Look at me, that am deprived 
 of sight. 
 
 Women, when they arrive to 
 the age of forty, lose the beauty 
 of youth, and acquire that of ma- 
 trons. 
 
 The beautiful nymph having 
 finished her singing. 
 
 GLI UOMINI SONO DELLE FEM- 
 
 MINE CAPO, e senza V or dine loro 
 rdde volte riesce alcuna nostra 
 opera a laudevol fine. (Bocc. 
 Intr.) 
 
 IL CAPITANO CADDE, E SCON- 
 
 ciossi IL PIEDE in forma, che 
 non pote stare in piedi. (Matt. 
 Vill. 9. 11.) 
 
 GLI SCOLARI MORIGERATI E The well-behaved and diligent 
 DILIGENTI STUDIANO. (Cort. Os- scholars study, 
 serv.) 
 
 Men are the head of women, 
 and without their management it 
 seldom happens that any under- 
 taking of ours succeeds well. 
 
 The captain fell, and sprained 
 his foot in such a manner, that he 
 could stand no more. 
 
 IL MAETSTRO PREMIA GLI S COL A- 
 RI ATTENTI E STUDIOSI. (BuOHl. 
 
 Ling. Tosc.) 
 
 LA VIRTU DI PAOLO FU debita- 
 ininte RICONOSCIUTA. (Cavalc.) 
 
 Ma la ricordtvol pdtria RICO- 
 
 NOSCEVA NE 5 DISCENDENTI LA 
 VIRTU DEL PADRE. (Bott. StOf. 
 
 Am. 1. 9.) 
 
 The master rewards the atten- 
 tive and studious scholars. 
 
 The virtue of Paul was duly ac- 
 knowledged. 
 
 But the grateful country ac- 
 knowledged in the descendants the 
 virtues of their father. 
 
ORDER OF WORDS. 
 
 393 
 
 LO SCOLARE, IL QUALE, in SUl 
 
 fare della ndtte, col suo fdnte, 
 presso della torretta, NASCOSO 
 ERA. (Bocc. g. 8. n. 7.) 
 
 PietrO AMA ARDENTEMENTE LA 
 
 GLORIA. (Cort. Osserv.) 
 
 Dl SELVA IN SELVA DAL CRU- 
 
 DEL s' INVOLA. (Ariost. Fur. 1. 
 34.) 
 
 V deque pdrlan d' amore, e 
 r dura, e i rdrni, E GLI AUGEL- 
 
 LETTI, E I PESCI, E I F1ORI, E 
 
 ERBA ; Tutti insieme pre- 
 gdndo ch' i* sempr* ami. (Petr. 
 s. 239.) 
 
 OlME ! CHE tll!li.O, CHE 
 
 TU DI' ? (Bocc. g. 3. n. 1.) 
 
 The scholar, who, when it grew 
 night, had concealed himself, with 
 his servant, near the small tower. 
 
 Peter loves glory ardently. 
 
 She flies from wood to wood to 
 avoid the pursuit of the ferocious 
 animal. 
 
 The waters speak of love, and 
 the air, and the boughs, and the 
 little birds, and the fishes, and the 
 flowers, and the grass ; entreating 
 all together that I should always 
 love. 
 
 Alas ! what is it you say ? 
 
 INVERSE CONSTRUCTION. 
 
 With regard to inverse construction no certain rules 
 can be established, it varying according to the taste and 
 ear of the speaker or writer. It can only be said, that 
 in this construction the subjective may be put after the 
 verb ; as, 
 
 chiese i/ IMPERATORE dlla the Emperor asked of the Diet 
 Dieta tremila cavdllr, three thousand horses ; 
 
 presemi allora LA MIA SCOR- then my guide took me by the 
 TA per mdno, hand. 
 
 The objective may be put before the verb ; as, 
 
 s^ingcgnano IL LORO TEMPO they endeavour to pass away 
 
 di consumdre, their time ; 
 
 GRANDI BESTIE hdnno ntf 16- they have large beasts in their 
 
 ro boschi, woods. 
 
 The adjectives belonging to the subjective or the 
 objective, may be put before them ; as, 
 
394 
 
 SYNTAX. 
 
 quantunque fosse TONDO e although he was a. foolish man. 
 GROSSO 
 
 The other words dependent on the subjective or 06- 
 jective, may also be put before them ; as, 
 
 il [DI] cui nowie era Efige- whose name was Ephigenia. 
 nia, 
 
 The adverb may be put before the verb, which it 
 modifies ; as, 
 
 PIETOSAMENTE U chiamdva, she did call him with a lamen- 
 
 table voice. 
 
 
 
 The preposition may be put after the ivord, which it 
 governs ; as, 
 
 io TI vend AFPRESSO, I will come after thee. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 CHIESE L* IMPERATORE ALLA 
 DiETA, per tale impresa, TREMI- 
 LA CAVALLI, e seditimila fanti. 
 (Mach. lett,) 
 
 PRESEMI ALLORA LA MIA SCOR- 
 TA PER MANO. (Dant. Inf. 13.) 
 
 S* INGEGiVANO IL LORO TEMPO 
 
 DI CONSUMARE. (Bocc. g. 1. n. 8.) 
 
 GRANDI BESTIE HANNO NE' LO- 
 RD BOSCHI. (Day. Germ.) 
 
 QUANTUNQUE FOSSE TONDO E 
 
 GROSSO UOMO. (Bocc. g. 3. n. 3.) 
 
 IL GUI NOME ERA EriGENIA. 
 
 (Bocc. g. 5. n. 1.) 
 
 Assdi volte, la notte, PIETOSA- 
 
 MENTE IL CHIAMAVA. (BOCC. g. 
 
 4. n. 5.) 
 
 Or via ! mettiti avanti, io TI 
 
 VERRO APPRESSO. (BOCC. g. 2. 
 
 n, 5.) 
 
 The Emperor asked of the Diet, 
 for such an undertaking, three 
 thousand horses, and sixteen thou- 
 sand foot-soldiers. 
 
 Then my guide took me by the 
 hand. 
 
 They endeavour to pass away 
 their time. 
 
 They have large beasts in their 
 woods. 
 
 Although he was a foolish man. 
 Whose name was Ephigenia. 
 
 A great many times, during the 
 night, did she call him with a la- 
 mentable voice. 
 
 Come ! walk before, I will come 
 after thee. 
 
ORDER OF WORDS. 395 
 
 These inversibns are very common in Italian, and 
 add great expression and beauty to the phrase ; but in 
 using them we must always consult euphony. A learner 
 ought never to avail himself of such liberties, until, by 
 a competent knowledge of the language, and a long 
 perusal of the classics, he be able to appreciate their 
 value and to make use of them with propriety. 
 
 EXERCISE XXVII. 
 
 Rome was full of funerals, the capitol of victims. 
 Roma pieno mortorio, campidoglio vitiima. 
 
 I routed three legions, and three lieutenants. This house 
 atterrdre legione, legato. cdsa 
 
 is built 1 on I a high situation ; it has gar- 
 fabbricdre \ in \ emin6nte z sito 1 ; av6re giar- 
 
 dens, it has groves, it has plains and hills. The 
 dino, bosco, pianura collina. 
 
 conversation of Montanus pleased so- much the sen- 
 parldre Montana piacere send- 
 
 ate, that Elvidius Priscus hoped to be able to 
 
 to, Elvidio Prisco sperdre di pot&re ab- 
 
 conquer even Marcellus. Many wives have spoiled 
 bdttere Mar cello. moglie 3 l guastdre 
 
 (the) their husbands. He made him dress nobly. 
 marito. fdre* l vesttre 4 nobile 3 . 
 
 Fulvius, who had been consul, and had already I tri- 
 Fulvio, 6ssere console, | tri- 
 
 umphed over the 
 onfatore d6* 
 
 Gauls, the most illustrious of (the) 
 Gdllo, illustre 
 
 thy followers, was killed by the Patricians in a bath 
 
 stgudce, uccidere Padre bdgno 
 
 together with a son I of his I as beautiful as innocent. 
 
 figliuolo* I l I leggiddro innocent^. 
 
396 SYNTAX. 
 
 There came a merchant I of Cyprus, 
 Venire mercatdnte \ Cipridno, 
 
 much beloved 
 3 amdre 4 
 
 by him. Thou seest, that it is useless to pray 
 
 2 . ved6re, inutile 
 
 and to weep (the praying and the weeping.) 
 
 pregdre pidngere. 
 
 Nothing else has been left to me of the inherit- 
 
 8 dssere 11 rimanen? 10 * 2 eredi- 
 
 ance of (the) my ancestors, except (the) my honor ; 
 
 td 3 4 56 dvolo 1 , 12 13 onestci; 
 
 and that I intend I to 
 2 intendere 1 di 
 
 guard, and I to I preserve 
 guarddre, \ di \ servdre 
 
 as long as I live (the life will last to me). 
 
 durdre* l 
 
 To be contented (the being contented) I with (the) 
 
 essere contento \ di 
 
 his own condition, to moderate (the) excessive desires, 
 proprio stdto, moderdre soverchio 2 desiderio 1 , 
 
 not to allow himself neither to be transported 1 by I 
 lascidre^^ trasportdre \ ad \ 
 
 excessive joy in (the) prosperities, nor to be overcome 
 eccessivo gioia prosperita, abbdttere 
 
 | by (the) misfortunes, form the character of a wise 
 I in disgrdzia, formdre cardttere sdggio 2 
 
 man. He could not appease the angry mother with 
 udrno 1 . potere b 4 attutdre 6 l irdto 2 mddre 3 
 
 any act of generosity. Plato asserts, that in 
 niuno larghezza. Platone 2 "^ - f 
 
 literary disputes (in (the) disputes of (the) letters) 
 
 disputazione letter a 
 
 it is more useful to be conquered (the being 
 
 utile essere 
 
 conquered) than to conquer. 
 mncere mncere. 
 
CONCORDANCE OF WORDS. 397 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 CONCORDANCE OR AGREEMENT OF WORDS. 
 
 CONCORDANCE OF ARTICLES. 
 
 ARTICLES agree with nouns, in gender and number ; 
 as, 
 
 iisfratello, LA sorell^ the brother, the sister ; 
 
 LI pddn, LE mddrij the fathers, the mothers ; 
 
 LA donnA, IL marlto 9 the wife, the husband ; 
 
 i Jigliuoli, the children. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 L* unfratello V altro abbando- One brother abandoned the 
 
 ndva,ei*A. SORELLA IL FRATELLO, other, and the sister the brother, 
 
 e sptsse volte LA. DONNA IL suo and oftentimes the wife her hus- 
 
 MARITO. (Bocc. Intr.) band. 
 
 E che maggior cosa , LI pi- And what is more, the fathers 
 
 DRI e JLE MADRI, i FiGi.iuoLi di and the mothers shunned to visit 
 
 visit are e di servire schivdvano. and serve their children. 
 (Bocc. Intr.) 
 
 CONCORDANCE OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 Adjectives, as we have already observed at p. 63, 
 are to agree with their substantives, in gender and num- 
 ber 5 as, 
 
 uomo DOTTO, buonA GENTE, a learned man, good people ; 
 BELLE donnE, LEGGIADRI fair women, pretty youths* 
 fanciulli, 
 
 34 
 
398 SYNTAX. 
 
 Adjectives are also to agree with personal, conjunc- 
 tive, and relative pronouns^ in gender and number ; as, 
 
 10 (fern.) son VIVA, I arn alive ; 
 voi (masc.) siite LONTANI, you are far ; 
 
 vi (fem.) Idscio LIBE.RA di I leave you at the disposal of 
 
 Nicoluccio, Nicoluccio ; 
 
 per renderci (masc.) FORTI to make us strong and invin- 
 
 ed INVINCIBILI, cible ; 
 
 qudndo LA videro SOLA, when they saw her alone ; 
 
 11 QUALI erano motto LTJNGHI, which were very long. 
 
 When two or more substantives singular of the same 
 gender come together, the adjectives belonging to them 
 are put in the plural, agreeing with a noun of the same 
 gender understood ; as, 
 
 LICTA e CALLIMACO [quest! Lycias and Callimachus [these 
 
 due individui] sono RICCHI, two individuals'] are rich ; 
 
 MAIUA e LuciA [queste due Mary and Lucy [these two girls] 
 
 fanciiille] sono FOVERE, are poor. 
 
 If the substantives are of different genders or different 
 numbers, the adjectives are put in the plural, agreeing 
 with a masculine noun understood ; as, 
 
 IL PADRE e LA MAD RE del- the father and the mother of 
 la Lisa, CONTE.NTI, ftcero Lisa, both glad, expressed 
 grandissimafestaj very great joy ; 
 
 LA CORTE TUTTA, I SOVRAjNI the whole COUrt, the SOV6- 
 
 sono sommamente CONTEN- reigns are well satisfied. 
 
 EXCEPTION. 
 
 If, however, one of the substantives is preceded by the preposition 
 con, ' with,' ' in company with ' ; then the adjective or participle used 
 as an adjective, may agree either with the other substantive, or with a 
 noun in the plural understood ; as, 
 
 essendosi PIONEO con gli dltri Dioneo and the other youths hav- 
 
 giovani MESSD a giucdre, ing set themselves to play ; 
 
 esse"ndosi LA DONNA COL GIO- the lady and the young man hav- 
 
 VANE POSTI a tdvola, ing sat down to table. 
 
CONCORDANCE OF WORDS. 
 
 399 
 
 When there are in a phrase several substantives of 
 different gender and different number, separated from 
 their adjective by a verb either expressed or understood; 
 the adjective is put in the plural, agreeing with a mascu- 
 line noun understood 
 
 as, 
 
 LE mie CASE ed i LUOGHI 
 pubblici di Roma, SON PIE- 
 NI d* antiche immdgini, 
 
 IL PADRE di lei e LA MAD RE, 
 [essendo] DOLOROSI di 
 questo accidente, V atdvano, 
 
 my houses and the public pla- 
 ces of Rome are filled with 
 ancient images ; 
 
 both her father and her mother, 
 [being] grieved at this acci- 
 dent, relieved her. 
 
 If several names of inanimate beings occur in the 
 same phrase, and they are not separated from their' 
 adjective by a verb ; this adjective agrees with the near- 
 est noun ;* as, 
 
 onori e GLORIA NUOVA, 
 con bdrba e CRINI BAGNATI, 
 V una e V ALTRA MAN MOZZA, 
 
 new honors and glory ; 
 
 with a dripping beard and hair ; 
 
 both hands cut off. 
 
 The adjective agrees also with the nearest noun, 
 when there are in the same phrase several substantives, 
 and the quality expressed by that adjective is affirmed 
 or denied to belong, successively or alternatively, to 
 either of them ; as, 
 
 Pittro o MARIA MORTA, either Peter or Mary is dead ; 
 ne Francesco, ne GIOVANNI neither Frances nor John has 
 
 71071 & PARTITO, 
 
 gone ; 
 
 un tizzo, un carbone, TJNA a brand, a coal, a spark might 
 TAVILLA e ATTA ad appic- set fire. 
 cdrfuoco, 
 
 * Contrary to this rule is the following example in Boccaccio: 
 
 Se cosi giidato aveste, ella avrebbe cost 
 L? A'LTRA CO'SCIA, e V tiltro pi& fudr 
 MANDA'IA. (G. 6. n. 4.) 
 
 If you had cried out so, it (the crane) 
 would have likewise put out the other 
 leg and the other foot. 
 
400 SYNTAX. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 An adjective accompanied with a substantive feminine applicable to 
 a man, is put in the masculine gender ; as, 
 
 LA PERSONA qudndo e TRIBOLA- when a person is afflicted ; 
 TO, 
 
 QUELL A BESTIA [di Tofano] era that stupid ass [Tofano] was dis- 
 pur DISPOSTO, posed. 
 
 The adjective mezzo, l half,' when it precedes a substantive, agrees 
 with it in gender ; but when it follows , it remains invariable ; as, 
 
 in sulla MEZZA NOTTE, about midnight; 
 
 una libbra e MEZZO di castrone, one pound and a half of mutton ; 
 
 ventitre e MEZZO cardti, twenty-three carats and a half. 
 
 The adjective salvo, signifying 'except'; remains invariable', as, 
 
 SALVO la Mdrca Tnvigidna, except the Trevisan March ; 
 
 SALVO quelli delle case eccettu- except those of the families ex- 
 ate per Ghibellini, ' eluded as Ghibellines. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 UOMO DOTTO delle Scritture. A man learned in Holy Writ. 
 (Cavalc. Att. Apost. 113.) 
 
 Ndta di BUONA e virtuosa Born of good and virtuous peo- 
 
 (Aiiost. Fur. 18. 82.) pie. 
 
 Qvdnte BELLE DONNE, quanti How many fair women, how 
 
 LEGGIADRI FANCitiLLi, la s6ra many pretty youths, the coming 
 
 vegntnte, nelV dltro mdndo ce- evening, supped in the other 
 
 ndrono con li loro passdti! (Bocc. woild with their departed friends ! 
 Intr.) . 
 
 Io SON VIVA, la Dio merce. I am alive, thank God. 
 (Bocc. g. 9. n. 9.) 
 
 Considerdndo, che voi SI^TE Considering, that you are far 
 
 dalle vostre donne LONTANI. from your wives. 
 (Bocc. g. 10. n. 9 ) 
 
 Madonna, omdi da ogni pro- Madam, I free you from all your 
 
 messa fdttami io vi assolvo. e LI- promises to me, and I leave you at 
 
 BERA vi LASCIO DI NicoLuccio. the disposal of Nicoluccio, 
 (Bocc. g. 10. n. 4.) 
 
CONCORDANCE OF WORDS. 
 
 401 
 
 jfcgli mine ad unire la sua pos- 
 sanza colla ndstra deboltzza, PER 
 
 RENDERCI FORTI ED INVIJVClBILI. 
 
 (Gang.) 
 
 Li quali, QUAIVDO LA VIDERO 
 SOLA, dissero. (Bocc. g. 5. n. 3.) 
 
 Jllessdndro, levdtosi presta- 
 m6nte, con tutto che i pdnni del 
 morto avesse inddsso, LI QUALI 
 EUANO MOLTO LUNGHi,/?wre andd 
 via altresl. (Bocc. g. 9. n. 1.) 
 
 Messer LICIA E CALLIMACO 
 SON RICCHL (Mach. Com.) 
 
 Ma MARIA E LUCIA SONO PO- 
 VERE. (Mach. Com.) 
 
 Perdicone, e 'L PADRE E LA 
 
 MADRE BELLA LlSA, ed Hid al- 
 treSl CONTENTI, GRANDfsSIMA 
 FESTA FECERO. (BOCC. g. 10. 
 
 n.7.) 
 
 Dovevate dirmi, che LA CORTE 
 
 TUTTA, Che I SOVRANI SONO SOM- 
 MAMENTE CONTENTI, (Metast. 
 
 lett) 
 
 ESSENDOSI DlONEO CON GLI AL- 
 TRI G1OVANI MESSO A GIUCARE. 
 
 (Bocc. g. 6. n. 10.) 
 
 ESSENDOSI LA DONNA COL GIO- 
 VANE POSTI A TAVOLA per cendre. 
 (Bocc. g. 5. n. 10.) 
 
 LE MIE CASE ED I LUOGHI PUB- 
 BLICI DI ROMA SON P1ENI D J AN- 
 
 TICHE IMMAGINI d&* miH mag- 
 giori. (Bocc. g. 10. n. 8.) 
 
 TL PADRE DI LEI E LA MADRE, 
 DOLOROSI DI QUESTO ACCIDENTE, 
 
 in cid che si pvtdva, L,' ATAVANO. 
 (Bocc. g. 10. n. 7.) 
 
 E cosa manifestissima, che 6g- 
 gi non mine in consulta se ha 
 a rifiutdre V oocasione d* acqui- 
 stdre ONORI E GLORIA NUOVA. 
 (Guicc.) 
 
 34* 
 
 ^He comes to unite his strength 
 with our weakness, to make us 
 strong and invincible. 
 
 Who, when they saw her alone, 
 said. 
 
 Alexander, getting up quickly, 
 although he was dressed in the 
 clothes of the deceased, which 
 were very long, went away like- 
 wise. 
 
 Messer Lycias and Messer Cal- 
 limachus are rich. 
 
 But Mary and Lucy are poos. 
 
 Perdicone, and the father and 
 the mother of Lisa, and herself, all 
 glad, expressed great joy. 
 
 You ought to have told me, that 
 the whole court, and the sove- 
 reigns are well satisfied. 
 
 Dioneo and the other youths 
 having set themselves to play. 
 
 The lady and the young man 
 having sat down to supper. 
 
 My houses and the public places 
 of Rome are filled with ancient im- 
 ages of my ancestors. 
 
 Both her father and her mother, 
 grieved at that accident, did all in 
 their power to relieve her. 
 
 It is a manifest thing, that none 
 comes now to a consultation 
 whether he is to refuse the oppor- 
 tunity of gaining new honors and 
 glory. 
 
402 
 
 SYNTAX. 
 
 V Oceano si far a ddlla destra, 
 un omaccione CON BARBA E CRI- 
 NI BAGNATI. (Ann. Car. lett.) 
 
 Ed un, che avea L' UNA E 
 
 I/ ALTRA MAN MOZZA, DlSSC. 
 
 (Daut. Inf. 28.) 
 
 PIETRO o MARIA i: MORTA. 
 (Mach. Com.) 
 
 NE FRANCESCA NE GIOVANNI 
 NON E PARTITO. (Buon. Tanc.) 
 
 UN TIZZO, UN CARBONE, UNA 
 
 FAVILLA E ATTA AD APPICCAR 
 FUOCO. (Cavalc.) 
 
 LA PERSONA QUANDO E TRIBO- 
 
 LATO si dice e pinsa, che Iddw 
 V dbbia in 6dio. (Fra. Giord. 
 Pred.) 
 
 Li pritghi non giovdvano al- 
 cuna cosa, perchb QUELLA BES- 
 
 TIA ERA PUR D1SPOSTO a VoUfC 
 
 (Bocc. g. 7. n. 4.) 
 
 VUntene IN SULLA MEZZA 
 NOTTE. (Bocc. g. 3. n. 7.) 
 
 TdgU UNA LIBBRA E MEZZO DI 
 
 CASTRONE. (Burch. p. 2. s. 1.) 
 
 LA montta di VENTITRE E MEZ- 
 ZO CARATI,. (Giov. Vill. 1. 8. 
 c. 58.) 
 
 Rendtgli la Signoria di Lorn- 
 bardia, SALVO LA MARC A TRIVI- 
 GIANA. (Giov. Viil. 1. 3. c. 5.) 
 
 Fecero ordine e decrito, che 
 ciascuno potesse uscire dal bdndo, 
 
 SALVO QUELLI DELLE CASE EC- 
 CETTUATE PER GHIBELL1NI. 
 
 (Giov. Vill. 1. 6.) 
 
 As for the Ocean, it is to be 
 rej resented on the right, as a 
 large man with a dripping beard 
 and hair. 
 
 And one, who had both hands 
 cut off, said. 
 
 Either Peter or Mary is dead. 
 
 Neither Frances nor John has 
 gone. 
 
 A brand, a coal, a spark might 
 set fire. 
 
 When a person is afflicted, peo- 
 ple say and believe God hates 
 him. 
 
 Entreaties were of no use, be- 
 cause that stupid ass [Tofano] 
 was disposed to wish 
 
 Come about midnight. 
 
 Take a pound and a half of 
 mutton. 
 
 The coins of twenty-three ca- 
 rats and a half. 
 
 He restored to him the Signo- 
 ry of Lombardy, except the Tre- 
 visan March. 
 
 They ordained and decreed, that 
 every one could return from ban- 
 ishment, except those of the fam- 
 ilies excluded as Ghibellines. 
 
CONCORDANCE OF WORDS. 
 
 403 
 
 CONCORDANCE OF NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. 
 
 Numeral adjectives agree 
 gender and number ; as, 
 
 Plafond vivttte OTTANTUNO 
 ANNO, 
 
 pare descenders dltre NO VAN- 
 TUNA RUOTA, 
 
 it TERZO GIORNO dalV appa- 
 rizione dti sopradetti se- 
 gni, 
 
 in quei PRIMI GIORNI, vi vo- 
 id sopra la testa uri> dqui- 
 
 with their substantives, in 
 
 Plato lived eighty-one years ; 
 
 he seems to descend ninety- 
 one more circles ; 
 
 the third day after the appear- 
 ance of the abovementioned 
 symptoms ; 
 
 in those first days, an eagle 
 flew over your head. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Jlbbidmo di PLATONE, che es- 
 
 80 VIVETTE OTTANTUNO ANJVO. 
 
 (Dant. Conv.) 
 Poi per la medesima via PARE 
 
 DESCENDERS ALTRE NOVA^TUNA 
 
 RUOTA. (Dant. Conv.) 
 
 JVnzi quasi tutti, infra IL TER- 
 ZO GIORNO DALL' APPARIZIONE 
 
 DEI SOPRADETTI SEGN I,m0rivan0. 
 
 (Bocc. Intr.) 
 
 E Che IX QUEI PRIMI GIORNI, 
 
 di sul nwnte dejla Trinity, vi 
 
 VOLO SOPRA LA TESTA UN* AQUI- 
 
 LA. (Bemb.) 
 
 They say that Plato lived eighty- 
 one years. 
 
 Then he seems to descend nine- 
 ty-one more circles by the same 
 way. 
 
 Nay almost all died the third 
 day after the appearance of the 
 abovementioned symptoms. 
 
 And that in those first days, on 
 the mountain of the Trinity, an 
 eagle flew over your head. 
 
 CONCORDANCE OF PRONOUNS. 
 
 Adjective pronouns agree with their substantives, in 
 gender and number 5 as, 
 
 teneie QUEST o DEN^RO, take this money ; 
 
404 SYNTAX. 
 
 non rimarrebbe a sostentr there would not remain any 
 NESSUNA PENA, punishment to suffer. 
 
 EXCEPTION. 
 
 The pronoun tutto, preceded by the preposition per, through ' ; re- 
 mains invariable j as, 
 
 per TtfTTo Rojna, [through all or] all over Rome ; 
 
 per TUTTO la cdsa, all over the house. 
 
 Possessive pronouns agree with the thing possessed, 
 and not with the possessor ; as, 
 
 Monna Giovdnna sen 9 andd- Monna Giovanna used to go 
 va con questo suo FI- with this son of hers ; 
 
 GLIUOLO, 
 
 Fresco aveva una SUA NEPO- Fresco had a niece. 
 
 TE, 
 
 The relative pronoun quale, c which ' ; agrees with its 
 antecedent, in gender and number \ as, 
 
 quel CUORE, IL QUALE la lie- that heart, which propitious 
 tafortuna non avea potuto fortune had not been able to 
 aprire, move. 
 
 If the antecedent consists of two .or more nouns of 
 different gender or number, the relative quale agrees 
 with the nearest noun ; as, 
 
 la virtu e I 9 ONORE DEL QUA- the virtue and honor with 
 
 LE e dotdta, which she is endowed ; 
 
 i QUALI TEMPJ e cappelle ri- which temples and chapels he 
 
 empie di paramentij filled with ornaments. 
 
 EXAM PLES. 
 
 Sig7i6ra, TENETE QUESTO BE- Madam, take this money. 
 NARO. (Bocc. g. 8. n. 1.) 
 
 Che NON RIMARREBBE A sos- That there would not remain 
 TENER PEN A NEssuNA nel purga- in purgatory any punishment to 
 torio per gli peccdti. (Pass.) suffer for sins. 
 
CONCORDANCE OF WORDS. 
 
 405 
 
 Sono stato PER TUTTO ROMA. 
 L' ho cercdf.o PER TUTTO LA 
 cisA. (Salv. Avvert. vol. 1. 1. 3.) 
 
 GlOVANNA CON QUESTO 
 StJO- FIGLIUOLO SEN' ANDAVA. f 
 
 contddo. (Bocc. g. 5. n. 9.) 
 7/10, cfte si chiamd FRESCO, 
 
 AVEVA UNA SUA NEPOTE. (BoCC. 
 
 g. 6. n. 8.) 
 
 QUEL CUORE, IL QUALE LA LIE- 
 TA FORTUNA DI GlllOLAMO NON 
 
 AVEA POTUTO APRIRE, la misdria 
 V aperse. (Bocc. g. 4. n. 8.) 
 
 LA VIRTU E L' ONORE DEL 
 ^UALE E DOTATA. (BoCC. g. 5. 
 
 n. 6.) 
 
 OUre di quest o, f^ce fare altdri 
 e cappelle splendidissime, i QUALI 
 
 TEMPJ E CAPPELLE RIKMPIE DI 
 
 PARAMENTI. (Mach. Sior. Flor. 
 1.7.) 
 
 I have been all over Rome. 
 I have looked for it all over the 
 house. 
 
 Monna Giovanna used to go 
 into the country with this son of 
 hers. 
 
 A certain man, called Fresco, 
 had a niece. 
 
 That heart, which the propitious 
 fortune of Jerome had not been 
 able to open, was opened by his 
 misery. 
 
 The virtue and honor with which 
 she is endowed. 
 
 Besides that, he caused very 
 splendid altars and chapels to be 
 built, which temples and chapels 
 he filled with ornaments. 
 
 CONCORDANCE OF VERBS. 
 
 Verbs are to agree with their sutyectives, either ex- 
 pressed or understood, in number and person ; as, 
 
 1O ti CONSOLER6, 
 
 v6r non UDISTE, 
 [io] BRAMO la mdrte, 
 
 I will gratify thee ; 
 you did not hear ; 
 I desire death. 
 
 When the subjective consists of several nouns, which 
 all concur simultaneously to perf>rm the action of the 
 verb, the verb agrees with a noun in the plural under- 
 stood ; as, 
 
 CONSIGLIO e RAGIOIVE [qu6- advice and reason [these two 
 ste cMc cose] coNotfcoNO things] lead to viatory ; 
 la vittoria, 
 
406 
 
 SYNTAX. 
 
 CALANDRISO, BRTJNO,^ BUF- 
 FALMACCO [qu6sti tre sog- 
 getti] VANNO cercdndo di 
 trovdr V elitropict, 
 
 nt LA SUA PARTITA, 716 LA 
 St7A LU.NGA DIMORA, 7l LA 
 SVE.NTURATA SUA MORTE, 
 
 me V HA N NO POTUTO trdr- 
 re dal cuore, 
 
 Calandrino, Bruno, and Buflfal- 
 macco [these three persons] 
 go in search of the helio- 
 trope ;* 
 
 neither his departure, nor his 
 long absence, nor his la- 
 mentable death, has been 
 able to take him out of my 
 heart. 
 
 When there are in a phrase several subjectives, and these are of two 
 or more different persons ; as, io e tu 9 ' I and thou '; tu ed egli, ' thou 
 and he ' ; c., the verb agrees with a personal pronoun in the plural 
 understood. 
 
 Thus, if one of the subjectives is io, l l 7 ; the pronoun understood 
 with which the verb will agree, is not, l we ' ; if one of the subjectives 
 is tUj and w is not one of the others, the pronoun understood is voi, 
 1 you ' ; and if the subjectives are all of the third person, the pronoun 
 understood is eglino, elleno t or essi, * they ' ; as ; t 
 
 STECCHI thou on one side and Stecchi on 
 
 TU dalV un Idto e 
 
 daW dltro [v6i].7wi VERRETE 
 
 SOSTENENDO, 
 
 come sdi tu, chi MIO MARITO o 
 io [noi] ci SIAMO ? 
 
 the 
 
 me 
 
 other [you] will support 
 
 how dost thou know who my hus- 
 band and I [we] are ? 
 
 EGLI e ELLA [essi] CFNARONO he and she [they] supped on a lit- 
 
 un poco di cdrne saldta, tie salt beef; 
 
 TU, EGLI, SfRO, e io [noi] PI- thou, he, Cyrus, and I [we] will 
 
 GLIERAMO uno per take a man for 
 
 vorrei che voi o EGLINO mi DI- I wish that eitfier you or they 
 
 CESTE, would tell me. 
 
 If the subjective consists of several nouns, and the ac- 
 tion of the verb can be performed, either -successively or 
 
 * A kind of precious stone, which was believod to possess the virtue of render- 
 ing invisible the persona who carried it about them. See Dant. Inf. 24 ; Bocc. g. 8. 
 n. 3j Franc. Sacch. Op. Div. 93. 
 
 t There are two examples in Dante in which this rule appears to have been dis- 
 regarded for the sake of rhyme : 
 
 Tdsto che IL DU'CA. ed i'o net leg-no 
 FU'I. (Daut. Inf 8.) 
 
 De> quai n i'o, n& IL DU'CA MI'O 
 s' ACCO'RSE. (Dant. Inf.) 
 
 but such licenses are not to be followed. 
 
 As soon as my leader and I entered in 
 the boat ; 
 
 Of whom neither I nor my leader was 
 aware : 
 
CONCORDANCE OF WORDS. 407 
 
 alternatively, by either of them, the verb agrees with the 
 nearest noun \ as, 
 
 MUOVASI LA CAPRAIA e la may Capraia and Gorgona rise 
 Gorgona, from their foundations ; 
 
 qudlforluna o DESTINO quag- what fortune or destiny brings 
 giu ti MENA ? thee here below ? 
 
 non Cinna, non SILLA si- neither Cinna nor Sylla ruled 
 GNOREGGIO lungamente, long. 
 
 Sometimes one of the nouns, which form the subjective 
 of the verb, is a word which in itself includes the signi- 
 fication of all the others, and then the verb agrees di- 
 rectly with this word ; as, 
 
 nl voi, ne ALTRI mi POTRA neither you nor any other one 
 piu dire ch? io non V dbbia will be able to tell me any 
 veduta, longer that I have not seen 
 
 it; 
 
 ne piopgia'caduta, nk dcqua neither the rain which had fal- 
 giitdta,n ALTRO UMIDORE len, nor the water which 
 gli SPEGNEVA, they threw on it, nor any 
 
 other wet thing extinguished 
 them. 
 
 If the subjective .consists of two nouns, the one of 
 which is, as it were, a part of the other which expresses 
 the whole, the verb agrees with the whole, and not with 
 the part ; as, 
 
 la maggidr pdrte dP suoi so- the greater part of his friends 
 
 NO mortiy are dead ; 
 
 una infinitti di STROMENTI a great number of instruments 
 
 FURONO prepardti, were prepared. 
 
 Sometimes the noun expressing the whole is under- 
 stood ; as, 
 
 la maggior partita [di indi- the greater part [of the indi- 
 vidiii] FURONO morti, viduals] were killed. 
 
408 SYNTAX. 
 
 When the subjective is a collective noun, the verb is 
 put in the singular ; * as, 
 
 perche QUEL POPOLO E si tm- why is that people so fell ? 
 
 pio? 
 
 m' APPARI tfNA GENTE rf' <$- a troop of spirits appeared to 
 
 nime, rne ; 
 
 VENIA MAGGIOR FROTTA di there came a greater crowd of 
 
 Romdni, Romans, 
 
 If the subjective is a verb used as a noun, or a phrase, 
 the verb is put in the singular ; as, 
 
 IL VOLERE SOTTOMETTERE LE the wish to oppose my strength 
 
 Mis FORZE A GROSsisstMi to very heavy burdens is the 
 
 PESI, m' E tagione di que- occasion of this weakness. 
 sta infermitti, 
 
 Sometimes the subjective of the verb is represented 
 by the relative pronoun che, ' who,' ' which ' ; and then 
 the verb agrees with the noun or pronoun, represented 
 by che ; either expressed or understood ;f as, 
 
 i' son Beatrice che ti FACCIO I am Beatrice, who bids thee 
 an dare, to go ; 
 
 * Instances may be quoted from tho classics, however, in which the verb is put in 
 the plural ; as, 
 
 L'innoche ^UE'LLA GE'NTE all6r CAN- The hymn, whith those people then 
 TA'RO. (Dant. Purg. 32.) sung. 
 
 Potetevedere c6me IL COMU'PTE PO'POLO You may see how ignorant of the true 
 
 E'BANO ignordnti del vero Iddio. (Giov. God the common people were. 
 Vill. 1. 1. c. 26.) 
 
 LA SU'A FAMI'GLIA AVE'VANO un di One day his family took a potter for 
 
 preso un pentoldio per malleveria. (Nov. bail : 
 Ant. 83.) 
 
 but this usage is carefully avoided by modern writers. 
 
 t Examples may be found, nevertheless, in which the verb agrees directly with 
 the relative pronoun che, without any reference to the noun or pronoun, which it 
 represenis j as, 
 
 J'o son colei, CHE ti Die tdnta guerra, I am she, who caused thee so much 
 
 E COMVIC siia giornala inndnzi aera. trouble, and who closed her day before 
 
 (Petr. s. 3b'l.) its evening. 
 
 Or sP tu quclla Cor'isca, CHE trad'ito Now art. thou that Corisca, who has 
 
 tn' HA in tdntt rn6dil Corisca son ben betrayed me in so many different ways? 
 
 io, CH' dgli occhi tuoi Un tempo I am indeed that Corisca, who was 
 
 FU si cdra. (Guar. Past. Fid. 2. 6.) once so dear in your eyes. 
 
CONCORDANCE OF WORDS. 
 
 409 
 
 io son colui, che TENNI dmbo 
 le chidvi, 
 
 poeta, [tu] che mi GU!DI, 
 
 O frdti, [voi] che SIETE 
 giunti all* occidente, 
 
 uno de* sette REGJ, che Assi- 
 SI^RO Tebe, 
 
 uno di QUEGLI, cheil POSERO 
 in croce. 
 
 I am he, who held both the 
 keys; 
 
 poet \ [thou] who art my guide ; 
 
 O brothers ! [you] who have 
 now reached the west ; 
 
 one of the seven kings, who be- 
 sieged Thebes ; 
 
 one of those, who put him on 
 the cross. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 IO TI CONSOLERO dl COsl lllHgO 
 
 desio. (Bocc. g. 7. n. 7.) 
 
 Graziose donne, voi NON UDI- 
 STE forse mdi dire. (Bocc. g. 3. 
 n. 10.) 
 
 Che per minor martir LA MOR- 
 TE BRAMO. (Bocc. g. 4. Canz.) 
 
 CONSIGLIO E RAGIONE CONDtJ" 
 CONO LA VITTORIA. (DaV. St.) 
 
 CALANDRINO, BRUNO, E BUF- 
 FALMACCO VANNO CERCANDO DI 
 
 TROVAR L' EL1TROPIA, 6 Cdlan- 
 
 drino se la crede aver trovdta. 
 (Bocc. g. 8. n. 3.) 
 
 NE LA SUA PARTITA, NE LA 
 SUA LUNGA DIMORA, NE LA SVEN- 
 TTJRATA StJA MORTE, ME L' HAN- 
 NO POTUTO TRARRE DAL CUORE. 
 
 (Bocc.) 
 
 Tu DALL' UN LATO, E STECCHI 
 DALL' ALTRO, MI VERRETE sos- 
 
 TENENDO. (BOCC. g. 2. D. 1.) 
 
 " COME," disse la donna, c< SAI 
 
 TU CHI MO MARITO O IO CI SIA- 
 MO ? " 
 
 EGLI E ELLA CENARONO UN 
 POCO DI CARNE SALATA. (BOCC. 
 
 g. 7. n. 1.) ^ 
 
 35 
 
 I will gratify thee in so long a 
 desire. 
 
 Charming ladies, perhaps you 
 never heard say. 
 
 I desire death to lessen my suf- 
 ferings. 
 
 Advice and reason lead to vic- 
 tory. 
 
 Calandrino, Bruno, and Buffal- 
 macco go in search of the helio- 
 trope, and Calandrino believes he 
 has found it. 
 
 Neither his departure, nor his 
 long absence, nor his lamentable 
 death, have been able to take him 
 out of my heart. 
 
 Thou on one side, and Stecchi 
 on the other, will support me. 
 
 " How dost thou know," said 
 the lady, " who my husband and 
 I are ? " 
 
 He and she supped on a little 
 salt beef. 
 
410 
 
 SYNTAX. 
 
 Tu, EGH, SlRO, E IO PIGLIE- 
 REMO TJNO PER ..... (Mach. 
 
 Mandrag.) 
 
 VORREI CHE VOI O &GL18O MI 
 
 DICESTE. (Ben. Varch.) 
 
 MUOVASI LA CAPRAIA E LA 
 GORGONA, E fdccian siepe ad 
 A'rno in su la foce. (Dant. Inf. 
 c. 33.) 
 
 QUAL FORTTJJVA O DESTINO, 
 
 A'nzi V ultimo di, QUAGGIU TI 
 MENA ? (Dant. Inf. 15.) 
 
 NON ClNNA, NON SfLLA, 81- 
 GNOREGGIO LUNGAMENTE. (DaV. 
 
 Stor.) 
 
 " Fated dipmgere la Cortesia." 
 " I'o cela faro dipmgere di 
 maniira> die mai NE voi, NE 
 ALTRI, con ragione, MI POTRA 
 
 PIU DIRE, CH' 10 NON I/ ABBIA 
 
 VEDUTA, ne conosciuta." (Bocc. , 
 g. 1. n. 8.) 
 
 NE PIOGGIA CADTJTA, iXE AC- 
 QUA GITTATA, NE ALTRO UMIDO- 
 
 RE GLI SPEGWEVA. (Dav. Ann.) 
 Ciascuna di noi sa che PE J 
 
 SUOI SONO LA MAGGIOR PARTE 
 
 MORTI. (Bocc. Intr.) 
 
 UNA IJVFINITA DI STROMENTI 
 
 da dar martorio FI^RONO PRE- 
 PARATI. (Fir. As. 71.) 
 
 LA MAGGIOR PARTITA FURONO 
 
 MORTI e taglidti, e pdrte presi. 
 (Giov. Vill. 1. 7. c. 19.) 
 
 Dimrni, PERCHE Q.UEL POPOLO 
 i; si EMPIO Incontr* 6} mici in 
 ciascuna zua l&gge? (Dant. Inf. 
 10.) 
 
 Da man sinistra M' APPARI 
 
 UNA GEXTE D^ ANIME, Che mO- 
 
 vieno i pie ver noi. (Dant. Purg. 
 3.) 
 
 Thou, he, Syrus, and I, will 
 take a man for 
 
 I wish that either you or they 
 would tell me. 
 
 May Capraia and Gorgona rise 
 from their foundations, and dam up 
 the mouth of Arno. 
 
 What fortune or destiny brings 
 thee here below, before thy last 
 day? 
 
 Neither Cinna, nor Sylla ruled 
 long. 
 
 " Cause Liberality to be- paint- 
 ed there."- " I will cause it to 
 be painted there in such a manner, 
 that neither you nor any other 
 one, will be able to tell me any 
 longer, that I have never seen it, 
 or known it." 
 
 Neither the rain which had fal- 
 len, nor the water which they 
 threw on it, nor any other wet 
 thing extinguished them. 
 
 Every one of us knows, that 
 the greater part of our friends are 
 dead. 
 
 A great number of instruments 
 of torture were prepared. 
 
 The greater part were killed 
 and cut to pieces, and some taken. 
 
 Tell me, why is that people so 
 fell against my kin in all their 
 laws ? 
 
 On the left hand appeared to 
 me a troop of spirits, that moved 
 their steps towards us. 
 
CONCORDANCE OF WORDS. 
 
 411 
 
 P6lj VENfA MAGGIOR FROTTA 
 
 DI ROMANI. (Franc. Sacch. Rim.) 
 Signor ?nio, IL VOLERE w LE 
 
 MIE FORZE SOTTOMETTERE A 
 GROSSISSIMI FESI M' E CAGIONE 
 DI QUESTA INFERMITA. (BoCC. g. 
 
 10. n. 7.) 
 
 I* SON BEATRICE, CHE TI FAC- 
 cio ANDARE. (Dant. Inf. 2.) 
 
 lO SON COLtjI, CHE TENWI AM- 
 
 BO LE cHiAvi Del cuor di Fe- 
 derigo. (Dant. Inf. 13.) 
 
 I f o comincidi : " POETA, CHE 
 MI GUIDI, Gudrda la mia vir- 
 tu s' eW & possdnte." (Dant. Inf. 
 2.) 
 
 " FRATI," dissi, " CHE per 
 c6nto milia Perigli SIETE 
 GIUNTI ALL' OCCIDENTS." (Dant. 
 Inf. 26.) 
 
 Dicendo : " Qu&l fu I 9 UN DE' 
 
 SETTE REGI, CH' ASSISER TE- 
 
 BE." (Dant. Inf. 14,) 
 
 Se tu fossi stdto TJNO DI QUE- 
 
 GLI, CHE IL POSERO IN CROCE. 
 
 (Bocc. g. 1. n. 1.) 
 
 Then, there came a greater crowd 
 of Romans. 
 
 My lord, the wish to oppose my 
 strength to very heavy burdens is 
 the occasion of this weakness. 
 
 I am Beatrice, who bids thee 
 to go. 
 
 I am he, who held both the keys 
 of the heart of Frederick. 
 
 I began : " Poet ! thou who art 
 my guide, consider well if there is 
 sufficient virtue in me." 
 
 " O brothers ! " said I, " who 
 through perils without number 
 have now reached the west." 
 
 Saying : " That was one of 
 the seven kings, who besieged 
 Thebes." 
 
 If thou had been one of those, 
 who put him on the cross. 
 
 CONCORDANCE OF PARTICIPLES. 
 
 Participles, a& it has been already mentioned p. 345, 
 when used as adjectives, agree with substantives in gen- 
 der and number, and follow in this respect the rules 
 already given with regard to the concordance of that part 
 of speech ; as, 
 
 LEI, in vdno merci ADDO- he killed her, while begging 
 
 MANDANTE, uf else, in vain for mercy ; 
 
 dlle DONNE ASPETTANTI si he addressed himself to the la- 
 
 rivolse, dies [who were] waiting ; 
 
412 
 
 SYNTAX. 
 
 il cavaliere, UDITA LA DO- 
 
 MANDA LA PROFERTA, 
 
 propose, 
 
 poiche il giardino, e LA 
 CAS A di Messer Neri ebbe 
 VEDUTA, 
 
 le DONNE e I CAVALIERI fid 
 
 paldgio RADUNATI, 
 
 L' ANELLA LA CORONA 
 
 AVUTE dal nuovo sposo, 
 
 IL RE C(5' SUOI COMPAGNI 
 
 RIMONTATI a cavdllo, 
 
 the gentleman, having heard 
 the request and the proposal, 
 resolved ; 
 
 after having viewed the gar- 
 den and the house of Messer 
 Neri ; 
 
 the ladies and gentlemen [that 
 had] collected in the palace ; 
 
 the rings and the garland, 
 [which she had] received 
 from her new husband : 
 
 the king with his attendants 
 having mounted their horses. 
 
 [For Rules how to determine when Participles are used as adjectives and when not, ice 
 CHAPTER on PARTICIPLES.] 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Folco, da dolor vinto, tirdta 
 fitori iina spdda, LEI, IN VANO 
 
 MERGE ADDOMANDANTE, TJCCISE. 
 
 (Bocc. g. 4. n. 3.) 
 
 DONNE ASPETTANTI si 
 RIVOLSE, e dissc. (Bocc. g. 9. 
 n. 10.) 
 
 IL CAVALIERE, UDITA LA DO- 
 MANDA E LA PROFERTA dilld 
 
 donna, seco PROPOSE. (Bocc. g. 
 10. n. 5.) 
 
 n qudle, POICHE IL GIARDIN 
 
 tuttO, E LA CASA DI MESSER NE- 
 RI EBBE VEDtJTA. (BOCC. g. 10. 
 
 n. 6.) 
 
 E sentdndo LE DONNE E' CAVA- 
 
 LIERI NEL PALAGIO del COnte RA- 
 DUNATI. (Bocc. g. 3. n. 9.) 
 
 La donna e L' ANELLA E LA 
 
 CORONA AVtJTE DAL NUOVO SPOSO 
 
 quwi lascid. (Bocc. g. 10. n. 9.) 
 
 IL RE CO* SUOI COMPAGNI, RI- 
 
 MONTATI A CAVALLO, al redle 
 ostidre se ne torndrono. Bocc. 
 g.lO.n. 6.) 
 
 Folco, overcome by grief, hav- 
 ing drawn a sword, killed her while 
 begging in vain for mercy. 
 
 He addressed himself to the 
 ladies who were waiting, and said. 
 
 The gentleman, having heard 
 the request and the proposal of 
 the lady, resolved. 
 
 Who, after having viewed the 
 garden and the house of Messer 
 
 Neri. 
 
 And hearing that the ladies and 
 gentlemen had collected in the 
 palace of the count. 
 
 The lady left there the rings 
 and the garland which she had 
 received from her new husband. 
 
 The king with his attendants, 
 having mounted their horses, re- 
 turned to the royal palace. 
 
CONCORDANCE OF WORDS. 413 
 
 EXERCISE XXVIII. 
 
 Then that magnanifnous Pompey, who (the which) 
 
 magndnimo Pompeo, 
 
 boasted (himself) continually, that where he I struck 
 vantdre 2 l contmuo, \percuotesse 
 
 the earth with (the) his foot (the) entire legions 
 
 tdrra pid 4 intiero^ legione 9 
 
 would come out 
 sar6bbero 2 usctie 3 
 
 from it I , fled not only from 
 ne l \jfuggire 
 
 Rome, but from (the) Italy also. He is of a won- 
 Itdlia . mara* 
 
 derful agreeableness _and (of a wonderful) vivacity. 
 viglioso 6 piacevoUzza 1 2 ' 3 4 brio 5 . 
 
 And the preparation, and the joy, and the other 
 appar&cchio, allegrezza y dltro 
 
 things were described to-him beyond (of) the truth. 
 cosa 2 dipingere 3 1 maggiore vero. 
 
 (The) my guide and I descended the mountain. 
 duca scendere m6nte. 
 
 The greatest part of (the) men are ambitious. He 
 maggior pdrte uomo ambizioso. 
 
 commanded that all (the) his family should appear 
 Comanddre tutto famigUa venire 2 
 
 before him. Know, that I am Bertrand de Born, 
 l . Sapere, Bertram dal Bornio, 
 
 he who gave (to the) King John the mischievous 
 ddre re Giovdnni mdlo 
 
 counsels. The filial respect and (the filial) love. 
 conforto. l filidle 6 riverenza 2 34 amor 5 . 
 
 Great,* small,* rich,* and poor,* no one can escape 
 Grande, piccolo 2 ricco, 1 povero, ne.ssuno potere sottrdrre^ 
 
 (himself to the) death. Many were accused this year. 
 morte. Molto 3 accusdre* l anno 2 . 
 
 Great, small, rich, poor, are here used in the plural number. 
 
 35* 
 
414 SYNTAX. 
 
 And she embracing (the) her infant. I have looked 
 abbraccidre figliuolo. cercdre 
 
 all over the street. Callimachus and Ligurius have 
 tutto* per 1 strdda. Callimaco Ligurio 
 
 told me, that the doctor and the ladies are coming 
 dire 3 1 9 dottore donna venire 
 
 to (the) church. Neither thou nor I am rich. I 
 chiesa. ricco. 
 
 am the ghost of Capocchio, who falsified (the) metals 
 ombra , falsdre metdllo 
 
 I by the power of alchemy. He I fell in love I 
 
 con 
 
 alchimia. s' innamoro 4 
 
 I with I a noble-lady, held in (the) his time * for 
 I J9' 1 I 2 gentildonna* tenere 8 6 tempo 7 
 
 one of the most beautiful, and of the most amiable 
 b6lla, leggiddra 
 
 that were in Florence. Pride, envy, and avarice 
 3 1 Firdnze 2 . Superbia, invidia, avarizia 
 
 are the three sparks, which have inflamed all 
 favilla, accendere 3 
 
 (the) hearts. I saw a man, who had both (the) 
 1 cuore 2 . Vedere uomo, dtnbo 
 
 his hands cut-off, and another who had (the) his 
 mdno mozzo, 23 
 
 throat pierced. For (the) which, reasons, (the) our 
 gola* fordto 1 . cosa, 
 
 supper having been disturbed, I not only have not 
 etna sturbdrej 
 
 eat it, but not even (have) tasted it. Nor 
 
 trangugidre* 2 , 32 assaggidre* l . 
 
 the excessive maternal pity and joy permitted it. 
 soprabbonddnte materna 4 pieta 1 2 allegrezza 3 permtttere 6 5 . 
 
 * Time, in the plural. 
 
GOVERNMENT OF WORDS. 415 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 REGIMEN OR GOVERNMENT OF WORDS. 
 
 REGIMEN OF SUBSTANTIVES. 
 
 A substantive may be dependent on, or in relation 
 with, another substantive ; and this dependence or rela- 
 tion, which may be expressed in different manners, 
 forms what is called the regimen or the complement of 
 the signification of substantives. 
 
 When of two substantive nouns the second, which is 
 dependent on the first, conveys an idea of possession, 
 extraction, or qualification, (as when it expresses prop- 
 erty ; paternity, or filiation; the material, the place, or 
 the quantity of a thing ; a family name ; or similar cir- 
 cumstances ;) it requires to be preceded by the preposi- 
 tion di ; as, 
 
 V occhio DEL CUORE, the eye of the heart ; 
 
 gli dnni dtlla Incarnazione the years of the Incarnation of 
 
 del Figliuolo DI Dio, the Son of God ; 
 
 vergogna e mddre DI ONESTA, shame is the mother of modes- 
 ty ; 
 unafontana DI MARMO bian- a fountain of very white mar- 
 
 chissimo, ble ; 
 
 Certdldo e un casttllo DI Certaldo is a castle of Valdel- 
 
 VALDELSA* sa ; 
 
 torchietti DI LIBBRA, e tor- wax-tapers of a pound, and 
 
 chittti DI M,EZZA LIBBRA, wax-tapers of half a pound 
 
 each; 
 
 fu salvdto da certi di cdsa he was saved by some people 
 DE' BARDI, belonging to the house of 
 
 the Bardi. 
 
416 SYNTAX. 
 
 There are some adjective pronouns, which when used substantively 
 follow the same rule ; as, 
 
 factva un POCO DI BANCO, he kept a little bank; 
 
 spalancdndo TANTO DI GOLA, opening his throat [rnouth] wide. 
 
 The preposition di is often elegantly suppressed after the word cdsa 
 followed by a family name ; as, 
 
 in CAS A [di] Messdr GUASPAR- in the house of Messer Guaspar- 
 RINO, ririo ; 
 
 me ASA [de] gli ALBIZZI, in the house of the AlbiSzi. 
 
 When the second substantive expresses the form or 
 similitude of the first, it requires to be preceded by the 
 preposition a ; as, 
 
 dtnti A BiscHERi, teeth like pegs ; 
 
 berettdccia A GRONDA, a cap like the ' eaves of a 
 
 house ; 
 
 bdrba A LUCIGNOLI, a heard like two wicks of a 
 
 candle. 
 
 When the second substantive expresses suitableness, 
 convenience, or derivation as to one's country,* it re- 
 quires to be preceded by the preposition da ; as, 
 
 etcL DA MARITO, an age suitable for marriage ; 
 
 tempo DA CONFORTO, time of consolation ; 
 
 Guidotto DA CREMdNA, Guidotto of Cremona ; 
 
 Giacomin DA PAviA, James of Pavia. 
 
 * Thte is limited, however, to the case when the substantive is a proper name of 
 a city, town, village, or castle ; for, when the substantive is a proper name of a king- 
 dom, province, or island, it is always preceded by the preposition di ; as, 
 
 Disse il mdnaco : " Fo s6no anche m6r- The monk replied ; " I am dead also, 
 to, efui DI SABDIGNA.." (Bocc. g. 3. n. 8.) and I was of Sardinia." 
 
 Instances are also met with amongst the classics, in which the preposition di is 
 used even in the case when, according to the rule, da ought to be used j as, 
 
 Lo pr'tmo Podestd flie Messer Pazzino The first Podesta was Messor Pazzino 
 
 d& Pdzzi DI FIRE'NZE. (Stor. Pist. 50.) de' Pazzi of Florence. 
 
 Cdlla forza de> detti Ors'ini DI RdMA. With the assistance of the said Orsini 
 
 (Gio. Vill. 1. 9. c. 39.) of Rome. 
 
 n Signtir Oismdndo Malatesta DI Ri- Gismondo Malatesta of Rimini. 
 MINI. (Car. lett. 3.) 
 
GOVERNMENT OF WORDS. 
 
 417 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 L' amore private chiude L S 6c- 
 CHIO DEL CUORE. (Amm. Ant. d. 
 5. r. 3.) 
 
 Gid irano GLI ANNI BELLA 
 frultifera INCARNAZIONE DEL Fi- 
 GLIUOLO DI Dio al nitmero per- 
 venuti di 1348. (Bocc. Intr.) 
 
 VERGOGNTA 35; MADRE DI ONE- 
 STA, e maestro, d 1 innocenza. 
 (Amm. Ant. d. 5. r. 7.) 
 
 Nel mezzo del qudl prdto era 
 
 UJVA FONTANA DI MARMO BIAN- 
 
 CHISSIMO. (Bocc. g. 3. Intr.) 
 
 CERTALDO E UN CASTELLO DI 
 VALDELSA, il qudle quantunque 
 picciol sittj gid di molti uomini ed 
 agidti fu abitdto. (Bocc. g. 7. 
 n. 10.) 
 
 Una grand 9 area tutta fornita 
 
 di TORCHIETTI DI L1BBRA, E la 
 
 chiesa e le cappelle d' intorno 
 piene di TORCHIETTI DI MEZZA 
 LissRA, e spesso di que* DI LIB- 
 BRA. (Borgh. Arm. Fam. 23.) 
 
 Fu scampdto e SALVATO DA 
 
 CKRTI DI CASA DE J BARDI. (Gio. 
 
 Vill. 1. 12. c. 17.) 
 
 VI era, un certo Ludovico, il 
 qudle avea di molti dandri y e 
 
 FACEVA UN POCO DI BANCO. 
 
 (Firenz. As. d' Or.) 
 
 E SPALANCANDO p6i TANTO DI 
 
 GOLA. (Lip. Malm. 7. 85.) 
 
 Stettero piit dnni i due giovani 
 IN CASA MESSER GUASPARRINO. 
 (Bocc. g. 2. n. 6.) 
 
 Con grdnde paura e pericolo 
 si fuggl IN CASA GLI ALBIZZI. 
 (Gio. Vill. 1. 12. c. 17.) 
 
 Selfishness shuts the eye of the 
 heart. 
 
 The years of the fruitful Incar- 
 nation of the Son of God had 
 reached the numher of 1348. 
 
 Shame is the mother of modesty, 
 and the mistress of innocence. 
 
 In the middle of which field 
 there was a fountain of very white 
 marble. 
 
 Certaldo is a castle of Valdelsa, 
 which, although small, was for- 
 merly inhabited by many and 
 wealthy people. 
 
 A great coffin surrounded with 
 wax tapers of a pound, and the 
 church and the chapels full of 
 wax-tapers of half a pound, and 
 often of some of a pound each. 
 
 He was rescued and saved by 
 certain people belonging to the 
 house of the Bardi. 
 
 There was a certain Ludovico, 
 who had a great deal of money, 
 and kept a little bank. 
 
 And opening his mouth wide. 
 
 The two youths remained for 
 several years in the house of Mes- 
 ser Guasparrino. 
 
 In great fear and danger he took 
 refuge in the house of the Albizzi. 
 
418 
 
 SYNTAX. 
 
 Con qudi suoi DEXTI A BIS- 
 CHERI. (Bocc. g. 8. n. 2.) 
 
 Con qMla BERETTACCIA A 
 GRONDA, e con quella BARBA A 
 LUCIGNOLI. (Buon. Fier. 2. 3.) 
 
 Essdndo ella gib di ETA DA 
 MARITO. (Bocc. g. 4. n. 4.) 
 
 La donna a cut piit TEMPO DA 
 CONFORTO, che DA ripreiisione 
 para. (Bocc. g. 2. n. 8.) 
 
 GTJIDOTTO DA CREMONA Idscia 
 a 'GiAcoMiN DA PAVIA itna sua 
 fanciuUa. (Bocc. g. 5. n. 5.) 
 
 With those teeth of his like 
 pegs. 
 
 With that cap of his like the 
 eaves of a house, and that beard 
 like two wicks of a candle. 
 
 age 
 
 She being already of an 
 suitable for marriage. 
 
 The lady to whom this appeared 
 more a time of consolation, than of 
 reprehension. 
 
 Guidotto of Cremona leaves a 
 daughter of his to James of Pavia. 
 
 REGIMEN OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 The regimen or complement of adjectives is generally 
 a substantive, a pronoun, a verb, or a phrase preceded 
 by a preposition. 
 
 Adjectives signifying knowledge or ignorance, praise 
 or blame, possession or privation, abundance or scarcity, 
 require that their complement be preceded by the prepo- 
 sition di; as, 
 
 learned in the Scriptures ; 
 very ignorant of medicine ; 
 
 dotto DE#e SCRITTTJRE, 
 
 ignorantissimi DE// MEDICI- 
 
 NA, 
 
 giovine DI ETA, bellissima of youthful age, of very beau- 
 DI FORMA, chidra DI sA^- tiful form, and of distinguish- 
 
 GUE DI COSTUMI, 
 
 prdde DE//C ARMF, ma DE' 
 
 , COSTUMI vizioso, 
 abbonddnte DI GRANO, DI 6R- 
 
 ZO, DI BESTIAME, DI 
 PESCI, 
 
 ed birth and manners ; 
 
 brave in arms, but of vicious 
 habits ; 
 
 abundant in grain, barley, cat- 
 tle, and fish. 
 
 Adjectives signifying similitude, inclination, suitable- 
 ness, advantage, tendency, or thereon trary, require their 
 complement to be preceded by the preposition a ; as, 
 
GOVERNMENT OF WORDS. 
 
 419 
 
 the beard like his locks ; 
 
 things more becoming to 
 drunkards, than to sober la- 
 dies ; 
 
 provinces addicted to arms ; 
 
 nothing is so unfavorable to a 
 
 speaker ; 
 
 odious to men of wicked habits. 
 
 la bdrba A' suoi CAPEGLI 
 simiglidnte, 
 
 cdse piu dtte A' BEVITORI, 
 die klle SOBRIE DONNE, 
 
 province dedite ALLE ARMI, 
 niuna cosa e cosl contrdria 
 AL DICITORE, 
 
 grave AGLI UOMINI di perver- 
 si costumi, 
 
 Jldjectives signifying departure, distance, separation, 
 equire that their complement should be preceded by the 
 Deposition da ; as, 
 
 esuli vLlle LORO PATRIE, exiles from their countries ; 
 
 /e' disgiunto DA//' ANIMO il made the soul disjoined from 
 
 passibile intelletto, his passive intellect ; 
 
 una navicella di pescatori a small fishing boat distant 
 
 separata vLW ALTRE NA- from the other vessels. 
 
 Some adjectives, as contento, ' contented,' ' satisfied ' ; 
 
 presto, 'prompt,' ; ready '; acconcio, ' disposed,' fi in- 
 clined ' ; may have a complement preceded by either the 
 Deposition di or a; as, 
 
 CONTENTO DI QUELLO, che content with what was given 
 
 glieraddto, to him ; 
 
 state CONTENTI fdla VOLON- be satisfied with the will of 
 
 TA di Dio, God ; 
 
 PRESTA DI FARE FESTA al prompt to greet his fellow- 
 
 suo cittadino, citizen ; 
 
 PRESTI A MORDERE ogui ready to slander every praise- 
 
 laudevol cosa, worthy thing ; 
 
 sono ACCONCIA D' IMPEGNAR I am disposed to pav^ these 
 
 queste robe, garments ; 
 
 piit, ACCONCIA A CREDERE il more inclined to believe the 
 
 male, evil. 
 
420 
 
 SYNTAX. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Essindo mdlto DOTTO DELLE 
 ScRiTTURE,ed ammaestrdto della 
 fede di Cristo. (Cav. At. ap. 113.) 
 
 Molti vi sono DELLA MEDIC IN A 
 IGNORANTISSIMI. (Lib. Cur. mal.) 
 
 U'na di loro DI ETA GIOVINE, 
 
 DI FORMA BELLISSIMA, CH1ARA 
 DI SANGUE E DI COSTtJMI. (BOCC, 
 
 Fiam. 1. 1.) 
 
 Cavaliere PRODE DELLE ARMI, 
 MA DE' COSTTJMI vizioso. (Pass. 
 Spec. Ver. Penit.) 
 
 Hpa6se k, grandissimo, e molto 
 
 ABBONDANTE DI GRANO, DI OR- 
 ZO, DI BESTIAME, E DI PESCI. 
 
 (Giamb. 1. 5.) 
 
 Lunga LA BARB A, e di pel 
 bidnco mista, Portdva, A' suoi 
 
 CAPEGLI SIMIGLIANTE. (Dant. 
 
 Pur. 1.) 
 
 COSE PIU ATTE A' BEVITORI 
 CHE ALLE SOBRIE ed Gn6ste DON- 
 NE. (Bocc. Intr.) 
 
 PROVINCE naturalmdnte DE- 
 
 DITE ALLE ARMI. (Giatllb. 1. 3.) 
 NlTJNA COSA E COS1 CONTRARIA 
 
 AL DICITORE, come il manifesto 
 acconciamento. (Amm. Ant. d. 
 11. r. 3.) 
 
 La vita d6* buoni & s&mpre 
 
 GRAVE AGLI UOMINI DI PERVERSI 
 
 COSTUMI. (Amm. Ant. d. 14. 
 r. I.) 
 
 Coloro, che sono ESULI DALLE 
 LORO PATRIE, desiderano di tor- 
 ndrvi. (Fra Giord. Prei!.) 
 
 Siccht, per sua dottrma, FE' 
 DISGITJNTO DALL' ANIMO IL 
 
 PASSIBILE INTELLETTO. (Dant. 
 
 Pur. 25.) 
 
 Being very learned in the Scrip- 
 tures, and well instructed in the 
 Christian faith. 
 
 There are many very ignorant 
 of medicine. 
 
 One of them of youthful age, of 
 most beautiful form, and of distin- 
 guished birth and manners. 
 
 A cavalier bfave in arms, but of 
 vicious habits. 
 
 The country is very vast, and 
 very abundant in grain, barley, 
 cattle, and fish. 
 
 His beard, mixed with hoary 
 white, like his locks, descended 
 low down. 
 
 Things more becoming to drunk- 
 ards, than to sober and modest la- 
 dies. 
 
 Provinces naturally addicted to 
 arms. 
 
 Nothing is so unfavorable to a 
 speaker as the evident dressing up 
 of language. 
 
 The life of the good is always 
 odious to men of wicked habits. 
 
 Those, who are exiles from their 
 countries, are desirous to return 
 there. 
 
 So that, by his wisdom, he made 
 the soul disjoined from his passive 
 intellect 
 
 
GOVERNMENT OF WORDS. 421 
 
 Trovd per avventiira, alquanto He found by chance, a small 
 
 SEPARATA DALLE ALTRE NAVI, fishing boat somewhat distant from 
 
 UNA NAVICELLA Di PESCATORi. the other vessels. 
 (Bocc. g. 5. n. 2.) 
 
 CONTENTO DI DUELLO, CHE DA- Content with what was given 
 
 TO GI.I ERA, piu non chiedea. to him, he asked no more. 
 (Vit. S. Ant.) 
 
 E perb, padre e mddre mia, Therefore, my parents, be satis- 
 
 STATE CONTENTI ALLA VOLONTA. fied With the will of God. 
 
 DI Dio. (Vit. S. Gio. Batt.) 
 
 Quell 9 anima gentil fu cosl That gentle spirit was so prompt 
 
 PRESTA Di FARE AL ciTTADfN to greet there his fellow-citizen, 
 suo quivi FESTA. (Dant. Pur. 6.) 
 
 Dar matiria dgV innidiosi, To give occasion to envious per- 
 
 PRESTI A MORDERE OGNi LAU- sons, ready to slander every praise- 
 
 DEVOL COSA. (Bocc. Intr.) worthy thing. 
 
 Per me soisro ACCONCIA D' IM- As for me, I am disposed to 
 
 PEGNAR per te QUESTE ROBE, pawn for thee these garments. 
 (Bocc. g. 8. n. 10.) 
 
 Let gknte & PIU ACCONCIA A People are more inclined to be- 
 
 CREDERE IL MALE, che il bene. lieve the evil, than the good. 
 (Bocc. g. 3. n. 6.) 
 
 REGIMEN OF VERBS. 
 
 Verbs may govern, or have for a complement, a noun, 
 a pronoun, another verb, or a phrase. 
 
 The nouns and pronouns governed by the verb may 
 be in the subjective, in the objective, or in any other re- 
 lation preceded by a preposition. 
 
 The verbs governed by another verb may be in the 
 indicative, in the conjunctive, or in the infinitive mood, 
 either in the objective or in any other relation, except 
 the subjective, preceded by a preposition. 
 
 The verb essere governs a noun in the subjective, and 
 is consequently construed with two subjectives, called, the 
 36 
 
422 SYNTAX. 
 
 one, the subjective before, and, the other, the subjective 
 after ', the verb ; as, 
 
 io sono LA SVENTURATA I am the unfortunate Ginevra : 
 
 GlNEVRA, 
 
 i veri amici sono TJ.NA COSA true friends are one thing 
 insieme, together. 
 
 Active verbs govern a noun or a pronoun in the objec- 
 tive ; as, 
 
 io ho amdto ed dmo GUIS- I have loved and love Guis- 
 
 CARDO, card ; 
 
 m6lti sdnno MOLTE COSE, e many know many things, and 
 
 non sdnno SE MEDESIMI, do not know themselves. 
 
 Many active verbs, besides having a noun or a pronoun 
 in the objective, or, what is the same, a direct regimen, 
 may govern a noun or a pronoun in any other relation, 
 except the subjective, preceded by a preposition, and 
 thus have also an indirect regimen ; as, 
 
 io non la vendei LORO, ma I did not sell it to them, but 
 tssi ME L' avrdnno imbold- they must have stolen it 
 ta, from me ; 
 
 per premidre il cavaliere in order to reward the gentle- 
 
 DELL' ONORE riceviito, man for the honor received ; 
 
 s AD OGNI suo sERvicio of- he -offered himself to serve her 
 
 ftrse, in every thing; 
 
 5' ingegno di rivolgerla DA he endeavoured to dissuade her 
 
 PROPOJS JMENTO sijitro, from so cruel a proposal. 
 
 Passive verbs govern a noun or a pronoun in the re- 
 lation of derivation preceded by the preposition da ; as, 
 
 tgli DA ME tra egualmente he was equally loved by me ; 
 amdto, 
 
 Efigenia DA MOLTE NOBILI Iphigenia was received by 
 DONNE di Rodifu ricevuta, many noble ladies of Rhodes. 
 
GOVERNMENT (fr WORDS. 423 
 
 Sometimes instead of da we find the preposition per used by good 
 
 writers ; as, 
 
 la piu bdlla cosa, che giammdi the handsomest object that was 
 PER ALCTJNO veduta fosse, ever seen by anybody ; 
 
 PER FALSA LODE di stollo essere to be deceived by the false praise 
 inganndto, of fools. 
 
 Neuter verbs, strictly speaking, have no regimen; but 
 as some of them are often used, in Italian, actively, they 
 follow, when so used, the same rules as q% 
 as, 
 
 cendrono UN POCO ui CARNE 
 
 SAl/ATAj 
 
 quantunque Jlmore i LIETI although iX^e Dwells ' nJ 
 PALAGI, piu vo'entieri che willingly nK gaiy palaces, 
 LE POVERE c APANNE, a6z7i, than in poor cottages. 
 
 Pronominal verbs govern the pronouns mi, ti, ci, vi, 
 si, with which they are varied, in the objective ; as, 
 
 io MI levdi diritta, I stood up ; 
 
 lo scoldre s' esercitdva, the scholar took exercise. 
 
 Many pronominal verbs, besides the above, which is 
 their direct regimen, may have an indirect regimen, or, 
 what is the same, may also govern a noun in any other 
 relation, but the subjective, preceded by a preposition ; 
 as, 
 
 ?- attristi BELLA M!A DIMO- thou grievest for my^stay ; 
 RA, 
 
 la cittci, 5' arrendeo A CE- the city surrendered to Caesar. 
 SAKE, 
 
 Unipersonal verbs, generally, have no regimen ; there 
 are instances, however, in which some of them govern 
 
424 
 
 SYNTAX. 
 
 a word in the relation of attribution, preceded by the 
 preposition a ; as, 
 
 come accdde A' BUONI, cosi 
 
 accdde A' CATTIVI, 
 questa novella, la qudle A ME 
 
 tocca di dover dire, 
 
 as it befalls good people, so it 
 befalls bad people ; 
 
 this novel, which I am to re- 
 late. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Signor nrio, 10 SONO LA misera Sir, I am tbe unfortunate, wretch- 
 SVENTURATA GINEVRA. (Bocc. ed Ginevra. 
 g. 5. n. 9.) 
 
 I VERI AMfci SONO "UNA COSA 
 
 INSIEME. (Am. Ant. d, 18. r. 1.) 
 
 lO HO AMATO ED AMO GuiS- 
 
 CARDO, e quanta viverd io V ame- 
 rd. (Bocc. g. 4. n. 1.) 
 
 MOLTI MOLTE COSE SANNO, SE 
 TOEDESIMI NON SANNO. (Am, Ant. 
 
 d. 5. r. 3.) 
 
 lO NON LA VENDEI LORD, MA 
 
 ESSI questa ndtte ME L* AVRANNO 
 IMBOLATA. (Bocc. g. 4. n. 10.) 
 
 PER PREMIARE IL CAVALIERE 
 
 DELL' ONORE RICEVUTO da lui. 
 (Bocc. g. 10. n. 6.) 
 
 Soddisfece alia sua domdnda, 
 
 SE AD OGNI SIJO SERVIGIO OF- 
 
 FERSE. (Bocc. g. 2. n. 3.) 
 
 Con parole assdi s' INGEGNO 
 
 DI RIVOLGERLA DA PROPONIMEN- 
 
 TO si FIERO. (Bocc. g, 2. n. 6.) 
 
 COSI EGLI DA ME ERA EGUAL- 
 
 MENTE AMATO, com' 6gli me amd- 
 va. (Bocc. Fiam. 1. 6.) 
 
 EFIGENIA DA MOLTE NOBILI 
 DONNE DI RODI FU RICEVtJTA. 
 (Bocc. g. 5. n, 1.) 
 
 Costei esser LA PIU BELLA 
 
 COSA, CHE GIAMMAI PER ALCUNO 
 
 VEDUTA FOSSE. (Bocc. g. 5. n. 1.) 
 
 True friends are one thing to- 
 gether. 
 
 I have loved and love Guiscard, 
 and I shall love him as long as I 
 live. 
 
 Many know many things, and do 
 not know themselves. 
 
 I did not sell it to them, but 
 they must have stolen it from me 
 last night 
 
 In order to reward the gentle- 
 man for the honor he had received 
 of him. 
 
 He complied with her request, 
 and offered himself to serve her in 
 every thing. 
 
 With a great many words he 
 endeavoured to dissuade her from 
 so cruel a proposal. 
 
 So he was equally loved by me, 
 as he loved me. 
 
 Iphigenia was received by many 
 noble ladies of Rhodes. 
 
 She was the handsomest object 
 that was ever seen by anybody. 
 
GOVERNMENT OF WORDS. 
 
 425 
 
 MtgUo b 6sser corritto dal sa- 
 
 VIO, Che PER FALSA LODE DI STOL- 
 TOESSER INGANNATO. (Am HI. Ant. 
 
 d. 3. r. 6.) 
 
 CENARONO UN poco DI CARNE 
 SALATA. (Bocc. g. 7. n. 1.) , 
 
 QUANTUNQUE AMORE i LIETJU 
 PALAGI e le morbid? cdmere, PIU 
 
 VOLENT1ERI CHE LE POVERE CA- 
 
 PANNE, ABIT*. (Bocc. g. 3. n. 10.) 
 
 fo MI LEVAI DIRITTA. (BOCC. 
 
 g. 7. n. 6.) 
 
 Lo SCOLARE S' ESERCITAVA 
 
 per riscalddrsi. (Bocc. g. 8. n. 
 
 *>: 
 
 . DELLA MIA lunga DIMORA 
 
 T* ATTRISTI. (BOCC. g. 4. D. 5.) 
 S* ARRENDEO LA CITTA A Cfi- 
 
 BARE. (Gio. Vill.) 
 
 COME ACCADE A' BUONI, cosi, 
 fratttlo, mi pare che accdggia 
 A' CATTIVI. (Fra. Guitt. lett.) 
 
 QUESTA NOVELLA, LA QUALE A 
 ME TOCCA DI DOVER DIRE, VOgllO 
 
 ve ne renda ammaestrdle. (Bocc. 
 g. 1. h. 10.) 
 
 It is better to be corrected by 
 the wise, than to be deceived by 
 the false praise of fools. 
 
 They supped on a little salt 
 meat. 
 
 Although Love dwells in gay 
 palaces and sumptuous apartments, 
 more willingly than in poor cot- 
 tages. 
 
 I stood up. 
 
 The scholar took exercise to get 
 warm. 
 
 Thou grievest for my long stay. 
 The city surrendered to Caesar. 
 
 Brother, I think that as it befalls 
 good people, so it befalls bad peo- 
 ple. 
 
 I wih, that the novel, which I 
 am to relate, may make you wise. 
 
 GOVERNMENT OF VERBS - Continued. 
 
 A verb governs another verb that depends upon it, in 
 the infinitive mood, whenever the subject of the princi- 
 pal (governing) verb is the same with that of the rfe- 
 pendent (governed) verb ; as in the following example 
 of Boccaccio, Proem. : 
 
 assai manifestamMe pdsso I can easily believe, that that 
 coMPRENDERE,<?we//oesser is really true, which wise 
 
 men are wont to say, name- 
 ly, that poverty alone is not 
 envied ; 
 
 o, che SOGLIONO i SAVJ 
 DIRE, CHE SOLO LA MisE- 
 RIA e senza invidia, 
 
 where posso and sogliono govern comprendtre and dire 
 
426 SYNTAX. 
 
 in the infinitive ; because, in the first instance, io, which 
 is understood, is the subject of posso and at the same 
 time of comprendere, that depends upon it ; and in the 
 last, savj is the subject of sogliono as well as of dire, 
 that depends upon it. 
 
 The infinitives, depending on another verb which 
 governs them, may be either in the objective, as in the 
 foregoing example ; or in any other relation, except the 
 ^subjective, preceded by a preposition ; as, 
 
 niga D' AVER RICEVTJTO il he denies to have received the 
 
 beneficio, benefit ; 
 
 dobbidmo impardre A TACE- we must learn how to keep 
 
 RE, silent. 
 
 If the subjects of the two verbs be different, then the 
 principal verb governs the dependent verb in a tense of 
 the indicative or conjunctive mood, preceded by the con- 
 junction che ; as, 
 
 so io bene, CHE EGLI ne I know well, that he carried 
 PORTO (ind.) V dnima mia, away my soul ; 
 
 io CREDO, CHE LE SUCRE I think, that the nuns are 
 SIENO (conj.) a dormire, asleep. 
 
 By a peculiarity of language the conjunction che is sometimes sup- 
 pressed ; as, 
 
 credo, [che] egli se n 9 ANDO I believe that he went away. 
 
 (ind.), 
 
 tem6ndo [che] non gli ATVE- fearing lest it should happen to 
 
 NISSE (conj.), him. 
 
 The dependent verb is put in the indicative, when 
 
 the principal verb implies affirmation, knowledge, or 
 certainty of action ; as. 
 
 vi DICO, ck* egli E morto, I tell you, that he is dead ; 
 
 so ch* tgli E cost, I know that it is so ; 
 
 egli STA Mne, s6lvo che gU he is well, except that he has 
 
 DUOLE il cdpo, the headache. 
 
GOVERNMENT OF WORDS. 
 
 427 
 
 The dependent verb is put in the conjunctive, when 
 the principal verb implies will, desire, entreaty, com- 
 mand, hope, fear, pleasure, displeasure, permission, pro- 
 hibition, negation, shame, blame, adulation, wonder, 
 surprise, supposition, conjecture, judgment, belief, ques- 
 tion, doubt, ignorance, uncertainty, or future action ; 
 as, 
 
 io vo' che SAPPI, 
 
 I wish thatthou shouldst know ; 
 
 che SIA posto in I desire that it should be put 
 in execution ; 
 
 she begged him to come ; 
 
 he ordered one of his domes- 
 tics to bring him into his 
 house ; 
 
 dost thou hope [or believe] 
 that Nicostratus would ob- 
 serve loyalty ? 
 
 I fear that excessive grief 
 will destroy the heart; 
 
 esecuzidne, 
 PREGAVA che ne 
 COMANDO ad un de' suoi 
 
 famiglidri che nella sua 
 
 cdsa il MENASSE, * 
 SPERI tu che Nicostrato AN- 
 
 DASSE la lealtti ritrovdn- 
 
 rfo? 
 
 TEMO [che] il soverchio af- 
 fdnno non DISTRUGGA il 
 cor, 
 
 DISPIACQUE lorOj che i Peru- 
 gini AVESSERO roita la 
 lega, 
 
 SUPPONGASI che Juppiter si A 
 dnimo di qutsto mondo, 
 
 quello che V dnimo GIUDICA 
 che SIA benfdtto, 
 
 CREDO [che] mi PORTASSE 
 amore, 
 
 DOMANDAVA, che db FOSSE, 
 
 non so che mene PEN si, o che 
 mi DICA, 
 
 it displeased them, that the 
 Perugians should have brok- 
 en the league ; 
 
 let us suppose that Jupiter be 
 the soul of this world ; 
 
 that which the soul judges to 
 
 be well done ; 
 I believe that he loved me ; 
 
 he asked, what that was; 
 I know not what to think, or 
 what to say. 
 
 The verb is put in the conjunctive, when it is depend- 
 ent upon a unipersonal verb, such as sembrdre, to seern '; 
 parere, 6 to appear ' ; mostrare, ' to show ' ; bisognare, 
 
 i must ' or c to be obliged ' ; &tc. ; as, 
 
 SEMBRAVA, che AVESSE it appeared to me as if he had 
 
 voglia di ridere, 
 
 a wish to laugh ; 
 
428 
 
 SYNTAX. 
 
 e' PAR che tu si A morto, 
 
 che.Roma si REG- 
 GESSE a signoria di re, 
 
 BISOGNAVA Che PART1SSE 
 
 V indomdni, 
 
 it seems as if thou wert 
 dead; 
 
 it shows that Rome was under 
 the government of kings ; 
 
 it was necessary that he should 
 set out the next morning-. 
 
 The dependent verb is put -in the conjunctive, when 
 preceded by a comparative or a superlative ; as, 
 
 costei fu dal padre 
 
 AM AT A, QUAKTO 
 
 figliuola da padre FOSSE 
 giammdi, 
 
 tra IL PIU SAVIO ed IL PIU 
 AWEDUTO uomOj che al 
 mondo FOSSE, 
 
 this young woman was as dear 
 to her father, as any other 
 child ever was to a parent ; 
 % 
 
 he was the wisest and the 
 most prudent man that there 
 ever was in the world. 
 
 quivi non bra CHI le smarrite 
 forze RIVOCASSE, 
 
 dicendoli QUALE VOLESSE, 
 
 The dependent verb is likewise put in the conjunctive 
 when it is preceded by the relative pronouns, chi, 'who'; 
 and qualej 6 which,' ' what ' ; as, 
 
 there was no one there who 
 could restore to her her lost 
 spirits ; 
 
 asking him which he would 
 prefer. 
 
 The verb is also put in the conjunctive after the 
 conjunction se, 'if';* the adverb quando, used in the 
 signification of ' if,' ' provided ' ; and the adverbs ove, 
 dove, both in the signification of ' if,' ' when,' ' in case 
 that,' and in their proper signification of ( where ' ; 
 as, 
 
 SE rf' esser mentovato laggiu if thou dost not disdain to be 
 
 mentioned there below ; 
 
 * Instances arc, nevertheless; to be found, in which the verb is put in the indicative 
 after se ; as, 
 
 JVbn so, SE a v6i quillo se ne PAKR&, 
 t,hi a me ne PARRE'BBE. (Bucc. Intr.) 
 
 I do not know, whether it will seem 
 to you, as it would seem to me. 
 
GOVERNMENT OF WORDS. 
 
 429 
 
 io voglio porre fine dlle tut 
 angosce QUANDO TU VOGLI, 
 
 6vE cosi non FOSSE, 
 
 DOVE tu non VOGLI cosi fare, 
 
 vommene in guisa, d? oV&o, 
 che non sa OVE si VADA, 
 
 io non so DOVE io mifugga, 
 
 I wish to put an end to thy 
 suffering, if [or provided] 
 thou wishest it ; 
 
 if [or when] it will not prove 
 so ; 
 
 if [or when, or in case that] 
 thou dost not wish to do so ; 
 
 I move along like a blind man, 
 who does not know whither 
 he goes ; 
 
 I know not whither I should 
 fly. 
 
 [For a List of Verbs governing a noun or another verb, either in the objective, or in 
 any other relation, preceded by a. preposition, see APPENDIX K.J 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Ingrdto e chi il beneficio NEGA 
 
 D* AVER RICEVTJTO. (Alll. Ant., 
 
 d. 17. r. 2.) 
 
 DOBBIAMO pctrldndo IMPARARE 
 A TACERE. (Am, Ant. d. 7. r. 3.) 
 
 So fo BENE, CHE StCLUOtte EGLI 
 NE PORTO L' ANIMA MIA. (BoCC. 
 
 g. 4. n. 2.) 
 
 IO mi CREDO, CHE LE SUORE 
 SIEN tiltte A DORMIRE. (BoCC. 
 
 g. 8. n. 1.) 
 
 I'O CREDO, EGLI SE N* ANDO 
 
 disperdto. (Bocc. g. 3. n. 7.) 
 
 TEMENDO, NON GLI AVVENISSE 
 quello, che gli avvenne. (Bocc. 
 g. 5. n. 6.) 
 
 Vl D1CO, CH 5 EGLI E MORTO. 
 
 (Bocc.) 
 
 So CH' EGLI E cosi, ma non 
 ne comprendo la ragione. (Class.) 
 
 EGLI STA BENE, SALVO CHE GLI 
 
 DUOLE IL CAPO. (Barb. Gr. Gr.) 
 
 He is ungrateful, who denies to 
 have received a benefit. 
 
 We must, in speaking, learn how 
 to keep silent. 
 
 I know well, that last night he 
 carried away my soul. 
 
 I believe that the nuns are all 
 gone to sleep. 
 
 I believe, he went away in de- 
 spair. 
 
 Fearing, lest it should happen 
 to him, what in fact happened to 
 him. 
 
 I tell you, that he is dead. 
 
 I know it is so, but do not 
 understand the reason. 
 
 He is well, except that he has 
 the headache. 
 
430 
 
 SYNTAX. 
 
 Sennuccio, fo vo* CHE SAPPI 
 in qudl maniera Traltdto sono. 
 (Petr. s. 89.) 
 
 Percid DESIDERO CHE SIA PO- 
 STO IN ESECUZIONE. (Cas. lett. 
 15.) 
 
 II chiamdva, e PREGAVA CHE 
 
 NE VENISSE. (BOCC. g. 4. D. 5.) 
 
 COMANDO AD UN DE* SUOI FA- 
 MIGLIARI CHE NELLA^SUA CASA 
 
 IL MENASSE, e gli focesse dar da 
 mangidre, per Dio. (Bocc. g. 2. 
 n. 7.) 
 
 SPERI TU, CHE NlCOSTRATO AN- 
 DASSE LA LEALTA. RITROVANDO, 
 
 che tu servdr vuoi a lui ? (Bocc. 
 g. 7. n. 9.) 
 
 Ch 1 io TEMO, lasso ! KO S L so- 
 
 VERCHIO AFFANNO DlSTRUGGA 
 
 IL COR. (Fetr. s. 84.) 
 
 DISPIACQTJE LORO grctndemente, 
 CHE i PERUGINI ROTTA AVESSERO 
 LA LEGA. (Gio. Vill.) 
 
 SUPPONGASI pero, CHE JUPPI- 
 TER SIA, a modo loro, ANIMO DI 
 
 QDESTO MONDO. (St. Allg. Clt. 
 
 Dio.) 
 
 Che tu fdcci, QUELLO CHE 
 
 L* ANIMO ti GltJDICA CHE BEN 
 SIA FATTO. (BOCC. g. 1. n. 6.) 
 
 CREDO MI PORTASSE AMORE, 
 e che di me non FOSSE m6no ar- 
 dente. (Ariost.) 
 
 DOMANDAVA, CHE CIO FOSSE. 
 
 (Bocc. g. 7. n. 4.) 
 
 NON SO CHE MENE PENSI, O CHE 
 
 MI DICA. (Petr.) 
 
 Ml SEMBRAVA,CHE AVESSE VO- 
 GLIA DI RIDERE. (BoCC.) 
 
 E' PAR CHE TU SIA MORTO. che 
 
 tistntitu? (Bocc. g. 9. n. 3) 
 
 Sennuccio, I wish that thou 
 shouldst know in what manner I 
 am treated. 
 
 Therefore I desire that it should 
 be put iii execution. 
 
 She called him, and begged him 
 to come. 
 
 He ordered one of his domes- 
 tics to bring him into his house, 
 and cause something to eat to be 
 given to him, for God's sake. 
 
 Dost thou believe, that Nicos- 
 tfatus will observe the loyalty to- 
 wards thee, that thou dost towards 
 him ? 
 
 So that I fear, alas!, that ex- 
 cessive grief will destroy the heart 
 
 It displeased them exceedingly, 
 that the Perugians should have 
 broken the league. 
 
 But let us suppose, that Jupiter, 
 as they will have it, be the soul 
 of this world. 
 
 That thou shouldst do, what 
 thy soul judges to be well done. 
 
 I believe that he loved me, and 
 that he was no less ardent in love 
 than I. 
 
 He asked, what that was. 
 
 I do not know what to think, or 
 what to say of it. 
 
 It appeared to me, as if he had a 
 wish to laugh. 
 
 It seems as if thou wert dead, 
 what ails thee ? 
 
GOVERNMENT OF WORDS. 
 
 431 
 
 JE COSl MOSTRA CHE ROMA SI 
 REGGESSE A SIGNORIA DI RE c6n- 
 
 to cinquantaqudltro dnni. (Gio. 
 Vill. 129.) 
 
 E Chf BISOGNAVA CHE PARTISSE 
 L* INDOMANI. (BOCC.) 
 
 COSTEI FU DAL PADRE TANTO 
 
 tencrarninie AM ATA, Q.UANTO AL- 
 
 CtJNA dltra FIGLIUOLA DA PA- 
 DRE FOSSE GIAMMAI. (BOCC. g. 4. 
 
 n.l.) 
 
 EgH ERA IL PIU SAV1O ED IL 
 PIU AVVEDtTTO UOMO CHE AL MON- 
 
 DO FOSSE. (Bocc. g. ]0. n. 10.) 
 
 QUIVJ NON ERA CHI con dcqua 
 frtdda o con dltro argomento 
 
 LE SMARRITE FORZE R1VOCASSE, 
 
 (Bocc. g. 2. n. 6.) 
 
 DlCENDOLI QUALE VOLESSE, 
 
 subito restituirc il suo porco, o che 
 igli anddsse al rettore. (Franc. 
 Sacch. 146.) 
 
 Grdzie riportero di te a Ui t 
 
 SE D' ESSER MENTOVATO LAGG1U 
 
 DEGNI. (Dant. Purg. 1.) 
 
 fp VOGLIO ALLE TUB ANGOSCE, 
 QUANDO xu medtsimo VOGLI, 
 
 PORRE FINE. (BOCC.) 
 
 6vE cosi NON JFOSSE, w mi ri- 
 marro giudeo com 9 io mi sono. 
 (Bocc. g. 1. n. 2.) 
 
 E DOVE TU NON VOGLI COS1 
 
 FARE, raccomanda a Dio V dni- 
 ma tua. (Bocc. g. 5. n. 4.) 
 
 VOMMENE IN GD1SA D 5 ORBO 
 
 stnza luce, CHE NON SA OVE 
 si vADA,,e pur si pdrte. (Petr. 
 s. 16.) 
 
 i tutti fuori ; io NON so 
 
 DOVE 10 MI FUGGA, dOV6 IO ml 
 
 nasconda. (Mach. Com.) 
 
 And thus it shows, that Rome 
 was under the government of kings 
 one hundred and fifty-four years. 
 
 And that it was necessary that 
 he should set out the next day. 
 
 This young woman was as ten- 
 derly loved by her father, as any 
 other child ever was by a parent. 
 
 He was the wisest "and most 
 prudent man that ever there was 
 in the woild. 
 
 There was no one there who 
 could either with cold water or 
 by any other means, restore to her 
 her lost spirits. 
 
 Asking him which he would 
 prefer, either that he should return 
 him immediately his hog, or that 
 he should go to the rector. 
 
 I will return thanks to her for 
 thy favor, if thou dost not disdain 
 to be mentioned there below. 
 
 I wish to put an end to thy 
 troubles, if thou thyself wishest 
 it. 
 
 If it will not prove so, I will 
 remain a Jew as 1 am. 
 
 And if thou dost not wish to 
 do so, recommend thy soul to 
 God. 
 
 I move along like a blind man, 
 deprived of light, who does not 
 know where he goes, and yet he 
 departs. 
 
 Here they are all out ; I know 
 not whither 1 should fly, where I 
 should conceal myself. 
 
432 
 
 SYNTAX. 
 
 
 REGIMEN OF PREPOSITONS. 
 
 The regimen or complement of prepositions is gen- 
 erally a noun, a pronoun, or a verb, either in the objec- 
 tive, or in any other relation, except the subjective, 
 preceded by another preposition ; as. 
 
 io non ddva loco PER LO aiio 
 CORPO al trapassdr d& rag- 
 & 
 
 volgeansi CIRCA JNOI le due 
 ghirldnde, 
 
 un giorno, DIETRO MANGIA- 
 RE, laggiit venutone, 
 
 comincio a pidgnere SOFRA 
 DI LEI, 
 
 assdi PRESSO A SALERNO e 
 ima costa, 
 
 DA OGNI UOMO, 
 
 I gave no way for the rays to 
 pass through my body ; 
 
 the two garlands [of unfad- 
 ing roses] wreathed about 
 us; 
 
 one day having come there be- 
 low, after dinner ; 
 
 he began to mourn over her ; 
 
 very near Salerno there lies 
 
 a coast ; 
 far from every man. 
 
 [For a List of Prepositions governing the objective or any other relation preceded 
 by a preposition^ see APPENDIX L.] 
 
 EXAMPL ES. 
 
 Qudndo s' accorsdr ch' io NON 
 
 DAVA LOCO PER LO MIO CORPO 
 
 AL TRAPASSAR DE 5 RAGGI. (Dant. 
 
 Purg. 5.) 
 
 Co si di quille sempit6rne rose 
 VOLGEANSI CIRCA NOI LE DUE 
 GHIRLANDE. (Dant v Parad. 12.) 
 
 IJjY G10RNO, DIETRO MANGIARE, 
 LAGGIU VENUTONE, in UH CCLHtO 
 
 sopra un carcllo si pose a seder e. 
 (Bocc. g. 4. n. 1.) 
 
 COMINCIO A PlAGNERE SOPRA 
 
 DI^ LEI, non altramente -che se 
 morta fosse. (Bocc. g. 8. D. 7.) 
 
 When thy perceived, thai 
 through my body I gave no waj 
 for the rays to pass. 
 
 Thus about us wreathed the 
 two garlands of unfading roses. 
 
 One day having come there be 
 low, after dinner, he seated himsel 
 in a corner upon a cushion. 
 
 He began to mourn over her 
 not otherwise than if she had beei 
 dead. 
 
GOVERNMENT OF WORDS. 
 
 433 
 
 ASSAI PRESSO A SALERNO E Very near Salerno there lies a 
 
 TJNA COSTA il mare riguarddnte, coast looking upon the sea, which 
 
 la qudle gli abitdnti chidmano la the inhabitants call the coast of 
 
 costa di Mdlfi. (Bocc. g. 2. n. 4.) Amalfi. 
 
 Da una pdrte della sdla, assdi In one corner of the hall, very 
 
 I/ONTANO DA oGNi uoMO, co//a don- far from every man, he sat down 
 
 na si pose a sedere. (Bocc. g. 5. with the lady, 
 n. 5.) 
 
 REGIMEN OF CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 There are some conjunctions, in Italian, which have 
 a ver6 for their regimen, which they require to be put 
 either in the indicative, or the conjunctive mood. 
 
 The following are those, which require the verb to 
 be put in the conjunctive mood : 
 
 ajSf' - order that; 
 
 comunque, 
 conciosiachb, 
 
 however ; 
 whereas, since ; 
 
 abbenche, 
 ancorche, 
 
 
 cdso che, 
 in cdso che, 
 
 > in case that ; 
 
 avvegnache, 
 
 
 ddto che, ( 
 
 suppose, 
 
 benche, 
 comeche, 
 contuttoche, 
 
 though, 
 " although ; 
 
 supposto che, | 
 Jinche, 
 Jintdntoche, 
 
 ' grant that ; 
 
 quantunque, 
 
 
 injino che, 
 
 > till, until ; 
 
 sebbene, 
 
 
 insino che, 
 
 
 tuttochc, , 
 
 
 sinche, 
 
 
 avdnti che 9 ^ 
 dnzi die, f before, 
 
 nonostdnteche, < 
 
 j notwithstanding 
 \ that ; 
 
 inn&nzi che, sooner than ; 
 prima che, J 
 
 per tema che, 
 
 for fear that, 
 lest; 
 
 a meno che, except, unless ; 
 a condizione J 
 
 qualora, 
 
 if, when, 
 whenever ; 
 
 che, f on condition, 
 
 quand' dnche, 
 
 ' even when ; 
 
 con patio che, ^ provided that ; 
 
 se, 
 
 if; 
 
 purche, ) 
 
 stnza che, 
 
 without ; 
 
 come se, as if; 
 
 solo che, 
 
 only that.* 
 
 * The following instances are, nevertheless, met with in the classics, in which 
 
 37 
 
434 SYNTAX. 
 
 To which may be added the conjunction perche, used 
 in the signification of ' although,' and ' in order that ' : 
 also the conjunctions che, 'that';se, ' if ' ; quando, in 
 the signification of ' if,' ( in case that,' c provided ' ; and 
 the adverbs ore, dove, both in their own signification and 
 that of the conjunctions ' if,' ' when,' ( provided ' ; as 
 has been already mentioned at p. 428, in treating of the 
 regimen of verbs. 
 
 Se requires the verb in the conjunctive, when it expresses something 
 contingent or doubtful : but when it expresses a sure, natural, or 
 expected circumstance, or when the action of the verb is entirely past, 
 the verb is put in the indicative ; as, 
 
 SE tu ti CALI w non ti verrd if thou do cast thee down, I can- 
 dietro di galoppo, not chase thee on foot ; 
 
 dimmi SE w POSSO adoperdre tell me whether I can do any 
 alcuna cosa, thing for thee ; 
 
 noi glidlo farem fare, SE tu we will make her do it, if thou 
 
 VORRAI, wishest it ; 
 
 s' w MERITAI di voi vnlntre if, living, I merited aught of you, 
 
 ch' w vissi, non vi movete, move ye not ; 
 
 SE gli occhi suoi ti FUR dolci if her eyes were dear and sweet to 
 nh cariy thee ; 
 
 s' w DISSI fdlso, e tu FALSASTI if I spoke false, thou falsely stamp- 
 il conio, edst the coin. 
 
 the conjunctions avvegnacM, benchd, comeche, contuttochd, sebbenej are used with a 
 verb in the indicative mood : 
 
 AVVEGNACHG quel di niiino E'RA AN- Since, that day, no one had gone to 
 
 DA'TO a lavordre. (Bocc. g. 8. n. 7.) work. 
 
 BENCHC a me non PA'RVE mdi chs vdi Although I never thought you were a 
 
 gibdicefdste. (Bocc. g. 2. n. 10.) judge. 
 
 La qudle il gidvanc focosamente dma, Whom the young man ardently loves, 
 
 COMECHB ella non se ne ACCORGE, per although she does not perceive it, for 
 
 :jucllo ch' to vegga. (Bocc. g. 2. n. 8.) what I see. 
 
 Si ricomincib la guerra c6ntro gli Are- They renewed the war against the 
 
 tini, CONTUTTOCHC iiel segreto RIMA'- Aretines, although in secret the Aretines 
 
 BERG gli Aretini in trattdto d* accdrdo remained on terms of peace with the 
 
 c6> Fiorentini. (Gio. Vill. 1. 11. c. 58.) Florentines. 
 
 Perchi SEBBE'NE i giovani V AOME'N- For, although young men enlarge them 
 
 TANO, 6* non sdnno di poi mantenerle. (the cities), they know not how to gov- 
 
 Gell.) ern them afterwards. 
 
GOVERNMENT OF WORDS. 
 
 435 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 ACCIOCCHE piu avdnti non 
 POTESSE il prince venire. (Bocc. 
 g. 2. n. 7.) 
 
 Perocche Jlmor V avea giaferi- 
 ta, ABBENCHE le PARESSE s- 
 ser tradita. (Bopc. Ninf. Fies.) 
 
 Alessdndro, ANCORCHE gran 
 paura AVESSE, stette pur cheto. 
 (Bocc. g. 9. n. 1.) 
 
 JViuno dltrOjper QUANTUNQUE 
 AVESSE aguto r avvedimdnto, 
 potrebbe chi w mifossi conoscere. 
 (Bocc. Fiam.) 
 
 TUTTOCHE questa gente ma- 
 ladetta in vera perfezion giain- 
 mdi non VADA. (Dant. Inf. 6.) 
 
 I'D non ti concederd quello che 
 seguita,perche, DATOCHE noi ce 
 li DIAMO, non percio restidmo 
 debitori. (Varch. Sen. ben. 5. 9.) 
 
 Dico, che COMUNQUE si si A, 
 egli ha tdnte 6re la notte qudnte 
 il di. (Ser. Brun. Tes. 2. 44.) 
 
 La medicma da guarirlo so io 
 troppo bene fare, PURCHE a voi 
 DIA il cudre di segreto tenure cid 
 che w vi ragionerd. (Bocc. g. 3. 
 n. 8.) 
 
 NONOSTANTE CHE fosse pregd- 
 to da tutti i cittadmi, che gli do- 
 vesse perdondre. (Zibald. Andr. 
 3. 3.) 
 
 Or vo' che sdppi t INNANZI CHE 
 piu ANDI, Ch' ei non peccdro. 
 (Dant. Inf. 4.) 
 
 Seguiro r 6mbra di quel dolce 
 Iduro, FINCHE /' ultimo di 
 CHitJDA quest' occhi. (Petr. c. 7.) 
 
 Ch* io spero Far mi immor- 
 tal, PERCHE la came MUOIA. 
 (Petr. c. 18.) 
 
 In order that the prince should 
 not approach any further. 
 
 Because Love had already 
 wounded her, although she thought 
 she was betrayed. 
 
 Alexander, although he 
 great fear, remained quiet. 
 
 had 
 
 No one else, however acute 
 perception he may have, could 
 know who I am. 
 
 Though this accursed race never 
 can reach true perfection. 
 
 I will not grant thee what fol- 
 lows, because, suppose we should 
 give them to them, we shall re- 
 main no less debtors. 
 
 I say, that however it may be, 
 there are as many hours in the 
 day as in the night. 
 
 The medicine to cure him, I 
 know well how to apply, provided 
 you have a mind to keep secret 
 what I shall tell you. 
 
 Notwithstanding he was begged 
 by all the citizens to pardon him. 
 
 Now I wish thou mayst know, 
 before thou passest any farther, that 
 these did not sin. 
 
 I will follow the shade of that 
 sweet laurel, until death close 
 these eyes. 
 
 So that I hope to make myself 
 immortal, though the body die. 
 
436 
 
 SYNTAX. 
 
 La 'ncomincid a bdttere PER- 
 
 CHE '/ PASSASSE. (BoCC. g. 9. 
 
 n.9.) 
 
 SE TU TI CALI, IO NON TI VER- 
 HO DIETRO DI GALOPPO. (Dant. 
 
 Inf. 22.) 
 
 Cdccia via la paura, e DIMMI 
 
 SE IO POSSO ADOPERARE ALCTJ- 
 
 NA COSA. (Bocc. g. 2. n. 8.) 
 
 Noi GLIELO FAREM FARE, 
 
 voglia ilia o no, SE TU VORRAI. 
 (Bocc. g. 9. n. 5.) 
 
 O Viii che siete due dentro ad 
 unfuoco, S' io MERITAI DI voi 
 MENTRE CH' io vissi, S' io 
 
 MERITAI DI VOI ttSSdi pOCO, 
 
 Qudndo nel mondo gli alii versi 
 scrissi, NON vi MOVETE. (Dant. 
 Inf. 26.) 
 
 A l nzi la voce al suo nome 
 rischidrij SE GLI OCCHI sudi TI 
 
 FUR DOLCI NE CARI. (Petr. S. 40.) 
 S' IO DISSI FALSO, E TU FAL- 
 
 SASTI IL CONIO, Disse Sinone. 
 (Dant. Inf. 30.) 
 
 He began to beat her in order 
 to cure her. 
 
 If thou do cast thee down (into 
 the pitch) I cannot chase thee on 
 foot. 
 
 Drive away fear, and tell me 
 whether I can do any thing for 
 thee. 
 
 We will make her do it, whether 
 she is willing or not, if thou wish- 
 est it. 
 
 O ye, who dwell two spirits 
 within one fire, if living I merited 
 aught of you, whatever may have 
 been the measure of that desert, 
 when in the world I wrote my 
 lofty verses, move ye not. 
 
 Nay let thy voice celebrate her 
 name, if her eyes were ever dear 
 and sweet to thee. 
 
 If I spoke false, thou falsely 
 stampedst the coin, said Sinon. 
 
 EXERCISE XXIX. 
 
 A good man, destitute of money, and of poor mind. 
 buon uomo, povero montta, 2 strdtto 1 dnimo. 
 
 Deprived of every virtue, and full of every pride. 
 Voto valor, pieno orgoglio. 
 
 Of ancient blood, and (of) noble manners. The 
 2 Antico 1 sdngue, 3 4 6 nobile b costume. 
 
 Marquis of Monferrato was a man of great valor. 
 Marchese uomo alto valore. 
 
 With some good wine, and some preserves she re- 
 alquanto buon vino, alqudnto confetto ricon- 
 
.GOVERNMENT OF WORDS. 437 
 
 cruited him. (The) pride is hated by (is odious 
 
 fortdre 2 l superb la odioso 
 
 to) God and by (to) (the) men. They foment that 
 
 Dw uomo. Fomentdre 
 
 i bad disposition of theirs, inclined to (the) evil. 
 
 genidccio 
 
 Ready to do virtuously 
 Pronto 1 * operdre 7 virtuoso 6 
 
 to 
 
 inclindre mdle. 
 
 others that, which she 
 
 would (that) should be done I to her. In exchange 
 
 "\ cdmbio 
 
 vol6r e n 12 6ssere 13 operdre u j m 9 
 
 for that, which I received. She left at liberty 
 
 , ricevere. conctdere 9 10 liberta? 
 
 e very-one until (to) the hour of (the) supper. This 
 
 11 i 2 7 3 Ora 4 5 
 
 young-woman is neither from Cremona, nor from Pavia, 
 giovane 2 non 1 , , 
 
 nay she is from Faenza (a Faentine). He wished, 
 
 Faentino. VoUre, 
 
 that I should see all the holy relics. Show me 
 vedere sdnto reliquia. Mostrdre^, 
 
 the way, that goes to Rome. I myself know not, 
 cammino, anddre Roma. medesimo sapere 2 *, 
 
 what (that which) I wish (for myself). I know 
 
 4 5 volere 7 6 . sapdre 2 
 
 not, who thou mayst be, nor by what means thou hast 
 1 . , modo 6ssere 2 
 
 come here-below. 
 
 Being much pleased 
 Piacendogli molto 
 
 with the 
 
 manners of the boy, he asked who he was. 
 m6do fanciullo, domanddre 
 
 He began pleasantly to speak, and to ask who 
 
 Comincidre piacevole ragiondrc, domanddre 
 
 he was, whence he came, and where he was-going. 
 
 , venire, anddre. 
 
 He was disposed to go wherever it was (to) her 
 disposto anddre 3 l 
 
 37* 
 
438 
 
 SYNTAX. 
 
 I pleasure I to go. As I arrived on the other side, f 
 a grddo* \ . giungere di la, 
 
 there was one who seemed to know (that he 
 
 parere 
 
 Do thou 
 
 knew) all (the) my sins 
 3 peccdto* 
 
 by heart 
 a mente 
 
 sapere 
 
 stay (thyself), whom by 1 the fashion of thy garb 
 Sostdre 1 ^, a \ dbito 
 
 we deem to be (seemest to-us to be) some native 
 
 sembrdre 2 l 
 
 (some one) of our evil land. If I had this 
 
 prdva 2 terra 1 . 
 
 money,* I would lend it* to thee immediately. Who 
 dendro, prestdre 3 1 incontanente . 
 
 would fare better than I, if that money f were mine ? 
 stare , dendro ? 
 
 Whenever you wish, I will take you a great part 
 volere, portdre 2 l gran pdrte 
 
 He might govern such 
 rcggere 6 qudle 3 
 
 of the way I on horse-back 
 via a cavdllo 
 
 a pjart (of it) as he should wish. He asked of the 
 1 pdrte 2 volere' 1 . Domanddre 
 
 host where he could sleep. (The) virtue will not 
 oste esso potere dormire. virtu 
 
 be conquered 
 essere vincere 
 
 come into m 
 
 by (the) misery. 
 miseria. 
 
 mi si paran 
 
 ly m 
 d* av 
 
 mind 
 avdnti* 
 
 to 
 
 be 
 
 | perdovereesser 1 
 
 Many novels 
 novella 
 
 related by me. 
 raccontdre* 2 3 . 
 
 God feeds the angels and (the) his servants I with 
 Iddio pdscere dngelo 2 servo 1 \ di 
 
 love and I (with) 
 amort di 
 
 eternal 
 sempiterno 
 
 joy. 
 
 2 crAiirJin^ 
 
 Let there be this 
 
 law in (the) friendship, that 
 legge 2 3 4 
 
 of 
 da 8 
 
 (the) friends we 
 9 amico 10 
 
 * This money it, to be used in the plural. 
 t That money, in the plural 
 
GOVERNMENT OF WORDS. 439 
 
 should ask but an honest thing. Deliberate all (the) thy 
 
 domanddre 13 onesto 11 cosa 12 . Deliberdre' 1 l * 
 
 things with (the) thy friend, but always before (of) him. 
 
 cosa 3 45 amico 6 , - . 
 
 I A friend who is a time-server (according to 
 
 L' amico 
 
 the time) will not be constant in the day of (the) 
 tempo stare fermo di 
 
 tribulations. I refrained (myself) from speaking 
 
 tribolazidne. trdrre 9 7 di b parldr 6 
 
 until we reached (to) the river. The flatterer is 
 1 3 flume*. adulatore 
 
 I (even) I like that voice, which replies 1 from I the 
 I dnco I voce, rispdndere \ dopo \ 
 
 mountains and the walls to him-who cries-out. In 
 monte muro griddre. 
 
 order that the world should know her and love her. 
 mondo conoscere 2 l amdre . 
 
 Although positively it displeases her. And what dif- 
 stretto dispiactre 2 l . dif- 
 ference there is between these and the other visions, 
 ferenza av6re visione, 
 
 since the learned^ men speak of it, I will not write 
 dottore parldr e? l , 3 scrwere 5 
 
 it here. In order to prevent, I say, in case that 
 4 . salvdrej dire, 
 
 we should do I otherwise, that this I should be I the 
 
 facendo 2 \ altramente 1 , | fora 6 
 
 cause of blame and ignominy to us. Whereupon he 
 bidsimo 3 4 ignominia* . 
 
 said to me : " Although thou rendest away all my 
 " , dischiomdre 2 mi 1 
 
 hair, I will neither tell (thee), nor show (it to) 
 3 dire 5 4 , 9 ?nostrdre 10 ^ n ^ 
 
 thee, who I am." 
 
 12 67 8 
 
440 SYNTAX. 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 USE OF ARTICLES. 
 
 Articles are used, in Italian, before all common nouns 
 employed in a determinate sense. 
 
 Nouns may be employed in a determinate sense in 
 three different ways : 
 
 First, when, in naming an object, we intend to desig- 
 nate the whole species or kind, to which that object 
 belongs ; as, gli UOMINI, < [the] men ' ; the noun uomini 
 being taken in the whole extent of its signification, the 
 article gli shows that all the individuals composing the 
 human kind are here spoken of. 
 
 Secondly, when we intend to designate a class of ob- 
 jects of any kind ; as, gli UOMINI virtuosi, ' [the] virtuous 
 men ' ; here the noun uomini, expresses only a certain 
 number of men, its signification being restricted by the 
 adjective virtuosi. 
 
 Thirdly, when we intend to designate one particular 
 object of a kind or of a class; as, /' UOMO di cui vi 
 pdrlo, ' the man of whom I speak to you ' ; the noun 
 uomo being taken, in this case, individually, and the 
 article used to express the man spoken of : 
 
 GLI UOMINI sono rfeLLE FEjvi- men are the head of women ; 
 MINE capo, 
 
 GLI udiviiNi di questa terra the people of this land will rise 
 si leverdnno a romore, in an uproar ; 
 
 se L' UOM [con cui tu parli] if the man [with ivhom thou 
 ti faccia liberamente do, speakest] will do for thee 
 che H tuo dir prega, ancor freely, what thou entreatest, 
 ti pidccia di dime, do thou further be pleased 
 
 to declare to us. 
 
USE OF ARTICLES. 
 
 441 
 
 When the noun is sufficiently determined by the 
 nature of the thing, or by the circumstances of the case, 
 the article is generally suppressed ; as, 
 
 cosl CAVALLI, UOMINI fur thus horses and men were vic- 
 
 vittime, 
 
 quivi SOSPIRI, PIANTI, ed 
 ALTI GUAI risondvan, 
 
 SONI, CANTI, VEST1R, GIUO- 
 
 CHI, VIVANDE, quanta pub 
 cuor pensdr, pud chieder 
 bocca, 
 
 tims ; 
 
 there sighs, lamentations, and 
 loud moans resounded ; 
 
 music, singing, dresses, games, 
 viands, all that the heart can 
 think of, and all that the pal- 
 ate can desire. . 
 
 The article is also suppressed when the noun is used 
 as a mere sign of qualification of the objects expressed. 
 This is generally the case, 
 
 First, when the noun is preceded by the verb essere, 
 6 to be ' ; as, 
 
 ERANO UOMINI 6 FEMMINE 
 
 di grosso ingegno, 
 tu 9 che SE' UOMO, dovresti sa- 
 pvre delle cose del mondo, 
 
 they were men and women of 
 dull understanding ; 
 
 thou, who art a man, ought to 
 be acquainted with the af- 
 fairs of the world. 
 
 Secondly, when the noun is preceded by one of the 
 prepositions, 0, di^ da, con, in, per, senza ; as, 
 
 uscirono fuochi di sotterra, 
 che si appresero A CAMPI, 
 
 viLLE, CASALI, 
 
 si nutrlsce DI PANE e D' Ac- 
 
 QUA, 
 
 morsi DA PULCT, DA MOSCHE, 
 
 DA TAFANI, 
 
 CON BE' MOTTI, CON RI- 
 SPOSTE PRONTE, 
 
 venne crescendo IN ANNI, IN 
 
 PERSONA, ed IN BELLEZZA, 
 
 PER PAURA d' altrui) e per 
 servdre la miafdma, 
 
 there issued flames from under 
 the earth, which set fields, 
 villas, and hamlets on fire ; 
 
 he feeds on bread and water ; 
 
 bitten by fleas, by flies, or 
 gadflies ; 
 
 with witty sayings, and prompt 
 replies ; 
 
 grew up in years, in stature, 
 and in beauty ; 
 
 for fear of other people, and 
 also to preserve my fame ; 
 
442 
 
 SYNTAX. 
 
 cosl penserd di fare, SENZA I shall do so, without fail. 
 FALLO, 
 
 Thirdly, in comparisons of equality, when the noun is 
 preceded by the adverb come, ' as,' 'like ' ; as, 
 
 non COME UOMINI, ma quasi they died not like men, but 
 
 COME BE s TIE morivano, 
 pareva che ruggisse COME 
 LEONE, e beldsse COME PE- 
 CORA, e ragghidsse COME 
 ASINO, 
 
 almost like beasts ; 
 he appeared to roar like a lion, 
 to bleat like a sheep, and to 
 bray like an ass. 
 
 When a noun is employed in an indeterminate sense 
 the article is never used ; as, 
 
 qudl che tu sii, od OMBRA od whatever thou art, whether a 
 
 shadow or a living man ; 
 
 now I am not a man, man I was 
 
 formerly ; 
 
 pdrmi vedere DONNE e DON- I seem to see ladies and dam- 
 sels, and they are firs and 
 beeches. 
 
 UOMO CERTO, 
 
 ?? on UOM, UOMO giafui, 
 
 ZELLE, 6 
 FAGGI, 
 
 50710 ABETI 6 
 
 The article is also never used when a noun is preceded 
 by a demonstrative or indefinite pronoun ; as, 
 
 this little boy began to be fa- 
 miliar ; 
 
 how do you say those words ? 
 
 QUESTO GARZONCELLO 5 IU- 
 
 comincio a dimesticdre, 
 
 come dile voi COTESTE PA- 
 ROLE? 
 
 INFER- 
 MITA trasporldre, 
 
 COn OGNI SOLLECITtfDINE, 
 COn OGNI INGEGNO, C COH 
 
 OGNI ARTE si proccdcciano 
 di riducere a nulla la Cri- 
 stidna religione, 
 
 it appeared to communicate 
 that same sickness ; 
 
 they strive with all their zeal, 
 and their power, and their 
 skill, to overthrow the Chris- 
 tian religion. 
 
USE OF ARTICLES. 443 
 
 EXCEPTION. 
 
 When a noun is preceded by the indefinite pronoun tittto, the article 
 is used after the pronoun ; as, 
 
 Tt/TTi i PENSIERI, TUTTO Lo all the thoughts, all the attentions, 
 STUDIO, e TUTTE i,E OPERE, and all the actions. 
 
 The article, however, is omitted when tutto is used as a mere sign 
 of qualification ; as, 
 
 noi sidm TUTTE FEMMINE, we are all women ; 
 
 tinne il ponte contra TUTTA kept possession of the bridge 
 TOSCANA, against all Tuscany. 
 
 When several nouns come together before or after 
 the verb, and the article is used or omitted before the 
 first of them, this article is to be repeated or omitted 
 before every other noun in the sentence j * as, 
 
 Lucio Silla vinse LA VIRTU., Lucius Sylla surpassed Caius 
 e i TRIONFI, e i SETTE Marius in courage and in the 
 CONSOLATI di Cdio Mario, number of his triumphs and 
 
 consulships ; 
 
 nt> VECCHIEZZA, ne INFER- neither age, nor sickness, nor 
 
 MITA, n& PAURA di morte, the fear of death, could deter 
 
 ddlla sua malvagita V han- him from his wicked course. 
 no potuto rimuovere, 
 
 * Examples are found in the classics, nevertheless, in which this rule is not 
 rigorously observed j as, 
 
 AMORE, e L' IRA. del re. (Bocc. g. 5. Tho love and anger of the king, 
 n. 6.) 
 
 Crepdta per LO LU'NGO e per TRAVE'R- Broken lengthwise and breadthwise, 
 so. (Dant. Pur. 9.) 
 
 Fra FOLTI BOSCHI, e LE RioiDE A'LPI, In the thick woods, and among the 
 e DISE'RTE SPELONCHE. (Bocc. g. 3. rugged Alps, and in lonely caves. 
 n. 10.) 
 
 In the following examples : 
 
 Sopravvennero i CONFORTI cd OFFE'R- There arrived the encouragements and 
 TE de> Ve.neiia.rn. (Guicc. Stor. Ital.) the offers of the Venitians. 
 
 Se, COL NOME su'o e RIPUTAZIO'NE del Whether, with his name and the rep- 
 padre, ritomdre negli stdti sudi di Pe- utation of his father, he could not return 
 ritgia poteva, (Mach. Stor. Fior.) to his own estates at Perugia: 
 
 the omission of le before offerte, and of la or COLLA before ripulazidne, are manifest 
 errors of grammatical concordance. 
 
444 
 
 SYNTAX. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 GLI yoMiNi SONO DELLE FEM- 
 MINE CAPO, e senza V or dine loro 
 rdde volte riesce alcuna nostra 
 opera a laudevol fine. (Bocc. 
 Intr.) 
 
 GLI UOMINI DI QUESTA TERRA, 
 
 vedendo cid, si LEVERANNO A RU- 
 
 MOKE. (BOCC.) 
 
 SE L* UOM TI FACCIA LlBE- 
 RAMENTE CIO, CHE *L, TUO DIR 
 
 PREGA, f Spirito 'ncarcerdto, AN- 
 
 COR TI PlACCIA Dl D1RNE COTTie 
 
 r dnirna si lega In questi noc~ 
 chi. (Dant. Inf. 13.) 
 
 COSI CAVALLI, UOMINI FUR 
 
 VITTIME. (Dav. Ann.) 
 
 Quivi SOSPIRI, FIAIVTI, ED ALTI 
 GUAI RISONAVAN per r dere 
 sinza sttlle. (Dant. Inf. 3.) 
 
 SONI, CANTI. VESTIR, GIUOCHI, 
 
 VIVANDE, QUANTO PUO CUOR 
 
 PENSAR, PUO CH1EDER BOCCA. 
 
 (Ariost. Fur. 4. 32.) 
 ERANO UOMINI E FEMMINE DI 
 
 GROSSO INGEGXO. (BoCC. Intf.) 
 
 Tu, CHE SE* UOMO, DOVRESTI 
 SAPERE DELLE COSE DEL MOJVDO. 
 
 (Bocc. g. 7. n. 2.) 
 
 USCIROIV FUOCHI DI SOTTERRA, 
 CHE SI APPRESERO A CAMPI, V1L- 
 
 LE, CASALI. (Bocc. g. 3. n. 3.) 
 
 Si NUTRISCE DI PANE E D* Ac- 
 
 QUA. (Bocc. g. 3. n. 3.) 
 
 Non altrimenti fan di state i 
 cdni Or col ceffo or c(? pie, 
 quando son MORSI DA PULCI, 
 
 O DA MOSCHE, DA TAFANI. 
 
 (Dant. Inf. 17.) 
 
 CON BE* MOTTI, E CON RISPOSTE 
 
 PRONTE. (Bocc. g. 5. fin.) 
 
 Men are the head of women, 
 and without their management it 
 seldom happens that any under- 
 taking of ours succeeds well. 
 
 The people of this land, seeing 
 this, will rise in an uproar. 
 
 If he [this man] will do for 
 thee freely, what thou entreatest, 
 O imprisoned spirit I do thou fur- 
 ther be pleased to declare to us, 
 how in these gnarled joints the 
 soul is tied. 
 
 Thus horses and men were vic- 
 tims. 
 
 There sighs, lamentations, and 
 loud moans resounded through the 
 starless air. 
 
 Music, singing, dresses, games, 
 viands, all that the heart can think 
 of, and all that the palate can de- 
 sire. 
 
 They were men and women of 
 dull understanding. 
 
 Thou, who art a man, ought to 
 be acquainted with the things of 
 the world. 
 
 There issued flames from under 
 the earth, which set fields, villas, 
 and hamlets on fire. 
 
 He feeds on bread and water. 
 
 Thus use the dogs in summer 
 to ply now with their jaws and 
 now with their feet, when bitten 
 by fleas, or flies, or gadflies. 
 
 With witty sayings, and prompt 
 replies. 
 
USE OF ARTICLES. 
 
 445 
 
 La Violdnte VENNE CRESCEN- Violante grew up in years, in 
 
 DO ed IN ANNI, ed IN PERSONA, stature, and in beauty. 
 
 ED IN BELLEZZA. (BOCC. g. 2. 
 
 n. 8.) 
 
 Cosi m? & convenuto fdre, e I have been obliged to do so, 
 
 PER PAURA D ; ALTRUI, E PER for fear of other people, and also to 
 
 SERVARE LA FA&iA delta mm preserve my character. 
 onesta. (Bocc. g. 3. n. 5.) 
 
 Sol tdnto m dire, che come im- I only tell you that I shall, 
 
 pdsto w* avete, cosl PENSERO DI without fail, do what you have 
 
 FARE SENZA FALL. (Bocc. g. 3. ordered, 
 n. 5.) 
 
 They died riot like men, but 
 almost like beasts. 
 
 NON COME COMINI, MA QUASI 
 COME BESTIE MORIVANO. (BOCC. 
 
 Intr.) 
 
 PAREVA CHE RUGGISSE COME He appeared to roar like a lion, 
 
 LEONE, E BELASSE COME PEcoRA, and to bleat like a sheep, and to 
 
 E RAGGHIASSE COME AsiNo. (Dial, bray like an ass. 
 S. G;eg. m.) 
 
 " Miserere di me" griddi a lui t 
 
 " QUAL CHE TU SII, OD OMBRA 
 
 OD VOMO CERTO." Risposemi : 
 
 u NON UOM, UOMO GIA FUI." 
 
 (Dant. Inf. 1.) 
 
 Ch' io r ho negli occhi, e VEDER 
 seco PARMI DONNE E DONZEL- 
 
 LE, SONO ABETI E FAGGI. (Petr. 
 
 s. 143.) 
 
 QUESTO GARZONCELLO S 5 IN- 
 COMINCIO A DIMESTICARI COH 
 
 questo Federico. (Bocc. g. 5. 
 n. 9.) 
 
 Voi mi parete uomo di Dio, 
 
 COME D1TE VOI COTKSTE PAROLE ? 
 
 (Bocc. g. 1. n. 1.) 
 
 Ma ancora il toccdre i pdnni 
 ddgli infdrmi adoperdti PAREVA 
 
 siCQ QUELLA COTALE INFERMITA 
 
 neJtoccaforTRASPORTARE. (Bocc. 
 Intr.) 
 
 38 
 
 (( Have mercy on me," cried 
 I to him, " whatever thou art, 
 whether a shadow, or a living 
 man." He answered me : (i Now 
 I am not a man, man I was for- 
 merly." 
 
 Whom I have before my eyes, 
 and I seem to see ladies and dam- 
 sels with her, and they are firs and 
 beeches. 
 
 This little boy began to be fa- 
 miliar with this Frederic. 
 
 You appear to me to be a man 
 of God, how do you say those 
 words ? 
 
 But even to touch the clothes 
 used by the sick appeared to com- 
 municate with it the same sickness 
 to the one who had touched them. 
 
446 
 
 SYNTAX. 
 
 E per qucllo che io 
 
 OGNI SOLLECITI^DINE, CON OGNI 
 INGEGNO, K CON OGNI ARTE, mi 
 
 pare che si PROCACCIANO DI RIDU- 
 CERE A wtfLLA, e di caccidre del 
 mondo LA CRISTIANA RELIGIOSE. 
 (Bocc. g. 1. n. 2.) 
 
 TUTTI i PENSIERI delle fern- 
 mine^ TtJTTO LO STUDIO, TUTTE 
 
 LE OPERE, a niuna dltra tosa 
 tiranOj se non a signoreggidre 
 gli uomini. (Bocc. Lab.) 
 
 Ricordivi che NOI SIAM TtJTTE 
 FEMMINE. (Bocc. Intr.) 
 
 E qu^l, che t solo, CONTRA 
 
 TtfTTA TOSCANA TENNE IL PONTE. 
 
 (Petr. Trionf. Fam. c. 1.) 
 
 O'nde LTJCIO SILLA, che VINSE 
 
 LA VIRTU, E I TRIONFI, E I SETTE 
 CONSOLATI DI CilO MARIO, SI 
 
 f<? chiamareil Felice. (Davan.) 
 Che uomo e costui, il qudle NE 
 
 VECCHIEZZA, NE INFERMITA, NE 
 PAURA DI MORTE DALLA StJA 
 MALVAGITA. L' HANNO POTUTO 
 RIMUOVKRE ? 
 
 And by what I can judge, it 
 seems that they strive with all 
 their zeal, and their power, and 
 their skill to overthrow the Chris- 
 tian religion, and to drive it from 
 the face of the earth. 
 
 All the thoughts, all the atten- 
 tion, and all the actions of women 
 tend to nothing but to rule over 
 men. 
 
 Remember that we are all wo- 
 men. 
 
 And he, who alone kept pos- 
 session of the bridge against all 
 Tuscany. 
 
 Therefore Lucius Sylla, who 
 surpassed Caius Marius in cour- 
 age, and in the number of his 
 triumphs and consulships, made 
 himself to be called the Happy. 
 
 What a man is this, whom nei- 
 ther age, sickness, nor the fear of 
 death, could deter from his wicked 
 
 It has been said, that articles are used before nouns 
 employed in a determined sense ; adjectives, verbs, ad- 
 verbs, and prepositions, therefore, when used as nouns, 
 in that sense, require the article before them ; as, 
 
 from the same clear fountain 
 springs the bitter and the 
 sweet ; 
 
 to be born in high life is a 
 chance and not merit ; 
 
 I should be happy to know 
 [the] when ; 
 
 I have already thought [of the] 
 
 sol d 1 una chidra fonte muo- 
 
 Ve IL DOLCE e L' AMARO, 
 
 IL NASCER grdnde e cdso e 
 
 non virtu, 
 sarei contento di sapere IL 
 
 QUANDO, 
 IL DOVE io ho gib pensdto, 
 
 IL COME ho io ben veditio, 
 
 where ; 
 I have already seen [the] how ; 
 
USE OF ARTICLES. 
 
 447 
 
 I.L FERCHE ti diro, 
 
 ci e IL PRO, e 'L CONTRO, 
 
 son certa deL si, 
 ciascuno rispose dei, NO, 
 
 I will tell you [the] why ; 
 there is something to say for 
 and against ; 
 
 I am certain of the affirmative ; 
 every one answered in the 
 negative. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 COS\ SOL D' UNA CIIIARA FON- 
 TE Viva MUOVE IL DOLCE E 
 
 L' AMARO. (Petr. s. 131.) 
 
 IL NASCER GRANDE E CASO 
 
 E NON VIRTU. (Metast. Artas. 
 1.1.) 
 
 SAREI CONTENTO DI SAPERE IL 
 QUANDO. (Petr. s. 306.) 
 
 IL DOVE lo HO GIA PENSATO. 
 
 (Bocc. g..2.) 
 
 IL COME HO 10 BEN VEDUTO. 
 
 (Bocc. g. 8. n. 6.) 
 Del come non ti caglia, IL 
 
 PERCHE Tl DIRO. (BOCC. FHOC. 
 
 6.) 
 
 Sicche ci E IL PRO E 'L CON- 
 TRO. (Gio. Vill.) 
 
 SON CERTA DEL SI. (BOCC. 
 
 g. 7. n. 7.) 
 
 CIASCUNO RISPOSE DEL NO. 
 (Bocc. g. 1. n. 7.) 
 
 Thus, from the same clear, living 
 fount, springs the bitter and the 
 sweet. 
 
 To be born in high life is a 
 chance and not merit. 
 
 I should be happy to know [the] 
 when. 
 
 I have already thought [of the] 
 where. 
 
 I have already seen [the] how. 
 
 Do not trouble thyself about 
 [the] how, I will tell you [the] 
 why. 
 
 So that there is something to 
 say for and against. 
 
 I am certain of the affirmative. 
 
 Every one answered in the 
 negative. 
 
 The names of abstract substances, and those of gems, 
 metals, liquids, and provisions, require the article before 
 them, when used in a generic sense ; as, 
 
 laudevol c6sa e ne* principi prudence is praiseworthy in 
 LA PRUDENZA, rulers ; 
 
 L' 6RO, e LE PERLE, e i fior the gold, and the pearls, and 
 vermigli e bidnchi, the red and white flowers ; 
 
448 
 
 SYNTAX. 
 
 meppiu dolce si trova L' Ac- water and bread are sweeter 
 quA e 'L PANE, che LE than gems and gold. 
 
 GEMME e L 9 ORO, 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 LAUDEVOL COSA, e necessaria 
 molto E NE' PRINCIPI LA PRU- 
 DENZA. (Bocc. Filoc.) 
 
 L* ORO, E LE PERLE, E I FTOR 
 VERMIGLI E BIANCHI,^ Son per 
 
 me acerbi e velenosi stecchi. 
 (Petr. s. 38.) 
 
 VlEPPIU DOLCE SI TKOYA L' AC- 
 
 QUA t 'L PANE, CHE LE GEM- 
 ME E L' ORO. (Petr. Trionf. c. 6.) 
 
 Prudence is praiseworthy, and 
 very necessary to rulers. 
 
 The gold, and the pearls, and 
 the red and white flowers, are to 
 me sharp and poisonous thorns. 
 
 Water and bread are sweeter 
 than gems and gold. 
 
 The names of heaven, the earth, and the sea ; 
 of the cardinal points ; of the four quarters of the 
 world ; also of kingdoms, provinces, mountains, and 
 rivers, when, in speaking of them, we consider their 
 whole extent, take the article ; but when we speak of 
 any indeterminate part of them, they refuse it ; as, 
 
 era stdto tdnto timpo senza he had been so long without 
 
 vedere IL CIELO, seeing the heavens [the sky] ; 
 
 LA TERRA efredda e secca, the earth is cold and dry ; 
 
 anddvi super LO MARE, 
 
 era gia L' ORIENTE tutto 
 
 bianco, 
 non solamente IL LEVANTE, 
 
 ma quasi tutto IL PONENTE, 
 
 il conosceva, 
 tutta L' EUROPA e ripututa 
 
 stretto confine, 
 
 thou didst walk on the sea ; 
 the east was already bright ; 
 
 L' ITALIA e stdta piu volte 
 
 soggiogdta da* bdrbari, 
 salvo LA MA RCA TRIVIGIA- 
 
 NA, 
 
 inghiottita da una eruzione 
 dei, VESUYIO, 
 
 not only the east, but also the 
 
 freatest part of the west, 
 new him ; 
 all Europe is considered to be 
 
 a narrow limit ; 
 Italy has been several times 
 subdued by barbarians ; 
 
 except the March of Trevigi ; 
 
 overwhelmed by an eruption 
 of Mount Vesuvius ; 
 
USE OF ARTICLES. 449 
 
 ilia & taglidta dai^iS ADIGE, it is intersected by the Adige : 
 
 Visse sdnto in TERRA ed ora He lived a saint on earth and 
 
 in CIELO, now is in heaven ; 
 
 il cdmpo Cristidno passb in the Christian camp passed to 
 
 ORIENTE, the east ; 
 
 le glorie d' ITALIA, the glories of Italy ; 
 
 cdme fdlde di neve in ALPE like flakes of snow on the 
 
 sinza vento, summit of the Alps, when 
 
 the wind is hushed , 
 
 mi dissetdi con dcqua di SEN- I quenched my thirst with the 
 
 NA, water of the Seine. 
 
 H LdziOj l [the] Latium ' ; whicfe always takes the article : and 
 I' da, ' Ida ' ; O'ssa, ' Ossa ' ; which always refuse it. 
 
 Names of seas take the article ; as, 
 
 IL MEDITERRANEO, L' ADRI- the Mediterranean, the Adri- 
 ATICO, atic ; 
 
 L' EGEO, the Egean ; 
 
 L' ATLANTICO, IL PACIFICO, the Atlantic, the Pacific. 
 
 Names of cities, islands, and lakes take no article ; as, 
 FIRENZE, ROMA, MARSI- Florence, Rome, Marseilles ; 
 
 GLIA, 
 
 CipRO, Scio, CRETA, Cyprus, Scio, Crete ; 
 
 Idgo MAGGIORE, di LUGANO, lake Maggiore, of Lugano, of 
 di COMO, Como. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 The following names of cities and is/ands, however, take the article ; 
 viz. IL Cairo, ' Cairo ' } LA Mirdndola, ' Mirandola ' ; LA Roccella, 
 1 Rochelles ' ; L' A'ia, Aix ' ; IL Giglio, Giglio ' ; LA Caprdia, 
 1 Capraia ' ; LA Gorgona, l Gorgona ' ; and perhaps a few more : ajso 
 the names of those islands which are spoken of in the plural ; as, 
 LE Baledri, l the Balearic islands ' ; LE Filippme, l the Philippine 
 islands ' ; LE Molucche, * the Molucca islands ' ; &c. 
 
 The names of the following islands, may or may not take the 
 article ; viz. lba or L' Elba, ' Elba ' ; Sardegna or LA Sardegna, 
 
 38* 
 
450 
 
 SYNTAX. 
 
 * Sardinia ' ; Corsica or LA Corsica, l Corsica ' ; Sicilia or LA Sicilia, 
 ' Sicily ' ; Inghilttrra or L' Inghilttrra, < England ' ; Irldnda or 
 L' Irldnda, l Ireland.' 
 
 Names of cities, &c., always take the article when preceded by an 
 adjective ; as, la b6lla Firinze, ' [the] beautiful Florence ' ; &c. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 TAN-TO TEMPO ERA STATO SEN- 
 ZA VEDERE IL CIELO. (BOCC, 
 
 g. 3. n. 8. 
 
 LA TERRA E FREDDA E^ SEC- 
 
 CA, U acre e cdldo e umido. 
 (Brun. Tes. 1.) 
 
 Per la qudl tu su PER LO MARE 
 ANDAVI. (Dant. Par. 24.) 
 
 ER\ GIA L' ORIEN/TE TUTTO 
 
 BIANCO. (Bocc. g. 5. n. 1.) 
 
 NON SOLAMENTE IL LEVANTE, 
 MA GIA QUASI TUTTO IL PONENTE 
 
 perfdma IL CONOSCEVA. (Bocc. 
 g. 10. n. 3.) 
 
 TUTTA L' EUROPA E RIPUTATA 
 STRETTO CONFINE. (Buom.) 
 
 Voi sapdte che L' ITALIA E 
 
 STATA PIU VOLTE SOGGlOOATA 
 
 DA molti BARBARI. (Buom.) 
 
 Rendegli la Signoria di Lorn- 
 bardia, SALVO LA MARCA TRIVI- 
 GIANA. (Gio. Vill. 1 3. c. 5.) 
 
 O've restd un tempo INGHIOT- 
 TITA la citta d' Ercoldno DA TJNA 
 ERUZIONE DEL VESUVIO. (Gang, 
 lett.) 
 
 ELLA i; TAGLIATA DALL' ADI- 
 GE, fiume, come sdij amenissimo. 
 (Algar. lett.) 
 
 VlSSE SANTO IN TERRA, ED ORA 
 
 E IN CIELO. (Tass. Ger.) 
 
 Gia '/ sdsto anno voJgea che 'N 
 ORIENT* PASSO IL CAMPO 
 CRISTIANO all 9 dlta imprtsa. 
 (Tasg. Ger.) 
 
 He had been so long without 
 seeing the sky. 
 
 The earth is cold and dry, and 
 the air warm and damp. 
 
 By which thou didst walk on 
 the sea. 
 
 The east was already bright. 
 
 Not only the east, but also the 
 greatest part of the west, knew 
 him by reputation. 
 
 All Europe is considered to be 
 a narrow limit. 
 
 You know that Italy has been 
 several times subdued by many 
 barbarians. 
 
 He restored to him the signiory 
 of Lombardy, except the March 
 of Trevigi. 
 
 Where the city of Herculaneum 
 was overwhelmed by an eruption 
 of Mount Vesuvius. 
 
 It is intersected by the Adige, 
 a very pleasant river, as thou 
 knowest. 
 
 He lived a saint on earth, and 
 now is in heaven. 
 
 It was already six years since 
 the Christian camp passed to the 
 East on their great undertaking. 
 
USE OF ARTICLES. 
 
 451 
 
 LE sotntne GLORIE D' ITALIA. The very great glories of Italy. 
 (Buom.) 
 
 Piov6an difuoco dilatdtefdlde, 
 COME DI NEVE IN ALPE SENZA 
 VENTO. (Dant. Inf. 14.) 
 
 There fell down dilated flakes 
 of fire, as flakes of snow on the 
 summit of the Alps, when the 
 wind is hushed. 
 
 Ml DISSETAI CON ACOJJA DI 
 
 SENNA. (Vanz.) 
 
 Ma L* EGEO, ma L' ATLAN- 
 TICO, non cerca di comprinde- 
 re, e sa bne che ei non pud. 
 (Da van.) 
 
 Perche FIRENZE e citta domi- 
 ndnte, e imitatrice di ROMA. 
 (Davan.) 
 
 MARSEILLES [MARSIGLIA], sic- 
 come voi sapete, e antica e nobi- 
 lissima citta. (Bocc. g. 4. n. 3.) 
 
 Guiscdrdo, re di CIPRO. (Eriz. 
 Giorn.) 
 
 Che le bidde Ogri isola di 
 Gricia a lui sol miita, E Scio 
 pietrdsa gli vendemmi e GRETA. 
 (Tass. Ger. 1. 78.) 
 
 Vidggio a? tre Idghi : MAG- 
 GIORE, DI LUGANO, e DI COMO. 
 (Amor.) 
 
 II conte Guido dem*. MIRAN- 
 DOLA, mosso ddlla munificenza 
 di Lorenzo, pose la sua abita- 
 zione in Firenze. (Mach. S(or. 
 Fior. 1. 8.) 
 
 Muovasi LA CAPRAIA LA 
 GORGONA. (Dant. Inf. 33.) 
 
 I quenched my thirst with the 
 water of the Seine. 
 
 But he does not try to compre- 
 hend the Egean sea ; and the 
 Atlantic ocean, and he knows he 
 cannot. 
 
 Because Florence is a powerful 
 city, and the rival of Rome. 
 
 Marseilles is, as you know, an 
 ancient and very noble city. 
 
 Guiscard, king of Cyprus. 
 
 That every island of Greece 
 should reap corn, and stony Scio 
 and Crete should make wine for 
 him alone. . 
 
 A journey to the three lakes : 
 Maggiore, of Lugano, and of Co- 
 mo. 
 
 Count Guido of Mirandola, 
 pleased with the munificence of 
 Lorenzo, fixed his residence in 
 Florence. 
 
 May Capraia and Gorgona rise 
 from their foundations. 
 
 Dio or Iddio, l God ' ; and names of persons, when 
 used in their full meaning, never take the article ; but, 
 when we limit their signification to designate a particu- 
 lar object, they always take the article ; as, 
 
 Dio ct mdndi bene, God help us ; 
 
452 SYNTAX. 
 
 IDDIO dispdse altramente, God ordained otherwise ; 
 
 APOLLO fu veduto saetlare il Apollo was seen shooting the 
 
 Pitdne, serpent Python ; 
 
 ov' ERCOLE segno li suoi where Hercules fixed his boun- 
 
 rigudrdi, daries ; 
 
 OMERO, VIRGILIO, e DANTE, Homer, Virgil, and Dante: 
 
 IL Dio dttla guerra, The God of war; 
 
 L' APOLLO del Belvedere, the Apollo of Belvedere ; 
 
 L' ERCOLE Farnese, the Farnese Hercules ; 
 
 L' OMERO Ferrarese, the Ferrarese Homer [Ariosto]. 
 
 Agreeably to this principle the nouns Dio t Iddw, in the plural, 
 when speaking of the deities of the heathens, take the article ; as, 
 
 se fdsse piaciuto dGLi DEI, if it had pleased the Gods ; 
 GL' iDofi, li f qudli governano the Gods, who govern our affairs. 
 le nostre cose, 
 
 They take also the article, when they are preceded 
 by an adjective ; as, 
 
 L' onnipotente Dio, the almighty God ; 
 
 IL grdnde ACHILLE, the great Achilles; 
 
 L' infelice PRIAMO, the unhappy Priamus. 
 
 They take the article when they are used to desig- 
 nate persons familiarly or publicly known ; as, 
 
 ckiamdto IL GERBINO, having called Gerbino ; 
 
 aveva amdta LA NINETTA, he had loved Ninetta ; 
 LA MADDALENA, LA MARI- Magdalen, Marianna. 
 
 ANNA, 
 
 But when names of persons are preceded by one of 
 the nouns Sere, ' Sir ' ; Messere, ' Master ' ; maestro, 
 ' master ' ; Don, ; Don ' ; Donna, ' Donna ' ; Frate, 
 ' Friar or Brother ' ; Santo or Santa, ' Saint ' ; they re- 
 fuse the article ; as, 
 
 SER Brunitto, Sir Brunetto ; 
 
USE OF ARTICLES. 453 
 
 MESBER Gugliilmo, Mr. William ; 
 
 MAESTRO Mdmo, master Adamo ; 
 
 DON Pietro, Don Pedro; 
 
 . FRATE AlUrlo, Friar Albert; 
 
 SAN Maurizio, Saint Maurice ; 
 
 SANTA Verididna, Saint Veridiana. 
 
 Names of persons, preceded by the nouns Papa, ' Pope ' ; Re, 
 1 King,' are better used without the article ; as, 
 
 Papa Giovdnni, Re Carlo, Pope John, King Charles. 
 
 Surnames or family names take no article, when pre- 
 ceded by names of persons ; but when they are used to 
 specify a person of such a family, also when we speak 
 of celebrated men, and when they are preceded by a 
 title, the article is used ; as, 
 
 Guglielmo Rossiglidne, Gu- William Rossiglione, William 
 glielmo Guardastdgno, Guardastagno ; 
 
 IL GUARDASTAGNO, IL Ros- Guardastagno, Rossiglione ; 
 
 SIGLIONE, 
 IL PETR^RCA, IL BOCCAC- Petrarch, Boccaccio; 
 
 CIO, 
 
 IL cardindl MAZZARINI, cardinal Mazzarini. 
 
 Names of the months take no article ; as, 
 
 il sesto di GENNAIO fu V dsce, the sixth of January was for 
 
 the axe ; 
 
 il primo e J Z secondo di AGO- the first and second of August 
 STofuron le marietta, were for the hammers. 
 
 Names of the days may be used with or without the 
 article ; as, 
 
 MERCOLEDI, dopo desindre, Wednesday, after dinner ; 
 IL SABATO mattina si parti on Saturday morning he left 
 di Firenze, Florence. 
 
454 
 
 SYNTAX. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Entrdndo dentro disse : " Dio 
 ci M!NDI BENE ; chi e qu&?" 
 (Bocc. g. 8. n. 2.) 
 
 IDDIO, giusto riguarddtore de- 
 gli altrui m6riti, ALTRAMENTE 
 DISPOSE. (Bocc. g. 2 n. 8.) 
 
 Chi FU verame'nte 
 APOLLO SAETTARE IL velenoso 
 PITONE. (Davan.) 
 
 foei compdgni eravdm vecchi 
 e tdrdi, Qudndo venimmo a 
 quella foce stre'tta, Ov' ERCO- 
 
 LE SEGNO LI SUOI RIGUARDI. 
 
 (Dant. Inf. 26.) 
 
 OMERO, VIRGILIO, E DANTE 
 han lascidto n6lle pitture loro 
 molto di che fare alV immagina- 
 tiva del leggitore. (Fosc.) 
 
 IL Dfo DELLA GUERRA. (Ce- 
 
 sar.) 
 
 L' APOLLO DEL BELVEDERE. 
 (Miliz. Art. Dis.) 
 
 L J OMERO FERRARESE. (Me- 
 last, lett.) 
 
 SE AGLI DEI FOSSE P1ACIUTO. 
 
 (Bocc. Filoc.) 
 
 GL' IDDII, LI QUALI dispongo- 
 no e GOVERNAN noij e LE NOSTRE 
 COSE. (Bocc. g. 10. n. 8.) 
 
 L' ONNIPOTENTE Dio, e mise- 
 ricordioso giudice, nasconde dal 
 suo giudicio i nostrifdlli. (Pass. 
 Ver. Pen.) 
 
 E Vldi 5 L GRANDE ACHILLE, - 
 
 Che con amore alf'ine combattto. 
 (Dant. Inf. 5.) 
 
 // qudle mdlto AMATA AVEVA 
 
 LA NlNETTA. (BOCC. g. 4. D. 3.) 
 
 On entering said : " God help 
 us ; who is here ? " 
 
 God, the just rewarder of peo- 
 ple's merit, ordained otherwise. 
 
 For Apollo was really seen 
 shooting the venomous serpent 
 Python. 
 
 I and my companions were tar- 
 dy with age, when we came to 
 the strait pass where Hercules 
 fixed his boundaries. 
 
 Homer, Virgil, and Dante have 
 left in their pictures much to do 
 for the imagination of the reader. 
 
 The God of War. 
 
 The Apollo of Belvedere. 
 
 The Ferrarese Homer [Ariosto]. 
 
 If it had pleased the Gods. 
 
 The Gods, who dispose of, and 
 govern, us and our affairs. 
 
 The almighty God, and merciful 
 judge, conceals our sins from his 
 judgment. 
 
 And I saw the great Achilles 
 who fought with love to the end. 
 
 Who had ardently loved Niuet- 
 
 ta. 
 
USE OF ARTICLES. 
 
 455 
 
 E chindndo la ruano dlla sua 
 fdccia Risposi : l( Siete v6i qulj 
 SER BRUNETTO ? " (Darit. Inf. 
 15.) 
 
 MESSER GUGLIELMO Rossiglio- 
 ne dcL a mangidre dlla moglie sua 
 il cuore di ME^SER GUGLIELMO 
 Guardastdgno. (Bocc. g. 4. n. 9.) 
 
 Di88* egli a noi : Guarddte, 
 ed attendee Alia miseria del 
 MAESTRO ADAMO." (Dant. Inf. 
 30.) 
 
 Torto farei dlla infinita virtu 
 delV eccellentissimo DON PIETRO 
 de Toledo. (Bern. Tass. lett.) 
 
 FRATE ALBERTO d& a vedere 
 ad una donna, che V dgnolo Ga- 
 bricle (Bocc. g. 4. n. 2.) 
 
 Con una bolla istitui V ordine 
 di SAN MAURIZIO. (Den. Riv. 
 Ital.) 
 
 Pareva pur SANTA VERIDIANA, 
 che da a beccdre dlle serpi. (Bocc. 
 g. 5. n. 10.) 
 
 Morto PAPA GIOVANNI, e non 
 avendo potuto RE CARLO otteni- 
 re che si fosse rifdtto un Pdpa 
 Franzese. (Gian. Stor. Giv. Nap. 
 1. 20. c. 5.) 
 
 IL GUARDASTAGNO rispose, che 
 senzafdllo il di seguente andrdb- 
 be a cendr con lui. IL Rossi- 
 GLIONE, udendo questo, pensd il 
 timpo esser venuto di poterlo uc~ 
 cidere. (Bocc. g. 4. n. 5 ) 
 
 U esquisitezza dei* PETRARCA, 
 dltro nume dilla nostra volgdr 
 poesia. (Buom.) 
 
 U Decameron dei, BOCCACCIO 
 e di gran lunga il miglior libro, 
 che abbidmo infdtto d* eloqucnza 
 Italidna. (Den. Sag. Letter.) 
 
 And inclining my hand towards 
 his face, I answered : {< Sir Bro- 
 netto, are you here ? " 
 
 Mr. William Rossiglione give? 
 to his wife the heart of Mr. 
 William Guardastagno to eat. 
 
 And he said to us : " Regard 
 attentively the woe of master 
 Adamo." 
 
 I should do wrong to the im- 
 mense merit of the most excellent 
 Don Pedro de Toledo. 
 
 Friar Albert gives a woman to 
 understand, that the angel Gabriel 
 
 With a bull he instituted the 
 order of Saint Maurice. 
 
 She seemed Saint Veridiana, 
 feeding the serpents. 
 
 Pope John having died, and 
 King Charles having not been 
 able to obtain that a French 
 Pope should be re-elected. 
 
 Guardastagno answered, that he 
 would without fail sup with him 
 the following night. Rossiglione, 
 hearing this, thought the time of 
 murdering him was come. 
 
 The exquisite elegance of Pe- 
 trarch, another god of our Italian 
 poetry, 
 
 The Decameron of Boccaccio 
 is by far the best book which we 
 have in point of Italian elequence. 
 
45(5 
 
 SYNTAX. 
 
 IL CARDINAL MAZZARINI, Itali- 
 dno ancor esso. (Den. Riv. Ital. 
 I. 23. c. 12.) 
 
 Se IL SESTO DI GENNAIO ru 
 
 L' ASCE, IL PRIMO E IL SECONDO 
 D* ACOSTO FtTRONO LE MARTELLA. 
 
 (Davan. Stor.) 
 
 MERCOLEDI, DOPO DESINARE, 
 assalirono da piii pdrti qutgli del 
 Idto dtgli Mimari. (Gio. Vill. 
 c. 20.) 
 
 Venuta in Firdnze la novella 
 il Venerdi s6ra, IL SABATO MAT- 
 TINA Mess6r Giambertdldo si 
 PARTI DI FIREISTZE. (Gio. Vill. 
 1. 7. c. 31.) 
 
 Cardinal Mazzarini, an Italian 
 also. 
 
 If the sixth of January was for 
 the axe, and the first and second 
 of August were for the hammers. 
 
 Wednesday, after dinner, they 
 assailed from different quarters 
 those who sided with the Adimari. 
 
 The news having reached Flor- 
 ence on Friday evening, Messer 
 Giambertaldo left Florence on Sat- 
 urday morning. 
 
 A noun preceded by an adjective takes the article 
 before this adjective ; as, 
 
 IL GRAN mdle, IL GRAN pec- the great evil, the great sin, 
 cdto, IL GRAN fdtto adopt- the great crime committed 
 rdti da Gisippo, by Gisippus. 
 
 Nouns also take the article when preceded by an 
 ordinal number, or a possessive pronoun ; * but they 
 
 * This rule with regard to possessive pronouns has not been strictly followed by 
 the early writers, as may be seen by the following examples : 
 
 Com' c' vedrdnno quel volume aperto, As soon as they shall see that book 
 JYel qual si scrivon tittti suoi DISPRE'- open, in which all their sins are written. 
 01. (Dant. Par. 19.) 
 
 Pdssan VOSTRI TRIONFI e VOSTRE 
 POMPE. (Petr. Trionf. Temp.) 
 
 Quesla tra di D'to a NOSTRA CORREZI- 
 ONE manddta sdpra i mort&li. (Bocc. 
 Intr.) 
 
 Your triumphs and your pomp pas 
 away. 
 
 This wrath of God sent down upon 
 mortals for our correction. 
 
 Besides there are in Italian several modes of expression, such as a mia posta, ' at 
 r pleasure ' ; in sito ndme, * in his name ' ; cdntra sua vdglia, ' against his will ' ; 
 ;., in which, by a peculiarity of language, the article is elegantly suppressed; as, 
 
 fo non posso far caldo e freddo A M!A I cannot make warm and cold weather 
 POSTA. (Bocc. g. 5. n. 4.) at my pleasure. 
 
 Qutsti sgrida, IN so'o NOME, il trdppo This one blames, in his (Godfrey's) 
 ardire. (Tass. Ger. 3. 53.) name, their excessive daring. 
 
 " J 'jo, CONTRA SU'A VOGLI A, altrdnde 'I And I guide him elsewhere against 
 
 his will. 
 
 y 
 men*. (Petr. 8. 39.) 
 
USE OF ARTICLES. 457 
 
 refuse it when they are preceded by a demonstrative, 
 interrogative, or indefinite pronoun ; as, 
 
 IL VENTESIMO Canto, the twentieth Canto ; 
 
 LA PRIMA canzone, the first song ; 
 
 LA MIA pdtria, my country ; 
 
 IL VOSTRO amico, your friend : 
 
 QUESTI sospiri, these sighs ; 
 
 QUAL paura ? what fear ; 
 
 QUALUNQUE ^LTRA fdnte, any other woman ; 
 
 UNA COT!L mezzanita, such a middling course. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 When the nouns are preceded by the indefinite pronouns, uno, 
 
 'one'; dltro, 'other'; st6sso or meddsimo, 'same'; they are used 
 with the article ; as, 
 
 L' UNA e L' ALTRA mdno, the one and the other hand ; 
 
 MEDESIMA citth, neL ME- in the same city, in the same day. 
 DESIMO giorno, 
 
 Sometimes the noun, which is preceded by an ordinal 
 number or a possessive pronoun, is understood ; as, 
 
 non stringendosi nelle vi- not confining themselves in 
 vdndc quanta i pRiMi, ne eating like the former, nor 
 nel here quanta i SECONDI, in drinking like the latter ; 
 
 soma d? altri omeri che ddi a burden for stronger shoul- 
 TUOI, ders than thine. 
 
 When the noun, which is preceded by a possessive 
 pronoun, is one of those which express kindred or rela- 
 tion, quality or rank, and this noun is in the singular 
 number, the article is suppressed ; * but, if the noun is 
 in the plural, the article is always used ; as, 
 
 * Notwithstanding this, instances are often found in excellent writers, in which 
 
 39 
 
458 SYNTAX. 
 
 MIO FIGLIO ov j ? where is my son? 
 
 suo PADRE cijece mdlti dan- his father did us many injuries : 
 
 ni, 
 
 MIA MADRE, un frdtello mi- my mother, a younger brother, 
 
 ndre, ed io, and I ; 
 
 mtna teco TUA MOGLIE, take thy wife with thee ; 
 
 il nobile dtto di Filippo, usdto the noble action which Philip 
 
 a salute di suo MARixo, had done for the safety of 
 
 her husband ; 
 
 il diro a MIO FRATELLO, I will tell it to my brother ; 
 
 VOSTRA SORELLA, VOSTRA your sister, your aunt ; 
 
 Z1A, 
 
 SUA ECCELLENZA It bacio la His Excellency kissed her 
 
 raano, hand ; 
 
 stidmo assdi btne con SUA we stand very well with His 
 
 ALTEZZA, Highness ; 
 
 gV interessi di SUA MAESTA, His Majesty's interests : 
 
 Guarded nel viso di MIEI I looked upon the countenance 
 FIGLIUOLI, of my sons; 
 
 ringrdzio LE LORO SIGNORIE, I thank your Lordships. 
 
 EXCEPT 
 When the noun is separated from the pronoun by an adjective 
 
 the article is used before nouns of kindred and quality in the singular, preceded 
 bj possessive pronouns j as, 
 
 E'cco IL TU'O FiGLio. (Guar. Past. Behold thy son. 
 Fid. 1.) 
 
 Arete Cirendica, che dopo la morte dei. Arete of Cyrene, who, after her fa- 
 
 su'o PA'DRE, resse la scudla. (Firenz. thor's death, directed the school, 
 lett.) 
 
 Veder pudi con quanta affetto, La Thou mightest see with what affection 
 
 vtte s' avviticchiaaL su'o MAKiro. (Tass. the vine entwines itself round her hus- 
 
 Amint. 1. 1.) band [the oak]. 
 
 Jtcendo riguardo <ILLA VOSTRA ECCEL- Paying regard to your Excellency. 
 LE'WZA. (Bocc. g. 5. n. 9.) 
 
 jJrrfiro di p6rgere i prieghi miei <ILLA I will take the liberty of advancing 
 
 VOSTRA ALTE'ZZA. (Bocc. g. 3. n. 5.) my prayers to your Highness. 
 
 LA SU'A MAESTa. (Dav.) His Majesty. 
 
USE OF ARTICLES. 459 
 
 placed between them ; and when it is preceded by the pronoun lore, 
 1 their ' ; in which cases the article is used even in the singular ; as, 
 
 AL, mio DISPIETATO pddre, to my cruel father ; 
 
 LA LORO figlia, LA LORO so- their daughter, their sister. 
 rella, 
 
 The article is also suppressed, when the noun, pre- 
 ceded by a possessive pronoun, is also preceded by a 
 numeral adjective, or a demonstrative or indefinite pro- 
 noun ; as, 
 
 con QUESTO suojigliuolo, with this son of hers ; 
 
 QTJALCHE suo amico, some of his friends; 
 
 OGNI mio ufficio, all my obligations ; 
 
 NITJN vostrofdtto, none of your business; 
 
 CERTI suoi amid, certain friends of his. 
 
 The relative pronoun quale, c which,' when preceded 
 by its antecedent, requires the article ;* but it refuses the 
 article when it is used in the signification of chi, ' he 
 who ' ; when it expresses doubt, or when it expresses 
 similitude ; as, 
 
 SETTE GIOVANI DONNE, i no- seven young women, whose 
 mi deLLE quAn raccon- names I would relate ; 
 terei, 
 
 QUAL piu ginte possiede, he who has most people [sol- 
 
 diers] ; 
 
 QUAL guerriero Cristidno, like a Christian warrior ; 
 quAL piu vi place dtlle due, which of the two you like best. 
 
 The words signore or signora, when used substan- 
 tively in the signification of the master or mistress of a 
 
 * In poetry, however, the article is often suppressed ; as, 
 
 oivA LU'CS, Q.UA'LE, in tre persdne O divine light, who, one substance in 
 
 Ed iina essenza, il del governi e 'I three persons, governest Heaven and the 
 
 mtndo. (Bocc. Amet. 98.) world. 
 
 E quei ; " Di rado Incdntra," mi And he replied to me : " It seldom 
 
 risptfse, " che di wUi Fdccia 'L cAjMMi- happens, that any one of us makes the 
 
 NO alciin, per O^UA'LE io vddo." (Dant. journey which I am going." 
 Inf, 9.) 
 
460 
 
 SYNTAX. 
 
 thing, take the article; but when used adjectively as 
 
 titles or epithets, they take the article, when we jpeofc 
 
 o/, and they refuse it, when we speak to, a person ; as, 
 
 IL SIGNORE [di qu6sta casa] the master [of this house] is 
 
 e uscito, gone out; 
 
 LA siGtftfRA occupdta, the mistress is engaged ; 
 
 v6i qul siite IL siowdRE, you are the master here ; 
 
 IL siGNdR Cdrlo Ddti ed IL Mr. Charles Dati and Mr. An- 
 
 SIGN^R Andrea Cavalcdnti, drew Cavalcanti ; 
 
 IL siGNdR Cardindle Spl- Cardinal Spinola ; 
 
 nola, 
 
 IL siGN6R marchese e LA the marquis and the countess : 
 
 SIUNOKA contdssa, 
 
 O Mr. Achilles ! 
 
 vedtte, siGNdRi, com? igli see, sirs, how he had left me ; 
 
 m' avea lascidto, 
 
 SIGNORI e d6nne, v6i dovite gentlemen and ladies, you 
 
 sapere, must know. 
 
 Agreeably to this rule, the words signore and signdra, take the 
 article , when used to express ' our Lord' [God], and * our Lady' 
 [the Virgin] ;* and refuse it, when used with the adverbs si, yes ' ; 
 and no or non, f no ' ; in affirmative and negative phrases ; as, 
 
 IL SIGNORE, Jesu, 
 
 LA SIGWORA delle Grdzie, 
 
 SlGNOR 81, 
 NON SlGNORA, 
 
 our Lord, Jesus ; 
 our Lady of the Graces ; 
 yes, Sir ; 
 no, Madam. 
 
 * In the following instances the article is suppressed before the word signdre, 
 preceded by the possessive pronoun ndstro ; 
 
 i: iii.-( 'ni le chidvL 
 
 To whom our Lord [Christ] loft the 
 keys. 
 
 What treasures did our Lord demand 
 of $t. Peter, before he put the keys into 
 se le chitivi in sua balla 1 (Dant. Inf. 19.) his charge ? 
 
 Si d&e 6ssere lo cavaU6re astindnte, e A knight ought to be abstinent, and 
 digiun&re il fencrdi, in rimem.brd.ma di ought to fust on Friday, in commemora- 
 WOSTUO SiGwdKJB. (Nov. Ant. 51.) tion of [the death of J our Lord, 
 
 A cui N6sTRO S 
 (Dant. Par. 24.) 
 
 Qudnto tesdro v6lle N^STRO Siowd- 
 : /// /ir'nnu da San Pidtro Che ponds- 
 
USE OF ARTICLES. 
 
 461 
 
 Finally, there are several expressions in Italian, in 
 which the article is always suppressed ; as, 
 
 anddre A C^SA, A PALAGIO to go home, to court, to a 
 
 wedding, to a feast, to 
 church ; 
 
 to live or to be at home, in the 
 shop, in the square, in the 
 city, in the country ; 
 
 Or A CORTE, A NOZZE, A 
 FESTA, A CHIESA, 
 
 stare or essere IN CASA, IN 
 
 BOTTEGA, IN PIAZZA, IN 
 CITTA, IN CAMPAGNA Or 
 CONTADO, 
 
 uscire DI CASA, DI CITTA, DI 
 
 CONTADO, 
 
 aver FAME, SETE, C!LDO, 
 
 FREDDO, 
 
 avere IN MA.NO, mettere IN 
 BOCCA, 
 
 to go out of the house, of the 
 city, of the country ; 
 
 to be hungry, thirsty, warm, 
 cold ; 
 
 to have in hand, to put into 
 one's mouth ; 
 
 mendre A SPAS so, tenir TA- to take one to walk, to give a 
 
 VOLA, dinner ; 
 
 correr Riscmo, render CONTO, to run a risk, to give account ; 
 
 dare ORDINE, prestdr FEDE, to give orders, to give credit. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Questo e dunque IL GRAN 
 
 MALE, IL GRAN PECCATO, IL GRAN 
 FATTO ADOPERATO DA GlSIPPO? 
 
 (Bocc. g. 10. n. 8.) 
 
 Di nuova pena mi convien far 
 versiy E dar materia CL VEN- 
 
 T^SIMO CANTO D^LLA PRIMA 
 
 CANZONE, ch' e de y sommersi. 
 (Dant. Inf. 20.) 
 
 LA MIA PATRIA mi ha nutri- 
 cdto saviamente. (Am. Ant. d. 
 2. r. 6.) 
 
 Fo vi voglio dire ciocche IL 
 VOSTRO AMICO mi fecc stamdne. 
 (Bocc. g. 3. n. 3.) 
 
 Che fdnno omdi meco QUEST i 
 SOSPIRI ? (Petr. c. 33.) 
 
 Qudli leggi, qudli mindcce, 
 
 QUAL PATERA ? (BoCC. g. 10. D. 8.) 
 
 39* 
 
 Is this, then, the great evil, the 
 great sin, the great crime com- 
 mitted by Gisippus ? 
 
 I must write verses respecting 
 new torments, to be the subject of 
 the twentieth canto of the first 
 song, which treats of those who 
 are sunk in woe. 
 
 My country has brought me up 
 wisely. 
 
 I wish to tell you what your 
 friend did to me this morning. 
 
 What do these sighs do with 
 me ? 
 
 What laws, what threats, what 
 fear ? 
 
462 
 
 SYNTAX. 
 
 S6* tu piu che QUALUNQUE 
 ALTRA dolorosetta FANTE. (Bocc. 
 g. 8. n. 7.) 
 
 Per UNA COTAL MEZZANITA, 6 
 
 per contentdre il popolo, elessero 
 due cavalitri Frdti Gaudenti. 
 (Gio. Vill. 1. 7. c. 13.) 
 
 Ed un, ch' avea L' UNA E L' AL- 
 TRA MAN mozza. (Dant. Inf.) 
 
 E NELLA MEDES1MA CITTA, WfiZ 
 
 inese medesimo di Mprile, NEL 
 
 MEDESIMO GIORNO s6l, UelV aniW 
 
 mille trecento quarantotto^da 
 questa luce quella luce fu tolta. 
 (Petr. lett.) 
 
 Molti dltri servdvano una mez- 
 zdna via, NON STRINGENDOSI NEL- 
 
 LE VIVAlVDE QUANTO I PR1MI, NE 
 NEL BERE QUANTO I SECONDI. 
 
 (Bocc. Intr.) 
 
 Che farle onore E D' ALTRI 
 OMERI SOMA,CHE DA' TUOI. (Petr. 
 s. 5.) 
 
 Mio FIGLIO ov 5 E, e perche 
 non e teco ? (Dant. Inf. 10.) 
 
 StJO PADRE CI FECE MOLTI 
 
 DANNI. (Dav. Stor. 4.) 
 
 MlA MADRE, UN FRATELLO 
 
 MINORE, ED io, sidmo restdti 
 neir estrema miseria. (Soav. 
 Nov.) 
 
 To voglio che tu ti vdda, e 
 
 MENI TECO TUA MOGLIE. (BOCC.) 
 
 InteSO IL NOB1LE ATTO DI 
 FlLIPPO, USATO A SALUTE DI SUO 
 
 MARITO. (Giral. lett.) 
 
 I'O IL DIRO A Mio FRATELLO. 
 
 (Bocc.) 
 
 VOSTRA SORELLA mi mandd 
 a cdsa Monna Lessdndra, VO- 
 STRA ZIA. (Cecch. Dot. 2. 2.) 
 
 E SlJA ECCELLENZA LE BACIO 
 
 LA MANO. (Car. lett.) 
 
 Art thou more than any other 
 weeping woman. 
 
 To observe such a middling 
 course, and to satisfy the people, 
 they elected two knights [of the 
 order of] Joyous Friars. 
 
 And one, who had the one and 
 the other hand cut off. 
 
 And in the same city, in the 
 same month of April, on the same 
 sixth day, in the year one thou- 
 sand three hundred and forty- 
 eight, that light (Laura) was 
 taken from this light. 
 
 Many others chose a method 
 between the two, not confining 
 themselves in eating like the for- 
 mer, nor in drinking like the latter. 
 
 For to do her honor is a burden 
 for stronger shoulders than thine. 
 
 Where is my son, and why is he 
 not with thee ? 
 
 His father did us many inju- 
 ries. 
 
 My mother, a younger brother, 
 and I, have remained in extreme 
 misery. 
 
 I wish that thou shouldst go, 
 and take thy wife with thee. 
 
 Having heard of the noble ac- 
 tion, which Phillip had done for 
 the safety of her husband. 
 
 I will tell it to my brother. 
 
 Your sister sent me to Monna 
 Lessandra's, your aunt. 
 
 And His Excellency kissed her 
 hand. 
 
USE OF ARTICLES. 
 
 463 
 
 N6i due, secondo che a me We two, as it seems to me, 
 
 pare, STIAMO ASSAI BENE CON stand very well with His High- 
 
 STJA ALTEZZA. (Firenz. disc. an. -ness. 
 14.) 
 
 GL' INTERESSI DI StJA MAE- 
 
 STA. (Bent, lett.) 
 
 Ond* io GUARD Ai NEL viso 
 A' MIE' FIGLIUOLI senzafar mot- 
 to. (Dant. Inf. 33.) 
 
 A che. rispondoi prima che w 
 
 RINGRAZII LE LoRO SlGNORIE. 
 
 (Bemb. lett.) 
 Pose Iddio nell- dnimo AL MIO 
 
 DISPIETATO PADRE. (BOCC.) 
 
 Sentendo gli Jlmidei, die Mes- 
 ser Buondelmonte av^va tolta 
 un* dltra mogUe, e non voUva 
 LA LORO [FIGLIA, SORELLA], fu- 
 rono insieme. (Gio. Fior. Pecor.) 
 
 Monna Giovanna CON QUESTO 
 stjo FIGLIUOL.O sen* anddva in 
 contado. (Bocc. g. 5. n. 9.) 
 
 Per consiglio di Q.UALCHE STJO 
 AMIGO. (Bocc. g. 2. n. 1.) 
 
 O molto amdto cuore, OGNI 
 BIIO UFFICIO v6rso te fornito. 
 (Bocc. g. 4. n. 1.) 
 
 j&SSl di NltJN VOSTRO FATTO 
 
 s' impdcdano. (Bocc. g. 10. n. 8.) 
 
 Gli venne un messo da CERTI 
 suoi grandisshni AMICI. (Bocc. 
 g. 4. n. 10.) 
 
 SETTE GIOVANI DONNE, i NOMI 
 DELLE QUALI w in proprid forma 
 RACCONTEREI. (Bocc. Intr.) 
 
 QUAL Pill GENTE POSSIEDE, 
 
 Colui e piu dd' suoi nemici av- 
 volto. (Petr. c. 29.) 
 
 Vivesti QUAL GUERRIERO CRI- 
 
 STIANO, e sdnto. (Tass. Ger. 3. 
 68.) 
 
 His Majesty's interests. 
 
 Whence I looked upon the coun- 
 tenances of my sons without say- 
 ing a word. 
 
 To which I reply, before thank- 
 ing your Lordships. 
 
 God put into the mind of my 
 cruel father. 
 
 The Amidei hearing, that Mes- 
 ser Buondelmonte had taken an- 
 other wife, and wished no longer 
 for their [daughter, sister] met to- 
 gether. 
 
 Monna Giovanna used to go 
 into the country with this son of 
 hers. 
 
 By the advice of some friend 
 of his. 
 
 O beloved heart [object], all 
 my obligations towards thee are 
 satisfied. 
 
 They do not meddle with any 
 of your business. 
 
 He received a message from 
 certain very great friends of his. 
 
 Seven young women, whose 
 names I would relate in due form. 
 
 He who has most people [sol- 
 diers], is surrounded by most ene- 
 mies. 
 
 Thou livedst like a Christian 
 and holy warrior. 
 
464 
 
 SYNTAX. 
 
 
 Nella vostra elezione sta di 
 torre QUAL PIU vi PIACE DELLE 
 DUE, o,se volete, amendue. (Bocc. 
 g, 7. n. 2.) 
 
 IL SIGNORE E USCITO. (Gram. 
 Gram.) 
 
 LA SIGNOBA E OCCUPATA. 
 
 (Vanz.) 
 
 V6l QUl SIETE IL SIGNORE. 
 
 (Bocc.) 
 
 IL SIGNOR CARLO DATI, IL 
 SIGNOR AGOSTINO* NELLI, ED IL 
 SIGNOR ANDREA CAVALCANTI vi 
 salutano cara?n6nte. (Red. lett.) 
 
 IL SIGNOR CARDINALE SPINO- 
 LA, nostro legdto. (Bent. lett. 1.) 
 
 IL SIGNOR maestro, IL SIGNOR 
 
 MARCHESE, E LA SIGNORA CON- 
 TESSA. (Gram. Gram.) 
 
 O SIGNOR ACHILLE ! (Guid.) 
 
 E d' villdni rivolto, disse : 
 11 VEDETE, SIGNORI, COM' EGLI 
 M' AVEA LASCIATO nelV albergo 
 in arndse." (Bocc. g. 9. n. 4.) 
 
 SlGNORI E DONNE, VOI DOVETE 
 
 SAPERE, che (Bocc. g. 6. 
 
 n. 10.) 
 
 Jlndctrono, e pensomi che tro- 
 vdrono IL SIGNORE ; GESU. (Vit. 
 S. G. Bat.) 
 
 E dal buon uomo furono 
 SIGNORA DELLE GRAZIE racco- 
 manddte. (Vit. S. Cater.) 
 
 " SIGNOR si, da cavalttre" 
 gridd il conte. (Manz. Prom. 
 Spos.) 
 
 NON SIGNORA ; in compagnia 
 d 1 unforesti&re. (Gold. Avvent.) 
 
 Giunti A CASA del padre d6lla 
 fanciulla. (Bocc. g. 10. n. 10.) 
 
 It is at your option to take 
 which of the two you like best, 
 or, if you wish, both of them. 
 
 The master is gone out. 
 The mistress is engaged. 
 You are the master here. 
 
 Mr Charles Dati, Mr. Augustine 
 Nelli, and Mr. Andrew Cavalcanti 
 salute you affectionately. 
 
 Cardinal Spinola, our legate. 
 
 The master, the' marquis, and 
 the countess. 
 
 O Mr. Achilles ! 
 
 And turning to the rustics, he 
 said : " See, sirs, in what condi- 
 tion he had left me at the inn." 
 
 Gentlemen and ladies, you must 
 know, that 
 
 They went, anl I imagine that 
 they found our Lord, Jesus. 
 
 And by that good man they 
 were recommended to our Lady 
 of the Graces. 
 
 "Yes, sir, [it is the act] of a 
 nobleman," cried out the count. 
 
 No, madam ; she is accompa- 
 nied by a stranger. 
 
 Having arrived at the house of 
 the father of the girl. 
 
USE OF ARTICLES. 
 
 465 
 
 Benche i cittadini non dlbiano 
 a far cosa del mondo A PAL AGIO, 
 pur talvolta vi vdnno. (Bocc. 
 g. 8. n. 5.) 
 
 N&^giti aresti amico si caro, 
 per cui mallevadore tu anddssi 
 A CORTE. (Senec. Pist.) 
 
 Che A NOZZE, O A FESTA, A 
 
 CHIESA anddr potesse. (Bocc. 
 g. 7. n. 5.) 
 
 Gli sbanditi uscirono quasi 
 
 tuttl DI CITTA, e DI CONTADO. 
 
 (Gio. Vill.) 
 
 The citizens sometimes go to 
 court, though they have nothing 
 in the world to do there. 
 
 You would not have so dear 
 a friend, for whom you would go 
 into court as bail. 
 
 That she might go to wedding, 
 or to a feast, or to church. 
 
 Almost all the outlaws went 
 out of the city, and out of the 
 country. 
 
 When we wish to designate a portion or a number 
 of the objects in a class, this may be done in four differ- 
 ent ways : 
 
 First, by naming only the objects of the class ; as, 
 ho buon vino, or buoni vini, ' I have good wine,' or 
 6 good wines.' 
 
 Secondly, by using the preposition di, c of; as, ho 
 DI buon vino, or DI buoni vini, I have [of] good wine,' 
 or ' [of] good wines.' 
 
 Thirdly, by using the same preposition and the arti- 
 cle ; as, ho DEL buon vino, or DEI buoni vini, * I have 
 [of the] good wine,' or i [of the] good wines.' 
 
 Fourthly, by using the indefinite pronoun uno, una, 
 6 a' or an,' in the singular; akuni, alcune, ' some,' in 
 the plural; as, ho UN buon vino, or ALCUNI buoni vini, 
 c I have a good wine, or ( some good wines.' Thus, 
 
 great beasts ; 
 
 GRANDI BESTIE, 
 VIE AM Pis SI ME, 
 
 DI belli gioitlli, 
 
 pi buone merende, 
 
 DELLE canzoni, e DE J sonetti, 
 
 very extensive walks ; 
 [of] beautiful jewels ; 
 [of] good luncheons ; 
 
 [of the] songs and [of the] 
 sonnets : 
 
466 
 
 SYNTAX. 
 
 DEGLI amid, e DE' servidori, some [of the] friends, and some 
 
 [of the] servants ; 
 
 lor sorella, a sister of theirs ; 
 
 suoi vicini, some of his neighbours. 
 
 EXAMPL ES. 
 
 GRANDI BESTIE hdnno ne' loro 
 boschi. (Dav. Ann.) 
 
 JEsso av6a VIE AMPISSIME. 
 (Bocc.) 
 
 I'O ho DI BELLI GIOIELLI. 
 
 (Bocc.) 
 
 Jlvevan da lui DI BUONE ME- 
 RENDE. (Bocc. g. 8. n. 9.) 
 
 Comincid a fare DELLE CAN- 
 
 ZONI, E DE' SONETTI. (BoCC. 
 
 g. 7. n. 3.) 
 Fdtli prestamente chiamare 
 
 DEGLI AMICI, E DE* SERV1DORI, 
 
 (Bocc. g. 10. n. 9.) 
 
 Jjv6vano TJNA LOR SORELLA, 
 chiamdta Lisabttta. (Bocc. g. 9. 
 n. 5.) 
 
 Trovollo con ALCUNI suoi vici- 
 NI. (Bocc. g. 9. n. 8.) 
 
 They have great beasts in their 
 woods. 
 
 It had very extensive walks. 
 I have beautiful jewels. 
 
 They had from him good lun- 
 cheons. 
 
 He began to write songs and 
 sonnets. 
 
 Having caused some friends and 
 some servants immediately to be 
 called. 
 
 They had a sister of theirs, 
 called Elizabeth. 
 
 He found him with some of his 
 neighbours. 
 
 The English make use of the article before an or- 
 dinal number joined to a proper name ; as, Leo THE 
 Tenth, &c. ; before a noun in apposition, or imme- 
 diately following another, of which it expresses a 
 quality ; as, Mr. Grant, THE son of John, &e. ; also 
 in speaking of quotations, or of the division of a book ; 
 book THE first, chapter THE second, &c. : in Italian, 
 however, the article is suppressed ; as, 
 
 il cardindle Richelieu, primo cardinal Richelieu, THE prime 
 ministro di Luigi Decimo- minister of Louis THE Thir- 
 terzo, teenth ; 
 
USE OF ARTICLES. 467 
 
 giorndta nona, novtlla ottdva, the ninth day, novel the eighth. 
 
 In speaking of buying and selling any thing, the 
 English article a or an, used with nouns of number, 
 measure, or weight, is expressed in Italian by the arti- 
 cles il, lo, la ; as, 
 
 il frumento si vendeva ad the wheat was sold at eighty 
 ottdnta lire IL moggio, livres A bushel. 
 
 The same article, a or an, in Italian is suppressed : 
 
 First, after the verbs to be, to become, with a noun 
 expressing the country, profession, dignity, or any other 
 quality of the subject of the verb ; as, 
 
 Vittorio Siri, Italidno, Vittorio Siri, AN Italian; 
 
 fui poita, I was A poet ; 
 
 sarete capitano, you will be A captain ; 
 
 diverra cardindle, he will become A cardinal. 
 
 Secondly, with a noun of the same kind after the 
 verbs to make, to create, to appoint, to elect, to choose, 
 to declare, to proclaim, whatever may be the subject of 
 the verb ; as, 
 
 fecelo maliscdlco, he made him A marshal ; 
 
 10 dichiarb mdtto, she declared him A madman. 
 
 Thirdly, before a noun in apposition, or qualifying 
 another which precedes it ; as, 
 
 11 Tamigij fiume d' Inghil- the Thames, A river in Eng- 
 ttrra, land. 
 
 Fourthly, before the title of a work ; as, 
 
 discorso di Luigi Guicciar- A discourse of Luigi Guicciar- 
 dini, dini. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 IL CARDIJVALE RICHELIEU, Cardinal Richelieu, the prime 
 PRIMO MINISTRO DI LUIGI DECi- minister of Louis the Thirteenth, 
 MOTERZO. (Den. Letter.) 
 
468 
 
 SYNTAX. 
 
 The ninth day, novel the eighth. 
 
 He fixed the price of bread, as 
 if the wheat were sold at thirty- 
 three livres a bushel ; and it was 
 selling as high as eighty. 
 
 GlORNATA NONA, NOVELLA OT- 
 TAVA. (BOCC.) 
 
 Fissd la tneta del pdne al 
 prezzo che il pdne avrebbe avuto, 
 se IL FRUMANTO si fosse venduto 
 a L!RE trcntatre IL MOGGIO ; e 
 
 SI VENDEVA FINO AD OTTANTA. 
 
 (Manz. Prom. Spos.) 
 
 VITTORIO SIRI,^ ITALIANO, fu 
 storiografo della corte di Frdncia. 
 (Den. Letter.) 
 
 POETA FIJI, e contdi di quel I was a poet, and sang of that 
 giusto Figliuol d* Jlnchise, che just son of Anchises, who came 
 venne da Troia. (Dant. Inf. 1.) from Troy. 
 
 In luogo di quello che morto He substituted him for the one 
 era, il sostitm, e FECELO siio who had died, and made him his 
 MALISCALCO. (Bocc. g. 2. n. 8.) marshal. 
 
 Vittorio Siri, an Italian, was 
 historian to the court of France. 
 
 SUL TAMIGI, FITJME D' INGHIL- 
 TERRA. (Bocc. Com. Dant.) 
 
 On the Thames, a river in Eng- 
 land. 
 
 DISCORSO DI LUIGI GUICCIAR- A discourse of Luigi Guiccardini 
 DINI di magistrdti. (Mach.) to the magistrates. 
 
 EXERCISE XXX. 
 
 The good, which man can derive from a thing, 
 giovamentOj uomo potere cavdr cosa, 
 
 consists either in (the) its utility, or (in the) pleasure. 
 consistere utile, piacere. 
 
 He advised the king to wish for peace, and not war. 
 Confortdre re volere pace, guerra. 
 
 I know (of) many fine things, and (of) beautiful little- 
 sapere molto bello cosa, bello can- 
 
 wish 
 
 songs, and I 
 zone, 
 
 to tell thee one* of them. 
 dire 3 1 VX 4 2 . 
 
 One, in the feminine gender. 
 
USE OF ARTICLES. 
 
 469 
 
 The queen having turned (herself) to Filomena, or- 
 regina torndre^ im- 
 
 dered her 
 porre 2 l 
 
 to I continue. 
 1 seguitdre. 
 
 Now you say, that if. 
 2 dire\ 
 
 of I all things created for man, the faculty of 
 fra I tutto cosa credte , 
 
 speech (speaking) is that which properly and par- 
 
 parldre, proprio par- 
 ticularly belongs to (is for) man, speaking I may 
 
 ticoldre uomo, parldre si 
 
 be said 
 pud dir 
 
 with reason to be an excellent thing. 
 ragione ottimo 2 cosa 1 . 
 
 And being asked by her (of) the reason (why), he 
 
 domanddre , 
 
 related to her 
 raccontdre 3 2 
 
 word for word 
 ordinatamente 1 
 
 his whole dream. 
 
 not say how, nor if the effect is true ; but 
 1 dire , effetto vero ; 
 
 I believe it for certain. I hope, (that) you will 
 credere* l certo. Sperdre, 
 
 not permit, that I, for I the great love I bear 
 sofferire, , | tdnto e tale amore 
 
 you, should receive death I as a reward. It ap- 
 , ricevere 2 mdrte 1 \ per guiderdone. pa' 
 
 peared to him, that he gave away, now to one, 
 rere 2 l , 3 esso* dondre 12 , 5 6 7 , 
 
 and then (now) to another, castles, cities, and 
 
 8 9 10 i\ 9 castello, cittd, 
 
 baronies. We have arms, men, and 
 baronia. drme, uomo t 
 
 well-fortified 
 ben muniti 
 
 quarters, and provisions for a long war. Speak to 
 
 him of past and present things, and of new fears. 
 
 passdto 2 3 presente 4 ^ cosa 1 , 5 nuovo 7 paura 6 . 
 
 Weakness, fear, melancholy, and ignorance are the 
 
 Debolezza, timore, rnalinconia, ignordnza 
 
 40 
 
470 SYNTAX. 
 
 sources of superstition. The Romans were inured 
 
 sorgente superstizione. Romano assuefdre 
 
 to hardship, fatigue, and a military life. Italy is 
 
 disdggio, fatica, militdre* vita 1 . Italia 
 
 situated between two seas. Cane della Scala was 
 situdre mare. 
 
 one of the greatest lords, that from the time of 
 piii notdbile aignore, 
 
 the emperor Frederic the Second 
 imperadore Federigo 
 
 to this 
 in qua 
 
 has 
 
 been known I in Italy. The Tiber washes a great 
 sapesse \ Italia. Tevere bagndre gran 
 
 portion of the state I of the Pope I . King Charles 
 pdrte Stdto \ Pontificio \ . Re Carlo 
 
 died, when (the) his son was still in Burgundy 
 morire, 3 figliuolo* essendo 1 orgogna 
 
 I under the care of I the Duke Philip. The Arno 
 appresso a Duca Filippo. 3 4 
 
 separates it,* which, as you know, flows from east 
 divider e z 1 9 sapere, cdrrere oriente 
 
 to west. Rinieri king of Cyprus. Three younjj 
 ponente. re Cipro. gio- 
 
 men love three sisters, and elope (themselves) with 
 vane amdre sorella, fuggire* 
 
 them to Crete. I see Fracastoro, Bevazzano, Trifon 
 elleno* Creta. vedere 
 
 Gabriel, and farther on (more far) I see Tasso. 
 
 2 lontdno 3 l . 
 
 The Greeks attributed them to their Gods, and to 
 Greco attribute* l Iddio, 
 
 those who performed those great deeds, which are 
 colui fare gran cosa, 
 
 recorded of Hercules and Theseus, of Hector and 
 tcrivere Ercole Teseo, Ettore 
 
 * It, in the feminine gender- 
 
USE OF ARTICLES. 471 
 
 Achilles. He has thy sister for his wife. Thou wilt 
 
 Achille. sorella moglie. Hi- 
 
 remember (thyself) to I tell to thy father, that thy 
 
 corddre. 
 
 di \ dire padre, 
 
 children, and his and my nephews, are not descendants 
 figliuolo, nepote, 1 ndscere 6 
 
 of I a pal try- fellow. She 
 da I paltoniere. 
 
 | on their mother's side 
 per 3 mddre* 
 
 made (to) her brother, and (to) her sisters, and (to) 
 Fare fratello, sorella, 
 
 every other person, believe, that by the power of de- 
 persona, crddere , indozzamento de- 
 mons this had appeared to them. Have you heard 
 monio issere accaddre 2 *. udire 
 
 how your good brother-in-law treats your sister. This 
 buono cogndto tr attar e 2 sorella 1 . 
 
 is my master. Without preserving faith to his friend 
 signore. serbdre fede* l 2 amico 3 
 
 and to his master. Gentlemen, it is well to taste 
 456 signore 7 . Signore, egli buono 
 
 (that we should taste) (some of) the wine of this 
 
 assaggidre vino 
 
 able man. Shall I tell it to the master or to 
 valenV uomo. dire 2 * signore 
 
 the mistress ? O, my Lord, when shall I ever 
 signora ? 0, *, qudndo 3 
 
 be happy ? A treatise on I painting and 
 
 lieto 1 Trattuto 
 
 di I pittura 
 
 on 
 
 di 
 
 sculpture I by 
 scultura di 
 
 Leon-Battista Alberti. Guided by 
 
 (with the guidance of) Ulamane, a Persian. Having 
 guida , Persid.no. 
 
 left Tauris, a royal city. In the times of the 
 
 abbandondre Tduri.de, redle* cittd 1 . tempo 
 
 emperor Frederic the Second. Under the pontificate 
 mperatore Federigo . pontificdto 
 
472 SYNTAX. 
 
 of Pope Clement the Seventh. Tasso, Jerusalem 
 Pdpa Clemtnte , Gerusatemme 
 
 Delivered, Canto the fourth, stanza the third, the 
 Liberdta, , > 
 
 first verse. 
 2 verso 1 . 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 POSITION OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 ADJECTIVES in Italian, as we have already observed 
 at pp. 390 and 393, may be placed either before or 
 after the substantives, which they are to qualify ; as, 
 
 [new spouse] bride; 
 
 vini BUONI, good wines ; 
 
 BUONE vivdnde, good meats. 
 
 The adjective is often separated from its substantive by another 
 word; as, 
 
 un monastero di donne assdi a convent of nuns very much re- 
 
 FAMOSO, nowned ; 
 
 due cose molto ai miei costumi two things very much contrary to 
 
 CONTRARIE, my habits. 
 
 /There are, however, some adjectives which are to be 
 placed after their substantives, and others which are to 
 be placed before them ; as, 
 
 Jiera CRUDELE, cruel monster ; 
 
 inclinazione BISBETICA, extravagant disposition ; 
 
 BEGLI occhi, beautiful eyes ; 
 
 GRAN mdle, great evil. 
 
POSITION OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 473 
 
 Adjectives of nations ; adjectives expressing taste, 
 smell, or hearing ; denoting shape or form ; expressing 
 colors ,* the state of the elements, and physical or 
 mental qualities ; adjectives that may be wsed as sw6- 
 stantives ; that are formed of participles ; that govern, 
 or are connected with, any other part of speech ; are to 
 be placed after the substantives ; as. 
 
 dbito ARABESCO, 
 favilla LATiNA, 
 vino DOLCE, 
 6rbe ODOIUFERE, 
 voci so AVI, 
 t6rri RITONDE, 
 rosdi B i AN CHI, 
 
 TEMPESTOSO, 
 INFERM1CCIO, 
 
 persone DOTTE, 
 
 [un gob bo], sdrto GOB BO, 
 
 Arabian dress ; 
 
 Latin tongue ; 
 
 sweet wine ; 
 
 sweet herbs ; 
 
 sweet voices ; 
 
 round towers ; 
 
 white rose-bushes ; 
 
 stormy weather ; 
 
 sickly old man ; 
 
 wise persons ; 
 
 [a hunchback], a hunchbacked 
 
 tailor ; 
 [acc^so, da accendere], lam- [lighted, from to light], a light- 
 
 pada ACCESA, 
 tdzze PIENE di vino, 
 
 ed lamp ; 
 cups filled with wine : 
 
 To which may be added the following adjectives, which, 
 generally, are put after the substantives ; viz. 
 
 l&ngo, 
 
 long; 
 
 Idnguido, 
 
 languid ; 
 
 corto, 
 
 short ; 
 
 importuno, 
 
 importunate ; 
 
 pigro, 
 
 lazy; 
 
 vizioso, 
 
 vicious ; 
 
 lento, 
 
 slow ; 
 
 virtuoso, 
 
 virtuous ; 
 
 neutro, 
 
 neuter ; 
 
 pauroso, 
 
 fearful ; 
 
 intiero. 
 
 entire ; coraggioso, 
 
 courageous : 
 
 * Instances are found, notwithstanding, among the poets, in which adjectivea of 
 colors are put before the substantives j as, 
 
 Colddir'ttto sopra'l VE'RDE SMA'LTO, Thereon the green enamel [verdure] 
 Mi far ruostrdti gli spiriti mdgni. (Dant. were soon shown me the great spirits. 
 
 V 6sser covtrto pdi di BIA'NCHB PIU'- 
 ME. (Petr. c. 4.) 
 
 40* 
 
 To be then covered with white feathers. 
 
474 SYNTAX. 
 
 And adjectives ending in e/e, and He ; as, 
 crwc?ELE, cruel ; | CIVILE, civil. 
 
 Numeral adjectives, both cardinal and ordinal, and 
 the adjective pronouns questo, ' this ' ; quello, ' that ' ; 
 cotesto or codesto, 6 that near you ' ; are to be placed 
 before the substantives ; as, 
 
 Dtf E dnnij two years ; 
 
 6TTO miglia, eight miles ; 
 
 il TERZO giornoy the third day ; 
 
 la SETTIMA COSA, the seventh thing ; 
 
 QUESTO castello, this castle ; 
 
 QUELL' anno, that year ; 
 
 COTESTE Zagrime, those tears. 
 
 When the ordinal numeral adjectives are joined to a proper name, 
 or are used in speaking of the division of a work ; in which case they 
 are put after the substantives ; * as, 
 
 Urbdno OTTAVO, LEONE DE- Urban the Eighth ; Leo the 
 CIMO, Tenth ; 
 
 pdrte PRIMA, canzone QUARTA, part the first ; song the fourth : 
 
 And the cardinal numeral adjectives ventuno, * twenty-one ' ; trentu- 
 no, ' thirty-one '; quarantimo, ' forty-one *; &c. ; which may be put 
 either before or after the substantives. 
 
 Numeral adjectives, as we have already observed at p. 403, agree 
 with their substantives in gender and number. Now, by a peculiarity 
 of language, if the numeral adjectives ventuno, trentuno, &,c., precede 
 the substantive, this substantive is put in the singular ; but if the 
 
 * But, when, in speaking of books, the article is used, we find them, in good 
 writers, both before and after the substantives j aa, 
 
 JVeL VENTE'SIMO CA'NTO del Purgatd- In the twentieth canto of the Purgato- 
 rio, egli ricdrda la genealog'ia dp Cape- ry, he [Dante] traces the genealogy of 
 tingi. (Fosc.) the Capets. 
 
 Machiavelli, neL L!BRO PR!MO dtlle Machiavel, in the first book of the 
 Isttirie Florentine. (Den.) History of Florence. 
 
POSITION OF ADJECTIVES. 475 
 
 numeral adjectives follow the substantive, then the substantive is put 
 in the plural ; as, 
 
 novantuna RUOTA, ninety-one circles ; 
 
 ANNI ventuno 9 twenty-one years. 
 
 If there is any other word connected with the substantive, and this 
 word precedes the adjectives ventimo, &c., it is put in the plural, 
 though the substantive following the adjectives be in the singular ; but, 
 if the word follows the adjectives, it is put in the plural if it comes 
 after the substantive, and in the singular if it comes before ; as, 
 
 ALTRE novantuna ruota, ninety- one circles more ; 
 
 anni trentuno INTERI, thirty-one whole years ; 
 
 ventuna PICCOLA STELLA, vici- twenty-erne small stars, very near 
 NISIME tra di I6ro* to each other. 
 
 To which may be added the following adjectives, 
 which, generally, are put before the substantives ; viz. 
 
 buono, good ; 
 
 cattivo, bad ; 
 
 grdnde, great ; 
 
 picciolooT ? n 
 
 piccolo, $ 
 
 7/77 $ handsome, 
 
 m > ] fine ; 
 
 brutto, ugly, bad ; 
 
 ricco, rich ; 
 
 poor. 
 
 There are some adjectives which may be placed 
 either before or after the substantives, but whose posi- 
 
 * This usage may appear contrary to reason ; but it is to be observed that these 
 and similar expressions are elliptical and stand for, A'LTRE NOVA'NTA rudte, e U'NA 
 RUOTA, * ninety cirdes and one circle more ' ; VE'NTI piccole stelle, ed U'NA PICCOLA 
 STE'LLA, tutte viciNissiME TRA DI LORO, 'twenty small stars, and ono small star, all 
 very near to each other'; &c., which sentences were first abbreviated into, 
 A'LTRE NOVA'NTA, e u NA FUOTA, ' ninety and one circle more ' : VE'NTI ed U'NA 
 piccoLA STE'LLA, ViciNissiME, &c.,' ' twenty and one small stars, very near, &c. J 
 and afterwards into, A'LTHE NOVANTU'NA RUOTA; VENTU'NA piccoLA STE'LLA, 
 viciNissiME, &c. 
 
 Notwithstanding this, there are instances of some writers using the substantive in 
 the plural, even when preceded by the numeral adjectives ventuno, &c. ; as, 
 
 Enta, eddscanio, suo figliudlo, e ttiita ^Eneas, and Ascanius his son, and all 
 
 sba ginte DE'LLE VENTU'NA NA'VI, la the crews of the twenty-one ships, were 
 
 d6tta reina accdlse con grande ondre. received by the said queen with great 
 
 (Vill.) honors. 
 
 Troverete V O'pera delV Alessdndro You will find the Opera of Alexander 
 
 nell* 1'ndie piti edrta di qudllo, chefindra in India 561 lines shorter, than it has 
 
 i stdta, di 561 VE'RSI. (Metast. lett.) been hitherto. 
 
476 
 
 SYNTAX. 
 
 tion affects the signification ; as, galante, gentile, solo, 
 certo, doppio, semplice. Thus, 
 
 un GAL ANT' wdmo, 
 un uomo GALANTE, 
 
 un GEN TIL' uomo, 
 un uomo GENTILE, 
 
 un SOLO u6mo, 
 un uomo SOLO, 
 
 una CERTA notizia, 
 una notizia CERT A, 
 un DOPPIO amico, 
 un amico DOPPIO, 
 un SEMPLICE contadino, 
 un contadino SEMPLICE, 
 
 a good, an honorable man ; 
 a courteous, a galant man ; 
 
 a gentleman, a nobleman ; 
 a civil, gentle, courteous, kind 
 man ; 
 
 a single man [one only] ; 
 a single man [not married, 
 without family] ; 
 
 certain [not well ascertained] 
 
 news; 
 certain [undoubted] news ; 
 
 a double friend [two or equal 
 
 to two friends]'; 
 a double [false] friend ; 
 
 a single [no more than one] 
 countryman ; 
 
 a simple [inexperienced] coun- 
 tryman. 
 
 Two or more adjectives, qualifying the same substan- 
 tive, may be placed before or after the substantive ; as, 
 
 VARIE e DIVERSE novita, various and different new 
 
 things ; 
 
 conpdnni LARGHI e LUNGHI, with garments full and long, 
 e voci UMILJ e MANSUETE, and language humble and 
 
 meek. 
 
 Sometimes they are separated by putting one of them 
 before and the other or others after the substantives, 
 which adds grace and elegance to the phrase ; as, 
 
 NOBILE giovane e BE 
 
 a noble and beautiful young 
 woman ; 
 
 NOBILI vestimenti e RICCHI, rich and elegant clothes. 
 
POSITION OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 477 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Di* da mia pdrte alia NUOVA 
 SPOSA, che nelle mie contrdde 
 s' usa, qudndo alcun forestiere 
 mdngia al convito della SPOSA 
 NUOVA .... (Bocc. g. 10. n. 9.) 
 
 Ma V 6ra del mangidre venuta, 
 V abate e tutti gli dltri e di BUONE 
 VIVANDE e di VINI BUONI sermti 
 furono. (Bocc. g. 10. n. 2.) 
 
 In queste nostre contrdde fu, 
 ed & ancora, UN MONASTERO DI 
 
 DONNE ASSAI FAMOSO di Sttntltd. 
 
 (Bocc. g. 3. n. 1.) 
 Mi converra far DtiE COSE 
 
 MOLTO AI MIEI COSTtJMI CONTRA- 
 
 RIE. (Bocc. g. 10. n. 8.) 
 
 Cerbero, FIERA CRUDELE e di- 
 v6rsa, Con tre^gole canina- 
 m&nte Idtra Sovra la gdnte, 
 che quivi g sommersa. (Dant, 
 Inf. 6.) 
 
 Gli storpidti capricci della sua 
 naturaJe INCLINAZIONE BISBETI- 
 CA. (Alleg. 157.) 
 
 EW e de' suoi BEGLI OCCHI 
 ved6r vdga. (Dant. Purg. 27.) 
 
 Questo e dunque il GRAN MALE, 
 il GRAN peccdto, il GRAN fdtto 
 adoperdto da Gisippo ? (Bocc. 
 g. 10. n. 8.) 
 
 U abdte, con tutto che egli in 
 ABITO ARABESCO fosse, dopo al- 
 qudnto il rajffigwd. (Bocc. g. 10. 
 n. 9. 
 
 La giovane udendo la FAVELLA 
 LATINA, dubitd, non fbrse dltro 
 vento r avisse a Lipari ritorndta. 
 (Bocc. g. 5. n. 2.) 
 
 U uve troppo mature fdnno il 
 VINOJOIW DOLCE, ma meno potin- 
 te. (Gr. 4. 22.) 
 
 Tell the bride from me, that it 
 is a custom in my country, when 
 any foreigner goes to the banquet 
 of the bride 
 
 But when the hour of dinner was 
 come, the abbot and all the others 
 were helped to good meats and 
 good wines. 
 
 In this neighbourhood of ours 
 there was, and there is still, a con- 
 vent of nuns very much renowned 
 for sanctity. 
 
 I shall be obliged to do two 
 things very much contrary to my 
 habits. 
 
 Cerberus, cruel and strange 
 monster, through his threefold 
 throat barks as a dog over the 
 multitude which is immersed there. 
 
 The lame caprices of his natural 
 extravagant disposition. 
 
 She is charmed to behold [in 
 the glass] her beautiful eyes. 
 
 Is this, then, the great evil, the 
 great sin, the great crime com- 
 mitted by Gisippus ? 
 
 Although he had on an Arabian 
 dress, the abbot soon recognised 
 him. 
 
 The young woman, hearing the 
 Latin [Italian] tongue, feared, lest 
 a contrary wind had brought her 
 back to Lapari. 
 
 Grapes, when too ripe, make 
 more sweet wine, but less power- 
 ful. 
 
478 
 
 SYNTAX. 
 
 Mdlti anddvano attorno, por- 
 tdndo nille mdni, chi fiori, chi 
 
 ERBE ODORIFERE, chi diverse 
 
 maniere di spezierie. (Bocc. Intr.) 
 
 Parldvan rddo con voci soAvi. 
 (Dant. Inf. 4.) 
 
 Sopra le mura d6lla cittd edi- 
 fied TORRI RITONDE ni6ltO Sp6sS6. 
 
 (Gio. Vill. 1. 1. c. 38.) 
 
 / Idti delle qudli vie, tutti di 
 ROSAI EIANCHI e vermigli, e di 
 gelsomini 6rano chiusi. (Bocc. 
 g. 3. n. 1.) 
 
 Con 6ssa surse un TEMPO fie- 
 rissimo e TEMPESTOSO. (Bocc. 
 g.5.n. 1.) 
 
 Fo non vorrei, che noi piglids- 
 simo un grdnchio, e ch* 6' fosse 
 qudlche VECCHIO debole o IN- 
 FERMICCIO. (Mach. Mandr. 4. 9.) 
 
 Ma dopo se fa le PERSOJVE 
 DOTTE. (Dant. Pur. 22.) 
 
 Costui fu uno de* piu infdmi 
 nwstri di quella corte, allidvo di 
 un SARTO GOBBO. (Dav. Ann. 15.) 
 
 Nelle mdni le si ponga una 
 LAMPADA ACCESA. (Ann. Car. 
 leti.) 
 
 Con alcune TAZZE in mdno 
 PIENE DI VINO. (Car. lett.) 
 
 La VESTA, chi vuol che sia 
 LT^JVGA fino a? pi6di, chi CORTA 
 / ino dlle ginocchia. ( Car. lett.) 
 
 Del lungo 60 10 CIVIL ti pregan 
 fine. (Petr. c. 41.) 
 
 JVel ditto anno si comincidj e 
 fu DUE ANNI seguenti, grdnde 
 cdro di srdno in Firenze. (Gio. 
 Vill.) 
 
 Many went about carrying in 
 their hands, some, flowers, some, 
 sweet herbs, and others, different 
 kinds of spices. 
 
 They spoke seldom, but their 
 words were sweet. 
 
 Upon the walls of the city he 
 built round towers very frequent. 
 
 The sides of which ways were 
 all lined with white and red rose- 
 bushes, and jasmine. 
 
 With it [the night] arose stormy 
 and very severe weather. 
 
 I should not wish, that we 
 make a mistake, and that he is 
 some feeble and sickly old man. 
 
 But make the persons, that fol- 
 low them, wise. 
 
 This one was one of the most 
 infamous monsters in that court, 
 and a pupil of a hunchbacked 
 tailor. 
 
 Let a lighted lamp be put into 
 her hands. 
 
 Holding some cups filled with 
 wine. 
 
 As for her dress, some will 
 have it to reach to her feet, others 
 to her knees. 
 
 They beg that you will put an 
 end to the long civil hatred. 
 
 In the said year, began in Flor- 
 ence a great scarcity of corn, 
 which lasted for the two following 
 years. 
 
POSITION OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 479 
 
 E QUESTO CASTELLO pOStO prO- 
 
 pinquo a Firenze ad OTTO MIGLIA. 
 (Mach. Stor.) 
 
 Quasi tutti, infra il TERZO 
 GIORNO, monvano. (Eocc. Intr.) 
 
 LA SETTIHA COSA che c' induce 
 afar penitenza, . . . . (Pass.) 
 
 Le viti facevano gran vista di 
 dovere QUELL,* ANNO assdi uve 
 fare. (Eocc. g. 1. n, 2.) 
 
 Al qudle la donna disse: " Tan- 
 cr6dij serba COTESTE LAGRIME a 
 meno desiderata fortiina." (Bocc. 
 g. 4. n. 1.) 
 
 1 pittori, gli scultori, e gli 
 architetti del tempo di Paolo 
 QUINTO, e di URBANO OTTAVO, 
 non cedevano quasi per dltro ri- 
 gudrdo a quelli che vissero sotto 
 LEONE DECIMO, e Paolo TERZO, 
 fuorchi nel merito di avire aper- 
 ta e disegndta la strdda. (Den. 
 Riv. Ital. 1. 23. c. 12.) 
 
 Petrdrca, PARTE PRMA, CAN- 
 ZONE QUARTA. (Crus.) 
 
 Poi per la medisima via pare 
 des<:e"ndere AL.TRE NOVANTUNA 
 RUOTA. (Dant. Conv.) 
 
 Tennemi amor ANNI VENTUNO 
 ardendo. (Petr. s. 312.) 
 
 Cantdndo ANNI TRENTUNO IN- 
 TERI sp6si. (Petr.) 
 
 La nubilosa d* Orione gli ap- 
 pari formdta da VENTUNA PIC- 
 COLA STELLA, VICINfsSIME TRA 
 
 DI LORD. (Tris. Elog. Galil.) 
 
 n Signor Giovanni Corvino 
 richi^dea d* esser fdtto GENTILE 
 UOMO Vinizidno. (Bemb.Stor.4.) 
 
 DONNA ^ GENT|L nel ciil> che 
 si compidnge Di questo im- 
 pedimento. 
 
 This castle is situated eight 
 miles from Florence. 
 
 Almost all died within the third 
 day. 
 
 The seventh thing which in- 
 duces us to do penance, is 
 
 The vines seemed as if they 
 would produce an abundance of 
 grapes that year. 
 
 To whom the lady said : " Tan- 
 cred, save those tears against 
 worse fortune than this." 
 
 The painters, the sculptors, and 
 the architects of the times of Paul 
 the Fifth and Urban the Eighth, 
 were not inferior, perhaps, to those 
 who lived under Leo the Tenth, 
 arid Paul the third, in any other 
 respect than the merit of having 
 opened and marked the way. 
 
 Petrarch, part the first, song the 
 fourth. 
 
 Then he seemed to descend 
 ninety-one more circles by the 
 same way. 
 
 Love kept me in a flame twenty- 
 one years. 
 
 I consumed thirty-one years in 
 the study of the Muses. 
 
 The nebula of Orion showed 
 itself to him to be formed of 
 twenty-one small stars, very near 
 to each other. 
 
 Mr. John Corvino, asked to be 
 made a Venetian nobleman. 
 
 There is a courteous lady in 
 Heaven who mourns this hin- 
 drance. 
 
480 
 
 SYNTAX. 
 
 Jlvendo stco Tancredi VARIE E 
 DIVERSE NOVITA, pensdtc. (Bocc. 
 g. 4. n. 1.) 
 
 II qudle dmpia materia mi 
 presto, a, dimostrdre quanta e 
 qudle sia la ipocresm de* religiosi, 
 
 CO 5 PANNI LARGHI E LtJ^NGHI, 6 
 
 co* visi artificialmente pdllidi, E 
 
 VOCI UMILI E MANSUETE 
 
 nel domanddr V altrui. (Bocc. 
 g. 4. n. 2.) 
 
 Ormisda, stdto^ in lungo trat- 
 tdto di dover torre per moglie 
 
 Una NOBILE GIOVANE E BELLA, 
 
 chiamdta Cassdndra. (Bocc. g. 
 5. n. 1.) *. 
 
 Maestro Mazzio> av6ndo presa 
 per miglie una bella e gentil 
 giovane, di NOBILI VESTIMENTI E 
 RICCHI la tentvafornita. (Bocc. 
 g. 4. n. 10.) 
 
 Tancred having revolved in his 
 mind various and different new 
 things. 
 
 Which [proverb] affords me am- 
 ple matter to show how great is 
 the hypocrisy of the religious, 
 who have garments full and long, 
 and faces made pale artificially, 
 and language humble and meek 
 for the purpose of getting men's 
 property from them. 
 
 Ormisda, who had been long 
 talked of as about to marry a 
 noble and beautiful young woman, 
 called Cassandra. 
 
 Master Mazzeo, having married 
 a beautiful and noble woman, kept 
 her well provided with rich and 
 elegant clothes. 
 
 EXERCISE XXXI. 
 
 There was once (one time) a man of a ben- 
 
 JEssere volta uomo be- 
 
 eficent heart. This courtier had the misfortune 
 
 nefico* cuore 1 . 2 cortigidno 3 l 
 
 (bad fortune) of losing the favor (falling in dis- 
 
 fortuna cadere dis- 
 grace) of his master. The astrologer of the Caliph, 
 grdzia signore. astrologo Califfo, 
 
 after various observations, said. I have been writing 
 vdrio osservazione, dire. 
 
 so long (it is so long that I write), that my 
 
 tdmpo scrivere, 
 
 hand I ought to be I accustomed to it. The affairs 
 mdno dovrebbe essere^, avvdzza? l . 2 c6se* 
 
POSITION OF ADJECTIVES. 481 
 
 of the Lombards being prosperous. No* sinful woman 
 4 Lombdrdo 5 l prospero. , rto femmina 
 
 was ever more deserving (of) the fire than I (a? 
 
 degno 3 l fuoco 2 * 
 
 I should be). People really pious, are wise. Although 
 5 . Persona vero pio, sdvio. 
 
 he had a very long beard (the beard great). 
 
 barba grdnde. 
 
 Having, I from I a very rich and great merchant, 
 JEssej'e, \ di \ ricco gran mercatdnte, 
 
 become a nobleman. He showed to him a noble- 
 divenire 2 cavali6re l . Mostrdre^, cava- 
 
 man, called Philip Argenti, a man large and robust, 
 litre, chiamdre Fillppo , uom grdnde nerboruto, 
 
 and very disdainful, irascible, and passionate. She 
 forte sdegnoso, iracondo, bizzdrro. 
 
 is to hold 
 Tens a 
 
 her 
 la 
 
 hands up, and I in 
 mdno dllOj \ da 
 
 (the) one 
 
 hand a white child asleep (that sleeps), I to 1 
 
 bianco fanciullo dormire, \ per \ 
 
 represent sleep ; in the other a black onef seemingly 
 significdre sonno ; da nero 
 
 asleep - (that seems to be asleep), 
 parere dormire, 
 
 to represent 
 sigmfichi 
 
 death. Immediately he collected a large, fine, and 
 morte. Presto congregdre grdnde, bello, 
 
 powerful army.' Some (of the) cherries are sweet, 
 poderoso oste. certo 3 1 ciriegid 2 dolce, 
 
 and some sour. I have many valuable precious stones. 
 certo dgro. mdlto ricco prezioso pietra. 
 
 The Pope had kept in the college of Pisa (Pisan 
 
 2 Papa 3 l tenere Pisdno 
 
 college), to learn Divine letters, Raphael of Riario, 
 studio, impardre Ponlificio lettera, Raffaello , 
 
 a nephew of Count Jerome. The first and most 
 nipoie Conte Girolamo. 
 
 * JVo. for no one. t O/w, for another. 
 
 41 
 
482 SYNTAX. 
 
 essential advantage, which ought to have been do- 
 
 S, f ' At '- i i n . t mt 
 
 essenziale jrutto, 
 rived 
 
 si 5 dovtva? ricavdre 7 
 
 from I the new studies, was the knowledge 
 di l 2 nudvo 3 studio*, cognizidne 
 
 of the ancient Latin and Greek authors. The Academy 
 antico Latino Greco autdre. Accademia 
 
 of (the) Inscriptions and Belles Lettres is posterior 
 Iscrizidne E6lla L6tttra postcridre 
 
 to the Florentine Academy, and that of the Crusca. 
 Fiurentmo rfccademia, 
 
 Lulli was the father and creator of the French music. 
 padre creatdre Francise musica. 
 
 A certain kind and charitable little-woman. Com- 
 c6rto compassiontvole carit&tivo doruia. Com- 
 
 punction does a great pood, and renders man humble, 
 punzione fare gran bene, r&ndere uoino umile, 
 
 and charitable. He was tall, and of very pleasing 
 caritativo. grdnde, piacevote 
 
 and graceful deportment, and (a young man) of a middle 
 graziuso maniira^ giooant mizzo 
 
 age. (The) their conversation* having been long, and 
 etd. 3 ragionamdnto* 2 lungo, 
 
 the heat excessive. Giving her to eat ^ some roots 
 caldo grdnde. Ddre^_, da mangidre radice 
 
 of herbs, and wild fruits, and dates, 
 er&a, salvdtico pfano, ddttero. 
 
 * Conversation in the plural. 
 
USE AND POSITION OF PRONOUNS. 483 
 
 CHAPTER VI. 
 
 USE AND POSITION OF CERTAIN PRONOUNS. 
 
 PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 
 
 ITALIAN personal pronouns, as it has been already men- 
 tioned at pp. 105, 164, 165, when they form the subject 
 of the verb may be either expressed or understood ; as, 
 
 io vidi wn' area non troppo I saw a good-sized chest ; 
 grdnde, 
 
 Marsilia, come VQI sapete, e Marseilles, as you know, is an 
 antica t nobilissima cilia, ancient and famous city : 
 
 wVe a negdre, ne a pregdre I am neither inclined to deny, 
 [io] son disposta, nor to pray ; 
 
 il che littamtnte [voi] com- which thing you will take in 
 porterete, good part. 
 
 When personal pronouns are expressed, they are gen- 
 erally put before the verb ; hut they may also be placed 
 after it ; as, 
 
 EGLI avea V anello assdicdro, he held the ring very dear : 
 
 JVe voglio [io] qul tralascidr nor do I wish to omit saying 
 di dire una cosa, one thing. 
 
 When, however, a command is given, or a question is 
 asked, or when, in narrations, the sayings or doings of 
 a person are mentioned, the pronouns are always put 
 after the verb ; as, 
 
 mdngi [EGLI] del suo, s' egli let him eat of his own proper- 
 ne ha, ty, if lie has any. 
 
 che vdi [TU] factndo per what art thou doing in this 
 
 quista contradat street? 
 
 " dimmi il perche,' diss" io, " tell mo the cause," said I. 
 
 io non piangiva ; piangevan I wept not ; they wept. 
 
 ELLI, 
 
484 SYNTAX. 
 
 When personal pronouns are preceded by the adverbs 
 come, siccome, ' as ' ; quanta, ' so much', ' as ' ; they are 
 put in the objective ; and consequently io, ' I ' ; tu, 
 i thou ' ; egli, ' he ' ; ella, she ' ; eglino, elleno, ' they ' ; 
 are changed into me, c me ' ; te, ' thee ' ; lui, ' him ' ; lei, 
 i her ' ; loro, ' them ' ; if the verb of which they are sub- 
 jects is not expressed] but they remain in the subjec- 
 tive, and are never changed, if the verb of which they are 
 subjects is expressed ; as, 
 
 irano SICCOME LUI maliziosi, they were as malicious as he ; 
 
 QDANTO ME, puote issere al- any one may be as afflicted as 
 cun dolente, I : 
 
 Se 10 fossi nellavia COME E If I were in the street as he 
 EGLI, is ; 
 
 se tgli fosse in cdsa COME if he were within the house as 
 SONO io, I am. 
 
 When two of these pronouns come, one before, and 
 the other after, the verb essere, i to be ' ; or credere, 
 ( to believe'; and these verbs imply an idea of transmu- 
 tation from one to the other of the two pronouns ; 
 that which precedes the verb, is put in the subjective, and 
 that which follows it, is put in the objective ; as, 
 
 credtndo, c/t' io FOSSI TE, believing me to be thee ; 
 maravigliossi, che [EGLI] wondered much that he should 
 FOSSE CREDtfTO Lui, be taken for him. 
 
 If the pronouns io, tu, egli, ella, eglino, elleno occur 
 with an infinitive, and this infinitive follows the pro- 
 nouns, the pronouns are put in the objective ; but if the 
 infinitive precedes the pronouns, the pronouns remain in 
 the subjective ; as, 
 
 uddndo Lth con gli altri ES- hearing that he and his com- 
 
 SER morto, panions were dead ; 
 
 conosctndo LEI non ESSERE knowing that she was not of a 
 
 di buon legndggio, good condition : 
 
USE AND POSITION OF PRONOUNS. 
 
 485 
 
 Non bastdndogli cT ESSER 
 EG LI divenuto riccJussimo, 
 
 dispose di A.NDARE 
 desima per 6sso 9 
 
 He not being satisfied with 
 having become very rich ; 
 
 she determined to go herself 
 after him. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Madonna, fo vfoi questa sera 
 al irdi UN' ARCA NON TROPPO 
 
 GRANDE. (BOCC. g. 4. II. 10.) 
 
 MARSILIA, COME voi SAPETE, 
 E in Proven za sopra la marina 
 sitvdta, ANTICA E NOBILISSJMA 
 CITTA. (Bocc. g. 4. n. 3.) 
 
 Tancredi, NE A NEGARE NE A 
 
 PREGARE SON DlSl'6sTA. (BoCC. 
 
 g. 4.n 1.) 
 IL CHE, se sdvj siete, LIETA- 
 
 MENTE COMPORTERETE. (BoCC. 
 
 g.lO.n.8.) 
 
 ECU AVEA L' ANELLO ASSAI 
 
 CARO per alcuna virtu, che stdto 
 gli era ddto ad intendere, che 
 egii avca. (Bocc. g. 3. n. 9.) 
 
 N VOGLIO QUl TRALASCIAR DI 
 
 D!RE TJNA COSA, la quale mi par 
 molto vera. (Bott. Stor. Airier. 
 ). 6.) 
 
 Or MANGI DEL StJO, S* EGLI NE 
 
 HA, che del nostro non manger & 
 egli. (Boec. g. 1. n. 7.) 
 
 O figliuola, CHE VAI TU a 
 quest' urttj cosi sola, FACENDO PER 
 
 QUESTA CONTRADA ? 
 
 " DlMMI J L PERCHE," DISS' 10 J 
 
 tf per tal convegno, Che se tu 
 a ragion di lui ti pidngi, Sap- 
 piendo c/ii voi siete^ e la sua p6c- 
 ca, JW/ mondo suso ancor w te 
 ne cdngi." (Dant. Inf. 32.) 
 
 io NON PIANGEVA, si dentro 
 impietrdi : PIANGEVAN ELLI ; 
 ed Anselmuccio nuo Di&sn : 
 " Tu gnardi si, padre ! cht hdi ? " 
 (Dant. Inf. 33.) 
 
 41* 
 
 Madam, I saw late in the even- 
 ing a good-sized chest. 
 
 Marseilles, as you know, is an 
 ancient and famous cily in Prov- 
 ence, situated on the sea coast. 
 
 Tancred, I am neither inclined 
 to deny nor to pray. 
 
 Which thing, if you be wise, 
 you will take in good part. 
 
 He held the ring very dear, on 
 account of some virtue, which 
 they had made him believe it pos- 
 sessed. 
 
 Nor do I wish to omit mention- 
 ing here one thing, which appears 
 to me to be very true. 
 
 Let him eat of his own prop- 
 erty, if he has any, for he will not 
 eat of ours. 
 
 Daughter, ;vhat art thou doing 
 in this street, alone, at this hour ? 
 
 " Tell me the cause," said I, 
 " on such condition, that if right- 
 fully thou giievest for him, know- 
 ing who you are, and his sins, I 
 may repay thee in the world 
 above." 
 
 I wept not ; so petrified was I 
 within : they \vept ; and my little 
 Anselrn crid : '* Thou lookest so, 
 father! what ails thee ? " 
 
486 
 
 SYNTAX. 
 
 Costoro, che dair dltra pdrte 
 
 ERANO SICCOME Ltll MALIZIOSI. 
 
 (Bocc. g. 1. n. 4.) 
 
 SlCChe, QUANTO ME, PUOTE ES- 
 SERE ALCTJN DOLENTE. (BoCC. 
 
 Filoc.) 
 
 Che difdste voi, SE 10 FOSSI 
 
 NELLA V!A COME EGLI,^0d! 
 EGLI FOSSE IN CASA COME SONO 
 
 fo? 
 
 CREDENDO dsso, CH' io FOSSI 
 TE, m' ha con un lastone tutto 
 rdtto. (Bocc. g. 9. n. 7.) 
 
 MARAVIGLIOSSI forte Tedaldo, 
 che alcuno in tdnto il somiglidsse, 
 
 CHE FOSSE CREDUTO Lth. (BoCC. 
 
 g. 3. n. 7.) 
 
 La giovane, UDENDO LUI CON 
 GLI ALTRI ESSER MORTO, lunga- 
 mintc pidnse. (Bocc. g. 5. n. 2.) 
 
 CONOSCENDO LEI NON ESSERE 
 DI LEGNAGGIO che dlla SUtt 710- 
 
 biltd bene st6ssej tutto sdegndso 
 disse. (Bocc. g. 3. n. 9.) 
 
 Ma NON BASTANDOGLl D' ^S- 
 
 ER EGLI e' suoi compdgni in 
 brieve tempo DivENtrxi Riccnfs- 
 SIMI. (Bocc. g. 5. n. 2 ) 
 
 Seco DISPOSE di non manddre, 
 
 ma D* ANDARE ELLA MEDESIMA 
 
 PER ESSO. (Bocc. g. 5. n. 9.) 
 
 These, who, on the other side, 
 were as malicious as he. 
 
 So that, anybody may be x as 
 afflicted as I. 
 
 What would you say if I were 
 in the street as he is, or he within 
 the house as I am ? 
 
 Believing me to be thee, he 
 has broken all my bones with a 
 cudgel. 
 
 Tedaldo wondered much, that 
 any one should be so much like 
 himself, as to be taken for him. 
 
 The young woman, hearing, 
 that he and his companions were 
 dead, was very much grieved. 
 
 Knowing that she was of a 
 condition that did not well com- 
 port with his nobility, he said with 
 disdain. 
 
 But he and his friends not being 
 satisfied with their having become 
 very rich in a short time. 
 
 She determined hot to send, 
 but to go herself after him. 
 
 CONJUNCTIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 We observed (p. 109), that conjunctive pronouns are 
 used instead of personal pronouns, when these pronouns 
 are in the objective or in the relation of attribution, 
 and are closely connected with a verb, of which they 
 are the direct or indirect regimen. 
 
USE AND POSITION OF PRONOUNS. 
 
 487 
 
 This is always the case when there is but one per- 
 sonal pronoun in the phrase in the afrovementioned rela- 
 tions^ when the emphasis does not fall upon this pro- 
 noun, and when this pronoun is not in apposition with 
 the subject of the verb ; as, 
 
 MI potele torre qudnlo tengo you can take away from me 
 [for, A ME potete torre, all I have ; 
 &*.], 
 
 pieiosamente IL chiamava she called him with a piteous 
 [for, chiamava LUI], voice ; 
 
 ci faceste la leffa [for, A NOI you should put a trick upon 
 faceste, &c.], us; 
 
 LE vi donerd [for, A voi do- I will give them to you. 
 ner6 LORO], 
 
 But, if there are more than one personal pronoun in 
 the phrase, in the objective or in the relation of attribu- 
 tion; if the emphasis falls upon the pronouns; and if the 
 pronouns are in apposition with the subject of the verb, 
 or in apposition with each other; the conjunctive pro- 
 nouns are not used and the personal pronouns retain 
 their places ; as, 
 
 thou shalt not murder me ; 
 
 I am wont to say that he is, 
 another self; 
 
 you might console both your- 
 self and me ; 
 
 offesi ME per non offender I injured myself not to injure 
 Ltf i, him ; 
 
 it was, to both her and me, 
 given as a punishment, to 
 her to flee before me, and to 
 me to pursue her. 
 
 ME non ucciderdi tu, 
 
 uso dire, che E' sia un dltro 
 
 ME, 
 potreste voi e ME consolare, 
 
 ne fu, ed A LEI ed A ME, per 
 p<?na dato, A LEI di Jug- 
 girmi dav&nti, ed A ME di 
 seguitdrla, 
 
 Conjunctive pronouns are commonly put before the 
 verb, but may also be placed after it. When before 
 the verb, they are placed immediately after the personal 
 pronouns ; and when after, they are, as it has been 
 
488 
 
 SYNTAX. 
 
 
 already stated at p. 110, always joined to the verb, so 
 as to form a single, word ; as, 
 
 he loves you ; 
 
 he gave him his benediction ; 
 
 they will run to our houses, 
 and rob us of our property ; 
 
 to send him out of our house 
 would be in us a great fault ; 
 
 they assisted me well ; 
 
 6gli vi ama, 
 
 dMeoL} la siia benedizione, 
 
 cprrerannoci dlle case, e V a- 
 
 vtre ci ruberdnno, 
 U manddrLO fuor di cdsa NE 
 
 SAKEBBE gran bidsimo, 
 
 ajuldronwi bene, 
 ^TTI uscito di infaite ? 
 moslrocci un' ombra, 
 
 has it escaped thy mind ? 
 he showed us a spirit. 
 
 We have already observed (pp. 338-340), that infinitives and some 
 other forms of verbs, when joined to conjunctive pronouns, drop their 
 last vowel, and that the consonant of conjunctive pronouns (gli only 
 excepted) must be doubled when joined to those forms of verbs, 
 which either consist of one syllable, or end with an accented vowel. 
 
 When the verb is in the infinitive, in the gerund, in 
 the participle, or in the imperative mood,* the con- 
 junctive pronouns are always to be put after the verb ; 
 as, 
 
 ricomincio a fdrGL.1 
 gior piaceri, 
 
 trovdndosi egli una volta a 
 
 Parigi, 
 son venula a ristordrTi dP 
 
 ddnni avuti, 
 
 mag- she began to do him again the 
 greatest kindnesses ; 
 
 he finding himself once in 
 Paris ; 
 
 I am come to make thee some 
 amends for the evils sus- 
 tained ; 
 
 * Notwithstanding this rule the following examples may be cited from the 
 classics, in which the conjunctive pronoun is put bfjorc the imperative-. v 
 
 Famuli ritornare alia prigidne, e quivi 
 quanio ti place MI fa ujjliggere. (Bocc. 
 g. 2. n. 6.) 
 
 jQuddfe v6i e Siro a Irovar Callimaco, 
 e GLI dite die la cdsa & proccdiua bcne. 
 (Much. Coinm.) 
 
 FA in a liii: " Con ]>iangere e con Hitto, 
 Spirito malcdcltOj TI riindni." (Dunt. 
 Inf. 8. ) 
 
 Cause me to be carried back to my 
 pri-on, and there cause me to be tor- 
 mcnted as much as thou pleascst. 
 
 Co you and Syrus to find Callimnchus, 
 and tell him that the affair went on 
 well. 
 
 And T said to him : " In mourning and 
 ia woe, cursed spirit, do thou remain." 
 
USE AND POSITION OF PRON017NS. 489 
 
 ricordandoTi della tua pre- bringing to thy mind thy past 
 Urita vita, life ; 
 
 muovaTi questo solo mio dtto, let this act of mine alone move 
 
 thee ; 
 
 salutatoio, il domando se egli after he had saluted him, he 
 si scntisse nitrite, asked him, whether any 
 
 thing ailed him ; 
 
 sidleMi ludn amico, be my good friend ; 
 
 fdttdLA. pi'tndere, having caused her to be taken. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 When the adverb non, ' no,' or ' not ' ; precedes the verb in the im- 
 perative, the conjunctive pronouns must be put before the verb ; as, 
 
 non si renda ridicola, do not make yourself ridiculous ; 
 
 non LE date rttta, do not mind her. 
 
 Conjunctive pronouns are sometimes put before, even when the 
 verb is in the infinitive and in the gerund, preceded by the adverb 
 non ; as, 
 
 mi avea prome'sso di non s* al- she had promised me, that she 
 
 lontandre, would not depart ; 
 
 non MI vedtndo giungere, not seeing me arrive. 
 
 The conjunctive pronoun 76ro, c to them,' or 'them '5 
 is always to be put after the verb ; as, 
 
 veduti LORO in slpoveracon- having seen them in so mis- 
 
 dizione, erable a condition ; 
 mando LORO dicendo . . , . , sent to them, saying 
 
 When loro is in the objective, the pronouns gli or Li, for the mascu- 
 line gender, and le for the fern inine, sometimes take its place, but then 
 they follow the general rule ; as, 
 
 faccndoGi.1 [or, facendo LORO causing them [her children'] to 
 (i suoi figli)] da buoni mae- be instructed by good masters; 
 slri insegndre, 
 
 GLI fece [or, fece LORO] irn- she made them learn all good 
 pard.re tutte le buone drti, arts. 
 
 When more than one conjunctive pronoun occur with 
 
490 SYNTAX. 
 
 the same verb, they follow the same rules, as when they 
 occur with it singly ; as, 
 
 cd' compagni suoi SEGLI he ate them with his com- 
 
 mangib, panions ; 
 
 deliberdrono di rfdroLiELA they determined to give her to 
 
 per mogiie, him as his wife. 
 
 Conjunctive pronouns occurring in the same sentence 
 with two verbs, one of which is in the infinitive, are 
 generally put before the other verb.; as, 
 
 to TI voglio dire, I wish to tell thee ; 
 
 non GLIELO voliva dire, she would not tell it to him. 
 
 When the other verb is in the imperative, for then they must be pot 
 after it; as, 
 
 faTTi sentire, make thyself heard ; 
 
 ZdsciaMiTi vedere, let me look at thee. 
 
 When conjunctive pronouns occur with the indefinite 
 pronoun si, this is always put after, and sometimes 
 joined to them ; as, 
 
 il bel che mi si mostra, the good which shows itself to 
 
 me ; 
 qudnte cose gli si promittono, how many things they promise 
 
 to him; 
 attribuiscecisi a ndstrofdllo, it is attributed to our fault. 
 
 Conjunctive pronouns occurring with the adverb ecco ; 
 and the pronoun lo occurring with the adverh non ; 
 are put after them ; and, as it has been already stated 
 at p. 116, form with them one single word.} as, 
 
 &COMI, here I am ; 
 
 noL niego, I do not deny it. 
 
USE AND POSITION OF PRONOUNS. 
 
 491 
 
 The particles ne, t of him,' ' of her,' { of it ' ; 'of them'; 
 and ci, ' here, hither ' ; vi, ; there, thither ' ; follow the 
 same rules as the conjunctive pronouns. They may be 
 put either before or after the verb, except when the verb 
 is in the infinitive, in the gerund, in the participle, and 
 in the imperative ; in which cases they are always put 
 after it ; as, 
 
 it pleases me to speak of it ; 
 seeing no one of them ; 
 having taken out her beautiful 
 robe ; 
 
 i fondamenti il re King Tarquin laid the founda- 
 tions of it ; 
 
 I am disposed to go there ; 
 the cook having employed 
 there [or in it] all his art ; 
 
 mi place 
 
 niuno veggendo N E, 
 
 la sua bella rqba, 
 
 Tarquinio, 
 son disposto ad anddrvi, 
 il cudco postovi tiitta V Me, 
 
 fdteci diplngere la Cortes'ia, 
 
 cause Liberality to be painted 
 there. 
 
 If the particles ci, vi, occur with one of the conjunc- 
 tive pronouns mi, ti, ci, vi, usage strictly requires that 
 the particles . should be placed after the pronouns; but 
 they are sometimes put before them, particularly if eu- 
 phony demands it; as, 
 
 costoro mi ci fanno entrdre 
 
 io ti ci vtdo simpre, 
 
 they make me enter there [or 
 
 into it] ; 
 I see you here always: 
 
 Vi ti porro iina tavoluccia, I shall place for thee there a 
 
 small table ; 
 
 diro che vi ci ablia fdtta ve- I will say that he has caused 
 nlre per dcndri, you to come here for money. 
 
 When the particles ci,vi, o-ccur with the pronouns, Io, 
 la, li, gli : le, they are generally put before the pronouns, 
 and, as has been mentioned at p. 160, form with them 
 a single ivord ; but they may be placed also after them, 
 separately ; as, 
 
 ingtgnati di rilentrcEio, contrive to keep him there ; 
 
492 
 
 SYNTAX. 
 
 ringrazidndo Iddio che con- 
 ddtto VEL' aieva, 
 
 thanking God that he had con- 
 ducted him there : 
 
 sua camera il mise, e she put him in her room, and 
 dentro IL vi serrb, there she locked him in. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 V6i MI POTETE TORRE QUANTO 
 
 TEN GO, e dondrmi, siccume vostro 
 uomo, a chi vi pidce. (Bocc. g. 
 
 3. n. 9.) 
 
 Assdi volte, la nitte y PIETOSA- 
 
 B1ENTE IL, CHIAMAVA. (BOCC. g. 
 
 4. n. 5.) 
 
 Ma guarddte che voi non ci 
 
 FACESTE LA BEFFA. (BOCC. g. 
 
 8. n. 1.) 
 
 S' elle m pidcciono, w LE vi 
 DONERO. (Bocc. g. 2. n. 9.) 
 
 J3 udendo che egli av6a morti 
 due confessori, disse fra se me- 
 desimo : " ME KON UCCIDERAI 
 TU." (Pass.) 
 
 Tdnto posso disporre di lui, 
 che io uso DIRE, CHE certo E' 
 SIA UN ALTRO ME. (Firenz. ) 
 
 Ma, dove voi voUste, per av- 
 ventura. voi POTRESTE voi E ME 
 COKSOLARE. (Bocc. g. 3. n. 9 ) 
 
 OFFESI ME PER NON OFFENDER 
 Ltfi. (Petr.) 
 
 COSI NE FU, ED A LEI ED A 
 ME, PER PENA DATO, A LEI DI 
 FUGGIRMI DAVANTI, ED A ME, 
 
 che gid cotdnto /' amai, DI SE- 
 GUITARLA. (Bocc. g. 5. n. 8.) 
 
 I'o so che EGLI vi AHA. (Bocc. 
 g.S.n.7) 
 
 DlEDEGLI LA stTA BENEDIZI- 
 6NE. (EOCC. g. I. n. 1.) 
 
 CORRERANNOCI ALLE CASE, E 
 L* AVERE CI RUBERANNO. (BOCC. 
 
 g. 1. n. 1.) 
 
 You can take away from me 
 all I have, and give me, like one 
 of your men, to whomsoever it 
 pleases you. 
 
 A great many times, during the 
 night, did she call him with a 
 piteous voice. 
 
 But beware putting a trick upon 
 
 If you like them, I will give 
 them to you. 
 
 And hearing that he had mur- 
 dered two confessors, he said to 
 himself: " Thou shall not murder 
 me" 
 
 I can so much depend on him, 
 that I am wont to say, that he 
 is certainly another self. 
 
 But, if you wishe<), you might 
 perhaps console both yourself and 
 me. 
 
 I injured myself not to injure 
 him. 
 
 Thus it was, to both her and 
 me, given as a punishment, to her 
 to flee before me, and to me, who 
 loved her so much, to pursue her. 
 
 1 know that he loves you. 
 He gave him his benediction. 
 
 They will run to our houses, and 
 rob us of our property. 
 
USE AND POSITION OF PRONOUNS. 
 
 493 
 
 IL MANDARLO FUOR DI CASA 
 
 nostra, cwsl infermo y NE SAREB- 
 
 BE GRAN BIASIMO. (BOCC. g. 1. 
 
 n. 1.) 
 
 AJUTARONMI elle BENE. (Bocc. 
 g. 4. Proem.) 
 
 ETTI igli da stamdne USCITO 
 
 DI MENTE ? (BOCC. g. 7. D. 8.) 
 
 MOSTROCCI UN' OMBRA doll' un 
 cdnto sola. (Dant. Inf. 12.) 
 
 RlCQMINCIO A FARGLI I MAG- 
 GIOR PIACERI. (BOCC. g. 8. D. 
 
 10.) 
 
 TROVANDOSI EGLI TJNA VOLTA 
 A PARIGI. (Bocc. g. 1. n. 7.) 
 
 10 SON VENTJTA A RISTORARTI 
 
 DE' DANNi, U qudli tu hdi giti 
 AM^Tiper me. (Bocc. g. 5. n. 9.) 
 
 Federigo, RICORDANDOTI DEL- 
 LA TIJA PRETERITA VITA. (BOCC. 
 
 g. 5. n. 9.) 
 
 MUOVATI alqudnto QUESTO SO- 
 LO MIO ATTO. (Bocc. g. 8. n. 7.) 
 
 SALUTATOLO, IL DOMANDO SE 
 SI SENTISSE NIENTE. (BOCC.) 
 
 SIATEMI, adunque, sdmpre BUON 
 AMICO. (Gang, lett.) 
 
 FATTALA prestamente PREN- 
 DERE. (Bocc. g. 2. n. 7.) 
 
 NON SI RENDA RIDlcOLA CWCd 
 
 le usdnze del mondo. (Gang, 
 lett.) 
 
 NON LE DATE RETTA, U& plU 
 
 lafrequentdte. (Vanz.) 
 
 NON MI VEDENDO GltJNGERE 
 
 in t6mpo, se ne ritornd, benchb 
 
 MI dVtsse PROMESSO DI NON s' AL- 
 L.ONTANARE flUO ttl miO CLTr'lVO. 
 
 (Vanz.) 
 
 42 
 
 To send him out of our house, 
 so sick as he is, would be in us 
 a great fault. 
 
 They assisted me well. 
 
 Has it, since this morning, es- 
 caped thy mind ? 
 
 He showed us a spirit by itself 
 apart. 
 
 She began to do him again the 
 greatest kindnesses. 
 
 He finding himself once in 
 Paris. 
 
 I am come to make thee some 
 amends for the evils thou hast 
 sustained on my account. 
 
 Frederic, bringing to thy mind 
 thy past life. 
 
 Let this act of mine alone move 
 thee at least. 
 
 After he had saluted him, he 
 asked him, whether any thing 
 ailed him. 
 
 Be, then, always my good 
 friend. 
 
 Having caused her immediately 
 to be taken. 
 
 Do not make yourself ridicu- 
 lous respecting the customs of the 
 world. 
 
 Do not mind her, nor visit her 
 any longer. 
 
 Not seeing me arrive in time, 
 she went back, although she had 
 promised me, that she would not 
 depart before my arrival. 
 
494 
 
 SYNTAX. 
 
 VEDUTI LORD IN si POVERA 
 CONDIZIONE ridotti. (Pecor.) 
 
 E MANDO LORD DICENDO .... 
 
 (Bott. Stor. Amer.) 
 
 / quali [i suoi figli] facevano 
 stupire chi GLI conoscdva, e la 
 mddre FACENDOGLI DA BUONI 
 
 MAESTRI INSEGXARE, GLI FECE 
 IMPARARE TtJTTE LE BUONE ARTI. 
 
 (Pecor. g. 10. n. 1.) 
 
 Comprdti i capponi insidme 
 
 CO* COMPIGNI SUOI SEGLI MAN- 
 
 GIO. (Bocc. g. 9. n. 3.) 
 DELIBERARONO DI DARGLIE- 
 
 LA PER MOGLIE. (BOCC. g. 2. 
 
 n. 8.) 
 
 Mendi quello che 10 TI VOGLIO 
 DIRE. (Bocc. g. 2. n. 3.) 
 
 La ddnna rispose, che NON 
 
 GL.IELO VOLEVA DIRE. (BOCC. 
 
 g. 7. n. 5.) 
 
 Grtda forte, FATTI ben SENTIRE. 
 (Bocc. g. 8. n. 6.) 
 
 LASCIAMITI VEDERE a mio 
 senno. (Bocc.) 
 
 IL BEN, CHE MI SI MOSTRA 171- 
 
 torno. (Petr. c. 7.) 
 
 QUANTE COSE GLI SI PROMET- 
 
 TONO tiitto J l dl. (Bocc. g. 3. 
 n. 1.) 
 
 ATTRIBUfsCESI A NO3TRO FAL- 
 
 LO. (Cavalc.) 
 
 Lo s^coldre^accostdtosi alV u- 
 scio, disse: * ECCOMI qu\ t Madon- 
 na.' (Bocc. g. 8. n. 7.) 
 
 In drmi egli 6ra prode, NOL 
 NIEGO io 9 no. (Alf. Saul. 2. 1.) 
 
 Egli MI PIACE DI PARLARNE. 
 
 (Bocc. g. 3. n. 7.) 
 
 NltJNO VEGGiNDONE. (BOCC. 
 
 g. 2. n. 2.) 
 
 Having seen them reduced to 
 so miserable a condition. 
 
 And sent to them, saying .... 
 
 Who [her children] astonished 
 all those, who knew them ; and 
 their mother, causing them to be 
 instructed by good masters, made 
 them learn all good arts. 
 
 Having bought the capons, he 
 ate them with his companions. 
 
 They determined to give her to 
 him as his wife. 
 
 Listen to what I wish to tell 
 thee. 
 
 The lady replied, that she would 
 not tell it to him. 
 
 Speak loud, make thyself heard. 
 
 Let me look at thee at my plea- 
 sure. 
 
 The good, which shows itself 
 about me. 
 
 How many things they promise 
 to him all day. 
 
 It is attributed to our fault. 
 
 The scholar, coming to the 
 door, said : ( Here 1 am, Madam." 
 
 He was brave in arms, I do not 
 deny it, no. 
 
 It pleases me to speak of it. 
 Seeing no one of them. 
 
USE AND POSITION OF PRONOUNS. 
 
 495 
 
 TRATTANE celatamente LA stf A 
 
 BELLA ROBA. (BoCC. g. 8, U. 9.) 
 
 GETTONNE i FONDAMENTI IL 
 RE TARQuimo. (Dav. Stor. 1. 3.) 
 
 Fo SON del tutto Dfsposxo AD 
 
 ANDARVI. (BOCC. g. 1. H. 2.) 
 
 IL cuoco^ presolo, e POSTOVI 
 xtrxTA L' ARTE .... (Bocc. g. 
 4. n. 5.) 
 
 FATECI DIPINGERE LA CORTE- 
 
 SIA. (Bocc. g. 1. n. 8.) 
 
 COSTORO MI CI FANNO ENTRARE 
 
 per inganndrmi. (Bocc. g. 2. 
 n. 5.) 
 
 r * 
 
 lO TI CI VEDO SEMPRE. (NOV. 
 
 Ant. 67.) 
 
 JPO VI TI PORRO T^NA TAVOLtJC- 
 
 CIA. (Bocc. g. 8.) 
 
 VO DIRO CHE VI CI ABBIA FAT- 
 TA VENIRE PER DENARI. (BOCC. 
 
 g. 3. n. 6.) 
 
 INGEGNATI DI RITENERCELO. 
 (Bocc. n. 5.) 
 
 RlNGRAZIANDO IDD1O CHE CON- 
 DOTTO VEL* AVEVA. (BOCC. g. 
 
 2. n. 4.) 
 
 NELLA stfA CAMERA IL MISE, 
 
 E DENTRO IL VI SERRO. (BOCC.) 
 
 Having taken out secretly her 
 beautiful robe. 
 
 King Tarquin laid the founda- 
 tions of it. 
 
 I am entirely disposed to go 
 there. 
 
 The cook having taken it, and 
 having employed in it all his art, 
 
 Cause Liberality to be painted 
 there. 
 
 They make me enter into it [the 
 chest] in order to play Some trick 
 upon me. 
 
 I see thee here always. 
 
 I shall place for thee there a 
 small table. 
 
 I will say that he has caused 
 you to come here for money. 
 
 Contrive to keep him there. 
 
 Thanking God that he had con- 
 ducted him there. 
 
 She put him in her room, and 
 there she locked him in. 
 
 POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 Possessive pronouns rnay be placed either before or 
 after the nouns expressing the things possessed ; as, 
 
 la MIA persdna, i MIEI mdli, my person, my misfortunes ; 
 le membra MIE, il sdngue my limbs, toy blood ; </^ 
 
 gli 6cM suoi, Vordine L6no, her eyes, their management. 
 
496 SYNTAX. 
 
 In addressing a person, however, and in exclamations, 
 possessive pronouns are to be put after the nouns ; as, 
 
 padre uioyJigUuM MIO ! my father, my son ! 
 
 Italia MIA, Signdr MIO ! my Italy, my Lord ! 
 
 Possessive pronouns are always to be repeated before 
 nouns of different gender and number ; as, 
 
 la LOR virtu, i LOR costumi, their virtue, their customs, and 
 e It LORO manie'rc, their manners. 
 
 But if the nouns are of the same gender and number, 
 they may be used only once, after the said nouns ; as, 
 
 It sirocchie e It mogli LORO, their sisters and their wives. 
 
 We have already observed (p. 132), that possessive 
 onouns may be expressed in Italian, by the conjunc- 
 tive pronouns of that person to which the possessor be- 
 longs. This is always the case when they are accom- 
 panied by a noun expressing the limbs of the body or 
 denoting a part of one's dress ; as, 
 
 st MI caccidsser gli OCCHI if they should tear out my 
 
 [for, se cacciasser i MIEI eyes ; 
 
 OCCHI], 
 non \ijiaccate il COLLO .[for, do not break your neck. 
 
 non fiaccate il VOSTRO 
 
 COLLO], 
 
 The English possessive pronouns his, her, their, when they refer to 
 one's own limbs or parts of dress, are expressed in Italian by the con- 
 junctive pronoun si ; but when they refer to another person's limbs 
 or parts of dress, they are expressed by the conjunctive pronouns gli, 
 le, lorOj according 1 to the gender and number of the possessor ; as, 
 
 si levd r anello di DITO [for, he took off the ring from his 
 
 levo P anello del suo DITO], [own] finger] ; 
 
 risolve di levdrzi le SCARPE he resolved to take off his [own] 
 
 [for, di levare le SUE SCAR- shoes : 
 PE], 
 
 GLI ruppe tutto il viso [for, he disfigured all his [another per" 
 ruppe tutto il suo (or, il di son's] face ; 
 lui) vfso], 
 
USE AND POSITION OF PRONOUNS. 
 
 497 
 
 straccidtaLE la CTJFFIA [for, 
 stracciata la stJA (or, la di Ui) 
 
 having torn her [another per- 
 son's] headdress. 
 
 Often the personal pronouns accompanying a noun 
 expressing the limbs of the body, or denoting the parts 
 of one's dress, are entirely suppressed when they relate 
 to the principal subject of the proposition ; as, 
 
 c6rsi a cercdrmi il l&to cdtta I laid immediately my hand on 
 mdno [for, colla MIA ma- my side ; 
 no], 
 
 asciug&ndosi gli occhi col bel drying her eyes with her beau- 
 ve/o, [for, col stfo bel v- tiful veil, 
 lo], 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 E siccome LA MIA PERSONA 
 cresce"va, cosl le MIE belldzze, de 1 ' 
 MIEI MALI special cagione, multi- 
 plicdvano. (Bocc. Fiam.) 
 
 Non son rimdse ac6rbe ne ma- 
 ture LE MEMBRA MIE di la, ma 
 son qui me'co COL SANGUE suo, 
 e con le stfE giunture. (Dant. 
 Purg. 26.) 
 
 Ed tra.no GLI OCCHI suoi di 
 qu6l color e che lo grifone. (Buti. 
 com. Inf. 4.) 
 
 S&nza L' ORDINE ^LORO rdde 
 v6He riisce alcuna NOSTRA opera 
 a Iaud6vol fine. (Bocc. Intr.) 
 
 Gdddo mi si gittd dist&so d' 
 piedi, Dic6ndo : " PADRE MIO, 
 che non m' aiuti ? J> (Dant. Inf. 
 33.) 
 
 O FIGLIUOL MIO ! non ti dis- 
 pidccia, Se Erunitio Luting un 
 poco teco Ritorna indietro. 
 (Dant. Inf. 15.) 
 
 42* 
 
 And as [my person or] I grew 
 up, my beauty, the first cause of 
 all my misfortunes, increased. 
 
 I have not left yonder my limbs, 
 either crude or in mature age ; but 
 they bear me here, fed with blood 
 and sinew-strung. 
 
 And his [Caesar's] eyes were 
 as black as those of a raven. 
 
 Without their management it 
 seldom happens that any under- 
 taking of ours succeeds. 
 
 Gaddo stretched himself at my 
 feet, saying : " My father, why 
 dost thou not assist me ? " 
 
 O my son ! do not disdain that 
 Brunetto Latini should turn back 
 a little, and go with you. 
 
498 
 
 SYNTAX. 
 
 ITALIA MIA, benche il parldr 
 sia inddrno Alle pidghe mor- 
 tdli, Che nel bel corpo tuo si 
 spesse veggio. (Petr.) 
 
 O SIGNOR MIO ! qudndo sard 
 w liito A veder la^ vendetta, 
 che, nascosa, Fa dolce V ira 
 tua nel tuo segreto ? (Dant. Purg. 
 20.) 
 
 Rigudrda tra tutti i tuoi no- 
 bill uomini, ed esdmina LA LOR 
 
 VIRTU, I LOR COSTUMI, E LE LORO 
 MANIERE. (BOCC. g. 4. D. 1.) 
 
 Jlppresso costoro^ LE SIROC- 
 
 CHIE E LE MOGLI LORO VenHCTO. 
 
 (Bocc. g. 3. n. 7.) 
 
 O SE CSSi MI CACCIASSER GLI 
 
 OCCHI o MI traessero i DENTI, o 
 mozzdsserMi le MANI, a che sare* 
 io ? (Bocc, g. 9. n. 1.) 
 
 Egli e gran peccdto che voi 
 NON vi FIACC!TE IL COLLO. 
 (Bocc. g. 9. n. 6.) 
 
 E COS\ SI LEVO L' ANELLO DI 
 
 DITO, e diello al giudice. (Pecor.) 
 
 Gudrda se dltri lo scorge, ed 
 alfine si RISOLVE DI LEVARSI LE 
 SCARPE. (Lod. Nov.) 
 
 E cost diccndo con le pugna 
 
 TtJTTO IL V1SO GLI RtJPPE. (BoCC. 
 
 g. 9. n. 8.) 
 
 E STRACCIATAL.E LA CUFFIA, 
 
 diceva. (Bocc. g. 9. n. 8.) 
 
 Di che io sentiva si fdttc dolo- 
 re, che, desto, COLLA MANO CORSI 
 subitamente A CERCA.RMI IL LA- 
 TO. (Bocc. g. 4. n. 6.) 
 
 E fdccia forza al Cielo, 
 
 ASCIUGANDOSI GLI OCCHI COL 
 
 BEL VLO. (Petr. c. 11.) 
 
 My Italy, although words will 
 have no power to heal the mortal 
 wounds which I see, in so great 
 a number, in your beautiful body. 
 
 O my Lord ! when shall I re- 
 joice to see the vengeance, which 
 thy wrath, well pleased, broods in 
 secret silence ? 
 
 Look among all your noblemen, 
 and examine their virtue, their 
 customs, and their manners. 
 
 After these, came their sisters 
 arid their wives. 
 
 If they should tear out my 
 eyes, or draw out my teeth, or 
 lop off my hands, to what should 
 I be reduced ? 
 
 It is a great pity you do not 
 break your neck. 
 
 And thus he took off the ring 
 from his finger, and gave it to the 
 judge. 
 
 He looked around lest he should 
 be seen, and at last he resolved to 
 take off his shoes. 
 
 And thus saying he disfigured 
 all his face with blows. 
 
 And having torn her headdress, 
 he said. 
 
 Which gave me such a pain, 
 that, having awaked, 1 laid imme- 
 diately my hand on my side. 
 
 And should compel Heaven [to 
 have pity upon me], drying her 
 eyes with her beautiful veil. 
 
USE AND POSITION OF PRONOUNS. 499 
 
 INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 
 
 The indefinite pronouns, stesso, medesimo, c same ' ; 
 and sometimes tutto, * all,' ' every'; are put either be- 
 fore or after the noun ; as, 
 
 quel dl STESSO ; in quel ME- that same day ; in that same 
 
 DESIMO dbito, dress ; 
 
 TtiTTE le notti ; le qudli cose every night ; all which things. 
 
 T1JTTE, 
 
 Tutto, followed by a numeral adjective, takes the 
 particle e after it ; as, 
 
 tutti E trt, all three. 
 
 The indefinite pronouns veruno, nessuno or nissuno, 
 neuno or niuno, nullo, i no one,' * nobody ' ; and nulla, 
 niente, ' nothing ' ; as we have already mentioned at 
 p. 147, may have also the signification of c any one,' 
 c anybody' ; and 'some or any thing'; according to 
 their respective position in the sentence. 
 
 They have the first signification, (of ' no one,' * no- 
 body ' ; and c nothing '), when they are placed before 
 the verb, or when they are placed after a verb preceded 
 by the adverb non ; as, 
 
 per VERUN modo poteva, she could do it in no manner ; 
 
 NON/a cdldo VERTJNO, it is not at all warm : 
 
 NESSUN si dolse di servitii, no one complained of servi- 
 tude ; 
 
 NON si pud fare NISSUNA co- no-thing can be done : 
 
 sa, 
 
 NEUNO ebbe gli Dei sifavore- no one had the Gods so favora- 
 
 voli, ble ; 
 
 NON ve n' e NI^NO si cattivo, there is no one so had : 
 N^LLO martirio sarebbe do- no torment were a well-pro- 
 lor compito, portioned pain ; 
 
500 SYNTAX. 
 
 NON gli mdnca N# LLA, he wants nothing i 
 
 di NTJLLA fti dispesi, let him despair of nothing ; 
 
 NON nefard NTJLLA, I will do nothing about it : 
 
 NIENTE dico del tuo sldto, I say nothing about thy con- 
 dition ; 
 
 NON gli parribbe NIENTE, it would seem to him nothing. 
 
 But when they are placed after a verb not preceded 
 by the adverb non, and when the phrase in which they 
 occur implies a question, or expresses a doubt, the 
 abovernentioned pronouns have the last signification, 
 (of *any one,' 'anybody'; and 'some or any thing ');* 
 as, 
 
 senzafdre a voi VERTJN pro, without doing any good to 
 
 yourself; 
 
 se VERUNO vede la pena mia, whether any one observes my 
 
 sorrow ; 
 qudndo s' accdmpano in NES- when they encamp in any 
 
 STJNO Iu6go, place ; 
 
 trovossi NITJNO che contradi- was there found any one who 
 
 dsse alia podestdde ? opposed public power ? 
 
 le dirdi se vuol NTJLLA, thou wilt ask her, whether she 
 
 wants any thing ; 
 
 * There are instances, however, in good writers, which seem in contradiction 
 with these rules ; as may be seen by the following examples : 
 
 E qudndo NESSU'NO ' era preso, sti- And when any one was taken, he was 
 bito era impiccdto per la gola. (Stor. directly hung by the neck. 
 Pistol.) 
 
 Che NON rimarrebbe a sostenere pena That there would not remain in pur- 
 NESSU'NA nel purgattirio per gli peccdti. gatory any punishment to suffer for sins. 
 (Pass.) 
 
 NON c' i ragione NESSU'NA per la There is no [or not any] reason why it 
 quale 6' debba entrdre in un tal determi- should enter in such a determinate de- 
 ndto grddo di velodtd. (Gal. Sist.) gree of velocity. 
 
 Mai NON menefardpid NID'NA. (Bocc. He will never do me an- [or, any] 
 
 g. 8. n. 3.) other [thing like this.] 
 
 C6me ilia vide un giovlnetto di fdrma As soon as she sees a youth somewhat 
 
 NIE'NTE riguardevolc, tlla s' accende del- handsome, she falls in love with his 
 
 le site bellezze. (Fir. Asin. 40.) beauty : 
 
 'In whieh the pronouns nessuno, nessuna, niitna are used instead of alcuno, alcii- 
 na, ' any,' ' any person,' * any thing ' ; and niente instead of un p6co, alqudnto, ' a 
 little,' ' somewhat.' 
 
USE AND POSITION OF PRONOUNS. 
 
 503 
 
 il domando se si seniisse he asked him whether he felt 
 NIENTE, any thing. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Creduto abbidmo che costei We supposed, that she had been 
 
 nella cdsa> che mi fu Q/UEL DI burnt that same day along with 
 
 STESSO drsaj ardesse. (Bocc. g. the house. 
 5. n. 5.) 
 
 Guarddndo tra molte, che qm- 
 vi n' erano IN QUEL MEDESIMO 
 ABITO. (Bocc. Lab.) 
 
 E 'I rossignuol TUTTE LE 
 NOTTI si lamenta e pidnge. 
 (Petr.) 
 
 LE QUALI COSE TUTTE SOHO da 
 
 esser diligentemente considerate. 
 (Cresc. 12. 2.) 
 
 Fratelli miei } che anddte voi 
 cercdndo, a quest' 6ra } TUTTI E 
 TRE ? (Bocc. g. 7. n. 8.) 
 
 Qudndo venne il tempo, quella 
 misera PER VERUN MODO POTE- 
 VA. (Vit. SS. PP. 2. 21.) 
 
 Anzi NON FA egli CALDO VE- 
 RTJNO. (Bocc, g. 5. n. 4.) 
 
 NESSUN DI SERVITU giammdi 
 si DOLSE, Ne di morte, quant' 
 w dilibertdte. (Petr. Tr.Mort. 1.) 
 
 NON SI PUO COSA NISSUNA FARE 
 
 a lor modo. (Bocc. g. 3. n. 1.) 
 
 NETJNO EBBE mdi GLI DEI si 
 FAVOREVOLI, che nel futiiro gli 
 potdsse obbligdre. (Bocc. Fiam, 
 5. 84.) 
 
 EgU NON VE N' E NIUNO SI CAT- 
 
 Tfvo, che non viparesse uno im- 
 peratore. (Bocc. g. 8. n. 9.) 
 
 NTJLLO MARTIRIO, fuorche la 
 tua rdbbia, SAREBBE al tuo 
 
 furor DOLOR COMPITO. 
 Inf. 14.) 
 
 (Dant. 
 
 Looking among so many wo- 
 man, who were there, clad in that 
 same dress. 
 
 And the nightingale every night 
 laments and weeps. 
 
 All which things ought to be 
 carefully considered. 
 
 Brothers, what are you looking 
 for, all three, at such an hour ? 
 
 When the time arrived, that un- 
 fortunate one could not do it in 
 any manner. 
 
 Nay it is not at all warm. 
 
 No one ever complained of 
 servitude or death, as much as I 
 do of liberty. 
 
 Nothing can be done in their 
 manner. 
 
 No one even had the Gods so 
 favorabla as to oblige them to 
 favor him in future. 
 
 There is no one so bad, that 
 you would not take him for an 
 emperor. 
 
 No torment, save thy rage, were 
 to thy fury a well-proportioned 
 pain. 
 
502 
 
 SYNTAX. 
 
 O'nde felice dicono tsser colm, 
 
 Che NON GLI MANCA NtJLLA. 
 
 (Fr. Giord. 20.) 
 
 Chi in alcuna cosa pud spe- 
 rdre, DI NTJXLA si DISPERI. 
 (Bocc. Fiam. 5. 85.) 
 
 Altriminti mdi NON NE FARO 
 
 NtJLLA. (BOCC. g. 1. n. 2.) 
 
 DEL Ttfo presente STATO 
 NIENTE DICO. (Bocc. g. 2. n. 6.) 
 
 Se V uomo magndnimo desse 
 ogni cosa per amore, NON GLI 
 
 PARREBBE AVER DATO NIENTE. 
 
 (Cavalc. Speech. Cr.) 
 Fare"ste ddnno a noi, SENZA 
 
 FARE A VOI PRO VER1JNO. (BOCC. 
 
 g. 8. n. 9.) 
 
 Allora. gudrdo intorno t SE VE- 
 RIJNO VKDE LA PENA MIA, 
 che m' ha conquiso. (Rim. Ant. 
 96.) 
 
 QuiNDO S* ACCAMPANO IN NES- 
 
 ST^NO LUOGO per cagione di guer- 
 ra. (Buti. Purg. 7.) 
 
 TROVOSSI in Mildno NIXJNO, 
 
 CHE CONTRADIA.SSE ALLA PO- 
 
 DESTADE ? (Nov, Ant. 21.) 
 
 TU LE DIRAl S* 6lla VUOL Nt7L- 
 
 LA. (Bocc. g. 9. n. 5.) 
 
 IL DOMANDO SE 6gU SI SENTIS- 
 SE NIENTE. (BOCC. g. 9. n. S.) 
 
 Whence they call him happy 
 who wants nothing. 
 
 Let him, who can hope in any 
 thing, despair of nothing. 
 
 Otherwise I will never do any 
 thing about it. 
 
 I say nothing about thy pres- 
 ent condition. 
 
 If the magnanimous man should 
 give every thing for love, it would 
 not seem to him that he had given 
 any thing. 
 
 You would injure us without 
 doing any good to yourself. 
 
 Then I look around me to see 
 whether any one observes that 
 sorrow, which has subdued me. 
 
 When they encamp in any 
 place on account of war. 
 
 Was there found any one in 
 Milan, who opposed the public 
 power ? 
 
 Thou wilt ask her whether she 
 wants any thing. 
 
 He asked him whether he felt 
 any thing. 
 
 EXERCISE XXXII. 
 
 They rob you. 
 rubdre 
 
 Have pity 
 compassione 
 
 di 
 
 the afflicted. 
 afflitto. 
 
 Dost thou know the daughter of Cidippe ? May you 
 conoscere 3 l figliuola? ? 
 
USE AND POSITION OF PRONOUNS. 503 
 
 be pleased to bless (the) my soul. Let him call 
 VoUre benedire 2 dnima 1 . Chiamdre 
 
 the leaders to a council. What thou wishest that 
 duca consiglio. volere 
 
 1 should say. She said : " How can that be " ? 
 dire. Dire : potere questc? l " ? 
 
 He replied : " Thou wilt see it, if thou comest im- 
 Dire: " vedtre venire to- 
 
 mediately." I am here with one, who, I having I 
 sto" , I per avere \ 
 
 my name, wishes to be I myself | in every thing 
 nome, volere io ogni cosa 
 
 he does, or rather, that I should be he. He 
 t > 
 
 saw himself I deprived I of the hope of having her 
 ved6re \ privdre \ sperdnza 
 
 for his wife - ( I to have to have I her himself), 
 I dov6re avere \ 6gK> 
 
 if Ormisda did not marry her. 
 prendere 
 
 The Turk then said : " If I were thou, I should 
 Turco dire : tl , 
 
 perhaps infringe the law ; but as I am myjself and 
 forse violdre legge ; perche io 
 
 not thou, I will never do it." 
 non 1 mai* fdre* 2 ." 
 
 I will tell thee the truth, companion, I like 
 voUre dire vero, sozio, 
 
 her (she pleases me) so much, that I could not 
 
 piac6re , potere 
 
 tell it to thee. He sent her I word I that, with- 
 dire . Manddre \ a dire \ , 
 
 out any more delay, she should do what (that 
 
 indugio, . dovere fare 
 
 which) he had told her. I order thee to go 
 
 avere 3 dire 1 2 . Comanddre 
 
504 SYNTAX. 
 
 (that thou go) immediately I after I thy father. You 
 anddre* incontanente 1 \ per padre. 
 
 promised me 1 to I make me speak with (the) your 
 promettere \ di \ fare parldre 
 
 wife. I Pray, leave me in peace. Why dost thou 
 
 donna 1 . \ In grdzia, 
 
 lascidre pace. Che 
 
 not reply, wicked man ? Art thou become dumb 
 rispdndere, reo udmo ? divenire tnutolo 
 
 in hearing me ? Having raised (herself upon I her 
 
 udire ? Lerare in \ 
 
 feet), she said : " Brother, you are (the) welcome." 
 pfc t dire : " Fratdllo, benvcnuto." 
 
 No, she would not believe it, and would turn me 
 , credere , scaccidre 
 
 out of her house. He begged him that he would 
 cdsa. Pregdre inse- 
 
 show him how they did. " Then," said he, " let 
 gndre fare. " ," dire , ' 
 
 us do it." Say it frankly. (I), as for me, do 
 fare .'-' Dire sicuro. , , 
 
 not remember (myself of) it. Having caused a purse 
 ricorddre . -7- Fare 2 bdrsa 3 
 
 to be brought to her- (self), she put it (to him) 1 into I 
 venire 1 , mettere \ in \ 
 
 his hand, and said : " Count if they are five-hun- 
 
 mdno, dire : " Annoverdre 
 
 dred." He conquered Scotland, and was crowned 
 ." conquistdre Scozia, corondre 
 
 king of it. I did not discern there any thing. 
 re . discfrnerc cosa. 
 
 There is Minos I who I grins horribly. 1 will 
 stdre I c* | ringhidre 3 orribile. 1 fd- 
 
 cause it to be painted there. Where art thou, good 
 re dipingere . , buona 
 
 woman ? Here I am (behold me), what dost 
 
 donna ? ? 
 
- USE AND POSITION OF PRONOUNS. 505 
 
 thou wish ? We are (behold us) ready to obey 
 
 2 domanddre 1 ? pronto ubbidire 
 
 you. 
 
 My friend and not the friend of fortune. My 
 amico fortuna. 
 
 father told (it to) me, that I should take care (my- 
 4 dire 3 l , guarddre 
 
 self) of ever setting- foot in Messenia. O Samuel, 
 giammdi 2 porre* piede 5 3 4 . 
 
 once my true father, dost thou command it ? I As 
 vero pddre, imponere ? \ Per 
 
 much as 
 qudnto 
 
 thou 
 
 valuest I my affection. I In order 
 dbbii. cdro I amor. Per 
 
 to die as your daughter, and not as your enemy. 
 
 mor'ire ' fi&lif^ nemica. 
 
 He let fall his hook at his (own) feot. Weeping 
 
 Lascidre cascdr uncino piede. Pidngere 
 
 he threw himself I on 
 gittdre a 
 
 his (another person's) neck. 
 collo. 
 
 The unfortunate ones wept, scratched their (own) faces,* 
 meschina pidngere, sgraffidre viso, 
 
 tore their (own) hair.f In thinking of it I shud- 
 
 strappdre capello. pensdre racca- 
 
 > 
 
 der (myself all\ over) and my heart melts (itself), 
 priccidre tutto cuore struggere 
 
 He remained there all the ni^ht with certain 
 Stare notte cdrto 
 
 snares of his I to 
 artifizio 2 J | per 
 
 ceived (himself) of it. There is no one|| of them 
 cdrgere 
 
 so young, who could not know well how wowen 
 fanciulla, potere conoscere 2 ben } femmine 
 
 * Faces to be put, i n the Italian, in the singular. 
 
 f Hair, in the plural. t all, in the feminine. 
 
 $ JVo, for no one. \\ A*o one, for not any one, in tho/er/miine. 
 
 catch a bat. No person per- 
 piglidre pipistrello. persona ac- 
 
sanctii 
 
 santitw 
 
 506 SYNTAX. 
 
 are. I have not slept any last night. Let no 
 dormzre passdto notte. 
 
 one move himself, or say a word, if he does not 
 muovere , fdre motto, 
 
 wish to die. There it seemed to me to see no* 
 voUre morire. l parere 15 14 vedtrt 19 2 
 
 jtity, no* devotion, no* good work, or example 
 ita?, 4 divozione 5 , 6 buono 1 opera 8 , 9 es6mpio w 
 
 of life. Has any one been here ? If there is 
 vita 12 . 4 l 1 
 
 any one, who wishes I to bet I a supper, I will 
 , vottre I matter su \ c6na, met- 
 
 do it willingly. If Philip goes any where (in 
 
 tere volentidri. Filippo anddre 
 
 any place), follow him (approach thyself to him) 
 
 luogo, accostdre 
 
 in some manner. I have nothing I to I fear now. 
 qudlche modo. \ da \ temere omdi. 
 
 Thou knowest nothing then. 
 sapere dunque. 
 
 CHAPTER VII. 
 
 VERBS. 
 
 POSITION OF VERBS. 
 
 Verbs are generally placed after their subjectives 5 
 but if a command is given, or a question is asked, or a 
 wish or imprecation is expressed ; the verb is to be put 
 before the subjective ; as, 
 
 JVo, for no one* 
 
VERBS. 
 
 507 
 
 SPENGASI nei vostri pttti let every spark of venomous 
 
 OGNI SCINTILLA di pesti- disdain be extinguished in 
 
 fero sdegno, your hearts ; 
 
 ACCENDASI in quelli ARDEN- let there [in your hearts] be 
 
 TE FIAMMA di sinccro kindled a fervent flame of 
 
 amdre, sincere affection ; 
 
 die VUOL dir QUEST o ? what can this mean ? 
 
 VOLESSE IDDIO che il gua- would to Heaven that his gaz- 
 
 tdrmi gli fosse bastdto, ing at me had satisfied him ; 
 
 MALADETTA S!A LA CRUDEL- cursed be the cruelty of him, 
 
 TA di colui, eke mi ti fa who causes that I should 
 
 vedere, see thee. 
 
 The verb is likewise put before the subjective, when 
 it is neuter and is preceded by a sentence or part of it ; 
 when it is preceded by a negative ; and when an em- 
 phatical adjective introduces the sentence ; as, 
 
 standosi cosi, VENNE Alia vol- 
 
 ta SUd UN GAMBERO, 
 
 ne me ne HA mdi PARLATO 
 
 dolce i IL 
 
 [the bird] being so, a crab 
 came up to him ; 
 
 nor has any one ever spoken 
 
 to me of her ; 
 to do good is pleasing. 
 
 Finally, the verb is put before the subjective, when in 
 narrations the sayings or doings of a person are re- 
 lated ; when in exclamations it is accompanied by the 
 word come or quanta ; and when one of the following 
 words ci, vi, qui, qua, ivi, quivi, dove, qu'indi, quanta, 
 cosi, begins a sentence or phrase ; as, 
 
 the lady said : " How can that 
 
 be?" 
 oh ! how often do old men fall 
 
 into this error ! 
 
 D1SSE LA D6NNA : 
 
 pud tsser questo 1 " 
 
 oh! come spisso CASCANO i 
 
 VECCHI in questo errore ! 
 se ce ne vENissE ALCUNA, 
 
 qUl SONO GIARD1NI, 
 
 if some one should come here ; 
 here are gardens ; 
 chi t qutllo che now sdppia who does not know how in- 
 quanto si A EGLI infe- ferior he is ? 
 riore ? 
 
508 
 
 SYNTAX. 
 
 EXAM PLE 9 . 
 
 SPENGASI, SPENGASI NEI vo- 
 
 STRl PETTI OGNI SCJNT1LLA DI 
 PEST1FERO SDEGNO J ACCENDASI 
 IN QUELLI ARDJENTE FlARIMA DI 
 
 8IN-CERO AMORE. (Cavalcanti.) 
 
 CHE VUOL DIR QUESTO ? 
 (Bocc.) 
 
 E VOLESSE IDDIO, che il pas- 
 
 Sarvi O IL GUATARMI GLI FOSSE 
 BASTATO. (BOCC. g. 3. D. 3.) 
 
 MALADETTA SIA LA CRUDELTA 
 DI coLth, CHE con gli occhi dtl- 
 la fr^nte or MI TI FA VEDERE. 
 (Bocc. g. 4. n. I.) 
 
 E STANDOSI cosi di mala vo 
 glia VENNE ALLA VOLTA SUA UN 
 GAMBERO. (Firenz.) 
 
 NE ME NE HA MAI PARLATO AL- 
 
 CUNO, che non mel* dbbia dip'in- 
 ta egudle alia nria Costanza. 
 (Gell.) 
 
 DOLCE in ogni tempo E IL 
 BENEFICIO. (Soave, Nov.) 
 
 DlSSE LA DONNA I " COME PDO 
 ESSER QUESTO ? " " DlSSE MeS- 
 
 ser Lizio : " Tu il vedrdi, se tu 
 vitni presto" (Bocc. g. 5. n. 4.) 
 
 OH ! COME SPESSO CASCANO I 
 VECCHI IN QUESTO ERRORE ! 
 
 (Gell.) 
 
 E se per isciagura -CE NE VE- 
 NISSE ALCtiNA. (Bocc. g. 5. n. 3.) 
 
 QUI SONO GIARDINI, qua dltri 
 
 luoghi dilett&voli. (Bocc. Intr.) 
 Perche, CHI E QUELLO CHE 
 
 NON SAPPIA QUANTO SIA EGLI 
 
 di forze ? (Tolom.) 
 
 Let every spark of venomous 
 disdain be extinguished in your 
 heart ; let there be kindled a fer- 
 vent flame of sincere affection. 
 
 What can this mean ? 
 
 And would to Heaven, that his 
 passing by, and gazing at me, had 
 satisfied him. 
 
 Cursed be the cruelty of him, 
 who causes that my eyes should 
 see thee now. 
 
 And being [the bird] so mel- 
 ancholy, a crab came up to him. 
 
 Nor any one has ever spoken 
 to Hie of her, without describing 
 her to me as equal to my Con- 
 stanza. 
 
 To do good is pleasing at all 
 times. 
 
 The lady said : " How can that 
 be ? " Mr. Lizio said : " Thou 
 wilt see it thyself if thou comest 
 immediately." 
 
 Oh ! how often do old men fall 
 into this error ! 
 
 And if, for our misfortune, some 
 one should come here. 
 
 Here are gardens, there pleasant 
 places. 
 
 Because, who does not know 
 how inferior he is in strength ? 
 
VERBS. 509 
 
 USE OP THE IMPERFECT AND FIRST AND SECOND-PERFECT, 
 
 The preterite of English verbs answers to the imper- 
 fect as well as to the first and second-perfect. In Italian 
 these three tenses are rendered in three different forms; 
 I loved, for instance, may be rendered by io amava, io 
 amai, or io ho amato ; but these forms are not indfFerent- 
 ]y used. 
 
 We make use of the first, the imperfect, when the 
 action of which we speak was present in respect to 
 another action past at the same time; CANTA'VA qudn- 
 do voi veniste, ' I was singing when you came ' ; E'RANO 
 a tavola qudndo noi entrammo, ( they were at table when 
 we entered ' ; as, 
 
 mentre STAVAN CENANDO, while they were at supper, her 
 
 vtnne il mar'Uo, husband came ; 
 
 incontro la Catella, che VEN!- he met Catella, who was com- 
 
 VA, ing. 
 
 The imperfect is also used when we speak of an ac- 
 tion become habitual, or continued, or repeated several 
 times ; as, 
 
 io LAVORAVA un loro giar- I had the care of their garden ; 
 
 dino, 
 
 ANDAVA al bosco per le 16- I used to go to the forest for 
 
 gne, wood ; 
 
 ATTIGNEVA ticqua, 6 FAC^VA I drew water, and did other 
 dltri servigttti, services ; 
 
 le donne mi DAVAN si poco, the ladies gave me so little, 
 che io non ne POTEVA ap- that with it I could scarcely 
 pena pagdre i calzdri, pay for my shoes. 
 
 Finally, we use the imperfect in speaking of the 
 age, name, actions, dispositions, and good or bad quali- 
 ties of persons and things that exist no more ; as, 
 
 ne pur tre lustri AVEA/ornifo', he [Rinaldo] had scarcely fin- 
 ished his third lustrum ; 
 43* 
 
510 
 
 SYNTAX. 
 
 
 la moglie, che Isabella AVEA 
 
 wo'me, 
 ERA di buona mente, e di fe- 
 
 lice ingegno dotdto, e bd- 
 
 lissimo favellatore, 
 
 p A R E v A San la Feridiana, 
 che da beccare dlle serpi, 
 
 RA qutsto giardino vago 
 molto, 
 
 his wife, who was called Isa- 
 bella ; 
 
 he [Joseph Warren] was of 
 good mind, endowed with a 
 happy genius, and a very 
 fine speaker ; 
 
 she appeared Saint Veridiana 
 feeding the serpents ; 
 
 this garden was very pleasant. 
 
 It may, perhaps, assist the learner in making a proper use of this 
 tense, to observe further, that whenever the preterite in English may 
 be turned into was or were and the present participle of the same 
 verb, or into used "and the infinitive of the same verb ; it is to be 
 rendered by the imperfect tense in Italian : thus, if, without altering 
 the meaning, I or we LOOKED for, may be changed into / WAS or we 
 WERE LOOKING for, or into 7 or we USED TO LOOK /or, it must be 
 rendered by w CERCAVA, or noi CERCAVAMO. 
 
 The first-perfect is used to denote an action done in 
 a period of time completely past ; as, 
 
 poiche a mdrte mi SENTII fe- 
 rito, 
 
 AVVENNE che il re di Frdncia 
 
 MORI, 
 
 Colombo PARTI per la sco- 
 perta del nuovo mdndo 
 V anno 1492, 
 
 io altresl questa notte pass&ta 
 FECI un sognoy 
 
 The second-perfect is used to express an action done 
 in a period of time not specified; or, if specified, not 
 completely past ; as, 
 
 after I found myself mortally 
 wounded ; 
 
 it happened that the king of 
 France died ; 
 
 Columbus departed for the dis- 
 covery of the new world the 
 year 1492 ; 
 
 I also had a dream last night. 
 
 dnzi V HO SKmpre AMATO. e 
 AvtiTO cdro, 
 
 voi r AVTE COMPERATO, 
 ed io non V HO 
 
 nay, I always loved thee, and 
 held thee dear ; 
 
 you have obtained it by pur- 
 chase, without my selling it 
 to you ; 
 
VERBS. 
 
 511 
 
 m* AVETE FATTO pirl&re con 
 iina stdtua di mar mo, 
 
 gia sono otto anni, V HO pih 
 che la mia vita AMATO, 
 
 mdlte {tlili scop&rte 
 
 FATTE nel presinte stcolo, 
 
 you hav^ made me speak with 
 
 a marble statue ; 
 for these eight years have I 
 
 loved thee more than my 
 
 very life ; 
 
 many useful discoveries have 
 been made within the pres- 
 ent century. 
 
 The phrase / saw him this morning, if used in the foren&on, 
 when the morning is not yet elapsed, is rendered by V HO vEDtiTO 
 stamattinai but, if used in. the afternoon, when the morning is 
 already elapsed, it must be rendered by lo vioi stamattina. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 MENTRE STAVAN CENANDO, While they were at supper, her 
 VENNE IL MARITO. (Bocc. g. 1. husband came, 
 n. 3.) 
 
 jfrgli INCONTRO LA CATELLA, 
 CHE VENIVA. (BOCC. g. 2. n. 5.) 
 
 lO LAVORAVA UN LORO GIARDI- 
 
 JPTO bcllo e grande, e, dltre a qu6- 
 sto, ANDAVA alcuna volta AL BO- 
 SCO PER LE LEGNE, ATT1GNEVA 
 ACQUA, E FACEVA COtdll ALTRI 
 
 SERVIGETTI ; ma le DONNE MI 
 
 DAVANO SI POCO, CHE o NON NE 
 POTEVA APPENA PAGARE I CAL- 
 
 ZARI. (Bocc. g, 4. n. 1.) 
 
 AU6r NE PUR TRE LtJSTRI AVEA 
 
 FORNITI. (Tass. Ger. 1. 60.) 
 
 LA MOGLIE, CHE ISABELLA 
 AVEA NOME. (BOCC. g. 5. n. 1.) 
 
 ERA DI EUONA MENTE, E DI 
 FELICE 1NGEGNO DOTATO, E BEL- 
 LisSIMO FAVELLATORE. (Bott. 
 
 Stor. Amer. 1. 5.) 
 
 U'na vtcchia, che PAREVA SAN- 
 TA VERIDIANA,CHE DA BECCARE 
 ALLE SERPI. (Bocc. g. 5. n. 10.) 
 
 ERA Q,UESTO GIARDINO VAGO 
 
 MOLTO. (Bemb.) 
 
 He met Catella, who was com- 
 ing- 
 
 I had the care of a large and 
 beautiful garden of theirs, and be- 
 sides this I used sometimes to go 
 to the forest for wood ; 1 drew wa- 
 ter, and did other like services for 
 them ; but the ladies gave me so 
 little, that with it I could hardly 
 pay for my shoes. 
 
 Then he [Rinaldo] had scarcely 
 finished his third lustrum. 
 
 His wife, who was called Isa- 
 bella. 
 
 He [Joseph Warren] was of 
 good mind, endowed with a happy 
 genius, and a very fine speaker. 
 
 An old woman, who appeared 
 Saint Veridiana feeding the ser- 
 pents. 
 
 This garden was very pleasant. 
 
512 
 
 SYNTAX. 
 
 POICCHE A MORTE MI SENTfl 
 
 FERITO. (Petr.) 
 
 AVVENNE CHE 1L RE DI FKAN- 
 
 CIA MORI, ed in suo luogo fu 
 corondto ilfigliuolo. (Bocc.) 
 
 COLOMBO PARTI PER LA sco- 
 
 PERTA DEL NUOVO M6NPO L* AN- 
 NO 1492. (Vanz.) 
 
 Se w fossi voluto anddre dii- 
 tro d j sogni, w non ci sarei venu- 
 fo, non tdnto per lo tuo, quanta 
 per unOy che io ALTRESI QDESTA 
 
 NOTTE PASSATA HE FEC1. (BOCC. 
 
 g. 4. n. 6.) 
 
 ANZl T' HO SEMPRE AMATO, E 
 
 AVUTO CARO inndnzi ad dgni 
 dltro. (Bocc. g. 3. n. 5.) 
 
 Ed or volcsse Iddto che iofdtto 
 V av6ssi, percid che voi L' AVETK 
 
 COMPERATO, ED fo NON L* HO 
 
 VENDtJTO. (Bocc. g. 3. n. 5.) 
 
 " Che ti pare ? HotV io Une 
 la promessa servdta ? " " Mes- 
 ser, no ; voi M' AVETE ri.TTO 
 
 PARLARE CON T?NA ST^TUA DI 
 
 M^RMO." (Bocc. g. 3. n. 5.) 
 
 To, misera me ! CIA SONO OTTO 
 ANNI, T' HO PIU CHE LA M!A 
 
 VITA AMATO. (BoCC. g. 3. D. 6.) 
 
 MOLTE T^TILI SCOPERTE SONOSI 
 FATTE NEL PRESENTE SECOLO. 
 
 (Vanz.) 
 
 After I found myself mortally 
 wounded. 
 
 It happened that the king of 
 France died, and his son was 
 crowned in his stead. 
 
 Columbus departed for the dis- 
 covery of the new world the year 
 1492. 
 
 If I had any faith in dreams, 1 
 should not have come here ; and 
 not so much for the sake of yours, 
 as of one I also had last night. 
 
 Nay I always loved thee, and 
 held thee dear beyond every other 
 person. 
 
 And now would to Heaven that 
 I had done so, because you have 
 obtained it by purchase, without 
 my selling it to you. 
 
 " What dost thou think of it ? 
 Have I not kept my promise ? " 
 " No, sir ; you have made me 
 speak to a marble statue." 
 
 Alas ! for these eight years have 
 I loved thee more than my very 
 life. 
 
 Many useful discoveries have 
 been made within the present cen- 
 tury. 
 
 USE OP CERTAIN TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE FOR SOME OTHER 
 TENSES OF THE SAME MOOD ; AJJD OF THE INFINITIVE FOR 
 CERTAIN TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE, AND FOR THE CON- 
 JUNCTIVE AND IMPERATIVE MOODS. 
 
 The present of the indicative is sometimes used, in 
 narrations, for the first-perfect ; as, 
 
 ESCE [for, usci] veloce da he went quickly out of that 
 qutlla tomba, tomb ; 
 
VERBS. 
 
 513 
 
 or, CORSE] alpaldgio, he ran to his palace ; 
 
 non & [for, BRA] piii dubbia the way was no longer doubt- 
 
 la via, ful ; 
 
 non E piii oscura la notte, the night was no longer dark. 
 It is also used for the future ; as, 
 
 domdne E [for, SARA] /' ulti- to-morrow will be the last day ; 
 
 mo dij 
 
 die fardi tu, se ilia il DICE what wilt thou do, if she will 
 
 [for, DIRA] a? fraUlli ? tell it to her brothers ; 
 
 se to infra otto giorni non vi if I shall not cure you in eight 
 
 GUAnisco [for, GUARIR6], days, have me burnt ; 
 
 fdtemi brugidre, 
 
 se tu ti CALI [for, CALERAI], if thou wilt cast thee down, I 
 
 10 non ti verro dtitro di cannot chase thee on foot. 
 galoppo, 
 
 The first-perfect may be used for the present ; as, 
 
 or che AVESTI [for, che HAI], now what ails thee, that thou 
 
 che fdi cotdl viso, makest such a face ; 
 
 Anichino gittd un gran so- Anichino gave a deep sigh. 
 
 spiro. La donna disse : The woman said : " What 
 
 " Che avesti, Anichino ? " ails thee, Anichino ? " 
 
 The first-perfect may be used, also, for the second- 
 perfect ; as, 
 
 6nde FOSTI tu [for, SEI STATO where hast thou been this 
 
 tu] stamane ? wYbn so morning ? I know not 
 
 dve w mi FIJI [for, SONO sWhere I have been ; 
 STATO], 
 
 sceglitsti? [for, HAI SCELTO?] hast thou chosen? I have. 
 
 Ho scelto. Em6n 2 ^Emon ? - Death. Thou 
 
 Morte. U avrdi, shalt have it. 
 
 The second-pluperfect may be used for the first-per- 
 fect ; as, 
 
 lire FU GIUNTO [for, GI^NSE] the king arrived and said: 
 
 c disse : " Cavaliere, a qudl " Knight, what lady dost 
 
 donna se? tu?" thou belong- to ? " 
 
 alzdtala lanterna, EBBER VE- having raised the lantern, they 
 
 D^TO [for, VIDERO] il cat- saw that rogue Andreuccio. 
 tivtl di Andreuccio, 
 
514 
 
 SYNTAX. 
 
 The future is used for the present, in doubtful ac- 
 tions ; as, 
 
 PARR! [for, forse PARE] a 
 voi, eke non vi vSglia bene, 
 
 gente si appressa : Elvira 
 SARA [for, forse & Elvira], 
 
 The future-anterior is 
 in doubtful cases ; as, 
 
 AVRO DETTO [for, foTSB HO 
 
 DETTO], che ho da andare 
 a Venezia, 
 
 perhaps it seems to you, that 
 she does not like you ; 
 
 people approach : perhaps it 
 is Elvira. 
 
 used for the second-perfect, 
 
 perhaps I have said, that I am 
 to go to Venice. 
 
 The infinitive may be used for the third person 
 singular of the present and of the imperfect of the 
 indicative, and their compounds, depending on another 
 verb of the same mood; as, 
 
 conosco liii ESSERE [for, che 
 egli E] un malvdgio uomo, 
 
 udendo il re il maliscdlco ES- 
 SER [for, che il maliscalco 
 ERA] m&rto, 
 
 ti converra avere nella memo- 
 ria, Iddio ESSERE STATO 
 [for, che Iddio ic STATO] 
 creatore del cielo, e della 
 terra, 
 
 S* accorse V'abale AVER MAN- 
 GIATO [for, che V abate AVEA 
 MANGIATO] fdve secche, 
 
 It may likewise be used for the third person singular 
 of the present and of the imperfect of the conjunctive, 
 and their compounds ; as, 
 
 si crede ESSERE [for, che egli he is thought to be one of the 
 
 I know that he is a wicked 
 man ; 
 
 the king hearing that his far- 
 rier was dead ; 
 
 thou must keep in thy mind, 
 that God has been the crea- 
 tor of heaven and earth ; 
 
 he found out, that the abbot 
 had eaten dry beans. 
 
 S!A] uno de' piit ricchi pre- 
 Idti del mdndo, 
 ella, credendo lui ESSER [for, 
 che egli FOSSE] Gisippo, 
 rispose di $i, 
 
 richest prelates in the world ; 
 
 she, believing that he was 
 Gisippus, answered yes ; 
 
VERBS. 
 
 515 
 
 di Guiscardo ho io gict m'eco I have already determined 
 
 preso partilo che FARne within myself what to do 
 
 [for, che ne DEBBA FARE], with Guiscard ; 
 
 credendo lui ESSER TORNATO believing that he had returned 
 
 [for, che egli FOSSE TOR- from the wood. 
 NATO] dal 6<5sco, 
 
 Finally, the infinitive is used for the second person 
 singular of the imperative rnood, when preceded by the 
 negative ; as, 
 
 do NON TEMER,* do not fear that ; 
 
 NON mi TOCCARE, do not touch me. 
 
 E X AMP L E S . 
 
 ESCE VELOCE DA QUELLA TOM- 
 BA, CORRE AL PALAGIO } 71011 E 
 
 piu incerto il siio pas so, JVON E 
 
 P1U DUBBIA LA VIA, NON E PIU 
 
 osctJRA LA NOTTE. (Alberg. Nov.) 
 
 Quello che mi dite di fare, si 
 fdccia tosto, perciocche DOMANE 
 E L' ULTIMO DI che w debbo 6s- 
 sere aspettdto. (Bocc. g. 10. n. 9.) 
 
 CHE FAR.il TU, SE ELLA IL 
 DICE A' FRATELLI ? (BoCC. g. 3. 
 
 n. 3.) 
 
 SE io INFRA OTTO GIORNI NON 
 VI GUARISCC), FATEMI BRUCIARE. 
 
 (Bocc. g. 3. n. 9.) 
 
 SE TU TI CALI, fo NON TI VER- 
 RO D1ETRO DI GALOPPO. (Dtmt. 
 
 Inf. 22.) 
 
 OR CHE AVESTI, CHE FAl 
 
 COTAL viso. (Bocc. g. 7. n. 9.) 
 
 ANICHfNO GITTO UN GRANDfs- 
 
 SIMO SOSPIRO. LA DONNA, guar- 
 ddtolOj DISSE : " CHE AVESTI, 
 ANICHINO ? Du6lti cost, che w ti 
 mnco" (Bocc. g. 7. n. 7.) 
 
 He went quickly out of that 
 tomb, ran to his palace ; his steps 
 were no longer uncertain, the way 
 was no longer doubtful, the night 
 was no longer dark. 
 
 What is to be done, let it be 
 done immediately, for to-morrow 
 will be the last day of my being 
 expected. 
 
 What wilt tho'u do, if she tells it 
 to her brothers ? 
 
 If I shall not cure you in eight 
 days, have me burnt. 
 
 If thou wilt cast thee down 
 [into the pitch], I cannot chase 
 thee on foot. 
 
 Now what ails thee, that thou 
 makest such a face. 
 
 Anichino gave a very deep 
 sigh. The lady, having looked at 
 him, said : " What ails thee, Ani- 
 chino ? Art thou sorry, that 1 con- 
 quer thee ? " 
 
 * These and similar expressions ought to be regarded, however, as equivalent to 
 the phrases (ti comdndo, ti csdrto, ti consiglio a) cio NON TEME RE, (a) NON 
 MI TOCCA'RE, &.C., ' (1) do (command, exhort, counsel thee) not (to) fear that, 
 not (to) touch me ' ; &c. ; in which tho words contained within parentheses are 
 generally suppressed by ellipsis. 
 
516 
 
 SYNTAX. 
 
 FOSTI TU STAMANE ? 
 
 NON so OVE MI FUI. (Bocc. g. 
 3. n. 3.) 
 
 SCEGLIESTI ?^ Ho SCELTO. 
 EMON ? MORTE. L' AVRAI. 
 (Alf. Antig. 4. 1.) 
 
 lo anddva per grdnde bisogno 
 in servigio de'lla mia donna, IL 
 
 RE FU GIUNTO, E DISSE : " CA- 
 VALIERE, A QUAL DONNA SE J 
 
 TU ? " (Nov. ant. 35.) 
 ALZATA dlquanto LA LANTER- 
 
 NA, EBBER VEDUTO IL CATTIVEL 
 
 DI ANDREUCCIO. (Bocc. g. 2. n. 
 5) 
 
 Eh ma ! cdro amico, PARR! A 
 
 VOI, CHE NON VI VOGLIA BENE. 
 
 (Gold. Ver. Am.) 
 
 GENTE si APPRESSA : ELVIRA 
 SARA. (Alf. Fil. 4. 1.) 
 
 AVRO DETTO, CHE HO DA AN- 
 
 DARE [A VENEZIA], per una lit- 
 tera che tratta di mw zw. (Gold.) 
 
 CONOSCO LUI ESSERE UN MAL- 
 
 VAGIO UOMO. (Gr. Gr.) 
 UDENDO IL RE d' Ing/iilte'rra 
 
 IL MALISCALCO ESSER MORTO. 
 
 (Bocc. g. 2. n. 8.) 
 Ti CONVERRA sirtipre AV^RE 
 
 NELLA MEMORIA, IDDIO ESSERE 
 8TATO CREATOR DEL CIELO, E 
 BELLA TERRA. (BOCC, g. 3. n. 4.) 
 
 EgH S* ACC6RSE L' ABATE AVER 
 MANGIATO FAVE SECCHE. (BOCC. 
 
 g. 10. n. 2.) 
 
 Venne a corte V abate di Cli- 
 gniyil qudle si CREDE ESSERE UNO 
 
 DE* P1U R1CCHI PRELATI DEL 
 
 MONDO. (Bocc. g. 10. n. 2.) 
 
 ELLA, CREDENDO LUI ESSER 
 GISIPPO, RISPOSE DI si. 
 
 Where hast thou been this 
 morning ? I know not where I 
 have been. 
 
 Hast thou chosen ? I have. 
 J3mon ? Death. Thou shalt 
 have it. 
 
 I was going on an important 
 errand in the service of my lady, 
 when the king arrived, and said: 
 ' Knight, what lady dost thou be- 
 long to ? " 
 
 Having raised the lanlern a 
 little, they saw that rogue An- 
 dreuccio. 
 
 Come ! dear friend, perhaps it 
 seems to you, that she does not 
 like you 
 
 People approach : perhaps it is 
 Elvira. 
 
 Perhaps I have said, that I am 
 to go to Venice on account of a 
 letter which concerns my uncle. 
 
 I know that he is a wicked 
 man. 
 
 The king of England hearing 
 that his farrier was dead. 
 
 Thou must keep always in thy 
 mind that God has been the crea- 
 tor of heaven and earth. 
 
 He found out, that the abbot 
 had eaten dry beans. 
 
 There came to court the abbot 
 of Cluny, who is thought to be 
 one of the richest prelates in the 
 world. 
 
 She, believing that he waa 
 Gisippus, answered yes. 
 
VERBS. 
 
 517 
 
 Di GUISCARDO HO 10 GIA 
 
 MECO PRESO PART1TO CHE FARNE ', 
 
 ma di te sallo Iddio, chb w non 
 so chc FARMI. (Bocc. g. 4. n. 1.) 
 
 CREDENDO Ltfi ESSER TORNA- 
 TO DAL BOSCO, avvisd di ripren- 
 derlo forte. (Bocc. g. l.-n. 4.) 
 
 Cio NON TEMR, che in cru- 
 delta son pdri 1 tuoi ministri 
 a te. (Alf. Filip. 4. 2.) 
 
 Ldsciami, NON MI TOCCARE. 
 (Bocc.) 
 
 I have already determined with- 
 in myself what to do with Guis- 
 card ; but God knows what to do 
 with thee, for I do not. 
 
 Believing that he had returned 
 from the wood, he thought of 
 reprimanding him severely. 
 
 Do not fear that, for thy min- 
 isters are not inferior to thee in 
 cruelty. 
 
 Let me alone, 
 me. 
 
 A COMPOUND 
 
 OF THE TENSES OF THE DEPENDENT VE 
 SENTENCE. 
 
 When, in a compound sentence, the principal verb is 
 in the present of the indicative, or in the future, the 
 dependent verb must be put in the present of the con- 
 junctive, if we mean to imply the present or future time ; 
 and in the imperfect of the conjunctive, if we mean to 
 imply the past ; as, 
 
 o CREDO omdi che monti e I believe that, by this time, 
 pidgge SAPPIAN di che tern- mountains and plains know 
 
 what is the condition ojf ray 
 
 pre SIA la mla vita, 
 
 CONVERRA. che tu GODA di tal 
 
 desio, 
 CREDO mi PORTASSE amdre, 
 
 life : 
 
 it is proper that this wish of 
 thine should be gratified ; _ 
 
 I believe that he loved me ; 
 
 you will easily imagine how 
 to mt Fdssi rallegrato, much I rejoiced at it. 
 
 When the principal verb is in the imperfect or the 
 perfect of the indicative, or in the conditional, the de- 
 pendent verb is generally put in the imperfect of the 
 conjunctive ; as, 
 
 appena SAPE>A che far si he hardly knew what to do ; 
 DOVESSE, 
 
 44 
 
518 
 
 SYNTAX. 
 
 DOMANDO qudl FOSSE fa Cd- 
 
 gione del loro romdre, 
 chi STAREBBE meglio di me, 
 st quilli dtndri rdssERO 
 miii? 
 
 she asked what was the cause 
 of their noise ; 
 
 who would be happier than I, 
 if that money were mine ? 
 
 In suppositive or conditional phrases, the imperfect of 
 the indicative in English, had, was, or were, is ren- 
 dered in Italian by the imperfect of the conjunctive ; as. 
 
 se cosl non FOSSE, w non vi 
 potrti prestdre un grosso, 
 
 se non AVESSI paura di mio 
 padre, 10 gli insegnerti la 
 risp6sta, 
 
 se AVESSI qutsti dendri, iegli 
 prester&i incontantnte, 
 
 [if it was not so] were it not 
 so, I could not lend you a 
 farthing ; 
 
 [if I had not the fear if I 
 was not afraid] were I not 
 afraid of my father, I would 
 teach him how to reply ; 
 
 if I had this money, I would 
 lend it to thee immediately. 
 
 EXAM PL E S. 
 
 SI ch' io mi CREDO OM Ai, CHE 
 
 MONTI, E PIAGGE, E fiumi, 6 
 Stive SAPPIAN DI CHE TEMPRE 
 
 SIA LA MIA viTA. (Petr. s. 22.) 
 
 Di TAL DESIO CONVERRA CHE 
 
 TU GODA. (Dant. Inf. 8.) 
 
 CREDO MI PORTASSE AMORE, e 
 che di me non FOSSE m6no ar- 
 dtnte. (Ariost.) 
 
 GlTJDICHERA FACILMENTE 
 
 qUANTO 10 MI FOSSI RALLEGRA- 
 
 TO. (Bent, lett.) 
 
 APPENA SAP^TA CHE FAR si 
 DOVESSE. (Bocc, g. 2. n. 8.) 
 
 DOMANDO LA REGINA QUAL 
 FOSSE LA CAGIONE DEL LORO RO- 
 
 MORE. (BOCC. g. 6.) 
 
 CHI STAREBBE MEGLIO DI ME, 
 SE Q.UELLI DENARI FO8SERO MIEI? 
 
 (Bocc. g. 2. n. 5.) 
 
 So that I believe, that, by this 
 time, mountains, and plains, and 
 rivers, and woods know what is 
 the condition of my life. 
 
 It is proper that this wish of 
 thine should be gratified. 
 
 I believe that he loved me, and 
 that he was no less ardent in love 
 than I. 
 
 You will easily imagine how 
 much I rejoiced at it. 
 
 He hardly knew what to do. 
 
 The queen asked what was the 
 cause of their noise. 
 
 Who would be more happier 
 I, if that money were mine ? 
 
VERBS. 519 
 
 SE cosi NON FOSSE, fo NON vi Were it not so, I could not 
 
 POTREI PRESTARE UN GROSS, lend you a farthing. 
 (Bocc. g. 8. n. 10.) 
 
 SE w NON AVESSI PAURA Di Were I not afraid of my father, 
 
 MIO PADRE, fo GLI iNSEGNEREi I would teach him how to reply. 
 LA RISPOSTA. (Mach. Com.) 
 
 SE^O AVESSI QUESTI DENARII, If I had this money, I would 
 
 w TE"GLI PRESTEREI INCONTA- lend it to thee immediately. 
 JVENTE. (Bocc. g. 8. n. 10.) 
 
 OF THE MANNER OF EXPRESSING THE ENGLISH PRESENT- 
 PARTICIPLE IN ITALIAN. 
 
 "The English present-participle may be expressed in 
 Italian : 
 
 First, by the gerund of the corresponding verb ; as, 
 
 consumdre c6me seeing him waste away like 
 la ntve al sdle, snow in the sun ; 
 
 DORMENDO gli pdrve di ve- [sleeping or] whilst he was 
 dire, la donna siia, asleep, it seemed to him 
 
 that he saw his lady. 
 
 Secondly, by the conjunction cAe, or the adverb 
 quando, and a tense of the indicative mood ; as, 
 
 poi CH' EBBI RIPOSATO il having rested my weary body 
 cdrpo lasso, 
 
 QUAND' EBBE DETTO cio, ri- having said this, he took up 
 prtee il teschio misero c6' once more that miserable 
 dinti, skull with his teeth. 
 
 Thirdly, by a preposition and the verb in the infini- 
 tive ; as, 
 
 consumo quella mattina IN he spent that morning in look- 
 
 CERcAR/i, ing after them ; 
 
 crtdo che k suore sttn tutte A I believe that the nuns are all 
 
 [sleeping or] asleep. 
 
520 SYNTAX. 
 
 When the English present-participle has before it 
 preposition, such as cfjfrpm, with, on. in, for, without, 
 before, after, &c., it is always rendered in Italian by the 
 corresponding verb in the infinitive with a preposition. 
 
 If the participle is preceded by the prepositions of, 
 from, with, they are expressed in Italian by the preposi- 
 tion di, attended by the infinitive ; as, 
 
 6bbi il piactre DI VEDER^O, I had the pleasure of seeing 
 
 him; 
 
 Ma m' impedisce DI FAR/O, you prevent me from doing so ; 
 conUnto D' AVER? trovdta, being content with having 
 
 found her. 
 
 The preposition on, before the participle, may be 
 expressed by the prepositions di, or in 5 as, 
 
 si vdnta D' AVER la loro co- he values himself on being ac- 
 noscinza, quainted with them ; 
 
 NEl PARTIRE gli sovvtnne di on his departure he recollected 
 Ui, her. 
 
 The preposition in is rendered by a, or in ; as, 
 
 che A FAR cio voUsse aitdrlo, that he would assist him in 
 
 doing that ; 
 
 avfa NEZ QUETAR popolo au- in appeasing the people he had 
 torita ed arte> both authority and art. 
 
 The prepositions for, without, before, after, &c., are 
 literally translated. 
 
 If the participle is preceded by the preposition by, 
 this preposition is generally omitted in Italian, and the 
 participle, rendered by the gerund of the corresponding 
 verb ; as, 
 
 gli scoldri impdrano le rtgole scholars learn the rules of a 
 di wm lingua STUDIANDO- language by studying them. 
 le, 
 
VERBS. 
 
 521 
 
 But if we wish to express the preposition, then the 
 verb must be put in the infinitive, and by rendered by 
 con; as, 
 
 il divino Giulio rintuzzo la the divine Julius checked the 
 
 sedizione del suo estrcito sedition of his army by only 
 
 col DIR sdlo : M Qui~ saykig : " Ah Romans ! " 
 r$/ 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 ^ CONSUMERS 
 
 COME Si fa LA NEVE AL SOLE. 
 
 (Bocc. g. 3. n. 7.) 
 
 DORMENDO GLI PARVE in SO- 
 gno DI VEDERE LA DONNA stlA 
 
 anddr per un bosco assdi bello. 
 (Bocc. g. 9. n. 7.) 
 
 POICH 5 BBI RIPOSATO IL COR- 
 
 po LASSO, Ripresi ma per la 
 piaggia diserta. (Dant. Inf. I.) 
 
 QUAND' EBBE DETTO cio, cogli 
 occhi torti, RIPRESE IL TES- 
 
 CHIO MISERO CO' DENTI Che 
 
 fiiro aW osso, come d' un can, 
 forti. (Dant. Inf. 33.) 
 
 Tutto il rimanentc di Q.UELLA 
 
 MATTINA CONSUMO IN CERCARLI. 
 
 (Bocc. g. 8. n. 3.) 
 
 I'O mi CREDO CBE LE SHORE 
 SIEN TtJTTE A DORBlfRE. (BOCC. 
 
 g. 3. n. 1.) 
 JVbn prima di ieri EBBI IL PIA- 
 
 CKRE DI VEDERE, f'lt CttSa deW 
 
 ambasciaddre del re di Frdncia, 
 (Bent.) 
 
 Se non ch' LLA M* IMPED! SCE 
 DI FARLO. (Metast. lett.) 
 
 CONTNTO DI AVER TROVATA 
 Filomena. (Bocc.) 
 
 JEgll SI VANTA D* AVER LA 
 LORO CONOSCENZA. (Gold.) 
 
 44* 
 
 I seeing him waste away as the 
 snow does in the sun. 
 
 Whilst he was asleep, it seemed 
 to him that he saw, in a dream, his 
 )ing through a very beautiful 
 
 Having rested my wearied body, 
 I made my way through the de- 
 serted shore. 
 
 Having said this, with looks 
 askanse he took up once more that 
 miserable skull with his teeth, 
 which were as strong upon the 
 bone as those of a dog. 
 
 He spent all the rest of that 
 morning in looking after them. 
 
 I believe that the nuns are all 
 asleep. 
 
 Not before yesterday did I have 
 the pleasure of seeing, at the house 
 of the ambassador of the king of 
 France, .... 
 
 Except that you prevent me 
 from doing so. 
 
 Being content with having found 
 Philomena. 
 
 He values himself on being ac- 
 quainted with them. 
 
522 SYNTAX. 
 
 NEL PARIIRE GLI SOVVENNE On his departure he recollected 
 
 DI LEI, che miscra rimdsa era. her, whom he had left so misera- 
 
 (Nov. Ant.) ble. 
 
 Pregdndolo CHE A FAR cio Begging that he would assist 
 
 VOLESSE AITARLO. (Bocc. g. 6.) him in doing that. 
 
 AVEA NEL QTJETAR POPOLO AU- In appeasing the people, he had 
 
 TORITA ED ARTE. (Dav. St. 3.) both authority and art. 
 
 GLI SCOLARI IMPARANO LE RE- Scholars learn the rules of a 
 
 GOLE DI UNA LINGUA sTUDiAN- language by studying them. 
 DOLE. (Rosasco.) 
 
 IL DIVINO GIULIO RINTUZZO The divine Julius checked the 
 
 LA SEDIZIONE DEL suo ESERciTO sedition of his army by only say- 
 
 COL DIR SOLO : '* AH QUIRITI ! " ing : " Ah Romans ! " 
 (Dav. Ann.) 
 
 OF THE WAT OF RENDERING INTO ITALIAN THE ENGLISH 
 PARTICLE to, BEFORE THE INFINITIVE OF VERBS, 
 
 The particle to prefixed to English verbs is used 
 sometimes as a mere sign of the infinitive, and some- 
 times as a preposition. When it is a mere sign, it is 
 never rendered in Italian, except when the infinitive is 
 used as a noun, and then it is expressed by the article 
 il or lo. When to has the force of a preposition, it is 
 rendered by the prepositions di, a, per. 
 
 When the infinitive of verbs can be expressed in Ital- 
 ian by a noun ; as, ' to read is useful,' la lettura 
 e Mile ; ' always to study is fatiguing,' lo studio 
 continuo efaticoso ; the particle to is rendered by the 
 article il or lo ; il leggere e utile, l to read is useful ' ; 
 lo studiar sempre e faticoso, c always to study is 
 fatiguing'; as, 
 
 le impose IL SEGUITARE [or, she ordered her to continue ; 
 
 IL PROSEGUIMENTO], 
 
 L' ASTENERSI* [or, L' ASTi- to abstain from what pleases, 
 NENZA] da qu&l che place, is true virtue ; 
 vera virtu, 
 
VERBS. 523 
 
 la ddnna veggtndo che IL the woman, seeing that to 
 PREGARE non le valeva [or, pray was useless, had re- 
 che LE PREGHIERE non le course to threats : 
 valvvano], ricdrse AL MI- 
 NACCIARE [or, ALLE MI- 
 NACCE], 
 
 But if the infinitive cannot be expressed by a noun, 
 the particle to is rendered by a preposition. 
 
 If the particle to is preceded by a verb signifying re- 
 membering or forgetting, pleasing or displeasing, rejoic- 
 ing or grieving, owning or denying, permitting or pro- 
 hibiting, telling, declaring, affirming, supposing, suspect- 
 ing, fearing, commanding, asking, entreating, doubting, 
 promising, advising, concluding, finishing, proposing ; 
 or by any verb implying desire or aversion, it is rendered 
 in Italian by the preposition di ; as, 
 
 a me pidce DI dirvi una no- it pleases me to tell you a 
 
 vella, story ; 
 
 m' & caduto nelV dnimo DI it has occurred to my mind to 
 
 dimostrdrvi, show you ; 
 
 a me appartUne DI ragiond- it belongs to me to speak ; 
 . re, 
 
 dma D' essere sveglidto a he likes to be awakened by 
 
 su6n di trombe, the sound of trumpets. 
 
 The particle to is translated by the preposition a, 
 when it comes after verbs signifying beginning, teach- 
 ing, learning, attaining, insisting, persisting, proceeding, 
 remaining, continuing, opposing, contributing, engaging, 
 liking, accustoming, encouraging, obliging ; after verbs 
 implying inclination, difficulty, application, thought, re- 
 luctance, fitness ; and after verbs signifying motion ; as, 
 
 comincid A chiedere perddno, he began to ask pardon ; 
 
 egli b brutto A vedtre, he is ugly to look at ; 
 
 quanta m? era cib cdro AD how pleasing it was to me to 
 
 udlre I hear this ! 
 
 chi not crede, v&nga A ve- let him who does not believe it, 
 
 derla, come and see her. 
 
524 
 
 SYNTAX. 
 
 And whenever for the particle to, joined with the in- 
 finitive of English verbs, can be substituted the phrases 
 in order to, with the design of} it is rendered in Ital- 
 ian by the preposition per ; as, 
 
 PER MOSTRARE (F aVCTC a 
 
 grddo la sua venula, 
 V agricola, che Cristo elesse 
 aW 6rto suo PER AIUTAR- 
 lo, 
 
 to show how agreeable his 
 visit was to him ; 
 
 the husbandman, whom Christ 
 chose to assist him [to be his 
 helpmate] in his own garden. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 La regina, a Filomena voltdta, The queen, having turned to 
 LE IMPOSE 11, SEGUITARE. (Bocc. Philomena, ordered her to con- 
 g. 3. n. 3.) tinue. 
 
 E VERA VIRTtJTE, IL SAPER- 
 
 SI ASTENER DA QUEL CHE PIACE, 
 
 Se quel che place offende. 
 (Past. Fid. 3. 3.) 
 
 LA DONNA VEGGENDO CHE IL 
 PREGARE JNOJV LE VALEVA, RI- 
 CORSE AL MINACCIARE. (BOCC. g. 
 
 7. n. 4.) 
 
 A ME PIACE DI DfRVI UNA NO- 
 VELLA. (Bocc. g. 5. n. 8.) 
 
 M' E CADUTO NELL* ANIMO DI 
 
 DIMOSTRARVI nella novella, che 
 
 a me tdcca DI dire (Bocc. 
 
 g. 1. n. 5.) 
 
 A ME ornai APPARTIENE DI RA- 
 G ION ARE. (Bocc. g. 5. n. 9.) 
 
 AMA meglio D* ESSERE SVE- 
 
 GLIATO A SUON DI TROMBE, 6 TO- 
 
 mor d* drmej che a suon di cetra, 
 o di vivola. (Dav. Stor. ) 
 
 11 medico COMINCIO A CHIEDE- 
 RE'PERDONO. (Bocc. g. 8. n. 9.) 
 
 EG LI E defbrme di cdrpo, 
 
 TO A VEDERE. (Vai'Ch.) 
 
 O qUANTO M* ERA CIO 
 AD UD1RE ! (BOCC.) 
 
 To know how to abstain from 
 what pleases, when that which 
 pleases is injurious, is true vir- 
 tue. 
 
 The woman, seeing that to 
 pray was useless, had recourse to 
 threats, 
 
 It pleases me to tell'you'a story. 
 
 It has* occurred to my mind to 
 show to you, in the story which I 
 am to tell you, 
 
 Now it belongs to me to speak. 
 
 He likes better to be awakened 
 by the sound of trumpets, and the 
 noise of arms, than by the sound 
 of citherns or viols. 
 
 The physician began to ask 
 pardon. 
 
 He is deformed in his person, 
 and ugly to look at. 
 
 O how pleasing it was to me to 
 hear this ! 
 
VERBS. 
 
 525 
 
 CHI NOL CREDE, VENGA EGLi Let him, who does not believe 
 A YEDEKLA. (Petr. s. 210.) it, come and see her himself. 
 
 Crcd6ndo costui tssere un gran 
 barbassoroj PER MOSTRARE DI 
 
 AVERE A GRADO LA stJA VENUTA, 
 
 una gran coppa dordta, la qudle 
 davdnti avtva, comandd, die fos- 
 se empiiita di vino, e portdta al 
 gentiluomo, (Bocc. g. 10. n. 9.) 
 
 Domenico fu detto, ed io ne 
 pdrlo, Siccome delt,' AGRICOLA, 
 CHE CRISTO ELESSE ALL* OR- 
 TO suo PER AIUTARLO. (Dant. 
 Par. 12.) 
 
 Believing that he was a great 
 man, to show how agreeable his 
 visit was to him, he ordered that 
 a large gilded cup, which he had 
 before him, should be filled up 
 with wine and given to the gentle- 
 man. 
 
 He was called Dominic, and 
 I speak of him, as of the husband- 
 man whom Christ chose to be his 
 helpmate in his own garden. 
 
 EXERCISE XXXIII. 
 
 Would to Heaven I that my fortune would allow me 
 Fdccia il Citlo \ fortuna ddre 
 
 They came in sight 
 
 to I put them in execution. 
 di I mitttre opera. 
 
 of (saw themselves near to) a small-castle I from I 
 
 vedere memo castello \ di 
 
 which, having been seen, 
 , vedtre, 
 
 about I twelve men suddenly 
 da 3 ; 4 fdnte 5 subito 1 
 
 rushed out upon them. Finally, no (not any) virtue 
 
 uscire* . finalmente* Ne l 5 virtu* 
 
 can be found 
 si trova 2 
 
 finalmentfp 
 
 in those, who have given themselves 
 issere dare 
 
 up 1 to gluttony. 
 inpreda \ gola. 
 
 Oh ! how true these things 
 come vero cdsa 
 
 It was the castle of one of the family of the 
 cast^llo 
 
 Orsini, and by 
 , per 
 
 his) was there. 
 
 good fortune 
 ventura 
 
 his lady (a lady of 
 
 Words 
 Parola 
 
 are not necessary 
 non bisOgnano 
 
 in this 
 
526 SYNTAX. 
 
 business (here). The mother said : " (O my) daughter, 
 
 mddre Dire: " fiaHLtu&a.. 
 
 what warm I are you talking about ? " 
 cdldo I fa egli?" 
 
 The father, 
 padre, 
 
 on account of 
 per 
 
 the love (that) he bore 
 amore portdre 
 
 her, took no care (gave himself little care) I to I 
 
 , dare 3 poco 1 cura 2 \ di* \ 
 
 marry her again, and it seemed not modest (thing) I in I 
 maritdre 6 piii 5 , pardre 12 ne 7 ontsto 10 cosa 11 \ a 8 \ 
 
 her I to ask it (of him). Who was a very young 
 9 I il 13 richiedere 1 * . assdi giovane 
 
 and handsome I man I . And he saw a knight 
 bello [ delta persona \ . l vedere* 6 cavalier 7 
 
 dressed in black following (to come after) her. But 
 
 bruno* venire 5 di6tro-a 2 3 . 
 
 the knight who saw this cried I from afar I to him. 
 cavalier e vedtre 2 l griddre \ di lontdno \ 
 
 The following daj the Saladin caused a most beautiful 
 seguente di 2 3 fdre 1 9 bello 10 
 
 and rich bed I to be put up I in a large hall. 
 11 ricco 12 Utto I fdre* \ 5 6 gran 7 sdla*. 
 
 Yesterday at I this hour we were in Mugello. He 
 
 leri 
 
 a 6ra 
 
 was one of those men, who are more attached to liberty, 
 
 iLOrnn. 3 1 nfFp.rA.mnhicP' lihp.rtfi.. 
 
 liberta, 
 
 than to life. Three months ago there was a conflagration. 
 vita. ntese fa incendio. 
 
 A noisy event happened this year. Ferondo was 
 strepitoso 2 avvenimento 1 accadere anno. 2 Essere 1 
 
 quite pale. 
 tutto pdllido. 
 
 To-morrow will be a holy-day. If thou wilt touch 
 Domdni festa. toccdre 
 
 her with this I written paper 
 scritta, 
 
 she will follow thee 
 venir di^tro 
 
VERBS. 527 
 
 immediately. He said he was perfidious and vile. He 
 incontanente. Dire pdrfido vile. 
 
 took a leap, and threw himself down from the other 
 Prdndere sdlto, gittdre 
 
 side. He thought that I this man I was such as 
 pdrte. Pensdre j costui \ dovere essere 
 
 the wickedness of the Burgundians required (it). From 
 malvagitd Borgognone rickiedere 
 
 these 1 it was heard I in the neighbouring fields, that 
 I si seppe memo cdmpo, 
 
 Terni was guarded by four-hundred horsemen. If he 
 guarddre quattrocento cavdllo. 
 
 thinks that the republic needs (has need) that the 
 
 credere repubblica bisogno 
 
 senators should speak freely, why does he enter into so 
 senatore parldre libero, entrdre 
 
 trifling details ? Do not make a noise. . She saw 
 debole 3 cosa 1 ? fare strepito. conoscere* 
 
 clearly that her vision had-been true. She, who was 
 Manifesto 1 5 visione 6 3 vero*. , 
 
 not a physician, believed without any doubt, that he was 
 2 m6dica\ credere* * , 5 fdllo*, 7 
 
 dead. Do not flatter thyself. 
 morto. lusingdre 
 
 Come into the house, for I believe (that) it is 
 Venire cdsa, credere 
 
 1 better I that she should not see thee. What dost 
 I bene \ vedere 
 
 thou wish that I should say to her, if I should happen 
 vottre dire , 
 
 to (it happens that I should) speak to her ? He 
 
 avventre favelldre 
 
 asked him what had become of the other leg of "the 
 Domanddre divenire coscia 
 
 crane. He was disposed I to I go wherever she 
 grit. disponere \ di \ anddre dovunque 
 
528 SYNTAX. 
 
 pleased (it was agreeable to her). I never should 
 
 a grddo . 
 
 have believed, that he would act so (was capable of 
 
 credere, capdce 
 
 doing this). Who would have been the one (that), 
 
 far . , 
 
 that would not have (set himself to) run-away. 
 
 essere mettere fuggire. 
 
 The king having ordered. Setting fire 
 re erdindre. Jlppiccare 
 
 to 
 per 
 
 every place. I met them riding post. That day 
 luogo. Incontrdre cdrrere pdsta. giorno 
 
 having passed. Having done writing. When she 
 passdre. finire scnvere. 
 
 began to sing. 
 comincidre cantdre. 
 
 He forbids him to produce the proofs of his 
 vietdre produrre pruova 
 
 innocence. I am very glad to see you (I re- 
 
 innocenza. ral- 
 
 joice myself much at seeing you). It is a crime in 
 legrdre . vedere . delitto 
 
 Tyre to have a great fortune.* It begins to rain. 
 Tiro gran bene. Comincidre piovere. 
 
 I beseech you to grant me that favor. If it was 
 pregdre accorddre favore. 
 
 a fault to leave thee, behold I make amends for 
 colpa latcidre , ecco 
 
 it (I amend it). He likes to play- I did 
 
 ammenddre . amdre giuocdre. fare 
 
 so (it) to oblige you. She speaks thus to 
 
 obbligdre . Parldre 
 
 vex me. 
 
 tormentdre 
 
 * Fortune, in the plural. 
 
PARTICIPLES. 
 
 529 
 
 CHAPTER VIII. 
 
 PARTICIPLES, AND USE AND POSITION OF CERTAIN 
 ADVERBS. 
 
 AGREEMENT OF PARTICIPLES. 
 
 IT has already been observed (p. 344) that participles 
 in Italian are considered and often used as adjectives, 
 and that, when so used, (pp. 345, 411) they agree with 
 substantives in gender and number. 
 
 This is always the case with present-participles, which 
 constantly agree in gender and number with their sub- 
 ject ; as, 
 
 a ship carrying men tempest- 
 tossed, endangered, and sub- 
 ject to so many storms ; 
 
 una navE PORTANTE uomi- 
 
 ni TEMPESTANTI, PERICO- 
 LANTI, SOGGIACENTI a tdn- 
 
 ti marosi, 
 
 presente dgli 6cchi sudi 1^1 
 GRID ANTE merce" svendro- 
 no, 
 
 alh donnv ASPETTANTI si ri- 
 volse, e disse, 
 
 before his eyes they slew her 
 [who was] crying out for 
 mercy ; 
 
 he addressed himself to the la- 
 dies [who were] waiting, and 
 said. 
 
 By a peculiarity of language, and in imitation of the 
 ablative absolute of the Latin, we often find in good 
 writers a present participle with its noun or pronoun, 
 independent of any verb, and standing, as it were, alone 
 in a discourse ; as, 
 
 quando, SOPRAVVEGNENTE when, night coming on, there 
 
 LA NOTTE, surse un tempo came very severe and tem- 
 
 Jierissimo etempestoso, pestuous weather; 
 
 Cesare parlo asseltatamente, Cesar spoke much to the point, 
 
 Ndi, delta vita e [whilst] we [were] hearing 
 
 delta morte, 
 
 45 
 
 him, about life and death. 
 
530 
 
 SYNTAX. 
 
 With regard to the agreement of past-participles, the 
 following are the most sure rules : 
 
 When the past-participle is joined to the verb essere, 
 6 to be ' ; or to such verbs as venire, restare or rima- 
 nere, vedersi, &;c., used in the signification of ' to be ' ; 
 it is to agree with the subject of the verb, with which it 
 is joined, in gender and number ; as, 
 
 issi iran di frondi di qutr- they were garlanded with oak- 
 
 
 IJVGHIRLANDATI, 
 
 leaves ; 
 
 nb ERANO /E fdltE de' Vitel- nor were the faults of Vitel- 
 
 lius' troops punished, but 
 well paid ; 
 
 whilst it [the language] is not 
 adopted by celebrated wri- 
 ters ; 
 
 lidni PUNITE, ma ben PA- 
 GATE, 
 
 mentre ch? ELLA [/A lingua] 
 ] 
 
 non VENGA [for, non SIA 
 USATA dafamosi scritteri, 
 proccurero che [EGLI] RESTI I shall endeavour that he may 
 [for, sii] IMPIEGATO in be employed in this city ; 
 questa citia^ 
 
 EGLI RIMASE [for, FU] MA- he was astonished ; 
 
 RAVIGLIATO, 
 
 U gidvanE infelicE si VIDE the unhappy youth was soon 
 [for, FU] tosto TRATTO in taken to prison. 
 prigione, 
 
 But when the past-participle is joined to the verb 
 avere, ' to have ' ; if this verb is used, instead of 
 essere, in the signification of ' to be ' ; or is used in the 1 
 signification of ' to hold,' ' to possess ' ; &c., as an ac- 
 tive and notf an auxiliary verb ; the participle agrees 
 with the object of the verb in gender and number; as, 
 
 per non poterti vedtre C A- thou wouldst have torn out thy 
 VRESTI [for, ti SARESTI] eyes, not to see thyself ; 
 
 CAVATI gll OCchlj 
 
 s' AVEA [for, 5' ERA] BIESSE he had put some small stones 
 alciinE petruzzE in bocca, in his mouth ; 
 
 uno che FORATA AVEA [for, one who had his throat pierc- 
 TENEA, POSSEDEA] /A g"d/A, ed ; 
 
AGREEMENT OF PARTICIPLES. 
 
 531 
 
 I have a mind so accus- 
 tomed to contemplate this 
 lady alone ; 
 
 although they had unsheathed 
 their swords ; 
 
 I did not hear these things 
 from the neighbours ; 
 
 the moon had lost her rays. 
 
 HO [for, TENGO] si AVVEZZA 
 /A mentE a contempldr so- 
 la costei, 
 
 benche AVESSERO [for, TE- 
 
 NESSERO] IE SpadE IGGUAI- 
 NATE, 
 
 won HO quests COSE 
 
 da* vicini, 
 AVEA la luna 
 
 suoi rdggi, 
 
 If the verb avere, to which the past-participle is joined, 
 is used as an auxiliary verb, in order to represent the 
 idea of past time, which could be equally expressed by a 
 single form of the verb, which the participle belongs to ; 
 then this participle remains invariable; as, 
 
 come 10 AVR6 DATO [or, DA- 
 RO] loro ogni cosa, 
 
 CERCATO HO [or, CERCAl] 
 
 sempre solitdria via, 
 
 w' HA DIMOSTRATO [or, mi 
 
 DIMOSTR6] la cagione del 
 
 tuo male, 
 chi queste c6se HA MANIFE- 
 
 STATO [or, MANIFESTO] al 
 
 maestro ? 
 
 When the past-participle is preceded by one of the 
 pronouns mi, ti, ci, vi, si, il, lo, la, li, gli, le, ne, che, 
 cui, quale, quali, quanti, as objects of the verb, the parti- 
 ciple agrees with the pronouns, or the objects represented 
 by them, in gender and number; as, 
 
 ella medesima me le ha DET- she herself has told them to 
 
 TE [or, mi ha DSTTE QUE- me ; 
 
 STE COSE], 
 
 il liberto diceva averm esso the freed-man said that he had 
 
 uccisA [or, avere esso uc- killed her himself; 
 
 CiSA LA D6NNA], 
 
 as soon as I shall have given 
 to them every thing ; 
 
 I have always sought a solitary 
 way; 
 
 he has manifested to me the 
 cause of thy evil; 
 
 who has told these things to 
 the master ? 
 
532 
 
 SYNTAX. 
 
 tu ci hai oggi tdnto DILITI- 
 CATE [or, hdi DILITICATE 
 
 NOl], 
 
 la quote io raccontero per 
 fdrvi ACcdRTE [or, fare 
 
 ACC6RTE VOl], 
 
 si f& ddre V dcqu, CHE il dl 
 davdnti aveva FATTA, 
 
 vedendo cosl fdttA. ddnnA, e 
 ctfi egli cotdnto AMATA 
 avea, 
 
 h ddnm, LI QUALI tu hdi 
 per me, 
 
 thou hast delighted us so much 
 to-day ; 
 
 which I will relate to show 
 you; 
 
 she caused the water to be 
 given to her, which she had 
 prepared the day before ; 
 
 seeing such a lady, and one 
 whom he had loved so 
 much ; 
 
 the evils which thou hast sus- 
 tained on my account. 
 
 The participle, however, remains invariable if it is 
 accompanied by an infinitive, and the abovementioned 
 pronouns are the objects of this infinitive ; as, 
 
 le cose che gia aveva UDITO 
 DIRE, che erano intervenute, 
 
 tiitti v* avrh F^TTO MORIRE, 
 
 la ddnna, la qudle il lungo 
 vagheggidre non aveva PO- 
 TATO MUOVERE, 
 
 the things which he had heard 
 of as having happened ; 
 
 he will have put you all to 
 death ; 
 
 the lady, whom his long admi- 
 ration had not been able to 
 move. 
 
 Finally, past-participles may be used, like present- 
 participles, absolutely ; the gerund of the verb essere, or 
 avere, being generally understood ; and then, if the 
 gerund understood is essendo, they agree with the sub- 
 ject, and if avendo, with the object of the proposition ; 
 
 as, 
 
 IL famiglidrv GIT^NTO [for, 
 
 ESSENDO GltflNTO], 6 DATE 
 
 [for, AVENDO DATE] ZE 
 ei/erE, e FATTA [for, A- 
 VEJSDO FATTA] F cmbascid- 
 t A, fu con gran festa rice- 
 vuto, 
 
 the domestic having arrived, 
 arid having consigned the 
 the letters and delivered the 
 message, was received with 
 great joy. 
 
AGREEMENT OF PARTICIPLES. 
 
 533 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 UNA NAVE PORTANTE UOMINI 
 TEMPE8TANTI, PERICOLANTI, SOG- 
 GIACENTI A TANTI MAROSI. (GIOV. 
 Fill. 11. 8.) 
 
 PRESE"NTE AGLI OCCHI suoi 
 
 LEI GRIDANTE MERCZ 6 CLluto 
 SVENARONO. (BOCC. g. 4. D. 4.) 
 
 ALLE DONNE ASPETTANTI sr 
 
 R1VOLSE, E DfsSE. (BOCC. g. 9. 
 
 n. 10.) 
 
 QuANDO, SOPRAVVEGNENTE LA 
 
 NOTTE, con 6ssa insieme SURSE 
 
 UN TEMPO FIERISSIMO E TEMPE- 
 
 STOSO. (Bocc. g. 5. n. 1.) 
 
 CESARE PARLO bello e ASSET- 
 
 TATAMENTE, UDENTI NOI, BELLA 
 VITA E BELLA MORTE, qudndo 
 
 disse (Brun. Tes, 8. 34.) 
 
 ESSI ERAN tutti BI FRONDI 
 QUERCIA 1NGHIRLANDATI. (BOCC. 
 
 g. 9. n. 1.) 
 
 NE .iRANO LE FALTE D^' Vl- 
 
 TELLIAJVI PUN!TE, MA BEN PA- 
 GATE. (Dav. Stor. 3.) 
 
 Ma siasi una LINGUA nobile, 
 p6co le gioverh MNTRE CH J ELLA 
 
 NON VENGA USATA DA FAMOSI 
 
 SCRITTORI. (Buom.) 
 
 Se non mi sara licito di spo- 
 sdrloj PROCCURERO almeno CHE 
 
 RESTI IMPIEGATO IN QUEST A CIT- 
 TA. (Gold. AVV.) 
 
 EGLI ^RIMASE MARAVIGLIATO 
 
 dblla brutta invenzione. (Boccal.) 
 
 E IL GIOVANE INFELICE SI 
 
 viDE T6sTo da una squddra di 
 satdlliti CIRCONDATO e TRATTO 
 IN PRIGIONE. (Soav. Nov.) 
 
 45* 
 
 A ship carrying men tempest- 
 tossed, endangered, and subject to 
 so many storms. 
 
 Before his eyes they slew her 
 [who was] crying out for mercy 
 and assistance. 
 
 He addressed himself to the 
 ladies who were waiting, and said. 
 
 " When, night coming on, there 
 came with it very severe and tem- 
 pestuous weather. 
 
 Caesar spoke finely and much 
 to the point, we hearing him, 
 about life and death, when he 
 said 
 
 They were all garlanded with 
 oak-leaves. 
 
 Nor were the faults of Vitellius' 
 troops punished, but well paid. 
 
 But however noble a language 
 may be, this will be of little use to 
 it, whilst it is Dot adopted by cele- 
 brated writers. 
 
 If I am not allowed to marry 
 him, 1 shall at least endeavour 
 that he may be employed in this 
 city. 
 
 He was astonished at the bad 
 invention. 
 
 And the unhappy youth was 
 soon surrounded by a band of 
 satellites and taken to prison. 
 
534 
 
 SYNTAX. 
 
 
 Di te stessa vergogndndoti, 
 
 PER NON POTERTI VEDERE, T* 
 AVRESTI CAVATI GLI OOCHI. 
 
 (Bocc. g. 8. n. 7.) 
 
 M6sser lo geloso s 5 AVEA MESSE 
 
 ALCUNE PETRUZZE IN BOCCA. 
 
 (Bocc. g. 7. n. 5.) 
 
 UN dltro CHE FORATA AVEA LA 
 
 GOLA. (Dant. Inf. 28.) 
 
 Lassdi qul, ch' ' piu brdmo : 
 ed HO si AVVEZZA LA MENTE 
 
 A CONTEMPLAR SOld COStei, Ck* 
 
 dltro non v6de (Petr. s. 80.) 
 
 BENCHE tglino AVESSERO gift 
 LE SPADE ISGUAINATE e ttiendte. 
 (Amm. Ant 11. 1. 12.) 
 
 fo NON HO QUESTE COSE SA- 
 PUTE DA* VICINI ; ELLA MEDESI- 
 
 MA, forte di te dolendosi, ME LE 
 
 HA DETTE. (BOCC. g. 3. D. 3.) 
 
 AVA LA LTJNA, ess6ndo nel 
 mizzo del ciilo, PERDTJTI i RAG- 
 GI suoi. (Bocc. g. 6. Intr.) 
 
 COME io AVRO LORO OGNI COSA 
 DATO. (Bocc. g. 2. n. 3.) 
 
 CERCATO HO SEMPRE SOLITA- 
 RIA VIA Per fuggir quesV in- 
 gdgni sordi e loschi. (Petr. s 
 222.) 
 
 Domeneddio M' HA DIMOSTRA- 
 
 TO LA CAGIONE DEL TtJO MALE. 
 
 (Bocc. g. 5. n. 4.) 
 ;Cm dltri c/<e tu, HA QUESTE 
 
 COSE MANIFEST ATO AL MAESTRO ? 
 
 (Bocc. g. 8. n. 8.) 
 
 iL LIBERTO DICEVA AVERLA 
 
 Esso UCCISA, e^vendicdta V in- 
 giuria del padron suo. (Dav.) 
 
 Se tu ieri f ci affliggsti,TU ci 
 
 HAI OGGI TANTO DILITICATE cJl 
 
 niuna di te si dee rammaricdre. 
 (Bocc. g. 5. n. 5.) 
 
 Being ashamed of thyself, thou 
 wouldst have torn out thy eyes, 
 not to see thyself. 
 
 * 
 
 The jealous man had put some 
 small stones in his mouth. 
 
 Another who had his throat 
 pierced. 
 
 I have forgotten what I most 
 desire : and my mind is so ac- 
 customed to contemplate this lady 
 alone, that it perceives nothing 
 else. 
 
 Although they had unsheathed 
 and used their swords. 
 
 I did not hear these things 
 from the neighbours ; she herself, 
 complaining bitterly of thee, has 
 told them to me. 
 
 The moon, although in the 
 middle of heaven, had lost her 
 rays. 
 
 As I shall have given to them 
 every thing. 
 
 I have always sought a solitary 
 way, iu order to avoid these deaf 
 and blind minds. 
 
 God has manifested to me the 
 cause of thy evil. 
 
 Who else but thou has told 
 these things to the master ? 
 
 The freed- man said that he had 
 killed her himself, and thus aveng- 
 ed the offence done to his master. 
 
 If thou didst afflict us yesterday, 
 thou hast delighted us so much 
 to-day that none of us can com- 
 plain of thee. 
 
USE AND POSITION OP ADVERBS. 
 
 535 
 
 LA QUALE, piacev6li donne, 10 
 
 RACCONTERO PER FARVI ACCORTE 
 
 ..... (Bocc. g. 3. n. 3.) 
 
 E questo detto, si FE* D^RE 
 V orciuoUtto, net qudle era L' AC- 
 
 QUA, CHE IL Dl DAVANTI AVEVA 
 
 FATTA, e tutta la bvve. (Bocc. 
 g. 4. n. 1.) 
 
 11 qudle cosi FATTA DONNA, 
 
 E Ctfl EGLI COTANTO AMATA 
 
 AVEA, per moglie VEDANDOSZ. 
 (Bocc. g. 5. n. 9.) 
 
 To sono venuta a ristordrti d6' 
 
 DANNI, LI QUALI TU HAI gt'A 
 AVtJTI PER ME. (BOCC. g. 5. D. 9.) 
 
 LE COSE CHE GlA AVEVA TJDfTO 
 
 D!RE, CHE di notte ERANO INTER- 
 VENT^TE, (Bocc. g. 9. n. 1.) 
 
 Dunque, un uom solo Si 
 partira, che non V am tie offeso, 
 Qudndo TT^TTI v* AVR^. FAT- 
 TO MORIRE ? (Ariost. Fur. 17. 8.) 
 
 LA DONNA, LA QUALE IL 
 
 GO VAGHEGGIARE, /' armeggidre, 
 le mattindte MUOVERE NON AVE- 
 VANO POTATO, mossero le affet- 
 tuose parole. (Bocc. g. 5. n. 9.) 
 
 GitjNTO adunque IL FAMIGLIA- 
 RE a Genovaj E DA'TE LE LET- 
 TERE, E FA'TTA L* AMBASCIA'TA, 
 FU ddlla donna CON GRAN FESTA 
 RicEVtiTO. (Bocc. g. 2. n. 9.) 
 
 Which, kind ladies, 1 will re- 
 late to show you 
 
 And, having said this, she caus- 
 ed the vessel of water to be given 
 to her, which she had prepared the 
 day before, and drank it all off. 
 
 Who seeing himself united in 
 marriage with such a lady, and one 
 whom he had loved so much. 
 
 I am come to make thee amends 
 for the injuries thou hast sustained 
 on my account. 
 
 The things which he had heard 
 of as having happened by night. 
 
 Then, shall a single man depart 
 from hence, when he will have put 
 all of you to death, without having 
 been at all hurt by you ? 
 
 The lady, whom his long admi- 
 ration, tournaments, serenades, 
 were not able to move, was mov- 
 ed by his tender words. 
 
 The domestic, having arrived at 
 Genoa, and having consigned the 
 letters and delivered the message, 
 was received by the lady with 
 great joy. 
 
 USE AND POSITION OF CERTAIN ADVERBS. 
 
 Adverbs, as we mentioned at pp. 391, 394, may be 
 put before or after the verb ; they may be put, also, 
 between the auxiliary and the participle, and between 
 two participles ; as, 
 
 tu SAI BENE come io s6no thou knowest well how I am 
 agidto, situated ; 
 
536 SYNTAX. 
 
 PRESTAMENTE s' AWENTA'- quickly [a wolf] seized her by 
 VA alia gola di costei, the throat ; 
 
 non HO mdi POSCIA POTATO I could sleep no longer after 
 dormire, that ; 
 
 era STA'TA MdLTo MA'LE she had been very badly ad- 
 
 CONSIGLU/TA, vised. 
 
 The adverb non, l no or not' ; is always put before 
 the verb ; as, 
 
 NON FARNETICO, madonna, I do not rave, Madam ; 
 NON v' ACCORGETE che uoi do you not perceive that we 
 Mm vermi ? are worms. 
 
 When the adverb non is employed to deny several 
 objects, and these precede the verb, the adverb is put 
 before the nouns, and not before the verb ; as, 
 
 NON PIOGGIA, NON GRA X NDO, neither rain, nor hail, nor snow, 
 NON NEVE, NON RUGIA'DA, nor dew, nor frost falls a- 
 NON BRiNA piu su cdde, bove. 
 
 The adverb mai, which in itself strictly means ' at any 
 time,' may be put either before or after the verb ; 
 when, however, it is put before, it takes the signification 
 of never, and when after, it takes that of ever ; as, 
 
 ti priego die MA'I Dicni I beseech thee never to tell, 
 d* avermi veduta, that thou hast seen me ; 
 
 i Ptrugini MA'I si VOLLERO the Perugians never wished to 
 dichindre ad alcun accordo, condescend to come to any 
 
 agreement ; 
 
 qudi bdrbare FUR MA'I ! what barbarians were ever ! 
 
 U cielo e oggi cosl hello come the sky is as beautiful to-day 
 FU MA X I, as ever it was. 
 
 The adverbs non mai, ' not ever,' ' never ' ; occurring 
 in the same phrase, are generally separated by the verb ; 
 and then non, c no or not ' ; always precedes, and mai, 
 6 ever ' ; always follows that verb ; as, 
 
 io NON mdngio MA'I, I never eat ; 
 
 V drti NON istetter MA'I peg- the arts never fared worse ; 
 ' 
 
USE AND POSITION OF ADVERBS. 
 
 537 
 
 NON SPERAR di vedermi in never hope to see me again on 
 terra MAI, earth. 
 
 But they may be used, also, united ; and then, if mai 
 precedes non, they are to be put both before the verb ; 
 if it follows non, they may be put after it ; as, 
 
 io MAI NON odRMOj I never sleep ; 
 
 che ferro MAI NON STRINGE, who never knew how to use 
 
 arms; 
 giurogli di MAI NON DIRLO, she swore to him never to tell 
 
 it; 
 
 amid fedeti POSSON DIVEN- they can, indeed, become faith- 
 TAR bene, sudditi NON ful friends, but subjects nev- 
 MAI, er. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Pinuccio, TU sXi BENE COME 
 io SONO AGIATO. (Bocc. g. 9. n. 
 6.) 
 
 II qildle PRESTAME'NTE 8* AV- 
 YENTAVA ALLA GOLA DI COSTEI. 
 
 (Bocc. g. 9. n. 7.) 
 
 J'O NON HO M^I POSCIA POTATO 
 DORM1RE. (BOCC. g. 9. n. 6.) 
 
 E Ck 9 el? ERA STATA MOLTO 
 MALE CONSIGLIATA. (BoCC.) 
 
 Disse allora Pirro : " Now 
 
 FARNETICO, no, MADONNA." 
 
 (Bocc. g. 7. n. 9.) 
 
 NOI^V' ACCORGETE v6l, CHE 
 
 NOI si AM VRMI, Ndti a for- 
 mar V angelica forfalla. (Dant. 
 Purg. 10.) 
 
 Perchb INTON PIOGGIA, NON 
 
 GRANDO, NON NEVE,~NoN RU- 
 GIADA, NON BRIJVA PIU 3U CADE, 
 
 Che la scaletta de 1 tre grddi 
 breve. (Dant. Purg. 21.) 
 
 Ti PRIEGO CHE MAI ad alcuna 
 persdna DICHI D* AVERMI VEDT^- 
 TA. (Bocc. g. 2. n. 7.) 
 
 Pinuccio, thou knowest well 
 how I am situated. 
 
 Which [wolf] quickly seized her 
 by the throat. 
 
 I could sleep no longer after 
 that. 
 
 And that she had been very 
 badly advised. 
 
 Then Pyrrhus said : " I do not 
 rave, Madam, no." 
 
 Do you not perceive, that we 
 are worms, made to form the 
 winged insect imped with angel 
 plumes. 
 
 Because neither rain, nor hail, 
 nor snow, nor dew, nor frost, ever 
 falls above that short ladder of 
 three steps. 
 
 I beseech thee never to tell to 
 any ono that thou hast seen me. 
 
538 
 
 SYNTAX. 
 
 I PERUGINI, per loro alterigia, 
 
 MAI VOLLERO DICHINA.RE AD AL- 
 
 CUN ACCORDO. (Matt. Vill. 8. 39.) 
 
 QUAI BARBARE FUR MAI, 
 
 Saracme ! (Dant. Purg. 23.) 
 
 COSI Z OGGI BELLO IL CIELO 
 COME FU MAI. (BOCC. g. 6. D. 10.) 
 
 Se tu digiuni, io NOJV MANGIO 
 Mix ; se tu vegghi, io MAI NON 
 DORMO. (Passav.) 
 
 In quisle mezzo, L' ARTI e la 
 mercanzia NON ISTETTER MAI 
 PEGGIO in Fir6nze. (Giov. Vill. 
 9. 12.) 
 
 NON SPERAR DI VEDERM1 IN 
 
 TERRA MAI. (Petr. s. 212.) 
 
 Popolo ignudo, pavdntoso, e 
 Unto, CHE FERRO MAI NON 
 STRINGE. (Petr. c. 5.) 
 
 E GIUROGLI DI MAI NON DIRLO. 
 
 (Bocc. g. 3. n. 6.) 
 
 AMICI FEDEL.I POSSON DIVEN- 
 
 TAR BENE gli Jlmericani agV In- 
 
 fldSl, SUDDITI NON MAI. (Bott. 
 ton Amer. 1. 6.) 
 
 The Perugians, through pride, 
 never wished to condescend to 
 come to any agreement. 
 
 What barbarians, what Saracens 
 were ever ! 
 
 The sky is as beautiful to-day 
 as ever it was. 
 
 If thou fastest, I never eat; if 
 thou art watching, I never sleep. 
 
 During this time, the arts and 
 commerce never fared worse in 
 Florence. 
 
 Never hope to see me again on 
 earth. 
 
 A race poor, fearful, and indo- 
 lent, who never knew how to use 
 arms. 
 
 And she swore to him never to 
 tell it. 
 
 The Americans can indeed be- 
 come the faithful friends of the 
 English, but subjects never. 
 
 EXERCISE XXXIV. 
 
 After he had spent some (of his) time I to con- 
 Poichi 4 ponere 5 alqudnto 1 2 t6mpo 3 \ in 6 dovdr 7 
 
 sole I her weeping. To him, then residing in 
 
 racconsoldre \ 8 pidngere 9 . , dimordre 
 
 Ireland, came the desire of hearing. (The) rivers 
 Irldnda, venire voglia sentire. TWO 
 
 of (the) blood extinguished the rising flame. Happy, 
 sdngue estinguere 4 l ndscere* fidmrna?. Felice, 
 
 and fortunate, and enjoying I for ever I the fruit 
 fortundto, godere 4 \ in 1 ogni 2 ttmpo 3 \ 
 
USE AND POSITION OF ADVERBS. 539 
 
 of their love. You* are not the first, nor will you be 
 amore. primo, 
 
 the last, that is imposed upon. I know not whether 
 ultimo, inganndre. sapere se 
 
 thou hast ^ minded I how close wef are kept. 
 
 C hdi posto in mente \ stretto 3 l tenere*. 
 
 They having arrived at the city, went | with 
 
 Esso* l pervenire 6 3 4 cittd b , ne anddrono 13 \ 7 
 
 Mr. Torello to his house,:): where fifty of the 
 Messtr* 9 cdsa 1 *, cinqudnta 
 
 principal citizens were come to receive them. The 
 maggiore cittadino venire ricevere 
 
 message which I have given to him I to I deliver 
 commessione dare \ di \ riferire 
 
 to the king. Thou knowest what is the offence, 
 re. sapere ingiuria, 
 
 which thou hast given me. Master, I have seen 
 fdre . Maestro, vedtrc 
 
 a thing which troubles me. One who had 
 cosa dispiacere. 
 
 the one, and the other hand cut off. Each one of 
 uno, dltro man mozzdre. 
 
 them had her right breast cut off, I in order to I 
 i _ diritto 3 mammilla^ taglidre*, \ per 
 
 carry 
 portare 
 
 j the shield 
 I lo scudo 
 
 in I battles. They|| are 
 alia I battdglia. 
 
 handsomer than the painted angels, which you have 
 bello dipmto 2 dgnoli 1 , 
 
 oflen-tirnes shown me. ThoulF hast been with that 
 piit volte mostrdre co ~ 
 
 lady, whom thou hast deceived. 
 Ui, inganndre. 
 
 I have caused the greater part of my possessions to- 
 j are 2 maggior 3 pdrte 4 8 6 possessione* ven- 
 
 * You, feminine gender. t We, feminine. 
 
 J House, in the plural. $ Each one, in the feminine. 
 
 || They, feminine. * Thou, feminine. 
 
540 SYNTAX. 
 
 be-sold. They were glad that they had (of having) 
 
 dere 1 . Rimanere content o 
 
 successfully (with success) known how to mock the 
 
 successo , sapere schernire 
 
 avarice of Calandrino. I No sooner 
 avarizia . | Ne prima 
 
 had she entered (into) 
 entrdre* l 
 
 the room, than the (beating of the arteries the) pulse 
 
 2 camera 3 , che battimento polso 
 
 returned to the youth ; and having left it (she hav- 
 
 ritorndre giovane ; 
 
 ing departed), it [the pulse] left him also (it ceased). 
 
 partire, cessdre. 
 
 Is not this the land, which I first 
 terren t pria 
 
 trod with 
 toe- 
 
 my feet I ? Ciacco replied : " Thou knowest very 
 care \ 1 2 Risp6ndere l : " sapere 
 
 well, that I shall come." Who quickly opened 
 bene y venire" prestamente aprire 
 
 the door. The Devil said once to St, Macarius : 
 pdrta. Diavdlo dire una volta San Macdrio : 
 
 " If thou art always watching (watchest), I never 
 
 " vegliare, 
 
 sleep ; if thou I usest all thy efforts I in thy works 
 dormire ; ti affatichi 
 
 (working), I never rest (have never rest)." 
 
 operdre, non nidi riposo" 
 
 Did not thy master say, that we should carry 
 padrone dire, portdre 
 
 I home | these things ? Caring (himself) neither 
 a cdsa cosa ? Curare 
 
 for I the palaces, nor I for I the ox, nor 
 ' 
 
 for 1 the 
 di 
 
 horse, nor 
 cavdllo, 
 
 paldgio, \ di \ biie, 
 
 for I the ass, nor I for I the money,* nor 
 
 di \ dsino, \ di \ dendro, 
 
 for I any other thing, which he had seen. 
 di I cosa, 2 vederc 1 . 
 
 * Money t in the plural. 
 
EXPLETIVES. 
 
 541 
 
 CHAPTER IX. 
 EXPLETIVES. 
 
 [Although many of the following words have been already mentioned in treating 
 of the different Parts of Speech, which they respectively belong to, it baa, 
 nevertheless, not been thought altogether useless to present them here once 
 more united in a single chapter.] 
 
 B&LLO : 
 
 IL vostro vestito e BELL' efdtto. 
 (Fir.) 
 
 per BELLA paura gitto le ban- 
 diere del comune. (Cron. 
 Mor.) 
 
 per BELLE scritte di lor mdno 
 s' obbligdrono V uno aW dl- 
 tro. (Bocc, g. 2. n. 9.) 
 
 Your suit of clothes is finished. 
 
 through fear he threw down 
 the standards of the com- 
 monwealth. 
 
 they were bound to each other 
 by fine, obligations written 
 with their own hands. 
 
 BENE, BEN, BE' : 
 
 Gli domanddi, se gli bastdva 
 
 V dnirno di caccidrlo via ; ed 
 
 egli rispose : " Si BENE." 
 
 (Bocc. g. 9. n. 5.) 
 egli e qua un malvdgio uomo, 
 
 che m' ha taglidto la borsa 
 
 con BEN cento fiorini d> oro. 
 
 (Bocc. g. 2. n. 1.) . 
 " BE'," rispos* io, "Messere,par- 
 
 lerem poi ; JVbn fat e qul 
 
 per or questo fracdsso" 
 
 (Bern. Rim.) 
 
 CI: 
 
 Sempre che tu ci viverdi. (Bocc. As long as thou livest. 
 
 g. 6. n. 4.) 
 la donna e Ptrro dicevano : the lady and Pyrrhus said : 
 
 " Noi ci seggidmo." (Bocc. " We will sit down." 
 
 g. 7.n.9.) 
 
 CON: 
 
 Sldssi CON meco. (Petr.) He is with me. 
 
 spero d y avire assdi bu6n tempo I hope I shall have a fine time 
 CON teco. (Bocc. g. 8. n. 10.) 
 46 
 
 I asked him, if he had courage 
 to send him away ; and he 
 answered : " Yes, indeed." 
 
 here is a wicked man, who has 
 cut my purse with full one 
 hundred florins of gold. 
 
 " well, Sir," answered I, " we 
 will speak afterwards ; do 
 not make now such a noise 
 here." 
 
 with thee. 
 
542 SYNTAX. 
 
 ECCO : 
 
 Ed ECCO Pietro chiamo alV And lo Peter called at the door, 
 
 uscio. (Bocc. g. 5. n. 10.) 
 ECCO, Giannotto, a te place here, John, thou wishest that I 
 
 ch? lo divenga Cristidno. should become a Christian. 
 
 (Bocc. g. 2. n. 2.) 
 
 EGLI : 
 
 EGLI e una compassione a ve- It excites pity to see him. 
 
 derlo. (Mach. Com.) 
 
 non ti fa mestieri il dlrlo, il it is not necessary to tell it, 
 
 viso tuofavella EGLI. (Sen.) thy face manifests it. 
 
 ELLA : 
 
 ELLA non andra cosl. (Bocc. It shall not go on so. 
 
 g. 9. n. 5.) 
 
 se non ch> ilia ha in cib voluto except that she wished to show 
 
 mostrdre, ch' ilia t gentile, by this, that she is courte- 
 
 ELLA. (Bocc. Corb, 79.) ous. 
 
 ESSO: 
 
 Andidmo a Roma con ESSO lui. Let us go to Rome with him. 
 (Bocc. g. 2. n. 3.) 
 
 JEsso, as an expletive, is invariable, and may be used equally welf 
 before a masculine and a feminine pronoun, both singular and plural ; 
 as, con esso meco, ' with me ' j con esso teco r ' with thee ' ; con esso 
 lui, *with him'; con essotei, 'with her,' or ^with^you'; con esso 
 noi, ( with us ' j con eso voi, ' with you ' ; con esso loro, l with them/ 
 or ' with you : ' 
 
 fatti alia finestra, e chidmala, e go to the window, and call 
 dV die vfaga a desindre con her, and tell her to come 
 ESSO NOI. (Bocc. g. 8. n. 8.) and dine with us. 
 
 GIA: 
 
 Gil D'to non voglia. (Bocc. May God forbid, 
 g. 10. n. 5.) 
 
 non credo lo Gil che ne avete a I do not think you take it ill. 
 male. (Varch.) 
 
 10: 
 
 Che farebbe egli s j lo morlssi, What would he do if I should 
 io ? (Mach. Com.) die ? 
 
EXPLETIVES. ;,i;> 
 
 6gni dltro uo 
 si lodi, io me 
 ddre io. Bo 
 n. 3.) 
 
 . , 
 
 comeche 6gni dltro uomo molto although every other perton 
 di lid si lodi, io mene posso praises him much. I can 
 poco loddre, io. (Bocc. g. 10. praise him but little. 
 
 Mil : 
 
 Una pdrte del mondo e, che There is a part of the world, 
 si gidce MAI stmpre in which lies always frozen. 
 ghidccio. (Petr. c. 5.) 
 
 * come," disse Ferondo, " dbn- " how," said Ferondo, u am I 
 
 que sono io morto ? " Dis- dead, then ? " The Monk 
 
 se il Mfinaco : " MAI si." replied : " Yes indeed." 
 (Bocc. g. 3. n. 8.) 
 
 MI: 
 
 to MI sono un povero pellegri- I am a poor pilgrim. 
 no. (Boce. Filoc. 1. 5.) 
 
 io MI credo che le suore sien I believe that the nuns are all 
 tutte a dormire. (Bocc. g. 3. asleep, 
 n. 1.) 
 
 MICA: 
 
 Son novelle e vere, non son These are true news, they are 
 
 MICA fdvole. (Fir. Trin.) aot fables. 
 
 on MICA idiota ne materidle ; not an idiot nor a vulgar man ; 
 
 ma scienzidto, e di aciito in- but learned, and of an acute 
 
 gegno. (Casa. Gal.) mind. 
 
 NE: 
 
 Chetamente N' ando per la cd- He went tranquilly through the 
 mera insino dtta Jinestra. room to the window. 
 (Bocc. g. 2. n. 7.) 
 
 didnNv l&, e laveremlo spac- let us go there, and we will 
 ciatamente. (Bocc. g. J. n. 5.) wash it immediately. 
 
 NON: 
 
 Temo che voi NON mi abbando- I fear you will abandon me. 
 
 nidte. (Bocc.) 
 la qual modestia dubito che which modesty, I doubt, may 
 
 NON gli sia danndsa. (Tolom. be hurtful to him. 
 
 lett.) 
 
544 SYNTAX. 
 
 6RA : 
 
 Deh ! OR V avessero essi qffogd- Ah ! would that they had 
 to. (Bocc. g. 8. n. 9.) drowned thee. 
 
 ORA che vorrd dir questo ? now what does this mean ? 
 (Bocc. g. 7. n. 8.) 
 
 P6l: 
 
 Non e POI vero qudnto mi di- What you told me is not true. 
 
 ciste. (Bocc.) 
 
 io non mi sono POI risoluto di I have not come to the resolu- 
 
 partir di R6ma. (Car. lett.) tion of leaving Rome. 
 
 PtiNTO : 
 
 Sinza sbigottir PTJNTO. (Bocc.) Without being frightened at all. 
 Teddldo non e PTJNTO morto. Tedaldo is not at all dead. 
 (Bocc. g. 3. n. 7.) 
 
 PURE : 
 
 La cosa andd PUR cost. (Bocc. The affair went off so. 
 
 g. 2. n. 5.) 
 
 fa ptfRE che tu mi mostri qudl do hut show me him whomthou 
 
 tipidce. (Bocc. g. 5. n. 10.) likest. 
 
 Del paldgio s' uscl, e fuggissi He went out of the palace, and 
 a cdsa. (Bocc. g. 2. n. 8.) fled to his house. 
 
 Si e tdnta la benignita, e la So great is the goodness and 
 misericordia di Dio. (Bocc. the mercy of God. 
 g. 1. n. 1.) 
 
 TI : 
 
 I'o non so se tu T' hdi posto I know not, whether thou hast 
 in mtnte. (Bocc. g. 3. n. 1.) minded. 
 
 TU: 
 
 Tu dV tuepar6le,i:u. (Bocc. g. Thou mayest say what thou 
 7. n. I.) pleasest. 
 
ELLIPSIS. .-,45 
 
 TUTTO : 
 
 La donna, udtndo costui par- The woman, hearing this man 
 
 Idre il qudle ilia, credeva speak whom she thought 
 
 mutolo, TTJTTA stordl (Bocc. dumb, was quite amazed, 
 g. 3. n. 1.) 
 
 tiJSO: 
 
 Vuoi tu quell 9 tfw> ? (Bocc.) Dost thou want that one ? 
 
 VI: 
 
 Vol non sapete cib che v6i vi You do not know what you 
 dite. (Bocc. g. 6. n. 6.) say. 
 
 VIA: 
 
 " Va VIA," rispose ; " e cib che tu " Go away," answered he ; " and 
 vuoi, conta." ( Dant. Inf. 32.) relate what thou pleasest." 
 
 CHAPTER X. 
 OF THE ELLIPSIS. 
 
 ELLIPSIS is a figure in grammar, which consists in 
 the omission of one or more words in order to add con- 
 ciseness and elegance to the phrase, without affecting its 
 clearness. This figure is very frequent in Italian, and 
 offers one of the principal difficulties in the grammatical 
 analysis of the Classics. We will here give some exam- 
 ples in which the ellipsis is employed, supplying the 
 words which are omitted, that the learner may familiar- 
 ize himself with similar locutions. 
 
 ELLIPSIS OF THE Substantive: 
 
 Ruppe [la nave] in mdre. He made shipwreck. 
 
 (Crusca.) 
 mi scusdi [d611a colpa] di cib. I exculpated myself from that 
 
 (Class.) fault. 
 
 46* 
 
546 
 
 SYNTAX. 
 
 Jllessdndro muore [per amore] 
 di quella vedova. (Bocc.) 
 
 conoscdndo che quivi non era 
 
 [luogo] da pidngere 
 
 (Bocc.) 
 
 bdstami [la disgrazia] di esse- 
 re stdto schernito una volta. 
 (Bocc.) 
 
 io ci tornerb, e darottene tdnte 
 [busse], ch> io ti farb tristo 
 per tutto il tempo, che tu ci 
 viverdi. (Bocc. g. 4. n. 2.) 
 
 niuno male si fece nella cadu- 
 ta, quantunque alqudnto ca- 
 desse da alto [luogo]. (Bocc. 
 g. 2. n. 5.) 
 
 Alexander dies for that widow. 
 
 knowing that there was no 
 place to weep 
 
 it is enough to have been in- 
 sulted once. 
 
 I will return, and give thee so 
 many blows, that I will make 
 thee sorry as long as thou 
 livest. 
 
 he did not hurt himself in fall- 
 ing, although he fell from 
 a high place. 
 
 ELLIPSIS OF THE Adjective : 
 
 E simpre poi per [buono] da 
 mdlto I' 6bbe, e per amico. 
 (Bocc. g. 6. n. SL) 
 
 fu [abile] da tdnto, e tdnto 
 seppe fare, ch' tgli pacifi- 
 cb il figliuolo col padre. 
 (Bocc. g. 2. n. 3.) 
 
 non suspicb, che cib Guccio 
 BaUna gli avessefdtto, per- 
 ciocche nol conosceva [ca- 
 pace] da tdnto. (Bocc. g. 6. 
 n. 10.) 
 
 il re gli chiamb, e quei, quan- 
 do il videro, tennersi [im- 
 mobili]. (Nov. Ant.) 
 
 And considered him always 
 afterwards as a very good 
 man, and as a friend. 
 
 he was so able, and knew how 
 to do so much, that he re- 
 conciled the son with the 
 father. 
 
 he did not suspect that Guccio 
 Balena had done this to 
 him, because he did not 
 think him capable of so 
 much. 
 
 the king called them, and 
 they, when they saw him, 
 stopped. 
 
 ELLIPSIS OF Relative Pronouns: 
 
 Esaminidmo se delle cose [che 
 si sono] dette ne hafdtto al- 
 cuna. (Mach. Princ.). 
 
 la donna gli fece apprestdre 
 pdnni [i quali erano] stdti 
 del marito. (Bocc. g. 2, n, 2.) 
 
 Let us examine if he has done 
 any of the things which have 
 been said. 
 
 the woman caused clothes to 
 be prepared for him, which 
 had been her husband's. 
 
ELLIPSIS. 
 
 riscontrollo quivi Pet'dio Ce- 
 ridle [il quale e*ra] fugglto 
 dalle gudrdie di Fitellio. 
 (Dav. Stor.) 
 
 there met him Petilius Ceri- 
 alis, who had escaped from 
 the guards of Viteliiua, 
 
 ELLIPSIS OF THE Infinitive or Verbs: 
 [prendere] essi. Go after them. 
 
 And&le per 
 (Bocc.) 
 
 qu\ il sole non vi pub [pene- 
 
 trare]. (Class.) 
 to ira un asindccio che non 
 
 poteva [sostenere] la vita. 
 
 (Firenz.) 
 
 here the sun cannot penetrate. 
 
 I was a great ass that could 
 not endure life. 
 
 ELLIPSIS OF THE Verb IN THE Indicative Mood : 
 
 Tessa, 6di tu qu6l c/i 5 to [odo] ? 
 (Bocc. g. 7. n. 1.) 
 
 questi & il capitdno, gli cdtri 
 [sono] da nulla. (Dav. Stor.) 
 
 ira parinte stretto di Vespa- 
 sidnOj e [era] solddto di con- 
 to. (Dav. Stor.) 
 
 Tessa, do 
 hear? 
 
 you hear what I 
 
 this is the captain, the others 
 are of no account. 
 
 he was a near relation of Ves- 
 pasian, and a good soldier. 
 
 ELLIPSIS OF THE Verb IN THE Conjunctive Mood : 
 
 Qut ha qutsta etna, e non 
 sar6bbe chi [potesse] man- 
 giarla. (Bocc. g. 2. n. 2.) 
 
 avrfa gridato, se non [f6sse 
 stato] che egli mi chttse 
 mercd per Dio, e per v6i. 
 (Bocc. g. 3. n. 3.) 
 
 ah ! ah ! se non [f6sse] cA' to 
 ho reverenza a vdi, p&dre, 
 to dirti pure il bell 3 onore 
 ch> ei mi fa. (Mach. Com.) 
 
 Here is this supper, and there 
 is no one to eat it 
 
 I would have cried out, had 
 it not been that he besought 
 mercy both in the name of 
 God and in your name. 
 
 ah ! ah ! were it not for the 
 respect that I hear to you, 
 father, I would tell the grett 
 honor he does me. 
 
 ELLIPSIS OF THE Gerund : 
 
 [Essendo] durante la guirra. [Being] during the war. 
 
 (Bocc.) 
 
548 
 
 SYNTAX. 
 
 [avendo] veduto il luogo soli- 
 tdrio. (Bocc.) 
 
 [essendo] giunto il famiglidre 
 a Genova, e [avendo] date 
 le lettere, e [avendo] fdtta 
 I 3 ambascidta (Bocc.) 
 
 having seen the solitary place. 
 
 the domestic having arrived at 
 Genoa, and having consign- 
 ed the letter and delivered 
 the message 
 
 ELLIPSIS OF THE Participle : 
 
 Se is si mi caccidsser gli occhi If they should tear out my 
 a die sar& io [ridotto] ? eyes, to what should I be 
 (Bocc. g. 9. n, 1.) reduced ? 
 
 if it had not been for the High 
 Priest, whom curses light 
 
 se non fosse [stato] il Gran 
 Prete, a cui mal prenda. 
 (Dant. Inf. 27.) 
 
 se non fosse [stato] ch' egli 
 era giovane, 6gli avrebbe 
 avuto molto a sostenere. 
 (Bocc. g. 8. n. 7.) 
 
 had he not been a young 
 man, he would have had a 
 great deal to suffer. 
 
 ELLIPSIS OF Adverbs : 
 
 Ora [cosi] fossero essi pur 
 gia disposti a venire, che 
 veramente potremmo dire la 
 fortuna dssere favor eggidn- 
 te. (Bocc. Intr.) 
 
 al mondo non fur nidipersone 
 [talmente] rdtte, JL far 
 lor pro ... Cow 3 io dopo 
 cotdi parole fdtte. (Dant. 
 Inf. 2.) 
 
 Would that they were dispos- 
 ed to come, that we might 
 truly say that fortune is fa- 
 vorable. 
 
 never among men did any with 
 such speed haste to their 
 profit ... as I when these 
 words were spoken. 
 
 ELLIPSIS OF Prepositions: 
 
 In cdsa [di] questi 
 (Bocc.) 
 
 serviva [a] cirti pescalori. 
 
 (Bocc. g. 9. n. 1.) 
 usdva mdlto [in] la chiesa. 
 
 (Bocc. g. 3. n. 4.) 
 
 sedette re [per] dnni quindici. 
 
 (Crusca.) 
 
 usurdi. In the house of these usurers, 
 she served certain fishermen. 
 
 he frequented much the church, 
 he reigned for fifteen years. 
 
MODES OF ADDRESS. 549 
 
 n. 1.) 
 
 ELLIPSIS OF Conjunctions : 
 
 /o s6nola mlsera [e] en<u- I am the miserable and on- 
 rata Zmevra. (Bocc. g. 2. . fortunate Ginevra. 
 
 n. y. ) 
 
 red; na^ro, [e] aflfflfco tnfei- a royal nature, and an angelic 
 
 lettoy [e] Chiar* dlma, [e] mind, and " clear spirit,* and 
 
 prdnta vista, [e] 6cchio cer- a quick sight and piercing 
 
 vitro. (Petr. s. 201.) eyes. 
 
 REMARKS ON THE DIFFERENT MODES 
 OF ADDRESS IN ITALIAN. 
 
 THE Italians have three different modes of addressing 
 a person ; viz. the second person singular, TU, ' thon ' ; 
 and its inflexion, TI, { to thee,' c thee': the second per- 
 son plural, voi, ' you ' ; and its inflexion, vi, * to you/ 
 * you ' : and the third person singular, feminine, E'LLA, 
 and its inflexions, LE, LA; representing the title VOSTRA 
 SIGNORIA (generally contracted into VOSSIGNORJA, and 
 often written V. S.), 'your worship,' *your lordship,' 
 c your ladyship'; whether the person addressed be a 
 man or a woman. 
 
 The second person singular is used in addrtttin^ a 
 person of inferior condition ; as by a master speaking 
 to a servant, by a parent addressing a child. Likewise 
 husbands and wives, brothers and sisters, and any two 
 intimate friends adopt it in speaking to each other I 
 is also used in poetry, and in addressing the Divinity. 
 
 The second person plural is used in addresring a 
 person of egwa? rani with the speaker, but not par- 
 
550 SYNTAX. 
 
 ticularly intimate with him. Also by children address- 
 ing their parents, by ladies speaking to gentlemen. 
 It is likewise used in addressing artisans, tradesmen, 
 dealers, &c. 
 
 The third person singular, feminine, is used in ad- 
 dressing a superior, or one- towards whom the speaker 
 wishes to exhibit special civility and respect ; as by a 
 servant to his master, by a tradesman to a gentleman, 
 &c. Ladies, and persons respectable for their age or 
 office, are addressed in this mode. 
 
 It is to be observed, that when the second person 
 plural, voi, and its inflexion, vi, are used, the verb is 
 put in the plural ; but all the other words, such as 
 adjectives, participles, &c., agreeing with the subject, 
 remain in the singular, masculine or feminine, accord- 
 ing to the gender of the person addressed ; as, 
 
 voi, SigndrE, SARETE rispet- you, Sir, will be respected ; 
 
 tdto, 
 voi, SigndrA, SIETE S&VIA, you, Madam, are wise. 
 
 When the third person singular, feminine, E'LLA, and 
 its inflexions, LE, LA; or the title VOSSIGNORIA, are em- 
 ployed, the verb is put in the singular and the words 
 agreeing with them take the feminine gender, whether 
 the person addressed be masculine or feminine', as, 
 
 ( you [Sir], or your lordship will 
 
 *A, or V. S. SAKX mpettflA, ] j^jflSjU your ladyship 
 will be respected : 
 C you [Sir] are, or your lordship 
 
 MA or V. S. * sdviA, 1 ybu [M^dam] are, or your lady- 
 
 f ship is wise. 
 
 Where two or more individuals are addressed in the 
 third person, the third person plural, feminine, E'LLENO, 
 
MODES OF ADDRESS. 551 
 
 and its inflexion, LORO ; or the titles VOSTRE or LE 
 
 VOSTRE SlGNORlE, LE SlGNORlE LoHO, LoR SlONOBI, 
 
 are used ; the verb being put in the plural, and the 
 words agreeing with them, in the plural feminine ; as, 
 
 x, 7 C y u [gentlemen], or your lord- 
 
 etfENo, or IE FostrE Signo- 1 ships will be respected 
 TIE SARANNO rispettdtE, \ you [ladies], or your ladyships 
 f will be respected : 
 
 I you [gentlemen], or your lord- 
 C//ENO, or IE Signonv 1,6110 1 ships are wise ; 
 
 sdNO $dw*E, \ you [ladies], or your ladyship* 
 
 f are wise. 
 
 Some Italian Grammariang assert, on the authority of Bembo, Benti- 
 vtigliOj Ganganelliy and other modern writers, that this agreement in 
 gender of adjectives and participles, with the word Vossignona or the 
 pronoun ella, when used in addressing a man, ought to take place only, 
 when the verb essere, ' to be/ stands between them ; as, 
 
 ell A, or V. S. molto ddttA, you [Sir] are, or your lordship b 
 
 very learned : 
 
 but if any other verb stands between the word Vossignona or the 
 pronoun ella and the adjective or participle, these are made to agree 
 with the person signified by those 3 as, 
 
 V. S., or ella PAR molto pensie- you [Sir] seem, or your lordship 
 roso, seems very thoughtful. 
 
 If the verb happens to be the auxiliary essere, and the participle of 
 another verb, then this participle agrees in gender with the won! 
 or the pronoun 6lla, and the following adjective or participle is made 
 to agree with the person signified by them ; as, 
 
 ellA. si % MOSTRATO, Stgndr*, you have shown yourself, Sir, both 
 non meno sdvio, che benigno, wise and kind. 
 
 Adjectives of nations agree always with the person signified by the 
 pronoun ella or the word V. S. j as, 
 
 ella senza dubbio e Romdno, you, Sir, without doubt are a 
 
 Roman ; 
 
 le Signorie L6ro sardnno certo you, gentlemen, are certainly llal- 
 Italian^ ians. 
 

 552 SYNTAX. 
 
 Besides the abovementioned modes of address, the 
 Italians often use the demonstrative pronouns quello, 
 quella, and the words giovane, uomo, donna, in speaking 
 to a person whose name is unknown to them ; and say 
 quel giovane, ' young man ' ; quell* uomo, ' good man ' ; 
 &c.; as, 
 
 avvertisci, QUEL GIOVANE, take care, young man, for thou 
 
 che tu V ingdnni, deceivest thyself; 
 
 QUELL' UOM DABBENE, che what is the matter, good man? 
 
 cosa e stata 1 
 
 v6i siete molto dtitra, QUEL- you are very proud, my good 
 LA DONNA, woman : 
 
 but this way of addressing people, is only used by 
 superiors towards their inferiors. 
 
 The following are the TITLES used by the Italians 
 in addressing the different qualities of persons : viz. 
 in speaking to a GENTLEMAN, Signore, ' Sir ' ; Fos- 
 signoria (written, V. S.), 'your worship,' c your lord- 
 ship ' : tO a PERSON OF RANK, Or tO a NOBLEMAN, 
 
 lllustrissimo (lllmo), ' most illustrious Sir '; Fossi- 
 gnoria Illustrissima (V. S. lllma), 'Your most illus- 
 trious lordship ' ; Eccellenza, c Excellency ' ; Vostra 
 Eccellenza (V. JE.), c Your Excellency ' : to a 
 PRINCE OF THE BLOOD, JUtezza, c Highness ' 5 Pos- 
 tra Jlltezza, l Your Highness ' : to a KING, Sire, 
 6 Sire ' ; JMaestd, { Majesty ' ; Fostra Maesta (V. M.), 
 c Your Majesty ' : to an EMPEROR, Sire, c Sire ' ; 
 Maesta, ( Majesty ' ; Maesta Imperiale, ' Imperial Majes- 
 ty ' ; Fostra Maesta Imperiale (V. M. /.) 'Your Im- 
 perial Majesty ' ; Fostra Maesta Reale e Imperiale (F. 
 M. R. /.), 'Your Royal and Imperial Majesty 5 : to 
 a MONK, Padre, ' Father ' ; Fostra Paternitd (F. Pta), 
 ' Your Paternity ' : to a PRIEST, Reverendo, ' Rev- 
 erend '; Fostra Reverenza (F. R.), 'Your Rever- 
 
MODES OF ADDRESS. .V^J 
 
 ence ' : to a BISHOP, Monsignore, < Riu;ht Honorable '; 
 Eccellenza Reverendissima, ' Most Reverend Excellen- 
 cy ' ; Vostra Eccellenza Reverendissima ( V. E. Rtma), 
 'Your most Reverend Excellency' : to a CARDINAL, 
 Eminenza, 'Eminence'; Vbstra Eminenza (V. Ema), 
 6 Your Eminence': to the POPE, Santita, * Holiness ; 
 Santo Padre, 'Holy Father'; Rostra Santita 
 'Your Holiness'; V6stra Beatitudine (F. 
 4 Your Blessedness.' 
 
 [For Illustrations of the above Remarks on the Dffircnt Modtt if .Mrttt in 
 Italian, see the Author's COKVERSAZIO'NE ITAUA'A, whore they have beeo 
 
 fully exemplified.] 
 
 47 
 
PART IV. 
 
 ITALIAN ORTHOGRAPHY. 
 -o| 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 OF ACCENTS. 
 
 THE accent, in Orthography, is a small sign placed 
 upon the vowels of words to determine their pronun- 
 ciation. 
 
 There are two accents in Italian, the grave and the 
 acute. 
 
 The grave accent is an oblique line drawn from the 
 left to the right ( x ) ; and the acute, an oblique line 
 drawn from the right to the left ('). 
 
 These accents are generally put on all words in which a letter or 
 syllable has been suppressed; as in natw from nativo t l native ' ; 
 in which v is suppressed ; virtu from w'rfatTE, virtuoE, or virtue, 
 t virtue ' ; in which te, de, e, are suppressed ; &c. 
 
 And on those words in which the sameness of spelling might pro- 
 duce a confusion of signification ; as in peidj l hut ' ; balia, ' power' ; 
 &c. to distinguish them frompero, ' pear-tree '; balia, * nurse J ; &c. 
 
 The grave accent is put 
 
 On all contracted nouns of more than one syllable ; 
 as, 
 
 caritJL [caritafe, or caritacfc], charity ; 
 merc& [mercerfe], mercy : 
 
ACCENTS. 555 
 
 On the names of the days of the week ending in 
 
 Lunedi, Monday; 
 
 On the compounds of che ; as, 
 percn&, because ; 
 
 On the compounds of tre ; as 
 twenty-three ; 
 
 Vcnerdi, Friday: 
 
 although : 
 
 cenJoTHE, 
 
 one hundred 
 [and three : 
 
 On the first and third persons singular of the future 
 of all verbs ; as, 
 
 I will 
 
 temerb, 
 sentirb, 
 
 amerA, C love ; 
 
 /emerl, he will < fear ; 
 senfaYA, ( hear : 
 
 On the third person singular of the perfect of all 
 those verbs in which the first person of the same tense 
 terminates with two vcwels ; as, 
 
 [cantAi, 
 [credEj, 
 
 C sang ; ] 
 I < believed ;] 
 
 canto, 
 
 ( sang ; 
 he < believed; 
 
 [dormii, 
 
 ( slept ; ] 
 
 dormi, 
 
 ( slept : 
 
 On the 
 
 words 
 
 
 
 mete, 
 
 half; 
 
 cremisi, 
 
 crimson ; 
 
 baccate, 
 
 cod-fish ; 
 
 SO/A, 
 
 sofa; 
 
 caffE, 
 taiiE, 
 /a/6, 
 
 coffee ; 
 tawny; 
 bonfire ; 
 
 tafetA, 
 alcali, 
 
 taffety ; 
 aloes ; 
 alkali ; 
 
 0166, 
 orsu., 
 
 fy; 
 
 come ; 
 
 co/i, 
 cote, 
 
 > there ; 
 
 COSl, 
 
 so, or thus ; 
 
 costi, 
 
 
 testi, 
 aimjL \ 
 OIWE ! 
 
 just now ; 
 ( alas ! 
 
 ohs, 
 
 ho there ! 
 take care ! 
 
 On the 
 
 words 
 
 
 
 ci6, 
 
 this, or that ; 
 
 ffi 9 
 
 already ; 
 
 ^ 
 
 gift. 
 
 below ; 
 
 quk, 
 
 S here ; 
 
 piu, 
 
 more ; 
 
 qul, 
 
 S 
 
 pub, 
 
 may, or can ; 
 
 
 
 
556 ORTHOGRAPHY. 
 
 which are written with a grave accent in order to show 
 that the two vowels are to be pronounced both in out 
 syllable : 
 
 And on the words 
 cfi, (noun) day ; 
 
 w, 
 
 TIE, 
 SE, 
 
 I (adverb) 
 ^ . 
 
 there; 
 
 affirmative particle, or adverb) yes, or so ; 
 negative particle, or conjunction) nor, or neither ; 
 personal pronoun) one's self ; 
 
 (noun) tea ; 
 
 c^i, (conjunction) for, or because ; 
 
 in which the grave accent is used as a mark of distinc- 
 tion between them, and the words 
 
 , S (prepOSiti n) SfYoUorby; 
 
 e, (conjunction) and ; 
 
 ,?' > (article, or conjunctive pronoun) \ H* 6 ' or \ 
 
 h, jy> ' } the, or them ; 
 
 si, (conjunctive pronoun) one's self; 
 
 ne, (relative particle) of it, or of them ; 
 
 se, (conjunction) if; 
 
 te, (personal pronoun) thee, or to thee ; 
 
 che, (relative pronoun) who, which, or that. 
 
 The acute accent is put 
 
 On the i of the terminations ia, io, of nouns, when the 
 two vowels are pronounced in two distinct syllables : as, 
 magia, magic ; desio, desire : 
 
 On words in which the stress of the voice, by a 
 poetical license, is transferred from one syllable to 
 another ; as, 
 
 simile [for simile], similar ; oceA.no [for oceano], ocean : 
 
 And, sometimes, on the words 
 
 Ancora, anchor; nvttare, nectar; 
 
 fblgore, thunderbolt ; tvnere, tender : 
 
 suite ; 
 
APOSTROPHE. 557 
 
 to distinguish them from the words 
 
 rtttcora, 
 
 [ancdra], 
 
 yet, also, or again ; 
 
 folgore, 
 
 [folgdre], 
 
 splendor; 
 
 nettare, 
 
 [nettare], 
 
 to clean ; 
 
 tenere, 
 
 [tenerej, 
 
 to hold ; 
 
 seguito, 
 
 [seguito], 
 
 followed. 
 
 These are all the cases in which the accents are used, 
 except that, in some books which teach the principles of 
 the language, the acute accent is employed to facilitate 
 the pronunciation to learners. 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 OF THE APOSTROPHE. 
 
 THE apostrophe is a small sign, like a comma ('), 
 inserted between two words to mark the elision of a 
 vowel. 
 
 The apostrophe is generally used at the end of those words that 
 terminate with a vowel, followed by a word that begins with the tame 
 vowel ', as, 
 
 [buonA Avventura] buori* \vvcntura, good fortune ; 
 
 [grandE Edifizio] grand* vdifizio, great edifice : 
 
 And at the end of words that terminate with a vowel followed by a 
 word that begins with any other vowal, whenever it is necestary, to 
 render the pronunciation more agreeable ; as, 
 
 [questo uomo] quest* uomo, this man ; 
 
 [quello Albero] quell* A.lbero, that tree. 
 
 The Italians write with an apostrophe 
 
 The articles 70, la, ' the,' making an elision of the 
 vowels o, a, before words beginning with a vowel ; as, 
 r Amico, the friend ; /' innocenza, the innocence. 
 
 47* 
 
 
558 ORTHOGRAPHY. 
 
 These articles are also written sometimes without an apostrophe ; as, 
 
 Jo Amore, the love ; l\ JLnergia, the energy. 
 
 But when lo is followed by an o, and la is followed by an a, they 
 e always written with an apostrophe ; as, 
 
 V onore, the honor ; V imma, the soul : 
 
 The article gli, ' the,' when it is followed by an i ; as, 
 gV mgegni, the" geniuses ; gV idoli, the idols : 
 
 The article Ze, ' the,' when the following word begins 
 with e ; as, 
 
 V Eresie, the heresies : V vminde, the emendations. 
 
 Sometimes they write also with an apostrophe the article t7, ' the ' ; 
 after a word ending with a vowel, and make an elision of the vowel 
 i ; as, 
 
 tutto 'I mondoj all the world; sopr*. 'I petto, upon the breast : 
 
 The words mi, c me ' ; ti, c thee ' ; ci, c us,' or ' here' ; 
 vi, * you,' or ' there ' ; si, one's self ; we, ( of it,' or 
 4 of them '; 4 hence,' or { thence ' ; se, ' if ' ; di, f of ' ; 
 when they come before a voweZ ; as, 
 
 m' ingdnno, I deceive myself ; 
 
 V imcr, he loves thee ; 
 
 c' intende, he understands us ; &c. 
 
 And the words i', e\ de\ a\ dk\ co', ne\ pe\ be', 
 si\ di\fe\ re', po\ me\ mo\ vo\ te', &tc., abbreviated 
 from io, c 1 ' ; ci, * he,' or ' they ' ; dci, c of the ' ; ai, 
 c to the ' ; dai, ' from or by the ' ; coi, ' with the ' ; nei, 
 
 * in the ' ; pel, ' for or by the ' ; bei, or 6ene, c hand- 
 some,' or ' well ' ; sei, c thou art ' ; did, ' say thou ' ; 
 
 fece, * he made ' ; vedi, see thou ' ; pdco, ' little ' ; me- 
 glio, * better ' ; morfo, c mode ' or ' manner ' ; voglio, 
 
 * I wish ' 5 *i'e>M, ' hold thou ' ; &tc. 
 
APOSTROPHE. 55!) 
 
 The apostrophe ought never to be used when the 
 elision of the vowel might produce, in nouns or adjec- 
 tives, a confusion of gender, of number, or of relation 
 among themselves : 
 
 Thus die feminine of all the adjectives of the common 
 gender, like innocente, ' innocent ' ; errante, < wander- 
 ing ' ; &c. preceded by the article la, l the,' are written 
 without elision, L\. innocente, < the innocent woman ' ; /A 
 errante, 6 the wandering woman 5 ; to distinguish them 
 from the masculine, V innocente [lo innoc&nte], * the in- 
 nocent man '; V err ante [lo errante], 'the wandering 
 man' : 
 
 Those nouns which in the plural do not change their 
 termination, as, effigie, ' image ' ; estasi, ' ecstacy ' ; pre- 
 ceded by the article le, 'the,' are written without elision, 
 /E ejffigie, < the images '; ZE estasi, ' the ecstacies ' ; to 
 distinguish them from the singular, V (ffigie [la effigie], 
 * the image ' ; /' estasi [la estasi], ' the ecstacy ' : 
 
 And the preposition da, c from or by,' expressing the 
 relation of derivation, followed by a noun beginning 
 with a vowel, as C?A amore, ' from or by love '; is written 
 without elision, to distinguish it from the relation of pos- 
 session, d' amore [di amore], ' of love.' 
 
 Nor is the apostrophe to be used when the elision of 
 the vowels would change the sound of the consonants ; 
 as in gli, ' the,' followed by the vowels a, e, o, u, where 
 the elision of the i would render hard the liquid sound 
 of the gl ; as in 
 
 gV AVfiri, ) C gli Avdri, the misers ; 
 
 gV Kditti, f f ) gliEdilti, the edicts; 
 
 gl 1 6cchi, r J ) gli 6cchi, the eyea ; 
 
 gV uccttli, ) f gli vcctlli, the birds. 
 
 For the same reason, ci, < us,' or ' here ' ; and words 
 ending in ce, ci ; ge, gi, are never written with an apos- 
 trophe before the vowels a, o, u; since the elision of e, t, 
 would give to the consonants a hard sound ; as in 
 
560 ORTHOGRAPHY. 
 
 c' Ama, "| f ci Ama, he loves us ; 
 
 fac' Ardente, /acE Ardente, burning light ; 
 
 dole 1 Accenti, }> for <( dolci Accenti, sweet accents ; 
 
 piagg' Apriche, \ piaggE Apriche, sunny places ; 
 
 pogg' Ameni, ) ^ pdggi Ameni, pleasant hills. 
 
 Finally, words that end with two vowels, as cambw, 
 'exchange '; we66iA, ' fog ' ; though followed by another 
 vowel, do not receive an apostrophe ; 
 
 A few verbs, ending in to, as vogho, dogho, which followed by 10, 
 1 1,' are written 
 
 vogV io, I wish ; mi dogV io, I grieve. 
 
 Likewise words that are marked with a grave accent, 
 asfelicita, ' happiness ' ; gioventu, c youth ' ; &tc. do not 
 receive an apostrophe ; 
 
 EXCEPT 
 
 Perchb, benefit, and all the other compounds of che\ as, 
 perch' egli disse, because he said ; bench' 6llafdsse, although she was. 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 REDUPLICATION OF CONSONANTS. 
 
 The Italians write all words as they pronounce them ; 
 and in those words in which a consonant is pronounced 
 with double force, they double the consonant in writ- 
 ing ; as, 
 
 fanligo, obligation ; ivrndgine, image ; 
 
 faccenda, business ; legtTTimo, lawful. 
 
 Consonants are generally doubled 
 
REDUPLICATION OF CONSONANTS. 561 
 
 In words compounded of one of the particles a, o, 
 i or in, si, se, ne, co or con, so, su, da, ra, fra, and of 
 any other word beginning with a consonant ; as, 
 
 [A pena] appena, hardly ; 
 
 [o vero] ovvero, or else ; 
 
 [i or IN Rigare] iRRigdrv, to water ; 
 
 [si come] siccome, as ; 
 
 [SE Bine,} seBBene, although ; 
 
 [N& Meno], neyiweno, nor yet ; 
 
 [co or CON MUO- coMMuovere, to move ; 
 vere] 
 
 [so Levare] soi^i^evdre, to raise ; 
 
 [su ce*dere] succedere^ to succeed ; 
 
 [DA Be*ne] dasBene, honest ; 
 
 [RA conto] racconto, relation ; 
 
 [FRA Me*sso] frawMesso, put between : 
 
 In words compounded of a verb ending with a vowel 
 bearing the accent upon it, and of a conjunctive pronoun ; 
 as, 
 
 [hA LO] MLLO, he has it ; 
 
 [dir6 vi] dirovvi, I will tell you ; 
 
 When the verb is followed by the pronoun gli, when the g is never 
 doubled: 
 
 In all words compounded of an adverb, a preposition, 
 or a conjunction, ending with a vowel, and of any other 
 word beginning with a consonant ; as, 
 
 [61trE ci6] oltreccid, besides that ; 
 
 [11 oiu] fattGiic, there below ; 
 
 [gil Mai] giaMMdi, never; 
 
 [s6prA N(5me] sopranndme, surname ; 
 
 [E pure] epptire, and yet. 
 
562 ORTHOGRAPHY. 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 INCREASE OF WORDS. 
 
 THE increase of words is the addition of a vowel or 
 a consonant, either at the beginning or at the end of a 
 word. 
 
 When the words in, ' in ' ; con, ' with ' ; won, ' no,' 
 or ' not ' ; per, ' for,' ' by,' or i through ' ; are followed 
 by a word beginning with an s followed by another con- 
 sonant, as, STrada, spavcnto, scrive, scherzo ; to avoid 
 the harshness produced by the meeting of these con- 
 sonants, the second word commonly takes an i before 
 it; as, 
 
 IN istrada, } C in STrdda, in the street ; 
 
 CON ispa&fnto, f j ns |. ea j O f y c n spavento, with fright ; 
 
 NON iscrive, ^ J 71071 scr* ye, does not write ; 
 
 PER ischerzo, } \per sc/ierzo, in jest. - 
 
 In poetry, however, this rule is not so strictly observed as in prose; 
 since the increase (adding a syllable to the word), would be often 
 incompatible with the measure of the verse. 
 
 The preposition a, 'to,' and the conjunctions e, ' and '; 
 o, ' or ' ; when followed by a word beginning with a 
 vowel, sometimes take a d after them, to prevent the 
 hiatus ; as, 
 
 CD tfno cm tfno, one after another ; 
 
 amore CD orfio, love and hatred ; 
 
 OD in cielo OD in terra, either in heaven or on earth. 
 
 And the prepositions su, insu, ' upon ? ; followed by 
 another u, take an r after them ; as, 
 
 SUR nn m6nte, upon a hill ; 
 
 uR un pdlco, upon a stage. 
 
DIMINUTION OF WORDS. 563 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 DIMINUTION OF WORDS. 
 
 THE diminution of words is the suppression or re- 
 trenchment of a letter or a syllable, either at the end or 
 in the middle of a word. 
 
 The Italians retrench the last vowel of words ending 
 in e, o, preceded by one of the consonants /, m, n, r, 
 forming with them a syllable by themselves ; as in 
 sa-LE, salt ' ; WO-MO, c man ' ; wa-No, * hand ' ; CWO-RE, 
 ' heart ' ; and followed by a word beginning with a con- 
 sonant ; as, 
 
 SAL comiine, common salt ; 
 
 UOM in" c6rte 9 courtier ; 
 
 MAN DI donna, lady's hand ; 
 
 CUOR DolMe, grieving heart. 
 
 But if le, lo ; ne, no ; re, ro, do not form a syllable by themselves, 
 but in concurrence with any other consonant, as in Sofo-cL*, ' Sopho- 
 cles ' ; jfl'n-GLo,.' Englishman'; VI-GNE, vineyards '; J^-GNO, pledge'; 
 O-CRE, 'sour' ; ^i-ciio, lazy' ; the words are never retrenched. 
 
 When e is preceded by rr, as in concteR-RE, to 
 conduct'; and o is preceded by // or wn ; as in /an- 
 C/AL-LO, { youth ' ; AON-NO, ' they have ' ; they retrench 
 the whole syllable ; as, 
 
 CONDOR s^co, to conduct with one's self; 
 
 FANCIUL vezzdso, handsome youth ; 
 
 L' HAN Kubdto, they have robbed him. 
 
 The last vowel of the words uno, < a or an ' ; bene, 
 { well ' ; buono, ' good ' ; and the last syllable of the 
 words hello, 'handsome'; quello, < that'; grande, 'great \ 
 
564 ORTHOGRAPHY. 
 
 when they are followed by a word beginning with a 
 consonant, are always retrenched ; as, 
 
 UN Ft'o're, a flower ; 
 
 BEN TI sta, thou deservest it ; 
 
 Bu6N vino, good wine ; 
 
 BEL prdto, beautiful meadow ; 
 
 QUEL L*6ro, that book ; 
 
 GRAN MercdJo, great market ; 
 
 GRAN citta, great city. 
 
 The last vowel of the word Signore, ' Master ' ; and 
 the last syllable of the words Frate, < Brother [Friar] ' ; 
 Santo, ' Saint'; when they are used as titles; is also 
 retrenched before a consonant ; as, 
 
 SIGNOR CarZo, Master Charles ; 
 
 FRA Giovdnni, Brother John ; 
 
 SAN Paolo, Saint Paul. 
 
 Words ending in a are never retrenched ; 
 
 EXCEPT 
 
 Suora, l Sister ' ; which, when used as a title, loses the a ; as, 
 
 SUOR Maiia, Sister Mary ; 
 
 and 6ra, 'now,' with its compounds allora, ancora, talora, &c. which, 
 before a consonant, may be retrenched ; as, 
 
 OR DI', now say ; 
 
 ALLOR yidij then I saw ; 
 
 ANCOR ridnge, he weeps still ; 
 
 TALOR vtgghia, sometimes he is awake. 
 
 Words ending in i are never retrenched ; 
 
 Fucni, l out ' ; and the second person of the imperative of verbs 
 ending in ntre, mre; as ti6ni, l hold thou '; vteni, * come thou ' ; from 
 teNEnE, Mo hold'; rCNiRE, ' to come'; which before a consonant 
 lose their i ; as, 
 
DIMINUTION OF WORDS. fxtf 
 
 FUOR DI citta, out of town ; 
 
 TIEN weslo, hold this ; 
 
 VIEN prfsto, come quick. 
 
 Words ending in u, and words accented on the last 
 syllable, are never retrenched. 
 
 Words ending with two vowels are never retrenched ; 
 
 EXCEPT 
 
 When the two vowels are preceded by n, as in Antomo, < Anthony ' ; 
 testiniomo, l testimony ' ; in which case they may be retrenched ; as, 
 ANTON-Mana, Anthony-Maria ; 
 
 TESTIMON verdce, true testimony. 
 
 Words retrenched in the singular, are never retrench- 
 ed in the plural ; 
 
 Grande, ' great J ; which in its plural grdndij also, loses the last 
 syllable ; as, 
 
 GRAN pericoli, great dangers ; 
 
 GRAN mcchezze, great riches; 
 
 and such words as cavaliere, l cavalier ' ; demdnio, l demon ' ; &c. 
 which, in poetry, may lose the last vowel or vowels, even in their 
 plurals ; as, 
 
 le donne, i CAVALIER, the ladies, the cavaliers ; 
 
 i DEMON duri, the cruel demons. 
 
 Words, which would be retrenched before a word be- 
 ginning with a consonant, are always written with an 
 apostrophe before words beginning with a vowel; as, 
 
 bell 9 Aspetto, handsome appearance ; 
 
 qudV Arco, that bow ; 
 
 grand' uo'mo, great man ; 
 
 FraV Alberto, Brother Albert ; 
 
 Sani^ Andrea, Saint Andrew ; 
 48 
 
566 ORTHOGRAPHY. 
 
 C7 7 no, ' a or an/ and its compounds ; qudle, ' which ' ; buono, 
 ' good ' ; bene, c well s ; Signore, ' Master ' ; Suora, ' Sister ' ; and the 
 infinitive, and forms of verbs ending in Z, m, n, r, which do not receive 
 an apostrophe ; as, 
 
 un AinicOj a friend ; 
 
 alcun odore, no smell ; 
 
 qudl \rdire , what daring ; 
 
 ftuon Home, good man ; 
 Z>en mciso, v well engraved ; 
 
 Signor Onofrio, Master Onofrio ; 
 
 Suor Angelica, Sister Angelica ; 
 
 andar A spdsso, to go and take a walk ; 
 
 abbidm Amdto, we have loved ; 
 
 andrdn Ese"nti t they will be exempted ; 
 
 sardbber Lrsij they would be burnt. 
 
 Words are never retrenched, when they are followed 
 by a z, or an s followed by another consonant ; or when 
 they are at the end of a sentence ; 
 
 In poetry where words are sometimes retrenched, even before a z, 
 or an s followed by another consonant^ on account of the measure of 
 the verse. 
 
 Some words, when they undergo some alteration, lose 
 a vowel in the middle, particularly if the tonic accent of 
 the word, by such alteration, is transferred to the fol- 
 lowing syllable ; as, 
 
 6o6no, good ; bonissimo, very good ; 
 
 tvono, thunder; tonare, to thunder; 
 
 suono, I play ; sonidmo, we play. 
 
 Some compound words lose a letter, or a syllable in 
 their composition ; as, 
 
 [ie*n sera] iersfra, last evening ; 
 
DIMINUTION OF WORDS. 507 
 
 [s6tTO te*rra] sotttrra, under ground ; 
 
 [do.MANi mattina] domattina, to-morrow morning ; 
 
 [cenTO cinquanta] cencinqudnta, one hundred and fifty. 
 
 Infinitives, and those forms of verbs that end in /, 
 ne, mo, no, when joined to a conjunctive pronoun, drop 
 their final vowel ; as, 
 
 [amarE lo] WRLO, to love him ; 
 
 [duolE ti] du6LTi, it grieves thee ; 
 
 [vienE sne] VI^NSENE, he comes thence ; 
 
 [andiamo vi] andidwvi, let us go there ; 
 
 [aiutarono ci] aiutaroxci, they assisted us. 
 
 The first and third persons singular, and the third 
 person plural, of the imperfect of the indicative of all the 
 verbs, which in the infinitive terminate in ere, ire, 
 generally drop the v ; as, 
 
 flgli 5*emfcTJ \gli, H' he \ feared : 
 [eglino temerano,] eglino, temeano, they feared ; 
 
 |gli ! sentiv ^ fe, S se ' he S heard; 
 [eglino sentivano,] tglino, sentiano, they heard. 
 
 The words cavalli, capelli, coltelli, fratelli, ruscelli, 
 quelli, belli, delli, alii, dalU, nelli, pclli, colli, sulli, 
 tralli, and quali, mali, tali, figliuoli, may be contracted 
 into cavai, capei, coltei, fratei, ruscci, quei, bei, dti, at, 
 dcvi, nei, pei, coi, sui, trai, quai, mai, tai, fifti***, 
 which, when they are followed by a consonant, it is more 
 elegant to abbreviate, and write with an apostrophe ; as, 
 
 cavtf leggtiri, light horses ; rusct' ridtnti, smiling brooks ; 
 capSbMnchi, white hair ; gut' signdri, those gentlemen; 
 coM pungenti, sharp knives ; 66' costumi, good manners ; 
 carndli, own brothers; dV nemlci, of the enemies ; 
 
568 ORTHOGRAPHY. 
 
 d' parenti, to the parents ; trff b6schi, amongst the woods ; 
 dd* Iddrij by the robbers ; qua 9 dolori, what pains ; 
 ne'bisogni, in the necessities ; md' pensieri, malicious thoughts ; 
 pff cdmpi, through the fields ; iff discorsi, such discourses ; 
 c6' denli, with the teeth ; figliuo* miser- very miserable sons. 
 stf monti) upon the mountains ; [rimi, 
 
 The word eglino, ' they ' ; often loses its last syllable 
 and makes egli ; and egli, ' he,' or ( they/ may be 
 contracted into ei, and written 'e', c he,' or * they.' 
 
 This is all that needs to be said on the diminution or 
 retrenchment of words ; except that the rule respecting 
 the retrenchment of e, 0, when preceded by /, m, n, r, 
 does not hold in certain instances, where such retrench- 
 ment would produce a harsh sound. Thus the words, 
 come, c how 5 ; nome, ' name'; animo, ' courage'; chiarOj 
 4 clear'; raro, c rare'; nero, c black'; c^uro, c hard'; oscu- 
 ro, 'obscure '; &c., are never written com, nom, cmim, 
 c/iiar, ner, ror, ^wr, oscwr, &tc. 
 
 THE END. 
 
TABLE OF CONTENTS. 
 
 PREFACE to the former Edition vii 
 
 " to the present Edition - - - - xi 
 
 A LIST OF WORKS examined with Reference to the Com- 
 pilation of this Grammar xvii 
 
 A TABLE of the Abbreviations of the Names of Authors 
 
 and of the Works quoted in this Grammar - xxiv 
 
 ITALIAN GRAMMAR. 
 
 INTRODUCTION 1-10 
 
 ITALIAN ALPHABET - - - - - - - 11, 12 
 
 PART L ITALIAN PRONUNCIATION - 13-24 
 
 CHAPTER I. Sounds of the Vowels 13 
 
 " II. Pronunciation of the Consonants - - 14 
 
 III. Of J and H 16 
 
 IV. Double Consonants H 
 
 V. Of Syllables - - 19 
 
 " VI. Diphthongs and Triphthongs - -20 
 
 " VII. General Rules on the Italian Pronunciation 21 
 
 EXERCISE on the Pronunciation - 
 
 PART II. ITALIAN ANALOGY - 25-388 
 
 PARTS OF SPEECH 
 
 CHAPTER I. Articles 
 
 Union of the Prepositions with the Articles - 
 
 EXERCISE I. 
 
 CHAPTER II. Substantive Mouns 
 
 Gender 
 
 Number, or Formation of the Plural 
 
 Variation of Nouns 
 
 EXERCISE II. 
 
 48* 
 
TABLE OF CONTENTS. 
 
 CHAPTER III. Adjective Nouns. Comparatives and 
 
 Superlatives 62 
 
 Gender - 62 
 
 Formation of the Plural 62 
 
 Agreement of Adjectives ...--. 63 
 
 Comparatives --.-... 65 
 EXERCISE III. ...--.-.71 
 
 Superlatives -------- 72 
 
 EXERCISE IV. 78 
 
 CHAPTER IV. Augmentatives and Diminutives - 80 
 Augmentatives -------.80 
 
 EXERCISE V. 83 
 
 Diminutives -------- 84 
 
 EXERCISE VI. 89 
 
 CHAPTER V. Numerals ------ 90 
 
 Cardinal Numbers ------ -90 
 
 Ordinal " 94 
 
 Collective, Distributive, and Proportional Numbers 96 
 
 EXERCISE Vll. - - - 98 
 
 CHAPTER VI. Substantive Pronouns - - - 100 
 Personal Pronouns - - - - - - -100 
 
 Variation of Personal Pronouns ----- 101 
 
 EXERCISE VIII. 107 
 
 Conjunctive Pronouns - - - - - 109 
 Union of the Pronouns mi y ti, gli, ne or ci, wi, sz, with the 
 
 Pronouns lo, la, gli, li, le, ne 114 
 
 EXERCISE IX. 118 
 
 Relative Pronouns - - - - - -119 
 
 EXERCISE X. 125 
 
 Interrogative Pronouns - - - - - -127 
 
 EXERCISE XI. 129 
 
 CHAPTER VII. Adjective Pronouns ~ 131 
 
 Possessive Pronouns - - - - - -131 
 
 EXERCISE XII. 134 
 
 Demonstrative Pronouns - - - - - -337 
 
 EXERCISE XIII. 143 
 
 Indefinite Pronouns --___- 145 
 EXERCISE XIV. 156 
 
 CHAPTER VIII. Of the Particles Ne, Ci, Vi - - 158 
 EXERCISE XV. 162 
 
 CHAPTER IX. Verbs 164 
 
 Variation of Verbs - - - - - - 164 
 
TABLE OF CONTENTS. 
 
 Auxiliary Verbs - - - . - - - 
 
 The Verb Avere, affirmatively 165 
 
 " negatively 169 
 
 " interrogatively - - . - - 171 
 
 , " " interrogative-negatively - - 172 
 
 Essere 173 
 
 Regular Verbs - - - - - - 177 
 
 Active Verbs FIRST CONJUGATION ... 177 
 
 Aiflare, paradigm of the Verbs ending in dre - 177 
 
 Cercdre, paradigm of the Verbs ending in care - 181 
 
 Pregare, paradigm of the Verbs ending in gdre - - 182 
 
 Bacidre, paradigm of the Verbs ending in cidre 183 
 
 Fregidre, paradigm of the Verbs ending in gidre - - 185 
 
 Noidre, paradigm of the Verbs ending in idre ... 186 
 
 Invldre, paradigm of the Verbs ending in lore - 187 
 
 SECOND CONJUGATION - - 187 
 
 Temere, paradigm of the Verbs ending in the infinitive in 
 ere (long) ; and of those which in the perfect end in ii 
 and etti - 187 
 
 Tissere, paradigm of the Verbs ending in the infinitive in 
 ere (short) ; and of those which in the perfect end in 
 It only 191 
 
 Tacere, paradigm of the Verbs ending in cere 
 
 JSmpiere, paradigm of the Verbs ending in iere - 194 
 
 THIRD CONJUGATION ------ 195 
 
 Sentirc, paradigm of those Verbs of the third conjugation 
 
 which, in the present of the indicative, end in o only 195 
 
 Esibire, paradigm of those Verbs of the third conjugation 
 
 which, in the present of the indicative, end in isco only 198 
 Abborrire, paradigm of those Verbs of the third conjugation 
 
 which, in the present of the indicative, end both in o 
 
 and isco --------- 201 
 
 Cucire, paradigms of the Verbs ending in cire - 204 
 Remarks on the foregoing Verbs - 205 
 
 EXERCISE XVI. 20 
 
 Passive Verbs 212 
 
 Essere Amato, paradigm of the passive verbs 
 
 Neuter Verbs - 216 
 
 Partire, paradigm of the neuter verbs - 
 
 Pronominal Verbs - 
 
 Pentirsi, paradigm of the pronominal verbs - 
 
 Unipersonai Verbs 
 
 Pidvere, paradigm of the unipersonal verbs 
 
 Essere^ unipersonally used 
 
 EXERCISE XVII. 232 
 
TABLE OF CONTENTS. 
 
 Order, quantity, quality, affirmation, negation, doubt, com- 
 j/arison, interrogation ------ 351 
 
 Choice, demonstration ...... 352 
 
 Compound Adverbs ------ 356 
 
 Adjectives commonly used as Adverbs - 357 
 
 Adverbial Phrases in common use - 359 
 
 EXERCISE XXIII. - 361 
 
 CHAPTER XIV. Prepositions ----- 363 
 
 Prepositions in common use ------ 363 
 
 EXERCISE XXIV. 373 
 
 CHAPTER XV. Conjunctions ----- 376 
 Conjunctions in common use ----- 375 
 EXERCISE XXV. 382 
 
 CHAPTER XVI. Interjections - - - - 384 
 Interjections in common use - - - - - 384 
 EXERCISE XXVI. 387 
 
 PART III. ITALIAN SYNTAX - - -389-553 
 
 CHAPTER I. Order and Position of Words - - 389 
 Simple Construction - - - - - - - 389 
 
 Inverse " 393 
 
 EXERCISE XXVII. 395 
 
 CHAPTER II. Concordance or Agreement of Words - 397 
 
 Concordance of Articles ------ 397 
 
 " of Adjectives 397 
 
 " of Numerals 403 
 
 < of Pronouns ------ 403 
 
 " of Verbs 405 
 
 " of Participles 411 
 
 EXERCISE XXVIII. - 413 
 
 CHAPTER III. Regimen or Government of Words - 415 
 
 Regimen of Substantives ------ 415 
 
 " of Adjectives - 418 
 
 " of Verbs 421 
 
 " of Prepositions - - , - 432 
 
 ' of Conjunctions 433 
 
 EXERCISE XXIX. 436 
 
 CHAPTER IV. Use of Articles 440 
 
 EXERCISE XXX. - > - - - - - - 468 
 
 CHAPTER V. Position of Adjectives - 472 
 
 EXERCISE XXXI. 480 
 
 CHAPTER VI. Use and Position of certain Pronouns - 483 
 
TABLE OF CONTENTS. 
 
 Personal Pronouns ..-.. 453 
 
 Conjunctive " 486 
 
 Possessive " 405 
 
 Indefinite " 499 
 
 XXXII. 502 
 
 CHAPTER VII. Verbs 506 
 
 Position of Verbs 506 
 
 Use of the Imperfect and First and Second Perfect - - 609 
 Use of Certain Tenses of the Indicative for some other 
 Tenses of the same Mood ; and of the Infinitive for cer- 
 tain Tenses of the Indicative, and for the Conjunctive and 
 Imperative Moods - - - - - - -512 
 
 Of the Tenses of the Dependent Verbs in a Compound 
 Sentence ...... . . 517 
 
 Of ihe Manner of Expressing the English Present-Participle 
 
 in Italian - 519 
 
 Of the way of Rendering into Italian the English particle 
 
 Tb, before the Infinitive of Verbs - - - 522 
 
 EXERCISE XXXIII. - 525 
 
 CHAPTER VIII. Participles. Use and Position of 
 
 certain Mverbs _....- 529 
 
 Agreement of Participles 529 
 
 Use and Position of certain Adverbs .... 535 
 EXERCISE XXXI V. - 538 
 
 CHAPTER IX. Expletives - - - - - -541 
 
 CHAPTER X. Of the Ellipsis 545 
 
 REMARKS ON THE DIFFERENT MODES OF ADDRESS IN 
 ITALIAN 
 
 PART IV. - ITALIAN ORTHOGRAPHY 554-568 
 
 CHAPTER!. Of Accents - - - 554 
 
 II. Of the Apostrophe 557 
 
 " III. Reduplication of Consonants - - 560 
 
 IV. Increase of Words - 562 
 V. Diminution of Words - 
 
CORRIGENDA. 
 
 Page 
 
 line, 
 
 For, 
 
 Read, 
 
 
 
 44 
 
 a subject and a quality, to 
 which it affirms that the sub- 
 
 a subject, and a quality of which it 
 affirms that it is, or is not, at- 
 
 23 
 
 15 
 
 ject is, or is not attributed, 
 gioeondo, 
 
 tributed to the subject, 
 gioeondo. 
 
 
 24 
 
 14 
 
 magndmino, 
 
 magn&nimo. 
 
 
 26 
 
 12 
 
 nouns begins, 
 
 noun begins. 
 
 
 33 
 
 8 
 
 MERCA'TANTE, 
 
 MERCATA'NTE. 
 
 
 35 
 
 22 
 
 pidngere, 
 
 pidngere. 
 
 
 36 
 
 ]3 
 
 Erato, 
 
 E'ralo. 
 
 
 tt 
 
 25 
 
 Lapis, 
 
 Lapis. 
 
 
 43 
 
 41 
 
 delle cose, 
 
 che gli ho ddto. 
 
 
 44 
 
 13 
 
 eclissi, 
 
 ecclissi. 
 
 
 64 
 
 14 
 
 Dav. Tac. am. 
 
 Dav. Tac. ann. 
 
 
 65 
 
 6 
 
 Add. Cavalc. 
 
 Cavalc. 
 
 
 69 
 
 1 
 
 Id 
 
 To. 
 
 
 87 
 
 17 
 
 UMioizzo, 
 
 UMIDU'ZZO. 
 
 
 89 
 
 4 
 
 BACICCUHIA'I, 
 
 BACIUCCHIA'I. 
 
 
 cc 
 
 26 
 
 Nasccemmo, 
 
 Nascemmo. 
 
 
 155 
 
 34 
 
 Qudnto COSE, 
 
 Qudnte COSE. 
 
 
 161 
 
 4 
 
 Pass. tr. Hu. c. 4. 
 
 Pass. 276. 
 
 
 173 
 
 17 
 
 essere stdta, 
 
 Essere stdta. 
 
 
 179 
 
 20 
 
 that thou lovest, 
 
 that thou love. 
 
 
 < 
 
 21 
 
 that he loves, 
 
 that he love. 
 
 
 193 
 
 24 
 
 2 
 
 in. 
 
 
 258 
 
 25 
 
 as in the case, 
 
 as H the case. 
 
 
 287 
 
 18 
 
 COTtfllTTO, 
 
 COn/XTTO. 
 
 
 296 
 
 6 
 
 * I kindle , 
 
 I kindled.' 
 
 
 299 
 
 6 
 
 M raise, 
 
 Mi mise. 
 
 
 " 
 
 40 
 
 Arr. Vang. 
 
 Ann. Vang, 
 
 
 300 
 
 14 
 
 Jerusalem, 
 
 Jerusalem. 
 
 
 348 
 
 23 
 
 f6nda, 
 
 frdnda. 
 
 
 369 
 
 10 
 
 Petr. Fr. Am. 
 
 Petr. Tr. Am. 
 
 
 n 
 
 37 
 
 Bocc. Floe. 
 
 Boec. Filoc. 
 
 
 370 
 
 30 
 
 Mach. Corn. 
 
 Mach. Com. 
 
 
 382 
 
 1 
 
 rinuovelli, 
 
 rinnovelli. 
 
 
 394 
 
 5 
 
 Ephigenia, 
 
 Iphigenia, 
 
 
 M 
 
 19 
 
 PRE'SEMI ALL^BA, 
 
 PRE SEMI ALLOR. 
 
 
 < 
 
 27 
 
 Ephigenia, 
 
 Iphigenia. 
 
 
 395 
 
 20 
 
 E'lvidio, 
 
 Elvidio. 
 
 
 406 
 
 26 
 
 PIGLIEBA'MO, 
 
 PIGMERE'MO. 
 
 
 419 
 
 5 
 
 deaite, 
 
 dedite. 
 
 
 455 
 
 28 
 
 Gian. Stor. Giv. Nap. 
 
 Gian. Stor. Civ. Nap. 
 
 
 458 
 
 30 
 
 avviticchia, 
 
 avviticchia. 
 
 
 463 
 
 8 
 
 FIGLIUOLI, 
 
 FIGLT70I. 
 
 
 468 
 
 5 
 
 FRUMA NTO, 
 
 FRUME'NTO. 
 
 
 477 
 479 
 
 39 
 
 36 
 
 Lapari, 
 Tris. Elog. Galil. 
 
 Lipari. 
 Fris. Elog. Galil. 
 
 
 491 
 
 26 
 
 I see you, 
 
 I see thee. 
 
 
 495 
 
 5 
 
 msposTO, 
 
 DISP08TO. 
 
 
 500 
 
 2 
 
 dispesi, 
 
 disperi. 
 
 
 501 
 
 | 
 
 woman, 
 
 wom*n. 
 
 
 " 
 
 30 
 
 even, 
 
 ever. 
 
 
 
 
 In a ftw copies only 
 
 t 
 
 
 137 
 
 13 
 
 these, 
 
 those. 
 
 
 138 
 
 14 
 30 
 
 these near you, 
 STAMA'TTINA, 
 
 those near you. 
 
 STAMATTlNA, 
 
 
 143 
 
 19 
 
 COSTUI, 
 
 CO3TU I. 
 
 
 " 
 
 24 
 
 EXERCISES, 
 
 EXERCISE XIII. 
 
 
 
 
 ADDENDA. 
 
 
 
 409 
 
 35 
 
 add (Bocc. g. 3. n. 7.) 
 
 
 
 446 
 
 26 
 
 add (Bocc. g. 1 n. 1,) 
 
 
 
 479 
 
 42 
 
 add (Dant. Inf. 2.) 
 
 
 
 485 
 
 32 
 
 add (Bocc. g. 5. n. 3.) 
 
 
 
 486 
 
 10 
 
 add (Bocc. g. 7. n> 4.) 
 
 
 
 516 
 
 41 
 
 add (Bocc.) 
 
 
 

THIS BOOK IS DUE ON THE LAST DATE 
 STAMPED BELOW 
 
 AN INITIAL PINE OP 25 CENTS 
 
 WILL BE ASSESSED FOR FAILURE TO RETURN 
 THIS BOOK ON THE DATE DUE. THE PENALTY 
 WILL INCREASE TO 5O CENTS ON THE FOURTH 
 DAY AND TO $1.OO ON THE SEVENTH DAY 
 OVERDUE, 
 
 LD 21 
 
 .-lOOm-12,' 43 (8796s) 
 
U.C. BERKELEY Lll 
 
 . 
 
 THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY